Third Edition July 2021

(PR-402)
Third Edition
July 2021
Document No: PR-402
Third Edition
July 2021
Department of Municipalities and Transport
PO Box 20
Abu Dhabi, United Arab Emirates
© Copyright 2016, by the Department of Municipalities and Transport. All Rights
Reserved. This document, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form without
written permission of the publisher
Lighting Manual – Version 3.0: July 2021

Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual- Introduction
Introduction
All use of “The Department” within the Lighting Manual refers to the relevant Municipality; (Abu Dhabi
City, Al Ain City or Al Dhafra), the Department of Municipalities and Transport (DMT) and other Agencies;
dependent on the project locality/responsibility/end-owner.
Purpose, Scope & Application of this Document
The primary purpose of this Manual is to establish standards and guidelines for the planning, design and
installation of public realm and roadway lighting within the Abu Dhabi Emirate, in order to provide the
correct appropriate public realm lighting and adequate uniform lighting of roads and other travel-ways
within the public right-of-way.
This Manual establishes processes which guide the efficient and effective selection and placement of for
all public lighting requirements and streamlining the design process. The Manual provides appropriate
lighting standards for all the different types of roadway lighting; including roadway facilities, street-type
characteristics, conflict areas/intersections, bridges, underpass/tunnel lighting, footpaths, cycle-ways,
signage/gantry lighting, solar lighting and the various lighting tasks/applications for public realm and
parks.
The intended target users for this Manual are planners, consultants, designers, landscape architects,
contractors, manufacturers/suppliers and The Departments’ staff responsible for planning, design,
approval, operations and maintenance of public lighting facilities.
Content and Format
This Manual is divided into two main Parts with sub-Sections as follows:
Part-1: Roadway, Parking, Tunnel & Underpass Projects

Part-1 Contents Pages Section E – Solar Roadway Lighting
Section A – Lighting for Roadways & Parking Section F – Lighting for Gantries & Signage
Section B – Lighting for Tunnels & Underpasses Section G – Light Pollution Mitigation
Section C – Roadway Lighting Poles Section H – Project Submission Requirements
Section D – Roadway Lighting Management Section I – Electrical Requirements*
Applicable Standards & Guidance References Section J – Pro-forma*
Part-2: Parks & Public Realm Lighting Projects

Part-2 Contents Pages Section E – Solar & Lighting for Public Realm
Section A – Lighting for Parks & Public Realm Section F – Light Pollution Mitigation
Section B – Sports Area Use Lighting Section G – Project Submission Requirements
Section C – Lighting Poles & Accessories Applicable Standards & Guidance References
Section D – Public Realm Lighting Management Applicable Standard Detail Drawings*
*Note- these sections are applicable to Part 1 and Part 2
Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual – Version 3.0: July 2021 Introduction |2

How to Use the Lighting Manual
● Refer to relevant Part(s) and Section(s) applicable to the specific project as well as the
associated overall Sections entitled Project Submission Requirements
● Within the project-specific Sections read the Section Explanation for content summary
● Observe the Departments’ Project Design Requirements & Responsibilities
● Select and propose all lighting fixtures fully in compliance with LED Luminaires Clauses
● Note the blue Submission Requirement Clause summaries and the Public Realm
& Street Lighting Handbook links
● Prepare lighting designs fully in accordance with Project Lighting Design Requirements
● Undertake any required site measurements as per Project Site Verification Requirements
● Cross-refer to the associated overall Part’s Applicable Standards & Guidance References
Policy on Alternative Luminaires to LED
Another equally sustainable lighting technology to LED can be proposed for any Department project, but
these must both be only whole-luminaire solutions and also cannot include any filament, fluorescent or
discharge lighting technologies, nor any technologies containing mercury, other hazardous substances or
any lighting/lamp technologies/materials prohibited under UAE ESMA Lighting/Lamp Standards.
Any alternative technology luminaire proposed to The Department on projects must be able to prove
equal or better illumination performance, energy efficiency and long-term (minimum 15-year) full life
cycle cost analysis comparison to current LED luminaire marketplace performance and always based on
full luminaire data. Cost analysis must be undertaken to ISO 15686-5 or comparable International standard
and which fully meets the requirements of this Manual for the relevant project Part/Section and specific
fixture performance/material criteria therein.
The relevant Department may have official procedures for approving alternative luminaires to LED; in the
case of Abu Dhabi City Municipality, this is formal submission through the DMT Infrastructure Support
Divison. The relevant Department should be contacted to establish procedures. It is The Department’s
decision on what constitutes an equally sustainable luminaire technology to LED through their process
and their decision is final.
Solar Provision for Roadway/Public Realm/Parking
Please note it is a statutory requirement that for every Roadway/Public Realm/Park lighting project the
Consultant must explore the integration of the solar lighting solution in every project in parallel with a
cabled network solution. A full cost analysis must be carried out and presented in the design reports at all
stages of submissions. Refer to Part 1, Section E & Part 2, Section-E for specific details and cost analysis
guide.

Minimum Average Design Levels
All Lighting Design Tables define lighting level requirements for a particular task as ‘Minimum Average
Design Level’. Whether this is for Luminance(L)-cd/m2 or Illuminance (Em)-LUX, this is an international
industry standard term which should be considered as the “close-target” for the lighting calculations to
achieve; as both the calculated level not to drop below the defined figure, but also not to be exceeded
significantly.
There have been numerous cases noted on project submissions to The Department where Consultants,
Contractors and/or Manufacturers undertaking lighting calculations have attempted to justify extremely
overdesigned roadway or public realm lighting proposals on the basis that the minimum lighting level has
been achieved, but there was no maximum level defined. Please note that this is not what this standard
term represents and is unacceptable practice. The Department requires all Consultants to ensure that
lighting calculations target the defined lighting levels set out within this Manual as per international
practice and optimise all designs to ensure submissions correctly propose solutions that target the
required levels correctly and as closely as possible to the design figures defined.
Roadway Project Lighting Management Systems (PLMS)
Please note the now statutory requirement for PLMS provision for roadway lighting projects as specifically
defined within this Manual’s Part-1 Sections-A and D. The Department requires all project submissions
which meet the defined PLMS inclusion parameters to be identified as such and confirm this, plus all
design details, within all project stage submissions.
Upon a Detail Design (DD) Stage approval, it is the Consultant’s responsibility to ensure the PLMS is taken
forward through the Tender/Construction phases on all Department projects (or Developer projects to be
handed to The Department) as part of the infrastructure delivery. All proposed luminaires for roadway
and public realm will be factory fitted with NEMA sockets to ensure that they are PLMS/CMS ready.
Project Light Pollution Mitigation Report
Please note the now statutory requirement for a full project light pollution mitigation report to be
undertaken for all public lighting projects as set out within this Manual’s Part-1 Section-G and Part-2
Section-F and as per Estidama Public Realm requirements.
The Department requires all project submissions at Detail Design (DD) Stage to include the Light Pollution
Mitigation Report and prove all aspects of the project comply with the various applicable set limits for the
project zone and evening/night time periods.

Notice to Manufacturers Regarding LM-84/TM-28

The Department has reviewed the inclusion of IESNA LM-84/TM-28 and has decided that this will be an
option alongside the Manual’s current defined methods for demonstrating luminaire thermal
management and useful life; LM-82/LM-80/LM-79/TM-21 defined methods. LM-84/TM-28 will be
included on a Municipality basis in the Particular Specifications within the Contract Documents.
Where the requirements for LM-84/TM-28 are requested, the following notes are mandatory: -
Note 1: LM-84 test data provided for luminaire thermal performance purposes must be undertaken for
the defined Ta (Night-time Ambient Temperature) that the relevant Manual Section states for the
luminaire type and which allow for the appropriate ‘bedding-in’ time as defined within LM-84/TM-28,
before results are recorded.
Note 2: LM-84 test data provided for luminaire useful life prediction must be valid for TM-28 ruled 50,000-
hour operation extrapolation at the defined Tq (Average Night-time Ambient Temperature) that that the
relevant Manual Section states for the luminaire type. It in addition must allow for the appropriate
luminaire ‘bedding-in’ time for first photometric test as defined within LM-84/TM-28, and must also
adhere fully to TM-28’s minimum testing parameters (for either the “Direct Method” or “Combined
Method”) for both the minimum luminaire sample-size quantities, interim photometric measurements
and the minimum test hours of all the samples in relation to the applicable sample-size multiplication
factor.
Notice Regarding MCC Hybrid Poles

The Department has carried out extensive consultation with the Abu Dhabi Monitoring and Control Centre
(MCC) and has included reference to MCC Hybrid Poles that incorporate Roadway Lighting Luminaires and
all electrical requirements as well as MCC equipment within the same pole. It is mandatory that all
Developers/Consultants/Contractors communicate with MCC to discuss the installation of the MCC Hybrid
poles as part of all roadway lighting installations to ensure that all mcc Hybrid poles are installed at the
correct locations within the project and follow all MCC Standards and Specifications for MCC requirement.
All lighting requirements will follow this manual.
Glossary of Terms, Abbreviations & Acronyms
For explanation of all lighting terms, abbreviations and acronyms used within this Manual refer to the
DMAT Public Realm & Street Lighting Handbook. Principally Chapters O & P

Page Intentionally Blank

Section A – Lighting for Roadways & Parking
Clause No. Clause Title Page No.
1. Section Explanation……….................................................................................................. 2
1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-A………................................... 2
1.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-A………........................... 2
2. General Project Design Requirements & Responsibilities.................... 3
3. LED Luminaires…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………4
3.1 General Requirements..................................................................................................... 4
3.2 AD Quality Mark (QCC Exterior LED Luminaire Certification)........................... 4
3.2.1 QCC Certificate of Conformity
3.3 LED Luminaire Technical & Material Requirements (QCC aligned).…............. 5
3.3.1 General
3.3.2 Minimum Whole-Luminaire Efficacy & Colour Rendering
3.3.3 LED Binning
3.3.4 Serviceability/Lamp Source Replacement
3.3.5 Optical Control & Photometry
3.3.6 Luminaire Thermal Management
3.3.7 Roadway Lighting Fixture Mounting
3.3.8 Ingress Protection (IP) and Impact Protection (IK)
3.3.9 Luminaire (complete) Materials Requirements
3.3.10 LED Driver Technical Requirements
3.3.11 LED Luminaire Useful Life Requirements
3.3.12 Luminaire Photobiological Safety
3.3.13 LED Luminaire Vibration Testing
3.3.14 Project Lighting Management (PLMS)- Dimming System Requirements
3.3.15 Surge Protection & Earthing
3.3.16 Quality Assurance
3.3.17 Warranty
4. Project Lighting Design Requirements………………………………………………..………… 14
4.1 Appraisal…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 14
4.2 General Design Considerations…………………………………………………………………………………. 15
4.3 Schedule of Lighting Levels……………………………………………………………………...................... 19
4.4 Maintenance Factors…..……………………………………………………………………............................ 21
4.4.1 LLD (Lamp Lumen Depreciation)
4.4.2 LDD (Luminaire Dirt Depreciation)
4.5 DESIGN & DAY-1 Calculation Outputs………………………………………………........................ 22
4.6 Project Lighting Design Calculations………………………………………………….........................23
5. Project Site Verification Requirements……………………………………….………..….…… 25
5.1 Site Lighting Measurement………………………………………………………………………………..…………25
5.2 Interim (Non-Day-1) Measurement………………………………………………………………….……….30
5.3 Project Harmonic Measurement…………………………….………………………………………………….31
6. Section Explained………………………………………………………………………………………………….….……33
6.1 Required /Permitted under Lighting Design Guidance ……..…….…………….….…….. 33
6.2 Not Required /Permitted under Lighting Design Guidance ………….………………… 33
7. Design Steps………………………………………..……………………………………………………………………….….. 33
7.1 Breakdown of Lighting Design Parts ………………………….……..………………………….……….. 34
7.1.1 Roadway Lighting
7.1.2 Conflict Areaa
Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual – Version 3.0: July 2021 Contents Page |1
Part-1 Contents
7.1.3 Final Design
8. Section Explained……………………………..……………………………………………………………………….….. 44
8.1 Required /Permitted under Lighting Measurement Guidance ..………….………44
8.2 Not Required /Permitted under Lighting Measurement Guidance …………..44
9. Lighting Level Verification……………..……………………………………………………………………….…..44
9.1 Identification of the Measurements to be Used ..…………………………………….………45
9.2 Luminance Measurements ..………………………………………………..………………………….………46
9.2.1 Number of Luminaires Included in the Measurement
9.2.2 Step by Step Methodology for Luminance Measurements
9.2.3 Interpretation of Luminance Measurement Data
9.2.4 Luminance Measurement Pro-Forma
9.3 Illuminance Measurements – Residential Roads, Frontage and Access…..…51
9.3.1 Step by Step Methodology for Illuminance Measurement
9.3.2 Interpretation of Illuminance Measurement Data
9.3.3 Illuminance Measurement Pro-Forma
9.4 Illuminance Measurements – Conflict Area and Irregular Shaped Areas..…53
9.4.1 Illuminance Measurement Pro-Forma
Section B – Lighting for Tunnels & Underpasses
1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-B………....................................59
1.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-B……….......................... 60
3. LED Luminaires..................................................................................................................... 61
3.2 AD Quality Mark (QCC Exterior LED Luminaire Certification)........................... 61
3.3 LED Luminaire Technical & Material Requirements (QCC aligned).…............. 62
3.3.1 General
3.3.3 LED Binning
3.3.8 Luminaire (complete) materials Requirements
3.3.13 Project Lighting Management Dimming System Requirements
3.3.16 Warranty
4. Project Lighting Design Requirements………………………………………………………….. 70
4.1 General……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 70
4.3 Maintenance Factors……………………………………………………………………................................. 74
4.4 DESIGN & DAY-1 Calculation Outputs………………………………………………........................ 75

4.5 Project Lighting Design Calculations…………………………………………………........................ 76
5. Project Site Verification Requirements……………………………………………………….. 78
5.1 Site Lighting Measurement………………………………………………………………………………………… 78
5.2 Interim (Non-Day-1) Measurement…………………………………………………………………………. 85
5.3 Project Harmonic Measurement………………………………………………………………………………. 85
6. Section Explained……………………………………………………….……………………………………………….. 87
7. Tunnel Lighting Design Guide and Methodology……………………………………..87
7.1 Lighting Requirements for Tunnels of Different Lengths……………………………………89
7.1.1
LLD (Lamp Lumen Depreciation)
7.1.2
Determination for the Need for Daytime Lighting
7.1.3
Daytime Lighting for LTP Values Between 20% and 80%
7.2 Determination of Sropping Distance (SD)……………………………………..…………………………92
7.3 Tunnel Lighting Classification…………………………………………………………………………….…………93
7.4 Determination of Zone Luminance…………………….…………………………………………….…………94
Part-1 Contents
7.4.1 Access Zone Luminance – Daytime
7.4.2 Direct Measurement at Site- Methodology
7.4.3 Procedure for Existing Tunnel
7.4.4 Procedure for Proposed Tunnel
7.4.5 Determination of Access Zone Luminance by the Grid Method
7.5 Tunnel Interior Zones- Determination of Daytime Luminance Levels.…………98
7.5.1 Threshold Zone Luminance – Daytime
7.5.2 Transition Zone Luminance – Daytime
7.5.3 Interior Zone Luminance – Daytime
7.5.4 Exit Zone Luminance – Daytime
7.5.5 Zone Length Methodology
7.6 Luminance and Uniformity.…………………………………………………………………………………..……101
7.6.1 Tunnel Walls
7.7 Night Time Lighting.……………………………………………………….………………………………………..……101
Section C – Roadway/Parking Lighting Poles
1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-C……….................................... 104
1.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-C………........................... 104
2.1 Light Poles.............................................................................................................................. 105
2.1.1
Description
2.2 30.5m High Mast Poles..................................................................................................... 106
2.2.1 General
2.2.2 Materials
2.2.3 Construction
2.2.4 Luminaire Support Ring and Head Frame
2.2.5 Lowering Winch
2.2.5 Portable Power Tool
2.3 Light Poles-20m, 18m, 14m, 12m, 10m and 8m....................................................... 109
2.3.1 General
2.3.2 Materials
2.3.3 Construction
2.4 Mid-Hinged Poles ............................................................................................................... 112
2.5 Multi-Function Light Poles……………………………................................................................. 114
2.5.1 General
2.5.2 Materials
2.5.3 Assembly
2.5.4 Design Submissions and Production
3. Painting and Numbering of Light Poles.............................................................. 118
3.1 Painting of Light Poles....................................................................................................... 118
3.2 Numbering of Light Poles………………………………………………………………….............................118
3.2.1 Numbering Requirements
4. Foundations for Lighting Poles……………………………………………………….…………….……..119
4.1 Description……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……… 119
4.2 Foundations for Light Poles……………………………………………………………………………….……… 119
4.2.1 General
4.2.2 Materials
4.2.3 Construction
5. Structural Testing…………………………………………………………………………………………….………….. 122
6. Warranty……………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………….. 122
7. Light Poles Schedules…………………………………..……………………………………………….………….. 123
8. Section Explained…………………………………………………………………………………………….………….. 127
8.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-C……….................................... 127
8.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-C………........................... 127
9. Section Explained……………………………………………………………………………………………….……….. 127
9.1 General…………………………………………………………………………....................................................... 127
9.2 Asset Age………………………………………………………………………...................................................... 128
9.2.1 Determination of the Likelihood of Corrosion or Fatigue
9.2.2 Action Age of Lighting Pole
9.2.3 Setting Priority Score for Testing (Asset Management)
Part-1 Contents
9.2.4 Priority Action Steps (Asset Management)
9.3 Replacement Programme Risk Assessment……….................................................. 131
9.3.1 Lighting Pole Risk Assessment Criteria
9.3.2 Priority Report Preparation- Red. Amber, Green (RAG)
9.3.3 RAG Assessment Scoring
9.3.4 RAG Action Matrix
10. Asset Management Data Collection……………………………………………………….….. 133
11. Structural Inspection………………………………….………………………….…….…………………….….. 135
11.1 Stage 1 : Detailed Visual Inspection (DVI)……….....................................................135
11.1.1 Visual Inspection Categories
11.1.2 Visual Inspection Guidance
11.1.3 Visual Inspection Pole Breakdown
11.2 Stage 2 : Non Destructive Testing (NDT)………........................................................141
11.2.1 Ultrasonic Testing
11.2.2 Ultrasonic Testing Procedure
11.2.3 Percentage Wall Thickness Loss
12. Examples of Corrosion and Damage to Lighting Assets………….…………145
Part-1 Contents
Section D – Lighting Management

1. Section Explanation………............................................................................................... 149
1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-D………………………………....... 149
1.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-D …………………………... 149
2. General Project Design Requirements & Responsibilities................... 150
3. Project Lighting Management System (PLMS) Provision...................... 150
3.1 Projects Requiring PLMS Provision…………………………………………..……………………....... 150
4. PLMS Technical Criteria................................................................................................151
4.1 System Technical Requirements...................................................................................151
4.1.1 Wired Systems
4.1.2 Wireless Systems
4.1.3 General Mandatory Project Technical Requirements
4.1.4 Optional Project Requirements
4.1.5 Prohibited Components or Capabilities
4.1.6 Central Management System (CMS) Technical Requirements
5. Dimming Profiles...............................................................................................................157
6. Quality Assurance.............................................................................................................158
7. Warranty.................................................................................................................................158
8. Maintenance/Defects Contract Period............................................................ 159
9. Measurement and Payment.....................................................................................160
10. Operation and Maintenance Manual................................................................160
Part-1 Contents
Section E – Solar Roadway/Parking Lighting

1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-E……….................................. 163
1.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-E………........................... 164
2. Solar Roadway/Parking Lighting System Options.......................................165
2.1 Project Selection................................................................................................................. 165
2.2 Standalone System............................................................................................................. 165
2.3 Grid-Connected System.................................................................................................. 166
2.4 Full Backup System............................................................................................................ 166
3.1 Design Requirements....................................................................................................... 167
4. Project Cost Analysis........................................................................................................ 168
4.1 Cost Analysis Requirements............................................................................................ 168
5. System Components.........................................................................................................171
5.1 LED Luminaires................................................................................................................... 171
5.2 PV System............................................................................................................................. 172
5.2.1 General
5.2.2 Materials
5.3 Inverter/Controller............................................................................................................ 176
5.3.1 Technical Requirements
5.3.2 Operating Conditions
5.4 Batteries................................................................................................................................ 177
5.5 Controls................................................................................................................................ 178
5.5.1 PLMS Technical Requirements
5.6 Cleaning System.................................................................................................................. 179
5.6.2 Cleaning Cycles
5.6.3 PV System Assembly
5.7 Pole Design Submission and Production................................................................... 181
5.7.1 Design Submission
6. Quality Assurance............................................................................................................. 182
7. Warranty.................................................................................................................................. 182
8. Maintenance/Defects Contract Period............................................................... 183
9. Measurement and Payment..................................................................................... 184
10. Operation and Maintenance Manual.................................................................. 184
Part-1 Contents
Section F –Lighting for Signage

1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-F……….................................. 188
1.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-F……….......................... 188
3. LED Luminaires………............................................................................................................. 189
3.2 LED Luminaire Technical & Material Requirements(QCC Aligned)................... 190
3.2.1 General
3.2.4 LED Binning
3.2.8 Luminaire (complete) Materials Requirement
3.2.13 Surge Protection and Earthing
3.2.15 Warranty
4. Project Lighting Design Requirements............................................................... 198
4.1 General……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 198
4.3 Maintenance Factors…..……………………………………………………………………............................ 200
4.3.1 Lamp Lumen Depreciation (LDD)
4.3.2 Luminaire Dirt Depreciation (LDD
4.4 Project Lighting Design Calculations…………………………………………………........................ 202
5. Project Site Verification Requirements............................................................ 204
5.1 Project Harmonic Measurement…………………………………………………………………………….. 204
Part-1 Contents
Section G –Light Pollution Mitigation

1. Section Explanation………............................................................................................. 207
1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-G……….............................. 207
1.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-G……….........................207
2. General Project Design Requirements & Responsibilities...................208
2.1 General………..........................................................................................................................208
2.2 Exterior Lighting……………….................................................................................................208
2.3 Lighting Levels at the Site Boundary and Beyond……….........................................209
2.4 Additional Requirements/Clarifications……..............................................................210
3. Light Pollution Criteria Definitions………………………………………………………………..….210
3.1 Definitions………....................................................................................................................211
4. Design Calculation Requirements and Methodology……………….…….…….211
4.1 Step by Step Guidance....................................................................................................213
4.2 Light Pollution Mitigation Pro-forma.........................................................................213
Part-1 Contents
Section H –Project Submission Requirements

1. Section Explanation………..................................................................................................217
2. Concept Design Stage ……………………………………………………………………………………….………..218
2.1 Lighting Submission Minimum Requirements…………………………………………....………..218
2.1.1 Cover Letter
2.1.2 Lighting Report Key Aspects
2.2 Optional Lighting Submission Material…………………………………………….……….....………..219
3. Preliminary Design Stage………………………………………………………………………………….….…. 219
3.1 Lighting Submission Minimum Requirements……………………………………………..……….220
3.1.1
Cover Letter & Copy of the Concept Design Approval
3.1.2
Lighting Calculations Key Aspects
3.1.3
Lighting Layouts Key Aspects
3.1.4
Technical Data Key Aspects
3.1.5
Electrical Design Key Aspects
3.2 OptionalLighting Submission Material…………………………...……………………………….………223
4. Detail Design Stage………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 223
4.1 Lighting Submission Minimum Requirements…………………………….………………………. 224
4.1.1Cover Letter & Copy of the Preliminary Design Approval
4.1.2Lighting Calculations Key Aspects
4.1.3Lighting Layout/Details Key Aspects
4.1.4Technical Data Key Aspects
4.1.5Light Pollution Mitigation Report
4.1.6Electrical Design Key Aspects
4.2 Optional Lighting Submission Material…………………………….……………………………………. 227
5. Tender/Construction Responsibilities……………………………………………………………. 227
Part-1 Contents
Section I – Electrical Requirements

1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-I………................................... 230
1.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-I………........................... 230
2.1 General………………………………………………………………………………………..................................... 231
2.2 Service Connections…………………………………………………………………..................................... 231
2.3 Site Conditions………………………………………………………………….............................................. 231
2.4 Coordination with AADC/ADDC……………………………………………..................................... 232
2.5 Schedules and Technical Details……………………………………………..................................... 233
3. Inspection and Testing……………………………………………………………………………………………… 233
3.1 General …………………………….................................................................................................... 233
3.2 Field Performance Tests…………………………………………………………………….......................... 234
3.3 Electrical, Utilities and Record Drawings.…............................................................... 235
4. Procedures for Electrical and Lighting Works……………………………..………… 236
4.1 Procedures for the Lightng Works…………………………………………………………………………… 236
4.2 Procedures for AADC/ADDC Electrical, Distribution Works……………………………. 237
4.3 Shop Drg. Procedures for Lighting Systems after Approval of Materials....... 237
4.4 As-Built Drawings………………………………………………………………………………............................ 239
5. Lighting and Electrical Materials, General………………………………………….….…… 241
5.1 Description……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 241
5.2 General………………………………………………………….…………………………………………………………………. 241
5.3 Control of Materials………………………………………………………….…………………………………………. 242
5.4 Analysis of Materials………………………………………………………….…………………………………………. 244
5.5 Identification………………………………………………………….…………………………………………..…………. 244
6. Earthwork for Electrical………………………………………….……………………………………….….…… 244
6.1 Description……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 244
6.2 Trench and Backfill…………………………………….…………………………………………………………………. 245
6.3 Construction Methods………………………………………………….…………………………………………. 245
6.4 Excavation for Structures……………………………………………….…………………………………………. 246
6.5 Conduits, Junction Boxes and Pull Boxes……….…………………………………………..…………. 246
6.5.1Description
6.5.2Rigid Galvanized STEEL Electrical Conduit
6.5.3Rigid Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Conduit
6.5.4Junction Boxes
6.6 Pull Boxes Type IV……….…………………………………………………………………………………..…………. 250
6.6.1 General
6.6.2 Materials
6.6.3 Construction
6.6.4 Polycarbonate Pull Boxes
6.7 Installation of PVC Ducts……….………………………………………………………………………..…………. 254
6.7.1 Description
6.7.2 Materials
6.7.3 Construction
Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual – Version 3.0 July 2021 Contents Page |12
Part-1 Contents
6.8 Reinforced Concrete Service Chambers……….…………………………………………..…………. 254
6.7.1 Description
6.7.2 Materials
6.7.3 Construction
6.9 PVC Conduit and Concrete Encased Ducts…….…………………………………………..…………. 255
6.10 Protection of Existing Electric Cables……….……………………………………………………………. 255
6.11 Supply of Cable Covering Tiles……….……………………………………………………………..…………. 257
6.11.1 Materials, General
6.11.2 Concrete Mix
6.11.3 Curing
6.11.4 Moulding
6.11.5 Inspection and Test
6.12 Placement of Warning Tapes……….……………………………………………………………..…………. 258
6.13 Remove and Salvage Existing Lighting System…..…………………………………..…………. 258
6.13.1 Description
6.13.2 Remove and Salvage Existing Lighting System
6.14 Remove and Reinstallation of Existing Lighting Poles…………………………..…………. 259
6.14.1 General
6.14.2 Remove and Salvage Existing Lighting Poles with Luminaires
6.14.3 Foundation for and Install Light Poles
6.15 Electrical Distribution………………………………………………………………………………………..…………. 260
6.15.1 Description
6.15.2 Guaranteed Characteristics
6.15.3 Rejection of Equipment
6.15.4 Submittals
6.15.5 Low Voltage (LV) Cable and Accessories
6.15.6 Joint Boxes for Low Voltage Cables
7. Lighting and Low Voltage Electrical Cable………................................................ 265
7.1 Description …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..…………. 265
7.2 General Requirements……………………………………………………………………………………..…………. 265
7.3 Electrical Low Voltage Cables Installed in PVC Duct………………………………..…………. 265
7.3.1 General
7.3.2 Laying-Up
7.3.3 Conductors
7.4 Insulation………………………………………………………………………………………………….…………..…………. 266
7.4.1 Sheath
7.4.2 Armour
7.4.3 Serving
7.4.4 Current Ratings
7.4.5 Short Circuit Ratings
7.4.6 Guarantee
7.4.7 Tests
7.5 Low Smoke PVC Wiring Cables………………………………………………………….…………..…………. 269
7.5.1 Low Smoke and Fume
7.5.2 PVC Wiring Cables
7.5.3 Fire Resistant PVC Wiring Cables
7.6 Low Voltage (LV) Cable………………………………….…………………………………….…………..…………. 269
7.6.2 Fire Resistant Cable
7.6.3 Modular Cable- Fire Resistant, LSOH Type
7.7 Electrical Cables- In Conduit and Light Poles………………………………….…………..…………. 271
7.8 Packing……………………………….……………………………….…………………………………….…………..…………. 272
Part-1 Contents
7.9 Markings…………………………………………………………….…………………………………….…………..…………. 272
7.10 Drawings & Information…………………………….…………………………………….…………..…………. 273
7.11 License…………………………..……………………………….…………………………………….…………..…………. 273
7.11.1 Materials
7.12 Splicing 600/1000 Volt Cable and Wire….…………………………………….…………..…………. 274
7.13 Lighting and Low Voltage Electrical Cable Installation…………….…………..…………. 274
7.14 Grounding & Bonding…..……………………………….…………………………………….…………..…………. 278
7.14.1 Summary
7.14.2 References
7.14.3 General Requirements
7.14.4 Performance Requirements
7.14.5 Submittals for Review
7.14.6 Submittals for Information
7.14.7 Submittals for Closeout
7.14.8 Regulatory Requirements
7.14.9 Products- Rod Electrodes
7.14.10 Plant Electrodes
7.14.11 Earth Continuity Conductors
7.14.12 Main Conductor
7.14.13 Mechanical Connectors
7.14.14 Exothermic Connections
7.14.15 Pit Components
7.14.16 Execution- Examination
7.14.17 Installation
7.14.18 Field Quality Control
7.15 Earthng and Bonding for Lighting Installation…………………………….…………..…………. 285
7.16 Cable Installation…..……………………………….…………………………………….……………..…..…………. 285
7.16.1 General
7.17 Installing Cables for Lighting and Street Furniture…………….……………..…..…………. 286
7.17.1 General
7.17.2 Trench and Backfill
7.17.3 Cable Laying
8. Lighting Control Cabinets……….................................................................................... 289
8.1 Description…………….………………………………………………………………………………………..…..…………. 289
8.2 General……………………………………………………………………………………………..……………..…..…………. 289
8.2.1 Construction
8.3 Underground Lighting Control Cabinet …………………………………..……………..…..…………. 291
8.3.1 General
8.3.2 Construction
8.4 Lighting Control Cabinet with CMS/PLMS ……………………………..……………..…..…………. 293
8.4.1 Inspection and Testing
8.4.2 Lightng Control CabinetsSupplied by The Department
8.5 Foundation for Lighting Control Cabinets ……………………………..………………..…..…………. 294
8.5.1 General
8.5.2 Materials
8.5.3 Installation
8.6 Electrical Cut-Outs for Light Poles ……………………………..……………..…………………...…………. 295
8.6.1 Electrical Cut-out Thermoplastic and Galvanised Steel
8.6.2 Surge Protection Devices (SPD) in Cut-out or Lighting Pole Base
8.7 PLMS for Roadway/Parking LED Lighting Installations………..…………………...…………. 297
8.8 PLMS for Tunnel LED Lighting Installations……………………………..…………………...…………. 297
8.9 Luminaire (HID and LED) and Ornamental Lighting………..…………………..…...…………. 297
Part-1 Contents
8.9.1 Description
8.9.2 1000W HPS Luminaire for 30.5m High Mast Light Poles
8.9.3 1000W HPS for 20.0m, 18.0m and 14.0m High Poles and 400W HPS and MH
and 250W HPS and MH Luminaire for 10.0m High Poles
9. Electrical Appurtances……….......................................................................................... 315
9.1 Description………………………………………………………………………………….……..…………………...…………. 315
9.2 Cable Tray, Cable Trunking, Cavity Floor Trunking and Junction Box for Tunnel
Lighting.……..……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..…………...…………. 315
9.2.1General
9.2.2Cable Tray
9.2.3Cable Trunking
9.2.4Junction Box for Tunnel Lighting
9.2.5Cavity Floor Trunking
9.3 Isolator Switches…………………………………………………………………….……..…………………...…………. 316
9.4 Local Devices…………………………………………………………………………….……..…………………...…………. 317
9.4.1 Flexible Outlets
10. Tunnel Under Pass Lighting System..................................................................... 317
10.1 General………………………………………………………………………………….……..…………………...…………. 317
10.1.1 Operational Objectives
10.1.2 Scope of Work
10.1.3 Description of Lighting System
10.1.4 Design Criteria of Lighting System
10.1.5 Power Regulators/Power Controllers
10.1.6 Tunnel Luminaires- General
10.1.7 Tunnel Luminairs – Construction
10.1.8 Luminaires- Mechanical Requirements
10.1.9 Luminaires- Electrical Requirements
10.1.10 Luminaires- Photometrical Requirements
10.1.11 Luminaires- Photometrical Performance Requirements
10.1.12 Luminaires- Documents to be Submitted
10.2 Tunnel Lighting Control…………………………………………………….……..…………………...…………. 328
10.2.1 General
10.2.2 Luminance Meter
10.2.3 The Main Control System/Master PLC
10.2.4 LED Control and Monitoring System
10.2.5 General Specification of the LPL Module
10.2.6 General Specification of the LPM Module
10.2.7 LDB
10.2.8 Communication to Future SCADA System
10.2.9 Training for the Department’s Personnel
10.2.10 Site Inspection and Testing
10.2.11 Factory Acceptance Test (FAT)
10.2.12 Spares
10.3 Power Supply to Tunnel Lighting……………………………………….……..…………………...…………. 339
10.4 Diesel Generator Set………………………………..………………………….……..…………………...…………. 339
10.4.1 General
10.4.2 Sequence of Operation
10.4.3 Shop Drawings
10.4.5 Materials
11. Definition of Terms......................................................................................................... 358
12. Electrical Testing Section Explained..................................................................... 363
Part-1 Contents
12.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part 1, Section I- Electrical Testing………. 363
12.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part 1, Section I- Electrical Testing 364
13. General Project Design Requirements & Responsibilities………………… 364
13.1 General………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 364
13.2 Electrical Network…..……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 364
13.3 Risk of Electrocution..……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 365
13.3.1 Electric Shock
13.3.2 Outcomes of Electric Shock
14. Electrical Testing………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 367
14.1 Electrical Testing- Competency of Testers……………………………………………………………. 368
14.2 Electrical Testing Requirements………………………………………………………………………………. 369
14.2.1 Electric Testing Warning Notice
14.2.2 Visual Inspection – LCC & Lighting Pole
14.2.3 Continuity of Protective Conductors
14.2.4 Earth Electrode Testing
14.2.5 Insulation Resistance Testing
14.2.6 Polarity
14.2.7 Eath Fault Loop Impedance
14.2.8 Volt Drop
15. Asset Management……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 385
15.1 Asset Management Department………………………………………………………………………………. 385
15.2 Maintenance Department…………………………………………………………………………………..………. 386
Part-1 Contents
Section J– Pro-forma
Appendix A LightIng Design Certificate…………………………………………………..…….................... 390
Appendix B Electrical Design Certificate……………………………………………..……..................... 391
Appendix C Lighting Design Submission Checklist………………………..……..................... 392
Appendix D Design Submission Checklist …………………………………………..……..................... 394
Appendix E Electrical Testing Certificate……………………………………………..……..................... 399
Appendix F Site Inspection Checklist…………………………………………………..……..................... 400
Appendix G Light Pollution Mitigation…………………………………………………..……..................... 401
Appendix H Luminance Measurement…………………………………………………..……..................... 402
Appendix I Illuminance Measurement…………………………………………………..……..................... 403
Appendix J Illuminance Measurement (2)…………………………………………..……..................... 404
Appendix K Light Pole Condition Classification……………………………..……..................... 405
Appendix L Light Pole Structural Inspection Form………………………..……..................... 406
Appendix M Light Pole Wall Thickness Measurement………………..……..................... 407
Part-1 Contents
Applicable Standards & Guidance References

A. Abu Dhabi Standards & Guidance……………………………………………………………..…410
B. International Standards & Guidance……………………………………………………………411
C. Lighting Maintenance & Measurement…………………………………………………… 411
D. Mechanical/Material..................................................................................................412
E. Electrical.............................................................................................................................. 412
F. Light Emitting Diode (LED)...................................................................................... 413
G. LED Luminaire Performance...................................................................................414
H. Lighting Design.................................................................................................................415
I. Solar Street Lighting.....................................................................................................416
J. Economic/Cost - Life-Cycle Analysis................................................................. 417
K. Lighting Controls/PLMS............................................................................................ 417
Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual
Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual – Version 3.0: July 2021

Part-1 Section-A – Lighting for Roadways & Parking
Part-1 Section A – Lighting for Roadways & Parking

For full descriptions of any standards and guidance documents referred to within this Part-1
Section-A, refer to the Part-1 Applicable Standards & Guidance References Section.
1. Section Explanation
This Section is a brief summary of the primary factors covered within this Part-1 Section-A of the
Lighting Manual. The detailed technical criteria for which are described in the Clauses following:
1.1. Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-A
a) It is statutory that all luminaires used for projects must be LED (or other equally
sustainable alternative luminaire technology as defined within this Manual’s
Introduction).
b) LED Luminaire Useful-Life Performance is based on an ambient temperature of 350C.
c) Maintenance Factor (MF) calculations must be supplied with every submission.
d) Luminaire Dirt Depreciation Factor (LDD) component of the Maintenance Factor are
detailed in Part 1 Section A, Clause 4.4.
e) Warranty for all luminaires is a minimum of 50,000 hours for all aspects.
f) Table of Lighting Design categories has additional requirement of Emin/Emax.
g) Luminance levels increased for Residential Streets and Frontage/Access lanes
h) Pole Heights and Pole Spacing requirements revised to new set criteria for Residential
Streets and Frontage/Access Lanes.
i) The Department’s decision is final regarding project submissions and design
approvals.
j) All lighting designers to complete and sign the lighting design certificate as per Part 1,
Section J
1.2. Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-A
a) Any luminaires used for projects that are not LED (or other equally sustainable
alternative luminaire technology as defined within this Manual’s Introduction).
b) Any deviation from the system technical criteria as set out within this Manual.
c) Any deviation from the minimum maintenance and warranty requirements as set out
within this Manual.
d) Any deviation from the project Lighting Design, Calculation and Site Verification
requirements as set out within this Manual.
Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual – Version 3.0: July 2021 Page |2

2. General Project Design Requirements & Responsibilities
The primary purpose of roadway lighting is to produce quick, accurate, safe and comfortable
visibility at night and/or when visibility is low. These qualities of visibility may safeguard, facilitate,
and encourage vehicular and pedestrian traffic. Every designer should provide for those inherent
qualities required by the user. A very important consideration is that of making streets and
roadways useful during hours of darkness as well as during the daytime. Where good visibility is
provided through lighting, efficient night use can be made of the large investments in roadways
and motor vehicles. Thus, the proper use of roadway lighting as an operative tool provides
economic and social benefits to the public including:
• Reduction in night-time Personal Injury Accidents (PIAs)

• Augmentation of police protection and enhanced sense of personal security
• Facilitation of traffic flow
• Promotion of business and the use of public facilities during the night hours
This Manual Section includes information on the purpose and impacts of roadway lighting levels,
acceptable arrangements of lighting poles and fixtures, priority and associated aspects of roadway
lighting such as designing with reducing light pollution in mind.
The design, specification, calculation, manufacturing, testing, shipment, installation and

performance for the project shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of The
Department’s electrical and lighting standards for electrical distribution works, as per Part 1
Section I.Copies should be requested from The Department if not already held. Details of all
standards are provided within the Applicable Standards & Guidance References at the end of
Part-1.
It is a statutory requirement that all luminaires used on all Roadway Lighting and Parking Lighting
projects must be LED (or other equally sustainable alternative luminaire technology as defined
within this Manual’s Introduction).
Suppliers and manufacturers shall guarantee adherence to this Manual and the performance of
their luminaires under all the required design conditions.
The Consultant shall be responsible to ensure that the project and all product specifications are
fully in compliance, without any deviation from this Manual, prior to forwarding to The
Department for approval. Any deviation should be brought to the notice of The Department. The
Consultant shall ensure in their design the following: integration, coordination, functionality and
accessibility of these services. It shall be the Consultant’s responsibility to bring the system to the
design & operating and maintenance conditions.
The Consultant shall, as requested by The Department, provide full cost analysis including payback
assessments as required for the project (or part of the project) and in accordance with the
instructions given by The Department. All information provided and the cost analysis/payback
calculations must be calculated with the exact luminaire solution proposed; including specific

circuit wattages and drive currents, actual sources within the luminaires, including the exact
calculation for the fixtures’ useful-life cycle, project location, controls usage/programming etc.
3. LED Luminaires
3.1. General Requirements
The LED luminaires shall be designed to operate continuously for the required useful-lifetime
performance and at the specified ambient temperature, humidity and quality criteria as defined
by this Manual. With special attention given to the effects of direct sun-exposure during the day,
corrosion resistance and endurance against the occasional sandstorms and dusty weather in
designing the luminaire body and components.
For more reference information regarding lighting technology, lamps, luminaires, electrical,
materials and lighting maintenance, refer to the Public Realm & Street Lighting Handbook
Chapters C, D, E, M and O.
3.2. AD Quality Mark (QCC Exterior LED Luminaire Certification)
3.2.1. QCC Certificate of Conformity
A valid QCC Certificate of Conformity must be provided covering every luminaire proposed for the
project during submissions.
In addition to the LED fixtures supplied QCC Certificates shall be the additional specific Lighting
Manual fixture-technical and project-required design criteria, for which all data must be provided
on the project submission for Roadway Lighting and Parking projects.
Notes:
The QCC Certification Scheme provides certification for a fixture and/or fixture range/family;
within the allowed criteria set out under the scheme. The specific optics option of the luminaire is
not a critical parameter within the scheme and as such if the luminaire proposed for a particular
project has an optic which differs from that used for certification, this is not an issue for compliance
and is allowed, as long as, project specific minimum fixture efficacy requirements stated within
this Section are met with the particular optic used and photometry provided to show actual fixture
efficacy value.
If the luminaire proposed for a project has different/revised LED package to that installed within
the fixture(s) gaining compliance (i.e., using a new generation of LED sources), this too is allowed
as long as the fixture’s body, materials, driver and drive current remain the same (or less in regards
to drive current) and the overall fixture’s lumen output is similar. Justification must be made to the
Department alongside the QCC Product Conformity Certificate with all technical details and the

Department shall assess the justification as part of the project submission and decide if the fixture
is accepted as being covered under the existing Certificate or must require new certification. The
Department’s decision is final and it is advised for all manufacturers to ensure regular certification
of updated fixture families as required ensuring compliance is maintained.
If the Specifications within the QCC Certification Scheme becomes a UAE Standard through
adoption by ESMA (Emirates Association for Standards & Metrology), then from the date this
becomes active the QCC Certification procedure will simply refer to the ESMA Standard.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide Copy of valid QCC Product Conformity Certificate(s)
3.3. LED Luminaire Technical & Material Requirements (QCC aligned)
3.3.1. General
a) The LED luminaires must have valid certification under the Abu Dhabi QCC Certification
Scheme for LED Exterior Lighting.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide valid QCC Certificate.
b) Manufacturer’s company profile including a profile of the manufacturing facilities. Valid

ISO 9001 certificates of the manufacturing facilities.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide manufacturer profile and ISO 9001

certificates.
c) The following shall be submitted in addition to all requirements of this manual (all data in
SI units):
• Photometric test data
• Full light source lamp specification
• LED Chip Reliability reports
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide Photometric test data in standard format (IES or
EULUMDAT), full light source/lamp specification data and LED chip reliability reports to JEDEC
JESD22/JESD51 or comparable International standard (tests at +85ºC).
3.3.2. Minimum Whole-Luminaire Efficacy & Colour Rendering Index
a) The LEDs shall be from a manufacturer of LEDs with ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377 or

similar approved International Standard certification. (Please note: The nominal
Correlated Colour Temperature (CCT) ANSI standard LED colours accepted for use for
roadway/parking lighting on The Department’s projects are 2700K, 3000K and 4000K,
only, although the QCC Scheme allows a wider band for all luminaire types).

Project Submission Requirement:- Provide proof from LED supplier product data.
b) Minimum Luminaire Efficacy and associated Minimum Colour Rendering (CRI – Colour
Rendering Index) rating shall be as per Table 3.3.2.1:
Table 3.3.2.1 Minimum Whole-Luminaire Efficacy & Colour Rendering Index
Fixture Type Minimum Luminaire Efficacy* Minimum CRI-Rating
Roadway Lighting Fixture 125lm/W 70

*Luminaire efficacy is given as lumen Output (lm) over input power (W) at standard
laboratory conditions. All tests to be taken at 230V.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide IES LM-79-08 test reports (Sections 11 & 12) or
comparable IEC/International standards to prove luminaire efficacy and CRI, plus actual**
luminaire CCT is within acceptable limits as per Table 3.3.2.2 in relation to Nominal CCT.
Table 3.3.2.2 Nominal CCT

Nominal CCT (ANSI C78.377A)
Nominal CCT CCT Range (Fixture Actual Allowed**)
2700K 2725K ±83
3000K 3045K ± 100
4000K 3985K ± 154
Note: Where the project is either an extension of existing LED phases, or are roads
connecting to other adjacent roads installed with LED roadway lighting, or replacements
of existing luminaires in part, the Consultant shall investigate the nominal CCT of these
adjoining fixtures and propose a solution with matching CCT for visual consistancy.
3.3.3. LED Binning
All Luminaires shall be maximum proved MacAdam Ellipse Step-4.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide copies of highlighted LED chip data or full luminaire
LM-79-08 test data to show compliance acheived within limits of Step-4 or better.
3.3.4. Serviceability/Lamp Source Replacement
The fixture shall be ‘servicable’: Drivers and LED modules/boards/engine shall be site
removable/replaceable without any possible risk to maintaining luminaire photometry and
without the need to demount the fixtures for sake of future upgrading/ maintenance
requirements if required.
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide written descriptions of LED source maintenance and
replacement.

3.3.5. Optical Control & Photometry
The luminaire shall be fitted with optical refractors, diffusers and/or reflectors designed to exactly
suit the specific application the fixture is intended for.
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide product information describing the optical control
and components to cover the range and fixture application.
3.3.6. Luminaire Thermal Management
a) The LED luminaires shall be designed to operate continuously at the specified ambient
temperature and humidity with special attention given to the effects of direct sun-
exposure during the day, the occasional sand storms and dust in designing the luminaire
body. The design of the luminaire shall be such that there is a direct thermal path from
the LED junctions to the atmosphere thus providing a thermal transfer effect throughout
the life of the luminaire. The thermal solution shall be proprietary and designed by the
lighting manufacturer to enable the luminaires to work efficiently in Abu Dhabi climatic
conditions. The luminaire shall be provided with a demonstrated ventilation arrangement
allowing heat to be dissipated to the atmosphere.
The luminaire shall be designed to prevent collection of debris and dust/sand by proven
and stated means. The design shall be such that the luminaire lenses shall be anti-static
to ensure minimal dust/sand accumulation.
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide detailed physical description of the fixture including
images and dimensions. Provide written justification and luminaire product data.
b) The luminaire operating range (taking into account LED components, driver, etc.) shall be
to a minimum of +50°C ambient air temperature(Ta) with an acceptable demonstrated
lumen-output performance at Ta+50°C. The operating range maximum refers to the Ta as
per IEC/ISO 60598-1 or UL 1598.
Project Submission Requirement: - The effect of reduced lumen output at operation in increased
ambient temperatures (i.e. any ambient temperature higher than 25°C as per LM-79) must be
checked by a submitted LM-82 test report for 50°C ambient (testing the luminaire’s/luminaire
range’s largest LED engine/module, or (largest) whole luminaire, per LM-82 procedures in all
cases). This test shall be taken using the highest proposed fixture/range drive current, by
measuring total luminous flux or luminous intensity at the elevated temperature and
extrapolating to the 25°C Ta figure. This will be considered acceptable provided the lumen output
decrease is proved to be less-than-or-equal-to 6%)
In addition, this measured percentage drop of luminous flux shall then be applied to the LM-79
luminaire flux value and when multiplied by the measured load at 50°C, will be considered
acceptable provided the resultant efficacy value still remains within the minimum allowed fixture

efficacy as set out within Table 3.3.2.1. the LM 79 and LM 82 tests shall be carried out on the same
fitting.
c) The luminaire installed daytime (non working) temperature shall be to a minimum of 50°C
ambient air temperature (Ta) with all internal components rated to a minimum of 85°C..
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide declaration of the conformity of the Luminaire to the
required installed temperature minimums.
3.3.7. Roadway Lighting Fixture Mounting
Luminaires shall be provided with a heavy-duty rugged pressure die-cast aluminium alloy (or
proven equivalent material) adjustable clamp to suit any proposed pole/pole-arm connection-
angle between a below-entry to side-entry arm connection. Holding screws that tighten directly
onto the bracket arm will not be accepted.
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide written descriptions of lighting fixture mounting

design.
3.3.8. Ingress Protection (IP) and Impact Protection (IK)
The luminaire control gear and LED optical-unit components shall be externally fully rated to the
minimum IP (Ingress Protection) rating and IK (Impact Protection/Mechanical Strength) rating as
set out in the Table 3.3.8.1, have proven means of negating internal condensation build-up for
their application and be able to operate in high relative humidity.
Table 3.3.8.1 Ingress Protection (IP) and Impact Protection (IK)

Minimum IK-Rating
Fixture Type Luminaire Minimum IP-Rating
Luminaire Lens
Roadway Lighting Fixture IP66 IK08 IK07*
*Any glass diffusers or components must have a minimum IK08 rating.
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide test reports for IP and IK ratings: IP rating determined
by IEC 60529 or comparable International standard, IK rating determined by IEC 62262 or
comparable International standard.
3.3.9. Luminaire (complete) Materials Requirements
a) All Exterior pressure die-cast aluminum alloy components shall have a copper content
percentage in line with the requirements of ISO 3522, EN/BS 1706 by mass.

Project Submission Requirement:- Provide declaration of pressure die-cast aluminum alloy
standard used and associated component copper content (by mass) to ISO 3522, EN/BS 1706
Standards or other comparable International standard.
b) Testing of exterior metal coated/painted and non-coated components for proven and
demonstrated corrosion resistance.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide test report to ASTM D1654-08 or other comparable
International standard for evaluation of a sample of the exterior painted or coated metals
subjected to corrosive environments or provide test report to EN/ISO 9227, ASTM B117-11 or
other comparable International standard for Salt Spray test of finished luminaire body and all
metal coated/painted and non-coated fixture components for minimum 1000hours, or approved
accelerated test method under these standards.
c) Where different metallic materials are used together, then proof of avoidance of bi-
metallic or galvanic corrosion with any touching dissimilar metals must be assured.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide written report of all dissimilar metals used within the
lighting fixture and confirmation of the method/design in avoiding bi-metallic or galvanic
corrosion.
d) All synthetic optical materials shall be resistant to degredation by Ultraviolet Radiation and
scratch resistant.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide declaration with supporting evidence that the
resistance to degredation by Ultraviolet Radiation will be sufficient to not significantly affect the
luminaire performance during the Department’s expected useful lifetime of the luminaire.
Manufacturer to submit a datasheet of the proposed optic material to show both the Ultraviolet
Radiation degredation resistance and scratch resistance of the external optical synthetic material.
e) Any steel body materials, components, bolts, nuts and hardened washers shall be
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153 or comparable International standard.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide written confirmation covering any steel

components to show all are galvanised to ASTM-A153 comparable standard or other
f) Any external stainless steel body materials, components bolts, nuts and hardened washers
shall be minimum 316L Grade or comparable International standard.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide written confirmation covering any stainless

steel components to show all are minimum 316L Grade to ASTM-SAE comparable
standard or other comparable International standard.

3.3.10. LED Driver Technical Requirements
Within the fixture the drivers shall meet the following additional project requirements:
• Driver shall be minimum 1-10v dimmable/addressable and/or 1-10v+DALI
allowed and must be able to be PLMS/CMS connectable.
• Driver can have some means of built-in overheat thermal protection in the form
of either automatic dimming or stepping/holding down of the driver. But this
function can be present only if devices activate after the case-temperature
exceeds that experienced within the luminaire’s normal required maximum
operational limits: i.e. with Ta50°C (outside ambient-air temperature to the
luminaire). Driver currents shall be maximum 750mA.Case Temperature (Tc)
rating +80°C at a minimum 95% Relative Humidity (RH). Luminaires with open
drivers need to prove Luminaire ambient of 50°C maximum in equivalence with
this requirement.
• Nominal rated Input voltage: 230V+10%/-6% 50Hz
• Drivers shall have a Power Factor (PF) of L ≥ 0.90.
• Driver shall be UL and/or IEC Certified.
• Drivers shall be Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) compliant
• Drivers shall have a Total individual luminaire Harmonic Distortion (THD) of: ≤20%
in accordance with ANSI C82.77 or comparable International standard.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide LED driver manufacturer data sheets, test reports
and/or certification documentation demonstrating conformity to the above requirements. If
thermal protection is present within the driver, then proof required to confirm it’s operation is
not activated within the normal stated limits of luminaire thermal operational requirements.
3.3.11. LED Luminaire Useful Life Requirements
Demonstrate 50,000-hour useful life of the luminaire based on the simplified B20-L70 threshold
at ambient temperature (Tq) of 35°C (considers the annual average recorded night-time
temperature for Abu Dhabi Emirate plus safety allowance).
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide lumen maintenance report for 50,000 hour, B20-L70
@ (Tq) of 35°C for the luminaire, referring to the chip manufacturer’s IES LM-80 data for
demonstrated curve/drive current/ fVoltage. Using IES TM-21 or comparable IEC/international
standard.
3.3.12. Luminaire Photobiological Safety
Luminaire must comply with Photobiological Safety of lamps and lamp systems in accordance with
the requirements of IEC 62471 or ANSI/IES RP-27.3.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide test results for IEC 62471, ANSI/IES RP-27.3 or
comparable International standards. The fixture must pass all requirements of the tests for “No
Risk”/”Exempt” results.
3.3.13. LED Luminaire Vibration Testing
Test whole fixture/luminaire as per ANSI C136.31 or comparable international standard. Test
method specifics to be determined by the supplier dependent on the potential vibration
exposure.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide test results for ANSI C136.31 or comparable
International standard
3.3.14. Project Lighting Management System (PLMS)-Dimming Requirements
All Roadway Lighting projects shall be PLMS ready, and as such capable of being dimmed as per
the requirements of Part 1 Section D, irrespective of the project size or location. Where the project
is an extension of existing project, or is located in a brownfield site, the Consultant must approach
the relevant Municipality’s Asset Management Division to request connection to the existing
PLMS Gateways in the vicinity. Where the existing Gateway capacity has been reached, the
Consultant must provide additional Gateway(s) as per the system requirements. All project
submissions must include the provision for PLMS at Concept Design stage. A full description of the
proposed PLMS network must be provided at the Concept Design stage and carried through the
Project subsequent submissions, including Tender Submission stage.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide details of the PLMS
3.3.15. Surge Protection & Earthing
The Luminaire shall be provided with a Surge Protection Device (SPD) to

• IEC/EN 61547 up to 6 kV or
• IEEE/ASNI C62.41.2 Scenario I Location Category C up to 6kV-6kA
or comparable International standard for surge protection. All SPDs within the luminaire shall be
connected in series and will be complimentary to an SPD installed in the base of the pole
(accessible through the pole handhole as a separate item or integrated into the electrical cut-out)
of minimum 10kV/10kA as per the standards mentioned. All SPDs installed in the pole base shall
be connected in series and shall have an indicator (Green/Red) to provide visual identification if
working or faulty. SPDs in the pole base shall be designed to fail before any failure occurs in the
luminaire SPD.
SPDs shall be capable of protecting the luminaire against common mode and differential mode
surges and shall be connected to Phase (L), Neutral (N) and Protective Earth (PE). The Surge
protection Device shall include fusing and protection to prevent fire in case of protection
component failures at end of life.
Earthing of the LED luminaire shall be as per a class I “electrical unit” to EN/IEC 60598-1.To ensure
that no part of the luminaire can become live due to failure of the insulated parts or through any
type of fault, the luminaire will be provided with a Protective Earth Connection to which the wiring
from the supply from the cut-out shall be connected. All cabling from the cut-out to the luminaire
shall be 3 core flex as per the Electrical requirements detailed in Part 1 Section I.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide manufacturer’s details of the surge protection device
fitted to the luminaire including class-I earthing connection (and fuse provision as applicable) to
achieve the Manual’s requirements for 6kV/6kA protection to IEC/EN 61547, IEEE/ANSI C62.41.2-
2002/ earthing to EN/IEC 60598-1 or comparable International standards.
3.3.16. Quality Assurance
a) The Department will request a sample of three luminaires of all proposed luminaire types
to be installed for review by The Department. The Department’s decision on all matters
is final.
b) To verify luminaire performance and compliance with the specifications, The Department
may also request additional testing of sample luminaires. All such testing shall be from
accredited laboratories.
c) According to the requirements of the Project’s Contract documents, if required, The

Department reserves the right to attend, or appoint another party to attend, a factory
inspection.
Project Submission Requirement:- Written confirmation stating acceptance of the above

requirements if and when envoked by The Department.
3.3.17. Warranty
Note: Warranties shall be for/transferable to The Department after the end of project’s
defined defects phase to cover the remainder of the Warranty period to the
requirements as defined below.
a) A written warranty for a 50,000 Burning Hours* on-site replacement material, fixture,
finishes and workmanship against the deterioration of the housing, all external
components; such as lenses, gaskets & fastenings, and the fixture finishes shall include
warranty against failure or substantial deteriorations such as corrosion, blistering,
cracking or peeling (excluding damage caused by contact with chemical substances,
fertilizers, water containing corrosive agents or stray electrical currents) with no cost to
The Department**
b) A written warranty for a 50,000 Burning Hours* replacement material warranty for
defective or non-starting LED source assemblies with no cost to The Department**
c) A written warranty for a 50,000 Burning Hours*replacement material warranty on all

supplied drivers, power supply units (PSUs), electrical components and in-built control
components with no cost to The Department**
d) A written warranty for a 50,000 Burning Hours* replacement material warranty for on-
maintained luminance levels on all light sources (LED package, LED array, or LED module)
including, but not limited to the LED die, encapsulate, and phosphor. Stating B20
compliance for a minimum of 10 years. If the expected useful life performance
parameters of the luminaire system are not being maintained, then the manufacturer
shall replace the light source(s) or luminaire as needed with no cost to The Department**
Please note: * Burning Hours for the Emirate of Abu Dhabi is calculated as an Average of 11 hours
per day with a Total Annual of 4,015 hours.
**With no cost to The Department does not just refer to the luminaire or luminaire component
cost in regards to any warranty actions. This also refers to any costs associated with labour for
removal/fitting of luminaires, obtaining Authority NOCs, traffic management costs, transport etc.
The Department will not be liaible for any associated costs arising/necessary in relation to
warranty actions). The manufacturer must contact DMT prior to assigning any Contractor. These
requirements are purely in regards to the terms of Luminaire/Luminaire Equipment Warranties
that must be provided to The Department at Handover. It is not in any way in connection to the
cover during the defects period which shall be solely as per specific terms agreed between the
manufacturer and Contractor.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide a written undertaking, to the satisfaction of The

Department, of the Warranty for The Department from the Luminaire Supplier(s), accompanied
with written proof of the local representative’s UAE Operating License and established UAE
background, to warranty the materials and performance as stated within this clause and for the
minimum periods defined.
4. Project Lighting Design Requirements
For all project lighting design and calculations, refer to the Public Realm & Street Lighting
Handbook for guidance on applying the requirements of the Lighting Manual. Particular attention
should be given to Handbook Chapters F, G, H, I, M and O.
4.1. Appraisal
The Consultant shall undertake an Initial study for the project including the roadways, highways,
the freeway interchanges, etc. and identifying the following features:
• Name of different segments of the project including street, ramps, bridges,

overpasses, tunnels, etc.
• Identify diverging lanes, converging lanes, abrupt curves, accelerating, and
decelerating traffic lanes. These locations will need careful attention.
• Identify segments of the project where the road is categorized as a highway,
boulevard, avenue and local streets etc. including pedestrian and cycling activities
and crossings. All categorisations are to be as per the USDM.
• Identify Intersections and conflict areas with special attention given to proposed
luminaire/pole arrangements to ensure minimal infrastructure and even
arrangements both within the intersection/conflict area and leading off from them.
• Identify structures, walls, fences, ditches, water ponds, etc.
• Identify pedestrian walkways, sidewalks, and cycle lanes/paths.
• Identify any hospitals, residential areas, airports, observatories, industrial,
commercial zones, or any other critical locations close by
• Identify right of way including Public Realm.
• Identify the elevations of the different roads, ramps, overpass, etc. on the project.
• Determine the width of the different pavements, shoulders, medians, barriers, etc.
• Where possible, a site visit shall be undertaken to identify if the project is adjacent to
an existing developed area or if the project is within a Brownfield site, to allow the
Consultant to identify and consider the aesthetics of the existing roadway/parking
lighting, including LED CCTs, and try to match the existing as reasonably as possible.
• The approved lighting corridor shall be shown on all design submissions with all
lighting installed in the correct corridor.
• Ensure that the lighting installation will not interfere with pedestrian routes and
crossings as well as other services, proposed or existing.
• in Brownfield and Greenfield project locations, all existing and proposed tree
locations must be considered to ensure that all obstruction of light and casting of
shadows is minimised.
• A table is to be produced by the Consultant identifying each road or area under
design. Each road or area must be provided with a unique reference which shall be
used in the design calculation sheets for ease of identification by the Department’s
reviewer.
• Identify unprotected lighting within Clear Safety Zone the speed of the road. For
protection of poles refer to the latest version of Road Safety Audit Manual TR-540
and Road Side Design Manual TR-518.
4.2. General Design Considerations
a) Mesopic Multipliers
Use of Mesopic multipliers shall be disallowed herein, by assuming an S/P ratio of 1.00
for all luminaires in all calculations.
b) Highways/Freeways and Major Arterials

Because these road types are wide and have higher traffic speeds, general roadway
lighting requirements are inadequate for Highways/Freeways and Major Arterial lighting.
High lumen LEDs in conjunction with 20m poles shall be used to illuminate large roadway
areas and reduce glare.
c) Boulevards and Avenues

These roads serve moderately high volumes of traffic at lower speeds than
Highways/Freeways and Major Arterials. Although their primary function is to move and
maintain uninterrupted traffic flow, they frequently have busy at-grade intersections
requiring traffic control devices. These at-grade intersections require greater visibility for
traffic signals, signs and the resulting crossing and turning conflicts. Also, increased
commercial development along Boulevards and Avenues means increased
pedestrian/Non-Motorised Users (NMUs) movements and possibly the need to
accommodate public transportation/Transit users. Adequate lighting for pedestrian
movements and public transportation’s frequent stopping, loading, and unloading of
passengers is vital to safety along these roads. Boulevard and Avenue lighting must also
blend with commercial development lighting to avoid combinations which detract from
the overall lighting or result in poor visibility.
d) Sector Internal Roads (Streets)

A Sector Internal Road’s (Streets as per USDM designation) primary function is to provide
direct access to adjacent properties Traffic in these streets comprises more pedestrian
than vehicular and as such all lighting design will be carried out in Illuminance. Designers
to ensure that all lighting poles do not conflict with pedestrian paths, cycle or running
tracks. All lighting poles shall be installed to provide maximum clearance from the edge
of the road but will adhere to the approved lighting corridor as per UCDM.
e) Two-way roads with Narrow Medians

Where narrow medians are present it is mandatory to have the lighting installed as far as
possible away from the road edge whilst respecting the approved corridor as per UCDM.
All straight two-way roads from an Avenue class upwards that have a posted speed limit
of 60kph or higher and have a median less than 8m in width must consider the potential
night-time disabling glare issue of oncoming vehicle headlights. Any roads of such type
cannot be proposed with medians devoid of all fencing or vertical objects
(barriers/planting etc.) which if present can physically block the headlights of traffic
travelling in opposite directions to one another.
Completely untreated flat medians whilst having potential benefits for other reasons
required by The Department could conversely result in reduced visibility for drivers at
night by 50-60% regardless of the roadway lighting provision. This issue can effectively
result in a driver not being able to discern people, holes or debris in his or her path until
they are respectively 50-60% closer than the same road having a vertical treatment to the
median. The result could reduce the effective safe stopping distance to a level which the
driver cannot avoid collision, as well as causing accumulative eyestrain.
It should be noted that the direction of viewed glare for drivers for this hazard is when
the vehicles are diagonally opposed and travelling and thus it is not necessary for any
vertical blocking treatment solution to be either solid or continuous, as the median
presented in the eye line is foreshortened. As such, suitably spaced planting/objects with
gaps in-between can be considered to offer a visually solid barrier only when viewed from
drivers in the outside lanes of the opposing carriageways which is sufficient to mitigate
the issue. In addition, these objects only require to be considered of a height as needed
to block opposing headlights from drivers’ eye lines.
Note: This is a serious potential safety issue and Consultants must consider all such
cases to always ensure suitable treatments are recommended to be provided on
medians where applicable in agreement with The Department. Every project must be
considered individually for the specific constraints and geometry of their roadways.
f) Intersections, Conflict Areas and Pedestrian Crossings

Lighting intersections, Conflict Areas and Pedestrian Crossings are of particular concern
and must be adequate for traffic and pedestrian security, as well as meeting
environmental objectives. If necessary, for traffic safety, pedestrian security, or
aesthetics, the lighting colour for pedestrian crossings could be varied to define the
various elements more clearly. It is mandatory to have the lighting installed as far as
possible away from the road edge whilst respecting the approved corridor as per UCDM.
g) Roundabouts
The arrangement and character of the lighting may be distinctive, and thus assist the
warning signs in providing reliable warning of the roundabout. The lighting should reveal
the form, direction and edges of the travel lane all the way around the roundabout
without adding unnecessary poles/infrastructure to the area when able to be coordinated
and combined with the adjacent roadway lighting by careful spacing and design. Special
emphasis should be given on the central and other traffic islands. Mini-roundabouts,
particularly those of the ghost island type, or those that have been located relatively
remote from approach road give way lines, can be difficult to see. Luminaires should,
where possible, be sited to reveal the island. It is mandatory to have the lighting installed
as far as possible away from the road edge whilst respecting the approved corridor as per
UCDM.
h) Parking
The Consultant shall note that all calculations for Off-Street parking lots/bays adjacent to
roads are undertaken in Lux, and must consider, any roadway lighting contribution into
the parking lighting design where applicable. On-Street parking, either parallel or angled,
must be considered as part of the roadway lighting design and lighting calculations in
illuminance undertaken to achieve the same overall road category illuminance. All
projects shall be undertaken, checked and approved as the responsibility of the
Consultant to meet the required parking levels set out in Table 4.3.1. It is mandatory to
have the lighting installed as far as possible away from the road edge whilst respecting
the approved corridor as per UCDM.
i) Lighting Poles
It is mandatory to have the lighting installed as far as possible away from the road edge
for reasons of safety. The lighting pole positions also require to be mitigated with UPC
USDM/UCDM/Road Safety Audit (TR-540) requirements. The maximum bracket arm
length shall 1.5m and maximum luminaire tilt angle 5-degrees from the horizontal unless
agreed otherwise for the project with the Department. NOTE: Roadway Lighting Poles
must never be installed within the paved pedestrian footpath corridor to obstruct the
clear-width requirements
j) Coordination with Planting

Where the lighting design requires median mounted or additional lighting
poles dedicated for cycle-tracks and footpaths, all planting, including
trees, shall be considered within the design to ensure that any obscuring
of light or casting of shadows are considered during the design process.
The Consultant must provide calculations which show the potential for
tree growth and future issues with the proposed lighting. Where lighting
poles are to be installed in areas where irrigation will be used, a clear area
must be provided around the lighting pole to prevent irrigation water
adversely affecting the lighting pole life through corrosion. The minimum
clear area around the pole will be 1000mm either side of the pole centre Figure 4.2.1
and will be hardscape or gravel. Refer to Figure 4.2.1.
k) Bridges & Elevated Roads - Bridges are generally considered to be part of the roadway
and, as such, do not require any special lighting. Therefore, roadway lighting on bridges
shall be warranted as part of the regular roadway lighting and the same lighting criteria
and pole arrangement shall be maintained.
An exception is a very long bridge, which may be lit in a different manner and/or in
different arrangement to the roads leading to and from the bridge. The lighting designer
should consider placing roadway lighting in advance of the bridge to allow the driver’s
eyes to transition into the brighter roadway on the bridge.
Elevated roads differ from bridges in that they are usually longer, they are often sinuous,
and they often have parallel roads alongside them at lower levels. They also often have
slip roads that join the two levels; they usually carry very heavy traffic and have little room
for maintenance. Elevated roads differ so much from each other that each requires
individual consideration. Maintenance can be very difficult since the closing of lanes for
maintenance vehicle might not be acceptable, and this can be a ruling factor in the lighting
design.
l) Lighting adjacent to Airfields/Airports, Railways, Harbours & Navigable Inland

Waterways
For these small numbers of cases, consultation should be carried out with the appropriate
authorities regarding any special provisions that might be necessary.
m) Fixture Family
The Consultant shall design all roadway/parking lighting projects with an aim to propose
no more than three different optimised LED luminaire types, ideally two whenever
possible. Only larger projects with multiple road types may justify more luminaire types
but must be justified to The Department for approval at Preliminary Design Stage or
earlier.
In cases where a single fixture can be proposed instead of a twin-fixture arrangement, or

a twin-fixture arrangement can be proposed instead of a triple-fixture arrangement, the
Consultant shall always select the option of least fixtures as, regardless of the overall load
being similar or the same, this is both more economic with regards project infrastructure
cost as well as ongoing operational expenditure. The Department will not accept
additional fixture quantities when it is possible to achieve the project requirements with
less.
n) Curved Roads
For curved roads, the Consultant shall initially undertake roadway lighting calculations for
straight road sections to the same cross-sectional dimensions and once the correct
luminance/design levels are achieved note the associated illuminance levels and apply an
arrangement to the curved layouts to achieve similar illuminance distribution using
DIALux’s Exterior calculation option with imported CAD dxf/dwg overlays of the project.
o) Cost Analysis
The Consultant shall, as requested by The Department, provide full cost analysis including
payback assessments as required for the project and in accordance with the instructions
given by The Department.
p) Design Procedure
All roadway lighting designs shall conform to the procedure detailed in Section 7 and in
the following order, as follows: -
• All Conflict Areas to be designed
• All Curved Roads to be designed
• The remaing roads in between conflict areas and curved roads to be designed
By following the design procedure all roads will be designed to the correct lighting levels
and fit for purpose.
Project Submission Requirement:- Ensure all the above criteria and recommedations for the
specific project are applied as applicable.
4.3. Schedule of Lighting Levels
Table 4.3.1 Schedule of Lighting Levels
Minimum Average Uniformity Longitudinal

Area/Roadway Type/ Lighting Design Level : Ratio Uniformity Emin/E Pole Heights, Spacing & Priority
TI*1 SR (EIR*9)
Class Luminance(L)=CD/m2 (Minimum to (Minimum to max Arrangements*2
Illumination (Em)=LUX Average) Maximum)
20m Pole Height

Highways/Freeways*3 1.0 CD/m2 ≥0.2 ≥0.5
Uo≥0.4 Ul ≥ 0.7 ≤10% 80-95m Spacing
(100Kph or higher) (Conflict Areas 30Lux) (≥0.35*9)
Median Arrangement*8
1.0 CD/m2 20m Pole Height
Major Arterials (80Kph)*3 ≥0.2 ≥0.5
(Conflict Areas & Uo≥0.4 Ul ≥ 0.7 ≤10% 80-95m Spacing
(≥0.35*9)
Crosswalks 30Lux) Median Arrangement*8
Arterials (60Kph)*3 ≥0.2 ≥0.5
(USDM: Boulevards) (≥0.35*9)
Crosswalks 30Lux) Median Arrangement*8
Secondary Arterial*3 ≥0.2 ≥0.5
(USDM: Avenues) (≥0.3*9)
Crosswalks 20 Lux) Median Arrangement*8
8-10 Lux 8-10m Pole Height
Sector Internal Roads *3 (USDM: ≥0.2
(Conflict Areas & Uo≥0.4 N/A ≤15% N/A 40-45m Spacing
Streets)
Crosswalks 15Lux) Single-Sided
5-7.5 Lux(Conflict 8-10m Pole Height
≥0.2
Access Lanes (USDM)*3 Areas & Crosswalks Uo≥0.4 N/A ≤15% N/A 40-45m Spacing
15Lux) Single-Sided
Traffic Conflict Areas To Match Road(s) ideally,

Per Road Type as ≥0.2 If appli-
(Ramps, Intersections, Uo≥0.4 N/A ≤15% otherwise lower (10, 14 & 20m
stated above cable
Roundabouts etc.) only) heights used
Match Road ≥0.2 Match To Match Road/Soffit-
Under Bridges*4 Uo≥0.4 Match road N/A
Luminance road mounted*4
Per Road Type as
Provided by Road Lighting
Cross Walks stated ≥0.2
Uo≥0.4 N/A N/A N/A (or by dedicated supplementary
(Pedestrian/Zebra Crossings etc.) Plus vertical matching
lighting if required*7)
Lux level*6
Car Parking 5/10/15 Lux: Low/ ≥0.2
Uo≥0.4 N/A N/A N/A 10m Pole Height
(Parking Lots/Off-Street Bays) Med/High Risk*5
Car Parking Match Road Surface’s ≥0.2 From Road Lighting/To Match
Uo≥0.4 N/A N/A N/A
(On-Street Parallel/Angular) equivalent Lux level Adjacent Road
3-5 Lux + 1.5-2 Lux ≥0.2
Cycle Lanes/Paths Uo≥0.25 N/A N/A N/A As Design Proposal
Vertical*6
3-5 Lux + 1.5-2 Lux ≥0.2
Sidewalks/Pedestrian Pathways Uo≥0.2 N/A N/A N/A As Design Proposal
Vertical*6
(N/A = Not Applicable)
Notes to Table 4.3.1
*1 A 5% increase in minimum Threshold Increment may be permitted with project justifications.
*2 All projects shall be designed with the priority arrangements, however alternative arrangements can be proposed
as long as there is a justification provided for a deviation based on a specific project constraint/reason: e.g. excessive
median width and/or number of lanes, planned/future LRT or Metro for median or with extensive public realm
elements distant to road edges. Maximum boom length shall be 1.5m and maximum tilt angle 5-degrees from the
horizontal unless agreed otherwise by The Department.
*3 All base levels in the calculation software (cdm2/Lux, Uo, Ul, TI, SR) must be manually adjusted to exactly match
those within the Lighting Manual Table 4.3.1 for all calculations to show correct pass/fail reports for project
submissions to The Department.
*4 Only for situations where the roadway lighting requirements are required for nighttime only and the distance
allowances of the bridge underside are not exceeded to designate them underpasses/tunnels. Refer to Part-1
Section-B for all tunnels and underpasses. In addition; if any fixtures are soffit-mounted types, the the fixture
technical criteria within Section-B shall be refered to in full.
*5 For Parking Lot/Bay risk-category assessment for a project, Consultant shall refer to Chapter-G, Clause 9.0 within
the Public Realm & Street Lighting Handbook.
*6 Vertical Lux calculations where required shall be checked and submitted using the DIALux Ev (Vertical Illuminance)
output report options for all directions (Ev-West, Ev-North, Ev-East & Ev-South) to prove the average table values are
achieved for all view directions.
*7 Provision of the appropriate cross walk LUX level should be designed to be naturally achieved from the road
lighting system/luminaires wherever possible, so no separate dedicated lighting is required. This could also be
achieved by the optimum siting of crossings within the street’s pole arrangement if needed as per the lighting
calculation LUX-distribution values. However, if dedicated supplementary lighting is needed to achieve the required
LUX level, then these must be integrated as part of the crossing system using their infrastructure where possible and
in these cases all supplementary fixtures must be LED be chosen with a contrasting CCT to the roadway lighting
fixtures and meet the same technical criteria as roadway lighting luminaires as set out within this Manual Section.
*8 All straight two-way roads from an Avenue class upwards that have a posted speed limit of 60kph or higher and
have a median less than 8m in width must consider the potential night-time disabling glare issue of oncoming vehicle
headlights. Any roads of such type cannot be proposed with medians devoid of all fencing or vertical objects
(barriers/planting etc.) which if present can physically block the headlights of traffic travelling in opposite directions
to one another refer to Clause 4.2 item e).
*9 The SR (Surround Ratio) system may be replaced in the future within DIALux with the improved EIR (Edge
Illuminance Ratio) system from EN-13201-2. Therefore, depending on the version of DIALux being used, both SR and
EIR values are shown in this table and must be used and met as applicable for the road category and system.
Project Submission Requirement:- Ensure complete compliance with the table and associated
notes for all lighting designs and lighting calculations undertaken for projects. Citing any
justifications for design decisions where described above within any project roadway lighting
reports and within the DiaLux lighting calculation output reports described with Clause 4.6.
4.4. Maintenance Factors
MF = LLD x LDD (Lamp Lumen Depreciation x Luminaire Dirt Depreciation)
Project Maintenance Factors for DESIGN lighting calculations shall never be assumed, nor default
values used in any lighting calculations submitted to The Department. All Maintenance Factors
shall be calculated and justified in accordance with the requirements of this Clause.
4.4.1. LLD (Lamp Lumen Depreciation)

The following method shall be used to determine the Lamp Lumen Depreciation component of
the Maintenance Factor used in the DIALux lighting design software calculation:
The Consultant shall demonstrate the 50,000hour lumen depreciation of the luminaire, at 100%
output, at an average night-time temperature (Tq) of 35°C (considers the annual average recorded
night-time temperature for Abu Dhabi Emirate plus safety allowance). The methodology to be
used is as follows:
a) The manufacturer shall submit a Thermal Report to a suitable reference & standard
agreed by The Department, showing the highest Ts (solder point temperature of an LED)
recorded within the luminaire, usually at the centre of the fitting and the centre of the
PCB or what would appear logically to be the hottest region of the optical
compartment. This thermal test will be conducted at 25°C ambient.
b) 10°C shall then be added to the hottest recorded Ts to simulate the required average night
time temperature of 35°C.
c) The LM-80 report from the chip manufacturer shall be provided showing the associated
Alpha and Beta (α and β) figures for each of the three Ts measurements namely, 55°C,
85°C and 105°C at the proposed driving current. The most appropriate higher Alpha and
Beta will be chosen for the Ts + 10°C. (Note: figures from “Energy Star” type calculations
can only be submitted as per TM-21 formula requirements as verification of the required
LM-80 report derived figures, never as an alternative to LM-80 or the TM-21 method).
Example; if a thermal test shows a Ts of 68°C measured at 25°C ambient at 500mA drive
current, then 10°C is added to give 78°C. In this case the most appropriate Alpha and Beta
figures would be the LM-80 data for a Ts of 85°C at 500mA. Any Ts measurements that
exceed 105°C (including the added 10°C for Tq 35°C) will not be permitted.
d) These Alphas and Betas will then be applied to the TM-21 formula which calculates the
expected lumen output at 50,000 hours.
The TM-21 equation to be used is: Lxx = β e^ (-αt) (with t = 50,000 hours)
e) This lumen output (percentage) figure (Lxx) shall then be used as the LLD component
(Lamp Lumen Depreciation) which forms part of the MF to be used in all DESIGN
calculations. The LLD must be ≥0.70 or the fixture will not be allowed for use on all
projects.
Project Submission Requirement:- As per the stated process, provide the following:
Thermal Test Report at 25°C detailing the highest Ts within the luminaire. LM-80 Report from chip
manufacturer with α & β for the proposed driving current. TM-21 Calculation as per the given
formula.
4.4.2. LDD (Luminaire Dirt Depreciation)

Table 4.4.2.1 shall be used to justify the appropriate Luminaire Dirt Depreciation (LDD) in
accordance with the external optical material of the specific fixture and the appropriate pollution
category for the specific project. The appropriate value shall be selected from the table and
inputted as the LDD component of the Maintenance Factor with selection explained within the
MF written justification.
*Unless specifically informed otherwise by The Department, or with another justifiable reason,
assume Cleaning Interval as 24-months.
Table 4.4.2.1 LDD (Luminaire Dirt Depreciation)

Fixture with Glass External Optic Fixture Without Glass External Optic
Project Pollution Category Project Pollution Category
Cleaning Interval High Medium Low High Medium Low
6 months 0.95 0.96 0.98 0.92 0.93 0.94
12 months 0.93 0.94 0.97 0.91 0.92 0.93
18 months 0.91 0.92 0.96 0.9 0.91 0.92
24 months* 0.90 0.91 0.95 0.88 0.89 0.91
36 months 0.89 0.91 0.95 0.83 0.87 0.90
Project Pollution Category:
High – Remote/desert areas, major city centres, heavy industrial areas
Medium– High density residential, light commercial/industrial, coastal areas
Low- low-density city residential, Park/island areas
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide a written report of the calculated Maintenance Factor
(for every different luminaire proposed) as per the above instructions for the LLD and LDD
components and ensure these Maintenance Factors are used in all DESIGN lighting calculations in
which the particular LED luminaire is proposed.
4.5. DESIGN & DAY-1 Calculation Outputs
DESIGN – Defined as the Lighting Design Calculation; assuming 50,000 hours of luminaire
operation at 35oC average ambient temperature (Takes into account the annual average recorded
night time temperature for Abu Dhabi Emirate plus safety allowance). DiaLux calculations shall
use the derived MF value(s) as calculated under the requirements set out in Clause 4.4 and with
these MFs used designs shall achieve the Minimum Average Design Levels, Uniformities and other
applicable parameters set out within Table 4.3.1.
DAY 1 – Defined as the initial luminance/illuminance values. DIALux calculations shall use an MF
of 1.0 in all calculations. These calculations are useful to ascertain the expected measurable light
levels on site during the project commissioning period. It should be noted that this is not
considered a design calculation for the project but required for information for The Department
as described under Clause 5.
4.6. Project Lighting Design Calculations
The Consultant shall undertake all necessary lighting calculations for the project based on the
specific requirements set out within Section-A Clause 4.
All lighting calculations shall be undertaken using DIALux or DIALux Evo lighting design software,
using the Street Scene and Exterior Scene calculation sections, or both, as appropriate. DIALux
and DIALux Evo are certified Freeware and can be obtained from www.dial.de.
Note: DIALux Evo is especially useful in representing whole areas made up of adjacent streets,
intersections, parking areas etc.
DIALux lighting calculations (at 100% luminaire output) for a project shall be issued within a single
DIALux-generated report format and the Consultant shall comply with the following
requirements:
• All Company Details and Project Set-Up information shall be entered in full.
• Designer’s details and contact information shall be entered in full.
• Project Notes section to be filled in for all justifications/notes required.
• Each separate roadway/parking/conflict area calculation to be titled logically for the
project and cross-referenced to project drawings/reports specifically.
• For roadway calculations the CIE/EN Standards option within the software shall always
be selected
• Table 4.3.1 and associated notes shall form the basis of all calculations with base variables
(cdm2/Lux, Uo, Ul, TI & SR/EIR) manually adapted from defaults using the “Insert
Optimised Luminaire Arrangement” function from the DIALux menu as necessary to
exactly match Table 4.3.1
• Clause 4.5 calculated Maintenance Factors only shall form the basis of all entered MF
values used and replace any DIALux default values.
• All roadway element cross-sectional dimensions shall be inputted exactly as per the
project.
• Pole offsets shall exactly match those for the project.
• Maximum tilt angle allowed for street fixtures shall be 5-degrees.
• Maximum bracket arm length allowed for roadway fixtures shall be 1.5m unless specific
project justifications are given for longer overhang requirements.
• Asphalt Roadway-Coating type to always remain as the DIALux default: R3 (q0 0.07) and
is not to be changed to any other value.
• Uniformity Coating on Wet Roadways is irrelevant to lighting calculation results and
therefore can be ignored and left as software default values.
• Both DAY-1 and DESIGN calculations shall be undertaken for every calculation and
suitably labelled in the report. Refer to Clause 4.5 for details of requirements and reasons.
• Project Output Report for submissions shall always include the following selected
minimum options as and where applicable (These are DIALux standard Output Report
Options to be selected before generating the report):
Project
• Project Cover
• Table of Contents
• Luminaire Parts List (overall project)
• Luminaire Data Sheet(s)
Per Street Calculation for roadways/sidewalks/bicycle lanes (DESIGN)
• Planning Data
• Luminaire Parts List
• Photometric Results
• 3D Rendering
• False Colour Rendering
• Valuation Fields: Isolines (L)*1
• Valuation Fields: Value Chart (L) *1
• Valuation Fields: Isolines (E)
• Valuation Fields: Value Chart (E)
• Valuation Fields: Isolines (Ev West) *2
• Valuation Fields: Isolines (Ev North) *2
• Valuation Fields: Isolines (Ev East) *2
• Valuation Fields: Isolines (Ev South) *2
Per Street Calculation for roadways/sidewalks/bicycle lanes (DAY-1)
• Valuation Fields/Observer1/Observer2 etc.: Isolines (L) *1
• Valuation Fields/Observer1/Observer2 etc.: Value Chart (L) *1
Per Parking Lot/Conflict Area Calculation (DESIGN)
• Planning Data
• 3D Rendering
Per Parking Lot/Conflict Area Calculation (DAY-1)
*1 Required only for roadways.
*2 Required only for sidewalks and cycle lanes and areas covering a designated crosswalk.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide the DIAlux Lighting Calculation Output Report fully in
adhereance to the above requirements in PDF format. In addition, provide the source .DLX file
(DIALux file) alongside the PDF Report in all submissions to The Department.
5. Project Site Verification Requirements
5.1. Site Lighting Measurement
The Contractor shall conduct a Field Performance test of the lighting installation(s) immediately
after ADDC/AADC grid-energisation of the system, in the presence of a qualified project
Consultant representaive. For ALL projects to be handed over to the Department, a representative
from The Department must be invited to the Field Performance Test. The location of the test site
and the date of the test must be agreed with the Department’s Representative a minimum of
one week prior to the test being carried out. Site lightng verification shall be carried out as per
Section 8 with all results being recorded as pert the Pro-forma examples provided.
The test results shall meet the lighting design requirements identified in Clause 4 of this Section
and match the Approved DAY-1 lighting calculation output report values submitted. As all
roadway lighting projects will be connected to the Department’s PLMS/CMS network, the Field
Performance Test shall include the review of the PLMS/CMS at this time. The review will include,
as a minimum, switching on/off, information gathering from the luminaires, dimming to the
required levels, etc. (refer to part 1 Section D). Lighting levels will be measured at 100%
illuminance and as per agreed dimming levels.
Refer to the Public Realm & Street Lighting Handbook for guidance on Lighting Maintenance and
Lighting Performance Verification. Handbook Chapters L, and M.
Site measurements shall be undertaken to CIE 140 or BS EN 13201-4.
The Department will take appropriate actions if the specified project lighting levels are not
achieved/exceeded and the Contractor will have to undertake remedial action to address the
problems at his cost and without delay to the Contract.
Warning: Under no circumstances shall any LED luminaires be directly connected to a temporary
generator for field testing, nor should they be energised via a temporary generator if the
generator does not meet the requirements set out in Part 1, Section I, Clause 10.4 and without
seeking fixture manufacturer approval, as the output from many generators on start-up can
permanently damage the luminaire components and thus render the fixture warranties void.
Temporary generator energisation can only be undertaken with prior and written confirmation
obtained from the fixture manufacturer stating they approve that their fixtures can be
energised by this means with details of the specific generator used and method statement for
connection and energisation.
The Contractor is fully responsible for all electrical connections to the LED fixtures and if damage
is caused to fixtures due to ignoring this warning will have to undertake remedial action to
replace any affected luminaires at their cost and without delay to the Contract.
Testing shall be undertaken in accordance with the following:
Preparation:
• For roadways, both luminance and illuminance measurements shall be taken as
illuminance is a purer comparison against the design and can be used as mitigation if the
luminance results vary considerably due the roadway surface variation (against the
mathematical R3 standard reflectance-factor as used in calcs) or other mitigating site
factors
• For residential roads, access lanes, parking lots/bays, conflict areas, cycle lanes/paths and
pedestrian paths, only illuminance measurements are required.
• The DAY-1 project lighting calculation’s measurement grids shall be used as the basis for
the site measurement grids
• The geometry of the site’s lighting installation: mounting height of luminaires, positioning
of the poles and tilting angle of the luminaires.
• For roadways, the positioning longitudinally along the road and transversally to the road
edge, tilting angle of the luminaires, width of carriageway and sidewalks shall be checked
carefully.
• In case of significant difference of one or several installation parameters with the lighting
design, the results of measurement must be compared to a new calculation taking in
account the actual geometry of the lighting installation. For instance, if the project lighting
calculations cover the ‘worse-case’ (widest) spacing for a project, site measurements
should primarily aim to be undertaken on a road with these worse-case spacing. If this is
not possible and road with closer pole spacing is proposed, then adjusted DAY-1 Lighting
calculations must be prepared for the actual test-site spacing.
• The test installation for roads shall comprise a minimum of 6 poles equipped with
energised luminaires for a single side or twin central lighting installation. In case of
opposite or staggered installation, 3 poles at each side of the road are generally needed.
• The optical unit of the luminaires must be clean externally. The luminaire adjustment shall
be checked and must correspond to the luminaire adjustment used for the lighting design.
• Because field photometry involves significantly higher variability than laboratory
measurements, it is necessary to record and report the following factors which may
influence the site measured results:
o Supply voltage
o Lamp wattage
o Ambient Air Temperature
o Mounting height
o Overhang
o Tilt
o Pavement conditions
o Weather conditions
• Since lamp luminous flux is affected by electrical circuit operating conditions, voltage,
current and wattage should be measured at the pole cut-outs after the cut-out MCB.
Thereby, whether the fixtures operate in line with rated circuit conditions can be
determined.
• It is mandatory that supply voltages to the circuits are taken at the control cabinet and
recorded as part of the Field Performance Test.
• The atmosphere should be clear and extraneous light should be at a minimum when tests
are performed. Otherwise, the results of lighting measurement can be affected.
• Wet road surfaces can also lead to reflections that can cause considerable errors with
luminance measurements, so tests should not be conducted if the roadways surface is
wet.
• The road/ground surface must be clean and without irregularities in the area of the
lighting measurements.
• The personnel in charge of conducting the test should avoid casting shadows on the
measuring instrument detector. It is recommended that the personnel avoid wearing light
coloured clothing in order to not supplement the readings on the detector by reflected
light. If Hi-Vis vests are being worn on site, anyone tasked with operating meter
equipment should be allowed to remove them for the duration of measurements.
Photometric Test Equipment:

• Luminance and Lux Meters (Photometers) must be calibrated with available certification
provided to cover the date of the test. iOs/Android/Windows mobile device ‘Light Meter
Apps’ should never be used and are not permissible for any readings sent to The
Department!
• It is recommended that measuring instruments with self- luminous readouts be used since
it may be difficult to read analogue instruments and LCDs under low Illuminance and
torches must never be used to do so.
• Photometers capable of performing horizontal Illuminance measurements should be
used for Illuminance measurements of road surfaces and other horizontal measurement
requirements.
• Photometers capable of performing vertical Illuminance measurements should be used
for any vertical Illuminance measurement requirements.
• Commercially available Photometers that can be positioned without being shadowed by
the user and that can be shaded from extraneous light are preferred. Such Photometers
can measure illumination within ±5% error typically.
• Colour-correction of the Photometer should be made in accordance with the CIE Spectral
Luminous Efficacy Curve
• If a temperature-sensitive Photometer is used, temperature- correction should be made
appropriately.
• For local luminance measurements, the luminance meter should not have a field of view
greater than two minutes of arc; otherwise, differences may not be detected to accurately
determine uniformity.
Material check list
• Luminance meter with valid calibration certificate
• Tripod for luminance meter, with precision aiming capabilities.
• Screw to fix the luminance meter on the tripod (should be part of the luminance meter
material)
• Lux meter with valid calibration certificate
• Horizontal balancing device for the Lux meter sensor
• Holding device for vertical illuminance measurement (a long rod)
• White chalk or white spray paint cans
• Flexible meter (50m - 100m)
• Luminous target (for aiming the luminance meter in low lighting conditions)
• Compact pocket lamp
• Laser telemeter (if not available on site)
• Suitable voltmeter (if not available on site)
• Calculator
• Detailed measuring procedure
• Documents prepared for writing the results (tables) and pens.
• Digital camera
• USB key
• CIE 140 or BS EN 13201-4 publications - Road lighting Measurements
• Approved Drawings showing the way to proceed: positioning of the measurement points
in a representative zone and observer’s positions.
• Project DAY-1 lighting calculation reports
Information to collect before measurement exercise.

• How long have the LEDs already been working.
• Date of the last maintenance. (How long has the installation been in service.)
Information to collect before each measurement.

• Supply voltage (to be measured as close as possible to the row of luminaires, before and
after the lighting measurement)
• Check the luminaires spacing and their transversal position.
• Check the position of the lines marking the carriageway.
• Check the mounting height.
• Visually check the luminaires positions and orientations
Measurement:
• The area considered for the Illuminance and the luminance measurements for roadways
has to cover a portion of road which is reproducible in term of lighting results, it means
one complete spacing of poles. This area is situated between the 3rd and 4th poles in the
case of any non-staggered, 3rd and 5th poles in case of staggered. The field of calculation
should be typical of the area of the road which is of interest to the driver:
o In the longitudinal direction on a straight road, the field of calculation should lie
between two luminaires in the same row (see Figure 5.1a), the first luminaire
being located 60m ahead of the observer (for luminance measurements)
o In the transverse direction, it should cover the whole carriageway width on roads
without a central reservation, and the width of one carriageway on roads with a
central reservation.
o This grid of measurement points should correspond to the grid of calculation from
the DAY-1 Lighting Report and consequently to the specifications given by CIE
140.
Figure 5.1a Luminance Measurement Parameters
• The illuminance shall be measured at Ground Level in each point of the grid defined as
here above. The average illuminance level and the uniformity ratios are found by
calculation.
• The luminance shall then be measured at the same points as the illuminance. To proceed
to these luminance measurements, the luminance meter shall be localized (as per the
observer position CIE 140) not only 60m away from the first pole with the grid at a height
of 1.5m. From the results of these point-by-point measurements, the calculation of the
average level of luminance and the overall uniformity of luminance (Uo ratio Lmin/Lav)
shall be undertaken)
• The longitudinal uniformities of luminance (Ul) in the axis of each lane shall be checked
after measurements of all points along the axis of each lane. The luminance meter shall
be localized successively along the axis of each lane, 60m before the first point of
measurement (for Luminance measurements), and at a height of 1.5m. The longitudinal
uniformity of luminance will be the ratio between the minimum and the maximum
punctual measurement on each axis.
• A site measurement record sheet (pro-forma provided by the Department’s
Representative) and report shall be drawn up for the project to set out all the data
measurements decribed above as per CIE 140 and to record the following information:
o Project name
o Location of the roadway/area
o Date and time of the measurement
o Detailed information about the lighting equipment and installation
o Detailed information about the test equipment, calibrate certification and meter
tolerances
o Mounting height, luminaire spacing and arrangement and special conditions such
as extraneous light sources
o Electrical operating conditions
o Condition of luminaires and other equipment
o Air Temperature
o Tabulated test data shown on custom drawn table/grid set up for the project to
show illuminance and/or luminance readings as set out above
o Special measurements if recorded
o Ratio of maximum and minimum-to-average Illuminance and luminance
o Ratio of maximum-to-minimum Illuminance and luminance along longitudinal
roadway lines for each roadway lane
o Position of instrument detector and light source
o Names of test personnel
o Witnessed by: Names, Companies, Signatures
o Copy of the DAY-1 lighting calculations
o Copy of the DAY-1 Dimming system set-level calculations if applicable
o Site Photographs of the testing exercise
o Assessement of site measurements against project lighting calculations and
confirmation of Pass or Fail of the installation
o Additional remarks (if any )
Project Submission Requirement:- Undertake site verification tests fully in accordance with the
requirements of Clause 5.1 and provide report of all data to The Department as required. The
primary goal is to prove beyond doubt that the site installation meets/exceeds the minimum
required design requirements for the project.
5.2. Interim (Non-Day-1) Measurement
If the test purpose is to check the performance of the roadway lighting installation after
depreciation in service, the existing conditions of the luminaires should be recorded.
The period of hours-of-operation shall be calculated and stated and the MF (for clean luminaires)
after the stated period in the environmental conditions of the installation should be calculated
and stated together with the luminous flux in lumens of the light source or sources in the
luminaire after the stated period/MF applied.
With clean fixtures Clause 5.1 shall be followed as before in full with the recorded values assessed
against adjusted lighting calculations with the adjusted MF applied in place of the 1.0 value used
in DAY-1 calculations
requirements of Clauses 5.1 and 5.2 and provide report of all data to The Department as required.
5.3. Project Harmonic Measurement
The Contractor shall measure the harmonic at the supply point (LV side of the distribution
substation, after obtaining permission from AADC/ADDC) after the installation of all the LED
fixtures and adopt harmonic compensation methods, if required, to limit the total harmonics
distortion in the supply voltage.
The maximum allowed total harmonics distortion is to be taken as 5% (or as per latest Electricity
Authority latest requirements if different) and in accordance with IEEE 519 Regulations.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide test report of the project installation and proof of
harmonic distortion limit compliance.
Part-1 Section-A
Lighting Design Guide
Part-1 Section A – Lighting Design Guidance

This Section is a guidance on how to carry out the lighting design to meet the requirements of this
manual and to provide a suitable and fit for purpose lighting design. The detailed technical criteria
for which are described in the Clauses following:
6.1. Required/Permitted under Lighting Design Guidance
a) The use of DIALux/ DIALux Evo lighting design software for the calculation of roadway
lighting
b) The use of DIALux Evo or AGi 32 for the calculation of conflict area lighting.
c) Other lighting design software may be used at the discretion of the Department.
d) All conflict areas will be calculated for illuminance and will be measured in Lux.
6.2. Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-A- Lighting Design Guidance
a) Any manufacturer design software for lighting calculation
7. Design Steps
As per Section 4.2 (p), all lighting designs should be carried out in a systematic way to ensure that
the final design covers all areas as per the requirements of this manual and to meet the
Department’s Duty of Care for the safety of the vehicular and pedestrian users of the roads. The
following design steps and guidance will allow a greater understanding of how a lighting design
should be prepared. All lighting designs must also follow the requirements of the-
• Requirements of the Utility Corridor Design Manual (UCDM)

• Requirements for Road Safety Audit (RSA) TR 540
7.1. Breakdown of Lighting Design Parts
Lighting Design can be broken down into two parts: -
• Road
• Conflict Areas
The following sections will explain the requirements in detail of both parts.
7.1.1. Roadway Lighting
The design for the roadway lighting will be carried out in DIALux or DIALux Evo only. The
calculation shall consider all aspects of the roadway from the cross section-
• Travel Lanes- Number/Width

• Width of travel Lanes
• Median
• On Street Parking – Location/Width/Orientation
• Edge Strip
• Footpath
• Cycle Lane
All lighting levels, pole heights, pole design spacing (min/max), outreach bracket length and LED
luminaires shall be as per the Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual. Lighting pole setback shall be as per the
Approved lighting corridor with the lighting pole position at the rear (farthest away from the travel
lane) of the corridor. Figure 7.1.1.1 shows a Typical report output from DIALux.
Figure 7.1.1.1
7.1.1.1. Lighting Design for curved Roads

When carrying out the lighting design for the roadway, special consideration must be given to
roads that are curved. The lighting output from luminaires is “linear” and does not bend around
the curves and as such dark areas will be left in the road. To ensure that this situation will not
occur it is common practice to reduce the roadway design spacing by 10-15%. Where the road
curve is tighter, the calculation of that area should be carried out as a conflict area and in
illuminance with the lighting level equivalent to the luminance requirement. Section 7.1.2
describes the method for carrying out the conflict area calculation.
7.1.1.2. Roadway Lighting Calculation Sheets

As per Table 4.3.1 Note 3, All reference to BS/EN standards shall be removed from the final
report and all lighting levels to be achieved shall be amended in DIALux to show the actual
required levels from the Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual Table 4.3.1. prior to submission to the
Department. Figures 7.1.1.1.1 & 7.1.1.1.2 show unacceptable and acceptable submissions
Figure 7.1.1.1.1- Unacceptable Submission
Figure 7.1.1.1.2- Acceptable Submission
7.1.2. Conflict Areas
Conflict areas are where “vehicular and pedestrian traffic comes into contact more often”.
These areas are normally-
• Roundabouts
• Junctions
• Pedestrian Crossing Points- controlled and uncontrolled
It is vital that these places are illuminated correctly to ensure that all traffic in the area can clearly
see each other. Conflict areas must consider the approaches to the conflict area as well as the
conflict area.
Design Steps for Conflict Areas- Roundabouts and Junctions

Step Description Figure
No.
1 Carry out preliminary roadway calculation to determine the roadway lighting pole
height, spacing and luminaire wattage. Where possible, the same pole height and
luminaire wattage should be used in the conflict area calculation. Where the lighting
calculation requires excessive lighting poles/luminaires the pole height and wattage
may be changed after discussion with the Department.
2 Determine lighting
level for conflict area
from Table 4.3.1. All
lighting levels must
consider the highest
lighting class for the
Major Road.
3 Import the conflict area

from CAD into the
lighting design
software
4 Determine the extents
for the conflict area
lighting-use the inter-
pole spacing (A)
calculated in step 1 as a
guide to the extents.
Note- for areas with
splitter islands use the
edge of the splitter
island as the starting
point. Where no
splitter island is present
use the nearest kerb
edge. The extents will
form a square around
the conflict area.
5 Mask out any areas
NOT part of the road
travel surface. This
ensures that the
lighting levels
calculated are for the
areas of the road that
are used by the
vehicular and
pedestrian traffic.
6 Insert lighting pole
positions around the
roundabout and at the
entrances/exits for the
conflict area. Note -
remember to add the
nearest lighting poles
outside of the grid area
(B) on all roads, to
ensure that their
contribution is
considered in the
lighting calculation.
7 Align the lighting poles until the required lighting levels are achieved.
Note- DO NOT change the software default grid spacing as this will NOT provide
accurate results.
Design Steps for Conflict Areas- Pedestrian Crossings

Step Description Figure
No.
1 Carry out preliminary roadway calculation to determine the roadway lighting pole
height, spacing and Luminaire wattage.
2 Determine lighting level for conflict area from Table 4.3.1.
3 Import the conflict
area from CAD into
the lighting design
software
4 Mask out any areas
NOT part of the
pedestrian crossing
This ensures that the
lighting levels
calculated are for the
areas of the road that
are used by the
vehicular and
pedestrian traffic.
5 Insert the lighting pole as per the roadway calculation position. Note – NO lighting
pole shall be positioned where it will block the pedestrians from entering or exiting
the pedestrian crossing.
Adjust the pole position to achieve the required lighting levels.
Note – where the pedestrian crossing forms part of a larger conflict area, there is
no requirement to carry out a separate calculation.
7.1.3. Final Design
Having considered the design for the roadway (including footpaths and cycle-tracks) and the
conflict areas, the designer will prepare the final design by –
• Calculating the lighting design- pole height, bracket length, luminaire wattage, spacing
between poles & location of poles
• Plotting the conflict area lighting pole positions
• Plot the pole positions in the roadway sections between conflict areas.
Where the lighting poles in the roadway are close to the poles in the conflict area, the conflict
area will be calculated again to minimise the number of poles in the roadway and to maximise the
spacing. It is clearly understood that due to geometric road design (road length, entrances/exits
for buildings, etc.) that not all maximum design spacing between lighting poles will be able to be
achieved. Figure 7.1.3.1 shows the areas that makes up a Typical Final Design Layout.
Figure 7.1.3.1- Typical Final Design Layout
Part-1 Section A – Lighting Measurement Guidance

This Section is a guidance on how to carry out the lighting measurements to meet the
requirements of this manual and to provide an accurate measurement to be provide a comparison
between the theoretical (calculated) lighting levels from the lighting design and the on-site
measurement. The detailed technical criteria for which are described in the Clauses following:
8.1. Required/Permitted under Lighting Measurement Guidance
a) The use of calibrated measurement equipment

b) The use of CIE 140 as a measurement standard
c) Day 1 measurements and periodic measurements in line with the Contract
Requirements
d) All conflict areas will be calculated for illuminance and will be measured in Lux.
e) Irregular shapes to be as per CIE 140 guidance.
f) Confirmation that the installed lighting is as per the approved lighting design
calculation.
8.2. Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-A- Lighting Design Guidance
a) Any light measuring device on a smart phone or tablet.
9. Lighting Level Verification

It is important to measure and verify the lighting levels after installation to ensure that the
approved lighting design has been followed or where changes have been made, that these have
been fully captured in the submission. It is important that the Day 1 lighting measurements are
taken as soon as possible after energisation of the lighting network to provide the verification that
the lighting levels meet those required in this manual. It is also important that periodic lighting
measurements are carried out to ensure that the luminaire is following the predicted lighting
output and that the performance is adequate.
This guidance on how to carry out the lighting measurements and verification will be used on all
projects as the basis to provide the evidence to the Department that the lighting levels are as the
approved design.
9.1. Identification of the Measurements to be Used.
Lighting measurement falls into three areas-
• Luminance- roads where the reflection of the light from the road surface is required and
is measured in cd/m2.
• Illuminance- roads where the light falls onto the road surface and is measured in Lux.
• Conflict Areas and Irregular Shaped Areas- areas where vehicular and pedestrian traffic
comes together and is measured in Lux.
Flowchart 9.1.1 details which sections of this guide will be required depending on the lighting
measurement required.
Flowchart 9.1.1- Lighting Measurement by Type
9.2. Luminance Measurements
Luminance measurements are carried out on Avenues, Boulevards and Highways and are carried
out across all of the driving lanes and Emergency lanes, where installed. The methodology to
determine the number of longitudinal measurement points is shown in Flowchart 9.2.1 and
refers to Figure 9.2.1.
Flowchart 9.2.1- Methodology to Determine the Number of Longitudinal Lighting Measurement

Points
Figure 9.2.1- Luminance Measurement Grid Layout
S- Spacing between Lighting Poles (m)

N- Number of Lighting Measurement Points- Refer to Flowchart 9.2.1
D- Distance Between Measurement Points- Longitudinal
d- Distance Between Measurement Points- Transverse
WL- Lane Width (m)
Figure 9.2.2 provides the position of the observer (person taking the measurement) in relation
to the field of calculation. The observer position will always be in the centre of the travel lane.
The same concept of observer position can be used on roads with 2, 4, 5, 6, etc. driving lanes.
Figure 9.2.2- Examples of Observer Position for 3 Lane Roads
9.2.1. Number of Luminaires included in the Measurement.
As per Section 5, the number of lighting poles included in the measurement will be six (6) with
the field of measurement located between the 3rd and 4th lighting pole for single sided or
median mounted lighting arrangements.
Note- Staggered arrangements are uncommon in Abu Dhabi but are dealt with in Section 5.
9.2.2. Step by Step Methodology for Luminance Measurements

Step No. Description Photo
1 Road to be Cleaned of sand/debris prior to lighting measurements. Road to be Dry. All
external sources of light to be switched off where possible. All requirements of
Section 5 to be carried out and recorded on the Measurement Pro-forma. A copy of
the approved lighting calculation is to be provided to the Department’s Engineer on
site.
2 Measurement points to be calculated as per Flowchart 9.2.1
3 Using measuring tape mark out the measurement points as per Figure 9.2.1
4 Position Luminance meter on tripod 60m from the centre of the first pole at 1.5m
above the road surface and in the centre of the lane as per Figure 9.2.2
5 Using marker board/pole, focus luminance meter on first measurement point.
Note- the person using the marker board/pole should NOT wear Hi-Vis vest or light-
coloured clothing as this will reflect the light and will give false readings. Once the
person using the luminance meter has focused on the measuring point the marker
board/pole must be moved away from the measuring point to ensure that there are
no false readings through reflection.
6 Luminance meter is focused on the measurement point and the reading is taken
7 Luminance measurement is recorded on the measurement pro-forma- refer to
Section 9.2.4 & Part 1 Section J
8 Repeat steps 5 to 7 until all measurement points are covered in the driving lane
9 Illuminance measurements to be taken at the marked measuring points and recorded
on separate illuminance pro-forma- refer to Section 9.2.4 & Part 1 Section J
10 Repeat steps 3 to 9 on all driving lanes and emergency lane, if applicable, until the
entire measurement area has been covered and all measurements recorded.
Pro-forma to be signed by the Department Engineer/Contractor/Consultant as a true
record of the measurements and information provided.
9.2.3. Interpretation of Luminance Measurement Data
Once all measurements have been taken, the data requires to be interpreted to calculate the
required information to be presented to the Department. The following methodology will be
used-
1. Average Luminance (Lav)- from the Luminance Pro-forma. Add all measured values across all
measured lanes and then divide by the number of measured points.
2. Overall Uniformity (Uo)- from the Luminance Pro-forma. Take the lowest measurement
found across all measured lanes and divide by the calculated Average Luminance from Step
1. (Uo = Lmin/Lav)
3. Longitudinal Uniformity (Ul)- from the Luminance Pro-forma. Take the lowest measured
value along the centreline of the driving lane and divide by the highest measured value
along the same centreline. The observer’s position is always in line with this measurement
as per Figure 9.2.2. This is repeated for each lane. (Ul = Lmin/Lmax)
4. Interpretation of the Illuminance measurements- refer to Section 9.3.
All measurements and final calculations will be cross checked with the Approved Calculated
Lighting Levels submitted as part of the Design process. Where there are significant differences
in the outcomes (theoretical and measured) the contractor will provide an explanation to the
Department prior to any acceptance of the project.
9.2.4. Luminance Measurement Pro-Forma
9.3. Illuminance Measurements- Residential Roads, Frontage and Access
Illuminance measurements are carried out on Residential Street, Frontage Lanes/Access Roads,
Parking Areas and Conflict Areas and are carried out across all of the driving lanes, footpaths
and cycle tracks, where installed. The methodology to determine the number of measurement
points is shown in Flowchart 9.2.1 and refers to Figure 9.3.1.
Figure 9.3.1- Illuminance Measurement Grid Layout
S- Spacing between Lighting Poles (m)

N- Number of Lighting Measurement Points- Refer to Flowchart 9.2.1
D- Distance Between Measurement Points- Longitudinal
d- Distance Between Measurement Points- Transverse
Wr- Width of Relevant Area under Measurement (m)
The measurements are taken using an illuminance meter placed on the road/footpath/cycle track
at the measurement points as per Figure 9.3.1.
9.3.1. Step by Step Methodology for Illuminance Measurements
Step No. Description Photo

1 No requirement for the area to be Cleaned of sand/debris prior to lighting
measurements as this is an illuminance measurement with the measurement of the
light falling onto the surface. This measurement can be carried out even when the
area surface is wet. All external sources of light to be switched off where possible. All
requirements of Section 5 to be carried out and recorded on the Measurement Pro-
forma. A copy of the approved lighting calculation is to be provided to the
Department’s Engineer on site.
2 Measurement points to be calculated as per Flowchart 9.2.1
3 Using measuring tape mark out the measurement
points as per Figure 9.3.1
4 Place the Illuminance meter sensor on the ground at
the first point on the measurement grid. Take the
reading.
Note- the person taking the reading must ensure
that their shadow does not cover the illuminance
sensor as this will give false readings. It is also
required to remove the Hi-Vis vest as this may also
give false readings.
5 Record the illuminance meter reading on the
Illuminance Pro-forma in the correct measurement
location.
6 Carry out Steps 4 and 5 until all measuring points
have been completed and recorded on the Pro-
forma- refer to Section 9.3.3 & Part 1 Section J Pro-
forma to be signed by the Department
Engineer/Contractor/Consultant as a true record of
the measurements and information provided.
9.3.2. Interpretation of Illuminance Measurement Data
Once all measurements have been taken, the data requires to be interpreted to calculate the
required information to be presented to the Department. The following methodology will be
used-
1. Average Illuminance (Eav)- from the Illuminance Pro-forma. Add all measured values across
the relevant area and then divide by the number of measured points.
2. Overall Uniformity (Uo)- from the Luminance Pro-forma. Take the lowest measurement
found across all measured points and divide by the calculated Average Luminance from Step
1.
As per the Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual, there is no requirement to measure the Longitudinal
Uniformity as this is a measurement of the change in lighting level when moving from lane to
lane (overtaking) with traffic all moving in the same direction. The areas where illuminance is
used as a design requirement will be low speed and normally single driving lane in one direction.
All measurements and final calculations will be cross checked with the Approved Calculated
Lighting Levels submitted as part of the Design process. Where there are significant differences
in the outcomes (theoretical and measured) the contractor will provide an explanation to the
Department prior to any acceptance of the project.
9.3.3. Illuminance Measurement Pro-Forma
9.4. Illuminance Measurements- Conflict Area and Irregular Shaped Areas
Where measurement is required for Conflict or Irregular Shaped Areas the measurement points
should cover the relevant area under measurement with the spacing of the measurement points
no greater than 5m and where the area requires special consideration a grid spacing of 1m shall
be used. The grid area must cover all of the luminaires used in the calculation and
measurements taken in areas as detailed in the calculation. The grid must form a square of
equal length and width.
The measurement methods used in Section 9.3 can be applied for the luminance meter and a
grid will be required to record the measured lightng levels.
Figures 9.4.1 to 9.4.2 show the steps in producing the grid and the measurements to be taken.
This requires more detail in the marking out process as the shapes are irregular or cover a
significantly larger ares than a standard road. All measurements will be recorded on the
Illuminance Area Pro-forma.
Figure 9.4.1- Grid Area Under Measurement (Taken from AutoCAD)
Area under measurement to be the same

as the area used in the lightng calculation
and will include all luminaires used in the
design calculation.
Figure 9.4.2- Grid Area Under Measurement with Masking
Areas not pertinent to measurement are

masked off- in this example only the
carriageway at the junction will have
lighting measurements taken.
Figure 9.4.3- Grid Area Under Measurement with Overlaid Measuring Grid and Points
Areas not pertinent to measurement are

masked off- in this example only the
carriageway at the junction will have
lighting measurements taken.
To calculate the requirements follow Section 9.3.1.
9.4.1. Illuminance Area Measurement Pro-Forma

Part-1 Section-B – Lighting for Tunnels & Underpasses
Part-1 Section B –
Lighting for Tunnels & Underpasses
A tunnel/Underpass is a covered section of a road which a driver must negotiate safely. The
provision of night-time and/or daytime lighting depends on certain parameters which will be
discussed in this section.
Tunnels and underpasses can be broken down into two distinct types, those that are long tunnels
that require artificial lighting both during the day and at night and shorter tunnels that require
lighting only during the night. Each type of tunnel requires a control system of varying complexity.
This Section will describe in detail the methodology for the provision of lighting within the tunnel
and for the control system to be utilised.
Section-B, refer to the Part-1 Applicable Standards & Guidance References Section.
This Section is a brief summary of the primary factors covered within this Part-1 Section-B of the
1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-B
Introduction).
b) LED Luminaire Useful-Life Performance basis to be taken at temperature of 500C
ambient.
c) Maintenance Factor (MF) calculations must be supplied with every submission.
d) Luminaire Dirt Depreciation Factor (LDD) component of the Maintenance Factor are
detailed in Part 1 Section B, Clause 4.3.
e) Warranty for all luminaires is a minimum 10-Years for all aspects.
f) Table of Lighting Design categories has additional requirement of Emin/Emax.
g) It is mandatory that all tunnel systems must include a control system for the lighting
network.
h) All tunnel control systems shall utilise power-line or separate control cables but it is
mandatory that there are redundancies built in to remove the risk of no
communication to the luminaires if one cable is disconnected or damaged.
i) A cost analysis of the control system must be carried out and must incorporate all
safety aspects for cable and equipment as per relevant Authorities requirements.
j) The technical proposal must indicate all redundancy in the system to ensure that the
tunnel lighting will operate safely.
k) All lighting design shall be carried out by utilising tunnel lighting design software
suited for the specific tasks. Manufacturer’s proprietary software is not allowed.
Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual – Version 3.0: July 2021 Page | 59

l) All tunnel lighting systems must have emergency lighting in case of loss of grid power.
1.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-B
a) Any luminaires used for projects that are not LED (or other equally sustainable
b) NEMA sockets (RF control) for tunnel luminaires
c) Back up batteries are not to be installed in the luminaires.
d) Any deviation from the system technical criteria as set out within this Manual.
e) Any deviation from the minimum maintenance and warranty requirements as set out
within this Manual.
f) Any deviation from the project Lighting Design, Calculation and Site Verification

Department’s electrical and lighting standards for electrical distribution works, except as specified
herein. Copies should be requested from The Department if not already held. Details of all
Part-1.
It is a statutory requirement that all luminaires used on The Department’s Tunnel and Underpass
lighting projects must be LED (or other equally sustainable alternative luminaire technology as
defined within this Manual’s Introduction).
The Consultant shall as requested by The Department provide full cost analysis including payback
calculation for the fixtures useful-life cycle, project location, controls usage/programming etc.

3. LED Luminaires
3.1 General Requirements
by this Manual.
The LED luminaires shall be suitable for mounting on tunnel and/or underpass ceilings (either
surface-mounted or recessed versions as applicable for the project). They shall be suitably
vibration-proof, corrosion resistant, have appropriate optical distribution and shall provide
efficient even low-glare illumination.
3.2 AD Quality Mark (QCC Exterior LED Luminaire Certification)
In addition to the LED Luminaires supplied QCC Certificates shall be the additional specific Lighting
on the project submission for Roadway Lighting projects.
Notes:
The QCC Certification Scheme provides certification for a fixture and/or fixture range/family;
within the allowed criteria set out under the scheme. The specific optics option of the luminaire is
not a critical parameter within the scheme and as such if the luminaire proposed for a particular
project has an optic which differs from that used for certification, this is not an issue for compliance
and is allowed as long as project specific minimum fixture efficacy requirements stated within this
Section are met with the particular optic used and photometry provided to show actual fixture
efficacy value.
the fixture(s) gaining compliance (i.e. using a new generation of LED sources), this too is allowed
as long as the fixture’s body, materials, driver and drive current remain the same (or less in regard
to drive current) and the overall fixture’s lumen output is similar. Justification must be made to the
Department alongside the QCC Product Conformity Certificate with all technical details and the
Department shall assess the justification as part of the project submission and decide if the fixture
is accepted as being covered under the existing Certificate or must require new certification. The
Department’s decision is final, and it is advised for all manufacturers to ensure regular certification
of updated fixture families as required to ensure compliance is maintained.

Project Submission Requirement:- Provide a valid Copy of QCC Product Conformity Certificate(s)
3.3 LED Luminaire Technical & Material Requirements (QCC aligned)
3.3.1 General
a) The LED luminaires must have valid certification under the Abu Dhabi QCC Certification
Scheme for LED Exterior Lighting.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide valid QCC Certificate.
b) Manufacturer’s company profile including a profile of the manufacturing facilities. Valid

Project Submission Requirement:- Provide manufacturer profile and ISO 9001 certificates.
c) The following shall be submitted in addition to the documents required within Clauses
3.3.2 to 3.3.10 (all data in SI units):
• Full light source lamp Specification
EULUMDAT), full light source/lamp Specification data and LED chip reliability reports to JEDEC
JESD22/JESD51 or comparable International Standard (tests at +85ºC).
d) All test certification must be from laboratories accredited to ISO/IEC 17025 signatories of
the ILAC MRA.
Project Submission Requirement: - Ensure all test certificates submitted to The Department have
the correct accreditation to ISO/IEC 17025 signatories of the ILAC MRA.
3.3.2 Minimum Whole-Luminaire Efficacy & Colour Rendering Index
a) The LEDs shall be from a manufacturer of LEDs with ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2011 or

tunnel/underpass lighting on all projects are 2700K, 3000K and 4000K only, although the
QCC Scheme allows a wider band for all luminaire types).

Roadway Tunnel Lighting

125lm/W 70
Fixture
luminaire CCT is within acceptable limits as per Table 3.3.2.2 in relation to Nominal CCT

2700K 2725K ±83
3000K 3045K ± 100
4000K 3985K ± 154
3.3.3 LED Binning
replacement.

The LED luminaires shall be designed to operate continuously at the specified ambient
temperature and humidity with special attention given to the effects of heat, dust, dirt and
vibration in designing the luminaire body. The design of the luminaire shall be such that there is
a direct thermal path from the LED junctions to the atmosphere thus providing a thermal transfer
effect throughout the life of the luminaire. The thermal solution shall be proprietary and designed
by the lighting manufacturer to enable the luminaires to work efficiently in Abu Dhabi climatic
The luminaire shall be designed to prevent collection of debris and dust/sand by proven and
stated means. The design shall be such that the luminaire lenses shall be anti-static to ensure
minimal dust/sand accumulation.
a) The luminaire operating range (taking into account LED components, driver, etc.) shall be
to a minimum of +50°C ambient air temperature(Ta) with an acceptable lumen-output
performance at Ta+50°C needing to be demonstrated. The operating range maximum
refers to the Ta as per IEC/ISO 60598-1 or UL 1598.
In addition, this measured percentage drop of luminous flux shall then be applied to the LM-79
acceptable provided the resultant efficacy value remains within the minimum allowed fixture
fitting.

b) The luminaire installed daytime (non working) temperature shall be to a minimum of 60°C
ambient air temperature (Ta) with all internal components rated to a minimum of 85°C..
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide declaration of the conformity of the Luminaire to the

Minimum IK-Rating
Luminaire Lens
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide declaration of pressure die-cast aluminum alloy

Standards or other comparable International standard.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide written report of all dissimilar metals used within the
corrosion.

d) All synthetic optical materials shall be resistant to degredation by Ultraviolet Radiation and
scratch resistant.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide written confirmation covering any steel components
to show all are galvanised to ASTM-A153 comparable standard or other comparable International
standard.
f) Any external stainless steel body materials, components bolts, nuts and hardened washers
shall be minimum 316L Grade or comparable International standard.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide written confirmation covering any stainless steel
components to show all are minimum 316L Grade to ASTM-SAE comparable standard or other
• Driver shall be minimum 1-10V dimmable/addressable and/or 1-10V+DALI
• Driver current to be max. 750mA.
luminaire).
• Case Temperature (Tc) rating +80°C at a minimum 95% Relative Humidity (RH).
Luminaires with open drivers need to prove Luminaire ambient of 60°C maximum
in equivalence with this requirement.
in accordance with ANSI C82.77or comparable International Standard.
• Driver shall have a programmable soft start (20 seconds from 0% to 100%)

thermal protection is present within the driver, then proof required to confirm it’s operation
is not activated within the normal stated limits of luminaire thermal operational
requirements.
Demonstrate 50,000 hour useful life of the luminaire based on the simplified B20-L70 threshold
at ambient temperature (Tq) of 35°C (Takes into account the annual average recorded night time
demonstrated curve/drive current/Voltage. Using IES TM-21 or comparable IEC/international
standard.
3.3.11 Luminaire Photo-biological Safety
Luminaire must comply with Photo-biological Safety of lamps and lamp systems in accordance
with the requirements of IEC 62471 or ANSI/IES RP-27.3.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide test results for IEC 62471, ANSI/IES RP-27.3-2007 or
exposure.
3.3.13 Emergency Lighting
All tunnel lighting systems must have an integrated system to provide emergency lighting in the
case of power grid failure to the tunnel luminaires. The emergency lighting must provide lighting
in the tunnel for the duration taken to safely clear the tunnel of vehicles/pedestrians and to
allow the tunnel operations to close off the tunnel. The duration will be discussed at the design
stage and evidence provided by the designer on the specified time.

All emergency lighting will be provided by the installation of a UPS system which will be located
near the Lighting Distribution Board (LDB) or suitable electrical room. Back up batteries are not
to be installed within the luminaires.
Note-All UPS must meet the requirements of Civil Defence for safety.
Where the tunnel lighting (daytime or night-time) is used in the event of a power supply failure,
the lighting levels shall be reduced to be in line with Table 4.2.1
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide details of the UPS batteries to be used. Location and
emergency lighting duration and lighting level based on the tunnel geometric design.
3.3.14 Project Lighting Management Dimming System Requirements
All tunnels requiring Daytime Lighting will require a control system to ensure that the correct
lighting levels will be provided in each of the tunnel zones. Depending on the project size and
scope, provision of a lighting management dimming system is a statutory requirement as part of
tunnel/underpass lighting projects or projects containing tunnel underpass lighting. Refer to
Manual Part-1 Section-D for the specific technical requirements for the lighting management
dimming system.
Part-1 Section-D also describes in detail which project types fall under this requirement and which
do not need this provision to be included. However the Consultant must propose and agree the
inclusion of the lighting management dimming system with The Department as part of the project
Concept Design Stage submission approval process. If the project is approved by the Department
as required to be provided with a lighting management dimming system, a compliant system must
then be described and designed for all further project design stages, through and including to
Tender.
Project Submission Requirement:- Check the project against the requirements detailed within
Manual Part-1 Section-D, state and justify the inclusion or omission of a system as per Section-D
and undertake the Concept Design to meet these requirements. If approved as being required,
follow the technical criteria set out within Manual Part-1 Section D for the Preliminary and Detail
Design proposals as well as within the project Tender.
Luminaire shall be surge immune to IEC/EN 61547 up to 10 kV or in accordance to the

requirements of IEEE/ASNI C62.41.2 Scenario I Location Category C up to 10kV-10kA via a Surge
Protection Device. Or comparable International standard for surge immunity.
Surge Protection Device shall be capable of protecting the luminaire against common mode and
differential mode surges and shall be connected to Phase (L), Neutral (N) and Protective Earth
(PE). A Protective Earth connection shall be available inside the luminaire. The Surge Protection
Device shall include fuse and protection to prevent fire in case of protection component failures
at end of life.

achieve the Manual’s requirements for 10kV protection to IEC/EN 61547, IEEE/ANSI C62.41.2
earthing to EN/IEC 60598-1 or comparable International standards.
is final.
accredited laboritories.

inspection.

requirements if and when envoked by the Department
3.4 Warranty
Note: Warranties shall be for/transferable to The Department after the end of project’s defined
defects phase to cover the remainder of the Warranty period to the requirements as defined
below.
a) A written warranty for a Minimum ten (10) year on-site replacement material, fixture,
components; such as lenses, gaskets & fastenings, and the fixture finishes shall include
warranty against failure or substantial deteriorations such as corrosion, blistering,
cracking or peeling (excluding damage caused by contact with chemical substances,
fertilizers, water containing corrosive agents or stray electrical currents) with no cost to
The Department*
b) A written warranty for a Minimum ten (10) year replacement material warranty for
defective or non-starting LED source assemblies with no cost to The Department*

c) A written warranty for a Minimum ten (10) year replacement material warranty on all
supplied drivers, power supply units (PSUs), electrical components and in-built control
components with no cost to The Department*
d) A written warranty for a Minimum ten (10) year replacement material warranty for on-
maintained luminance levels on all light sources (LED package, LED array, or LED module)
including, but not limited to the LED die, encapsulate, and phosphor. Stating B20
compliance for a minimum of 10 years. If the expected useful life performance
shall replace the light source(s) or luminaire as needed with no cost to The Department*
(Please note: * With no cost to The Department does not just refer to the luminaire or luminaire
component cost in regards to any warranty actions. This also refers to any costs associated with
labour for removal/fitting of luminaires, obtaining Authority NOCs, traffic management costs,
transport etc. The Department will not be liaible for any associated costs arising/necessary in
relation to warranty actions. The manufacturer must contact DMT prior to assigning any
Contractor. These requirements are purely in regards to the terms of Luminaire/Luminaire
Equipment Warranties that must be provided to The Department at Handover. It is not in any
way in connection to the cover during the defects period which shall be solely as per specific
terms agreed between the manufacturer and Contractor.

minimum periods defined
4.1 General
should be given to Handbook Chapters F, G, H, I, M and O. Chapter G 7.0 gives specific guidance
on tunnel/underpass lighting.

1. The Consultant shall undertake the lighting design fully in accordance with this manual – refer
to Section 6-and CIE 88 / BS-EN 5489-2, as a basis for design.
2. The Consultant shall assess the tunnel/underpass for specific project and location. The tunnel,
depending on length, can have up to seven daytime lighting zones: Access Zone, Threshold Zone
(split into two parts), Transition Zone, Interior Zone (only for long tunnels), Exit Zone and Parting
Zone. Access and Parting Zones are the areas immediately outside the Tunnel extremities, whilst
the other five are within the tunnel itself. Figure 4.1 shows how these zones are arranged.
Figure 4.1 Tunnel Zone Arrangement
The Consultant shall undertake the lighting design fully in accordance with the criteria set out
within Clauses 4.2 and 4.3; considering The Department’s intended project speed limits for the
tunnel, the Safe Stopping Distance (SSD), tunnel length, height, and Access/Parting Zone
conditions, as these are the primary determining factors on the lighting requirements and lighting
zone-length assessment. In accordance with BS-EN 5489-2 the Consultant shall define the
Classification of the tunnel from Table 4.1.1.
Table 4.1.1 Tunnel Classification
Tunnel Classification BS-EN/5489-2:

The Passage of HGV and flammable vehicle carrying goods is restricted. In the view of
Class I
fire spread, there is a small risk. Typical urban tunnels for cars and buses only.
Uni-directional tunnels that are within 8-minutes time distance from fire department
stations or where fixed fire suppression systems like sprinklers are installed. All types
Class II
of fire may be controlled either by the fire department or by fixed fire suppression
systems. Typical urban tunnels with high fire load.
Uni-directional tunnels. The fire department may be able to extinguish slow-burning
Class III
fires. Typical urban street tunnels with no restriction for any goods transported.
Tunnels which are congested or bi-directional. The possibilities of the occurrence of a
Class IV single fire or collision fires and fire spreads are to be expected and are rated
significantly high. Bi-directional tunnels, long street tunnels on higher road network.
The Consultant shall design all tunnel/underpass lighting projects with an aim to propose no more
than three different optimised LED luminaire types, ideally two whenever possible. Four types of
light distribution are allowed for tunnel lighting: Pro-Beam, Symmetric, Asymmetric and Counter-

Beam. Symmetric, Asymmetric and Counter-Beam are the primary solutions to propose for
Department projects. Note: For uni-direction tunnels fixture light distribution must be Symmetric.
Night-time lighting levels shall always be designed to match the street lighting on the roads
leading into and out of the tunnel/underpass, so the luminance level and uniformities are as close
as possible for consistent visual transition at night (note: where dimming is proposed for adjacent
street lighting as part of a project including the tunnel/underpass, then dimming must be provided
for the tunnel/underpass for the night-time setting to allow programming to set the
tunnel/underpass and adjacent streets to the same level). As these levels will always be
significantly lower than any daytime level requirements, for projects requiring both night-time
and daytime lighting levels the Consultant shall ensure propose a carefully considered solution to
minimise the need for separate luminaires for night-time and daytime. This shall be undertaken
through either the dimming of the more powerful daytime fixtures if such a system is proposed,
or careful selection and circuiting of some evenly spaced luminaires as a ‘night-time circuit’
achieving the required luminance, uniformity and TI levels. The Consultant shall, as requested by
The Department, provide full cost analysis including payback assessments as required for the
project and in accordance with the instructions given by The Department.
The Consultant shall ensure all requirements of Civil Defence approval are adhered to with regard
emergency lighting provision: firstly; the requirement of emergency lighting and secondly; the
design/application of emergency lighting requirements. Only power cables that have fire
retardant/low smoke/zero halogen fire rated classification shall be permitted for use. All in
accordance with the UAE Fire & Life Safety Code of Practice - Chapter 18.1.4. Road Tunnels
including the use only of Civil Defence certified emergency lighting fixtures/systems.
Use of Mesopic multipliers shall be disallowed herein, by assuming an S/P ratio of 1.00 for all
luminaires in all calculations.

4.2 Schedule of Lighting Levels
Based on CIE 88 / BS-EN 5489-2 Standards/Tunnel Zone Classifications

Minimum Average Uniformity
Mounting
Tunnels/ Lighting Class Design Level Ratio Longitudinal Uniformity TI
Luminance(L)=cd/m2 Illumination (Minimum to (Minimum to Maximum)
(Em)=LUX Average)
Night-Time Luminance
Entire tunnel length to Ceiling or
uniformly match roads Uo≥0.4
Ceiling/Wall-
Night-Time Luminance either side of tunnel. & ≥Uo0.4 on walls Match Road ≤15%
Apex
(Tunnels walls to be 60-100% of to height 2m
Road surface luminance)
Mounted*2
Day Time Luminance
Calculated Lth1 cd/m2 *1 Uo≥0.4
Ul≥0.6 Tunnel Class I, II & III
Threshold Zone 1 (Tunnels walls to be 60-100% of & ≥Uo0.4 on walls ≤15%
Ul≥0.7 Tunnel Class IV
Road surface luminance) to height 2m
Calculated Lth2 cd/m2 *1 Uo≥0.4
Threshold Zone 2 (Tunnels walls to be 60-100% of & ≥Uo0.4 on walls ≤15%
Road surface luminance) to height 2m
Ceiling or
Calculated Ltr cd/m2 *1 Uo≥0.4
Ul≥0.6 Tunnel Class I, II & III Ceiling/Wall-
Transition Zone (Tunnels walls to be 60-100% & ≥Uo0.4 on walls ≤15%
Ul≥0.7 Tunnel Class IV Apex
of Road surface luminance) to height 2m
Mounted
Interior Zone Calculated Lin cd/m2 *1 Uo≥0.4 +
(Only required for long (Tunnels walls to be 60-100% ≥0.4 on walls to ≤15%
tunnels) of Road surface luminance) 2m height
Calculated Lex cd/m2 *1 Uo≥0.4 +
Exit Zone (Tunnels walls to be 60-100% ≥0.4 on walls to ≤15%
of Road surface luminance) 2m height
Calculated Eav shall be
minimum 10Lux with no point
Emergency lighting*3 at any location in the tunnel
being less than 2 lux
*1 All daytime luminance levels are calculated for the project-specific tunnel/underpass as set out within Clause 4.5
*2 Where tunnels/underpasses require daytime lighting provision, the LED luminaires used for the night-time lighting
level shall not be separate fixtures and either dimming (if forming part of the project) of the daytime fixtures or
carefully split circuits shall form the basis of the night-time provision.
*3 Emergency lighting will be part of the tunnel lighting (daytime or night-time) and will not be a separate system.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide full methodology for design decisions. Ensure
complete compliance with the table and associated notes for all lighting designs and lighting
calculations undertaken for projects. Citing any justifications for design decisions where described
above within any project tunnel/underpass lighting reports and within the lighting calculation
output reports described with Clause 4.5.

4.3 Maintenance Factors
Project Maintenance Factors for DESIGN lighting calculations shall never be assumed, nor default
values used in any lighting calculations submitted to The Department. All Maintenance Factors
shall be calculated and justified in accordance with the requirements of this Clause.
the Maintenance Factor used in the lighting design software calculation:
The Consultant shall demonstrate the 50,000-hour lumen depreciation of the luminaire at 100%
output at an average night-time temperature (Tq) of of 60°C (Designated annual average
day/night-time temperature within tunnel environments in Abu Dhabi including safety factor).
The methodology to be used is as follows:
b) 35°C shall then be added to the hottest recorded Ts to simulate the designated required
average tunnel temperature of 60°C.
current, then 35°C is added to give 103°C. In this case the most appropriate Alpha and
Beta figures would be the LM-80 data for a Ts of 105°C at 500mA. Any Ts measurements
that exceed 105°C (including the added 35°C for Tq 60°C) will not be permitted.

calculations. The LLD must be ≥0.70 or the fixture will not be allowed for use on all
projects.
formula.
Table 4.3.2.1 LDD (Luminaire Dirt Depreciation)

Fixture With Glass External Optic Fixture Without Glass External Optic
6 months 0.93 0.94 0.96 0.90 0.91 0.92
12 months 0.91 0.92 0.95 0.87 0.89 0.90
18 months 0.89 0.90 0.94 0.84 0.87 0.88
24 months* 0.87 0.88 0.93 0.81 0.84 0.86
36 months 0.84 0.85 0.91 0.77 0.80 0.82
High – Remote/desert areas, major city centres, heavy industrial areas
components and ensure these Maintenance Factors are used in all DESIGN lighting calculations in
which the particular LED luminaire is proposed.
4.4 DESIGN & DAY-1 Calculation Outputs
DESIGN – Defined as the Lighting Design Calculation; assuming 50,000 hours of luminaire
operation at 50oC average ambient temperature (Designated annual average day/night time
temperature within tunnel environments in Abu Dhabi including safety factor). Lighting
calculations shall use the derived MF value(s) as calculated under the requirements set out in 4.3
and with these MFs used designs shall achieve the Minimum Average Design Levels, Uniformities
and other applicable parameters set out within Table 4.2.1

DAY 1 – Defined as the initial luminance/illuminance values. Lighting calculations shall use an MF
of 1.0 in all calculations. These calculations are useful to ascertain the expected measurable light
levels on site during the project commissioning period. It should be noted that this is not
considered a design calculation for the project but required for information for The Department
as described under Clause 5.
4.5 Project Lighting Design Calculations
specific requirements set out within Section-B Clause 4.
All lighting calculations shall be undertaken in Two Stages: A tunnel/underpass lighting

assessment written report and the lighting design undertaken with lighting design software.
Phase-1: Assessment Report
Assessment for a tunnel/underpass project shall be undertaken and written report prepared
covering the project parameters and derived luminance and zone details. The Consultant shall
comply with the following requirements:
• All Company Details and Project Set-Up information shall be stated in full.
• Designer’s details and contact information shall be stated in full.
• State methodology use to the requirements to CIE 88 / BS-EN 5489-2 and this manual.
• State Project Tunnel/Underpass dimensions and site input variables.
• State and justify proposed light beam distribution type for the project.
• State and propose the control philosophy.
• Determine Safe Stopping Distance (SDD).
• Assess Threshold Zone Luminance (Lseq).
• Determine Threshold Zone Lighting % Requirement and Length.
• Calculate Threshold Zone 1 & 2 Luminance Requirements (Lth1 & Lth2).
• Calculate Transition Zone Luminance Requirement (Ltr) and Length.
• If applicable, calculate Interior Zone Luminance Requirement (Lin) and Length.
• Calculate Exit Zone Luminance Requirement (Lex) and Length.
• Represent all Luminance/Zone details on a CIE Curve – showing the Luminance Evolution.
along Tunnel/underpass for the various zones and distances.

Phase-2: Lighting Calculation
Lighting calculations (at 100% luminaire output) for the tunnel/underpass shall be issued within a
single lighting software report format and the Consultant shall comply with the following
requirements:
• All Company Details and Project Set-Up information shall be stated in full.
• Designer’s details and contact information shall be stated in full.
• All justifications/notes to be written into the calculation report.
• Table 4.2.1and Phase-1 Assessment Report shall form the basis of all calculations for the
zones with base variables (cd/m2, vertical cd/m2 (walls), Uo, Ul & TI) set as design targets
to exactly match Table 4.2.1.
values used and replace any lighting software default values.
• All tunnel/underpass dimensions and zone lengths shall be inputted exactly as per the
project and Assessment Report outputs.
• Soffit height and wall/ceiling reflectance values shall match exactly match those proposed
for the project.
• Asphalt coating type to always be set as lighting software equivalent category R3 (q0 0.07)
and not to be changed to any other value unless specific variation in roadways surface is
known for the project.
• Both DAY-1 and DESIGN calculations shall be undertaken for every calculation and
suitably labelled in the report. Refer to Clause 4.4 for details of requirements and reasons.
minimum options as and where applicable:
• Project Cover
• Planning Data
Per Tunnel/Underpass Calculation (DESIGN)
• Luminance Photometric Results (Overall, Each Lane & Side Walls)
• Illuminance Photometric Results (Overall, Each Lane & Side Walls)
• 3D Rendering (where possible)
• False Colour 2D or 3D Contour Rendering
Per Tunnel/Underpass Calculation (DAY-1)
• Luminance Photometric Results (Overall, Each Lane & Side Walls)
• Illuminance Photometric Results (Overall, Each Lane & Side Walls)
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide both the Phase-1 Assessment Report and Phase-2
Lighting Calculation fully in adhereance to the above requirements in PDF format. In addition,
provide the source files used for both the tunnel assessment report and lighting software
alongside the PDF Report in all submissions to The Department.

5.1 Site Lighting Measurement
The Contractor shall conduct a Field Performance test of the lighting installation(s) immediately
after ADDC/AADC grid-energisation of the system, in the presence of a qualified project
Consultant representaive. For ALL projects to be handed over to the Department, a representative
from The Department must be invited to the Field Performance Test. The location of the test site
and the date of the test must be agreed with the Department’s Representative a minimum of
one week prior to the test being carried out. Lighting verification shall follow the requirements
and guidance provided in this Section.
The test results shall meet the lighting design requirements identified in Clause 4 of this Section
and match the Approved DAY-1 lighting calculation output report values submitted. As all
roadway lighting projects will be connected to the Department’s PLMS/CMS network, the Field
Performance Test shall include the review of the PLMS/CMS at this time. The review will include,
as a minimum, switching on/off, information gathering from the luminaires, dimming to the
required levels, etc. (refer to part 1 Section D). Lighting levels will be measured at 100%
illuminance and as per agreed dimming levels.
Refer to the Public Realm & Street Lighting Handbook for guidance on Lighting Maintenance and
Lighting Performance Verification. Handbook Chapters L, and M.
Site measurements shall be undertaken to the requirements of this manual
The Department will take appropriate actions if the specified project lighting levels are not
achieved/exceeded and the Contractor will have to undertake remedial action to address the
problems at their cost and without delay to the Contract.
replace any affected luminaires at his cost and without delay to the Contract.

Testing shall be undertaken in accordance with the following:
Preparation:
• For tunnels/underpasses, both luminance and illuminance measurements shall be taken
as illuminance is a purer comparison against the design and can be used as mitigation if
the luminance results vary considerably due the roadway surface variation (against the
mathematical R3 standard reflectance-factor as used in calcs) or other mitigating site
factors
• Lighting measurements shall be taken for rach of the zones (Threshold/
Transition/Interior/Exit) within the tunnel wth the grid layouts as per Figures 5.1a and
5.1b
• The area considered for the illuminance and the luminance measurements must cover a
portion of road and wall which is reproducible in term of lighting results.
• The Threshold/Transition and Exit Zones shall have a minimum of 9 points per lane no
greater than 5m apart in the longitudinal direction. The first and third transverse points
shall be 1/6th of the lane width from the lane edges with the second point being along
the centre of the lane.
• The start of each Zone grids shall be within the first quarter of each zone (nearest the
tunnel entrance).
• On the walls, longitudinally, the same number of measurement points will be used as on
the road. Vertically, measurement will be taken at 3 different heights between the road
ground level, 1m height and a height of 2m. The vertical luminance and illuminance will
be measured in each point of the grid defined. The average luminance and illuminance
levels and the overall uniformity ratio are found by calculation.
• The Interior Zone (if any) shall have a grid of 12 points per lane normally marked between
two luminaires but at a length of no greater than 5m. The first and third transverse points
shall be 1/6th of the lane width from the lane edges with the second point being along
the centre of the lane.
• The geometry of the site’s lighting installation: mounting height of luminaires, positioning
of the fixtures and tilting angle of the luminaires shall be carefully checked to show full
compliance with the approved design.
• The positioning longitudinally along the road and transversally to the road edge, tilting
angle of the luminaires, width of carriageway and (if applicable) sidewalks shall be
checked carefully.
• In case of significant difference of one or several installation parameters with the lighting
design, the results of measurement must be compared to a new calculation taking in
account the actual geometry of the lighting installation. For instance, if the project lighting
calculations cover the ‘worse-case’ (widest) spacing for a project, site measurements
should primarily aim to be undertaken on a road with these worse-case spacing. If this is
not possible and road with closer pole spacing is proposed, then adjusted DAY-1 Lighting
calculations must be prepared for the actual test-site spacing.
• The optical unit of the luminaires must be clean externally. The luminaire adjustment shall
be checked and must correspond to the luminaire adjustment used for the lighting design.
• Because field photometry involves significantly higher variability than laboratory
measurements, it is necessary to record and report the following factors which may
influence the site measured results:

o Supply voltage
o Lamp wattage
o Ambient Air Temperature
o Mounting height
o Luminaire arrangements
o Tilt
o Pavement conditions
o Weather conditions
• It is mandatory that supply voltages to the circuits are taken at the control cabinet and
recorded as part of the Field Performance Test.
• The atmosphere should be clear and extraneous light should be at a minimum when tests
are performed. Otherwise, the results of lighting measurement can be affected.
• Wet road surfaces can also lead to reflections that can cause considerable errors with
luminance measurements, so tests should not be conducted if the roadways surface is
wet.
• The road/ground surface must be clean and without irregularities in the area of the
lighting measurements.
• The personnel in charge of conducting the test should avoid casting shadows on the
measuring instrument detector. It is recommended that the personnel avoid wearing light
coloured clothing in order to not supplement the readings on the detector by reflected
light. If Hi-Vis vests are being worn on site, anyone tasked with operating meter
equipment should be allowed to remove them for the duration of measurements.
Photometric Test Equipment:

• Luminance and Lux Meters (Photometers) must be calibrated with available certification
provided to cover the date of the test. iOs/Android/Windows mobile device ‘Light Meter
Apps’ should never be used and are not permissible for any readings sent to The
Department!
• It is recommended that measuring instruments with self- luminous readouts be used since
it may be difficult to read analogue instruments and LCDs under low Illuminance and
torches must never be used.
• Photometers capable of performing horizontal Illuminance measurements should be
used for Illuminance measurements of road surfaces and other horizontal measurement
requirements.
• Photometers capable of performing vertical Illuminance measurements should be used
for any vertical Illuminance measurement requirements.
• Commercially available Photometers that can be positioned without being shadowed by
the user and that can be shaded from extraneous light are preferred. Such Photometers
can measure illumination within ±5% error typically.
• Colour-correction of the Photometer should be made in accordance with the CIE Spectral
Luminous Efficacy Curve.
• If a temperature-sensitive Photometer is used, temperature- correction should be made
appropriately.
• For local luminance measurements, the luminance meter should not have a field of view
greater than two minutes of arc; otherwise, differences may not be detected to accurately
determine uniformity.

Material check list

• 2o FOV Luminance meter with valid calibration certificate.
• Tripod for luminance meter, with precision aiming capabilities.
• Screw to fix the luminance meter on the tripod (should be part of the luminance meter
material).
• Lux meter with valid calibration certificate.
• Horizontal balancing device for the Lux meter sensor.
• Holding device for vertical illuminance measurement (a long rod).
• White chalk or white spray paint cans.
• Flexible meter (50m - 100m).
• Luminous target (for aiming the luminance meter in low lighting conditions.)
• Compact pocket lamp.
• Laser telemeter (if not available on site).
• Suitable voltmeter (if not available on site).
• Calculator.
• Detailed measuring procedure.
• Documents prepared for writing the results (tables) and pens.
• Digital camera.
• USB key.
• Road lighting Measurements from Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual.
• Approved Drawings showing the way to proceed: positioning of the measurement points.
in a representative zone and observer’s positions.
• Project DAY-1 lighting calculation reports.
Information to collect before measurement exercise.

• How long have the LEDs already been working.
• Date of the last tunnel maintenance. (How long has the installation been in service.)
Information to collect before each measurement.

• Supply voltage (to be measured as close as possible to the row of luminaires, before and
after the lighting measurement).
• Check the luminaires spacing and their transversal position inside the tunnel.
• Check the position of the lines marking the carriageway and, if needed, the distance wall
to wall.
• Check the installation height.
• Visually check the luminaires orientations.
Measurement Guidance:
• Threshold/Transition/Exit Zones shall have a grid marked out as per Figure 5.1a on the
road surface and the walls. 3 longitudinal axes of measurement points per lane will be
measured. Longitudinally, the distance between measurement points on each axis should
not exceed 5m.
• Interior Zone shall have a grid marked out as per Figure 5.1b on the road surface and
the walls. 3 longitudinal axes of measurement points per lane will be measured.
Longitudinally, the grid length should not be less than 5m.

• The field of measurement should be each lane of the road which is of interest to the driver
and shall be representative of the number of lanes that make up the majority of the length
of the tunnel.
• In the transverse direction, it should cover each lane and the wall adjacent to the lane.
• This grid of measurement points should correspond to the grid of calculation from the
DAY-1 Lighting Report and consequently to the Specifications given by this manual.
Figure 5.1a Luminance/Illuminance Measurement Grid- Threshold/Transition/Exit Zones

Figure 5.1a Luminance/Illuminance Measurement Grid- Interior Zone
• The illuminance shall be measured at Ground Level at each point of the grid defined as
here above. The average illuminance level and the uniformity ratios are found by
calculation.
• The luminance shall then be measured at the same points as the illuminance. To proceed
to these luminance measurements, the luminance meter shall be localized 83m before
the beginning of the measurement area (for Luminance measurements), transversally in
front of the axis of the lane for which the calculation has shown the lowest average
luminance level, and at a height of 1.45m. From the results of these point-by-point
measurements, the calculation of the average level of luminance and the overall
uniformity of luminance (Uo ratio Lmin/Lav) shall be undertaken.
• The longitudinal uniformities of luminance (Ul) in the axis of each lane shall be checked
after measurements of all points of the axis of each lane. The luminance meter shall be
localized successively along the axis of each lane, 83m before the first point of
measurement (for Luminance measurements), and at a height of 1.45m. The longitudinal
uniformity of luminance will be the ratio between the minimum and the maximum
punctual measurement on each axis.

• On the walls longitudinally, the same number of measurement points will be used as on
the road. Vertically, measurement will be taken at 3 different heights between the road
surface level, 1m and a height of 2m. The vertical illuminance will be measured in each
point of the grid defined. The average illuminance level and the overall uniformity ratio
are found by calculation.
• A site measurement record sheet and report shall be drawn up for the project to set out
all the data measurements decribed above as per CIE 140 and to record the following
information:
o Project name
o Location of the tunnel/area
o Date and time of the measurement
o Detailed information about the lighting equipment and installation
o Detailed information about the test equipment, calibrate certification and meter
tolerances
o Mounting height, luminaire spacing and arrangement and special conditions such
as extraneous light sources
o Electrical operating conditions
o Condition of luminaires and other equipment
o Air Temperature
o Tabulated test data shown on custom drawn table/grid set up for the project to
show illuminance and/or luminance readings as set out above for roadways and
walls
o Special measurements if recorded
o Ratio of maximum and minimum-to-average road Illuminance and luminance
o Ratio of maximum-to-minimum Illuminance and luminance along longitudinal
roadway lines for each roadway lane
o Ratio of minimum to average wall illuminance
o Ratio of road overall illuminance uniformity to wall overall illuminance
uniformities to show walls are within 60-100% or roadway
o Position of instrument detector and light source
o Names of test personnel
o Witnessed by: Names, Companies, Signatures
o Copy of the DAY-1 lighting calculations
o Copy of the DAY-1 nighttime Dimming system set-level calculations if applicable
o Site Photographs of the testing exercise
o Assessement of site measurements against project lighting calculations and
confirmation of Pass or Fail of the installation
o Additional remarks (if any )
requirements of Clause 5.1 and provide report of all data to The Department as required. The
primary goal is to prove beyond doubt that the site installation meets/exceeds the minimum
required design requirements for the project.

5.2 Interim (Non-Day-1) Measurement
If the test purpose is to check the performance of the roadway lighting installation after
depreciation in service, the existing conditions of the luminaires should be recorded.
The period of hours-of-operation shall be calculated and stated and the MF (for clean luminaires)
after the stated period in the environmental conditions of the installation should be calculated
and stated together with the luminous flux in lumens of the light source or sources in the
luminaire after the stated period/MF applied.
With clean fixtures Clause 5.1 shall be followed as before in full with the recorded values assessed
against adjusted lighting calculations with the adjusted MF applied in place of the 1.0 value used
in DAY-1 calculations
requirements of Clauses 5.1 and 5.2 and provide report of all data to The Department as required.
5.3 Project Harmonic Measurement
The maximum allowed total voltage harmonics distortion (THDV) is to be taken as 5% (or as per
latest Electricity Authority latest requirements if different) and in accordance with IEEE 519
Regulations.


Part-1 Section B –
Lighting Design Methodology and Guidance
Tunnel Lighting Design is a highly specialised area of lighting design and must be carried out by
competent designers utilising software specially designed to provide the design calculations. It is
not sufficient to “adapt” other lighting design software to carry out the lighting design as many
aspects of the design will not be considered and the final design will not be accurate. To ensure
that the design is carried out correctly, the following section provides the design methodology
required to produce a compliant design.
The aim of tunnel lighting is to –

• Allow traffic to enter, pass through and safely exit the tunnel
• To transition form entrance to exit without impeding the flow of traffic
• Remove anxiety for the tunnel users
To ensure that these points are met, it is imperative that the lighting provision within the tunnel
is adequate to ensure that the drivers and pedestrians can quickly adjust to the lighting within the
tunnel, identify any possible obstructions and allow free flow of the traffic without significant
reduction of speed. These points must be met where the lighting is required where the lighting
will be required all day or only during the hours of darkness.
7. Tunnel Lighting Design Guide and Methodology
All tunnel lighting designs must consider the ambient conditions for both day and night time
conditions. During daytime conditions it is important that the tunnel user must be able to see into
the tunnel to a certain distance to ensure that they can see unexpected hazards, react and take
appropriate action to avoid any issues. The lighting level within the entrance to the tunnel must
be of a sufficiently high level to allow this during the day to ensure that the “black hole” effect is
not present- refer to photo 7.1.
Photo 7.1- Black Hole Effect in a Short Tunnel (Daytime)

It is also important that the lightng level of the tunnel exit zone is sufficiently high enough to allow
rearward vision to ensure that any manouvering actions do not result in collisions with other
tunnel users leaving the tunnel.
The “black hole” effect of the tunnel is not seen at night time as the lighting levels on the outside
of the tunel are significantly lower than those during the daytime.
Flowchart 7.1 shows the design process decision making for the provision of daytime lighting. This
methodology is based on BS5489-2 and is similar to CIE 88 which can also be used as a
methodology for design.
Flowchart 7.1- Daytime Lighting Decision Making Process

7.1 Lighting Requirements for Tunnels of Different Lengths
Lighting design for short and long tunnels are determined by the degree to which the
approaching tunnel user can see through the tunnel to the exit. This is considered at a point
equal to the Stopping Distance (SD) in front of the tunnel entrance. The geometric design of the
tunnel (straight/curved) along with the tunnel width, height and length also plays a major factor
in the ability to see through the tunnel and as such the requirement for lighting. Table 7.1.1
details the requirement for the need to provide lighting in the tunnel during the day.
Table 7.1 Determination for Daytime Tunnel Lighting
Tunnel Length (m) Daytime Lighting Requirement
≤25m Normally no requirement

>25m ≤200m Assessment required- refer to Section 7.1.1
>200m Required
The critical factor to be considered is whether approaching drivers can see vehicles, other road
uses or obstacles at a distance from the entrance to the tunnel equal to or less than the Stopping
Distance (SD).
7.1.1 Assessment for Daytime Lighting Requirement for Tunnels >25m ≤200m
The first step in determining if daytime lighting of the tunnel is required is to calculate the Look
Through Percentage (LTP), which is determined by Figure 7.1.1.1.
Figure 7.1.1.1- Look Through Percentage

The calculation should be carried out using the formula-

LTP = 100 X Surface EFGH = 100 x EF x FG = 100 x EF x FG
Surface ABCD AB x BC AB x BC
An approximation can be used for the LTP as the visual angles are small as shown in Figure
7.1.1.2.
Figure 7.1.1.2- visual Angles
The approximation method uses the following formula-
LTP = 100 x βu x au
βi x ai
Notes to the Section-
Note 1-the centre for the perspective drawing in Figure 7.1.1.1 is-
• A point on a horizontal line 1.2m above the road surface
• In the middle of the travel lane (if the road has multiple travel lanes the calculation must
be carried out for each lane)
• At the stopping distance from the ertrance portal (Table 7.2.1)
Note 2- DO NOT take the ceiling into account as it is NOT a backround that can mask other road
users
Note 3-Where Daylight Penetration is found, the apparent visual length of the tunnel is shortened.
As such, an apparent (assumed) entrance and exit portal is used when calculating LTP. Good
practice is used due to the difficulty in estimating or measuring the inset distance with –
• Entrance portal- 5m inside the tunnel
• Exit portal- 10m inside the tunnel
Note 4- the perspective situation vn be taken from a drawing or photograph (where the tunnel is
existing).
Note 5- due to geometric conditions withthe tunnel having both vertical and horizontal curvature,
it is not always possible to provide a perspective drawing. In this case, it is reasonable to use the
horizontal plane and vertical cross-section as a basis for the dark frame.

7.1.2 Determination for the Need for Daytime Lighting
Daytime lighting should be provided according to the LTP Values as follows-
• Where LTP <20%- Daytime Lighting is always required

• Where LTP >80%- Daytime Lighting is normally not required
• Where LTP is >20% but <80% an assessment is required to determine if Daytime Lighting
is required as per Section 7.1.3
7.1.3 Daytime Lighting for LTP Values Between 20% and 80%
Where the calculated value for LTP falls between 20% and 80%, an assessment is required to
determine if there is a need for Daytime Lighting. to determine the need a “critical object” is
required to represent –
• A car- where only vehicular traddic will use the tunnel. The car should be represented by
Figure 7.1.3.1 with the car represented by a rectangle (1) of dimension 1.4m x 1.6m
• A pedestrian or cyclist- where the tunnel will have mixed use. The pedestrian will be
represented by Figure 7.1.3.2 with the pedestrian/cyclist represented by a rectangle (1)
of dimension 0.5m x 1.8m
Figure 7.1.3.1- Critical Object- Visibility of a Car
Figure 7.1.3.2- Critical Object- Visibility of a Pedestrian/Cyclist

The longitudinal position of the observer should be the stopping distance (SD) from the apparent
entrance portal. The transverse position of the observer and the critical object should be as per
Table 7.1.3.1 for the proposed/existing road type.
Table 7.1.3.1- Transverse position of Object and Critical Object

Type of Road Position of Critical Object Position of Observer
Multi-Lane with an emergency lane Left- hand side, Emergency Lane Center Line, Lane 1
Multi-Lane with no emergency lane Left- hand side, Lane 1 Center Line, Lane 1
Daytime lighting should be provided when the following criteria are met-
• Less than 30% of the critical object representing a car can be seen against the apparent
exit portal (Figure 7.1.3.1)
• Less than 50% of the critical object representing a pedestrian.cyclist can be seen against
the apparent exit portal (Figure 7.1.3.2)
7.2 Determination of Stopping Distance (SD)
The stopping distance (SD) is the time taken for vehicles to come to a full stop under braking
conditions at the posted road speed in dry conditions. All SD for the tunnel lighting design will
be applied in dry conditions. Table 7.2.1 provides the SD at the various Posted Speeds.

Table 7.2.1- Stopping Distances at Various Posted Road Speeds
Posted Speed (km/h) Stopping Distance (SD) (m)

120 250
100 185
80 130
60 85
50 65
Note- Stopping Distances are taken from Table 4-1 of TR514 Road Geometric Design Manual
7.3 Tunnel Lighting Classification
The classification of the tunnel lighting must be based on the following: -
• Traffic Flow (known or proposed)

• Traffic Type and Mix
• Visual Guidane
Traffic flow shall be classified as High, Medium or Low. Table 7.3.1 details the traffic flow to be
considered.
Table 7.3.1- Traffic Flow

Traffic Flow Category Volume/Rate of Flow (Vehicles per hour per lane at peak hour)
One Way Traffic Two Way Traffic
High >1,500 >400
Medium 500 to 1,500 100 to 400
Low <500 <100
Note-All peak flows shall be taken from the approved Traffic Study.
By utilising the information from Table 7.3.1 the Tunnel Lighting Class selection can be finalised
using Flowchart 7.3.1.
Flowchart 7.3.1- Tunnel Lighting Classification Selection
Note- Mixed refers to Pedestrian and Vehicular Traffic

7.4 Determination of Zone Luminance
Figure 4.1 shows the 5 Zones that must be considered in the tunnel lighting design. This section
will detail the methodology to determine the luminance requirements of each zone.
Figure 4.1- Tunnel Zones
7.4.1 Access Zone Luminance- Daytime
To determine the daytime lighting levels within the tunnel it is necessary to determine the
Access Zone Luminance. This figure will then be utilised in the Threshold Zone lighting
luminance level and all subsequent Zone lighting requirements. There are two methods to
determine this requirement-
• Direct Measurement at the site

• Grid Method
7.4.2 Direct Measurement at Site- Methodology
This method is the preferred method as the geometric design of the tunnel may produce
differing results for each approach to the tunnel.
The measurement is taken using a luminance meter accepting a 20o circular field of view
mounted on a tripod.
7.4.3 Procedure for Existing Tunnel
Step 1- Figure 7.4.3.1 details the position of the tripod and luminance meter in relation the
entrance to the existing tunnel. The tripod and luminance meter are to be placed in the centre
of the carriageway approaching the tunnel. The luminance meter shall be positioned 1.5m (A)
above the road surface and at a distance equal to the stopping distance (SD) away from the
entrance portal. The luminance meter shall be aimed at the centre of the tunnel entrance (B).

Figure 7.4.3.1- Luminance Meter Positioning for Measurement
Step 2- Measurements shall be taken over several days when the sun is shining. Conditions with
white clouds are preferable as this will increase the L20 value in the measurement field. Any
measurements taken when the sun enters the 20o field of view should be discarded as this will
result in extremely high luminance readings that will skew the results unfavourably.
Step 3- A series of measurements should be taken at both ends of the of the tunnel when the
maximum L20 values are reached and should be plotted against time.
7.4.4 Procedure for Proposed Tunnel
Where a tunnel is yet to be constructed, the L20 measurements shall be made from positions
corresponding to the location of the proposed road with the luminance meter being pointed at
the centre of the proposed tunnel entrance.
To measure the L20 Values, Section 7.4.3 Step 2 method shall be used. If this is not practical in-
situ due to differences in the proposed ground level and existing ground level or the presence of
trees, rocks, vegetation blocking the aiming point the Grid Method as per Section 7.4.5 should
be applied.
7.4.5 Determination of Access Zone Luminance by the Grid Method
The Access Zone luminance L20 can be calculated by using the Grid Method and can be used for
an existing or a proposed tunnel. This method breaks up the field of view into small areas that
then have luminance values prescribed to them. This method will then allow an average
luminance level to be calculated for the complete area.
Note- this method is an approximation only and the accuracy depends on the particular
luminance values used in the calculation.

Step 1- prepare the view of the tunnel at seen from the Stopping Distance (SD) in front of the
entrance portal. The view can be a perspective view using drawings, computer simulation model
or site photograph. Irrespective of the method used to construct the view, the observation point
shall be 1.5m above the road surface and at a distance equal to the SD from the entrance portal.
Step 2- prepare the angular extent of the view to allow a circle providing 20o of the observer’s
eye can be superimposed. Where a photograph is used, a reference point must be included,
such as a surveyor’s pole, in the field of view at a known distance as this will allow the angular
view to be established. For an existing tunnel, the entrance portal height (H) provides a suitable
reference point and can be used with the SD from the portal to determine the angular
calibration of the photo. Calculation 7.4.5.1 is used-
Calculation 7.4.5.1- Angular Calibration from Photo
ѲH=tan -1
H/SD
Note: this equation provides an approximate value
By utilising the calculated values from the equation, it will be possible to draw the tunnel entrance
portal onto the site photograph, at the appropriate scale. All other objects such as the road verge,
retaining walls, gantries and other objects that will be part of the final view can be drawn onto
the photograph.
Note- final road levels must be considered.
The following steps will allow the L20 calculation to be carried out-
Step 1- superimpose a circle of 20o subtense centred on the tunnel portal as per Figure 7.4.3.1. to
provide the field of view limit.
Step 2- the 20o field of view is then divided into segments as per Figure 7.4.5.1 where each
segment is identified with a reference number or letter. Measured or typical luminance values
(L) for background objects should be assigned to each segment – Refer to Table 7.4.5.1.
Step 3- A table will be constructed to detail the assigned luminance value (L), the area of the
object (A) and the resultant of L x A. The average luminance L20 is then calculated by utilising
Equation 7.4.5.2.
Equation 7.4.5.2.- Average Luminance (L20) calculation.
Average Luminance L20 = AL/A
Figure 7.4.5.1- 20o Field of View Divided into Assessment Segments

Note: the figure 1 refers to the centre of the tunnel entrance portal
Table 7.4.5.1- Typical Luminance Values

Background Object Type Luminance (L) (cd/m2)
Sand/ Earth 3,500
Grass 2,000
Hill (Rock/scree) 3,500
House (Brick) 3,500
Portal (Dark) 1,000
Road (Asphalt) 4,000
Road (Asphalt)- in sun when facing in southerly direction 6,000
Road (Concrete) 8,000
Sky (Clear) 8,000
Sky (Hazy, bright)- occurs when facing in southerly 20,000
direction
Tree 1,000
Wall (Dark) 1,000
Wall (Light) 6,000
Note- these typical values are taken for mid-summer with horizontal illuminance approximately 100,000lux. Where a
surface is in shadow at the time that the value of L 20 is at a maximum, then the luminance value of L given for that
surface should be multiplied by 0.25
Table 7.4.5.2 provides an example of the calculation for the L20 grid method and is based on
Figure 7.4.5.1.
Table 7.4.5.2- Example of L20 Grid Method Calculation

Segment Background Object Area (A) Luminance (L) Product of A x L

(m2) (cd/m2)
a Sky (Clear) 2,600 8,000 20,800,000
b Dark Wall 1,150 1,000 1,150.000
c Dark Wall over Portal 300 1,000 300,000
d Road (Asphalt) in sun 3,300 4,000 13,200,000
e Road in shadow 80 1,000 80,000
f Dark Wall in shadow 128 250 32,000
g House (brick) in shadow 130 875 114,000
h Trees 90 1,000 90,000
i Sandy Medians 800 3,500 2,800,000
J Tunnel Interior (no lighting) 922 ---- ----
Totals 9,500 38,566,000
Average Luminance L20 = AL/A = 38,566,000 / 9,500 = 4,060 cd/m2 (rounded up)
7.5 Tunnel Interior Zones- Determination of Daytime Luminance Levels
Section 7.4 has detailed the methodology for determining the access zone luminance level which
is necessary to then determine the luminance levels for the four interior zones of the tunnel. This
Section will provide the methodology to allow the interior lighting levels to be determined and
will show the dimensions for each zone.
7.5.1 Threshold Zone Luminance- Daytime
The roadway lighting level is directly associated with the daytime luminance of the access zone
for the particular tunnel. The length of the threshold zone will be equal to the SD.
The threshold zone luminance (Lth) will be provided from the start of the threshold zone for a
length of 0.5SD. the calculation for the Lth will be calculated utilising Equation 7.5.1.1
Equation 7.5.1.1- Threshold Zone Luminance (Lth) calculation
Lth = k x L20 (the value for the variable k is taken from table 7.5.1.1)
Table 7.5.1.1- Value of k for different speed limits and tunnel lighting classes
Tunnel Lighting k value
Class Speed limit 50kmh to 70kmh Speed limit 80kmh to 100kmh Speed limit 120kmh
4 0.05 0.06 0.10
3 0.04 0.05 0.07
2 0.03 0.04 0.05
1 ---- ---- ----
The remaining half of the threshold zone length will then decrease linearly or stepped until the
level at the end of the threshold zone is equal to 0.4Lth.

7.5.2 Transition Zone Luminance- Daytime
The transition zone luminance level should be gradually reduced from the threshold zone
towards the interior zone. Figure 7.5.2.1 shows the reduction curve for the transition zone. The
luminance level must not fall below the level derived for the curve at the tunnel length shown.
Figure 7.5.2.1- Luminance Reduction Curve
7.5.3 Interior Zone Luminance- Daytime

The interior zone average luminance (Lin) for the road surface should not fall below the level
indicated in Table 7.5.3.1 for the tunnel class and road speed.
Table 7.5.3.1- Road Surface Luminance for the Interior Zone

Tunnel Lighting Average Maintained Luminance (Lin) (cd/m2)
4 3 6 10
3 2 4 6
2 1.5 2 4
1 ---- 0.5 1.5

7.5.4 Exit Zone Luminance- Daytime
The adaptation of the human eye going from dark to light is very rapid. The purpose of the lighting
at the exit zone is to –
• Provide illumination of smaller vehicles that could appear to be hidden behind larger
vehicles due to the glare effect of the high outside luminance.
• To enable the driver who is leaving the tunnel to have sufficient vision in their rear
mirrors.
To allow for the requirements of the two points, the road lighting luminance in the exit zone
(Lex) shall be five (5) x Lin with the length (m) of the exit zone equalling the posted road speed,
e.g. posted road speed of 100kmh = exit zone length of 100m.
Note-In a two-way tunnel, the threshold zone lighting for the opposing traffic will be considered
as the exit zone level.
Table 7.5.3.1- Road Surface Luminance for the Exit Zone

Tunnel Lighting Average Maintained Luminance (Lex) (cd/m2)
4 15 30 50
3 10 20 30
2 7.5 10 20
1 ---- 2.5 7.5
7.5.5 Zone Length Methodology
Figure 7.5.5.1 and the following steps can be used to determine the zone lengths are as follows.
Figure 7.5.5.1- Tunnel Zone Length Determination
Step 1- Use Table 7.2.1 to determine the Stopping Distance (SD)- this will be used as the
Threshold Zone Length (A)
Step 1- Use Posted Road Speed and show as meters – this will be the Exit Zone length (D)
Step 3- Use Figure 7.5.2.1 to determine the Transition Zone length (B)
Note- if A+B+D is less than the Tunnel Total Length (TTot), go to Step 4.
Step 4- Use the equation – Interior Zone (C) = Tunnel Total Length (TTot) – (A+B+D)
7.6 Luminance and Uniformity
All lighting calculations for the interior of the tunnel must take the complete carriageway,
including emergency lanes and shoulders, into consideration and must meet the required
lighting levels of this section. All uniformities shall match those shown in Table 4.2.1.
7.6.1 Tunnel Walls
All tunnel walls shall follow the requirements detailed in Table 4.2.1.
7.7 Night-Time Lighting
Night-time lighting of the tunnel shall match the roadway lighting levels at either side of the
tunnel with uniformity requirements as per Table 4.2.1.
Note- where Daytime lighting is provided, the Night-time lighting of the tunnel will not be a
separate system and will be provided by the luminaires used for the Daytime lighting.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide a logical and detailed methodology on ALL decisions
made for the choice of lighting levels within the tunnel zones.
lectrical Requirements

Part-1Part-1 Section-I
Section-C –Electrical Requirements
– Roadway/Parking Lighting Poles
Part 1 Section C – Roadway/Parking Lighting Poles
This Section is a brief summary of the primary factors covered within this Part-1 Section-C of the
1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-C
a) Lighting pole structural design calculations must be submitted prior to any installation
and must use a Wind Loading and Gust factor of 1.14.
b) Lighting Poles structural design must use the specified luminaire quantities, bracket
projection and luminaire type as per the approved lighting detail design or where the
Contractor proposes an alternative this must be agreed by The Department.
c) Lighting pole foundation design calculations must be submitted for approval prior to
any installation on site and must consider the consider project specific soil conditions.
d) Warranty for all lighting poles set as minimum 25-Years for all aspects.
e) Any alternative material proposal for the lighting poles must be approved by The
Department.
f) Lighting pole structural testing to be carried out as per Clause 5.
g) Lightning protection as per risk assessment to be provided.
h) The Department’s decision is final regarding project submissions and design approvals.
i) Coordination with Abu Dhabi Monitoring and Control Centre for MCC Hybrid Poles
1.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-C
a) Any deviation from the system technical criteria as set out within this Manual.
b) Any deviation from the maintenance and periodic testing requirements
within this Manual.

performance for the project shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of this Section.
Details of all standards are provided within the Applicable Standards & Guidance References at the
end of Part-1.
their lighting poles and accessories under all the required design conditions.
The Consultant/Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the project and all product
specifications are fully in compliance, without any deviation from this Manual, prior to forwarding
to The Department for approval. Any deviation should be brought to the notice of The Department.
The Consultant/Contractor shall ensure in their design the following: integration, coordination,
functionality and accessibility of these services. It shall be the Consultant’s/Contractor’s
responsibility to bring the lighting poles in line with the design & operating and maintenance
conditions. Where the Contractor proposes alternative luminares to those approved in the Detail
Design, they shall ensure that all calculations are specific to the material proposed and agreed by
The Department.
The Consultant/Contractor shall as requested by The Department provide full cost analysis including
payback assessments as required for the project (or part of the project) and in accordance with the
luminaire weights, bracket arm projection length, foundation type and soil analysis.
Note: The height and type of lighting poles shall be left to the Department to decide if suitable
for each area. Lighting pole foundations shall be installed 150mm above agreed ground level
except where the lighting pole will be installed in a tiled area. Where lighting poles are installed
in tiled areas, they will be flush with the tiles. Refer to Part 2 for Typical Standard Detail Drawings.
2.1 Light Poles
2.1.1. Description
Light poles shall be as indicated on the Contract plans and as specified herein.
All 30.5m, 20.0m, 18.0m, 14.0m, 12.0m , 10.0m and 8.0m light poles shall be provided with an
electrical cut-out at the pole base near the handhole for terminating and interconnecting
underground cables and lantern wiring cables. There shall be suitable provisions inside the
poleshaft to properly fix the electrical cutout. Light Poles 10.0m and less shall be single shaft. Any
light poles more than 20.0m height shall have lowering winch except for mid hinged poles. All
electrical cutouts shall be designed, manufactured, tested and sized in accordance with the
requirements referenced in Part 1, Section I Clause 8.6. The service life of light pole foundations
shall be as specified in Clause 6 The light pole warranty shall be as included in Clause 6. The
structural warranty for light poles shall be 25 years minimum as required by the Owner.
All light poles shall be earthed through a separate earth cable or a separate earth core in the power
supply cable, installed underground and terminated at each pole base. In addition to the earthing
through cable, the light poles at the end of each individual underground cable circuit shall be
earthed through separate earth electrodes as specified in Part 1, Section I. Where the light poles
require to be installed near the electrical overhead lines, the Contractor has to ensure that the
minimum vertical and horizontal clearance between the light poles and electrical overhead lines
are followed as required in ADWEA standard specifications.
2.2 30.5m High Mast Poles
2.2.1. General
The work described in this Section shall include, but not by way of limitation, furnishing 30.5M high
light poles complete with pole shaft, luminaires, anchor bolts, lowering mechanisms with
supporting cables, power cable, lantern support ring, head frame assembly, hoisting assembly and
accessories, and miscellaneous items such as circuit breakers, terminal boards, receptacles,
necessary to provide complete and working lighting units.
In the event the Contractor proposes luminaires of greater weight and/or greater projected area,
the Contractor shall submit, with shop drawings, computations of all stresses in the pole base plate
and anchor bolts all in accordance with BS EN 40 Lighting Columns. The final size of all anchor bolts
and base plates shall be as approved by The Department.
The Contractor shall submit to The Department with their shop drawings a certificate from a
registered structural engineer that the proposed light pole design meets the requirements specified
herein.
The Contractor shall also submit to The Department, after manufacture, a notarized statement
certifying that the light pole luminaire support ring, head frame and all appurtenances and lowering
device were built in accordance with the specified design standard.
2.2.2. Materials
Light poles shall be fabricated from high strength structural galvanized steel, meeting the
requirements ASTM A595, Grade B. The light poles shall have a one-piece, steel base plate and
anchor plate complying with the requirements of ASTM A588 and shall be of the shape, size and
thickness as indicated on the Drawings. The light pole shall be capable of withstanding wind speeds
of 160 kph with gust factor of 1.14 when equipped with maximum 6 luminaires of the maximum
weight and windage area.
All light poles shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of BS EN 40 Lighting Columns.
Standard pole shape shall be polygonal (other pole shapes can be discussed with The Department).
Anchor bolts for the light poles shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A675 or equivalent. The
anchor bolts shall be of the sizes and dimensions indicated on the Drawings and as approved by The
Department. Fabrication details are not indicated on the Drawings. Threaded ends of anchor bolts
and nuts are to be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153 and as indicated on the
Drawings. Each bolt in the anchor bolt assembly shall have a threaded section and the bolts shall
be double hex nutted with hardened washers for levelling purposes.
The complete pole unit and appurtenances shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 and
A385, unless otherwise specified herein. Precautions shall be taken against embrittlement, warpage
and distortion in accordance with ASTM A143 and A384. All pole sections shall be galvanized inside
and outside after assembly of the base plate to the pole section. A minimum of 0.70 kg/m2 of zinc
shall be the average applied, with no single point being less than 0.61 kg/cm2.
The chemical composition and mechanical properties of the structural steel shall be submitted in
accordance with these Standard Specifications.
Luminaires shall comply with the requirement of Part 1 Section A.
2.2.3. Construction
The base plate of the light pole shall be of the shape, size and thickness as indicated on the Drawings
and shall be secured to the lower end of the light pole shaft by complete penetration butt welding
or fillet welding, in accordance with the requirements of BS EN 40. The Contractor shall submit all
necessary data with the shop drawings to prove that the proposed welding method is in accordance
with approved standards. Additional fillet welds shall be used when deemed necessary by The
Department. The base shall be provided with holes to receive the anchor bolts of the number, size
and placement, as indicated on the Drawings. An earthing lug and nut shall be provided on the
inside of the shaft near the hand hole. The bottom of the base plate in contact with the concrete
foundation shall be coated with black bituminous paint.
The pole shall consist of tapered steel sections with slip joints that can be mechanically fitted
together in the field, and further consist of nuts, bolts, washers and incidentals necessary to
complete the assembly and may include a base plate, anchor bolt covers, pole cap, or handhole and
cover, as required on the Drawings. All exposed surfaces of the poles shall be of smooth even
texture, free from marks, burrs, sharp edges, or imperfection. For the 30.5 metre pole, a maximum
of three sections will be allowed. Slip joints shall have a minimum overlap of 1½ times the diameter
of the bottom of the upper section. The sections shall be pre-fitted and match-marked at the
factory. In the field, the sections shall be mechanically fitted using factory supplied equipment. Slip
fitted light poles shall not be shipped assembled. The Contractor shall submit field assembly
procedures which shall have been prepared by the manufacturer for The Department’s review and
approval.
The light poles shall be straight and centered on their longitudinal axis under no wind conditions so
that, when examined with a transit from any direction, the deviation from the normal shall not
exceed 3.0mm within any 1.5m of height.
The light poles shall be provided with a handhole opening at the base of the pole. Approximate size
of the opening shall be 25cm x 100cm, final size to be approved by the Department. The handhole
shall have a reinforced frame and cover to maintain the original strength of the pole. The pole shaft
at the handhole opening shall be suitably reinforced inside to maintain the original pole strength.
The handhole covers shall be a weather-proof hinged door, fabricated of the same steel used for
the pole. There shall be a drip gutter located above the door to prevent water from entering the
handhole. All pole doors shall be flush mounted dual locked with anti-tamper bolts and shall be
master keyed. There shall be a stainless steel chain with welded loop and class 316L-material
strength, between the pole and the door to ensure the door cannot be lost if incorrectly secured.
Typical size and dimension of anchor bolts and base plates for light poles as indicated on the
Standard Drawings are based on a luminaire weight of (45 kg) and luminaire windage area of (0.29
square metres) with wind loads as specified in Clause 2.1.2. The Contractor must provide all
calculations based on the design to be used in the construction and as per BS EN 40. The final size
and dimension of all anchor bolts and base plates shall be as approved by the Engineer.
The pole base shall be provided with an adequate method of discharging any accumulated
moisture. Where grout is used between the base plate and the top of foundation, to seal it,
provisions shall be made for adequate drainage. Grout shall be as specified in Part 1 Chapter 4,
Concrete Works of the Roads Standard Specification for Construction.
The light pole system shall be provided with a circuit breaker of the rating indicated on the
Drawings. There shall be a power twist lock disconnect receptacle in the pole base. The circuit
breaker shall be suitably de-rated for Abu Dhabi climatic conditions, as such, no further de-rating
will be required.
Prior to shipment and storage at the construction site, all light poles shall be carefully wrapped with
a non-staining paper to preserve the finish.
2.2.4. Luminaire Support Ring and Head Frame
The light poles shall be equipped with a luminaire support ring system and head frame that can be
lowered by a winch to within one meter of the surface of the ground.
The luminaire support ring shall be designed for the symmetrical mounting of maximum six (6)
luminaires as indicated on the Contract plans.
The head frame assembly shall be attached to the pole top by means of a steel slip fitter and secured
by screws as required, or by welding.
The head frame shall also include three latching devices to support the luminaire support ring
assembly when the lowering device is not in operation. The spring used as part of the latching
devices shall be made of stainless steel material.
The head frame assembly shall be provided with an anti-bird entry device as approved by The
Department to prevent birds from entering the pole shaft and damaging the wires.
A watertight twist-lock power receptacle shall be provided on the lantern support ring to allow
testing of lanterns while in lowered position. The inner portion of the ring shall be equipped with
an approved shock absorbing system protecting the pole and lantern during the raising-lowering
operation.
2.2.5. Lowering Winch
The winch (for raising and lowering the luminaire support ring) shall be totally enclosed and
permanently lubricated and shall be of such design and gear ratio that the lowering can be
accomplished at a rate of approximately 5 meters per minute. The winch shall be operated by a
reversible electric motor or power tool unit and shall be powered from a 230 V weatherproof outlet
or receptacle located in the service area of the light pole. The winch shall be self-locking. One full
layer of steel rope shall be retained on the drum when the carriage is lowered to ensure correct
rope stacking.
The power tool unit shall be capable of being installed at the service entrance and means shall be
provided for its remote control from a distance of 5 meters. A torque limiter shall be furnished with
the power tool unit. Mechanisms using a built-in electric motor shall be equipped with an automatic
shut-off to stop the motor when the ring is in the top position or at the lowered ground position.
The hoisting and power sheaves shall be made of stainless steel materials. The groove diameter of
the sheaves shall be coordinated with the diameter of the stainless steel hoisting cables and the
diameter of the power cable.
The entire hoisting system shall be designed so that power cable, suspension cables, and hoisting
cables may be replaced from the ground.
Three stainless steel aircraft hoist cables of 4.8 millimetres diameter or greater shall be provided.
The main winch cable shall be 6.35 millimetres diameter or greater stainless steel aircraft cable.
Each cable shall have a safety factor of not less than 5 times the safe working load of the winch.
2.2.6. Portable Power Tool
The Contractor must provide a portable power tool unit coupled with torque limiter, power
mounting frame and remote control switch suitable to supply driving power to the winch assembly
for raising and lowering the lantern support ring and head frame.
The power unit shall be portable, heavy duty, reversible electric motor, 1.5 horse-power minimum,
suitable for operating from 230V, 50 Hertz power supply. Part of the power unit shall be a remote
control unit with at least 5 meters of power cable to permit the operator to stand 5 meters away
from the pole base during the lowering and raising operation.
2.3 Light Poles- 20m, 18m, 14m, 12m, 10m and 8m
2.3.1. General
This work shall include, but not by way of limitation, furnishing the 20.0m, 18.0m, 14.0m, 12.0m,
10.0m and 8.0m high light poles, complete with pole shaft, base plate, luminaires, anchor bolts,
appurtenances and all accessories and incidentals for the complete installation as indicated on the
Contract plans and as specified herein Light poles up to a height of 14m shall be of one solid piece
other than the bracket. Poles of 18.0m and 20.0m height shall be made of not more than two
sections.
With their shop drawings, the Contractor shall submit computations of all stresses in the pole base
plate and anchor bolts all in accordance with BS EN 40. The final size and dimensions of all anchor
bolts and base plates shall be as approved by the Engineer.
Where banners are to be provided on light poles, the Contractor shall ensure that the design for
the proposed light pole, base plate, anchor bolts and foundation takes into account the additional
forces exerted onto the light pole. The light pole banner system shall be supplied from a recognized
light pole banner system manufacturer, approved by The Department.
The Contractor shall submit to The Department with his shop drawings a certificate from a
registered structural engineer that the proposed light pole design meets the requirements specified
herein.
The Contractor shall also submit to the Engineer, after manufacture, a notarized statement
certifying that the light pole and all appurtenances were built in accordance with the specified
design standards.
2.3.2. Materials
Light poles shall be fabricated from high strength structural steel, galvanized, meeting the
requirements of ASTM A-572, Grade 50. The light poles shall be welded longitudinally along its
height. The weld line shall be smooth and the surface of the pole and the finish shall be even. The
light poles shall have a one-piece, steel base plate and anchor plate complying with the
requirements of ASTM A588 with minimum yield strength of 3600 kg/cm2 for 10.0m/14.0m pole
and 4300 kg/cm2 for 18.0m and 20.0m pole shall be of the shape, size and thickness as indicated
on the Contract plans. The light poles shall be capable of withstanding wind speeds of 160 km/hr
with gust factor of 1.14 when equipped with 4 luminaires of the maximum weight and windage
area.
All light poles shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of BS EN 40. Pole shape shall
be polygonal for all 20.0m, 18.0m, 14.0m and 12.0m high poles and polygonal or round for all 8.0m
and 10.0m high poles.
Anchor bolts for the light poles shall comply with the requirements of ASTM A675, Grade 90, with
minimum yield strength of 3867 kg/Sq. cm for 10.0M, 12.0M and 14.0M light pole and 4300 kg/cm2
for 18.0M and 20.0M pole. The anchor bolts shall be of the sizes and dimensions indicated on the
Contract plans and as approved by the Engineer. Fabrication details are not indicated on the
Contract plans. Threaded ends of anchor bolts and nuts shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance
with ASTM A153. Each bolt in the anchor bolt assembly shall have a threaded section and each bolt
shall be double hex nutted with hardened washers for levelling purposes.
Luminaires shall comply with the requirement of Part 1 Section A, or any particular specification
provided.
The complete pole units and appurtenances shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 and
A385 unless otherwise specified herein. All pole sections shall be galvanized inside and outside after
assembly of the pole cap and base plate to the pole section. A minimum of 0.70 kg. of zinc per
square meter shall be the average applied with no single point being less than 0.61 kg per square
meter.
The chemical composition and mechanical properties of the structural steel shall be submitted in
accordance with these Standard Specifications.
2.3.3. Construction
The base plate of the light pole shall be secured to the lower end of the shaft by double fillet welds
in accordance with requirements of BS EN 40. The Contractor shall submit all necessary data with
shop drawings to prove that the proposed welding method is in accordance with approved
standards. Additional fillet welds shall be used when deemed necessary by The Department. The
base shall be provided with holes to receive the anchor bolts of the size and placement indicated
on the Contract plans. An earthing lug with nut shall be provided on the inside of the shaft near the
handhole as indicated on the Drawing. The bottom of the base plate in contact with the concrete
foundation shall be coated with black bituminous paint.
The pole shall be complete with nuts, bolts, washers and incidentals necessary to complete the
assembly and shall include a base plate, anchor bolt enclosure plate, pole cap, handhole and cover,
all as required in the Contract plans. All exposed surfaces of the poles shall be of smooth even
texture, free from marks, burrs, sharp edges, and other imperfections.
The light poles shall be straight and plumb on their vertical axes under no wind conditions.
The light poles shall be provided with a handhole opening at the base of the pole. Approximate size
of the opening shall be 12cm x 20cm or as required to match the electrical cut-out size. The pole
shaft at the hand hole opening shall be suitably reinforced to maintain the original strength of the
pole. The handhole cover shall be fabricated of the same steel used for the pole. Hinges for the
hand hole cover shall be stainless steel and all doors shall be lockable using 4mm Allen Screws.
All 20.0m, 18.0m, 14.0m, 12.0m, 10.0m and 8.0m high light poles in paved locations shall be
provided with a galvanized steel or cast aluminium removable enclosure plate to cover the anchor
bolts as indicated on the Contract plans or as approved by The Department. Cast aluminium
enclosures shall be suitably painted to match the appearance of the pole finish.
A galvanised steel flag pole holder shall be fixed to the pole shaft at a height determined by The
Department. The materials, configuration and construction of the flag pole holder shall match those
on existing poles unless otherwise directed by The Department.
The pole base shall be provided with an adequate method of discharging any accumulated
moisture. Where grout is used between the base plate and the top of foundation, to seal it,
provisions shall be made for adequate drainage. Grout shall be as specified in Part 1 Chapter 4,
Concrete Works of the Roads Standard Specification for Construction..
Prior to shipment and storage at the construction site, all light poles shall be carefully wrapped with
a non-staining paper to preserve the finish.
2.4. Mid-Hinged Poles
The Contractor shall supply mid-hinged light poles with the following specifications from 10.0M to
30.5M high light poles.
• All masts and brackets shall be designed to meet the wind loading requirements of 160kph
with a gust factor of 1.14 .
• The steel used for the construction of the mast and bracket shall be to ASTM A6 and all
welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1, American Welding Society Structural
Welding Code or comparable International standard. All Manufacturers’ certificates shall
be supplied with respect to the steel used in the mast.
• The mast shaft shall have, as standard, an octagonal or polygonal cross-section
continuously tapered and longitudinally welded. Other cross section shapes can be
proposed as must be agreed with The Department during submission stage. No
circumferential weld shall be acceptable, except at the mid-hinged point.
• The high mast shall be designed to accommodate a set of four or six luminaires and
associated brackets for achieving the luminance level requirement as specified in Part 1,
Section A, Clause 4.3. A hand hole shall be provided in the base of the mast of adequate
dimensions to permit clear access to install the cut-out. The hand hole shall be complete
with a close fitting weather-proof door lockable by 4mm Allen Screws. The door seam
tightness shall conform to IP 54 standard. The opening shall be adequately reinforced to
maintain the strength of the mast.
• The base flange shall be free of laminations and the welded connection to the mast shall
fully develop the strength of the section. The base plate shall be manufactured as per the
specific loading requirement.
• Inside each mast there shall be an earthing lug with nut.
• The entire mast and bracket shall be hot-dip galvanised internally and externally in
accordance with ASTM A123.
• All component parts or fasteners shall also receive the same hot-dip galvanised treatment,
threaded components centrifugally spun to remove local excess of zinc.
• The Contractor shall supply three set of rope (hook fixed to the end of the rope), Pulley, D-
shakle, rubber laminated counter weight and stainless steel grade AISI 316L hook for every
project. (Where the supplied pole quantities are more than 200 numbers, an additional one
set of ropes shall be provided for each 200 number of poles supplied.)
• the Galvanising of the pole shall have a minimum of 0.70 kg/m2 of zinc (average applied),
with no single point being less than 0.61 kg/cm2.11. Coating weight shall be determined by
a suitable magnetic or electronic measuring device. However, in cases of dispute, The
Department may direct that a stripping test in accordance with ASTM A123 be carried out.
• The Contractor shall provide a Technician at site to demonstrate the assembly procedures.
The manufacturer shall ensure that the moving parts and fixed parts of the mid-hinged pole
have a free movement without friction.
• The mast shall be hinged approximately midway above the base so that it may be
raised/lowered by means of externally operated rope and counter weight. The rope shall
be portable and to be easily detachable for use with other high masts. Alignment of the
mid-hinged poles shall be properly fixed by the Contractor.
• The Contractor shall afford every facility for the inspection of the mast and shall carry out
tests on materials and welds as may be instructed by the Engineer and the Owner. Material
or workmanship which is not in accordance with the Specification shall be replaced by the
Contractor at his own cost and risk.
• The spindle of mid-hinged mast shall be stainless steel grade AISI 316L.
• All bolts, nuts, locking screws and door chain shall be stainless steel Grade AISI 316L.
• Copper braid for electrical conductivity to be provided between fixed and movable sections.
• The mast shall have a special arrangement in order to impose no stress or pulling force
upon the mast internal cabling.
• At mid-hinged point there shall be arrangements to prevent ingress of water, moisture and
dust (Minimum IP54). The position of the hinge opening to be downward when the masts
are packed, so that, dust and rain shall not enter the hinge opening and damage the mast.
• Stainless steel rod of grade AISI 316L shall be provided for slip joint adjustment.
• The cables support plate at mid-hinged point shall be provided to secure the luminaire wire
to eliminate any stress on power cables.
• Provision of securing the movable part with the fixed part in lowered position shall be made
by using hooks and rope. Securing the movable jacket with the fixed pole shaft shall be
made by stainless steel prevailing torque with metal insert type hexagonal nut H, M24 AISI
316L – D shackle shall be provided to secure the locking system of jacket.
• The material and structural properties of the light pole for similar height shall be equal to
or better than the requirements included in Clauses 2.1 & 2.2
• All structural calculations showing the maximum forces encountered in the mast while
lowering or raising the mast to be submitted.
• All structural calculations showing the maximum forces on the foundation and the mast
holding down bolts/while lowering or raising the mast to be submitted.
• All structural calculations showing the forces encountered by the wind loading to be
submitted.
• All structural calculations showing the max top flexation under given wind load and the
forces occurring on the holding down bolts to be submitted.
• All structural calculations showing the maximum forces and pressure encountered by the
mast raising and lowering equipment during operation to be submitted.
• Details of the power supply cable tension release facility in the top of the mast to be
submitted.
• Shop drawings showing general dimensions of all components of the pole include mounting
bracket (s) for single and multiple luminaire array.
• Detailed scaled drawings of both pole and luminaire mounting brackets.
• Detail of the fixing and locking system between the pole and the lanterns mounting bracket.
• The Contractor may submit any new treatment method for extra protection against
corrosion of the base pate area and up to the height of 300mm.
• Detail structural calculations of the necessary strength for anchor bolts to be used should
be submitted for different heights of the pole and different locations in the pole such as
banners, traffic signal heads, CCTV equipments and sign boards, etc.
• Instructions for assembling two section poles shall be indicated in detail. If special tools are
required, the Contractor shall include one complete set and the price is included in the Bid
of Quantities for the pole.
• Impact resistance calculations at a height of one meter above the base plate of the column
shall be provided.
• Maximum tolerable impact calculations to shear the plate from the pole from an impact
point one meter above the flange plate shal be provided.
• All structural calculations shall be approved by a third party certification authority and the
same documents shall be submitted for The Department’s approval.
The Contractor shall provide a written undertaking of the Warranty from the pole supplier,
accompanied with the written proof of the local representative's UAE Operating License and
established UAE background, to the satisfaction of the Owner to warranty the materials and
performance as follows:
i. Provide a written twenty five (25) year on-site replacement material fixture
finish, and workmanship. On-site replacement included transportation,
removal and installation of new product. Finish warranty shall include
warranty against corrosion, failure or substantial deteriorations such as
blistering, cracking, peeling, chalking or fading. The warranty shall include
for maintained aesthetic integrity of the decorative pole and assembly,
without any partial or complete separation, dislocation, disjointing, flaring,
etc. of any elements of the pole and assembly with no cost to the Owner.
ii. Provide a written twenty five (25) year replacement warranty for defective
poles with no cost to the Owner.
2.5 Multi-Function Light Poles

2.5.1. General
Multi- Function poles shall be of a type that can accommodate a variety of applications. The pole
shall be made up of an extruded aluminium or steel mast that enables proprietary accessories to
be mounted along its length and height and position. The finish colour and design of the pole and
accessories shall be as agreed with the Owner for the project. Where required by design conditions
structural reinforcing steel cores shall be used to reduce deflection of pole for accessories' weight
requirements. If the steel core is in contact with Aluminium, the manufacturer shall ensure that bi-
metallic corrosion is prevented by means approved by the Engineer and the Owner. All poles shall
be linked by standard components, function and design. A design shall comply with BS EN 40. Each
service signs shall be installed at recommended height included in relevant standards. The
Contractor should ensure that each service signs are not in conflict when all are installed.
2.5.1.1. Monitoring and Control Centre (MCC) Hybrid poles (Multi-Function)

All projects may require MCC Hybrid poles to be installed as part of the lighting network.
Developers/Consultants/Contractors must contact MCC prior to finalising any roadway lighting
design to obtain MCC Hybrid pole locations and the full specification for the pole. The Abu Dhabi
Lighting Manual Part 2- Applicable Standard Details- Detail L35 provides Hybrid Pole Typical
Details.
2.5.2. Materials
a. Foundations
Structural analysis calculations shall be submitted to show that the foundation design
meets the load of the given pole type in its “Full Loaded" state. Unless otherwise stated it
is assumed the pole will sit above foundation on a 100mm bed on non-shrink grout. The
base plate needs to be strictly the above ground level to avoid corrosion. The design details
shall be submitted for the Engineer, local authorities and the Owner's review and approval.
b. Service Hatches
Each pole shall have two service hatches approximately, first hatch approximately 400mm
from ground level with the second 100mm above the second on the opposite side of the
pole where the connection of cables can be made between the outside network and the
pole accessories. One service hatch shall be used for roadway lighting and the remaining
one for other services. The service hatch shall be accessible without removing the cover
plate or cladding from the pole base. The cover shall be fixed by two screws. The hand hole
cover shall be fixed with hinges made of corrosion resistant materials such as stainless-steel
grade 316L, brass, hot-dip galvanized steel, etc. as applicable based on the pole and cover
plate material and shall be lockable by 4mm Allen Screws. The hand holes shall house
general purpose outlets (GPO) that can be accessed through an external lockable hatch. For
poles heights less than 10m one hand hole will be acceptable.
c. Foundation Conduits
Electrical conduits shall be installed through the foundation and shall enter the poles from
under the base plate.
d. Steel work
All steel work shall be manufactured out of BS grade S355 steel for 8.0m to 14.0m poles or
as appropriate to a pole of a Iower height. Hot dipped galvanizing (100microns minimum
coating thickness) surface treatment shall be applied to both internal and external surfaces.
The base plate, anchor bolts and pole properties such as the material and structural
requirements shall be equal or better than the requirements included in Clause 2.2. All
additional fixtures shall be on steel attachments of BS Grade S275 with hot dipped
galvanizing (100microns minimum). The base plate shall be manufactured as specified on
the Contract plans. Where steelwork is in contact with aluminium work; the manufacturer
shall ensure that bi-metallic corrosion is prevented by means approved by The Department.
e. Aluminium work
Where aluminium poles are to be specified, they shall be made up of extruded aluminium
alloy (6063/6082-T6) which shall have an anodized protective coating finish to 25 microns.
The colour of the anodized finish shall be as approved by The Department. The transition
rim shall be cast aluminium alloy of grade LM6 having coating of minimum 100microns of
polyester powder coating, type PE-SDF matching the approved colour of the anodized
extruded aluminium.
f. Bracketry and Base Plate Cover

Pole brackets and base plate cover shall be manufactured out of ASTM A36/ASTM 618gr3.
This shall have high strength, be easily machinable able to handle an array of finishes. All
steel components shall be hot- dip galvanized to a minimum thickness of 100microns and
painted as advised by The Department. The base plate cover shall be supplied along with
the pole.
g. Fasteners
All fasteners supplied shall be made of corrosion resistant materials such as stainless steel;
- Grade 316L, brass; hot-dip galvanized steel etc., based on the materials with which it will
be in contact. Bi-metallic contact shall be properly designed to avoid any galvanic or bi-
metallic corrosion.
h. Electric Equipment
M8 x30mm long threaded stud carrying two nuts and two washers shall be provided as an
earth point. It shall be located with the service hatch. The electrical termination cut-outs
shall be supplied in accordance with the requirements included in Part 1 Section I and as
shown on the Contract. Each pole shall be provided with a polyethylene rope (dia. 4mm)
"draw wire" to assist in feeding electrical and service cables.
i. Product Identification Tag

The name of the lighting pole manufacturer and the date of manufacture shall be clearly
marked using an aluminium name tag affixed to the column in an appropriate location and
manner to suit the column design and access.
j. Copper Content
All Aluminium Die-cast components shall have a very low copper content of less than 0.1%.
2.5.3. Assembly
a. Assembly of Pole
The pole shall be complete with all accessories and all necessary component assembly
undertaken at the factory. The final assembly of pole and components shall be ready for
installation at site without any works required other than using suitable fixing tools.
b. Mast arm for the Lanterns

The mast arm for the luminaire shall be fitted on site to the pole. The attachment of the
mast arms shall be made of standard fasteners through the structural casting. The mast
arm shall be self-supporting against all forces including uplift, without the use of any guy
wires unless approved by The Department. The luminaire shall be fixed to the mast arm
and electrically wired. Finally, the cable end shall be connected to the electrical cut-out
installed in the hand hole located in the pole base. Additionally, the arm shall be rotatable
by over 90° on either side, to allow for convenience of maintenance.
c. Additional Assembly
Provisions shall be made on the pole for enabling the fixing of other accessories such as
fabric or electric banners, street signs, CCTV cameras or traffic signal heads (by others) after
the installation of the poles. These provisions shall allow for future additional accessories
to be added without having to remove the existing installed accessories, luminaire brackets,
etc. The provisions shall be such as to ensure the clean, aesthetic look is maintained and
shall allow for complete dismantling when not in use, without leaving behind any clamps,
lugs, etc...
d. Pole Base Cladding

The pole base cladding shall be as approved by The Department. The pole base cladding
shall normally be kept plain but where a decorative base cladding pattern is selected by The
Department, this pattern shall be included in the Contract plans and Particular
Specifications.
Where a decorative pattern shall be used for the cladding at the base of the pole it shall be
made from laser cut, anodized or PE-SDF powder coated aluminium sheeting, UV stabilised,
scratch-resistant polycarbonate incorporating LED lighting as shown on the Contract plans
or as advised by The Department. The LED strip shall be hidden behind the polycarbonate
sheet and shall be fixed to the decorative base with appropriate adhesives. LED wattage
shall be finalized on product testing.
2.5.4. Design Submission and Production
a. Design for Strength

The poles shall be capable of withstanding a basic wind speed of 160 km/hr, with a gust
factor of 1.14 when equipped with the actual number of specified luminaires and the
associated fittings or accessories as approved by The Department. All poles shall be
designed in accordance with the requirements of the latest edition of BS EN 40. Design
calculations shall be submitted, for the Department approval, showing the following:
i. Wind load derivation (hand calculation) on lanterns and mounted
accessories
ii. Wind loading derivation (hand calculation) on the pole
iii. Sectional area of the pole at regular intervals of height along the pole,
especially at areas of cross-section change and hand hole opening
iv. Stress at the intervals specified in (iii) above.
v. Strength of the pole at the intervals specified in (iii) above
vi. Combined Stress Ratios at the intervals specified in (ii) above
vii. CAFL check (Constant Amplitude Fatigue Limit)
b. Design for Deflection

Actual deflection against the deflection limit of the plies shall be clearly stated in the design
calculations and shall conform to BS EN 40. The actual deflection calculated shall be based
on the basic wind speed of 160 km/hr with a gust factor of 1.14 and shall be measured at
the luminaire position. The calculated deflection shall be the sum of deflection on the
vertical pole section as well as the outreach bracket arm section. Deflection of both the
vertical pole and the arm shall be shown in the design submission.
c. Design calculations
Design calculations shall show the pole deflection and shall be checked against the
allowable deflection and special deflection limits required for high-definition cameras or
traffic signal poles where applicable.
d. Notarized Statement
A notarized statement attested by the UAE Embassy, certifying the poles were built
conforming to the manufacturer's approved drawings and design calculations, shall be
submitted after completion of manufacture, and prior to delivery of poles to site. Pole
delivery to project site shall not be accepted without this.
2.5.5. Quality Assurance
The Department shall request standard production model samples, identical to the proposed,
product to be installed. The Department may request independent testing of the sample poles to
verify the performance and compliance with the specifications. The Department shall be the sole
judge regarding the acceptability of the performance of the light poles. According to the
requirements of the Project’s Contract documents, if required The Department reserves the right
to attend, or appoint a third party to attend a factory inspection. During a factory inspection, the
manufacturer shall perform a full deflection test, as agreed jointly with an accredited independent
test house and The Department, on a randomly selected pole from the manufactured lot, for each
type of ordered pole to establish the design compliance and structural integrity of the
manufactured pole under simulated conditions of full loading, strictly in accordance with the
approved design calculations and drawings. Different options of the base or lower cladding unit
shall be shown on the contract drawings. The Department will choose one option during the
material review process and the sample shall be submitted accordingly.
Project Submission Requirement:- The Contractor shall submit the following design calculations
and data for Department’s approval prior to the fabrication of any components for all light poles:
1. General dimensions of all component parts.
2. The full structural design calculations as per the requirements of BS EN 40.
3. Shop drawings and all technical data.
3. Painting and Numbering of Light Poles
3.1. Painting of Light Poles
All light poles installed by the Contractor shall be given decorative and remedial painting at the time
of installation. The type of paint and colour shall be as approved by The Department. All painting
and surface preparation shall comply with applicable requirements of Part 2- Roads, Standard
Construction Specification Chapter 24- Painting unless otherwise directed by The Department.
3.2. Numbering of Light Poles
All light poles shall be numbered as required by The Department and as shown bin Table 3.2.1.1.
The pole numbering shall be provided using an aluminium name plate fixed from the factory
premises by the Manufacturer. An electronic bar coding shall be included in the name plate, so that
The Department Asset Management Division’s personnel can retrieve necessary information using
an appropriate scanner. The information’s necessary to be included in the bar codes shall be as
determined by The Department.
3.2.1. Numbering Requirements
Table 3.2.1.1 Light Pole Numbering Requirements
Details No. Of Digit Example

Location Area XXXXXX AA, AD, ADH*
Road Number XXXXXX E10, E11, E12, ...etc.
Road Name XXXXXX Al Khaleej Al Arabi
Road KM Label only KM without K000 K 120
fraction
Light Pole Identification & Serial XX-0000 HM-0005**
Number
Circuit Number CKT-00 CKT-01
Light Control Cabinet Number LCC-000 LCC-010
Note:
*
– AA: Al Ain
– AD: Abu Dhabi
– ADH: Al Dhafra
**
– S: For Decorative Light Poles
– P: For Light Poles 8.0m up to 12.0m Height

– L: For Light Poles 14.0m up to 16.0m Height
– M: For Light Poles 18.0m Height
– H: For Light Poles 20.0m – 25.0m Height
– HM: for Light Poles 30.5m Height
4. Foundations for Lighting Poles
4.1. Description
The foundations for 30.5m, 20.0m, 18.0m, 14.0m, 12.0m, 10.0m and 8.0 light poles shall be
furnished and installed by the Contractor as indicated on the Contract plans and as specified herein.
Foundations for light poles shall include, but not by way of limitation, all excavating and backfilling,
concrete, reinforcement steel, anchor bolts, conduit and all appurtenances for the light pole
foundations.
4.2. Foundations for Light Poles
4.2.1. General
The locations of all light poles as indicated on the Contract plans shall be deemed to be schematic
and the final locations of all light poles shall be as directed or approved by The Department.
The conduit for light poles shall be, as indicated on the Contract plans, in compliance with the
requirements of Part 1- Section I, Clause 6.5.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Contract plans, all light pole foundations shall be drilled or bored
in the manner, at the locations and to the depths indicated on the Contract plans, as specified
herein and as approved by The Department.
Prior to proceeding with any foundation work for light poles, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer for approval shop drawings, complete details, calculations for the proposed light poles
and all related data for the light poles and the light pole foundations. The shop drawings shall
include all information for the construction of the foundations, including but not by way of
limitation, the temporary metal casings, equipment data, the proposed method of conduit
installation in the foundation, clear zones, working widths of the VRS/RRS and zone of intrusion
provisions. The method of installation shall be subject to approval of The Department.
.
The length or lengths of foundations as indicated on the Contract plans are the estimated minimum
length or lengths to be required for the light pole foundations. The final length of foundations shall
be as approved by The Department based upon actual conditions encountered in drilling. The
Contractor shall make a full analysis of the subsoil conditions and work that shall be required to
provide the drilled or bored concrete light pole foundations as specified.
4.2.2. Materials
All concrete for light pole foundations shall be cast in place using Class C35/20 as per Table 4-16 in
Part 1- Roads Standard Construction Specification Chapter 4. All concrete work shall comply with
all requirements of applicable Sections in Chapter 4, Part 1- Roads Standard Construction
Specification Chapter 4- Concrete Works. The foundation shall be allowed to cure a minimum of
seven (7) days before erecting light poles on the foundations.
All reinforcement steel in light pole foundations shall be reinforcement bars complying with
requirements of Part 1- Roads Standard Construction Specification Chapter 4 Section 4.1.2,
Materials for Concrete Works.
Foundations for light poles where indicated on the Contract plans shall be furnished with an earth
electrode complying with Part 1 Section I. The size and dimensions of the electrode shall comply
with Part 1, Section I, Clause 7.14 unless otherwise indicated on the Contract plans or specified in
the Particular Specifications.
4.2.3. Construction
Construction of all foundations for light poles shall comply with the following requirements:
Note: Lighting pole foundations shall be installed 150mm above agreed ground level except
where the lighting pole will be installed in a tiled area. Where lighting poles are installed in tiled
areas, they will be flush with the tiles. All foundation installation shall follow the Guidance of TR-
518.
1. All excavations for foundations for light poles shall be made by drilling, boring or sinking a casing
unless otherwise indicated on the Contract plans.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for testing all soil at the bearing levels indicated on the
Contract plans, and shall submit written reports to The Department as to the bearing capacity
at the depth indicated on the Contract plans and the coefficient of lateral subgrade reaction
over the proposed length of pile, and the acceptability of such soil to support the proposed
foundation and appurtenances. The Contractor shall make boreholes to depths, locations and
frequencies as directed by The Department. The frequency and depth of the boreholes shall
depend upon the soil conditions encountered and shall be of the discretion of The Department.
The total number of boreholes may or may not be equal to the total number of light poles. The
report on each borehole made shall include all information as directed by the Engineer and
specified in Part 1- Roads Standard Construction Specification Chapter 2 Section 2.1.3.1
Earthworks.
3. In the event unsuitable soil is encountered within the length indicated on the Contract plans
for the light pole foundations, the Contractor shall advise The Department as to the
unsuitability of such soil materials. The Contractor shall be responsible for designing the
extension of the depth of such light pole foundations to acceptable bearing. The design of such
foundations shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of the "Drilled Shaft
Manual,” Volume II, Implementation Package 77-21, as published by the U.S. Department of
Transportation Office of Research and Development, Implementation Division HDV-22,
Washington, D.C. 20590.
4. The Contractor shall employ an independent chartered engineer or registered engineer as
approved by The Department to design the increased depth of any such foundations. The
Contractor shall submit design calculations and other data required by The Department for
review before proceeding with extending the depth of such foundations.
5. The need for additional foundation depth shall be at the sole discretion of The Department.
6. The Contractor shall not proceed with further construction of such foundations until receiving
written directions from The Department. In the event the depths of the light pole foundations
are lowered below the elevations indicated on the Contract plans and as approved by The
Department, the additional depths will be paid for as specified herein or in the Particular
Specifications.
7. All drilled foundations shall be installed in the presence of The Department’s representative.
The Department shall be notified in writing a minimum of 48 hours in advance that the
Contractor is commencing operations to install drilled foundations so that The Department can
be present during the foundation work on a daily basis throughout the installation of the
foundations. All foundations shall be located to the lines and spacing indicated on the Contract
plans and shall be drilled vertically with a tolerance of one in fifty.
8. In cases where the intended bottom of foundation is in soil, bailing will not be permitted by The
Department. The Contractor shall take measures to ensure that the ground beneath the base
of the drilled or bored excavation is not disturbed by upward seepage pressure. In such cases
the Contractor shall ensure the stability of the excavation base by maintaining a net positive
hydraulic head within the casing. Concrete shall be placed by tremie all subject to the approval
of The Department.
9. The foundations shall be drilled with a casing being installed such that the bottom of the casing
is maintained below the bottom of the excavation at all times. If approved by The Department,
the casing may be withdrawn as the concrete is placed provided the bottom of the casing is
maintained below the top of the concrete while the concrete is being placed and if the
reinforcement, anchor bolts, and conduit can be maintained in their correct position during the
casing withdrawal. Otherwise, the casing must be left permanently in place unless alternative
construction methods are approved by The Department.
10. In the event that conditions, during drilling of holes for the foundations, indicate that a drilled
foundation is encountering an obstruction before reaching proper bearing stratum, the
Contractor shall bore or drill through the obstruction (after confirming that it is not an
underground utility) or shall use whatever means are necessary to remove or circumvent the
obstruction, without additional cost to The Department.
11. In the event the Contractor excavates to an elevation below that indicated on the Contract
plans or approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish and place Class C20/20 concrete
up to the bottom of the foundation as indicated on the Contract plans or as directed or
approved by Department at no additional cost to The Department.
12. The reinforcement steel cage shall be placed and secured symmetrically about the axis of the
foundation and shall be securely blocked to clear the sides of the casing.
13. Unless tremie methods for concrete placement are approved by The Department, the casing
shall be clean and free of water before the reinforcement steel and concrete are placed.
14. The drilling of holes for foundations, installation of reinforcement, placement of concrete and
all appurtenant work shall be carried out in a continuous, uninterrupted operation. Once a
foundation hole has been started, work shall be continuous so that concrete placement shall
be completed on the foundation without interruption of the Contractor's operation and so that
at no time shall work on a foundation be stopped or the drilled hole left open for any reason
unless specifically approved in writing by The Department.
15. The method of storing and handling of casings shall be such as to avoid damage to the casings.
16. All exposed parts of the concrete foundations extending above the natural or finished ground
line shall be finished smooth with a steel trowel or given a rubbed surface finished in
accordance with Part 1- Roads Standard Construction Specification Chapter Section 4.1.3.3
Concrete Works. The top of the foundations shall be constructed level to provide a proper
horizontal surface for erecting all light poles so that no shims or other levelling devices will be
needed.
17. PVC electrical conduit of the size indicated on the Contract plans shall be installed in the
foundations as indicated on the Contract plans and as directed by The Department.
18. Anchor bolts and PVC conduit shall be located securely in position during the placing of
foundation concrete.
5. Structural Testing
As per requirements of The Department, all existing lighting poles shall be structurally tested
through Non-Destructive Testing (NDT) methods using Ultrasonic Wave Technology to determine
the percentage Loss of Wall Thickness due to corrosion in the lighting pole. Refer to Sections 8 to
12 for Structural Testing Requirements.
6. Warranty
below.
a) A written warranty for a Minimum fifteen (25) year on-site replacement: material, fixture
finish, and workmanship. On-site replacement includes transportation, removal and
installation of new product. Finish warranty shall include warranty against corrosion,
failure or substantial deteriorations such as blistering, cracking or peeling (excluding
damage caused by contact with chemical substances, fertilizers, water containing corrosive
agents or stray electrical currents). The warranty shall include for maintained aesthetic
integrity of the pole and assembly, without any partial or complete separation, dislocation,
disjointing, flaring, etc. of any elements of the pole and assembly with no cost to The
Department*
b) A written warranty for a Minimum fifteen (25) year replacement material warranty for
defective poles and foundations with no cost to The Department*
(Please note: * With no cost to The Department does not just refer to the pole cost in regards
to any warranty actions. This also refers to any costs associated with labour for
removal/fitting of pole or components, obtaining Authority NOCs, traffic management
costs, transport etc. The Department will not be liaible for any associated costs
arising/necessary in relation to warranty actions) The manufacturer must contact DMT prior
to assigning any Contractor. These requirements are purely in regard to the terms of
Pole/Pole Equipment Warranties that must be provided to The Department at Handover.
It is not in any way in connection to the cover during the defects period which shall be
solely as per specific terms agreed between the manufacturer and Contractor.

Department, of the Warranty for The Department from the Supplier, accompanied with written
proof of the local representative’s UAE Operating License and established UAE background, to
warranty the materials and performance as stated within this clause and for the minimum periods
defined.
7. Light Pole Schedules
LIGHT POLES
Schedule “A”/”C”/”E”
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF STEEL FOR
30.5m/20m/18m/14m/12m/10m/8m LIGHT POLES
1. Table 1 Chemical Composition of Steel
Material Type and Classification
C%
Minimum
Maximum
Si%
Minimum
Maximum
Mn%
Minimum
Maximum
S%
Minimum
Maximum
P%
Minimum
Maximum
Table 2 Mechanical Properties

Tensile Strength Minimum (kg/cm2)
Yield Stress Minimum (kg/cm2)
Elongation Minimum Percent (%)
Table 3
Maximum Stress Allowed in __M High Pole,
kg/cm2
Manufacturer Contractor
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
To be completed by the Manufacturer and Submitted to The Department
LIGHT POLES
Schedule “A”/”C”/”E”
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF STEEL FOR
1. Table 1 Chemical Composition of Steel
C%
Minimum
Maximum
Si%
Minimum
Maximum
Mn%
Minimum
Maximum
S%
Minimum
Maximum
P%
Minimum
Maximum
Table 2 Mechanical Properties

Tensile Strength Minimum (kg/cm2)
Yield Stress Minimum (kg/cm2)
Elongation Minimum Percent (%)
Table 3
Maximum Stress Allowed in __M High Pole,
kg/cm2
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
LIGHT POLES
Schedule “B”/”D”/”F”
SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFICATIONS
Bill Item Number Precise Details of Minor Deviations from Specifications
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Part-1 Section C –Lighting Pole Structural Testing

This Section is a brief summary of the primary factors covered within this Part-1 Section-J of the
Lighting Manual.
The technical brief criteria developed within this Section aims to ensure the appropriate Structural
Testing requirements for existing roadway lighting poles and the methodology for determining the
pole age if this information is not available from the Department’s Assets Section. The technical
brief will also show how to determine when the roadway lighting pole should be replaced.
All lighting poles within a project area must be considered together whether it is
roadway/parking lighting only, landscape lighting only, or combined roadway/parking and
landscape lighting.
8.1. Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-C
a) Completion of structural testing of roadway lighting poles prior to changes in luminaire

or adding any additional equipment/sign onto the lighting pole
b) Visual inspection of the roadway lighting pole if the structural testing of the lighting
pole has been carried out previously and is recorded in the Department’s Asset Section.
c) Structural Testing and Inspection Pro Forma to be completed and submitted to the
Department
8.2. Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-C
a) Addition of any additional luminaires/equipment/signage without structural testing

having been carried out and submitted to the Department’s Asset Section
9. Methodology for Determining Action Age
9.1. General
The roadway lighting pole structural testing shall be in compliance with the requirements and
specifications of the Department.
All structural testing shall be carried by a qualified Consultant/Contractor and will follow the
requirements and instruction specified in this manual.
The Consultant/Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the project and all product
specifications are fully in compliance, without any deviation from this Manual, prior to forwarding
to The Department for approval. Any deviation should be brought to the notice of The Department.
The Consultant shall ensure in their design the following: integration, coordination, functionality
and accessibility of these services. It shall be the Consultant’s/ Contractor’s responsibility to bring
the system to the design & operating and maintenance conditions.
The Consultant shall as requested by The Department provide a detailed breakdown of the roadway
Lighting Pole testing information as per the requirements of this manual
9.2. Asset Age
The asset age should be requested from the Department’s Asset Management Section to allow a
full and detailed report to be compiled. This will also indicate to the Department if there are issues
with lighting poles installed in a certain year by certain manufacturers. Where no asset age is
available the consultant/contractor must use a scaling and weighting factor to approximate the
lighting pole age.
9.2.1. Determination of the Likelihood of Corrosion or Fatigue
In general, there is a lack of detailed information on how the light pole material and protective
coating (galvanising) deteriorate and affect the structural strength of the light pole. However, there
have been studies carried out to estimate the age at which the pole will start to develop corrosion
or fatigue issues. These studies have looked at the corrosion of steel lighting poles, taking into
account the protective treatments and the influencing factors such as location- coastal or not,
presence of salts in the air and soil, presence of chemicals (including weed-killers), abrasive
materials i.e. fine sand, strimmer cords, etc. The studies then allocated a “Most Favourable” and a
“Least Favourable” conditions which then determines the age of the light poles when the likelihood
of corrosion or fatigue will start. The full list of influencing factors can be reviewed in Table 9.2.1.1.
These influencing factors and their criteria scoring are then used to determine the poles “Action
Age” which is determined for the various different installation types.
Table 9.2.1.1- Influencing Factors that Derive Action Ages Scaling for Steel Lighting Poles
Code Value
*Code Factor
4 2 1
b Lighting Pole Height >8m 6 to 8m <6m
c Ground Conditions Poorly drained Moderately drained Well drained
Irrigation directly onto
d Presence of Irrigation Irrigation in area No Irrigation
pole
External Influences (dog urine, grass
e Residential Other Urban Rural
strimmer, chemicals, etc.)
Near sea front or in area
f Environmental Conditions of heavy industrial Inland, urban or industrial Inland, rural
pollution
Near sea front or Suburban or industrial Urban areas with
i Wind Protection lakeshore or in open rural areas and permanent minimum 15% of surface
area with few obstacles forests covered with buildings
l Attachments or Height Extension Yes No
Plate exposed but no Plate exposed but with
m Base Plate Buried baseplate
additional protection additional protection
*Note- the code factors are taken from a wide ranging study and only applicable codes and factors
are shown here.
By utilising the criteria values and factors detailed in Table 9.2.1.1, we will be able to calculate the
Action age of the lighting pole. This should be somewhere between the values shown in Table
9.2.2.1.
To carry out this calculation it is necessary to use formulae developed to determine this.
Scaling factor for corrosion of base mounted light poles=
[(b+i+l+4m½ {(m-1)(m-2)c/3+d+e+4f})/27.0]0.217
(Jordan, Evans and McKenzie 2005)
9.2.2. Action Age of Lighting Pole
By applying the conditions and weighting detailed in Table 9.2.1.1, the research provided the
approximate scaling factor to be used to determine the Action Age of the pole when the likelihood
of corrosion or fatigue would start. It looked at the most favourable and least favourable conditions
when determining the age of the pole. This can be seen in Table 9.2.2.1.
The Action Age is then determined by dividing the most favourable condition age from Table 9.2.2.1
by the calculated Scaling Factor.
Table 9.2.2.1- Corrosion of Steel Lighting Poles (Years)

Influencing Protective Treatment Fatigue cracking of
Factors External Protective Hot Dipped Galvanised Hot Dipped Galvanised steel lighting columns
Coating only and external Protective not designed for
Coating fatigue
Most
Favourable 20 32 40 40
Condition
Least
Favourable 10 16 20 15
Condition
9.2.3. Setting Priority Score for Testing (Asset Management)
Asset Management will collate all asset data provided by the consultant/contractor into an Asset
Management Database. This will allow all assets to be updated in respect to any maintenance and
inspection carried out. Each street lighting asset will have a defined guarantee period and must be
inspected/tested prior to the end of this period, out with of the periodic inspection requirements,
to ensure that the asset is still in good working order. The guarantee period is not always end of life
for the asset, which can still operate efficiently and safely for many years.
Where the assets have not been inspected/tested prior to the end of the guarantee period, the
asset management team must look to set a Priority Score as to which assets should be tested first.
The asset management team must categorise the Action Age of the pole and to prepare the Risk
Assessment model for the pole. It will also allow the Test and Inspection dates to be calculated as
per the information shown in Tables 9.2.1.1 & 9.2.2.1. To set the Priority Score for inspection the
calculation should be as follows: -
Priority Score = (Current Age – Action Age) – Certified Guarantee Period
Once the Priority scoring has been determined, the testing of the lighting poles should be
implemented to update the asset management database and to allow for the lighting pole
replacement budgets to be calculated for the next 5 years.
9.2.4. Priority Action Steps (Asset Management)
When the Asset Management system is fully functional, certain trends will become apparent within
the assets. It will be easily recognised that where certain types of poles have been installed that
there are associated problems occurring and a history can be compiled. This will allow the asset
management team to very quickly identify where potential problems may occur within the lighting
network. It is important that a Priority Action Steps process is provided and that the Department
Asset Management team follow these steps.
The steps in the process are shown in summary in Table 9.2.4.1 and in Flow Chart 9.2.4.1.
Table 9.2.4.1: Priority Action Steps

Step No. Process
1 All lighting poles that have a history of structural problems, including areas where they show
rapid corrosion, surface peeling, door deformities, height extensions, foundation bolt
corrosion, etc. should be categorised as a Priority 1 Class and should be inspected and tested
immediately.
2 All lighting poles that have a Current Age that exceeds their Action Age (refer to Table 2)
should be categorised as a Priority 1 Class and should be inspected and tested immediately.
3 Lighting poles with an Action Age that exceeds their Current Age should be categorised as a
Secondary Class for testing if their current age is greater than 24 years.
4 Lighting poles that have an Action Age that exceeds their Current Age require no immediate
action but should be monitored, inspected and tested on a periodic basis.
It may not be physically or financially possible to test all poles and as such it is important that an
agreed sample percentage (5%) is tested each year. Normally where lighting poles are installed at
the same time they will corrode at approximately the same rate, unless there are outside influences
such as damage to the light pole surface, irrigation water being directly sprayed onto the pole,
chemicals being sprayed onto the pole surface, etc. Visual inspections will determine these cases.
Flowchart 9.2.4.1- Priority Action Process
9.3. Replacement Programme Risk Assessment
The roadway lighting poles are normally located at the road edge, in the median or set back from
the vehicular traffic flow. The consequences of a catastrophic failure in the lighting pole will be
varied according to the location. Where the lighting pole is located in the median of the Avenues or
Boulevards, which normally have medium to high traffic speeds’ and greater lighting pole heights,
the consequences could be that the pole falls across the road causing primary and secondary
accidents to occur. Where the pole is in residential areas the consequences could be either damage
to parked vehicles or to pedestrians and could cause serious injury or fatalities. Lighting poles
situated in areas beside entertainment or shopping centers would affect pedestrians with injury or,
at worst, fatalities. What also has to be considered within the mandatory CMS/PLMS, is the
energisation of the lighting circuits to be live during the day and night to facilitate the Smart PLMS.
This will bring another risk and consequence to the structural integrity issue of the lighting poles.
A risk assessment must be considered as to where the replacement of defective lighting poles
programme should start. This risk assessment must look at the consequences of the catastrophic
failure of the lighting pole. Table 9.3.1.1 details the risk assessment and consequences of
catastrophic failure in the various areas. The risk assessment is used as per any other risk
assessment matrix with the weighting factor being multiplied by the criteria value to produce a
score. The total value from the risk assessment is then calculated by adding all scores together. To
finalise the scoring, a “normalisation factor” is then introduced to produce a score from 0 to 10
(where 0 lowest and 10 highest priority) which is then used to prioritise the replacement
programme.
9.3.1. Lighting Pole Risk Assessment Criteria
It is necessary to prioritise the light pole action programme based on the consequences of any
catastrophic failure of the lighting pole. Table 9.3.1.1 details the factors, weighting score and criteria
values to allow the calculation and prioritisation of the lighting pole actions to be carried out.
Table 9.3.1.1: Risk Assessment and Consequences

Code Factor Factor Code Value
Weight 4 2 1 0
Road Freeways Boulevards & Residential Not on a road
A 5
Category Highways Avenues Areas
Posted Speed >80kph 60 to 80kph 40 to 60kph Not on a road
B 5
Limit
Location On a bridge over On a bridge On a bridge Not on a
the Highway over a over a bridge or on a
C 5
Boulevard or Residential bridge over
Avenue Road open land
Pedestrian Footway, bus Footpaths and Local access No pedestrians
Density station, places cycle-tracks footpaths
D 6 of entertainment
or commercial
areas
Traffic Major disruption Moderate Minor Not on a road
E Disruption 1 disruption disruption or no
disruption
Location Sited on Median Sited at road Sited away Sited away
Contributing edge in from road but from
F to Accident or 1 pedestrian in pedestrian pedestrians
Injury area area and vehicular
traffic
Calculation Process Normalising Factor (NF)

1. Calculate Weighting Factor x Code Value for each Factor Near a Road NF = 25.6
2. Enter scores into consequence formula: F(A+B+C+D+E) Away From a Road NF = 2.4
3. Normalise using Normalising Factor (Divide Score by Normalising
Factor) to give a score between 0 and 10 (Priority replacement
score). The higher the score the more priority to be given.
Normalising Factors are used to consider whether the pole is near or away from a road.
Where Lighting is on a median it is assumed that there will be no pedestrians. Refer to
Examples in Appendix 3.
9.3.2. Priority Report Preparation – Red, Amber Green (RAG)
By following this report, the consultant/contractor will be able to prepare the:

• Action Age of the pole
• Priority Score
• Risk Assessment and Consequence Score
From these items it is now possible to prepare a RAG report to identify the requirement for lighting
pole replacement.
9.3.3. RAG Assessment Scoring
To determine where the lighting pole will sit in the RAG hierarchy, certain criteria must be
considered and a scoring system provided. Table 9.3.3.1 details the criteria and scoring system.
Table 9.3.3.1- RAG Scoring Criteria

Code Factor Scoring
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Urgent refer to Flowchart shown in
U Figure1. Immediate testing or
replacement
Action Age < Current Age (1 point
W
for each year)
Risk Assessment (1 point for
X
each point scored)
Priority Score (1 point for
Y
each point scored)
Is current age > 24 years (1 point for
Z
each year)
The full scoring criteria is then added by using the formula: -

Scoring Criteria = (W+X+Y+Z)
9.3.4. RAG Action Matrix
Once the scoring criteria has been determined, the required action by the Asset Management
team/consultant/contractor can be decided. Table 9.3.4.1 details the scoring requirements and
actions.
Table 9.3.4.1- RAG Action Matrix

RAG Risk Assessment Scoring Range Action
Category Rating
High ≥30 Urgent- carry out NDT specialist testing or replace lighting pole
immediately
Medium to High 20 to 29 Programmed for replacement within 5 years- Periodic Inspection and
Testing to be carried out on agreed percentage (5% minimum) of lighting
poles
Low to Medium 10 to 19 Programmed for replacement within 10 years. Periodic Inspection and
Testing to be carried out on agreed percentage of lighting poles.
No Action <10 Periodic Inspection and Testing to be carried out on agreed percentage of
lighting poles
Further to the required actions being detailed as per Table 9.3.4.1, it is mandatory that a cost
assessment must be prepared to show the budgetary requirements for the immediate replacement
and the longer term replacement programme. Cost assessment for the replacement of lighting
poles is often understated and as such many lighting poles that should be replaced are left in place
and will become a hazard. The cost assessment must take into account the following items-
• Disconnection of the electrical supply to the luminaire
• Removal of the existing luminaire
• Removal of the corroded/end of life lighting pole
• Supply of the new lighting pole
• Erection of the new lighting pole
• Installation of the luminaire (including communication node)
o If the existing luminaire is to be reused there is no cost for supply only installation
and connection.
o If a new luminaire is to be installed there has to be a cost for supply, installation
and connection
• Installation of gateways
• Commissioning
• Supervision
• Traffic Management
Project Submission Requirement:- The Consultant/Contractor shall prepare the following

submission for the Department:
1. Action Age of the existing lighting pole
2. Asset Age of the existing lighting pole
3. Priority replacemen schedule for te replacement of the existing lighting poles
4. Risk assessment for the replacement of the existing lighting poles
10. Asset Management Data Collection
A minimum amount of information must be collected on each asset. This information will allow the
Asset Management team and the Maintenance Section to have up to date information on each
asset and be able to assign time and budgets to preventative and cyclic (periodic inspection and
testing) maintenance. This information can be collected during maintenance visits, periodic
inspection or provided by the Developer/Client during installation and handover. To ensure that
the correct information is collected, Table 10.1 details the requirement and the Data Field Number
associated with the required information to be collected. This allows a Database to be constructed
where all information can be input and accessed by Data Field Number.
Table 10.1 is broken down into four distinct sections: -
• Geographic Data
• Asset Data
• Risk Assessment Data
• Operational Data
Table 10.1- Asset Management Data to be Recorded

Data Field No. Description Record
Geographic Data
1 Road Name
2 Road Number
3 Pole location on road (median/side /away from road/on bridge)
4 Unique Lighting Pole Identity Number
5 GIS Location
Asset Data
6 Date Installed
7 Pole Manufacturer
8 Mounting Height (m)
9 Bracket Length (mm)
10 Bracket Type (Single/Double)
11 Pole Material
12 Protective Coating
13 Pole Shape
14 Pole Base Protection (none / additional bitumen paint)
15 Number of Luminaires
16 Luminaire Manufacturer
17 Luminaire Model / Reference Number
18 Lamp Type (LED/SON/MH)
19 Lamp Wattage
20 Supply Point (Control Cabinet Number)
21 Additional Attachments (banners/signs, etc.)
22 Attachment Size
23 Attachment Approval
Risk Assessment Data
24 Presence of Irrigation
25 Road Type
26 Wind Exposure
27 On a Bridge
28 Traffic Disruption caused by catastrophic failure
29 Pedestrian Density
Operational Data
30 Date of last maintenance visit
31 History of last maintenance visit (what was the fault and remedy-
32 include
Date of equipment replaced)
last structural Inspection and Test
33 Date of next structural test

34 Structural Inspection and Test report Reference Number
35 Date last electrical Inspection and Test
36 Date of next electrical Inspection and Test
37 Electrical Inspection and Test report Reference Number
The Asset Management Section will record the relevant data from the list in Table 10.1. The
information shall be prepared by the Contractor during the installation period and handed over to
the Asset Management Section during the handover of the lighting network to the Department. To
ensure that the Asset Management database is kept up to date, it is important that this continual
record keeping is carried out by the maintenance contractor during their scheduled and non-
scheduled visits to the lighting network.
1. Asset Information is submitted to the relevant sections of the Department
11. Structural Inspection
To minimise the cost to the maintenance budget, it is imperative that every opportunity is used to
record information about the assets. Whether this is during cyclic maintenance, reactive
maintenance or specified inspection and testing regimes, it is important that the lighting
maintenance operative follows a set procedure to identify defects, record them on approved pro-
forma SIF 001 and submit them to the asset management and maintenance teams to allow the
relevant databases to be updated or the relevant maintenance operation to be programmed and
carried out. As such, it is important that all lighting operatives are provided training on identifying
the typical faults associated with the asset to allow them to accurately assess the asset condition.
There are two stages of structural inspection that must be considered for time and financial
reasons.
Stage 1- Detailed Visual Inspection (DVI)
Stage 2- Non-Destructive Testing (NDT)
11.1. Stage 1: Detailed Visual Inspection (DVI)
A detailed inspection of the lighting pole will often be enough to warrant replacing the pole without
carrying out any further Non-Destructive Testing (NDT). DVIs can assess the following defects: -
• Corrosion- damage to the protective coating of the lighting pole and the base plate.
• Corrosion of the anchor bolts.
• Missing, lose or damaged anchor bolts.
• Identification of irrigation water being sprayed onto the lighting pole surface and baseplate.
• Missing doors
• Damaged door locks and hinges.
• Corrosion and cracking around the door.
• Corrosion at bracket/pole joint.
• Misalignment of luminaire on the bracket.
• Damage to the bracket and luminaire.
• Missing bolts from the luminaire to bracket.

• Impact damage to the lighting pole.
• Check the base plate and bottom of the light pole if they are covered by soil. The salt in the
earth may cause corrosion.
It is important that the maintenance operative carries out the visual inspection every time they visit
the lighting pole for any kind of maintenance (including cleaning) and must record the findings
either on the hard copy pro forma or more appropriately on an electronic device that can be
downloaded and update the asset management data base directly and electronically which
removes the need for time consuming and laborious manual input. The visual inspection only adds
a few minutes to the maintenance operation but is vital to the continued safe operation of the
network.
11.1.1. Visual Inspection Categories
Once the visual inspection has been carried out the defects can be broken down into two
categories:
• Category 1- Immediate action

• Category 2- Programmed action
Table 11.1.1.1 details the defects Category 1 and 2 items.
Table 11.1.1.1- Category 1 & 2 Defects from Visual Inspection
Defect Category 1 Defect Category 2
Minor Corrosion- damage to the pole protection coating,
Major Corrosion - Visible holes in the pole
visible surface corrosion
Identification of irrigation water being sprayed onto the
Missing Door lighting pole surface and baseplate. NDT to be
programmed.
Damaged Door Lock or Hinges Corrosion and cracking around the door
Missing bolts from the luminaire to bracket Corrosion at bracket/pole joint
Major Impact damage to the lighting pole- where
misalignment of the pole has occurred or damage around
Minor Misalignment of luminaire on the bracket
the door area has caused issues with the electrical cut-out
inside the pole
Missing / loose / damaged anchor bolts Damage to the bracket and luminaire
Major Misalignment of luminaire on the bracket – Minor Impact damage to the lighting pole – grazing,
luminaire tilted forward or hanging by cable scraping of the surface of the pole
Once the category is identified, the appropriate action must be taken, and the results logged into
the Asset Management database to ensure that the information on each asset is kept as current as
possible.
11.1.2. Visual Inspection Guidance
It is important that there is a guidance document for the visual inspections to ensure that all
information is looked at and considered. As such, the lighting pole can be broken down into five
and the asset condition reported on the pro-forma provided in Part 1 Section J. This will ensure
consistency of reporting across the lighting network. To ensure that there is a high level of
consistency in reporting, it is recommended that operatives are trained and an easy-to-follow
guidance document is provided. As part of this visual inspection guidance, a Structural Inspection
Pro-forma (SIF 001) has been produced and should be completed for every pole, with the periodic
inspection being a maximum of three years. It is recommended that the inspection is carried out as
part of the routine and non-routine maintenance visits to the pole as this will ensure that there is a
constant assessment ongoing. It is important that the information is completed electronically to
assist the asset management team in updating their records with ease and at a low cost.
To ensure that the lighting pole is assed correctly, the pro-forma uses a 1 to 4 scoring system across
the various areas identified. Where: -
• 1-Good
• 2-Fair
• 3-Poor
• 4-Bad
The guidance document SIF 100 Condition Classification, provides examples of definitions to assist
the operative in their assessment of the lighting pole.
SIF 100 Condition Classification Guidance

Area Item Item Condition SIF 100 Condition Classification
No Descriptions and scoring
1 – Good 2 – Fair 3 – Poor 4 – Bad
1 Base Plate No indication of Minor internal Layers of rust Support leaning
corrosion on corrosion and with metal or or structurally
Plate of Bolts signs of bolt bolt corroded damaged
corrosion
Score
2 Base Compartment No indication of Minor internal Layers of rust Layers of rust or
corrosion on and external or poor damaged
base corrosion foundation
Score
3 Door Opening Opening in good Minor Signs of Lock and Door missing,
condition corrosion hinges showing Hinges / Lock
A signs of wear. broken. Metal
Door in place around door
but secured by split.
wire/tape
Score
4 Internal Compartment No indication of Minor internal Layers of rust Layers of rust
corrosion corrosion and thin wall
Score
5 Shaft No signs of Rust spots or 25% external 60% external
corrosion protective rust cover rust cover or
coating structurally
removed damaged
Score
6 Illegal Attachment No attachments attachments
Score
7 Bracket Shaft Interface Good condition Minor signs of Missing bolts Extensive
and sealed corrosion or /grub screws cracking around
B loose shaft bolt / grub
joint screw holes and
misalignment
Score
8 Elbow Good condition Minor signs of Web showing Extensive
corrosion signs of stress cracking
splits
Score
C 9 Bracket Web Good condition Minor signs of Web showing Extensive
corrosion signs of stress cracking
splits
Score
10 Luminaire Fixing Luminaire Luminaire
attached misaligned or
correctly hanging
Score
11 Bowl / Lens Good lens seals Signs of decay Signs of UV damage to
and bowl clarity to seals and moisture dust lens/bowl
bowl/lens ingress reducing light
wear output
Score
12 Gear/Wiring Good electrical Untidy wiring Insulation Wiring showing
D integrity shrinkage or burning or
poor bonding damage
Score
13 Node Good condition Damaged
Score
14 Cut-out Cut-out in good Cut-out Damage to cut- Cover missing
condition showing out from cutout
corrosion
Score
15 Door in place / missing Door in place Door held on Door held on Door missing
by steel by wire or tape
banding
Score
E 16 Wiring / Earthing Good electrical Untidy wiring Insulation Wiring showing
integrity shrinkage or burning or
poor bonding damage
Score
17 Door Lock / Hinge Lock and Hinge Minor wear to Damage to lock Broken lock or
ok lock or hinges and hinges hinges
Score
11.1.3. Visual Inspection Pole breakdown
The roadway lighting pole can be broken down into 5 separate areas for the visual inspection-
refer to Figure 11.1.3.1. This clearly defines the areas to be considered and all visual inspection
information will be inserted into Pro-Forma SIF 001- Part 1 Section J.
Figure 11.1.3.1- Pole Breakdown for Visual Inspection
Part-1
Part-1 Section-C – Roadway/Parking Section-I
Lighting Poles –Electrical Requirements
Structural Inspection Form- SIF 001
Inspector Name: City/Area:

Road:
Date: Location:
Pole Type (Type) Protection (Prot) Material (Mat) Bracket Length Condition
TP Tapered G Galvanised S Steel 0.5P 0.5m Projection 1 GOOD
OC Octagonal G & RP G+Root Protection A Aluminium 1.0P 1.0m Projection 2 FAIR
1.5P 1.5m Projection 3 POOR
4 BAD
See SIF 100 FOR CONDITION
CLASSIFICATION
Pole Details Area A- Base Compartment Area B- Shaft Area C- Bracket Area D- Luminaire Area E- Electrical Integrity
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Pole Ref. Type Prot Mat Base Base Door Int Shaft Att Shaft/ Elbow Brkt- Fix Bowl Wire Node Cutout Door Wire Lock
No. Plate Brkt web
Part-1 Section-C – Roadway/Parking Lighting Poles
11.2. Stage 2: Non-Destructive Testing (NDT)
NDT is used to determine if a lighting pole satisfies the service requirements or is in danger of
catastrophic failure. As described in Section 11.1, the various visual indicators may be sufficient
to determine if a pole requires to be replaced. However, it is vitally important that NDT is carried
out on a sample percentage of the lighting assets to assess what the eye cannot see and the
effects of corrosion in critical areas that will affect the bending and torsion movements caused by
wind velocity and dead loads. The NDT will look at the loss of wall thickness at critical areas on
the pole and determine if the pole should be removed immediately or programmed for
replacement within a specified period of time. Corrosion in roadway lighting poles will start from
inside the pole and work outwards, by the time you see the corrosion on the outside of the pole,
approximately 75% plus of the pole wall thickness has already been lost. This will allow
maintenance budgets and programmes to be prepared over a period of years.
11.2.1. Ultrasonic Testing
Ultrasonic testing utilises shear waves, compression waves or Photo 11.2.1.1- Typical Ultrasonic
surface waves. These waves are pulsed through the metal via a Tester
probe that is placed against the external surface of the lighting
pole. The wall thickness meter utilises the time it takes for the
wave to travel through the metal and return to the probe. The
waves only measure “good” metal and do not measure any
corrosion. The meter then displays the wall thickness on the
display which is then recorded on the pro-forma SIF 002. From
study data received from many authorities across Europe who
have been carrying out the structural assessments over a number
of years, it has been determined that the following areas of the
lighting pole should be checked for wall thickness: -
• From the baseplate to the bottom of the door

opening
• At the door opening, including the four corner
points of the door Photo 11.2.1.2- Typical Ultrasonic
• At any change in section Probe
• The anchor bolts
Once the maximum and minimum wall thicknesses have been
recorded it is then required that a minimum of four points around
the circumference of the pole are then measured at the height
where the minimum wall thickness was found- refer to Section
11.2.2 for Ultrasonic Testing Procedure
11.2.2. Ultrasonic Testing Procedure
Table 11.2.2.1 details the procedure to carry out the NDT testing utilising Ultrasound. The
ultrasonic testing procedure will consider the loss of thickness at critical points of the pole- refer
to Figure 11.2.2.1. these are the areas where the highest amount of corrosion will occur
(statistically proven over years of research in various countries). Points A to D must be measured
at equidistant distances on the pole base and at four points around the pole (indicated by 1 to 4).
Points E to H around the door must also be measured and the findings recorded. The wall
thickness measurements will be entered into Inspection Form SIF 002- Part 1 Section J- and the
thinnest point highlighted. This will be required for each pole being tested. An electronic format
is preferred to allow for ease of insertion into data base.
Table 11.2.2.1- Ultrasonic Testing Procedure- Steps

Description
Ultrasonic Test Equipment
Check Battery is charged
Calibration check- use the supplied metal calibration discs to check that the test equipment is
calibrated.
1. Check calibration disc thickness
2. Turn the test equipment on
3. Attach the sensor
4. Clean the disc surface with a clean cloth
5. Hold the sensor against the surface of the calibration disc and press the test button.
Read the screen and compare with the thickness of the calibration disc
On Site Test
Step 1- Ensure that you are safe prior to starting any test.
Step 2- Carry out Visual Inspection of the lighting pole and complete the required Pro Forma SF001
Step 3- Switch on the Test equipment and attach the probe.
Step 4- Clean the Pole at the selected points with a cloth to remove Salt, Sand and Dirt.
Measure 4 equidistant points from the baseplate to the bottom of the door and take measurements
and record the wall thicknesses.
Take measurements at each corner of the door and record the wall thicknesses.
Note- Do not use abrasive materials to clean the pole surface as this may damage the galvanising and
lead to corrosion
Step 5- Determine from the measurements in Step 4 where the lowest reading is
Step 6- Take measurements around the pole at 90 Degree intervals and record. Clean the selected
areas before taking the measurements.
Step 6- complete the form supplied.
Step 7- move to the next pole and carry out Steps 1 to 7
Step 8- Pro-forma- Part 1 Section J-Table to be prepared with the measured results for further
decisions to be made on additional testing
Figure 11.2.2.1-Critical Testing Points on Roadway Lighting Pole.
Pro-forma – SIF 002

Wall Thickness Measurement – Structural Inspection Form -- SIF 002

Pole ID: Road:
Date: Location:
Measurement Area ID Measurement Thinnest
Code (mm) Point
A
B
BASE
C
D
E
F
DOOR
G
H
1
FROM BASE
THINNEST
2
POINT
3
4
11.2.3. Percentage Wall Thickness Loss
The measured percentage loss of wall thickness requires to be analysed after the ultrasonic
testing has been completed. This wall thickness loss is calculated on the original wall thickness of
the lighting pole during installation. Where this data is not available, measurements can be taken
at four points around the pole at 1.5m height from the baseplate. An average can then be taken
for the wall thickness to be used as the basis for the calculation of the wall thickness loss. Very
little corrosion will be found in the pole shaft at this height. To ensure that the lighting pole does
not become a hazard to the public or maintenance workers, a maximum of 40% loss of wall
thickness will be allowed before the pole has to be replaced. A set time has to be agreed for the
time between identifying the issue and the replacement of the lighting pole. This period should
not exceed 6 months in the interest of safety. Table 11.2.3.1 details percentage losses for Typical
Lighting poles in Abu Dhabi.
Table 11.2.3.1- Typical Wall Thickness Losses in Abu Dhabi Lighting Poles
Original Wall Thickness (mm) Original Wall Thickness (mm)
3 4
Loss Loss (mm) Remaining Loss Loss (mm) Remaining
( %) (mm) ( %) (mm)
5% 0.15 2.85 5% 0.20 3.80
10% 0.30 2.70 10% 0.40 3.60
15% 0.45 2.55 15% 0.60 3.40
20% 0.60 2.40 20% 0.80 3.20
25% 0.75 2.25 25% 1.00 3.00
30% 0.90 2.10 30% 1.20 2.80
35% 1.05 1.95 35% 1.40 2.60
40% 1.20 1.80 40% 1.60 2.40
Pole to be replaced
45% 1.35 1.65 45% 1.80 2.20
50% 1.50 1.50 50% 2.00 2.00
55% 1.65 1.35 55% 2.20 1.80
60% 1.80 1.20 60% 2.40 1.60
65% 1.95 1.05 65% 2.60 1.40
70% 2.10 0.90 70% 2.80 1.20
75% 2.25 0.75 75% 3.00 1.00
80% 2.40 0.60 80% 3.20 0.80
85% 2.55 0.45 85% 3.40 0.60
90% 2.70 0.30 90% 3.60 0.40
95% 2.85 0.15 95% 3.80 0.20
100% 3.00 0.00 100% 4.00 0.00

1. Structural test results are submitted to the relevant sections of the Department
12. Examples of Corrosion and Damage to Lighting Assets
Corrosion on Flag Holder Corrosion at ground level
Corrosion at Ground Level and on Bolts Corrosion on Pole Shaft
Corrosion Damage to the Electrical Cutout Lighting Pole Leaning
Damage to Foundation Lamp and Lampholder hanging from Luminaire
Structural Damage caused by Vehicular Impact
Wrong size door with cable used to secure Door Secured with tape
it
3 Phase control cabinet not securely Corrosion of bolts and damage to Foundation
locked mortar

Part-1 Section-D – Lighting Management
Part-1 Section D –Lighting Management

Section-D, refer to the Part-1 Applicable Standards & Guidance References.
This Section is a brief summary of the primary factors covered within this Part-1 Section-D of the
1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-D
a) Project Lighting Management System (PLMS) to be provided for all projects, both
retrofit projects / new-build; urban street, highway, parking, tunnel & underpass
projects, as defined in Clause 3.1.
b) Warranty for all lighting management systems set as minimum 10-Years for all
aspects.
c) Tables of Initial PLMS programming dimming profile levels provided within the
Manual
d) Central Management System (CMS) general requirements as defined within Clause
4.1.6.
e) PLMS/CMS shall be Open Protocol to allow various manufacturers’ equipment to be
used and connected seamlessly.
f) The Department’s decision is final regarding project submissions and design
approvals.
1.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-D
a) Any GPRS based PLMS/CMS systems/technologies

b) Any deviation from the system technical criteria as set out within this Manual
within this Manual.
d) RF System for Tunnels and Underpasses
e) Nema sockets for Tunnel Luminaires
Note:-Where a CMS is installed and operating within a Municipality, there is no requirement to

propose a separate CMS. All PLMS must connect to the Municipality’s existing CMS.
performance for the project shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of Part 1
Clause IDetails of all standards are provided within the Applicable Standards & Guidance
References at the end of Part-1.
their lighting management system, components and software under all the required design
conditions.
Consultant shall ensure in his design the following: integration, coordination, functionality and
calculation for the lighting fixtures’ useful-life cycle, project location, PLMS controls
usage/programming etc.
3. Project Lighting Management System (PLMS) Provision
The following project parameters define PLMS requirements:
3.1 Projects Requiring PLMS Provision
a) All roadway/parking lighting projects shall have luminaires with factory fitted NEMA
sockets and Nodes, compliant with DMT requirements, as a minimum, irrespective of
project size. Where projects are located in Brownfield sites, the Consultant must contact
DMT Asset Management Division to request connection to existing Gateways in the
vicinity.
b) Night-time lighting-only tunnels/underpasses (retrofit or new-build) which have roadway

lighting either side..
c) Tunnels of sufficient length (as defined within Manual Part-1 Section-B, Clauses-4, 6 & 7)
requiring both night-time and daytime-lighting and with LED fixtures, must be provided
with a daytime/night-time appropriate PLMS with full dimming and programming in order
to facilitate completely smooth and slow transitions between all daytime scenes/
thresholds and daytime to night-time level transistions as appropriate.
d) Off-street parking lighting when part of a combined scheme as part of a roadway lighting
project and which falls under the above criteria.
e) Solar roadway/parking lighting projects (refer also to the additional specific PLMS
requirements within Section-E).
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide assessment of the project based on the above and
justification within project submissions of the required PLMS
4. PLMS Technical Criteria
The project lighting control/operation shall be a fully interlinked system within the project
area based on either a wired or wireless PLMS which fully meets the requirements of this
Section and proposed as best meets the needs and location of the specific project:
4.1 System Technical Requirements
4.1.1 Wired Systems
• System shall use power line communication and be suitable for three-phase
and/or single-phase distribution as per the project’s infrastructure
• The system shall be equipped with a suitable filtering system, preventing any
disrupting interference signals being fed back through the supply and proposed
to address the actual site supply conditions
• Compliant with EN500065-1 and EN60950 and CE or comparable International
standard
• Main system units shall be located within lighting control cabinets (LCCs) and
must interconnect/communicate to all other main units and the luminaires’
interface modules via the existing power lines using the power line
communication method
• Each luminaire shall be equipped with an adjacent hard-wired transmitter/
receiver control interface through a hard-wired connection to the fixture terminal
block. The control interface and luminaire shall be interconnected via 5 core
cable; phase, neutral, earth, control+ and control –
• Devices cannot be located within the luminaire bodies, but to be positioned in
locations to be agreed for the project by The Department, either high level on the
pole or near the cut-out in an IP65 enclosure
• System must be able to handle and maintain communication when one or more
of the main system components are down by demonstrating capability for signal
distance performance on the specific constraints of the project
• Project PLMS must be provided with a single point of data terminal/interface/
connection for any reprogramming needs of the PLMS project area to be
achievable from one point of interface
• The system shall be able to operate in a pre-programmed condition
autonomously for the project and also data shall be able to be interfaced via a
MODBus, RS232 interface for communication to a central CMS location via the
GSM/GPRS/TCP-IP network, with a TCP/IP over a fiber- optic converter or other
approved means and protocol to a Department central location in the future.
4.1.2 Wireless Systems
• Wireless system; Wi-Fi or RF system, with MESH or STAR Capability and fully
tested and compatible with the lighting system proposed
• GSM 900/1800, GPRS, SMS, ZigBee etc. or other approved system agreed with
the Department
• All wireless communication complying with IEEE 802.15.4a
• 868MHz to 928 MHz or other approved frequency agreed with the Department
• System shall be compliant with all Abu Dhabi TRA Standards/requirements and
be proposed with all statutory approvals
• System to comprise of main system component units/nodes and addressable
transmitters/receiver units, with ‘hop’ capability, adjacent to or locally connected
to the luminaires to suit the proposed system’s requirements and final
connection to the luminaire through a hard-wired connection to the fixture
terminal block
• All luminaires are to be factory fitted with Nema sockets and Nodes. All Gateways
are to be fitted to the lighting poles, without causing damage to the pole coating
or causing galvanic corrosion. Where existing luminaires are to be retrofitted to
include PLMS, where possible and without voiding the warranty or affecting the
IP rating, the node shall be fitted to the luminaire body. Where this is not possible,
the node shall be fitted to the pole or the pole bracket. Where the luminaire is
still within the warranty period, the manufacturer must be contacted, prior to any
work being carried out, to ensure that the warranty will not be adversely affected.
• System must be able to handle and maintain communication when one or more
of the main system components are down by demonstrating capability for signal
distance performance on the specific constraints of the project
• Project PLMS must be provided with a single point of data
terminal/interface/connection for any reprogramming needs of the PLMS project
area to be achievable from one point of interface
autonomously for the project and also data shall be able to interface for
communication to a central CMS location via a GSM/TCP-IP network, with a
TCP/IP over a fiber- optic converter or other approved means and protocol to a
Department central location in the future
• The PLMS supplier shall have at least six (6) years of experience in public lighting
management systems and it shall be able to demonstrate at least two (2) similar
relevant installations in the UAE, GCC or MENA region
• The proposed system shall be fully compatible with all luminaire(s) and drivers
proposed for the project through a hard-wired final connection to the fixture
terminal block and all system components must comply with open
communication protocols
• Suitable for luminaire sizes (wattages) as per the specific project’s requirements
• Any brand of luminaires (as per the technical criteria within Part-1 Sections-A
and/or B) shall be able to be controlled from the system to ensure luminaire
choice can be made openly for the best current marketplace products available
for the project and for any future revisions and additions to the project area
• The PLMS and system main components must have a minimum of 20% spare
capacity for future potential street revisions and additions.
• The system must prevent all daytime operation of the LED roadway/parking lights
unless only the specific manual override of the automated programming is
desired by The Department
• Programmed dimming operation shall normally be only for luminaire groups set
for each length of roadway from defined intersection to defined intersection.
• Programmed dimming shall allow Intersections to be dimmed independently of
the roads on either side’s dimming profile.
• Each system unit and module shall act as a repeater (relays)
• All system components shall be able to operate within a range of Nominal Rated
Input voltage: 230V +10% / -6% (As per DOE EWR 4th Edition) @50Hz.
• The solution shall offer a complete backup operation; in the case of
communication or power failure to the system the area controlled shall be able
to operate automatically as per the set programming profiles
• System interface/software to be password encrypted, able to program the
project system and cater for revised programming settings for future if required
• System interface/protocol to be able to be interconnected to any outside central
system/control room in the future as and when required (refer to Clause 4.1.6)
• Minimum 0-10V analogue dimming capability (optional PWM dimming 0-100%
and DALI interface capability as required)
• Standard & customizable 24-hour light profiles for peak/off-peak times as per
Clause 5 for the specific project type/location. Light levels configurable at 10%
step increments. The individual dimming profiles shall be able to be changed to
weekly plans if required, rather than just identical 24-hour plans as per the initial
programming.
• Must enable slow transitions (30-seconds) between the pre-set dimming levels
• Photocell or astro-clock input adjustment to timed programming for dusk/dawn
operations
• Error Reporting - Comprehensive & instant overview about infrastructure
problems such as circuit power failure, individual LED Module/driver/fixture
failures
• Alarm thresholds shall be programmable from the central software
• Energy Reports - Detailed daily overview about energy consumed, voltage,
current, pf, accumulative hours of operation (at dimming level) etc.
• Data Export/Import capability for future in depth analysis or integration into any
existing asset/inventory management/control systems operated by The
Department (refer to 4.1.6)
• Provision for data backup
• Any UPS/batteries within the system components shall be rated for minimum 6-
years operation without need for replacement
• Components operating temperature (night-time): +50 °C
• Components storage (daytime non-operating) +85 °C
NOTE: These capabilities/devices/requirements are not suitable for general project PLMS and
should not be proposed for general projects. However only if specifically requested by The
Department they can be proposed for particular projects which may have unique or special
opportunities to warrant their inclusion within that project proposal:
• Movement/infra-red sensors
• Traffic/pedestrian monitoring sensors
• Luminance and illuminance measurement sensors
• Programming for individual dimming operation of adjacent luminaires on the
same road (i.e. Dimming performed on each fixture independently rather than in
groups)
• iOS/Android/Windows mobile application interface for maintenance work at site
4.1.5 Prohibited Components or Capabilities
• Individual fixture photocell light sensors

• Any fixture ‘flashing ‘or strobing programming operation
• Any alternate switching of roadway/parking luminaire arrangements
• Capability to monitor the separate internal components within the luminaires
• Public user-interface of lighting controls
• Any proprietary node socket that prohibits the use of any brand of luminaire
• Any luminaire interface or internal PLMS components which could affect the
thermal performance of LED luminaires and/or void the luminaire’s warranty
and/or require new luminaire testing
NOTE: This Clause’s requirements are only to be considered a General Specification aid to any
Department project-specific Tender covering the required provision of a main Central
Management System (CMS). This would be for a centralised equipment center/control room to
interconnect all current local PLMS installations, all future PLMS connections, as well as act as
the main interface in the future for interconnection to Department Asset Management, ‘Smart
City’, SCADA and/or other Department central systems as defined for the project. A full and
detailed project-specific Particular Specification would be required for any Tender for CMS. If
the CMS is to cover both roadway/parking lighting and public realm lighting PLMS, then refer
also to Manual Part-2, Section-D for details of these systems. The project Tender Particular
Specification shall need to cover the detailed specification requirements that are summarised
below:
• The Main CMS supplier shall have at least ten (10) years of experience in public
lighting management systems and it shall have at least five (5) similar installations
internationally and shall be able to demonstrate at least two (2) similar relevant
installations in the UAE, GCC or MENA region
• The proposed main system shall be fully compatible with, and able to maintain
luminaire addressability for, all existing wired or wireless local PLMS installations
in the project area coverage. It shall demonstrate capability and flexibility for
future Department expansion needs, compatibility with installed PLMS systems
and with all luminaire(s) and drivers connected to the PLMS systems as per this
Manual’s luminaire/driver specification criteria
• The CMS must have the capability to operate/monitor up to 3million addressable
luminaires through phased interconnection of existing and new PLMS/areas
• Provision of RGB/RGBW DMX System Interface/Capability through direct DMX
control capability or interface capability to separate DMX control systems from
third party suppliers, this includes, but is not limited to, the Sheikh Zayed Bridge
Martin Professional DMX system, any installed DMX systems on Maqta, Mini-
Maqta and Mussafah Bridges and any Corniche area or public realm DMX systems
within the project area
• As per UAE Restrictions for all Department systems, the main PLMS CMS
interface/software cannot be operated via Cloud-based server software; the
main system software and server must be able to be held and maintained within
a Department owned property and the server equipment as agreed with The
Department as part of the project
• Main System Control Room location should be agreed with The Department at
the time of the project Tender proposal
• System proposal must include for all client training requirements and software
maintenance needs as agreed with The Department
• Main system must be PC-based and shall allow remote control and monitoring of
the roadway lighting network through a customisable user interface as agreed
with The Department
• System must be designed with a graphical map showing the position of the
fixtures/poles, all network elements and display all field information and
configuration
• From the central level, the operator shall be able to perform manual command
override of individual luminaires, luminaire groups, pre-defined areas and other
user defined groups and shall be customizable for special requirements
• System shall allow dual language interface for each user: English and Arabic and
enable different user privileges, according to assigned rights
• Reports shall be available for luminaires status, system status, daily/week/month
energy consumption as required by The Department
• The CMS shall be able to pre-warn for end-of-rated-useful-life of LED luminaires
to defined and agreed parameters
• System shall be able to fully interface with The Department’s Asset Management
System and the operational requirements of the Asset Management Department.
Details should be requested from The Department at the time of Tender
• The system shall include API Technology and be capable of performing Web-
Services
• System shall be able to fully interface with The Department’s SCADA System (if
required) and as per the operational requirements of the SCADA Department.
Technical details/standards for interfacing should be requested from The
Department at the time of Tender.
• All system wireless components/protocols shall be compliant with all Abu Dhabi
TRA Standards/requirements and be proposed with all statutory approvals
• System shall be able to fully interface with any Department ‘Smart City’
infrastructure requirements or Smart City Strategy/Policy and be fully capable to
correlate with the future needs of The Department. Details should be requested
from The Department at the time of Tender
problems such as circuit power failure, individual lamp/driver/fixture failures
• Energy Reports - Detailed daily overview about energy consumed, voltage,
current, pf, accumulative hours of operation at dimming level etc.
• Any UPS/batteries within the system components shall be rated for minimum 6-
years operation without need for replacement
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide full project PLMS/CMS details for the project based
on the above requirements inlcuding all the proposed system manufcaturer’s specific technical
and performance data. Where CMS has already been installed show PLMS Interoperability.
5. Dimming Profiles
The following table shall be the default dimming programming profile settings for all listed project
types and used within in any required project cost analysis. During commisioning these levels can
be adjusted to suit the specific performance profiles of the luminaires if needed and if only as
agreed with The Department:
Table 5.1 Dimming Profile

PLMS %Dimming (Light Level*1) & Timing Programming Steps
Project Area Type
1 2 3 4 5
from systems
Residential ON*
3 from 9pm till from 12
100% 70% 30% 100%
from 5am
OFF*
3
Neighbourhoods*2 12 (Midnight) (Midnight) till 5am till 6am
till 9pm
from systems
Residential Mixed-Use ON*
3 from 10pm till
100% 60% 20% from 1am till 5am
100%
from 5am
OFF*
3
Areas*2 1am
till 6am
till 10pm
from systems
Light Industrial & ON*
3 from 10pm till
80%
from 5am
OFF*
3
Business Districts*2 1am
till 6am
till 10pm
from systems
High-Activity Commercial ON*
3 from 10pm till
100%
from 5am
OFF*
3
& City Centre Districts*2 2am till 6am
till 10pm
from systems
National/State Parks and ON*
100% 50% 20% 60%
from 5am
OFF*
3
Rural Districts*2 12 (Midnight) (Midnight) till 5am till 6am
till 9pm
from systems
3
ON* from 9pm till from 12
Highways in Rural Areas 100% 60% 12 (Midnight)
30% (Midnight) till 5am 100%
from 5am
OFF*
3
till 6am
till 9pm
from systems
Highways in Metropolitan ON*
100% 80% 12 (Midnight)
60% (Midnight) till 5am 100%
from 5am
OFF*
3
Areas till 6am
till 9pm
*1 These are the Lighting Level percentages that need to be achieved by the programming. Depending on the
PLMS and fixture/driver performance parameters, the actual required programming levels and resultant
power/PF outputs as a result of this may be a different percentage and all data and actual programming settings
need to be confirmed by the PLMS provider
*2 All Urban Street types within the project area to set to the same percentage levels/timings
*3 Dusk & Dawn operation determined by photocell input or astro-clock adjustment to timed programming
Project Submission Requirement:- Select and state the appropriate dimming profile from the
above Table for the project and include within the project submission.
6. Quality Assurance
a) The Department may request standard production model samples, identical to the
proposed products to be installed. The Department may request independent testing of
the sample equipment to verify the performance and compliance with the specifications.
The Department shall be the sole judge regarding the acceptability of the performance of
the PLMS/CMS.
b) According to the requirements of the Project’s Contract documents, if required The

inspection.
c)
7. Warranty
below.
a) A written warranty for a Minimum ten (10) year on-site replacement: material, material,
fixtures, finish, and workmanship. On-site replacement includes transportation, removal
and installation of new products. Finish warranty shall include warranty against
corrosion, failure or substantial deteriorations such as blistering, cracking or peeling
(excluding damage caused by contact with chemical substances, fertilizers, water
containing corrosive agents or stray electrical currents). The warranty shall include for
maintained integrity of the PLMS/CMS System equipment; all accessories, components
and assemblies, without any partial or complete separation, corrosion, leaking,
dislocation, disjointing, flaring, etc. of any elements of the system components with no
cost to The Department*
defective PLMS/CMS equipment and components, with no cost to The Department*
c) A written warranty for a Minimum five (5) year replacement material warranty on any
UPS batteries or other batteries for on-site replacement: material and workmanship. On-
site replacement includes transportation, removal and installation of new products.
Warranty shall include substantial deteriorations such as leaking, buckling, corrosion,
inability to be charged or withhold a charge, impacted system autonomy and reduced
output with no cost to The Department*
(Please note: * With no cost to The Department does not just refer to the PLMS/CMS
equipment/component cost in regards to any warranty actions. This also refers to any
costs associated with labour for removal/fitting of components, obtaining Authority NOCs,
traffic management costs, transport etc. The Department will not be liaible for any
associated costs arising/necessary in relation to warranty actions). The manufacturer
must contact DMT prior to assigning any Contractor. These requirements are purely in
regards to the terms of PLMS/CMS Equipment Warranties that must be provided to The
Department at Handover. It is not in any way in connection to the cover during the
defects period which shall be solely as per specific terms agreed between the

Department, of the Warranty for The Department from the PLMS/CMS Supplier, accompanied
8. Maintenance/Defects Contract Period
If requested within the Project documents, the Consultant/Contractor shall provide for the
PLMS/CMS manufacturer to include for a full maintenance and defects contract for a defined
period for the project. This would be above and beyond the normal defect arrangements
This contract shall include for all preventative and reactionary maintenance of the PLMS/CMS and
components, including all parts and materials throughout the duration of the contract. Full details
of this maintenance contract including method statement for the maintenance to be included for
approval of The Department. The maintenance contract should include for a renewal and/or
extension of the contract if required in the future by The Department.
Project Submission Requirement:- Cover the above requirements for all projects including a
PLMS/CMS
9. Measurement and Payment
a) General. The measurement and payment for the PLMS/CMS shall include, but not by way
of limitations, all modules, units, components and all related materials and works for the
complete installation and energizing the system.
b) PLMS/CMS Components. Measurement and payment for the PLMS/CMS and all
components will be at the unit rates as included in the Bills of Quantities, which rates shall
be considered as full compensation for all labour materials, finishes, tools, equipment and
appurtenances as required, as specified, and as directed by The Department.
PLMS/CMS.
10. Operation and Maintenance Manual

An Operation, Instruction and Maintenance Manual (O&M Manual), in both English and Arabic,
should be provided for The Department for the project PLMS/CMS. The following minimum details
must be provided in the Manual:
• Basic principles of the PLMS/CMS system

• A small write-up (with a block diagram) on the PLMS/CMS system and all its
components
• Equipment manufacturer’s documentation (data sheets, handbooks, etc.)
• Clear instructions on regular maintenance, cleaning and troubleshooting of the
PLMS/CMS
• Compete software and programming information
• Do's and Don’ts
• Environmental Policy regarding the origin and manufacturer of all components,
operation performance and safe transportation, disposal and/or recycling of
components after removal/changing-over
• All names and contact details of the relevant contact persons for repair, cleaning
and maintenance, in case of non-functionality of the PLMS/CMS
PLMS/CMS.

Part-1 Section-E – Solar Lighting
Part-1 Section E – Solar Roadway/Parking Lighting

Note: Solar Roadway/Parking lighting is a statutory requirement for projects and
must be considered in parallel with any cabled lighting network. A full cost
analysis must be carried out as per the requirements of this Part-1 Section-E. A
section must be included in all stages of the design reports to discuss solar
lighting options.
Section-E, refer to the Part-1 Applicable Standards & Guidance References Section.
For more reference information relating to solar lighting, refer to the Public Realm & Street
Lighting Handbook Chapters C, D, E, N and O.
This Section is a brief summary of the primary factors covered within this Part-1 Section-E of the
Lighting Manual.
The technical brief criteria within this Section have been established after access to over five years
of on-site test data from various solar installations within Abu Dhabi and the UAE. From these
results, has come the evidence of which types of technologies are viable as long-term sustainable
solutions for use on Abu Dhabi roadway/parking lighting projects and which are not viable. The
detailed technical criteria for which are described in the Clauses following:
1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-E
a) Vertically mounted pole-integrated solar PV systems, retrofit vertical PV cladding and

luminaire integrated PV panels
b) Monocrystalline or Polycrystalline silicon wafer PV construction
c) Gel Lead Acid, Lithium Iron Phosphate (LiFePO4) and Nickel Metal Hydride (NiMH)
battery technologies
d) Other battery technologies proposed with proven adherence to the technical
requirements of this Manual Section
e) Solar standalone solutions or grid-connected system options
f) Wind-generation components only as an addition to solar PV and with full material,
maintenance and efficiency data provided
g) Batteries mounted above ground within the base of the pole system
h) Batteries mounted below ground within the concrete foundation of the pole system
i) Batteries mounted within the Luminaire or PV cell array (must be accessible without
removing the PV cells)
j) Standalone systems with batteries to have minimum 24-hour autonomy
k) LED luminaires (or other equally sustainable alternative luminaire technology as
defined within this Manual’s Introduction) complying fully with the requirements of
Part-1 Section-A
l) Standalone or grid-connected project solar lighting control/operation fully interlinked
via wireless PLMS (Project Lighting Management System)
m) Minimum 10-year full on-site combined maintenance and defects cover in addition to
the standard warranty requirements
n) Full project cost analysis including payback
o) Provision of Operation and Maintenance Manual
p) Cleaning Proposal including the equipment type as part of the project system
provision
q) Environmental Policy Proposal for battery and component recycling/disposal
1.2 Not Permitted under this Manual Part-1 Section-E
a) Pole-top or side mounted flat PV-panel solar systems

b) Open ‘wet-type’ Lead Acid batteries
c) Other battery technologies proposed without proven adherence to the technical
d) Batteries mounted below ground within separate battery enclosure/pits
e) Batteries mounted below ground underneath the PV-Pole requiring demounting of
the pole to access
f) LED lighting fixtures (or other equally sustainable alternative luminaire technology as
defined within this Manual’s Introduction) not complying fully with the requirements
of Part-1 Section-A
g) Any claim for “self-cleaning” PV panels and/or unjustified maintenance factors
provided to include for dust accumulation
h) Any in-built mechanical/electrical automated cleaning mechanism or apparatus
without full test data to prove long term viability and sustainability
i) System approval unless full cost analysis provided and checked/approved by The
Department
j) Any non-site-specific sun-availability criteria used in calculations/analysis
k) Any deviation from the system technical criteria as set out within this Manual Section
l) Any deviation from the minimum maintenance and warranty requirements as set out
within this Manual Section
2. Solar Roadway/Parking Lighting System Options
2.1 Project Selection
There are three viable solar roadway/parking lighting system options available for consideration
for a project as described in Clauses 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4. The decision about which system option is
best considered is described within the three below clauses and can be determined primarily by
what level of existing roadway/parking lighting electrical infrastructure is present for the project.
The site-specific infrastructure, as far as a local sub-station being either present or not present is
another primary consideration; also, if planned for a defined or undefined future date or present
but lacking sufficient capacity. Even if local substation and capacity is available, but there is no
existing roadway/parking lighting electrical infrastructure currently in place (sub-mains
distribution, lighting control cabinets, final circuit cabling etc.) this can have a further implication.
A project area might indeed have both full infrastructure and capacity in place, but other factors
such as a client’s paramount need to ensure illumination is maintained at all times or any area is
subject to, or has a history of, power outages, or where the replacement of the existing electrical
network may be costly and disruptive to replace, may be an issue.
The main factors for consideration have been suggested in this section; however, there may be
other factors to determine the best system for a specific project. All these factors all need to be
weighed up when deciding on the most appropriate system option to consider and propose
through the project cost analysis.
2.2 Standalone System
No grid-connection, standalone vertical PV-poles with integral batteries, controller/ inverter

and wireless PLMS.
Recommended for solar roadway/parking lighting projects:
• Without existing substation/cabling/infrastructure

• Or with existing cabling/infrastructure, but unsuitable for utilisation
• Or where new cabling may not be commercially feasible
The batteries are installed within the solar PV-clad pole base, in a separate, concrete foundation-
located formed battery enclosure, in the PV Cell area or integrated into the luminaire.
The standalone PV-pole’s controller/inverter* controls the charge and discharge of the batteries,
battery status and the status of the solar pole PVs.
A wireless type PLMS provides and controls the power for the luminaire, including coordinated
activation, dimming and status of the lights.
*Note- Standalone solar LED Luminaires are preferred to be supplied directly from the battery
with DC to remove inverter losses.
2.3 Grid-Connected System
Electric grid-connection, vertical PV-poles without batteries, with controller/inverter and

wireless PLMS.
Recommended for solar roadway/parking projects:
• With *existing substation/cabling/infrastructure

• Or where new cabling may be commercially feasible
The grid-connected pole’s controller/inverter during the daytime converts the solar energy via
the PVs from dc to ac and feeds it to the power grid. During the night, the pole and LED fixture(s)
work like any other conventional roadway/parking lighting, with the required energy for lighting
taken from the power grid.
Ideally, the design of the system would ensure more energy from the solar PVs is produced during
the day than required for lighting the LED fixture(s) during the night.
Excess energy can be used for its own purposes or could be sold/credited in the future.
*Note- All proposed Grid connected systems must have AADC/ADDC approval prior to project
submission to The Department.
2.4 Full Backup System
Electric grid-connection, vertical PV-poles with integral batteries, controller/inverter and

wireless PLMS
Recommended for solar roadway/parking projects:

• Or for areas with infrastructure, but susceptible to power outages
• Or for a project where maximised efficiency of power generation is desirable
• Or for a project where 100% assurance of illumination is always essential
Solar energy generated from the PVs during the day is stored in batteries. Once the batteries are
charged, excess solar generated energy is converted from dc to ac and fed into the power grid.
The batteries are installed within the solar PV-clad pole base, in a separate, concrete foundation-
located formed battery enclosure, in the PV Cell area or integrated into the luminaire.
During the night, the pole and LED fixture can be designed to work in one of two ways:
• As per conventional roadway/parking lighting; with the required energy for

lighting taken from the power grid. Then in the case of power outage, the
system switches immediately to battery backup.
• The required energy for lighting taken solely from the batteries, with the grid
used as a back-up in the event of the batteries failing or discharging fully
before daytime.
A wireless type PLMS provides and controls the power for the light fitting, including coordinated
With a system such as this the autonomy and thus size of the batteries could be relaxed from the
normal Manual’s requirements as part of the overall system design.
Excess energy can be used for its own purposes or could be sold/credited in the future as per
discussions and direction from the Electricity Distribution Company.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide assessment of a solar roadwat/parking lighting project

based on the above and justification within project submissions of the proposed system(s).
3.1 Design Requirements
a) The design, specification, calculation, manufacturing, testing, shipment,

installation and performance of Solar and lighting systems shall be in
accordance with the applicable requirements of all The Department’s civil,
electrical, mechanical and lighting infrastructure standards for electrical
distribution works, except as specified herein. Copies should be requested
from The Department if not already held.
b) The Project’s lighting design and illuminance/luminance level requirements

and the LEDroadway/parking lighting luminaires (or other equally sustainable
alternative luminaire technology as defined within this Manual’s Introduction)
shall be fully in accordance with the requirements of Part-1 Section-A.
c) Submissions for the project made to the Department must include all the usual
proof of compliance; lighting calculations, layouts, compliance checklist,
luminaire/lamp-source/gear data and all accredited test sheets to show the
requirements of this Lighting Manual have been met fully.
d) The Consultant and manufacturers shall guarantee adherence to this Manual

and the performance of the Solar Pole, system and luminaire(s) under all the
required design conditions.
e) The Consultant shall be responsible to ensure that the project and product
specifications are fully in compliance, without any deviation from this Manual
prior to forwarding to The Department for approval. Any deviation should be
brought to the notice of The Department. The Consultant shall ensure in his
design the following: integration, coordination, functionality and accessibility
of these services. It shall be the Consultant’s responsibility to bring the system
to the design & operating and maintenance conditions.
4. Project Cost Analysis
4.1 Cost Analysis Requirements
assessments as required for the project solar proposal(s) and in accordance with the instructions
The full project life cycle cost analysis asset comparison shall be undertaken to the ISO 15686-5
Supplement (Publicly Available Manual - published by the International Organisation for
Standardisation) or similar and cover parameters which fully meets the requirements of this
Manual.
All information provided and the cost analysis/payback calculations should be calculated with the
exact proposed lighting fixture types/sizes, solar equipment, battery, inverter, autonomy and
Solar Peak daylight hours per day for the specific project location. Daylight hours and Solar Peak
hours available are not the same.
The Economic Cost Analysis should include the following parameters and allowances:
a) Compare the solar proposal(s) against the base standard of LED (or other equally
Introduction) as per Part-1 Section-A, with standard non-solar poles as per the
project’s brief requirements and electrical infrastructure matching the site’s existing
constraints
b) Compare project specific Initial Capital Expenditure (CAPEX) costs- Refer to Table
4.1.1
c) Compare project specific Annual Operational Expenditure (OPEX) to include

electricity usage and maintenance cost allowances – Refer to Table 4.1.2
d) Compare long-term total costs over minimum of 30-years based on present value cost
assessment including initial CAPEX annual OPEX and future CAPEX for required
component replacement.
e) Compare Salvage Value of the system at the end of the study period.
f) Include all justifications of given and calculated values and timescales with annotation
and supporting data where applicable.
g) Provide the calculated Payback Period (if applicable) for the solar proposal(s) against
the base LED conventional approach.
h) Provide report and output graphs/tables as required to present project data clearly.
i) Include also average ‘per-pole’ cost comparisons of all options within report findings.
j) Allow for 0.293fils/kWhr. as per the 2015 Meter Cost of Electricity; or

current/alternative tariff as agreed with The Department.
k) Allow for 11-hours per night, 365-days a year luminaire operation.
l) Allow for load of actual luminaires, with actual driver/current including all losses as
per the luminaires’ LM-79 reports or comparable standard.
m) Allow for stated average useful life of all components in the long-term analysis, and
salvage analysis, including, but not limited to, the luminaire, driver, inverter, battery,
control components, cables, PV-panels/modules, pole, base and associated synthetic
and metal materials.
n) For any solar grid-connected systems for which the poles have no batteries, but
connect to a conventional grid, generate electricity in the daytime and run
conventionally at night time, provide justified figures based on the local environment
and actual site situation on assessed generation value used in the analysis. A written
agreement with the Electricity Distributor stating that the Grid connected solar
systems have been approved by them, must be provided to The Department at the
time of submission.
o) Use an annual discount rate of 7% for the long-term Present Value analysis unless
confirmed otherwise by The Department
p) Allow for dimming savings in the analysis only if included within the project
proposal(s) and then only pro-rata as per the exact dimming settings proposed and
justified.
q) If local infrastructure is present or not present this should also be factored into the
analysis for cost comparison purposes including, as applicable, local sub-station
provision, sub-mains distribution, lighting control cabinets, final circuit cabling,
protection, civil works and connections.
r) Solar cleaning cycle requirements and the associated costs, as described within clause
5.6, should also be included within the project cost analysis
Table 4.1.1- CAPEX Items to be included in Cost Comparison

CAPEX ITEMS for Cost Comparison (Supply and Install)
Lighting Pole (*plus accessories)
LED Luminaire
PLMS Node
PLMS Gateway
Lighting Pole Foundation
Trench Excavation
Duct
Access Chamber
PV Modules
Battery
Battery Chamber
* refers to Cutout, cable glands, MCB, cable termination, internal wiring, labour, etc.
Table 4.1.2- OPEX Items to be included in Cost Comparison

OPEX ITEMS for Cost Comparison
Lighting Pole Structural Testing
Luminaire LED Modules Replacement
Luminaire LED Driver Replacement
Luminaire SPD Replacement
Smart Node/System Replacement
PLMS Gateway Replacement
Electrical Testing
PV Panel Cleaning
LED Luminaire Cleaning
Battery Replacement
Electricity Cost
All Periodic actions to follow the guidance from this manual. Failures within the warranty period
are not considered as they will be replaced FOC by the Manufacturer under the warranty clauses.
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide a detailed cost analysis based on the requirements of
this section for the solar roadway/parking lighting system or systems proposed.
5. System Components
5.1 LED Luminaires
a) The Project’s LED roadway/parking lighting luminaires (or other equally sustainable
alternative luminaire technology as defined within this Manual’s Introduction) shall
be fully in accordance with the requirements of Part-1 Section-A.
b) The Consultant shall note that all lighting calculations for parking lots/areas adjacent
to roads must take into account the roadway lighting contribution into the parking
lighting design and vice-versa. All projects shall be undertaken, checked and approved
as the responsibility of the Consultant to meet the required roadway and parking
levels as set out in Part-1 Section-A, Clause 4.3, Table 4.3.1.
c) The Consultant and Manufacturers shall ensure all luminaires are fully compatible
with the Solar PV Pole system, the fixture driver, the solar pole inverter/controller,
PLMS and components to meet all the overall design requirements.
d) All luminaire drivers must be specified correctly to have suitable inputs for the solar
system’s 12Vdc-48Vdc.output from the Battery/inverter/ controller.
e) Some systems may negate the need for a driver with the fixture entirely as the driver
current function forms part of the inverter/controller equipment. Refer also to Clause
5.3 to see details about the inverter/controller
f) All luminaire test data and supporting information must be provided with the specific
driver specification used.
g) Where the Solar PV cells are integrated into the luminaire, they must have beveled
edges to prohibit the accumulation of dust and sand.
Project Submission Requirement:- Ensure the requirements of Part-1 Section-A are met in
regards to all LED luminaires as well as the particular criteria contained in this section.
5.2 PV System
5.2.1 General
The pole for the solar roadway/parking lighting system shall either be of the vertically integrated
PV-clad variety, retrofitted PV Cladding or horizontally integrated. Herein referred to as PV-
Systems as shown in Figure 5.2.1.
Figure 5.2.1 Permitted PV System
Separate flat design PV panels mounted on the top of, or offset from, a standard pole are not
permitted for use on The Department’s roadway/parking lighting projects
All PV-systems shall be of a type that can accommodate a variety of applications. Where PV cells
are integrated into the poles, they shall be either circular, octagonal or square in cross-section,
made up of an extruded aluminium or steel mast that enables proprietary accessories, as required
by the project, to be mounted at set distances along its length at heights and positions
coordinated within the PV sections. The finish colour and design of the PV-pole and accessories
shall be as agreed with The Department for the project.
Note: For all standard technical and material pole, foundation and component specification
details refer to The Department’s Standard Specifications, Drawings and Manuals listed within
Part-1 Section C of this manual. All standard criteria within this section shall be adhered to in
addition to the specific solar pole/component specification information contained herein.
Table 5.2.1 Minimum Ingress Protection ratings for the PV- system components:
Component Type Minimum IP-Rating Minimum IK-Rating
Mast IP40 IK07
PVs & Electrical components IP-66 N/A
Glass covers/components N/A IK08
Synthetic clear covers N/A IK08
Batteries IP44 N/A
Battery housing above ground

IP66*1 IK07*1
within pole-base
Battery housing below ground

IP68 IK07
Foundation-mounted
Below Ground Battery housing

IP67 IK10
cover plate
*1 IP & IK Ratings must be designed to ensure they are not compromised during any maintenance
operations.
5.2.2 Materials
a) Foundations. Structural analysis shall be submitted to show that the foundation

design meets the load of the given PV-pole type in its “Fully Loaded” state. Unless
otherwise stated it is assumed the pole will sit above ground on a 150mm bed on non-
shrink grout.
For all standard foundations and/or foundations designed to house a chamber for
below ground mounting of a solar battery, full design details shall be submitted for
The Department’s review and approval. Special design details shall also be submitted
by the Contractor to install the poles above any tunnel structures.
Where batteries are to be located below-ground, only a Battery Foundation: a battery

pit constructed as part of the concrete foundation immediately adjacent to the pole
base is permitted. This is to ensure the maximum physical protection of the pit and
pit cover from damage. No remote battery pit enclosures or battery enclosures
mounted under the pole base are permitted on The Department’s projects,
The Two-Types of Permitted Solar PV-Pole Foundations
Example of Typical Standard Example of Typical Concrete

Concrete Foundation for PV-Pole Below Ground Integrated
with Batteries Mounted Above Battery Foundation
Ground within the Pole Itself
Figure 5.2.2 Permitted PV Foundations
b) Hand Hole(s). Each pole shall have its necessary hand hole positioned no lower than
400mm from finished ground level where all required electrical and solar components
and connections are accessible.
For a system where the connection of grid cables is required, a minimum of two hand
holes are required. The lower hand hole shall be used only for grid connection cable
and cut-out and shall allow connection to the luminaire to be made. The upper hand
hole shall be used for the solar equipment.
The hand hole(s) shall be accessible without removing the cover plates or cladding
from the pole bases. Cover plates shall be fixed by two screws. The hand hole covers
shall be fixed with hinges, lockable and made of corrosion resistant materials
complying with The Department’s standard Specifications. Hatch door keys shall be
supplied as per The Department’s requirements.
c) Foundation conduits. Electric conduits shall be installed through foundation and shall
enter the PV-poles from the base plate.
Regardless of which solar system type the project has, even if it is a standalone
(battery) system, these conduits are required to be installed always for cabling entry
purposes for both present and future needs to avoid any potential future remedial
works to the foundations to be incurred.
d) Steel work. PV-poles’ shall be manufactured to The Department’s standards as per

Part 1 Section C.
e) Aluminium work. PV-poles’ shall be manufactured to the Department’s standards as

per Part 1 Section C.
f) Photovoltaics (PVs). All photovoltaic components shall be either Monocrystalline or

Polycrystalline silicon wafer types, manufactured and tested as per the standards
within the Part-1 Applicable Standards & Guidance References Section and installed
as an integral part of the pole system, a retrofit cladding or as an integral part of the
luminaire.
The lowest level of the PVs on the PV-pole shall not be less than 3m from finished
ground level to ensure they are out of reach of the general public.
g) Wind Generators. Wind-generation components are only permitted as a potential

additional option to solar PV and must be proposed with full material and testing
data, including maintenance requirements and justified lifetime efficiency data for
The Department to consider their viability. For Warranty purposes they must be
considered to meet the same requirements as the PV modules.
h) Synthetic Materials. All synthetic materials including translucent (non-glass) PV

covers shall be 100% UV Stable non-yellowing, environmentally resistant and scratch
resistant. Laboratory test data shall be provided to The Department to prove the
materials are resistant to deterioration.
i) Bracketry and Base Plate Cover. Pole brackets and base plate cover shall be
manufactured out of EN 10025 S275 Steel. This shall have high strength and finished
to match the PV-pole. All steel components shall be hot-dipped galvanized to a
minimum thickness of 100microns and painted as per the applicable clauses of The
Department’s standard Specifications. The base plate cover shall be supplied along
with the pole.
j) Fasteners. All fasteners supplied shall be made of corrosion resistant materials such
as stainless steel; - Grade 316L, brass, hot-dip galvanized steel etc., based on the
materials with which it will be in contact. Bi-metallic contact shall be properly
designed to avoid any galvanic or bi-metallic corrosion.
k) Electric Equipment. Minimum M8 x30 mm long threaded stud carrying two nuts and
two washers shall be provided as an earth point. It shall be located within the lowest
hand hole. The electrical termination cut-outs shall be supplied in accordance with
The Department’s requirements and as shown on the Drawings. Each pole as
required shall be polyethylene rope (dia. 4mm) “draw wired” to assist in feeding
electrical and service cables.
l) Product Identification Tag. There should be a Name Plate affixed to the pole in an
appropriate location and manner to suit the pole design and access which will give:
i. Name of the Manufacturer or Distinctive Logo.

ii. Model Number
iii. Serial Numbers of all equipment
iv. Year of manufacture
v. Separate battery details (where applicable for the system)
m) Copper Content. All external pressure die-cast aluminium alloy components shall
have a maximum copper content of 1% by mass.
5.3 Inverter/Controller
The inverter/controller controls the charge and discharge of the batteries, battery status and the
status of the solar PV modules. The inverter/controller provides and controls the power for the
roadway/parking lighting luminaires, including dimming and status.
• Selected (with batteries) for minimum 24-hour autonomy operation (capability of

1-night full operation following one full bad weather day)
• Photovoltaic charge control for 12Vdc-48Vdc. batteries as per the project system
requirements
• 12Vdc-48Vdc. output for powering LED fixture drivers
• Intelligent charging of batteries, battery charging 12Vdc-48Vdc. Monitoring of all
individual cell voltages.
• 0-10V/DALI/dc/PWM/RS485 dimming 0-100%
• Solar PV module input 10Vdc-48Vdc.
• Nominal rated Input voltage: 230V +10% / -6% (As per DOE EWR) 50Hz
• Can be combined with dc/ac inverter for grid system connection as required
• Specified for the project assessed solar energy yield in combination with wattage
of luminaire(s) used, battery sizes and usage of dimming
• 130W maximum typical pole load (Input Power), options up to max 200W loads
if needed as per the requirements of the project
• Automatic Light Switching controlled by sunset/sunrise and Integration with
communication module (PLMS), remote software/firmware capabilities, logging
of all system parameters
• Automatic Light Level Calculation / Automatic Dimming functionality for bad
weather situations based on calculated night length & energy available in
batteries.
• Operating temperature (nighttime): max +60 °C

• Storage (non-operating daytime) max +85 °C
5.4 Batteries
The type, size and quality of batteries specified shall be selected for their optimum performance
and integration for the project specific requirements.
• Gel Lead Acid, Lithium (Li-ion), Lithium Iron Phosphate (LiFePO4) and Nickel
Metal Hydride (NiMH) battery technologies
• With the exception of open ‘wet-type’ Lead Acid batteries, other battery
technologies proposed can be considered provided with proven adherence to all
technical requirements of this Manual Section
• Selected for minimum 24-hour autonomy operation (capability of 1-night full
operation following one full bad weather day)
• 12Vdc-48Vdc., Min 70Ah rated for powering LED luminaire drivers
• Expected Lifetime for the project design – 8-10 Years
• Guaranteed Lifetime for the project design - 5 Years
• 75 % of the rated capacity of the battery should be between fully charged and
load cut off conditions (as per specific battery performance requirements)
• Manufactured, tested and installed as per the respective International standards
listed under Part-1 Applicable Standards & Guidance References Section
• Mounted in the PV-Pole base, below ground within concrete combined
battery/foundation type, in the luminaire or in the PV Cell area.
• Operating temperature (nighttime): max +60 °C

• Storage (non-operating, daytime) max +85 °C
5.5 Controls
Whether the Standalone, Grid-Connected or Full Backup type systems, the project solar lighting
control/operation shall be fully interlinked via a wireless PLMS system.
• Wireless system; Wi-Fi or RF system, with MESH or STAR Capability and fully
tested and compatible with the lighting system proposed
• GSM 900/1800, GPRS, SMS, ZigBee etc. or other approved agreed system
• System shall be compliant with all Abu Dhabi TRA Standards/requirements and
be proposed with all statutory approvals
• The proposed system shall be fully compatible with the specified luminaire and
driver (ac or dc) proposed for the project and the inverter/controller
• Any brand of luminaires (as per the technical criteria within Part-1 Section-A) shall
be able to be controlled from the system to ensure luminaire choice can be made
openly for the best current marketplace products available for the project
• The PLMS must have a minimum of 20% spare capacity for future potential street
revisions and additions
system (CMS)/control room in the future as and when required (refer to Part-1
Section-D Clause 4.1.6)
autonomously for the project and also data shall be able to interface for
communication to a central CMS location via a GSM/TCP-IP network, with a
Department central location in the future
• The system must prevent all daytime operation of the LED streetlights unless only
the specific manual override of the automated programming is desired by The
Department
• Standard & customizable 24-hour light profiles for peak/off-peak times as per
Part-1 Section-D Clause 5 for the specific project type/location. Light levels
configurable at 10% step increments. The individual dimming profiles able to be
changed to weekly plans if required, rather than just identical 24-hour plans as
per the initial programming
• Photocell/astro-clock input adjustment to timed programming for dusk/dawn
operations
• Programmed dimming operation shall be only for luminaire groups set for each
length of roadway from defined intersection to defined intersection and never
allow individual switching/dimming of any adjacent fixtures in the same road.
Junctions and intersections can be dimmed separately from the road links in
between them.
• Automatic luminous flux reduction in case of consecutive bad weather periods to
avoid light switch off
• System must be provided with a single point of data terminal/interface/
connection for any reprogramming needs of the PLMS project area to be
achievable from one point of interface
problems like engine/driver errors, battery errors, inverter errors per pole
• Reporting - Detailed overview about solar energy generation, energy consumed,
accumulated power usage (Wh), temperatures, individual cell voltages and
accumulative hours of luminaire operation at dimming levels, etc.
• Optional iOs/Android mobile application interface for maintenance work at site –
Basic status info and instant site-setting configuration via mobile phone
• Data Export for further in-depth analysis or integration into existing inventory
management systems operated by The Department
• Operating temperature (Nighttime): max+60 °C

• Storage (non-operating daytime) max +8 °C
5.6 Cleaning System
To ensure optimum performance, at all times, the PV-systems must be cleaned on a regular basis.
To avoid spillage of cleaning fluids, water and dirt/dust onto parked vehicles, notices of intent to
clean must be sent out to residents/building owners and posted on the lighting poles prior to any
cleaning being carried out. All cleaning methods for the PV cells must be detailed during design
submissions for review by The Department,
Where any cleaning systems using specific tools are specified, all tools shall be handed over to
The Department at the end of the maintenance period.
High pressure hose cleaning is not acceptable, nor are any automated/motorised systems,
without full test data to prove long term viability and sustainability, on the PV-systems themselves
and any solution should be based on the following parameters:
• Cleaning must be carried out using the methods and materials as specified by the
manufacturer. All cleaning methods will be recorded in The Department’s Asset
Management Database and provided to maintenance contractors when required.
• PV systems shall be cleaned as per the manufacturer’s detailed financial analysis

submitted during design stage
• Solar charging and battery levels will be reviewed on a monthly basis through the
PLMS
• Failure to meet the required levels of charging and battery level will be reviewed
as part of the warranty (performance)
5.6.3 PV System Assembly
a) Assembly of PV-system. Assembly of the solar lighting can be carried out fully at the
factory and shipped complete to the project site or can be assembled on site with
minimum time and suitable fixing tools.
b) Mast arm for the Luminaires. In all solar lighting systems, the pole bracket will be
designed in accordance with the requirements for structural design of lighting poles.
They will have an outside diameter of maximum 60mm and be round in cross section
to allow any other luminaire type to be fitted easily. Where post top mounting of the
luminaire is used, the bracket/adapter must be easily removable for replacement
with a side entry bracket.
Where possible, all solar lighting poles heights and inter-pole spacing shall conform
to the requirements of Part 1 Section A Clause 4.3 to ensure that the minimum
quantity of poles are used in the project whilst providing the required lighting levels.
Where heights and inter-pole spacing differ from The Department’s requirements,
full justification must be provided and fed into the financial analysis. During
installation, Pole heights and inter-pole spacing must match the design submission
and financial analysis.
c) Additional Assembly. If required by the project brief, provisions shall be made on the
PV-pole for enabling the fixing of other accessories such as fixed arms for fabric
banners, or CCTV cameras. These provisions shall allow for the planned accessories
to be added without having to remove the existing installed accessories, luminaire
brackets or the like. The provisions shall be such as to ensure the clean, aesthetic look
is maintained, the solar-collecting capability of the PVs to not be compromised. If
required these provisions shall be designed to allow for complete dismantling, when
not in use, without leaving behind any clamps, lugs, etc...
5.7 Pole Design Submission and Production
a) Design for Strength. The PV-poles shall be designed as per the requirements of Part
1 Section C. The design shall consider the loading of the pole when equipped with the
equivalent of the actual type and number of mounted luminaires for the project and
the associated fittings or accessories as confirmed by The Department. All PV-poles
shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of the latest edition of BS EN
40 or equivalent International standard. Design calculations shall be submitted, for
The Department’s approval, showing the following: -
i. Wind load derivation (hand calculation) on luminaires and mounted
accessories
iv. Stress at the intervals specified in (iii) above
vi. Combined Stress Ratios at the intervals specified in (iii) above
.
b) Design for Deflection. Actual deflection against the deflection limit of the PV-poles
shall be clearly stated in the design calculations and shall conform to BS EN 40 or
equivalent International standard. The actual deflection calculated shall be based on
the basic wind speed of 160kph with gust factor of 1.14 as per The Department’s
requirements and shall be measured at the luminaire(s) position(s). The calculated
deflection shall be the sum of deflection on the vertical PV-pole section as well as the
outreach bracket arm section(s). Deflection of both the vertical pole and the arm(s)
shall be shown in the design submission.
allowable deflection and special deflection limits required for CCTV cameras, where
applicable for the project.
c) Notarized Statement. A notarized statement, attested by the UAE Embassy, certifying

the PV-systems were built conforming to the manufacturer’s approved drawings and
design calculations, shall be submitted after completion of manufacture, and prior to
delivery of poles to site. PV-systems delivery to project site shall not be accepted
without this.
Project Submission Requirement:- Ensure all the material and component requirements are met
by the system proposed and provided as part of the project submission.
proposed products to be installed. The Department may request independent testing
of the sample PV-systems and equipment to verify the performance and compliance
with the Specifications. The Department shall be the sole judge regarding the
acceptability of the performance of the PV systems.

inspection. During a factory inspection, the manufacturer shall perform a full PV-pole
deflection test, as agreed jointly with an accredited independent test house and
department, on a randomly selected pole from the manufactured lot, for each type
of ordered pole, to establish the design compliance and structural integrity of the
manufactured pole under simulated conditions of full loading, strictly in accordance
with the approved design calculations and drawings. Where PV integrated into
luminaires or PV cladding has been proposed, The Department will require random
samples from the manufacturer’s stores to be tested to show compliance with The
Department’s requirements as set out in this Section.

7. Warranty
below.
a) A written warranty for a Minimum ten (10) year on-site replacement: materials,
fixtures, finish, and workmanship. On-site replacement includes transportation,
removal and installation of new products. Finish warranty shall include warranty
against corrosion, failure or substantial deteriorations such as blistering, cracking or
peeling (excluding damage caused by contact with chemical substances, fertilizers,
water containing corrosive agents or stray electrical currents). The warranty shall
include for maintained aesthetic integrity of the PV-pole, photovoltaic panels,
accessories, components and, without any partial or complete separation, corrosion,
leaking, dislocation, disjointing, flaring, etc. of any elements of the PV-pole, system
components and assembly with no cost to The Department*
defective PV-poles, photovoltaics, accessories, components and with no cost to The
Department*
c) A written warranty for a Minimum eight (8) year replacement material warranty on
the batteries for on-site replacement: material and workmanship. On-site
replacement includes transportation, removal and installation of new products.
Warranty shall include substantial deteriorations such as leaking, buckling, corrosion,
inability to be charged or withhold a charge, impacted system autonomy and reduced
dc output with no cost to The Department*
d) A written warranty for a Minimum twenty-five (25) year replacement material

warranty for the photovoltaic (PV) modules for their output peak watt capacity to not
fall below 80% at the end of twenty-five (25) years. With a Minimum-ten (minimum-
10) year replacement warranty for their output peak watt capacity to not fall below
90% at the end of ten (10) years. With no cost to The Department*
(Please note:*With no cost to the Department does not just refer to the solar
equipment/component cost in regards to any warranty actions. This also refers to any costs
associated with labour for removal/fitting of components, obtaining Authority NOCs, traffic
management costs, transport etc. The Department will not be liaible for any associated costs
arising/necessary in relation to warranty actions). The manufacturer must contact DMT prior to
assigning any Contractor. These requirements are purely in regards to the terms of Solar
Equipment Warranties that must be provided to The Department at Handover. It is not in any
way in connection to the cover during the defects period which shall be solely as per specific
terms agreed between the manufacturer and Contractor.

Department, of the Warranty for The Department from the Solar Supplier, accompanied with
written proof of the local representative’s UAE Operating License and established UAE
If requested within the Project documents, the Consultant/Contractor shall provide for the solar
street lighting system manufacturer to include for a full maintenance and defects contract for a
defined period for the project. This would be above and beyond the normal defects’ arrangements
This contract shall include for all preventative and reactionary maintenance of the solar system
and components, including all parts and materials throughout the duration of the contract. Refer
also to Clause 5.6 regarding cleaning. Full details of this maintenance contract including method
statement for the maintenance to be included for approval of The Department. The maintenance
contract should include for a renewal and/or extension of the contract if required in the future by
The Department.
Project Submission Requirement:- Cover the above requirements for all projects for solar street
lighting.
a) General. The measurement and payment for the PV-system solar roadway/parking
lighting system shall include, but not by way of limitations, the complete PV-poles and
components, batteries, invertors, controllers, PLMS, luminaires with all accessories,
foundations, earthing and all related materials and works for the complete
installation and energizing the system.
b) Installation of cables in PV-systems shall be in accordance with The Department’s

standard Specifications.
c) PV-Systems. Measurement and payment for the PV-system and components, will be
at the unit rates as included in the Bills of Quantities, which rates shall be considered
as full compensation for all labour, materials, finishes, tools, equipment and
appurtenances as required, as specified, and as directed by The Department.
Project Submission Requirement:- Cover the above requirements for all projects for solar
roadway/parking lighting.
An Operation, Instruction and Maintenance Manual (O&M Manual), in both English and Arabic,
should be provided for The Department for the project solar roadway/parking lighting system.
The following minimum details must be provided in the Manual:
• Basic principles of the photovoltaic system.

• A small write-up (with a block diagram) on the project solar roadway/parking
lighting system - its components, PV-poles and PV-modules, batteries,
inverter/controller electronics and LED luminaires, driver, including expected
performance.
• Type, Model number, Voltage & capacity of the batteries used in the system.
• Charging, discharging regime and significance of any indicators.
• Clear instructions about erection of the PV-poles and mounting of PV-modules,
luminaires, arms, fixtures and accessory housing assemblies on the PV-pole.
• Equipment manufacturer’s documentation (data sheets, handbooks, etc.
• A list of actions to be taken in the event of an earth fault alarm
• The shutdown and isolation procedure for emergency and maintenance
• A copy of the Shutdown procedure and any electrical safety warnings
solar roadway/parking lighting system.
• The system performance estimate, including expected seasonal or operational
variation
• Do's and Don’ts.
components after removal/changing-over.
and maintenance, in case of non-functionality of the solar roadway/parking
lighting system.
Project Submission Requirement:- Cover the above requirements for all projects for solar
roadway/parking lighting.

Part-1 Section-F –Lighting for Signage
Part-1 Section F – Lighting for Signage

Section-F, refer to the Part-1 Applicable Standards & Guidance References Section.
This section is a brief summary of the primary factors covered within this Part-1 Section-F of the
Lighting Manual.
1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-F
Introduction).
b) Part-1 Section-F covers front-illuminated fixed signage, self-illuminated signage
(trans-illuminated) and lettering-type signage and encompasses fixed or temporary
traffic/roadway/pedestrian signage applications, advertising/commercial material
within the public realm and signage used within in parks and public realm locations.
c) LED Luminaire Useful-Life Performance is based on an ambient to 350C.
d) Maintenance Factor (MF) calculations must be supplied with every submission.
e) Luminaire Dirt Depreciation Factor (LDD) component of the Maintenance Factor are
detailed in Part 1 Section A, Clause 4.4.
f) Warranty for all luminaires is a minimum 10-Years for all aspects.
g) The Department’s decision is final regarding project submissions and design
approvals.
1.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-F
a) External Lighting for Proposed Gantry Signage

Department’s electrical and lighting standards for electrical distribution works Part 1 Section I.
Details of all standards are provided within the Applicable Standards & Guidance References at
the end of Part-1.
It is a statutory requirement that all luminaires used signage must be LED (or other equally
sustainable alternative luminaire technology as defined within this Manual’s Introduction).
Part-1 Section-F covers both front-illuminated fixed signage and self-illuminated signage
(transilluminated) and encompasses fixed or temporary traffic/roadway/pedestrian signage
applications, advertising/commercial material within the public realm and signage used within in
parks and public realm locations.
3. LED Luminaires
corrosion resistance and endurance against the occasional sand-storm and dusty weather in
3.2.1 General
a) The LED luminaires must have valid certification under the Abu Dhabi QCC
Certification Scheme for LED Exterior Lighting.
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide valid QCC Certificate.
b) Manufacturer’s company profile including a profile of the manufacturing facilities.

Valid ISO 9001 certificates of the manufacturing facilities.
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide manufacturer profile and ISO 9001 certificates.
c) The following shall be submitted in addition to all requirements of this manual (all
data in SI units):
a) The LEDs shall be from a manufacturer of LEDs with ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377 or

signage lighting on The Department’s projects are 2700K, 3000K, and 4000K, only,
although the QCC Scheme allows a wider band for all luminaire types).
Rendering Index) rating shall be as shown in Table 3.2.2.1:
Fixture Type Minimum Luminaire Efficacy*1 Minimum CRI-Rating
Floodlight 100lm/W 80
Special*2 100lm/W 80
*1Luminaire efficacy is given as lumen Output (lm) over input power (W) at standard
*2In the case of Gantry/Signage use fixtures; the Special category covers fixtures used for
internally illuminated signage luminaire technologies or other special LED luminaire types
not of the normal floodlighting application for all front-mounted illumination of signage
luminaire CCT is within acceptable limits as shown in Table 3.2.2.2 in relation to Nominal CCT.

2700K 2725K ±83
3000K 3045K ± 100
4000K 3985K ± 154
3.2.4 LED Binning
replacement.
exposure during the day, the occasional sand-storm and dust in designing the
luminaire body. The design of the luminaire shall be such that there is a direct thermal
path from the LED junctions to the atmosphere thus providing a thermal transfer
effect throughout the life of the luminaire. The thermal solution shall be proprietary
and designed by the lighting manufacturer to enable the luminaires to work efficiently
in Abu Dhabi climatic conditions. The luminaire shall be provided with a demonstrated
ventilation arrangement allowing heat to be dissipated to the atmosphere.
The luminaire shall be designed to prevent collection of debris and dust/sand by

proven and stated means. The design shall be such that the luminaire lenses shall be
anti-static to ensure minimal dust/sand accumulation.
b) The luminaire operating range (taking into account LED components, driver, etc.) shall
be to a minimum of +50°C ambient air temperature (Ta) with an acceptable
demonstrated lumen-output performance at Ta+50°C. The operating range maximum
refers to the Ta as per IEC/ISO 60598-1 or UL 1598.
In addition this measured percentage drop of luminous flux shall then be applied to the LM-79
fitting.
c) The luminaire installed daytime (non working) temperature shall be to a minimum of

50°C ambient air temperature (Ta)with all internal components rated to a minimum
of 85°C..
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide declaration of the conformity of the Luminaire to the

Minimum IK-Rating
Luminaire Lens
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide declaration of pressure die-cast aluminum alloy

Standards or comparable International standard.
metal coated/painted and non-coated fixture components for minimum 1,000hours, or approved
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide written report of all dissimilar metals used within the
corrosion.
d) All synthetic optical materials shall be resistant to degredation by Ultraviolet

Radiation and scratch resistant.
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide written confirmation covering any steel components
standard.
f) Any external stainless steel body materials, components bolts, nuts and hardened
washers shall be minimum 316L Grade or comparable International standard.
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide written confirmation covering any stainless steel

• Driver Current to be max. 750mA.
luminaire).
in equivalence with this requirement
• Drivers shall have a Power Factor (PF) of L ≥ 0.90
• Driver shall be UL and/or IEC Certified
in accordance with ANSI C82.77or comparable International standard
thermal protection is present within the driver, then proof required to confirm it’s operation is
not activated within the normal stated limits of luminaire thermal operational requirements.
Demonstrate 50,000 hours’ useful life of the luminaire based on the simplified B20-L70 threshold
at ambient temperature (Tq) of 35°C (takes into account the annual average recorded night-time
standard.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide test results for IEC 62471, ANSI/IES RP-27.3 or
exposure.
3.2.13 Surge Protection and Earthing

luminaire SPD.
a) The Department will request a sample of three luminaires of all proposed luminaire
types to be installed for review by The Department. The Department’s decision on all
matters is final.
b) To verify luminaire performance and compliance with the specifications, The

Department may also request additional testing of sample luminaires. All such testing
shall be from accredited laboratories.

inspection.
Project Submission Requirement: - Written confirmation stating acceptance of the above

requirements if and when invoked by The Department.
3.2.15 Warranty
below.
a) A written warranty for a 50,000 Burning Hours* on-site replacement material, fixture,
components; such as lenses, gaskets & fastenings, and the fixture finishes shall
include warranty against failure or substantial deteriorations such as corrosion,
blistering, cracking or peeling (excluding damage caused by contact with chemical
substances, fertilizers, water containing corrosive agents or stray electrical currents)
with no cost to The Department**
b) A written warranty for a 50,000 Burning Hours* replacement material warranty for
defective or non-starting LED source assemblies with no cost to The Department**
c) A written warranty for a 50,000 Burning Hours *replacement material warranty on all
supplied drivers, power supply units (PSUs), electrical components and in-built
control components with no cost to The Department**
d) A written warranty for a 50,000 Burning Hours* replacement material warranty for
on-maintained luminance levels on all light sources (LED package, LED array, or LED
module) including, but not limited to the LED die, encapsulate, and phosphor. Stating
B20 compliance for a minimum of 12.5 years. If the expected useful life performance
shall replace the light source(s) or luminaire as needed with no cost to The
Department**
Please note: * Burning Hours for the Emirate of Abu Dhabi are calculated as an Average of 11
hours per day with a Total Annual of 4,015 hours.
**With no cost to The Department does not just refer to the luminaire or luminaire component
cost in regards to any warranty actions. This also refers to any costs associated with labour for
warranty actions). The manufacturer must contact DMT prior to assigning any Contractor. These

4.1 General
should be given to Handbook Chapters F, M and O.
The Consultant shall always check first that the required signage illumination/luminance level can
be achieved from the adjacent natural surrounding ambient lighting for the duration required for
the sign to be viewable. This also includes considering the optimum project-placement of signage
to suit the surrounding lighting as part of the project development. Both required levels and
required night-time duration are set out within Table 4.2.1 The Consultant shall note that all
calculations for front illuminated signage shall be undertaken with illuminance (Lux) calculations
across the fronts of the signs and internally illuminated signage shall be designed to ensure the
correct signage luminance (cdm2) levels are delivered dependent on sign and sign material.
Dedicated lighting fixtures shall always be selected and proposed in an integrated and aesthetic
manner to be the most appropriate for the task and sign type, size, position and viewing angles.
Note: If the surface sheeting material of the traffic sign is ASTM D4956 Type-XI: Retroreflective
sheeting typically manufactured as an unmetalized cube corner microprismatic retroreflective
element material, (refer to The Department’s Manual for Uniform Traffic Control Devices
(MUTCD)), there is no need to provide any lighting equipment to illuminate the sign.
Minimum Average Uniformity Hours of

Design Level : Ratio Required
Specific Signage Type Lighting Approach & Notes
Luminance(L)=CD/m2 (Minimum to Operation/
Average) Visibility
Illumination(Em)=LUX
N/A
1
Traffic Signage* (signs to be positioned From Dusk until No dedicated lighting fixture
N/A
adjacent to Roads for natural visibility Dawn provision
from car headlights)
20Lux
No dedicated lighting fixture
Pedestrian/Cyclist (signs to be positioned From Dusk until provision unless specifically
Signage*2 within for illumination by Uo≥0.5
Dawn requested for the project and as
Streetscapes street/streetscape agreed with The Department
lighting)
20Lux No dedicated lighting fixture

Pedestrian/Cyclist From Dusk until
(signs to be positioned provision unless specifically
Signage*2 within Uo≥0.5 time the park/area
for illumination by requested for the project and as
Parks/Public Realm is closed
area’s ambient lighting) agreed with The Department
30 CD/m2 Uo≥0.5
Internally Illuminated From Dusk until Only proposed when specifically
(assuming
Traffic*1 or Pedestrian/ Average for specific time agreed with agreed with The Department for a
single colour
Cyclist*2 Signage sign design and colours background)
The Department project
No flashing, strobing or fast

Commercial/Advertising 50 Lux From Dusk until colour-changing permitted unless
Externally Illuminated Uo≥0.3
Across the sign 12am (Midnight) specifically agreed with The
Signage Department
100-150 cd/m2 No flashing, strobing or fast

Commercial/Advertising
Assuming the plain From Dusk until colour-changing permitted unless
Internally Illuminated N/A
white screen diffusing 12am (Midnight) specifically agreed with The
Signage Department
material only
No flashing, strobing or fast

Commercial/Advertising 50 cd/m2 From Dusk until colour-changing permitted unless
LED ‘Neon-sign type’- N/A
Regardless of colour(s) 12am (Midnight) specifically agreed with The
Lettering Signs Department
*1 All traffic signs shall be as The Department’s Standard Specifications and Details for material, reflectance and
design format requirements.
*2 Pedestrian/Cyclist Signage refers only to public or cyclist wayfinding, safety and/or warning signs.
Project Submission Requirement:- Ensure complete compliance with the table and associated
notes for all lighting designs and lighting calculations undertaken for projects. Citing any
justifications for design decisions where described above within any project lighting reports and
within the lighting calculation output reports described with Clause 4.5.
Project Maintenance Factors for lighting calculations shall never be assumed, nor default values
used in any lighting calculations submitted to The Department. All Maintenance Factors shall be
calculated and justified in accordance with the requirements of this Clause.
4.3.1 Lamp Lumen Depreciation (LLD)
the Maintenance Factor used in the lighting design software calculation:
The Consultant shall demonstrate the 50,000 hours’ lumen depreciation of the luminaire at 100%
output at an average nigh- time temperature (Tq) of 35°C (takes into account the annual average
recorded night-time temperature for Abu Dhabi Emirate plus safety allowance). The methodology
to be used is as follows:
agreed by The Department, showing the highest Ts (solder point temperature of an
LED) recorded within the luminaire, usually at the centre of the fitting and the centre
of the PCB or what would appear logically to be the hottest region of the optical
b) 10°C shall then be added to the hottest recorded Ts to simulate the required average
night-time temperature of 35°C.
c) The LM-80 report from the chip manufacturer shall be provided showing the
associated Alpha and Beta (α and β) figures for each of the three Ts measurements
namely, 55°C, 85°C and 105°C at the proposed driving current. The most appropriate
higher Alpha and Beta will be chosen for the Ts + 10°C. (Note: figures from “Energy
Star” type calculations can only be submitted as per TM-21 formula requirements as
verification of the required LM-80 report derived figures, never as an alternative to
LM-80 or the TM-21 method).
Example; if a thermal test shows a Ts of 68°C measured at 25°C ambient at 500mA drive current,
then 10°C is added to give 78°C. In this case the most appropriate Alpha and Beta figures would
be the LM-80 data for a Ts of 85°C at 500mA. Any Ts measurements that exceed 105°C (including
the added 10°C for Tq 35°C) will not be permitted.
d) These Alphas and Betas will then be applied to the TM-21 formula which calculates
the expected lumen output at 50,000 hours.
calculations. The LLD must be ≥0.70 or the fixture will not be allowed for use on
Department projects.
formula.
4.3.2 Luminaire Dirt Depreciation (LDD)
Table 4.3.2.1 Luminaire Dirt Depreciation (LDD)
External Fixture With Glass External External Fixture Without Glass External
Optic or Any Internal Fixture Optic
6 months 0.95 0.96 0.98 0.92 0.93 0.94
12 months* 0.93 0.94 0.97 0.91 0.92 0.93
18 months 0.91 0.92 0.96 0.9 0.91 0.92
24 months 0.90 0.91 0.95 0.88 0.89 0.91
36 months 0.89 0.91 0.95 0.83 0.87 0.90

High – Remote/desert areas, major city centers, heavy industrial areas
components and ensure these Maintenance Factors are used in all lighting calculations in which
the particular LED luminaire is proposed.
Lighting Design Calculations; assuming 50,000 hours of luminaire operation at 35C average
ambient temperature (Takes into account the annual average recorded night time temperature
for Abu Dhabi Emirate plus safety allowance). Lighting calculations shall use the derived MF
value(s) as calculated under the requirements set out in 4.3 above and with these MFs used
designs shall achieve the Minimum Average Design Levels, Uniformities and other applicable
parameters set out within Table 4.2.1.
specific requirements set out within Section-F Clause 4.
All lighting calculations shall be undertaken and reported using lighting design software such as
DIALux or other proprietary software. Note: LED ‘Neon-sign type’- Lettering Signs need not have
lighting calculations used to prove compliance with the luminance requirements and instead just
need manufacturer’s technical data to show the lettering luminance information.
Lighting calculations for a project shall be issued within a single report format, containing all the
necessary signage calculations and the Consultant shall comply with the following requirements:
• All Company Details and Project Set-Up information shall be entered in full
• Designer’s details and contact information shall be entered in full
• Project Notes section to be filled in for all justifications/notes required
• Each separate sign and/or gantry sign calculation to be titled logically for the project and
cross-referenced to project drawings/reports specifically if applicable
• Table 4.2 and associated notes shall form the basis of all calculations with base variables
(CDm2/Lux, Uo) manually adapted from any software defaults as necessary to exactly
match Table 4.2
values used and replace any software default values
• Only exact-fixture IES/Elumdat luminaire data used within the calculation(s), fixtures files
always used at 100% lumen output
• All signage dimensions shall be inputted exactly as per the project
• Internally illuminated signs must be represented with appropriate colour and percentage
diffused material simulated and the actual luminaires behind. A reference-plane then
used to show the resultant surface luminance of the sign
• Fixture offsets and tilt angles shall exactly match those proposed for the project
• Project Cover
• Planning Data
Per Sign Calculation
• Luminance Photometric Results (Internally illuminated Signs) OR

• Illuminance Photometric Results (Externally illuminated Signs)
• Greyscale or False Colour 2D/3D Contour Rendering showing light distribution
across the sign
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide the Software Lighting Calculation Output Report fully
in adhereance to the above requirements in PDF format. In addition if requested by The
Department, provide the software source file alongside the PDF Report.

Part-1 Section-G –Light Pollution Mitigation
Part-1 Section G – Light Pollution Mitigation

Section-G, refer to the Part-1 Applicable Standards & Guidance References Section.
For more reference information regarding light pollution, light trespass and sky glow, refer to the
Public Realm & Street Lighting Handbook Chapter F.
This Section is a brief summary of the primary factors covered within this Part-1 Section-G of the
Lighting Manual.
The technical brief criteria developed within this Section aims to ensure the appropriate reduced
nighttime light pollution is maintained for a project. This is to ensure the correct balance is
achieved to avoid excessive and obtrusive light pollution and its associated adverse impacts on
human and ecological health.
The Light Pollution Mitigation calculations must be provided at Detailed Design Stage for the
whole project area or a typical section of project area if applicable: i.e. for a linear streetscape
project with a repetitive lighting design solution.
All lighting within a project area must be considered together whether it is roadway/parking
lighting only, landscape lighting only, or combined roadway/parking and landscape lighting. A
single project submission is required to cover all the area’s lighting. To ensure this holistic
requirement is understood fully, this section is repeated within Part-2 of this Manual
1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-G
A project Light Pollution Mitigation submission at Detailed Design Stage to cover whole project
lighting.
1.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-G
Separate roadway/parking lighting and landscape lighting submissions if both are present
together within a project area.
2.1 General

herein. All requirements ar detailed in Part 1 Section I.
2.2 Exterior lighting:
a) All non-safety and non-security public realm lighting must be automatically switched
off or dimmed between 23.00hrs and 07.00hrs during the week and 00:00 hrs. and
07:00hrs at the weekend and outside these hours if daylight levels are sufficient.
b) If safety lighting is provided and will be used between the hours detailed in Item a,
this part of the lighting system must comply with the lower levels of lighting
recommended during these hours as per Part 1 Section D.
c) If security lighting is provided, it must be activated using motion sensors with

threshold and time-off adjustment so that luminaires only activate when someone is
in the immediate area and turn off a reasonable time after motion is no longer
detected.
2.3 Lighting levels at the site boundary and beyond:
a) All projects must be classified and stated under one of the zones defined in Table
2.3.1:
Table 2.3.1 - Lighting Zones

Lighting Zone Description
Developed areas of national parks, state parks, forest land

LZ1
and rural areas
Areas predominantly consisting of residential zoning,

LZ2 neighbourhood business districts, light industry with limited
night time use, and residential mixed-use areas
LZ3 All other areas
High-activity commercial districts in major metropolitan areas

LZ4
as designated by the local land use planning authority
b) The project’s exterior lighting must then be designed to meet the following
requirements:
Table 2.3.2- Lighting Design Requirements

Maximum Maximum Light Maximum
Maximum
Maximum Initial Trespass into Surface
Luminaire Source
Initial Illuminance at Maximum windows (Vertical Luminance
Lighting Intensity (kcd) *3
Illuminance at Specified % Direct Lux)*3 (cd/m2)
Zone*2
Site Boundary Distance Up-light 19:00 to 00.00 to 19.00 to 00.00 to
(Lux) Beyond Site 00.00 07.00 00.00 07.00 Average
Boundary (Lux) hrs. hrs. hrs. hrs.
LZ1 <1 N/A 0% 2 1*1 2.5 0 2.5
LZ2 1.1 <1 AT 3m 2% 5 1 7.5 0.5 5
LZ3 2.2 <1 AT 4.5m 5% 10 2 10 1 10
LZ4 5 <1 AT 7.5m 15% 25 5 15 2.5 15
1
* Allowed from public roadway lighting installations only.
*2 Where the site boundary lies adjacent to a Lighting Zone of a lower category, the requirements of the
lower category must be met at and beyond that boundary.
*3 Worst case scenario of weekend lighting hours taken.
2.4 Additional Requirements/Clarifications:
a) High structure aircraft hazard lights are excluded from the calculations.
b) Feature lighting may be exempted from these requirements where a specialist

lighting consultant has recommended their inclusion in order to protect illuminated
visual elements/character as part of artwork.
c) Any floodlighting for sports facilities, for a limited amount of time in the evenings can
also be excluded from the project calculations. These sports facilities must only have
lighting activated during sporting activities/use. Sports facilities intended for
operation during non-operational hours must include the sports lighting within the
calculations.
d) Lighting schemes requiring/proposing upward light, for example ground recessed

luminaires, ground mounted floodlights and decorative lighting may not in
combination achieve the Table’s limits. In these instances, deliberation and care
should always be taken to minimise any upward waste light by the proper application
of suitably directional luminaires where applicable; accurate aiming onto surfaces,
minimal lumen-output/wattage selection, light controlling attachments and the
project’s circuit/control philosophy.
Project Submission Requirement:- To demonstate the above requirements are met
3. Light Pollution Criteria Definitions

Figure 3.1 - Diagram showing Light pollution
3.1 Definitions
a) Percentage Direct Uplight - The percentage of direct upward light associated with the
total initial designed fixture lumens emitted at an angle of 90-degrees or higher from
nadir (straight down). This percentage must be met at the project’s plot boundary.
b) Maximum Light Trespass (into windows) - This is calculated in vertical illuminance

(Lux) and is measured flat on the glazing at the center of the window. These values
are the maximum levels permitted excluding existing base light levels.
c) Maximum Luminaire Source Intensity - This applies to each lighting source and/or
luminaire directly visible outside of the area being lit which could be a source of glare
or distraction. These values must be achieved however exceptions may be permitted
it mitigated for particular lighting applications, such as sports lighting.
d) Maximum Surface Luminance - This is the measurement of actual visual brightness

and must be limited to avoid over lighting of all or any of the external lighting
elements. The area luminance is only applicable to surfaces directly illuminated as
part of the nighttime external lighting scheme.
e) Motion sensors with threshold adjustment - Threshold adjustments can be made to

prevent nuisance activation by insects, birds and small animals. Hours of operation
should be followed, except where it can be demonstrated that the project’s known
‘hours of usage’ exceed these.
4. Design Calculation Requirements and Methodology

A detailed Light Pollution Mitigation Report must be provided for all projects. This report must
include, but not limited to, the following requirements: -
a) Provide a narrative describing the type and location of all external lighting provided
on the project, and lighting calculations demonstrating that the required illuminances
and percentage up-light limits within the Table of Lighting Design Requirements have
been met.
b) Provide overall project site external lighting drawing(s) and details of lighting controls
and locations of any daylight sensors.
c) Provide specification and luminaire schedule details confirming mounting heights and
all information relating to the light output and aiming of each luminaire.
d) Provide the Control Strategy confirming which luminaires will be turned off and/or
dimmed outside the recommended hours of operation and which luminaires will
operate at the reduced levels.
e) Provide confirmation of any safety or security lighting used between 00.00 and 07:00
complies with the lower levels of lighting recommended within Table 2.3.2.
f) Provide a Light Pollution Mitigation Calculation Report within a single report format
which must include for all public realm lighting, including safety, security, pedestrian
circulation, landscape (functional/accent/feature/ architectural), roadway, external
car parking, and external signage/advertising. Proprietary lighting calculation
software, such as DIALux must be used to evaluate and demonstrate compliance of
the project and achievement of the limits set out within table 2.3.2.
g) Where the lighting project consists of exceptionally large areas that would not be
easily imported into calculation software, typical streets can be used as the basis of
the calculations. Typical streets must be identical in every aspect of the lighting
installation. Typical streets must be identified on the project layout to provide ease
of identification by The Department’s reviewer.
The Consultant shall comply with the following requirements:
• Designer’s details, contact information and project notes shall be entered in full
• Use of horizontal and vertical calculation planes, false-colour, contour and/or
point measurement grids can be used to address appropriately the various
aspects
• Each separate calculation/calculation plane to be titled logically for the project
and cross-referenced to project drawings/report specifically if applicable
• Table 2.3.2 and associated notes shall form the basis of all calculations with any
base variables manually adapted from any software defaults as necessary to
exactly match the requirements
• The calculated Maintenance Factors derived as per the relevant lighting design
Section(s) shall form the basis of all entered MF values used and replace any
software default values
• Only exact-fixture IES/Elumdat luminaire data used within the calculation(s),
fixtures files always used at appropriate % lumen output as per the controls’
strategy
• Fixture offsets, aiming and tilt angles shall exactly match those proposed for the
project
o Project Cover
o Table of Contents
o Luminaire Parts List
o Luminaire Data Sheet(s)
o Planning Data
Per Calculation/Calculation Plane (as applicable)
o Luminance Photometric Results OR

o Illuminance Photometric Results OR
o Greyscale or False Colour 2D/3D Contour Rendering
4.1 Step by Step Guidance
To prepare the Light Pollution Mitigation Report it is advisable to follow the steps in Table 4.1.1.
Table 4.1.1- Light Pollution Mitigation Report- Step by Step Guidance

Step Description Outcome
1 Provide Project info, project description and Luminaire Complete Pro-forma
Schedule in report format.
2 Identify ALL types of lighting to be used in the project Complete Pro-forma
3 Identify any additional lighting present Complete Pro-forma
4 Identify any Exemptions requested (refer to Clause 2.4) Complete Pro-forma
5 Identify the hours of operation/dimming for each lighting Complete Pro-forma
type
6 Identify the Applicable Lighting Zone to be used and justify Complete Pro-forma
selection
7 Identify Typical Streets, provide unique reference number Complete Pro-forma
and mark on project layout drawing
8 Use approved lighting calculation software to calculate the Complete Pro-forma
required lighting levels from Table 2.3.2. Set up Grids in
DIALux at the right of way boundary and the appropriate
distance for the Lighting Zone beyond the boundary.
Where buildings will be/are installed, set up grid on
building face to calculate light trespass through windows
(where building type is unknown use a typical type of
building as an example and add a note).
9 Provide report and completed Pro-forma to the
Department
4.2 Light Pollution Mitigation Pro-forma
To ensure that the information provided is accurate and covers all required data input and
calculation required for the submission and approval of the Light Pollution Mitigation Report,
the consultant/contractor must complete, sign and return Pro-forma 4.1.2
Pro-forma 4.1.2- Light Pollution Mitigation Report Project Data
Project Name Project Location
Project Drawing Luminaire Schedule (provided on separate sheet)
Numbers (type, height, wattage, lumen output, aiming, etc.)
*Project Lighting Highway *Project Lighting Type Cycle/Jogging Track
Type (Roadway) Boulevard/Avenue (Public Realm) Landscape
Residential Park/Open Space
Additional Lighting Present
Project Description:
Hours of Operation Dimming (Level)

Roadway Roadway
Cycle/Jogging Track Cycle/Jogging Track
Landscape Landscape
Park/Open Space Park/Open Space
List of Exemptions requested (Refer Clause 2.4)
Applicable Lighting Zone (Table 2.3.1) Justification
**Typical Street Reference Number

Maximum Initial Illuminance at Site Boundary (Lux)
Maximum Initial Illuminance at Specified Distance Beyond Site Boundary (Lux)
Maximum % Direct Up-light
Maximum Light Trespass into windows (Vertical Lux) 19:00 to 00.00 to
00.00 hrs. 07.00 hrs.
Maximum Luminaire Source Intensity (kcd) 19:00 to 00.00 to
00.00 hrs. 07.00 hrs.
Average Maximum Surface Luminance (cd/m2)
Designer Name Checker Name

Signature Signature
Date Date
*tick each type included in the complete project
**Where Typical Streets are used, they must be identical for the lighting proposed. Where multiple Typical streets are
used, they must have a unique reference number and be clearly marked on the Project drawings.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide a Project Light Polution Mitigation Report including
the Software Lighting Calculation Report fully in adhereance to the above requirements in PDF
format. In addition, if requested by The Department, provide the software source file alongside
the PDF Report.

Part-1 Section-H –Project Submission Requirements
Part-1 Section H – Project Submission

Requirements
Section-H, refer to the Part-1 Applicable Standards & Guidance References Section.
This Section is a brief summary of the primary factors covered within this Part-1 Section-H of the
Lighting Manual.
This Section covers Project Design Submissions made to The Department in relation only to the
lighting discipline and the specific technical lighting submission information required in addition
to any Department standard Consultant Procedures/standard submission standards. It is not in
relation to any other disciplines, nor planning submissions, material submittals, shop drawings,
Tender submissions or any other pre or post-design submissions. These are separate issues and
covered elsewhere as per Department procedures for other disciplines and as required for Town
Planning submissions or Contract works.
The Project Design Stage Submission Requirements for Lighting are grouped as per the separate
Stages as follows:
• Concept Design Stage

• Preliminary Design Stage
• Detail Design Stage
Concept Design, Preliminary Design and Detail Design are statutory project submission stages for
all projects, unless otherwise agreed by The Department Where the project will not follow all
submission steps, a letter from The Department must be provided at the design submission stage
providing the agreed exemption.
The Consultant shall ensure that all submissions made to The Department are correctly labelled
as per these Design Stages and if different terminology is used, aligned to the requirements of
these stage requirements and stated. All submissions will include the Design Submission Checklist
as per Part 1 Section J. The Consultant/Contractor shall also ensure that requirements of the Road
Safety Audit Manual (TR-540) are also adhered to whilst ensuring compliance with the
USDM/UCDM.
2. Concept Design Stage
It must be noted that any submission must be presented to The Department clearly and logically
and the various documents sensibly labelled. As all Department submission systems are
electronic, it is essential that all electronic files are titled simply and logically to allow The
Department’s reviewers to easily identify each file. Reports should be named as a report; any
lighting calculations should be named lighting calculations and any lighting layouts named as
per the layout’s titles and not the drawing numbers. All lighting calculations must be provided
with a reference to the lighting layout and road type. Consideration must be given to the Road
Safety Audit Manual (TR-540) and USDM/UCDM in the preparation of the lighting layouts.
2.1 Lighting Submission Minimum Requirements:
2.1.1 Cover Letter
Include a cover letter describing exactly what the project is, where it is and what lighting the
project encompasses.
a) This Lighting Manual must be stated as the primary basis of the project’s lighting
design. Reference to the Public Realm & Street Lighting Handbook is also desired.
b) State prior approval of relevant authorities such as UPC and DMT.
c) Any Supply Authority standards/requirements can only be mentioned, in regard to

sub-mains electrical requirements, not in relation to lighting, luminaires or lighting
design.
d) DMT: USDM, PRDM, UCDM, SSPM and ESTIDAMA documents and stated
requirements are recommended and acceptable references for lighting in relation to
planning and general project lighting requirements.
e) Any other QCC approved relevant Abu Dhabi Standards and Specifications can also be
stated.
f) If lighting levels, any design variables, pole heights, spacings/arrangements etc. are
stated then they must match the relevant requirements within this Manual unless
specific reasons are stated to justify a variation to the normal Department
requirements.
g) Any reference to luminaires must confirm they are LED (or other equally sustainable
h) Any reference to lighting management controls or solar lighting equipment must

conform to the requirements of this Manual’s Part-1 Sections D & E respectively.
Note: Images, renderings or visualisations are not a statutory requirement for this Stage within
purely roadway, parking or tunnel lighting projects, however they are required as part of the
Concept Stage submission for parks/public realm projects. Refer to Part-2 Section-G for details. If
a roadway/parking lighting project has any streetscape landscaping lighting elements then Part-
2’s requirements regarding images, renderings/visualisations must be covered and included as
applicable.
2.2 Optional Lighting Submission Material:
a) If there are lighting calculations included, then they must always match the relevant
requirements within this Manual unless specific reasons are stated to justify a
variation to the normal Department requirements. They must also correlate with any
lighting layout/plan information submitted (if supplied).
b) Where conflict area designs are submitted, the lighting design must be clear and
optimise pole locations that take into account lighting levels and safety.
c) If there are any images, renderings or visualisations shown, then they must always
correlate with the relevant requirements within this Manual.
As and when applicable to provide the above listed submission requirements, always refer to the
blue Project Submission Requirement summaries located at the end of clauses within this Manual
for assistance in specific requirements.
3. Preliminary Design Stage
The general rule of what technical information must be submitted for the Preliminary Design
Stage for lighting can be summarised into the following four requirements:
• Lighting Calculations
• Lighting Layouts
• Luminaire Data
• Electrical Design
All four items must always be submitted together as project lighting cannot be reviewed or be
able to gain an approval when provided in isolation.
with a reference to the lighting layout and road type. All electrical calculation submissions must
include the Electrical Designer’s Certificate as per Part 1 Section J. Consideration must be given
to the Road Safety Audit Manual (TR-540) and USDM/UCDM in the preparation of the lighting
layouts.
3.1.1 Cover Letter & Copy of the Concept Design Approval
project encompasses. Include under this letter a copy of the project’s Department approval (or
conditional approval if applicable) for the Concept Design Stage.
3.1.2 Lighting Calculations Key Aspects
a) If the calculation is for roadway/parking lighting then DIALux software must be used,
other lighting calculations can use other independent software packages, but
manufacturer’s own software is not permitted.
b) All luminaires used within lighting calculations are to be proposed only when
determined as being fully compliant with all the criteria set out with the requirements
of the relevant Part/Section(s) within this Manual.
c) The Maintenance Factor (MF) calculated value as per this Manual’s requirements
must be provided for the specific luminaire solution(s) and these calculated values
used with the lighting calculations. Software default values or any assumed
unjustified values are not acceptable.
d) Lighting Levels, design factors and spacing arrangements proposed must comply with
the tables of lighting design requirements and any priority arrangements described
within this Manual, unless accompanied by written justifications.
e) A single lighting calculation report must be provided to fully include all the
requirements set out with the Clause 4 requirements as per the relevant Section(s)
within this Manual.
f) The calculation results (spacings, heights, locations etc.) must correlate fully with the
setting out of the fixtures on the lighting layout drawings.
g) The luminaires used within the lighting calculations must correlate fully with the
luminaire data provided within the submission.
h) All calculations must be correctly referenced to the street / road / highway /

intersection / junction / bridge / etc. in an easy to follow referencing system to allow
The Department to review quickly and correctly. Any submission where the
referencing does not match or is vague will be returned to the Consultant.
3.1.3 Lighting Layouts Key Aspects
a) All lighting layouts must be provided with written dimensions included for spacings,
setbacks etc. regardless of whether the layouts have a stated scale; as any electronic
submission systems cannot scale layouts. If the spacing arrangement is repetitive,
such as with a long street system, and these spacings are regular, then a single
dimension calculation can be shown for every change in arrangement in order to
convey clearly the spacings to a reviewer.
b) All lighting layouts must show the approved lighting corridor as agreed with The
Department
c) The lighting layouts’ fixture spacings, heights, locations etc. must correlate fully with
the lighting calculation’s results for spacings, heights, locations.
d) Luminaires must never be referenced, labelled or defined by their wattage; wattage

is just a result a particular luminaire’s combination of light source, driver, optics and
fixture efficacy to meet the lighting design requirements and no longer can two
fixtures be deemed to be alike by this method. Referencing should be by symbol and
unique letter or number, for example: A, B, C1, C2, D etc…
e) The luminaires shown on the lighting layouts (as referenced/labelled) must correlate
fully both with those used within the lighting calculations and with the luminaire data
provided within the submission.
f) All Layouts; title blocks, labelling, electrical/civil layer information and all other
general requirements shall be as per The Department’s Drawing/CAD/CADD
Standards.
3.1.4 Technical Data Key Aspects
a) Preliminary drawings are required to show that the design is progressing in the
correct manner and if there are issues these can be identified at this stage and
discussed.
b) All luminaire data provided must prove they are fully compliant with all the criteria
set out with the requirements of the relevant Part/Section(s) within this Manual. All
necessary data required, as shown in the blue Project Submission Requirement clause
summaries, must be included as applicable. The Consultant is responsible for ensuring
technically compliant fixtures are selected and proposed. The Consultant must
complete the Submission Checklist pro forma prior to submission to The Department.
c) Each luminaire proposed within the submission must be clearly defined by the
referencing system and cross-referenced with both the lighting calculations and as
they are located on the lighting layouts.
d) Luminaires must be presented in a Lighting Schedule format, either on the layouts or

as a separate document, with the supporting data submitted separately in a clear and
ordered manner containing all the supporting information required for each
luminaire.
e) Any lighting management system proposed for the project (provision requirement as
determined by, and technically compliant to, the requirements of Section-D)
f) Any solar roadway lighting system proposed for the project (provision requirement
as determined by, and technically compliant to, the requirements of Section-E)
3.1.5 Electrical Design Key Aspects
a) All electrical design will be carried out on third party certified software (excel
spreadsheets or other methods will not be accepted).
b) Electrical designs shall cover the following: -
a. Cable Size- including all de-rating factors to be considered
b. Circuit Load- including any advertising signage to be added
c. Volt Drop- calculation to meet the AADC/ADDC requirements for maximum
allowed and to be as per DOE EWR.
d. Earth Fault Loop Impedance (EFLI) at start and end of circuit.
e. Disconnection time of Circuit Protective Device to be as per this manual and
the DOE EWR
f. Prospective Short Circuit Current (PSCC)
g. Maximum circuit length to be in the region of 800m
c) All information on Electrical Deign shall be recorded in the Electrical Design Certificate
which will be signed by the Designer(s) and submitted to the Department along with
the electrical calculation sheets.
It is useful to include any lighting information contained within a Preliminary Report (or even from
the original Concept Design Report) if the project has something, as often this gives the reviewer
some useful background to the project that can assist in the review.
Note: Approval at Preliminary Design Stage is always based on the specific luminaire solution(s)
proposed and proved through the combined calculation, layout and luminaire data material
submitted. Lighting approvals are not ‘generic’ and the Consultant is fully responsible to ensure
this approved solution is taken forward to Detail Design Stage and subsequently the Tender
package in whatever method is preferred to ensure The Department Approved solution is either
delivered or a fully Equal and Approved solution delivered in its place. All electrical calculation
submissions must include the Electrical Designer’s Certificate as per Part 1 Section J.
Consideration must be given to the Road Safety Audit Manual (TR-540) and USDM/UCDM in the
preparation of the lighting layouts.
4. Detail Design Stage
The general rule of what technical information must be submitted for the Detail Design Stage for
lighting can be summarised into the following five requirements:
• Lighting Layouts/Details
• Luminaire Data
• Light Pollution Mitigation Report
• Electrical Calculations
All five items must always be submitted together as project lighting cannot be reviewed or be
electronic, it is essential that all electronic files are titled simply and logically as to what they
are, so The Department’s reviewers to easily identify each file. Reports should be named as a
report; lighting calculations should be named lighting calculation, lighting layouts named as per
the layout’s titles and not the drawing numbers and the light pollution mitigation report files
labelled accordingly. All electrical calculation submissions must include the Electrical Designer’s
Certificate as per Part 1 Section J. Consideration must be given to the Road Safety Audit Manual
(TR-540) and USDM/UCDM in the preparation of the lighting layouts.
4.1.1 Cover Letter & Copy of the Preliminary Design Approval
conditional approval if applicable) for the Preliminary Design Stage.
a) If the calculation is for roadway/parking lighting then DIALux software must be used,
other lighting calculations can use other independent software packages, but
requirements set out with the requirements as per the relevant Section(s) within this
Manual.
setting out of the fixtures on the lighting layout and detail drawings.

intersection / junction / bridge / etc. in an easy to follow referencing system to allow
The Department to review quickly and correctly. Any submission where the
4.1.3 Lighting Layout/Details Key Aspects
b) The lighting layouts’ fixture spacings, heights, locations etc. must correlate fully with
c) The lighting detail drawings must show every luminaire type’s installation, fixing,
mounting details clearly and how they are integrated within the project’s hardscape
arrangements and compliance with any Department requirements.

is just a result a particular luminaire combination of light source, driver, optics and
unique letter or number, for example: A, B, C1, C2, D etc.
e) The luminaires shown on the lighting layouts and details (as referenced/labelled)
must correlate fully both with those used within the lighting calculations and with the
f) All Layouts/Details; title blocks, labelling, electrical/civil layer information and all
other general requirements shall be as per The Department’s Drawing/CAD/CADD
Standards.
g) All lighting layouts must show the approved lighting corridor as agreed with The
Department
a) All luminaire data provided must prove they are fully compliant with all the criteria
b) Each luminaire proposed within the submission must be clearly defined by the
they are located on the lighting layouts and detail drawings.
c) Luminaires must be presented in a Lighting Schedule format, either on the layouts or

luminaire.
d) Any lighting management system proposed for the project (provision requirement as
e) Any solar street lighting system proposed for the project (provision requirement as
determined by, and technically compliant to, the requirements of Section-E)
4.1.5 Light Pollution Mitigation Report
Provide a Project Light Pollution Mitigation Report including the Software Lighting Calculation
Report fully in adherence to the requirements of Section G, including the completed Pro-forma,
in PDF format. In addition, if requested by The Department, provide the software source file
alongside the PDF Report.
d) All electrical design will be carried out on third party certified software (excel
e) Electrical designs shall cover the following: -
the DOE EWR
f) All information on Electrical Deign shall be recorded in the Electrical Design Certificate
It is useful to include any lighting information contained within a Detail Design Report (or even
from the original Concept Design and/or Preliminary Design Report) if the project has something,
as often this gives the reviewer some useful background to the project that can assist in the
review.
5. Tender/Construction Responsibilities
Note: Approval at Detail Design Stage with regards to lighting is always an approval based on
the entire optimum project design and includes the specific optimum luminaire solution(s)
contained which has been proved through the combined calculation, layout and luminaire data
material submitted to meet all this Manual’s requirements. The luminaires included within a
Project’s lighting approval can therefore never be treated as ‘generic’, nor can lighting fixtures
be deemed purely an arbitrary commodity item based on a handful of performance variables
such as wattage, number of LEDs, IP-rating or lumen output. All LED luminaires are precise
optical instruments with a unique combination of a multitude of performance, distribution,
quality, material and aesthetic attributes, albeit attributes which can and should be correctly
defined for the later project stages from Tender onwards.
The Consultant is fully responsible to ensure the approved Detail Design can be taken forward
to Tender package and then to Construction accurately, in whatever method preferred, to
ensure the Department’s approval is either delivered exactly as the DD or an equal or better
optimum luminaire/lighting design solution could be approved and delivered in its place.
It is recommended that Tender documentation covers each fixture requirement/specification

in enough fine detail to set out all the necessary photometry/efficiency performance,
component, quality, material and aesthetic parameters clearly, including the specific fixture
brand/references/images if preferred, including accessories. But always being clearly set out
that any specific luminaire references are on an Equal & Approved basis. So a Contractor can
make his free choice and that any luminaires proposed by the Contractor that are different to
those approved within the Detail Design submission will need to be put forward to meet or
exceed all requirements and with new lighting calculations and data/testing sheets instructed
to be included within material submissions to prove this.

Part-1 Section-I –Electrical Requirements
Part-1 Section I –Electrical Requirements

Section-I, refer to the Part-1 Applicable Standards & Guidance References Section.
NOTE-This section applies to Part 1 and Part 2 of this manual. Standard detail drawings can be
found in Part 2 Applicable Standard Detail Drawings.
This Section is a brief summary of the primary factors covered within this Part-1 Section-I of the
Lighting Manual.
The technical brief criteria developed within this Section aims to ensure the appropriate electrical
requirements are provided for a project. This is to ensure that the Electrical Design elements of
the roadway/parking network meets the requirements of The Departments and the Department
of Energy Electricity Wiring Regulations.
The electrical design must provide a detailed breakdown of design methodology, material type,
installation methods and electrical testing.
lighting only, landscape lighting only, or combined roadway/parking and landscape lighting. As
landscape lighting design considers the architectural or aesthetics of the project, it is acceptable
to provide the electrical design as a separate entity as part of the submission.
1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-I
a) Lighting and Electrical Design to identify circuit design, including cable selection,
fusing arrangements and installation methods.
b) Single Line Diagrams showing cable type, Cross Sectional Area (CSA), volt drop and
circuit length.
c) All grounding and bonding requirements
d) Electrical Design to be carried out in Third Party Certified Electrical Software and
presented in an Electrical Design Report
1.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-I
a) Electrical supply using Generators not complying with Clause 10.4 of this Section I.
Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual – Version 3.0 July 2021 Page |230
2.1 General
The design, specification, calculation, manufacturing, testing, shipping, installation and

performance for the project shall be in accordance with the requirements of this Section,
AADC/ADDC requirements and the applicable requirements of the Department of Energy (DOE)
Electricity Wiring Regulations (EWR). Details of all standards are provided in Details of all
Part-1.
All electrical works (Design and Installation) shall be carried by a qualified Consultant/Contractor
and included in the approved Contractors list and based on the related categories. All Electrical
Designers shall complete and sign the Electrical Design Certificate (Part 1, Section J) and submit
as part of the approvals process. All installation inspections shall include for the completion and
signing of the Inspection Checklist (Part 1 Section J).
their equipment/materials under all the required design conditions.
calculations must be calculated with the exact solution proposed.
2.2 Service Connections
The Consultant/Contractor shall be responsible for making all necessary arrangements with
AADC/ADDC for service connections, including all connections to lighting control cabinets and
service connections to any other electrical system installation indicated on the Contract plans,
specified in the Particular Specifications or in this Manual.
The Consultant/Contractor will not be permitted to interrupt electric service except as directed
by the AADC/ADDC. The Consultant/Contractor shall contact the various sections the
Municipalities and AADC/ADDC to arrange for supply of electrical service connection. The
Contractor shall submit to AADC/ADDC all necessary documentation including The Department’s
signed service connection applications and any drawings approval charges as required by
AADC/ADDC and as directed The Department.
The Consultant/Contractor shall include in the contract price, all costs for arranging the service
connections to the electrical system installed under the Contract, including but not limited to, the
service connection charges and any drawings approval charges payable to the AADC/ADDC and
the cost of metering equipment and associated accessories required to obtain the service
connections. No separate payment will be made for arranging the AAADC/DDC service
connections to the electrical system.
2.3 Site Conditions
Climatic conditions are harsh in the Emirate of Abu Dhabi. Dust storms are prevalent, and the
atmosphere is saliferous, humid and corrosive. Humidity is high, maximum relative humidity being
100 percent, and periods of high humidity are long and continuous. Temperatures are high in
summer. The site conditions are shown in Table 2.3.1:
Table 2.3.1- Site Conditions in Abu Dhabi
Ground thermal resistivity (g) 150 Kcm/W
Max. peak ambient shaded temperature 50°C
Max. daily average ambient shade temperature 45°C
Minimum ambient temperature 7°C
Max. temp of metal surfaces in direct sunlight 80°C
Altitude Sea level to 300 m
Maximum wind velocity 125 Km/hr
The soil in Abu Dhabi is corrosive. Sulphate reducing bacteria are common to all soils in the Abu
Dhabi area, and as the soil is generally rich in sulphate, the anaerobic conditions which may arise
in contact with buried pipes and cables favours the development of these anaerobic organisms,
which generate hydrogen sulphate and consequently render these areas most corrosive.
In view of the high temperature encountered in Abu Dhabi, PVC plasticizers shall be of the long
chain, high molecular weight type to reduce the loss of plasticizer in the hot conditions. The sand
is not corrosive under dry aerated conditions, but under anaerobic conditions the sulphate
reducing bacteria in the sand will result in serious corrosion of metals in contact with the sand.
PVC shall be suitable for the soil conditions and the Contractor shall submit a certification along
with samples verifying that the PVC shall be suitable for the conditions.
2.4 Coordination Al Ain/Abu Dhabi Distribution Company (AADC/ADDC)
The Consultant/Contractor, prior to commencement of his work, shall notify the AADC/ADDC of
their intent to perform the work. Upon request from the Consultant/Contractor, the AADC/ADDC
will locate any buried cable, duct or other electrical facilities which may interfere with the
Contractor's operations with no charge to them. The Contractor shall report any known or
suspected damage to any electrical facilities immediately to The Department. This shall in no way
relieve the Contractor of their responsibility for the repair or replacement of facilities damaged
by his operations.
In the event of damage to any AADC/ADDC facilities by the Contractor's operations, the
AADC/ADDC will require the Contractor to restore the system or facilities to operation
immediately. The repair or replacement shall meet with the approval of the AADC/ADDC. All
damaged cable shall be replaced in complete spans and all splices shall be in locations permitted
in the original installation. No additional payment will be made by The Department for compliance
with these requirements or for any penalty or expenses incurred to effect repairs to damaged
electrical facilities.
2.5 Schedules and Technical Details
The Consultant/Contractor shall submit shop drawings and material submittals for all lighting and
electrical distribution work in accordance with the requirements of Part 1-Roads, Standard
Specification for Construction, Chapter 1, Section 1.15, of Chapter 1 and approved by The
Department and AADC/ADDC. The Contractor shall supply comprehensive supporting information
and full technical details to enable The Department and AADC/ADDC to assess the merits of each
submittal. These shall be signed by the manufacturer and reviewed by the Consultant/Contractor
before submitting to The Department.
All shop drawings for the supply of electrical materials shall be completed fully, correctly and
signed by the manufacturer. Any deviations to the specified materials shall be notified to the
attention of The Department. In case of the proposed deviations are accepted by The Department,
the Contractor must support his proposal with the test certificate from Third Party showing it is
equivalent to the original.
3. Inspection and Testing
3.1 General
All lighting and electrical distribution cables, materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor
for the Works will be subject to inspection and testing during manufacture and installation. The
inspection and testing requirements specified herein are in addition to the inspection and testing
by the independent inspection and testing authorities, specified elsewhere in these documents.
During manufacture, inspection and testing of electrical distribution cables, materials and
electrical appurtenances will be carried out by The Department, the AADC/ADDC representatives
and or an Inspector appointed by The Department. During manufacture, inspection and testing of
lighting materials (poles, luminaires and accessories) and electrical appurtances will be carried
out by The Department and/or an inspector appointed by The Department. The Contractor shall
provide all transportation, office space, tools, test equipment and all other necessary facilities for
The Department and/or an inspector appointed by The Department, who may carry out or witness
any inspections and tests that may be deemed necessary.
The Consultant/Contractor shall include in the Contract price, all costs of inspection and testing,
including the fees payable to the inspector appointed by The Department and the cost of all
material samples and inspection and testing equipment required as specified herein.
The Contractor shall carry out the tests specified in the latest relevant I.E.S./I.E.C./B.S.S.
specifications and these tests shall be carried out to the satisfaction and in the presence of The
Department or the approved Inspector appointed by The Department.
These tests shall be carried out prior to shipment of the tested material from the place of
manufacture. The Contractor shall give not less than fourteen days’ notice to the Inspector as to
when the different parts of the equipment will be ready for the specified tests.
The Consultant/Contractor will not be required to provide inspection and testing during
manufacture of any lighting and electrical distribution cables, materials and equipment provided
by the AADC/ADDC or by The Department.
The lighting and electrical distribution cables, materials and equipment shall not be shipped
unless the Inspector's approval is obtained. Approval by the Inspector shall not relieve the
Contractor of liability to supply the specified lighting and electrical distribution materials and
equipment nor exonerate them from any of the guarantees required by this Section.
After the installation has been completed, current, voltage, and insulation resistance readings for
each circuit shall be taken and tabulated by the Contractor. Any indications of ground faults,
shorts, or high resistance splices shall be thoroughly investigated and remedied before final
acceptance of the installation. Wiring devices, electrical apparatus or luminaires if grounded or
shorted in any integral "live" part, shall be removed and the trouble corrected by replacing all
defective parts or materials. All "live" wires shorted or grounded within ducts or conduit shall be
removed and replaced.
Any low voltage distribution cable not equal to the specified standards shall be rejected. Defective
cable shall be replaced with new cable and retested until satisfactory. Insulation resistance
readings shall meet the specified requirements. Lamp terminal voltages shall be taken at the
locations designated by The Department. Three copies of the tabulation of voltages, current, and
insulation resistance showing readings for each branch circuit shall be submitted to The
Department. A field test shall be made and witnessed The Department representative.
The Department will accept no claim for any costs incurred by the Contractor as a result of
replacing defective electrical distribution cables, materials and equipment furnished by the
AADC/ADDC or by The Department. The ConsultantContractor shall check the condition at the
time of delivery of all material furnished by the AADC/ADDC or by The Department.
3.2 Field Performance Tests
Upon completion of the Works, the Contractor shall conduct a complete inspection of all lighting
and electrical distribution Works to ensure that all lighting, distribution and control equipment is
in proper operating condition. All electrical circuits and lighting systems shall be checked by the
Contractor and they shall make corrections and adjustments that are deemed necessary to
provide a system in accordance with the Requirements of this Section. Such corrections and
adjustments shall be to the satisfaction of The Department. All electrical testing shall be carried
out to the requirements of this manual and all field tests shall include all cables and related panel
tests as per Section 14, DoE EWR and AADC/ADDC requirements.
A functional test shall be made to verify that every part of the system functions as required by the
Contract plans and the requirements of this Section. The length of the functional test shall consist
of not less than five days of continuous satisfactory operation. If unsatisfactory performance of
the system develops due to faulty materials, fabrication or installation, the condition shall be
corrected; and the test shall be repeated until satisfactory performance is achieved. Any
components of the lighting and electrical distribution system found to be faulty, malfunctioning
or damaged during the test period shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
During the specified test period, the Contractor's maintenance crews shall maintain the system
or systems undergoing test. The cost of any maintenance necessary shall be at the Contractor's
expense and no additional compensation will be allowed. The functional test for lighting systems
shall consist of an operational test for five consecutive nights according to the regular lighting
schedule. Shutdown caused by factors beyond the Contractor's control shall not constitute
discontinuity of the functional test.
Periodic testing for all lighting circuits (roadway, tunnel/underpass/landscape/public realm) shall
be carried out as per Section 14 and the DOE EWR requirements at a period of no greater than 6
year intervals. All testing results shall be recorded in the Electrical Testing Pro-forma in Part 1
Section J.
3.3 Electrical, Utilities and Record Drawings
For purposes of clearances and legibility, the electrical and utilities drawings are essentially
diagrammatic, and although the size and location of equipment is indicated to scale wherever
possible, the Contractor shall make use of all of the data in all the Contract Documents, and shall
verify this information with actual site conditions.
All other drawings take precedence over the electrical and utilities drawings in the representation
of the construction of the Works. The Contractor shall constantly refer to all other drawings in
order to coordinate the electrical works with the other work.
The wiring and equipment shall be modified as necessary to meet the requirements of any
particular manufacturer's equipment which is installed.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit record drawings in accordance with the requirements of
Part 1- Roads, Standard Specification for Construction Chapter 1, Section 1.26.7, General
Requirements. These drawings shall include defined locations of all cable crossings under
pavements or shoulders. The Department will not authorize final inspection of the electrical
systems until he has received said record drawings.
4. Procedures for Electrical and Lighting Works
Procedures for Electrical and Lighting Works are outlined below; however, it is the Contractor's
responsibility to verify these procedures with The Department and AADC/ADDC prior to starting
the electrical distribution works.
4.1 Procedure for the Lighting Works
The lighting works shall be administered in accordance with requirements of the following
procedures:
a) The Contractor, if approved by The Department, shall perform all work related to the
installation of the proposed lighting, materials and equipment. If not approved the
Contractor shall employ an electrical Subcontractor who is specialized in
roadway/parking/public real/landscape lighting construction and maintenance works
and is approved by The Department for performing the lighting works. The
Subcontractor shall be responsible for the correct and immediate maintenance of the
lighting system until the end of the Maintenance Period and shall have the facilities
to carry out the works as required on a 24-hour-a-day basis.
b) The shop drawing procedures shall be submitted by the Contractor as included in

Clause 3.6
c) All ducts, conduits and pull boxes required for lighting works in a particular sector or
area shall be constructed and their locations as per approved shop drawings before
proceeding with light pole and cable installation in the area.
d) Lighting material, if supplied by AADC/ADDC/The Department or from other ongoing

Contracts, shall be collected from their stores as a subsidiary obligation. No separate
payments will be made for the transporting of these materials.
e) The Contractor is responsible for maintenance of the lighting and the entire lighting
system from the date of energizing until completion of the Maintenance Period and
shall undertake specific maintenance or repair works within twenty-four hours’ notice
from The Department. This requirement is also applicable for detour lighting during
the construction period.
f) The Contractor shall remove the existing light poles based on The Department’s
authorization. Before removing the light poles, The Department and the Contractor
shall prepare a joint site inspection report indicating the existing condition of the light
poles and associated appurtenances.
g) Removed and salvaged materials shall be returned to The Department’s store in

accordance with the requirements of Clause 6.13.
h) All unused materials, at the end of the Contract, shall be delivered to The
Department’s store or to other locations as directed.
i) The details of poles installed and cables laid, with sketches showing cable routes, joint
locations, if any, and locations of lighting control cabinets, feeder pillars, service
turrets, etc. are to be furnished to AADC/ADDC, or to The Department by the
Contractor immediately after each installation is complete. No circuits will be
energized without this information.
j) The Contractor shall submit as-built sketches to The Department within one week
from the date of energizing the circuits.
k) If the Contractor does not deliver the unused lighting materials to The Department
store within the time limits specified in Item (g), The Department will advise The
Department to hold the Contractor's payment or to recover the cost of non-delivered
materials. The Department will recover the amount from the Contractor or hold the
Contractor's payment in accordance with the prevailing laws.
l) Final handing over of lighting works will be after completion of the Maintenance
Period. In addition to the above Procedures, the Contractor shall familiarize
themselves with the requirements of the Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual.
m) The Contractor shall submit a monthly material statement in a format approved by

The Department, showing the details of materials received, installed, and balance
available. This material statement shall be submitted with the Contractor’s monthly
progress certifications.
n) All materials to be used in the lighting and electrical works shall have The
Department’s approval prior to installation.
o) Any deviations from the contract drawings shall require The Department’s approval,
while preparing the shop drawings by the Contractor prior to installation.
p) Any change in the design documents requires The Department’s approval prior to
installation.
4.2 Procedure for ADDC/ADDC Electrical, Distribution Works
All electrical distribution works shall be carried out to the full requirements of AADC/ADDC.
4.3 Shop Drawings Procedures for Lighting Systems after Approval of Materials
Prior to beginning lighting work, and after approval of materials, the Contractor shall submit to
The Department for approval the following shop drawings:
a) Shop drawings for all lighting work
b) Comprehensive supporting information with full technical details, signed by the
manufacturer, as required to evaluate the submittal
c) For lighting control cabinet components, shop drawing submittal shall:
i) Show the commercial standard rating and the Abu Dhabi rating
ii) Include the manufacturer's certified shop drawings indicating all related
components along with their details for approval by The Department
d) Engineering illuminance/luminance study with recommendations as to pole spacings,
luminaire type, mounting heights and all requirements of Part 1, Section A
e) Any additional information as directed by The Department
f) All drawings that apply:
i) Lighting pole layout plan with pole foundation and pole mounting details
ii) Control cabinet details
iii) Cable routing (overall and poles) with necessary conduit and pullbox details
iv) Earthing system details
v) Load schedules
vi) Power supply routing and details
vii) Luminaire mounting details
g) Detailed shop drawing for any tunnel and underpass lighting, shall be in full
compliance with the Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual Part 1, Section B including:
i) Wiring diagram, electrical load schedule and control system required to

achieve lighting regulation for different external lighting levels
ii) Field measurements for luminaire and control systems
iii) Tunnel lighting levels
iv) Luminaire spacing required to achieve the specified lighting levels
v) Any other electro-mechanical system shop drawings for tunnels
For clarity and legibility, the lighting drawings are essentially diagrammatic. Size and location of
equipment is indicated to scale wherever possible, but the Contractor shall consult the Contract
Documents for useful data. The Contractor shall verify information given on Contract plans and in
the Contract with actual conditions at the site of the works. The Contractor shall constantly refer
to Contract plans for other disciplines to coordinate with the other work. Wiring and equipment
shall be modified as necessary to meet the requirements of any particular manufacturer's
equipment which is installed.
In addition:
a) The Contractor shall submit sketches to The Department showing areas where
lighting facilities are proposed for construction, in stages according to the approved
schedule of works.
b) The Contractor shall identify on the shop drawings, the adjacent areas which require
coordination of lighting facilities.
c) The shop drawings shall indicate, but not be limited to, the following:
i) Roadway pavement, parking, sidewalk, service reservation and pedestrian

paved areas.
ii) Proposed pole locations (Use different symbols for each pole height and each
luminaire type and the number of luminaires per pole. Centreline station
locations for each pole number shall also be given).
iii) Locations of all existing and future electrical ducts with number of ways
indicated.
iv) Proposed locations of all pull boxes.
v) Proposed locations of all control cabinets.
vi) Proposed circuitry.
vii) Legend.
d) The Department will obtain all available information from adjacent Contracts
e) The Department and The Department’s representative will jointly review the
proposed locations of pull boxes, control cabinets, circuitry and conduits as indicted
on the shop drawings.
f) The marked-up print will be returned to the Contractor with approval or comments
by The Department.
4.4 As-built Drawings
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements for as-built drawings, also called record
drawings, established Part 1- Roads, Standard Specification for Construction Chapter 1, Section
1.26.7, General Requirements, in addition to the requirements stated herein. Final presentation
of the As-Built drawings and schedules shall be approved by The Department. Final inspection of
the electrical systems will not be authorized until The Department has received the As-Built
drawings. As-Built drawings shall be provided for the installation of electrical cables and all
materials and shall show:
a) Route of each cable
b) Exact location of each cable
c) Position of each joint, with the relative positions of the cable, ducts, tiles, depths and
spacing
d) Exact locations of all cable crossings under pavements or shoulders
e) As-built drawings, drawn to scale (minimum 1:500), shall be submitted within 2

months of laying cable or as approved by The Department.
f) The As-Built drawings of roadway/parking lighting shall be drawn to a scale (minimum

1:500), or as advised by The Department.
g) In addition to the requirements under “Shop Drawings” given above, full details of
the following shall be presented to The Department for any electro-mechanical as-
built drawings.
h) Position and extend of all support construction left in.
i) Precise location of all services installed.
j) Amendments to approved working drawings due to issues found on site.
k) Measure locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,

referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
l) Field changes of dimension and detail.
m) Details not on original Contract plans.
The Consultant/Contractor shall submit to AADC/ADDC a draft copy of the as-built drawings
immediately after each installation is complete. No circuits will be energized without this
information. The Consultant/Contractor shall submit completed as-built drawings to AADC/ADDC
within 1 week from the date of energizing the circuits, unless otherwise directed by The
Department.
Five paper copies shall be provided, suitably bound, and 3 copies in electronic format (AutoCAD,
PDF and GIS) on a Digital Storage medium or as approved by The Department.
5. Lighting and Electrical Materials, General
5.1 Description
Materials supplied by the Contractor to be incorporated in the lighting and electrical distribution
Works shall be as indicated on the Contract plans, as specified herein and as directed by The
Department.
5.2 General
All materials shall comply with the requirements as specified herein in this Chapter, and in
conjunction with all relevant Chapters of the Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual.
All exterior LED luminaires must be certified and hold the ADQCC Certificate of Conformity for
Exterior LED Luminaires as Per Part 1 and Part 2 requirements. Where additional requirements
for Maintenance requirements in regards to non-LED discharge and other traditional source
fixtures are shown, they shall be followed.
The materials of all components used in the lighting and electrical distribution Works shall be new
and the best of their respective kind and the most suitable for working under the weather and
site conditions set out in the Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual Part 1 and Part 2 various Chapters, thus
withstanding the variations of temperatures and other prevailing conditions without distortion or
deterioration of any part of the electrical materials. In every case where a standard has been
established for a particular type of material, the material shall comply with the provisions set forth
in the standard, such standards being previously listed at the End of Part 1 and Part2.
The workmanship on all components shall be of the highest order and defective parts shall not be
welded, plugged or filled in any manner without written approval of The Department.
Metal works shall be adequately protected against corrosion, oxidation or other deterioration,
bearing in mind the prevailing site conditions.
Corresponding parts shall be made to gauge and shall be interchangeable wherever possible and
the Contractor shall provide interchangeability as and when directed by The Department.
Electrical materials or devices for use in electrical Works shall be of the same type and by the
same manufacturer, unless otherwise approved.
Mechanisms shall, where necessary, be constructed of stainless steel or brass to prevent sticking
due to corrosion. Cast iron shall not be used for the chambers of oil filled apparatus or parts
subject to mechanical stress.
The equipment specified in this Chapter shall be so manufactured as to facilitate easy and proper
erection and maintenance. The design of all equipment shall ensure satisfactory operation under
the prevailing site conditions.
It is the intent of this Chapter that a manufacturer shall be selected by the Contractor who can
supply complete lighting units meeting the general requirements of the specifications and
Contract plans. The selected manufacturer shall submit, for review and approval by The
Department, a complete list of equipment and materials proposed for use.
The list shall include descriptive literature, technical details and drawings sufficiently detailed to
fully describe and explain the proposed material. When directed by The Department, samples of
any of the materials and equipment proposed for use shall be submitted.
Before placing a final order, the Contractor shall submit to The Department three samples of
requested material for quality evaluation.
The materials and equipment specified herein shall give continuous, satisfactory and trouble-free
service under the conditions as required and as specified in this Chapter.
The Contractor shall submit with their shop drawings, satisfactory evidence that the manufacturer
whose products they are offering has been in commercial operation successfully for at least five
years. The Contractor shall also submit the manufacturer's annual reports and balance sheets for
the last five years. Proposals which do not include such evidence, or which include unsatisfactory
evidence may be rejected by The Department.
5.3 Control of Materials
Procedures for documentation and approval of all lighting and electrical distribution cables,
materials and equipment proposed for use are specified herein.
The Contractor shall conduct their own search into the timely availability of the specified cables,
materials and equipment required and shall ensure that all lighting and electrical distribution
cables, materials and equipment required for the Works are in strict compliance with Part 1 and
Part 2.
All costs of work and lighting and electrical distribution cables, materials and equipment, including
all samples required, shall be included in the Bills of Quantities Item for which the subject material
or equipment is paid and no additional payment will be made by The Department for any
incidental costs that may occur in meeting the requirements.
The control of lighting and electrical distribution cables, materials and equipment shall be
exercised in the following stages:
a) Within 90 days after the award of Contract and before any work is performed, the
Contractor shall submit for approval of The Department:
i) Complete shop drawings in accordance with Clause 3.6 and Part 1- Roads,
Standard Specification for Construction Chapter 1, Section 1.26.7, General
Requirements. Manufacturer's specifications and detailed technical bulletins,
drawings, design calculations and similar documents of the poles, luminaires,
lamps, ballasts, wire, cable, joints, splicing connectors, ducts, conduits and
equipment for the Works shall be provided. Manufacturer's catalogue data
for adhesive tapes and miscellaneous items shall also be submitted.
ii) Shop drawings for the fabrication of the control cabinets, the parts thereof
and the wiring of the equipment therein and shop drawings of the light pole
shafts and bracket arms, showing in detail the fabrication thereof and the
description of any materials used in the fabrication, anchor bolts and
foundation reinforcing materials.
iii) Isolux diagrams of horizontal illumination, utilization curves, and isocandela
diagrams for the proposed luminaires. When requested by The Department,
the Contractor shall also furnish lux tables for all vertical and lateral angles of
the luminaires.
iv) Spectral distribution details showing values of the luminaire (in lux) at various
test points in accordance with the current edition of the I.E.S. standards
and/or at locations as directed by The Department.
Note: Three copies of the above items shall be gathered by the Contractor and submitted The
Department at one time. A letter enumerating the submitted items shall accompany the
submittal package. Partial and sporadic submittals will not be acceptable, and The Department
will return such incomplete submittals unmarked or will evaluate the circumstances and
possible consequences and may accept to review such partial submittals conditionally.
b) Only after the requirements of Item (a; have been completely satisfied and before any
lighting and electrical distribution cables, materials and equipment are delivered to
the site, the following requirements shall be met:
i) If The Department will exempt any material from testing during manufacture,
the Contractor shall obtain and forward to The Department a written,
certified and notarized statement from the manufacturer, stating that all such
equipment and/or materials exempt from testing during manufacture by The
Department, is guaranteed by the manufacturer and that all such equipment
and material complies in all respects with the requirements of Part 1 and Part
2.
ii) When testing is required, it shall be performed in strict compliance with the
testing procedure as specified herein or as directed by The Department.
iii) The Contractor shall prepare the equipment in their workshop so that it can
be readily inspected and shall request an inspection of the equipment. The
Department Inspector will tag the equipment which has been inspected and
it may be delivered to the job site. No uninspected material shall be delivered
to the job site or installed in the work. No material will be inspected unless
the certified and notarized statement required above is delivered to The
Department and/or the testing has been performed and the results have
been acceptable to The Department. A one-week notice will be generally
required for the material inspection.
c) Material which has been installed prior to fully satisfying the requirements is subject
to removal, disposal and replacement in kind at the sole expense of the Contractor.
d) The Contractor shall obtain engineering assistance as required from the light pole and
luminaire manufacturer for the assembly of light poles, luminaires, power cables,
supporting cables to the ring, head frame assembly and to make the lighting unit
operational. The cost for all engineering assistance shall be borne by the Contractor.
5.4 Analysis of Materials
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Clause 3.

5.5 Identification
The manufacturer’s name, trademark or other descriptive marking by which the organization
responsible for the product may be identified, shall be placed on all equipment in addition to the
identification of its voltage, current, wattage, frequency, phase and other applicable ratings and
characteristics. The equipment including, but not by way of limitation, switches, circuit protective
devices, transformers and control cabinets shall also be identified to indicate their purpose or
function.
Before leaving the manufacturer’s works, all apparatus, fittings and similar items shall be painted
or stamped in at least two places with a marking number and/or letter as shown on the approved
shop drawings and materials list.
All labels, rating and name plates shall be in the Arabic and English languages and shall be non-
deteriorating and non-warping. Size and text shall be as approved by The Department. Labels for
mounting outdoors shall be of chromium plated bronze with black filled letters. Rating and name
plates for mounting indoors shall be in accordance with B.S.S. label specifications and shall be
made of suitable engraving material approximately 2mm thick with a white surface with black
engraving.
6. Earthwork for Electrical

6.1 Description
Earthwork for lighting and electrical distribution Work, including but not by way of limitation,
trench and backfill for installation of underground electrical Works, salvage of existing cables, and
installation of new lighting LV cables; and excavating and backfilling for electrical structures shall
be as indicated on the Contract plans or as designated by The Department and as specified herein.
6.2 Trench and Backfill.
This work shall consist of excavating trenches and backfilling the installations of electric cables,
ducts, conduits and precast concrete protection slabs at the locations indicated on the Contract
plans or where directed by The Department. The Contractor shall include the furnishing of backfill
materials and disposing of surplus materials in this Work.
Excavation, installation of cable duct, backfill, compaction, placement of cable tiles and warning
tapes and providing end caps and draw lines in ducts and conduit shall be in accordance with the
applicable Sections of Part 1- Roads, Standard Specification for Construction Chapter 2,
Earthwork, of these Standard Specifications and as specified herein.
6.3 Construction Methods
The trench shall be excavated in a manner to prevent cave-ins and to a depth and width as
indicated on the Contract plans or as designated by The Department. Excavated material shall be
deposited, at an adequate distance to prevent the excavated material falling back into the trench.
The banks of trenches shall be kept as nearly vertical as practicable and where required, shall be
properly sheeted and braced. Where electric cables enter ducts or conduits, the bottom of the
trench shall be built up to provide a smooth bed for the electric cable.
The PVC duct shall be placed in the bottom of the trench, after all loose and protruding stones
and all sharp materials likely to cause damage has been removed and covered with backfill
material as directed by The Department. All roadway/parking/public realm/landscape lighting
cables shall be installed in ducts.
Backfill material shall comply with the Part 1- Roads, Standard Specification for Construction
Chapter 2, Earthwork, Section 2.5.2. No additional payment will be made by The Department for
such backfill material.
The trenches shall not be backfilled until the system as installed is inspected, tested and approved
by The Department.
The backfill material shall be thoroughly compacted in layers to a density as specified in Part 1-
Roads, Standard Specification for Construction Chapter 2, Earthwork, Section 2.5.4, or as
approved by The Department and in such a manner as not to damage the duct or cable.
No stone or rock shall be allowed in the duct bedding or in the first fifteen (15) centimeter layer
of backfill over the duct. No stone or rock greater than five (5) centimeter in maximum dimension
shall be allowed in any succeeding layer of backfill.
The Department will inspect:
a) The trench before the duct, conduit, or cable covering tiles is placed in the trench.
b) The trench at any other time during excavation or backfilling.
The method and type of equipment to be used in compaction the backfill material shall be
approved by The Department before any work is started.
Any trenches improperly backfilled or where settlement occurs, shall be reopened to the depth
required for proper compaction, then refilled and compacted with the surface restored to the
required grade and compaction, mounded over and smoothed off or as directed by The
Department.
6.4 Excavation for Structures
All excavation for structures shall comply with the requirements of Part 1- Roads, Standard
Specification for Construction Chapter 2, Earthwork, as directed by The Department and with the
requirements as hereinbefore specified.
Excavation shall be made to the depth and dimensions necessary for the correct installation of all
electrical structures as indicated on the Contract plans. Care shall be taken that foundation areas
of structures are not excavated below grades established on the Contract plans. Excavation may
be carried out mechanically, but final shaping and trimming of the subgrade shall be performed
by hand. The subgrade shall be covered up to the bottom level of the concrete base slabs with a
10cm thick layer of Class C20/20 blinding concrete as indicated on the Contract plans and in
compliance with Part 1- Roads, Standard Specification for Construction Chapter 4, Concrete
Works.
6.5 Conduits, Junction Boxes and Pull Boxes
6.5.1 Description
Electrical conduit and junction boxes to be furnished and installed by the Contractor shall be as
indicated on the Contract plans and as specified herein. Conduit shall include conduit couplings,
fittings, bushings, all hardware for attaching, embedding or mounting and all appurtenances.
6.5.2 Rigid Galvanized Steel Electrical Conduit
Rigid galvanized steel electrical conduit bends, elbows, couplings, and nipples, shall be heavy wall,
hot-dipped galvanized or sheradised, standard weight, and shall comply with the requirements of
the applicable specification or any equivalent or superior international standard provided the
minimum wall thickness specified in Table 6.5.2.1:
Table 6.5.2.1- Galvanised Steel Electrical Conduit Diameter and Wall Thickness
Inside Diameter (cm) Minimum Wall Thickness (mm)
1.9 2.8
2.5 3.0
3.2 3.2
3.8 3.5
6.4 4.7
7.6 5.0
The tube used in the manufacture of the rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be of high grade, mild
steel with maximum welding characteristics and ductility. The tube shall have a circular cross
section sufficiently accurate to permit the cutting of clean, true threads. The pitch and form of
threads shall comply with the American National Standards Institute, ANSI B 1.20.3 or ANSI B
1.20.5 for pipe threads or equivalent. The tube shall be thoroughly cleaned inside and outside and
ends threaded and chamfered before applying any protective coating. The cleaning process shall
leave the tube in such a condition that zinc or enamel coating, when applied, shall firmly adhere
and have a smooth finish.
The outside and inside surfaces of the conduit shall be thoroughly protected against corrosion by
an even coating of at least 99 percent pure zinc applied by the hot-dip or sheradising process. The
zinc coating shall be such that it shall not show a fixed deposit of copper after four one-minute
immersions in a standard copper sulphate solution. A biochromate finish shall be applied to the
inside and outside surfaces of the conduits after galvanizing. The threads shall have the same
degree of corrosion resistance as the conduit itself. All the fittings to be used on the galvanized,
rigid, steel conduit system shall also comply with similar requirements.
Hardware to support and fasten the conduit and fittings including, but not by way of limitation,
nuts, bolts, washers, bushings and similar items shall be galvanized and shall be of a type approved
by The Department and shall be appropriate in design for this application. Conduit clamps shall
be of malleable iron. Conduit fittings, such as pulling elbows, entrance fittings, and similar items,
shall be cast of malleable iron. Flexible conduits used for connections shall be watertight, made
of square-locked galvanized metal tubing. All conduits, fittings, boxes, covers and outlets shall be
new and shall not have been stored where such material is exposed to the weather.
6.5.3 Rigid Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Conduit
All rigid polyvinylchloride (PVC) electrical conduit up to 6cm diameter shall comply with BS4607,
BS6099, Gulf Standards GS32/33 and relevant IEE regulation and as specified herein. Larger size
PVC conduits shall comply with National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards
Publication No. TC 2, Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80) or
ANSI/ASTM D1785 and as specified herein.
All PVC electrical conduit shall be designed and approved for direct burial, concrete encased
applications below grade or for exposed routing applications above grade. The type of routing
and application shall be as indicated on the Contract plans.
All PVC electrical conduit shall be tested by the manufacturer in accordance with NEMA TC 2 or
by other equivalent standards as approved by The Department and reports of all testing shall be
submitted to The Department. Testing shall include, but not by way of limitation, the following:
a) Impact resistance
b) Crush resistance
c) Heat distortion temperature
d) Chemical resistance
e) Water Absorption
f) Extension quality
g) Modulus of elasticity
h) Tensile and flexural strengths
i) Thermal coefficient of expansion
All fittings, junction and pullboxes to be used on PVC electrical conduit system shall be made in
compliance with identical standards and specifications as those used for the conduit and shall be
by the same manufacturer. All joints and connections on PVC electrical conduit system shall be
watertight and all support hardware used to support the conduit and boxes shall be the type
approved for the project specific application.
Electrical conduit and fittings shall be free of any substances that would be harmful to any wire
or cable covering. The bore of the conduit shall be straight and circular in cross section with
smooth interior surfaces. Conduit shall be furnished in standard lengths of six (6) meters including
the coupling. Fittings shall be of a type made for use with PVC conduit for electrical service. The
construction of conduit and conduit fittings shall ensure required strength and rigidity to enable
the conduit to resist damage during shipment, rough handling, installation and use. Conduit and
fittings shall not be threaded or tapered and shall be attached by a solvent cement to provide a
watertight and root proof joint.
The outside diameter and minimum wall thickness of PVC electrical conduit are shown in Table
6.5.3.1:
Table 6.5.3.1- PVC Electric Conduit Diameter and Wall Thickness
Nominal Size (cm) Minimum Wall Thickness (mm)
2.0 1.8
2.5 1.9
3.2 2.5
3.8 2.5
5.0 3.2
6.0 4.7
10.0 6.0
15.0 7.1
20.0 8.2
The Contractor shall submit proof that the PVC electrical conduit complies with the requirements
of NEMA TC 2 or similar standards as approved by The Department.
Fittings used with rigid PVC electrical conduit shall comply with requirements of NEMA TC 3
Standards Publication, PVC Fittings for use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
6.5.4 Junction Boxes
This work shall consist of furnishing and installing junction boxes of the sizes indicated on the
Contract plans at the designated locations.
The junction boxes shall be watertight, NEMA 4 rated, or comparable International Standard and
shall be flush mounted or surface mounted as indicated on the Contract plans. Junction boxes
shall be drilled or drilled and tapped for installation of threaded conduit to agree with the sizes of
conduit as indicated on the Contract plans. Standard locknut spacing shall be allowed for proper
entry of conduit to the junction box. Poly carbonate or rigid polyvinylchloride (PVC) Junction boxes
as an alternative can be provided, if all performance aspects are met or exceeded
The junction box shall be dust-tight and weatherproof and shall be constructed of galvanised steel
having a wall thickness of four (4) millimeters. The junction box and cover shall be hot-dipped
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 and be provided with neoprene gasket material. The
cover shall be fastened to the box by a minimum of four (4) stainless steel screws of adequate
size. Provision shall be made for properly terminating the ground wire inside the box. Junction
boxes shall be of the sizes indicated on the Contract plans, as described in the Bills of Quantities,
or as required to receive material or appurtenances as indicated on the Contract plans or as
specified herein in various Sections of this Chapter. Weatherproof junction boxes shall be used to
accommodate distribution boards for under bridge lighting.
Locknuts, bushings, screws and terminal boards shall be incidental to the cost of junction boxes.
6.6 Pull Boxes, Type IV
6.6.1 General
This work shall consist of furnishing and installing concrete pull boxes type IV, with ductile iron
frames and covers, for lighting, street furniture and traffic control systems as indicated in the
Contract plans or at locations required by site conditions and as directed by The Department.
6.6.2 Materials
All concrete work and reinforcement steel shall comply with applicable Sections of Part 1- Roads,
Standard Specification for Construction Chapter 4, Concrete Works. All concrete incorporated in
the construction of concrete pull boxes shall be Class C 30/20 concrete. All reinforcing steel shall
be Grade 60 deformed steel bars.
Pull box, Type IV, covers and frames shall be manufactured from ductile iron materials meeting
all the requirements listed in Clause 6.7.
6.6.3 Construction
All excavation, foundation preparation and backfill shall comply with the requirements Clause 6.
All concrete work shall comply with the dimensions and details as indicated on the Contract plans.
The tops of the covers of pull boxes, type IV, shall match final grade levels in paved areas, and
shall be placed 10 cm above final grade level in non-paved areas.
All unused ducts, conduits or sleeves at concrete pull boxes shall be capped in a watertight
manner.
6.6.4 Polycarbonate Pull Boxes
Polycarbonate manholes as an alternative to concrete Pull boxes-Type IV can be provided, if

approved by The Department, for lighting works. The Manufacturer must provide testing
documentation stating that the bull boxes will not be adversely affect by high contents of acids or
organic solvents found in the soil as per geotechnical investigations.
Polycarbonate manholes shall be designed and manufactured by an approved qualified vendor in
order to carry our possible traffic loads. Type test certificate for manhole loaded and tested to
confirm the same shall be provided. The Manufacturer shall certify the design and durability of
the manholes for minimum 25 years life cycle.
Polycarbonate manholes shall have good characteristics in resisting oil and chemicals from
aggressive soils. The Contractor shall submit test certificates for polycarbonate material used by
the Manufacturer. It shall comply with relevant International standards and Codes with properties
similar or better than the data shown in Table 6.6.4.1.
Polycarbonate manholes installed in the walkways, green areas or sand areas shall receive
medium duty ductile iron manhole cover Class Bl25. Heavy duty manhole cover Class D400 are
required if the polycarbonate manholes are installed in the carriageways. The Department’s
name/logo and function of the manhole shall be integrated in the manhole cover. The Sub-frame
for D.I covers shall be deep hot-dipped galvanized painted with epoxy primer, as well as
intermediate coats, and polyurethane top cost coat for exposed part. Elastomeric layer or gasket
for support of manhole covers is required for better sealing and protection. Polycarbonate
manholes can be fabricated with different connected segments as follow:
a) Integrated wall in top polycarbonate frame for height adjustment.
b) Height Adjustment integrated in steel frame
c) Modular frame structure.
d) Predetermined breaking points for connection of 100 mm I.D. PVC pipes for lighting
cabling.
e) Outer manhole body with structure for connection to surrounding condensed
compacted earth.
f) Base plate with openings for water outlet.
Polycarbonate manholes may be fabricated also by complete walls inter-connected and to the
base plate frame structure with an opening for water outlet. It shall provide the specified sizes
with predetermined breaking points for connection of 100mm PVC pipes for
roadway/parking/public realm/landscape lighting cables. All breaking points openings for
connection of PVC pipes for lighting cables shall be closed properly with proper fittings. Size of
manholes shall be as indicated on Contract plans for Pull box Type IV manholes. After the
preliminary approval from The Department for the proposed material submittal and
Manufacturer for polycarbonate manholes, the Contractor shall install mock-up sample at site to
obtain final approval. The Department may ask for a load test to be carried out on the mock-up
sample to ensure that the proposed design and used material are capable to withstand the
possible design traffic loads. A site load test is mandatory if the Contractor fails to submit
acceptable load test certificate from the approved Manufacturer and for the same manhole
design.
Table 6.6.4.1- Typical Properties of Polycarbonate
Filled with 10
Test Standard Property Unfilled
% Glass
PHYSICAL
Minimum Density
D792 / ISO 1183
(g/cm3) 1.22 1.26
D570 / ISO 62 Maximum Water Absorption, 24 hrs (%) 0.07 0.07
MECHANICAL
D638 All exterior

LED luminaires
must be certified
and hold the
QCC Certificate
of Conformity for
Exterior LED
Luminaires and
in addition only
as per the
Department
specific
requirements of Minimum Tensile Strength (MPa) 55 68
the Lighting
Manual PR-405
relevant
Sections. Any
requirements
listed within this
Specification are
only in regards to
non-LED
discharge and
other traditional
source fixtures.
D638 / ISO 527 Minimum Tensile Modulus (MPa) 2200 2850
D638 / ISO 527 Minimum Tensile Elongation at Break (%) 75 10
Filled with 10
Test Standard Property Unfilled
% Glass
D790 / ISO 178 Minimum Flexural Strength (MPa) 85 85
D790 / ISO 178 Minimum Flexural Modulus (MPa) 2200 2850
D695 / ISO 604 Minimum Compressive Strength (MPa) 75 85
D695 / ISO 604 Minimum Compressive Modulus (MPa) 1500 1700
D785 / ISO 2039 Minimum Hardness, Rockwell M70/R118 M 85
ASTM D6110 / Min. Charpy impact (V-notch) (23 0C)

50 11
ISO 179 (kJ/m2)
D256 / ISO 180 IZOD Notched Impact 700 140
THERMAL
ASTM D 1525 /
Vicat Softening Temp, Rate B/50 (°C) – min. 125 125
ISO 306
Flammability Rating H-B H-B

UL94
(flame class)
ELECTRICAL
IEC 60093 Specific Surface Resistance (Ω) 3.7e+14 > 1e+14
Dielectric Constant at 50/60 Hz 3.3 3.3
Dielectric Loss Factor at 50 Hz 0.002 0.055
- Dielectric Loss Factor at 1 MHz 0.02 0.021
6.7 Installation of PVC Conduits
6.7.1 Description
This work shall consist of furnishing and installing PVC conduit of sizes and at locations as indicated
on the Contract plans and as approved by The Department and/or The Department. The
Contractor shall include conduit couplings, fittings, junction boxes, concrete embedded junction
boxes with extension rings, bushings and all hardware for attaching, embedding or mounting.
6.7.2 Materials
All materials shall comply with Clause 6.
6.7.3 Construction
All trenching and backfill shall comply with Clause 6.2.
6.8 Reinforced Concrete Service Chambers
6.8.1 General
The Contractor shall construct reinforced concrete service chambers at the following locations:
a) Where indicated on the Contract plans.
b) Where existing house services pass under sidewalks or as required by The Department
or AADC/ADDC.
c) Where required for purposes of pulling cables, splicing or at turning points along cable
routes in addition to requirements of applicable Standards and Codes.
d) Where AADC/ADDC feeder pillars are located on sidewalks.
6.8.2 Materials
All concrete work and reinforcement steel in electric service chambers shall comply with
applicable Sections of Part 1, Roads Standard Construction Specification Chapter 4, Concrete
Works. All concrete incorporated in the construction of electric service chambers shall be Class C
30/20 concrete.
Electrical service chamber cover and frame shall be of the sizes, types and materials as shown on
the Contract plans. All electrical service chamber cover and frame shall be manufactured from
ductile iron material meeting the requirements for ductile iron covers as specified in the
Stormwater Drainage Manual. Most cover and frame for electrical service chambers will be
installed in non-traffic green or sidewalk areas and these cover and frame shall be for medium
duty use. Any cover and frame installed in paved traffic areas shall be heavy duty. The covers
shall be rubber gasket sealed, bolt down types using counter-sunk, stainless steel, hex head cap
screws. Each cover shall be cast with the appropriate label as shown in the Contract plans.
6.8.3 Construction
All excavation, foundation preparation and backfill shall comply with Clause 6.2 and 6.4.
All concrete work shall comply with the dimensions and details as indicated on the Contract plans.
Reinforcement steel shall meet the requirements of Part 1- Roads, Standard Construction
Specification Chapter 5, Reinforcing Steel.
The tops of the electrical service chambers shall be flush with the final grade in paved areas and
be located 10cm above final grade in non-paved areas. All unused ducts or conduits at electric
service chambers shall be capped in a watertight manner.
6.9 PVC Conduit and Concrete Encased Ducts
PVC conduit and concrete encased ducts shall be furnished and installed as indicated on the
Contract plans and as included in the Bills of Quantities. In general, PVC conduit and duct shall be
provided to permit routing for LV lighting system cables below pavement or other areas as
indicated on the Contract plans and as specified herein and as directed by The Department.
The conduits or ducts shall be PVC conduit and fittings complying with the requirements of Clause
6.5.
The PVC conduits and ducts shall be encased in Class C 20/20 concrete, where crossing roads or
traffic areas, complying with the requirements of Part 1-Roads, Standard Construction
Specifications, Chapter 4, Section 4.3.9 Concrete Works. The dimensions of concrete encasement
shall be as indicated on the Contract plans.
All trench and backfill at concrete encased PVC conduit and ducts shall comply with the
requirements of Clause 6.2. Trench and backfill for concrete encased conduits and ducts shall be
considered as a subsidiary obligation to the work for the Items of concrete encased PVC conduits
and ducts and duct banks as described in the Bills of Quantities. No separate payment will be
made by The Department.
6.10 Protection of Existing Electric Cables
This work pertains to the protection of existing LV electric cables exposed by manual excavation
and which are to remain in operation as designated on the Contract plans or where directed by
The Department.
All excavation and backfill shall be in accordance with Clause 6.2.
Precast concrete protection slabs, cast-in-situ concrete protection slabs, extensions of existing
cast-in-situ concrete protection slabs and extensions of the underlying existing concrete encased
duct banks shall be installed at road crossings, paved areas or other locations as detailed on the
Contract plans or where directed by The Department.
Existing occupied concrete encased PVC ducts shall be extended with concrete encased, matching
size, split polyvinylchloride (PVC) ducts and existing vacant, concrete encased PVC ducts shall be
extended with concrete encased, matching size, whole PVC ducts as specified herein and as
approved by The Department.. Extensions of existing vacant ducts shall be capped watertight
upon installation.
New, split polyvinylchloride (PVC) ducts shall be installed around existing electric cables to form
a protective concrete encasement where such cables are to remain under a new paved area or
are to pass through the wall of a service chamber or other locations where designated by The
Department.
The installation of concrete encased, split PVC duct shall be made in the following manner:
a) Split PVC ducts shall be made by jointing two PVC pipe segments, a lower 270°
segment and an upper 120° segment of identical size and specifications. The pipe
walls of the lower segment shall be cut on a vertical making an obtuse angle at the
inner surface to avoid sharp edges. The cut surface shall be smooth without any
projections. The lower segment shall be placed surrounding the existing cable, with
its 90° opening facing upward. The upper 120° segment shall be placed as a lid or
cover to the opening of the lower segment, with an equal overlap on either side. The
overlapping portions of the pipes shall be jointed together by spot supplying an
approved PVC glue to avoid displacement while concentrating. After jointing the split
PVC ducts shall be wrapped twice with polyethylene film, 152microns thick and the
wrapping securely fastened to prevent fresh concrete from entering the ducts. The
ducts shall be supported on suitable corrosion resistant spacers.
b) The existing occupied concrete encased PVC ducts shall be extended in the same
manner as above. The new split PVC duct shall be securely joined to existing ducts to
be extended in such a manner to insure against any displacement of the duct
extensions during the placement of concrete to the satisfaction of The Department.
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings identifying all the details for the approval
The Department.
The cast-in-situ concrete protection slab and protection slab extensions shall be Class C 20/20
concrete and shall match the existing slabs as approved by The Department.
The Contractor shall furnish and place precast, Class C 30/20, reinforced concrete protection slabs
of the sizes designated on the Contract plans where directed by The Department all in accordance
with applicable Sections of Part 1- Roads, Standard Construction Specifications, Chapter 4,
Concrete Works, and as specified herein, and approved by The Department.
6.11 Supply of Cable Covering Tiles
Where any LV lighting electrical cable is directly buried in trenches in locations other than where
such electrical cables are installed in concrete encased ducts, precast concrete cable covering tiles
shall be installed over all new electrical cables and over all existing electrical cables exposed by
manual excavation to verify the location of such cables.
The Contractor shall supply precast, concrete cable covering tiles for electric cables according to
the requirements of The Department and the following:
6.11.1 Materials, General
All materials for cable covering tiles shall comply with applicable Sections of Part 1- Roads,
Standard Construction Specifications, Chapter 4, Concrete Works, and as specified herein.
6.11.2 Concrete Mix
The ratio of the concrete mix for the cable covering tiles shall be as per class C15/20 of Part 1-
Roads, Standard Construction Specifications, Chapter 4, Concrete Works Table 4-16, with cement
and aggregate complying with the requirements of Section 4.3.7.
6.11.3 Curing
The cable covering tiles shall be cured in clean, fresh water for at least seven (7) days after they
are cast.
6.11.4 Moulding
The cable covering tiles shall be cast in appropriate accurately made moulds and compacted by
an efficient hydraulic pressure method. The pressure employed for the hydraulic pressed cable
covering tiles shall not be less than 70.3 kg/Sq. cm (1000psi) over the entire surface receiving the
pressure. All faces of the finished cable covering tiles shall be smooth and all edges and corners
true and sound.
6.11.5 Inspection and Tests
Sample cable covering tiles, selected by The Department, shall be subject to inspection and tests
as required and as described below. As part of the work for this Item, the Contractor shall
transport, unload and place, where directed by The Department, all tiles designated to be tested.
a) For purposes of the test, The Department will select up to twelve (12) samples at
random for every two thousand (2000) cable covering tiles or less and a further twelve
(12) samples for every additional four thousand (4000) cable covering tiles or less.
b) Selected sample cable covering tiles shall be tested by The Department, at the
premises designated.
Each group of twelve samples being tested shall be divided into two batches of six samples. In
the event of one sample in the first batch failing to comply with The Department test
requirements, then the six samples in the second batch shall be tested. If all six samples in the
second batch pass the test, cable covering tiles represented by the group of twelve samples being
tested shall be deemed to comply, but if one sample in the second batch fails, the cable covering
tiles represented by the group of twelve samples being tested shall be rejected.
6.12 Placement of Warning Tapes
The Contractor shall furnish and install traceable warning tapes during backfilling work over any
lighting electrical ducts/cables. Warning tapes shall be installed over any existing electrical cables
uncovered by the Contractor, over new utilities constructed by the Contractor and over buried
cables included in the Works.
Warning tapes shall be place on the compacted backfill material approximately thirty centimeters
below finished grade or as directed by The Department.
The warning tape shall be high quality, acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene film a minimum of
15cm wide, a minimum thickness of 150microns and with a minimum strength of 125kg/cm2
lengthwise and 105kg/cm2 crosswise with an elongation factor of 350 percent.
Warning tapes shall be coloured and inscribed for identification as follows:
Utility Colour Inscription
Electrical Cables Yellow “Caution – Buried Lighting

Cable”
The printed inscriptions shall be of a permanent black lettering and shall be placed a maximum of
two meters (2.0m) on center printed alternately in English and Arabic. The colours shall be vivid,
permanent and glossy with a life expectancy equal to the utility line which it marks. The warning
tapes shall be placed with the inscriptions facing up.
6.13 Remove and Salvage Existing Lighting System
6.13.1 Description
Removal and salvaging of the existing lighting system shall be as indicated on the Contract plans
and as specified herein.
6.13.2 Remove and Salvage Existing Lighting System
Where indicated on the Contract plans or where directed by The Department, the Contractor shall
remove and salvage the existing light poles, complete with all luminaires, foundations, cables,
cable covering tiles, ducts, control cabinets and all associated equipment under the supervision
of and to the satisfaction of The Department.
Prior to commencing the removal of the existing lighting system, the Contractor shall contact the
AADC/ADDC and make all necessary arrangements for shut-off of electric power and for removing
and salvaging the designated existing lighting system.
The Contractor shall provide all labour, tools, equipment and accessories to carefully remove the
existing light poles, foundations, cables, control cabinets and appurtenant equipment and clean,
load, transport, unload and place in The Department’s store yard.
The Contractor shall exercise care while removing the existing poles, luminaires, foundations,
cables and associated equipment so as not to damage any materials or equipment. Any materials
or equipment damaged while removing, handling or transporting shall be replaced with new
material or equipment or repaired as approved by The Department. All luminaires, control
cabinets and similar equipment removed shall be cleaned, packed, protected and crated as
approved by Department. All light poles, luminaires and associated equipment shall be loaded,
transported, unloaded and placed in storage where directed by The Department. All removed
poles shall be cleaned by removing all concrete and deleterious material and shall be suitably
supported during handling and transporting. Blocking or other approved means shall be provided
to support poles that are placed in storage. All poles shall be covered with an approved protective
cover securely anchored or tied in place.
The Contractor shall remove and transport all light poles and control cabinets designated to be
removed and the resulting excavations shall be backfilled with borrow material in accordance with
Clause 6.2 and as approved by The Department.
The Contractor shall remove, salvage and transport existing lighting cables designated to be
removed in accordance with Clause 6.15
Where required or directed by The Department or described in the Particular Specifications, the
Contractor shall extend and provide connections of electric service between existing light poles
which are indicated on the Contract plans to remain in service.
6.14 Removal and Reinstallation of Existing Light Poles
6.14.1 General
The existing light poles may conflict with the proposed roadway at certain locations. The
Contractor shall remove and salvage these existing poles from locations conflicting with the
proposed works or from locations as directed by The Department. These removed and salvaged
poles, if approved for reuse, shall be reinstalled at new locations as specified herein and as
directed by The Department. The excess material shall be delivered to The Department’s stores.
6.14.2 Remove and Salvage Existing Light Poles with Luminaires
The Contractor shall remove and salvage the existing light poles, luminaires, and associated
appurtenances from locations as approved by The Department in accordance with the
requirements of Clause 6.13. Abandoned foundations shall be removed and disposed of, unless
otherwise permitted by The Department, as part of the works under the Item, Remove and
Salvage Existing Light Poles.
6.14.3 Foundations for and Install Light Poles
The Contractor shall construct the foundations for and install all light poles with all associated
appurtenances at locations as approved by The Department.
Foundations for the light poles shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of Part
1 - Section C.
Work shall include, but not by way of limitation, providing light pole foundations complete with
anchor bolts and conduits, and installing light poles complete with all accessories such as electrical
cut-outs, luminaires, wiring, and all associated appurtenances as necessary to make each lighting
unit complete and fully functional, as specified herein by The Department.
The size of foundation, anchor bolts, and PVC conduits, shall be as indicated on the Contract plans.
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing all the details as required by the Part 1 –
Section C, including calculations for the analysis of the subsoil conditions. The Contractor shall
supply all materials required for the construction of foundations including anchor bolts and
conduits. The Contractor shall reuse the poles, luminaires, and associated appurtenances, except
lamps (maintenance projects only), removed and salvaged from site for installing on the new
foundations. All HID lamps shall be replaced with new ones as a subsidiary obligation to the work
Item, Foundations for and Install Light Poles. The Contractor shall modify the existing luminaire
mast arm assembly or provide a new mast arm assembly as required to install one or two
luminaires on each pole. Modifying the removed and salvaged mast arm assemblies or providing
new mast arms will not be separately measured and paid, but shall be a subsidiary obligation to
the Item, Foundation for and Install Light Pole. Where the conditions of the existing electrical cut-
outs, screws, nuts, lugs, flag holders and/or internal wiring are not suitable for reuse, the
Contractor shall provide these items as a subsidiary obligation to the work Item, Foundations for
and Install Light Poles.
Separate measurement and payment will be made for the supply and installation of underground
cables, for the supply of cables for wiring between the electrical cut-out and luminaire, for the
cables to connect the newly installed light poles to the power source, and for the supply of
luminaires in accordance with the requirements of the respective items.
6.15 Electrical Distribution
6.15.1 Description
The LV electrical distribution Works shall be as indicated on the Contract plans, as specified
herein, as included in the Bills of Quantities, as directed by The Department.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design, manufacture, testing at the manufacturer's
plant, delivery, transport, loading and unloading, the laying, installing and site testing of all
electric cables, material and equipment furnished by the Contractor, which shall be handed over
to The Department in operating condition.
All salvaged LV cable shall be re-used for installation along new routes or delivered to The
Department’s Stores.
The Contractor shall provide electrical service trenches, as detailed on the Contract plans, at
building service cable entry locations under sidewalk areas.
The existing electrical distribution system shall remain energized during installation of new
electrical cables, materials and equipment. Upon completion of the installation, testing and
acceptance of the new electrical distribution system by AADC/ADDC, the deactivated electrical
cables and appurtenances designated to be salvaged shall be removed as hereinafter specified.
Prior to commencement of electrical work, the Contractor shall complete all manual excavation
to locate existing underground utilities and services as specified in Part 1- Roads, Standard
Specification for Construction, Chapter 2, Section 2.4, Earthwork. Upon receipt of this
information, the AADC/ADDC will identify the cables to be relocated to the new service reserves
or to be removed and salvaged. The Contractor shall prepare all shop drawings required for the
electrical works for approval by The Department and by the AADC/ADDC in accordance with the
requirements for shop drawings as specified in Part 1- Roads, Standard Specification for
Construction, Chapter 1, Section 1.15.4.
6.15.2 Guaranteed Characteristics
6.15.2.1 Design and Criteria
The cables, equipment and accessories shall be designed to give satisfactory and continuous
service under the conditions prevailing at the site. The design shall also provide adequate facilities
for inspection, cleaning and repairs. Precautions shall be taken in the design to ensure safety of
the staff while operating and maintaining the equipment and of the general public. All equipment
shall be designed to minimize the entry of dust. Outdoor equipment shall be so designed that
water cannot enter or collect at any point. Corresponding parts of equipment shall be fully
interchangeable.
The Contractor shall be bound to adhere to the design in this Section (or elsewhere in these
Contract Documents). If the Contractor has reason to deviate from this criterion, they shall
request The Department for approval of such deviations. The Department has the option to
accept or reject such deviations proposed by the Contractor.
6.15.3 Rejection of Equipment
In the event the acceptance tests of the various equipment show that any equipment fails to meet
the guarantees, The Department may direct the Contractor to proceed at once to make
alterations and replace it with new if fails, including furnishing of new parts as may be necessary
to meet the requirements of the guarantees.
6.15.4 Submittals
6.15.4.1 General
The Contractor shall submit all shop drawings and related technical details in accordance with
Part 1- Roads, Standard Specification for Construction, Chapter 1, Section 1.2.14 and as directed
by The Department.
6.15.4.2 Record Drawings, Manuals, Cable Schedules and Records
The Contractor shall prepare all records of the electrical cables, materials and equipment and
submit one set of transparent drawings and nine sets of prints, within two months of the cable
laying.
The records shall be carefully taken on site during the installation of the Works. The final
presentation of the records and schedules shall be approved by The Department. The records
shall show the route, the exact location of each cable, the position of each joint and shall have
schedules showing the date of jointing, the name of the jointer, the lengths between the joints,
the serial number of the cable drums, the direction of the lay of cable, i.e., A & Z ends, soil
conditions, positions of ducts and sectional inserts of the cable trench giving the relative positions
of the cable, tiles, depths and spacing.
Fifteen complete and detailed sets of maintenance instruction manuals, housed in substantial
book bindings, shall be supplied by the Contractor to facilitate maintenance and operation of the
Works. These sets of instruction manuals shall include detailed jointing instructions for each type
of joint supplied with the first consignment of cable. All drawings, manuals and other submittals
shall be in the English language. All other lists of tools, spare parts, progress schedules, test
reports and like information reports required to completely document this work shall be provided
by the Contractor as directed by The Department.
6.15.5 Low Voltage (LV) Cable and Accessories
6.15.5.1 Cable
All low voltage XLPE (Cross Linked Polyethylene) cables supplied by the Contractor for the
installation in lighting and power distribution systems shall comply with the requirements as
specified in Clause 7. All low voltage PVC cable for wiring inside light poles and/or other lighting
units shall be as specified in Clause 7.6. The conductor size and cable length required shall be as
included in the Bills of Quantities. The cables shall be installed in accordance with the
requirements as specified in Clause 7.15.
6.15.6 Joint Box for Low Voltage Cable
6.15.6.1 General
The joints supplied by the Contractor shall be of the dry type, using adhesive precoated on heat
shrinkable components. Joint boxes shall be suitable for 4core XLPE Armoured Cables of various
sizes as indicated in the Bills of Quantities, and shall include all necessary components including,
but not limited to, corrosion resistant casing, overall sealing, armour clamps, armour bonding,
connecting ferrules and core insulation tubing required for the straight through jointing of two
cables. All joint boxes shall be designed, manufactured, tested and sized in accordance with the
requirements of all applicable standards and as required by The Department, The Department
and AADC/ADDC. Cable joints shall be installed at locations including those required for
connecting to the existing circuits (shut down joints) as directed by The Department and
AADC/ADDC, as specified in Clause 7.15.
The heat shrinkable tubes and moulds shall shrink to a pre-determined size when heated to 120°C.
They shall be coated internally for sealing against ingress of moisture. The sealant shall have high
dielectric capabilities.
The Contractor shall submit evidence with the shop drawings that the proposed technique has
been extensively used by established electricity supply authorities. Records of the clients served
during the last five (5) years shall also be submitted. The Contractor shall submit as part of his
shop drawings complete details of Kit Contents for each size of Joint, including, but not limited to,
'Length of tubing', 'Thickness before and after recovery' and shrink ratio.
The water table in Abu Dhabi is very high. Extra protection shall be supplied to protect the Joints
against ingress of water. All the jointing ferrules and lugs for copper cable shall be tinned copper.
All the insulating and anti-tracking tubing shall be the thick wall sealant lined type. The tubes shall
have a high shrink ratio. The minimum overall dimensions shall be as per Table 6.15.6.1.1.
Table 6.15.6.1.1.- Joint Tubing lengths for Lighting Cable
Cable Size Overall Length
16 – 25 Sq.mm 600 mm
a) Joint Ferrules. Jointing ferrules for copper cable shall be tinned copper circular
compression type.
b) Insulating Tubing. The Heat shrinkable conductor tubing shall withstand the specified
normal operating temperature of 90°C and shall not be affected by the temperature
variation resulting from cyclic loading of the cable.
c) Earth and Armour Continuity Bonding. The earth conductivity shall be provided by
means of compression type tinned copper bonding strip/braided copper strip, having
conductivity not less than 50% of the phase conductor. Necessary bonding clamps
with armour support rings shall be provided.
d) Overall Sleeve. The overall sleeve shall be a combination of heavy-duty galvanized
steel wrap around, clamped at each end and a thick wall heavy duty type heat
shrinkable tube or any approved type of composite joint case. A rigid steel tube or
application of wire mesh tape to form a protective cover is not acceptable. The sleeve
shall not be affected by the soil conditions prevailing in Abu Dhabi. The sleeve shall
provide perfect sealing against ingress of water.
e) Performance Tests. The Contractor shall submit evidence with the shop drawings that
the Joints have been tested by a recognized Independent Testing Laboratory. The
details of tests performed, and the results thereof shall be submitted. Detailed
procedures of the tests performed shall also be submitted.
The low voltage Joints shall be tested as per Table 6.15.6.1.2.
Table 6.15.6.1.2- Low Voltage Joint Test Sequence
Sequence Test Name Minimum Requirements
1 Minimum 1000 Mega
Insulation Resistance
Ohm
2 As per Electrical Council
Impact Eng. Recommendation
C81
3 A.C. Voltage 3.5 KV for five minutes
4 Impulse Voltage 8 KV
5 Minimum 1000 Mega
Ohm
6 As per VDE (Verin
Deutsher Electrotecniker)
0278. 63 ELECT. Heat
Load Cycling
Cycle each of 8 Hours. 5
Hours.Heating-3 Hrs.
Cooling
7 Minimum 1000 Mega
Ohm
8 Impulse Voltage 8 KV
9 D.C. Voltage 15 KV for five minutes
f) Packing. Each Joint shall be supplied complete with all accessories, packed in a thick
polyethylene bag with the size of the Joint clearly indicated on the bag. Kit Contents
with Jointing Instructions fully illustrated with sketches shall also be supplied.
7. Lighting and Low Voltage Electrical Cable
7.1 Description
The lighting and low voltage electrical cables to be furnished and installed by the Contractor shall
be as indicated on the Contract plans and as specified herein. Electrical cables shall include, but
not by way of limitation, all splicing materials, jointing materials and all related materials and
appurtenances required to install all lighting and low voltage electrical cables.
The cables shall give trouble-free service under the worst conditions encountered in Abu Dhabi
and shall carry the rated current continuously even under the high temperature conditions which
prevail in summer and shall also withstand maximum fault currents without damage or
deterioration.
The cable drums shall be stored for periods up to 18 months in the open and shall be exposed to
direct sunlight. Therefore, the cables shall be so designed as to withstand such conditions without
any deterioration of their mechanical or electrical properties.
Inspection, testing and technical schedules of all cable and cable material shall be completed in
accordance with the requirements of Clause 3.
7.3 Electrical Low Voltage Cables Installed in PVC Duct
All low voltage electrical cable for lighting shall be installed in PVC ducting and shall be rated
600/1000 volts, stranded, annealed copper, cross linked polyethylene insulated, PVC over-
sheathed, wire/tape armoured and PVC served complying with the requirements of and tested to
BS 5467 or IEC 502 and as specified herein.
7.3.1 General
All wiring to loads supplied from 400/230volt electrical systems shall be with a single, multi-
conductor cable insulated and rated at 600/1000 volts. The minimum conductor size installed to
connect to a load shall be no less than the conductor size indicated on the Contract plans or
described in the Bills of Quantities.
The design, manufacture and testing of the cables shall comply with the requirements of this
Chapter and the requirements of The Department and AADC/ADDC. The required values in the
Technical Particulars for low voltage cables indicate the properties acceptable to The Department
and AADC/ADDC based on previously accepted cables. The Contractor's proposed cable shall meet
these requirements, unless otherwise approved by The Department.
7.3.2 Laying-Up
The cores of the cables shall be laid with a right-hand direction of lay. Where necessary, non-
hygroscopic fillers, which may be applied integrally with the sheath of the cables, shall be used to
form a compact and circular cable. There shall be no adhesion between the sheath and insulation
of the cable and where the sheath is applied integrally with the fillers it shall be possible to strip
it from the cable without damaging the insulation of the cores.
7.3.3 Conductors
The cores of the cables shall be comprised of stranded, smooth, annealed, copper wire, having a
conductivity of not less than 100 percent of the international standard. The surface of the
individual strands shall be smooth and clean prior to the application of insulation. The Conductor
shall be free of defects likely to injure the insulation. Conductors of all cable sizes shall be in
compacted circular shaped cross-section. The size of the neutral conductor shall be the same as
that of the phase conductors in the circuit. The Conductor shall comply with the requirements of
BS 6360 or IEC 60228.
7.4 Insulation
Heat resisting cross-linked polyethylene shall be used for the insulation of the conductors. The
cross-linked polyethylene insulation shall be free of foreign materials and defects that would
reduce the effectiveness of the insulation. It shall be applied by an extrusion process and shall
form a compact homogenous body.
The insulation thickness shall comply with the requirements of Table IV of I.E.C. publication 502.1.
Further, the insulation shall comply with the following:
a) Normal Operating temperature 90°C
b) Permitted overload temperature 130°C
c) Short circuit temperature 250°C
d) Chemical resistance high
e) Moisture resistance high
f) Thermal resistivity low
g) Fire resistance high
h) Phase Identification "red,” "yellow,” "blue" and
"black,” full coloured cores for three phases, and neutral respectively.
7.4.1 Sheath
The sheath shall consist of extruded PVC. The material shall comply with Type 9, Table 1 of B.S.S.
6746 or IEC 60540. The thickness of the sheath shall be as specified in the respective schedules
for each cable size.
7.4.2 Armour
The armour shall consist of galvanized steel wires and shall provide a conductivity of not less than
50 percent of the phase conductor. Armour shall be solidly earthed and shall serve as the means
for earthing continuity for the branch circuit supplied by the cable. If required, the armour shall
be supplemented with additional tinned copper wires of the same diameter to achieve the
required conductivity. The zinc coating in the armour shall not be less than 200 grams/square
meter for 10, 16, 25 square millimeter cables.
7.4.3 Serving
The serving shall be an extruded black PVC applied over the armour, fire retardant and shall have
qualities as per IEC 60332. The material shall comply with Type 9, Table 1 of BS 6746 or IEC 60540.
The thickness shall be as specified in the respective schedules for each cable size.
The voltage designation, cable size, number of conductors, manufacturers name, Contract
number and the name of The Department shall be embossed on the PVC sheath. The sheath shall
be termite resistant and shall be made up of long chain, high molecular weight type PVC. The PVC
sheath of the cable on a drum shall be embossed with a marking indicating the length of the cable
every ten meters such that the markings 10, 20, 30, 40 . . . etc., shall commence inside near the
core of the drum and the final marking indicating the total length of the cable shall be on the
outside. The name of The Department shall appear at one-meter intervals over the entire length
of the cable.
7.4.4 Current Ratings
The current ratings of cables for the site and installation conditions mentioned above shall be
stated. Where ratings are specified for any standard conditions appropriate adjustment factors
shall be stated.
7.4.5 Short Circuit Ratings
The Contractor shall submit curves showing permissible short circuit ratings for low voltage cables
being proposed for this work.
7.4.6 Guarantee
A separate guarantee certificate shall be submitted with each submittal to guarantee that the
offered cables, particularly the outer PVC sheathing, shall withstand the severe ambient climatic
conditions when stored on drums in the open for a period of 18 months.
7.4.7 Tests
All tests for direct burial low voltage cables shall comply with the requirements of Clause 3 and as
specified herein. The cable shall be subject to all the routine tests as per BS 5467. Additionally,
the following tests shall be conducted in accordance with relevant IEC/BS/ASTM standards in the
presence of Owner’s representative on samples collected from each batch of maximum 20 drums.
a) Spark Test on cores and sheaths
b) Voltage Test on completed cable
c) Conductor Resistance Test
d) Armour Resistance Test
e) Flame Retardant Characteristics (The flame-retardant characteristics of electric cable
shall be tested for compliance with IEC 60332)
f) Thickness of insulation
g) Thickness of PVC Sheath
h) Number and thickness of wire armour
i) Thickness of PVC overall serving
j) Weight of copper conductor in gm/meter.
k) Weight of copper in armour in gm/meter.
l) Weight of zinc coating gm/sq. meter.
The thickness and weight as determined above shall agree with the guaranteed values. The weight
of copper per meter of cable shall also be determined.
All cable lengths cut and used for the various tests shall be at the Contractor's expense and these
shall not affect the final length of cable to be supplied as specified.
Test certificates from international recognized laboratories shall be submitted for the electrical
cable along with the material submittal for The Department’s approval.
7.5 Low Voltage PVC Wiring Cables
The low voltage PVC wiring cables to be supplied shall meet the requirements of BS 7211, low
smoke and fume wiring cables. The cable insulation shall allow continuous conductor operation
up to 90°C temperature. Maximum conductor temperature allowed under short circuit condition
shall be 250°C. Independent product testing to BS 7211 by an agency shall be submitted for
Engineers approval.
7.5.2 PVC Wiring Cables
Cables of sizes smaller than 16mm² shall be XLPE or PVC insulated as indicated on the Contract
plans or as approved by The Department. The PVC insulated wiring cables shall meet with the
requirements of BS 6004 and IEC 60227.
7.5.3 Fire Resistant PVC wiring cables
Cables of sizes smaller than 16mm² shall be XLPE or PVC insulated as indicated on the Contract
plans or as approved by The Department and The Department. Fire resistant non-armoured cables
shall meet the requirements of BS6387 category C, W & Z, BS8434-2, BS5839-I, BS5266-I and BS
8519.
7.6 Low Voltage (LV) Cable
The low voltage armoured cables shall meet the requirements as specified herein. The name of
the cable owner shall be embossed on the PVC outer sheath. The low voltage armoured cable to
be supplied by the Contractor shall meet the requirements of BS 6724, complies with acid gas
emission requirements of IEC 60754 Part 1 and Part 2, and Category C of IEC 60332-3. The cable
shall have low smoke and fume properties, no halogen acid gas emissions and reduced ignition
and fire propagation properties. Materials used for termination and joints shall also be low smoke
and fume type.
7.6.2 Fire Resistant Cable
The low voltage armoured cables shall meet the requirements as specified herein. The name of
the cable owner shall be embossed on the PVC outer sheath. The low voltage armoured cable to
be supplied by the Contractor shall meet the requirements of BS 7846, complies with acid gas
emission requirements of IEC 60754 Part 1 and Part 2, flammability IEC 60332-1 and IEC 60332-
3categories A, B and C, resistant to fire C-W-2 of BS 6387, IEC 60331 and F-2 and F-3 of BS 7846,
smoke emissions IEC 61034-1 and 2. The cable shall have low smoke and fume properties, no
halogen acid gas emissions and reduced ignition and fire propagation properties. Materials used
for termination and joints shall also be fire resistant type.
7.6.3 Modular Cable – Fire Resistant, LSOH Type
7.6.3.1 General
LV Cabling inside the tunnel, feeding tunnel light fittings shall be modular cables. This cabling
system shall consist of a main cable with branch cables used for rated 600/1000V main circuit and
branch circuit with weather-proof connector reaching up to the individual tunnel luminaire. The
entire cabling system shall be factory-built, with a pertinent number of joints with insulation
mould between a main cable and branch circuits shall be made at set points in line with the
approved shop drawings. Both main and branch cables to be fire resistant, Low Smoke Zero
Halogen type complying to BS6387. Branch assembly connector ‘Plug-socket’ assembly shall be
IP68 water-proof type complying with IEC 60529.
7.6.3.2 Conductors
Cable conductors shall comprise stranded bare clean smooth annealed copper wires having a
conductivity not less than 100 percent international standard. The surface of the individual
strands shall be smooth and clean before the insulation is applied.
7.6.3.3 Neutral
Cable of all sizes shall have full size neutral, i.e. same wire size as phase conductor up to 25mm2.
7.6.3.4 Insulation
The insulation shall be XLPE complying with the following requirements:

a) Normal Operating Temperature: 80 Deg. C
b) Chemical Resistance: High
c) Moisture Resistance: High
d) Thermal Resistivity: Low
e) Fire Resistance: Good
f) Insulation Thickness: shall be in accordance with IEC Publ.502.1
g) Phase Identification: Cables shall be colour coded, Red, Yellow and Blue for phases
with Black for neutral.
h) Protection Conductor Identification: Yellow and Green
7.6.3.5 Cores Laying Up
The cores of cable shall be laid up and where necessary non-hygroscopic fillers shall be used to
form a compact and circular cable.
7.6.3.6 Sheath (Bedding)
The sheath shall consist of an extruded layer of LSZH compound.
7.6.3.7 Armour
The armour shall consist of galvanized round steel wire.
7.6.3.8 Over sheathing
The over sheathing shall be LSZH compound.
7.6.3.9 Modular Cables and Socket
For connection of individual light fitting to the main distribution cable plug and socket
arrangement shall be followed. The main cable from the Lighting distribution board to the
Junction Box at the tunnel entry area shall be Fire resistant LSZH armoured cables. From this
Junction Box to the tunnel light fittings a modular cable shall be used. This cable shall have sockets
embedded on it. Another flexible cable with the plug shall be provided for connection from the
socket on the modular cable to the light fittings.
The sizes of the modular cables shall be as indicated on the drawings and as approved by The
Department.
7.7 Electrical Cables - In Conduit and Light Poles
Note: Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual Part 2 Section A, states specific restrictions on the use of
armoured cables only when the lighting fixtures can terminate armoured cables directly. i.e. such
as with roadway/parking lighting or other pole-based luminaires. In all other cases however, non-
armoured cables utilizing protective tiles, conduits, ducts or other mechanical protective means
must be used to terminate directly without the need for unnecessary junction boxes.
Electrical cables in light poles shall be as specified in Part 1, Section C, unless otherwise indicated
on the Contract plans, specified in the Particular Specifications or described in the Bills of
Quantities. Electrical cables installed in conduit shall have a copper core, shall be cross-linked
polyethylene (XLPE) insulated, and shall be suitable for installation in conduit, and underground
ducts in wet or dry locations. The insulation shall be rated for 90°C in dry locations, 75°C in wet
locations, 130°C for emergency overload conditions and 250°C for short circuit conditions. Multi-
core cable shall have heat resistant PVC over-sheath. The cable shall be in accordance with the
requirements of IEC 60502 or IPCEA Publication Number S-66-524. Certified test results for each
cable shipment delivered shall be furnished to The Department for approval prior to installation
of the cable. The cable shall have a normal core section and colour coding as indicated on the
Contract plans.
Cables conforming to comparable international standards shall be submitted in writing by the
Contractor to The Department and may only be used when approved in writing by The
Department.
7.8 Packing
The cables shall be wound on strong wooden cable drums provided with wooden battens to
protect the cable from damage. All drums shall become the property of The Department. The
cables shall be supplied in drum lengths specified herein. For each cable size unless otherwise
approved by The Department.
Table 7.7.1- Cable size and Drum Length
Cable Size Drum Length (m)
4x 25 Sq.mm XLPE Cu 1000
7.9 Markings
All cable drums shall be clearly engraved in English and Arabic language as follows:
a) Name of manufacturer
b) Sizes and number of conductors
c) Voltage
d) Drum number
e) Length of cable
f) Contractor's order number
g) Contractor's name, address and Contract Number
In addition to the above, two metallic sheets 16cm x 12cm fixed on each side of the drum by four
screws shall be marked with the cable length, size and order number in English and Arabic
language.
7.10 Drawings & Information
Tenderers are required to furnish with their Tenders, the cable manufacturer's comprehensive
supporting information for all cables which the Tenderer proposes to furnish for the Works. Upon
award of the Contract by The Department, the Contractor shall not substitute cable from a
different manufacturer except with the prior approval of The Department. The Contractor is
required to furnish the following information:
a) The applicable schedules included herein and/or in the Particular Specifications for all
cables proposed for the Works.
b) A detailed summary of deviations, if any, from the specifications.
c) Dimensioned drawings showing a cross-section through the cables and annotated to
show the make-up of the cables.
d) Short circuit current curves.
7.11 License
Where the contracted material or equipment is to be manufactured by a company who has a

license from another company, the Contractor shall obtain from the company, who owns the
design, an assurance addressed to The Department confirming the safety of the design. At the
same time The Departments of the design are to confirm that the produced equipment will be in
good condition and in accordance with their design and comply with The Department’s
specifications.
7.11.1 Materials
a) All materials and equipment shall comply with the latest relevant recommendations
of the International Electrotechnical Commission (I.E.C.) or with the latest relevant
British Standard specifications (BS). This applies to cable material quality and testing.
If standards as mentioned above contradict with this specification, then the
requirements of this specification shall apply.
b) Tenderers who wish to base their submittals on standards other than those
mentioned above may do so, provided they confirm in their Tenders, that such
standards meet the requirements of paragraph a). At the time requested by The
Department and prior to commencing use of these products, the Contractor shall be
required to prove this compliance and, if needed, compliance will be verified by The
Department. The Contractor shall pay for all costs associated with verifying
compliance by the AADC/ADDC as specified herein.
7.12 Splicing 600/1000 Volt Cable and Wire
Splicing of 600/1000 V insulated electric cable and wire shall comply with the requirements of the
manufacturer of the splicing materials, as specified herein and as approved by The Department.
When splicing is required as specified in herein or in the Particular Specifications or indicated on
the Contract plans, it shall mean a splice or tap of pigtail construction made with crimp-on lugs,
screw bolt, lock washer, hex nuts, tape and insulating paint of the following material description
and construction. The crimp-on lugs shall be made of high conductivity copper and shall be
electroplated for minimum contact resistance. An oxide inhibitor shall be used in the wire bore
for minimum connection resistance. The splice or tap shall be made using hardware of the
appropriate size for the wire and cables being jointed.
7.13 Lighting and Low Voltage Electrical Cable Installation
Where indicated on the Contract plans or specified in the Particular Specifications or described in
the Bills of Quantities, the Contractor shall install lighting and low voltage electric cables, materials
and equipment furnished by the Contractor in compliance with Clause 6.15 & Clause 7.15 and as
specified herein.
LOW VOLTAGE CABLE
SCHEDULE "A" - TECHNICAL PARTICULARS, GUARANTEES
600/1000 VOLTS GRADE, 4 CORE, XLPE, ARMOURED CABLE
Required Proposed
Sr Description 25 mm2 16 mm2 10 mm2 25 mm2 16 mm2 10 mm2
No.
1 Voltage Grade of Cable 600/ 600/ 600/
1000 1000 1000
2 Standard to which cables
conform (Ref. Number of
Standards) IEC and/or BS to
AADC/ADDC/AADC
IEC 60502
requirement
3 Type of Cable CU/ XLPE/ SWA/ PVC
4 Type of Conductor CIRCULAR COMPACTED STRANDED
(25mm and above TRIANGULAR)
5 (a) Area mm2 25 16 10
(b) Strands No. 7 7 7
6 Diameter of Conductor (mm) 5.9 4.7 4.1
7 Maximum Resistance of
Conductor per 1000 meters
0.727 1.15 1.83
of completed cable at 20°C
Ohms
8 Insulation
(a) Material XLPE
(b) Thickness (mm)
0.9 0.7 0.7
(Min. Average)
9 Sheath
(a) Material PVC
(b) Thickness (mm)
1.0 1.0 0.8
(Minimum Average)
(c) Nominal. diameter
19.9 17.3 15.3
over sheath (mm)
10 Armour
(a) No. of galvanized
38 38 38
steel wire (Nos).
(b) No. of Copper Conductor
2 2 N/A
(If applicable) (Nos.)
(c) Diameter of Steel
1.6 1.25 1.25
Armour Wire (mm)
(d) Maximum Resistance of
Armour per 1000
1.45 2.3 3.66
meters of completed
cables (Ohms)
(e) Diameter of Copper Wire
1.6 1.25 N/A
(If applicable) (mm)
(f) Nominal diameter over
24.4 19.8 17.7
Armour (mm)
MANUFACTURER CONTRACTOR
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
LOW VOLTAGE CABLE (CONTINUED)
SCHEDULE "A" - TECHNICAL PARTICULARS, GUARANTEES
600/1000 VOLTS GRADE, 4 CORE, XLPE, ARMOURED CABLE

Required Proposed
Sr Description 25 mm2 16 mm2 10 mm2 25 mm2 16 mm2 10 mm2
No.
11 Serving
(a) Material Extruded Black PVC Complying with BS EN 50363
(b) Thickness (Nominal) 1.8 1.8 1.5
12 Overall diameter of
30 25 20
Cable (mm)
13 Weight of following:
(a) Copper Conductor
885 560 349
kg/1000 Meters Approx
(b) Steel in Armour
591 380 378
c) Copper wire in Armour
37 22 N/A
Approx (if applicable)
(d) Finished cable
2250 1510 985
14 Minimum radius of bend
round which cable can be 240 200 120
held (cm.)
15 Nominal drum length (mtr) 1000 1000 1000
16 Gross weight of completed
2690 1710 1060
drum (kg.)
17 Current carrying capacity (A) per circuit:
a) When laid direct in
the ground:
75cm depth, ground
99 77 68
temperature 35°C
ground resistivity
150°C cm/W Amps.
(b) Flat formation at 30cm centres:
i. One - 3 Phase per
99 77 64
Trench (A.)
ii. Two - ditto- (A) 81 63 51
iii. Three - ditto- (A) 70 54 47
18 Assumed maximum Conductor Temperature (OC) for above:
(a) Laid direct in the ground 90 90 90
(b) Laid direct in the air 90 90 90
19 Expected life of cables 30-50 30-50 30-50
(Years.)
20 Guaranteed life of cables
1 1 1
(Years.)
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
SCHEDULE "B"
DEVIATIONS FROM TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The Contractor shall state in the following Schedule, any proposed deviations from the Technical
Specifications for low voltage cables and joints.
Sr. Specification
No. Clause Specified Proposed
7.14 Grounding & Bonding
7.14.1 Summary
This section includes the specification for the grounding system and provision for bonding all the
conducting parts to the grounding system.
A new grounding system shall be provided for the facilities being constructed and shall
incorporate the features as described in this section. The grounding system shall provide
protection and safety to personnel against electric shock and protection of equipment against
damage due to ground fault in the electrical system.
Suitable earth electrodes shall be included to achieve specified earth resistance.
7.14.2 References
a) NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

b) BS 7671: Code of practice for earthing
7.14.3 General Requirements
Products used in the grounding system shall be copper or an approved copper alloy, unless
otherwise specified, and specifically manufactured for the purpose. All connectors, couplers, etc.
shall preferably be made of Bronze. For use with dissimilar materials, suitable bi-metallic
connectors shall be used.
7.14.4 Performance Requirements
Grounding System Resistance: 2Ohms or to meet AADC/ADDC requirements.
7.14.5 Submittals for Review
a) The following shall be included in the submittals:

i) Shop drawings, product data and samples.
ii) Complete description, specifications, drawings and descriptive literature on
the equipment.
iii) Make and model of each component.
iv) Number of sizing electrical and control wires and power requirements.
v) Complete wiring and equipment installation diagram.
vi) List of spare Parts to be provided.
vii) Recommended procedure for protection of equipment against damage, prior
to installation.
i) Complete system diagram showing required components and routing.
b) The submittals shall be subject to approval by The Department. The Contractor shall
submit the final documentation based on The Department’s comments.
c) Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
d) Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections.
e) Submit full technical details and conductor size calculations suitable for short circuit
levels.
f) Submit route of each cable or conductor as proposed.
7.14.6 Submittals for Information
a) Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode
7.14.7 Submittals for Closeout
a) Project Record Documents: Record actual route of conductors, exact locations of

components and grounding electrodes.
b) Certificate of Compliance: Indicate approval of installation by The Department and
AADC/ADDC where required.
c) Provide grounding test results
7.14.8 Regulatory Requirements
a) Conform to the following requirements:

i) DOE Electricity Wiring Regulations
ii) NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, USA
iii) BS 7671 - Requirements for Electrical Installations, IET, UK.
iv) Latest issue of Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority (ADWEA)
regulations.
b) In the case of conflict, the DOE requirements shall take precedence.
7.14.9 Products - Rod Electrodes
a) Shall be the ground rod electrode type, unless impracticable to drive deep into the
specific soil on site.
b) Ground rod electrodes: 19mm diameter comprising a high strength steel alloy core
with a molten welded copper covering.
c) Shall be 3.6m long, in 1.2m sections coupled by strong bronze couplers.
d) Ground electrodes shall be solid copper or steel-cored copper with a metallic bonded
outer surface. Electrodes shall be provided with special hardened tips and caps to
avoid distortion being driven into the ground. Approved non-ferrous clamps for
connecting the electrodes to the copper strips leading to the disconnecting links shall
be provided.
7.14.10 Plant Electrodes
a) Shall be either Copper; or Cast iron where artificial treatment of soil is necessary
because of high soil resistivity.
b) Description: Metallic-salt-filled tube electrode.
c) Shape: Straight or as specified.
d) Length: 2400 mm or as specified.
e) Connector: U-bolt pressure plate.
7.14.11 Earth Continuity Conductors
Sizes shall be as specified by DOE, unless otherwise indicated, but in no case shall size be less than
half that of the associated phase conductors. Insulation shall be of the same material as insulation
in associated sub-circuits, coloured green and yellow.
7.14.12 Main Conductor
a) Main grounding conductors shall comprise tinned copper tapes of hard drawn, high
conductivity copper strip or stranded copper conductor.
b) Sized to meet requirements of latest edition of DOE EWR, BS 7671 and to meet
ADWEA regulations.
c) Grounding conductors shall be adequately sized for the maximum fault current and
in no case shall be smaller than 38mm x 4mm for Low Voltage equipment.
7.14.13 Mechanical Connectors
Provide multiple bolted type Bronze connectors, purpose manufactured for electrode and
conductor connection. Where bare copper is bolted in connections, contact surfaces shall be silver
electroplated.
Disconnecting bolts, nuts, locknuts and washers shall be made from phosphor bronze.
7.14.14 Exothermic Connections
Welding materials and suitable moulds manufactured by Company specializing in the Products
specified in this section for grounding system shall be used.
7.14.15 Pit Components
a) A concrete disconnecting chamber having a removable cover and containing a

disconnecting link for test purposes shall be provided over each earth electrode. The
top of the chamber shall be at finished ground level, and the head of each electrode
shall be within the disconnection chamber.
b) Concrete pit: 300 x 300mm and 500mm deep or preformed concrete chamber shall
be provided at locations for electrode.
c) Pit Cover: Cast iron or concrete with legend "EARTH" embossed on cover and to be
furnished with recessed lifting hook.
d) The disconnecting link shall be of tinned copper, be not less than the connecting strip
cross sectional area and have a generous contact area.
e) Concrete pits inside tunnel area shall be sized considering the concrete thickness.
7.14.16 Execution – Examination
a) Co-ordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions prior to beginning

work.
b) Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod
electrodes.
7.14.17 Installation
a) Provide a complete, new grounding system for complete electrical facilities of tunnel.
Existing grounding system shall be connected to the new system, if found suitable at
locations of existing facilities.
b) Electrode System
i) Install rod electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes
as required to achieve specified resistance to ground.
ii) Provide grounding pit with cover at each rod location. Install grounding pit
top flush with finished grade.
iii) Contractor shall be responsible for any rock drilling necessary for the
installation of the electrodes, for the supply and installation of the concrete
disconnecting chamber, and the provision of any chemicals required to assist
in obtaining a satisfactory earth.
iv) The ground electrodes interconnection shall be an electrically unbroken ring
using P.V.C. insulated stranded copper conductor grounding cable sweated to
the test links. The cable be adequately sized and of sufficiently low resistance
to carry the maximum fault current for the clearing time of the protective
equipment without undue temperature rise.
v) Each group of ground electrodes shall be connected to the station grounding
system by stranded copper conductor grounding cables or copper tapes. The
cables shall be sweated to opposite ends of the earth ring and to two different
points on the station grounding system.
vi) Groups of ground electrodes shall generally be located as close to the building
housing the switchgear as practical, and where two groups are required, they
shall be located at opposite ends of the building.
vii) Each group shall comprise one or more interconnected electrodes, driven to
a depth of 2m below the summer water table and with heads located at a
depth to suit the disconnecting chamber position.
c) Grounding system
i) All connections to the ground tape and any joints in the run of the tape shall
be, tinned, riveted, sweated and electrically continuous. The minimum
overlap of any connection be equal to the width of the larger of the two tapes.
When less than four rivets are used, they shall be located diagonally across
the joint. Final earth connections to motors shall be made by a bolted copper
disconnecting link to facilitate removal of the motors without the need for
bending the tape. Links shall be located for ease of inspection and testing.
Ground tapes shall be fixed by means of non-ferrous spacer saddles, drilling
of the conductors will not be permitted. Ground conductors within buildings
shall be run in ducts or on the underside of control room floors where
possible.
ii) Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit
trunking. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.
iii) Earth bars and earthing equipment shall be provided for each grounding
system and all main earth electrodes, grounding leads, neutral earth
connections, etc., shall be connected to these.
iv) Bonding
v) Provide grounding conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation
footing where indicated. Bond steel together.
vi) Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements.
vii) Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; and bond to
ground.
viii) Bond together reinforcing steel and metal accessories in pool and fountain
structures.
ix) Bond together each metallic raceway, pipe, duct and other metal object
entering space under access floors. Bond to underfloor ground grid. Use
35mm² copper conductor.
x) The non-conducting metal work of all electrical equipment shall be effectively
earthed. Electric drives rated at 7.5kW and above shall be provided with an
ground conductor comprising tinned copper tape of 25mm by 3mm minimum
cross section and connected to the main earth system. On drives of less than
7.5kW a separate insulated copper cable may be used for grounding
purposes, providing the total impedance of earth continuity system do not
exceed one Ohm. Cable armouring or sheath shall not be used as sole ground
conductor.
xi) Install ground grid under access floors where indicated. Construct grid of
38mm x 4mm bare copper tape installed on 600mm centres both ways. Bond
each access floor pedestal to grid.
xii) Conduit or trunking shall not be used for earth continuity, but all conduit or
trunking shall be connected to earth. All joints for cable trays, ladders and
trunking shall be bonded for continuity using 6 sq. mm. Y.G. stranded copper
cable. Flexible conduits shall have an additional external earth connection
adequately bonded at both ends. Where conduit and/or trunking is used to
connect equipment not separately bonded to the grounding system a
separate internal ground conductor shall be run, which shall be securely
bonded directly to the respective equipment by means of a separate
recognized earth terminal.
d) Equipment grounding
i) Motors Grounding: Connect the motor terminal box to the relative ground
loop. The terminal must be mechanically connected to the frame or, where
this is not feasible, extend the grounding conductor through an insulated
bushed opening in the connection box and connect to the frame.
ii) Main Switchboards, Switchgears and Motor Control Centres Grounding:
Connect the special grounding lug or busbars inside the cabinet to the main
earth copper tape. Connect all parts of the switchboards, switchgears and
motor control centers other than “live” parts, to the ground bar in the board
in an approved manner.
iii) Distribution Boards Grounding: Connect grounding conductor from the main
distribution earth busbar to an earth connector welded to the cabinet and
earthing bushings on the incoming and outgoing feeder conduits.
iv) Bus-Duct Feeders Grounding: Connect the green coded ground busbar
directly to the ground busbar in main switchboard with ground copper tape.
v) Fire Fighting Equipment: ground on a separate ring system.
vi) Provide separate grounding conductor for circuits supplying personal
computers and other sensitive electronic equipment as directed The
Department.
e) Cable system
i) The lead sheath and/or Armour wires on main cables shall be solidly bonded
and grounded to provide additional ground paths. Care shall be taken on
cable termination boxes to ensure that the cable sheath and Armour is
adequately bonded to the associated item or plant.
ii) Care shall be taken to ensure grounding continuity across items of equipment
situated within a cable run. Should the design of such equipment not give an
adequate and lasting continuity through its structural body, then additional
grounding and conductors shall be provided to independently bond the cable
sheaths together.
iii) Joints and terminal boxes in underground cables (if approved by The
Department's Representative) shall be bridged by tinned copper of adequate
cross section, bonded to the cable sheath.
7.14.18 Field Quality Control
a) Perform inspections and tests to meet AADC/ADDC requirements.

b) The resistance of any point in the earth continuity system to the main earth mass shall
not exceed 2Ohms.
i) Measure grounding resistance at each electrode location
ii) Measure overall grounding resistance of the complete system.
iii) Install additional earth electrodes if these figures are not met.
7.15 Earthing and Bonding for Lighting Installations
The earthing of wiring systems, circuits, equipment, arresters, cable armour, conduit or other
metal raceways as a protective measure shall be so arranged that there shall be no objectionable
passage of current over the earthing conductors. The path to earth from circuits, equipment, or
cable armours and conduits shall be permanent and continuous and shall have ample carrying
capacity to conduct safely any current liable to be imposed on it and shall have impedance
sufficiently low to limit the potential above earth and facilitate the operation of the devices on
the circuits.
The material such as earthing electrodes, copper conductor, fittings, couplings and connectors
shall be approved by the applicable standards as to their design, manufacture, testing and manner
of installation. A separate stranded copper wire with PVC oversheath (Green/Yellow) shall be
pulled through non-metallic conduits to maintain the continuity of earthing systems. It is not
acceptable to use the SWA cable armour as a means of earthing the system. Amour can only be
used as supplementary bonding and must be connected the cut-out gland plate. Rigid galvanized
steel conduit, if approved by the AADC/ADDC, shall be acceptable as the earthing path. Non-
current carrying parts which are metallic such as equipment and cabinet enclosures shall be
earthed.
Bonding jumpers shall be of copper wire or strap with a cross-section area not less than 16mm2.
Bonding jumpers may be used for connecting enclosures to earthing conductors or lugs or to
achieve earthing continuity between the electrically separated components.
Earthing electrodes shall be the copper-clad steel rod type with 1.9cm diameter and in sections
of 1.2m long and to reach 3.6m minimum depth. Rods shall have a thick copper covering
inseparably molten-welded to a strong steel core to provide stiffness for easy driving, rust
resistance for long life and copper-to-copper contacts throughout to assure low resistance.
Electrodes, upon being driven into the earth, shall have resistance to ground not more than
2Ohms. The earth pit components shall be as specified under Clause 7.13.15. If practicable, two
or more electrodes shall be connected in series as approved by The Department, if necessary, to
attain the resistance value specified.
7.16 Cable Installation
7.16.1 General
Where indicated on the Contract plans or specified in the Particular Specifications or described in
the Bills of Quantities, the Contractor shall install lighting LV electric cables, materials and
equipment furnished by any of the following:
1. The Contractor,
2. The Department,
In compliance with the applicable Sections of this Section, as required by the AADC/ADDC and as
directed by The Department
The Contract plans and this Section is not intended to give all the details of wiring system
installations. All appurtenances such as boxes, fittings, and supports shall be provided as per
Standards and Codes governing the installation. Adequate access and working space and
clearances shall be provided around all equipment to provide safety. Conduits and cables shall
be routed such as to be always either parallel or perpendicular to the structure.
Connection of conductors to terminal parts shall be made by means of pressure connectors and
shall ensure thoroughly good connections without damaging the conductors. Plug-in type
connections shall not be acceptable. Connections of dissimilar metals shall be strictly by methods
approved by The Department and/or the AADC/ADDC. Connections by means of wire binding
screws or studs and nuts having upturned lugs or an equivalent shall be permitted for 6mm2 or
smaller conductors. Conductors shall be spliced or joined with splicing devices suitable for the
use or by brazing, welding or soldering. Soldered splices shall first be so spliced or joined as to be
mechanically and electrically secured without solder and then soldered. All joints and free ends
of conductors shall be covered by an insulation equivalent to that of the conductors or with an
insulating device suitable for the purpose. All live parts of the equipment shall be guarded against
accidental contact by approved means. Installation of all cables, cable connections and cable
joints shall be by approved means and performed by persons specially qualified for such work.
There shall not be any intermediate joints in lighting cables except cable connections at
terminations of each circuit.
The Contractor shall supply all tools, haulage and lifting equipment and transport required for the
installation of the various cables for the respective circuits in compliance with Part 1- Roads,
Standard Specification for Construction, Chapter 1, Section 1.6.1, General Requirements.
7.17 Installing Cables for Lighting and Street Furniture
7.17.1 General
This work shall consist of installing cables for roadway/parking, decorative, bridge, street furniture
and other lighting system works as indicated on the Contract plans or designated by The
Department.
7.17.1.1 General
a) Underground Cable Installation in Duct.

b) Where indicated on the Contract plans or required by The Department or specified in
the Particular Specifications or described in the Bills of Quantities, the Contractor shall
install all underground lighting cable in PVC duct throughout the complete site.
c) Underground Direct Buried Cable.
Direct buried lighting cable shall only be installed where the Contractor is carrying out
maintenance works where the existing cable is already directly buried.
7.17.1.2 Cable Installation in Light Poles and Conduits
7.17.1.2.1 General
This work consists of installing cables, furnished either by the Contractor or by The Department,
in 10.0m, 14.0m, 18.0m, 20.0m and 30.5m light poles, decorative lighting, all interconnecting
conduit between all bridge lighting, overhead sign lighting and all related systems.
7.17.1.2.2 Installing Cables in Poles and Conduit
The Contractor shall install cables of the sizes and types as indicated on the Contract plans, or as
required by The Department to connect lighting poles/luminaires to the lighting distribution
cables.
Where more than one single conductor cables are installed through the pole from the connection
with the distribution cables in the base of the poles to the connection with the luminaires, the
cables shall be neatly bunched together and correctly supported as approved by The Department.
Cables shall be pulled carefully through the conduits to minimise the amount of damage during
installation.
When pulling cables through conduits, an approved lubricant shall be used. Slack shall be allowed
in each cable run to permit contraction and expansion of the cables. A service loop of cable shall
be left in each access chamber, junction box or handhole to facilitate future maintenance or joints.
When starting fish wires or tapes into the conduits, the ends shall be carefully taped with plastic
tape so as not to damage the interior wall of the conduit. Where hitches are used to pull the wire
or cables, the hitches shall be applied to distribute the strains to both the copper conductor and
braid or insulation on the cables. The hitches shall be made with no sharp projections that will
damage the interior bore of the conduit when pulling the cable through it.
7.17.2 Trench and Backfill.
The Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Clause 6.

The exact location of each trench and joint pit shall be subject to the approval of The Department.
The Contractor shall arrange that a maximum of 1,200m, or a lesser amount as directed by The
Department, of excavated trench shall be open at any time.
Where changes in levels are necessary in the bottoms of trenches, the bottom of the trench shall
rise or fall gradually. The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to prevent damage to
the road or ground surface due to a slip or breaking-away from the side walls of the trench.
Where sand dunes exist in the duct/cable routes as finally approved, the sand dunes shall be
cleared to the normal ground level. Duct/cables shall be laid in trenches with dimensions as
specified in Table 7.16.2.1.
Table 7.17.2.1. – Trench Dimensions (cm) for Lighting Cable

Voltage Depth to bottom Width at Bottom Additional Width at Bottom
Circuit (cm) for One Duct/Circuit (cm) for Each Additional Duct/Circuit (cm)
LV 75 30 30
For lighting cables, a 100mm layer of soft, sieved sand shall be placed in the trench to form a
smooth bedding before the duct/cables are laid. After the duct/cables have been laid they shall
be covered with an additional layer of soft, sieved sand over and around the cables to a level of
100mm above the top of the uppermost cable. The method of spreading and compacting the
sand layer over and around the cables shall be by hand. No mechanical tamper shall be used for
this work.
7.17.3 Cable Laying
The ducts/cables shall be laid along the routes, and in the locations, as approved by The
Department. The Department shall have the right to alter the cable routes and locations where
it is considered necessary to avoid obstructions, or to suit revised services reservations.
Prior to any excavation, the Contractor must request service drawings from all utility authorities
to ensure that no service is damaged during excavations.
All arrangements of cables and methods of laying and installation shall be subject to the approval
of The Department. The Contractor shall supply and install labels for the identification of cables,
properly numbered and located and subject to the approval of The Department.
Cable bending radii shall be as per IEC 60092-362.
Before installing cables in ducts, the Contractor shall remove any loose material from the ducts
and shall prove them by a method approved by The Department.
Cables shall be placed into underground ducts in all new lighting projects and at all road crossings.
Factory installed pulling eyes shall be used when drawing cables in ducts.
Cables shall be laid directly from the drum into the trenches and special rollers placed at close
intervals shall be employed for supporting the cables while pulling and laying them. Rollers used
during the laying of cables shall have no sharp projecting parts likely to damage the cables.
Every non-flexible cable shall be securely supported at a point not more than one meter from its
terminal gland to prevent stressing of the termination.
Multiple runs shall be marshalled so that cables entering or leaving the run do so in an orderly
and logical manner.
8 Lighting Control Cabinets
8.1 Description
Lighting control cabinets shall be as indicated on the Contract plans, as specified herein and as
directed by The Department.
8.2 General
400/230 volt, moulded glass reinforced plastic (GRP) lighting control cabinets for the control of
roadway/parking lighting shall be free standing and suitable for outdoor installation. All metallic
parts of the cabinet, including but not limited to, bolts, nuts, washers, latches and glanding plate
shall be corrosion resistant in the conditions prevailing in Abu Dhabi. The control cabinet shall be
installed directly on the levelled concrete foundation as indicated on the Standard Detail Drawing.
The cabinet opening side shall be facing the adjacent roadway or parking area and shall be parallel
to the curb line.
8.2.1 Construction
The lighting control cabinets shall consist of only one compartment and shall be heavy duty hot
moulded glass reinforced plastic with a reinforced lockable door. The compartment shall be
protected against dust and water to a minimum Ingress Protection of IP55, as per IEC 60529.
The door shall be pad lockable. Pad locks and master keys shall be supplied. In addition to
padlocks, two separate latches shall also be provided within the doors, one (within the right
panel) lockable with a key and another (within the left door panel) internally lockable by sliding a
bolt. Label indicating "PROPERTY OF *" (as per relevant Municipality Logo/Standard) and a Danger
Sign, both in English and Arabic shall be provided.
The GRP cabinet body wall thickness shall be a minimum of 4.5mm with the base thickness a
minimum of 6.0mm. The outside dimensions and internal connections shall be as indicated on
the Contract plans. The unit shall be tested at a recognized testing station to prove that the unit
withstands 46kA r.m.s. for 1 seconds. A short circuit test certificate shall be submitted with the
shop drawings. Doors with gun metal hinges, arranged to give maximum access for cabling and
maintenance, shall be provided.
The cabinet components shall include, but are not limited to, the items as follows:
a) Main and branch circuit breakers shall be of the circuit rating as follows:
i) Main Protection 1 No. 160A, 3 Pole MCCB (Adjustable between 0-7 and
1.0 times rated current) with ELP (300mA) (where additional
signage/decorative lighting will be added) OR 1 No. 100A, 3 Pole MCCB
(Adjustable between 0-7 and 1.0 times rated current) with ELP (300mA)
(where no additional signage/decorative lighting will be installed) OR 1 No.
63A, 3 Pole & Neutral MCCB ((Adjustable between 0-7 and 1.0 times rated
current) with ELP (300mA) for landscape lighting.
ii) Branch Circuits 6 No. 40A 3-Phase MCCB (Adjustable between 0.7 and
1.0 times rated current) OR maximum 24 No. Single Phase 10/16A MCB.
The MCCB shall be fitted with pressure connections for the cable terminations. The MCCBs shall
be the thermal magnetic type, adjustable up to its full rating and complying with IEC 60157 and
IEC/EN 61008/IEC/EN 62423 respectively. The short circuit rating shall be 25kA (MCCB) OR 10 kA
(MCB) for one second. The discrimination characteristics of the Branch MCCBs and Main
MCCB/ELP shall be so selected that in case of a fault on any Branch cable, only the MCCB of that
circuit shall trip. Full discrimination between the characteristics of pole fuse unit shall be ensured.
Where MCBs are to be used on outgoing circuits they will be mounted on DIN rails and will be
rated to disconnect at maximum 0.4 seconds.
b) Set of busbars of hard drawn, high conductivity, tinned copper and rigidly supported.
The phase and neutral bars shall have a rating of 200 Amperes. The busbars shall be
positioned to give maximum access and covered with PVC covering for identification
and protection against accidental contact. The size of the busbars (Cross sectional
area in Sq. mm) shall be stated in the shop drawing.
c) All droppers for branch circuits shall be busbar type of not less than 100A rating.
d) An earth bar, 40mm x 4mm shall be provided at the bottom and secured to give a
positive electrical connection.
e) A 12mm terminal shall be provided on the cabinet body and connected to the earth
bar.
f) Six No. 40A, 3-phase contactors (only required where an LCC is being replaced and
the lighting is NOT controlled through a CMS) OR 1 No. 63A, 3-phase contactor for
landscape lighting.
g) Digital astronomical time switch to control the lighting circuit contactors shall be
single pole. Astronomical time switch shall operate from a supply voltage of 230 Volts.
The Astronomical time switch shall follow the specification requirements as a
minimum (only required where an LCC is being replaced and the lighting is NOT
controlled through a CMS).:
i) Twin module single channel Astro Clock
ii) Pre-set for the longitude & latitude of Abu Dhabi, with “degrees & minutes”
to the set up in Expert mode to phase switch on of the lighting pillars.
iii) Longitude and latitude can set very precisely for the specific area of LLC.
iv) Clock to be pre-programmed from factory: Time, date,
v) longitude/latitude/minutes programme
vi) No compensation required during transit.
vii) Programme data key facility to allow a programme to be set up on a PC and
then using the data key, copy the programme to another clock
viii) Offset can be set up to a maximum of 2 hours and can be reprogrammed
easily.
ix) If necessary (video and instruction manual to be made available)
x) High temperature battery – 10-year life with power & 6-year reserve, Lithium
primary cell specially for high temperature use.
h) One No. 3-phase MCB to control time switch and seven single phase MCB's to control
contactors and door switch including one spare with ratings as indicated on the
drawing or as approved (only required where an LCC is being replaced and the lighting
is NOT controlled through a CMS) OR One No. Single Phase MCB to control time switch
and two single phase MCB's to control contactor and door switch .
i) One door switch operated, internal illumination circuit, complete with 3-5 Watt LED
lamp suitably protected against accidental damage. Circuit Protection shall be
through a single phase MCB
j) BWL Compression type brass cable glands to BS6346 for Main and Branch circuits,
with earth tags and plastic shrouds and galvanized steel plate for glanding the
armoured cables.
k) All the wiring within the cabinet shall be with 600V tropical grade PVC insulated
colour coded and suitable for the circuit ratings.
l) Two identification signs as indicated on the Drawing and as approved by The
Department. The identification signs shall meet all the applicable requirements as
specified in Section 8.4, Chapter 8, Traffic Marking & Signs, of these Standard
Specifications.
m) All the ratings specified are the normal continuous current at 50°C ambient
temperature and no further de-rating factor shall be applied. The shop drawing
submittal shall include in each case, the BS rating and the Abu Dhabi rating.
n) The Contractor shall furnish and install earthing and bonding at lighting control
cabinets in compliance with Clause 6.15.
o) The Contractor shall submit the manufacturers certified shop drawings indicating all
related components along with their details for approval by The Department.
p) The lighting control cabinet shall provide for a connection to the AADC/ADDC
Electricity meter which will be installed in a separate cabinet adjacent to the lighting
control cabinet.
q) Landscape lighting can have pre-wired panel or built in-situ components.
r) Pre-wired panel body to be constructed from 3mm powder coated steel.
8.3 Underground Lighting Control Cabinets
8.3.1 General
Underground Lighting Control Cabinets can be provided if required and/or suitable for a specific
project. All technical and material aspects shall be the same as with standard Control Cabinets,
except for the additional considerations/specification requirements as follows:
Underground Lighting Control Cabinets shall be a polycarbonate underground system as shown
on the Drawings, including an underground stainless-steel cabinet in a polycarbonate manhole,
supported by a hydraulic gas spring system.
All lighting circuits shall be controlled via the digital astronomical timer with override by the single
photocell which shall be installed on the street lighting fixture closest to the underground control
cabinet (only required where an LCC is being replaced and the lighting is NOT controlled through
a CMS). The cabinet opening side shall be facing the adjacent roadway or parking area and shall
be parallel to the kerb line.
Underground lighting control cabinets are to be approved by Owner/ADWEA and are only to be
provided from ADWEA’s list of approved manufacturers/suppliers. This Specification shall
therefore also be read in conjunction with the latest ADWEA Specifications. The Contractor is to
submit to The Department the ADWEA approval letter before any purchase.
8.3.2 Construction
a) Underground Chamber.
i) Chamber body shall be polycarbonate, complying with the typical material
requirements included within these Standard Specifications. The bottom
plate shall be polypropylene.
ii) Internal dimensions shall be 800mm x 1400mm x 890mm deep (minimum).
iii) Chamber construction shall be modular built frames.
iv) Chamber shall provide facility for cable entry from all directions through
110mm diameter knockouts.
v) Drainage of chamber shall be provided as directed by The Department.
b) Chamber Cover.
i) Cover to be ductile cast iron, GGG50 to DIN 1693, unless stated otherwise.
ii) Cover to comply with load class D400, according to EN124.
iii) Finished surface of the chamber cover shall be agreed with The Department,
to suit the installation location.
c) Control Cabinet Enclosure.
i) The enclosure shall be fabricated from stainless steel, Grade 1.4401 (AISI 316)
or Grade 1.4404 (AISI 316L).
ii) Dimensions shall be 600mm x 430mm x 1200mm high (minimum).
iii) The compartment shall be protected against dust and water to a minimum
Ingress Protection of IP55 (cabinet in raised position) and IP 58 (cabinet in
lowered position), as per IEC 60529
iv) Door shall have a 3-point locking system.
v) Fixing in the horizontal position to be with 2-hinges and a horizontal fastening
rod on both sides. Fixing in the vertical (open) position shall be with an
automatic stay-piece.
vi) Enclosure to include 2 stainless steel gas springs (optimal pressure), Grade
1.4401 (AISI 316) or Grade 1.4404 (AISI 316L).
vii) Cable entries to be provided at the front side of the cabinet under the door.
d) Control Cabinet (built-in).
i) Short-circuit withstand strength of main circuits 46kA r.m.s for 0.5 seconds.
ii) Feeding – with circuit breakers.
iii) Branches – with motorized circuit breakers.
iv) Control provision - remote control, timer switch, photocell, dimming module,
manual.
v) Reserved mounting plate for remote control 400mm x 900mm size. Opening
out mounting plate fixed in either opened (providing undisturbed operation
facility) or closed positions. Mounting plate and connection elements shall be
of non-corrosive construction.
vi) Components and ratings shall suit actual site requirements and be approved
by Owner/ADWEA and The Department.
vii) All fixing hardware and ancillary connection elements shall be corrosion-
resistant materials suitable for the Abu Dhabi environment.
8.4 Lighting Control Cabinet with CMS/PLMS
Part 1 Section A provides the requirements for CMS/PLMS for Roadway/parking lighting with Part
2-Section A providing the requirements for CMS/PLMS for Public Realm lighting. Clause 8.2.1
details items NOT to be included where CMS/PLMS will be installed.
The Contractor shall provide all required inspection and testing for lighting control cabinets in
compliance with the requirement of Clause 3.
8.4.2 Lighting Control Cabinets Supplied by The Department
The lighting control cabinets, supplied by The Department will be complete and will generally
comply with the requirements of these Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall be
responsible for and include, but not by way of limitation, the following work:
a) Loading, transporting, unloading, assembling (as required) and the complete
installation of all lighting control cabinets as indicated on the Contract plans and as
specified herein. All lighting control cabinets and appurtenances shall be obtained
from The Department’s designated store-yard.
b) The construction of all foundations for all control cabinets as indicated on the
Contract plans and as specified herein. The Contractor shall verify the size of the
lighting control cabinet, and all appurtenances with The Department, prior to
commencing construction of such foundations. The Contractor shall obtain earthing
electrodes and anchor bolts from The Department and shall set all earthing electrodes
and anchor bolts in accordance with shop drawings approved by The Department.
8.5 Foundations for Lighting Control Cabinets
8.5.1 General
Foundations for lighting control cabinets shall be as indicated on the Contract plans and as
specified herein.
The Contractor shall provide all labour, materials, tools, equipment and accessories required for
construction of the lighting control cabinet foundation, installation of the control cabinet, earth
electrode and all appurtenant work. The lighting control cabinet shall control night-time
illumination of all roadway lighting and such other equipment as indicated on the Contract plans.
8.5.2 Materials
All lighting control cabinet foundations shall be Class C30/20 concrete, as indicated on the
Contract plans and shall meet the requirements for quality and construction as specified in Part
1-Roads Standard Construction Specification, Chapter 4, Concrete Works.
The lighting control cabinets shall be mounted on the foundations by means of stainless steel
grade 316L expansion bolts of adequate size as approved by The Department.
8.5.3 Installation
The foundations shall be made by excavating and backfilling in accordance with Clause 6 and as
indicated on the Contract plans. The foundations shall be cast in place and allowed to cure for
seven (7) days before the control cabinet is erected.
The exposed portion of the foundations shall be finished smooth with a steel trowel or rubbed to
a smooth finish and the top of the foundation shall be constructed level to provide a proper
horizontal surface for erecting the lighting control cabinet so that no shims or other levelling
devices will be needed.
8.6 Electrical Cut-out for Light Poles
8.6.1 Electrical Cut-out Thermoplastic and Galvanised Steel
All lighting poles shall be provided with an electrical cut-out Unit in the pole base, fixed to the
backboard or pole fixing arrangements for terminating and interconnecting underground cables
and the flexible cable to the luminaire(s). The electrical cut-out enclosure shall be insulated
injection moulded common amorphous thermoplastic polymer or hot-dipped Galvanised Steel.
Cut-outs will be tested in accordance with BSEN 60947-1 & comply with the Low Voltage Directive
LVD/73/223/EEC & the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive EMC/336/EEC. The cut-out units
shall be for three phases (3Ø) capable of looping two or three 4 core 10mm2, 16mm2 or 25mm 2
XLPE/SWA/PVC Cu cables and have separate nickel plated brass terminal blocks for 3 x Live(s),
Neutral and Earth cables, loop in/loop out with brass fixing screws. For injection moulded thermo-
plastic cut-outs, all fixing screws for the top cover(s) shall be M4 stainless steel (grade A4) captive
type with similar grade retaining washers. For hot-dip galvanised cut-outs, screws shall be M4
hot-dip galvanised with similar grade washers. Cables will be terminated into the cut-out unit via
an integral, removable 2.5mm brass gland plate using BWL type brass compression gland and
shroud to BS 6346 or comparable International Standard and PVC Shroud suitable for the
proposed cable sizes. Brass M6 earth bolt & cable lugs (6mm internal & 16mm external) shall be
fitted on both sides of the gland plate for earth bonding.
The electrical cut-outs shall be provided with din rail mounted MCB(s) protective devices. All
MCBs will be minimum 6kA, Type B and fully compliant to BS-EN 60898 with the correct current
rating matching the requirement of the luminaire size (2A to 25A). Each luminaire or illuminated
decoration on or adjacent to a lighting pole shall be supplied from a separate MCB in the cut-out.
The cut-out will have the provision to accept up to a minimum of 4 No. single module MCBs. A
shatterproof, translucent hinged window will cover all MCBs to allow ease of determining when
an MCB has tripped. The window will be lockable to ensure that the MCBs can be locked off for
safety purposes. There will be a minimum of 2 No. (maximum 4 No.) Cable exits placed on the
sides of the cut-out for upward/outward luminaire circuit cables with angled silicon rubber
grommets or plastic compression glands to create a cable drip loop (to ensure that no water
enters the cut-out) for the flexible cable to the luminaire/decorative lighting.
The cut-out shall be provided with 4 No. brass nickel plated terminals (colour coded for three -
phase for ease of identification), with brass pinching screws to secure the loop in / loop out cables.
Supplied within the cut-out unit will be a set of internal colour coded cable links for connecting
the selected incoming phase terminal blocks to the protective device, red, yellow & blue, 4mm2 x
100mm(min) complete with wire boot lace crimps, the neutral cable shall be black 4mm 2 x
200mm(min) complete with boot lace crimps.
Extension boxes (where required) will be of the same material requirements as the main body of
the cut-out. The cut-out must be supplied with all cone grommets or plastic compression glands
for outward circuits. The other properties of the electrical cutout shall be as shown below and
shall be verified by Third Party Testing and Certificates:
a) Material: High grade flame-retardant Injection moulded amorphous thermoplastic
polymer enclosure or high grade 2mm thick hot-dip Galvanised (min. 100 microns)
steel. For hot-dipped galvanized cut-outs, all sharp edges shall be rounded prior to
galvanization.
b) Dielectric Strength: (BSEN 60947-1) Minimum 450V/mm, Nominal 500V/mm.
c) Flammability: (BSEN 60947-1) UL94, VO at 1.6mm.
d) Glow Wire rating: (IEC 60695-2-10/11) 960°C.
e) Impact Resistance: (BS7654) withstand 0.25J at ambient temperature
f) Ingress Protection Rating: Minimum IP54 (BS EN 60529),
g) Terminal Material: Brass grade CZ121 to BS 2874 with nickel/tin plating to BS 1872,
minimum 10 microns.
h) Terminal Block Screws: M6 Brass (grade CZ121 to BS2874)
i) Cable Looping: Terminal blocks to have either 1, 2 or 3 terminal bores suitable for
looping the required number of cables or adequate space within the terminal block
to securely capture the loop in/loop out cables as per the conductor sizes detailed in
Item 11.
j) Clamping Torque: 4Nm (BS 7654).
k) Conductor Sizes: 6mm up to 25mm.
l) Earth Conductor: Incorporating internal brass/stainless steel Earth terminal block.
m) The cut-out will accommodate up to 4 x single module MCB, the standard cut-out unit
will come with one MCB and the facility to add an additional 3 MCBs by removable
knock outs/blanking plates. Each luminaire/decorative adjacent light shall be supplied
from a separate MCB in the cut-out unit.
n) The cut-out Unit that holds the MCB can be a moulded thermoplastic type of any
colour or galvanized steel powder coated in any colour
o) The cut-out Unit can be a modular system and will allow for the addition of extra
extension boxes if required to cater for larger cable sizes or additional branch cables.
p) A 2.5mm thick removable brass gland plate with earth bolt and lug facility will be
provided; this plate will come with pre-punched holes for 2 x 20mm or 2 x 25mm or
2 x 32mm brass compression glands. Where required for branch circuits, the plate will
require three pre-punched holes. To accommodate this an additional extension box
can be securely fitted if required.
q) All cut-outs will be manufactured by a Quality Assured company holding Quality
Standards BS EN ISO 9001
8.6.2 Surge Protection Devices (SPD) in Cut-out or Lighting Pole Base

As per the requirements of Part 1, Section A, Clause 3.3.15, SPDs will be required to be mounted
in either the cut-out or in the pole base above the cut-out. The cut-out manufacturer must
provide the SPD as per the requirements stated in Clause 3.3.15 or provide access for cabling for
connection to the SPD.
8.7 Public Lighting Management System for Roadway/Parking LED Lighting Installations
Refer to Part-1, Sections A & D with regards to all PLMS/CMS system design, performance,
material and warranty requirements for roadway/parking lighting projects.
8.8 Public Lighting Management System for Tunnel LED Lighting Installations
Refer to Clause 10.2 and Part-1, Sections B & D with regards to all PLMS/CMS system design,
performance, material and warranty requirements for Tunnel lighting projects.
8.9 Luminaire (HID and LED) and Ornamental Lighting

Note: All lighting for new or retrofit projects is to be undertaken fully in accordance with Part
1 and Part 2 of the Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual using only QCC Conformity Scheme Certified LED
lighting fixtures and as per the Lighting Manual’s requirements, unless otherwise stated on the
Drawings, Particular Specifications or Bill of Quantities.
The Contractor shall refer to the Drawings, the Particular Specifications and the Bills of
Quantities of the Contract only where it shall indicate if High Pressure Sodium and Metal Halide
Luminaire (HID) are being either repaired/revised/maintained. Only where HID Luminaire are
applicable, the Contractor shall follow the associated requirements of the Clause 8.9 and the
Project Particular Specifications, as directed by The Department.
8.9.1 Description
Luminaires for 30.5m, 20.0m, 18.0m, 14.0m and 10.0m light poles, underpass and tunnel
luminaires, luminaires for sign lighting and ornamental luminaires shall be furnished and installed
by the Contractor as indicated on the Contract plans and as specified herein. Luminaires shall
include, but not by way of limitation, all lamps, ballasts and all related materials and
appurtenances required for the installation of light poles, underpass luminaire, sign lighting and
ornamental lighting units. These specifications shall be read in conjunction with Part 1, Section A
and B and Part 2, Section A.
8.9.2 1000W HPS Luminaire for 30.5M High Light Poles
8.9.2.1 General
The 1000W high pressure sodium luminaire for 30.5m high light poles shall be cut-off, Type V,
symmetrical distribution or Type III, asymmetrical distribution pattern per American National
Standards Institute (ANSI) or Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IES). Type V
distribution pattern shall provide a maximum candlepower of not less than 229 cd at 55-degree
vertical angle. Symmetrical distribution luminaire shall be used for bridge areas and ramp roads.
Straight sections of the roadways outside the bridge areas shall be provided with asymmetric
distribution luminaire. Final locations for the symmetrical and asymmetrical luminaire shall be as
approved by The Department.
The luminaire for 30.5m high light poles shall be mechanically strong and easy to maintain. The
luminaire, when installed, shall be of adequate design to operate at a mounting height of 30.5m
and withstand a wind speed of 160Kph with gust factor of 1.14. The Contractor shall propose
luminaires of suitable size and weight. The loading conditions imposed by the proposed
luminaires shall be compatible with the load carrying capabilities of the anchor bolts as indicated
on the Contract plans. The Contractor shall submit with shop drawings, computations of all
stresses in the pole base plate and anchor bolts, all in accordance with the accepted standard.
The ballast components, socket, reflector, mounting adjustments, and wiring terminals shall be
readily accessible for servicing. The luminaire shall be provided with a levelling surface and shall
be adjusted for ±3 degrees to the pipe arm axis and for any degree of adjustment with respect to
the arm axis. The luminaire shall have a pipe arm barrier to limit the amount of insertion. The
terminal board shall be equipped with pressure terminal connectors. The luminaire shall be
enclosed and gasketed and shall have an activated charcoal filter for breathing. Luminaire shall
be dust-proof and water-tight.
The refractor shall be made of crystal-clear, heat-resistant, impact-resistant, tempered glass or
crystal-clear and heat-resistant, borosilicate glass. The latches, nuts, screws, washers, pins and
other parts shall be made of stainless steel. The lamp sockets shall be Type "E40" heavy duty
porcelain enclosed, adjustable for varying candlepower angles and equipped with suitable means
for limiting lamp vibration. The housing and refractor holder shall be made of aluminium or
stainless steel. Other external metal parts shall be finished to match the adjacent polished
pressed borosilicate glass or chemically bonded glass reflector with sealed spun aluminium cover.
The lamp shall be installed vertically with base up for all luminaire.
8.9.2.2 Lamp
The lamp shall comply with the specifications and requirements in Table 8.9.2.2.1:
Table 8.9.2.2.1- 1000W Lamp Specification
Power into Lamp – (watts) 1000
Total Luminous Flux – (lumens) 140,000
Average Life to Burn Out – (hours) 24,000
Minimum Maintain Luminous Flux @ Half Life – (%) 90%
The Contractor shall submit spectral distribution information for The Department's approval.
Before placing a final order, the Contractor shall submit as samples, three lighting units
(luminaire, ballasts, and lamps) for quality evaluation.
8.9.2.3 Ballast
The ballast shall be designed to operate the HPS lamp at the power rating shown and it shall be
able to start the lamp and control it continuously for ambient temperatures ranges and meet the
specifications shown in Table 8.9.2.3. The ballast shall operate the lamp without affecting the
lamp life and performance. Line starting amperes shall not be more than the line operating
amperes.
Table 8.9.2.3. – 1000W Ballast Specification
Supply Voltage 230V AC @ 50Hz ±10%
Minimum Permissible Voltage Dip When Lamp Is

25%
New
Overall Minimum Power Factor 0.9%
Ballast Regulation For Input Voltage Fluctuations of Lamp Volt-Watt Trapezoid per ANSI
±10% From Nominal Voltage Standards
Dielectric Test 2,500V
Min. Pulse Peak Voltage 3,000V
Max. Pulse Peak Voltage 5,000V
Operating Temperature Rate 0°C – 55°C
8.9.3 1000W HPS for 20.0m, 18.0m and 14.0m High Poles and 400W HPS and MH and
250W HPS and MH Luminaire for 10.0m High Poles
8.9.3.1 General
The luminaire shall provide efficient even illumination; the optical system shall be sealed against
the entry of moisture, dirt and insects, mechanically strong and easy to maintain. The reflector,
mounting adjustments, wiring terminal board and ballast components shall be readily accessible.
All luminaire shall be of the same appearance and manufacture. Glare from 20.0m, 18.0m, 14.0m
and 10.0m lighting shall be controlled by using luminaire with sharp cut-off characteristics.
The luminaire housing shall be of the totally enclosed type with extruded aluminium mast arms
having an integral handhole and cover and cast aluminium fitting for the pole top bracket.
Luminaire shall be rain-tight, dust-tight and corrosion resistant; shall have lens frames made of
anodized, extruded aluminium with mitred corners. Ballasts for each lamp shall be unitized with
a plug disconnect. Each luminaire shall provide the light distribution as required at each luminaire
location shown on the Contract plans.
8.9.3.2 Construction Details
The housing sides shall be made of on- piece, multi-formed aluminium or extruded aluminium
panels. Multi-formed aluminium assemblies shall have an integral reinforcing spine and a single
concealed joint. The housing top shall be sheet aluminium, interlocking with the side panels and
silicone sealed. Pressure injected silicone shall be used throughout to provide a continuous
weatherproof seal. The pole top fitting shall have four stainless steel set screws. Each housing,
mast arm and pole top fitting shall receive integral colour, Aluminium Association Architectural
Class I anodizing (natural). Each lamp section shall accommodate one high-intensity discharge
lamp and shall include a hinged reflector assembly with lamp holder, ballast unit and one piece,
clear tempered glass, silicone sealed in a hinged frame made of natural anodized extruded
aluminium sections having metered corners. Lamp holders shall be porcelain with a vibration-
proof lamp grip shell. The frame hinging and latching mechanisms (except for release buttons)
shall be completely concealed. Hinge pins and latches shall be stainless steel. Frame to housing
gasket shall be high compliance, hollow section, memory retentive extruded silicone rubber
secured to the frame with silicone adhesive. The hinged reflector and glassware assemblies shall
be safely retained in the closed and open positions but shall be readily removable for cleaning
without the use of tools.
Specular reflectors shall be fabricated of homogeneous sheet aluminium. The reflective surface
shall be electrochemically brightened, anodized and sealed.
Alternative construction details may be considered if proven equal or superior. However, the
burden of proof lies entirely with the Contractor and the judgment of The Department regarding
acceptability shall be final.
8.9.3.3 Lamp and Ballast Requirements
a) The 1000W HPS lamps and ballasts shall meet the requirements of Clause 8.9.2.
b) The 1000W MH lamp shall comply with the following requirements in Table 8.9.3.3.1:
Table 8.9.3.3.1- MH Lamp Specification
The Contractor shall submit spectral distribution information, for The Department’s approval.
The 1000W MH ballast shall be designed to operate the specified lamp of the power rating
indicated in this Section and shall be able to start the lamp and control it continuously for ambient
temperatures ranges and meet the specification in Table 8.9.3.3.2. The ballast shall operate the
lamp without affecting the lamp life and performance. Line starting amperes shall not be more
than the line operating amperes.
Table 8.9.3.3.2. – 1000W MH Ballast Specification

Minimum Permissible Voltage Dip When Lamp

25%
Is New
Ballast Regulation For Input Voltage Fluctuations of ±10% From Lamp Volt-Watt Trapezoid
Nominal Voltage per ANSI Standards
As per manufacturer
Min. Pulse Peak Voltage
details
As per manufacturer
Max. Pulse Peak Voltage
details
a) The 400W HPS lamp shall comply with the following requirements in Table 8.9.3.3.3.
Table 8.9.3.3.3- 400W HPS Lamp Specification
b) The 400W HPS ballast shall be designed to operate the specified lamp of the power
rating indicated in this Section and shall be able to start the lamp and control it
continuously for ambient temperatures ranges and meet the specification in Table
8.9.3.3.4. The ballast shall operate the lamp without affecting the lamp life and
performance. Line starting amperes shall not be more than the line operating
amperes.
Table 8.9.3.3.4- 400W HPS Ballast Specification

Minimum Permissible Voltage Dip When Lamp Is New 25%
Ballast Regulation for Input Voltage Fluctuations of ±10% From Lamp Volt-Watt Trapezoid
Min. Pulse Peak Voltage As per manufacturer details
Max. Pulse Peak Voltage As per manufacturer details
c) The 400W MH lamp shall comply with the following requirements in Table 8.9.3.3.5.
Table 8.9.3.3.5- 400W MH Lamp Specification
The Contractor shall submit spectral distribution information, for The Department's approval.
d) The 400W MH ballast shall be designed to operate the specified lamp of the power
amperes.
Table 8.9.3.3.6 - 400W MH Ballast Specification
Ballast Regulation for Input Voltage Fluctuations of ±10%

±10%
From Nominal Voltage

e) The 250W HPS lamp shall comply with the following requirements in Table 8.9.3.3.7.
Minimum Maintain Luminous Flux @ Half Life –

90%
(%)
The Contractor shall submit spectral distribution information for The Department’s approval.
f) The 250W HPS ballast shall be designed to operate the specified lamp of the power
amperes.
Table 8.9.3.3.8. – 250W HPS Ballast Specification
Ballast Regulation For Input Voltage Fluctuations of ±5% From Lamp Volt-Watt Trapezoid
g) The 250W MH lamp shall comply with the following requirements in Table 8.9.3.3.9.
The Contractor shall submit spectral distribution information for The Department’s approval.
h) The 250W MH ballast shall be designed to operate the specified lamp of the power
amperes.
Table 8.9.3.3.10.- 250W MH Ballast Specification
Ballast Regulation for Input Voltage Fluctuations of ±10%

±10%
From Nominal Voltage
8.9.3.4 LED Luminaire for Roadway and Parking Area
Refer to Part-1, Section-A for all roadway and parking lighting design requirements and all LED
fixture technical criteria.
All LED Luminaire for Roadway and Parking Area use must hold a QCC Certificate of Conformity
for Exterior LED Luminaires and as per the Lighting Manual’s specific additional Department
requirements contained therein.
8.9.3.5 LED Luminaire for Tunnel and Underpass Areas
Refer to Part-1, Section-B for all tunnel and underpass lighting design requirements and all LED
fixture technical criteria.
All LED Luminaire for Tunnel and Underpass area use must hold a QCC Certificate of Conformity
for Exterior LED Luminaires and as per the Lighting Manual’s specific additional Department
requirements contained therein.
8.9.3.6 150W MH Overhead Sign Luminaire Materials
The MH overhead sign luminaire for mounting on illuminated overhead signs shall be complete
with lamps, fuses and built-in ballasts. Overhead sign supports shall be as specified in Part 1-
Roads, Standard Specification for Construction, Chapter 8, Section 8.4, Traffic Markings & Signs.
The overhead sign luminaire shall be MH, rated 150W and shall include, the housing, cover,
reflector, refractor, socket, lamp, ballast, wiring, latches, screws, pins and other parts composing
a complete unit. The work shall include, but not by way of limitation, conduit, wiring, fittings,
couplings, elbows, clamps, clips or straps and fasteners, all as required, and extending the wiring
from the handhole at the base of the sign support structure; the conduit elbow in the foundation;
of these Standard Specifications, and all other appurtenances necessary to complete the work as
directed by The Department.
The luminaire shall provide efficient even illumination, be optically sealed, mechanically strong
and easy to maintain. A minimum average maintained vertical illuminance of 300lux shall be
provided for overhead signs.
The reflector mounting, wiring terminals, and ballast components shall be readily accessible.
When closed for operation, the optical assembly shall be sealed against the entry of moisture,
dirt, and insects. The refractor shall be held in such a manner as to allow for expansion and
contraction of the refractor.
The optical system shall consist of a hydroformed aluminium primary beam reflector which shall
be precisely profiled and contoured to distribute light across the inner surface of the refractor.
The prismatic refractor shall be of moulded borosilicate thermal shock-resistant glass. The inner
surface shall have an intricate array of prisms to direct light across the face of the sign. The outer
surface shall be smooth to facilitate self-cleaning. The reflector shall be of the retro-dispersing
type designed to eliminate the halo of excessive luminance to assure more uniform sign
luminance.
The slipfitter shall provide a horizontal adjustment range of 10 degrees to permit compensation
for mounting misalignment. The slipfitter shall be designed for use with 2.5cm diameter conduit.
The terminal board shall be located beneath the reflector at the conduit entry and shall
accommodate the electric cable.
The reflector shall be fastened to the housing by means of four stainless steel screws with keyhole
slots to facilitate easy removal and replacement. Levelling pads are to be provided on the inside
and bottom of the main housing to permit accurate installation.
There shall be mounting bases at the bottom of the cast housing to permit mounting the
luminaire directly to the supporting structure.
The refractor shall be form-fitted to the anodized door frame and shall have a single piece gasket
with a sealing pad to effectively seal the assembly and housing. The assembly shall be fastened
to the housing by means of separable hinges at the front and spring tempered, stainless steel at
the rear. The lamp socket shall be provided with grips or other suitable means to hold the lamp
against vibration.
The 250W MH lamp shall comply with the following requirements in Table 8.9.3.6.1:
The ballast shall be designed to operate the metal halide lamp of the power rating indicated in
these Standard Specifications and shall be able to start the lamp and control it continuously for
ambient temperatures max. +55°C. The ballast shall be constant wattage auto transformers. The
ballast shall have a multi-tap terminal capable of accepting supply voltages of 200V and 230V AC,
50Hz. The ballast shall operate the lamp without affecting the lamp life and performance. Line
starting amperes shall not be more than the line operating amperes.
Table 8.9.3.6.2 specifications shall be met by the ballast.
Table 8.9.3.6.2 - 150W MH Ballast Specification
Permissible voltage dip (without causing the Min. 40% (when lamp is new)
lamp to extinguish)
Overall power factor Min. 0.9 (under rated load)
Dielectric test between core and windings. Max. 2,500V
Input voltage fluctuations of ±10% Regulate the lamp watts to ±5%.
The rate included in the Bills of Quantities for sign lighting shall include all luminaire, conduit,
except conduit in the foundation, and wire from the handhole to the safety switch; furnishing and
installing the safety switch, conduit and wire from the safety switch to the luminaire, and all other
associated work, complete, for lighting the signs on the overhead sign structure as indicated on
the Drawings and as specified herein and as approved by The Department.
8.9.3.7 LED Under Bridge Luminaire Materials

Refer to Part-1, Section-B for all under-bridge lighting design requirements and all LED fixture
technical criteria.
All LED Luminaire for Under Bridge area use must hold a QCC Certificate of Conformity for Exterior
LED Luminaires and as per the Lighting Manual’s specific additional Department requirements
contained therein.
8.9.3.8 Under bridge Luminaire Materials
8.9.3.8.1 General
Recessed or surface mounted luminaire shall be complete with lamps, fuses and built-in ballasts
as indicated in the Drawings. The luminaire shall include hardware and materials required for
mounting or recessing the unit on the bridge structure, bridge abutments and piers as indicated
on the Drawings so that the unit is level and secure in service and completely prepared for
operation. An underpass luminaire shall consist of housing, cover, reflector, refractor, socket,
lamp, ballast, wiring and such latches, screws, washers, pins, and other parts composing a
complete unit. The luminaire shall provide efficient even illumination, be optically sealed,
mechanically strong and easy to maintain. The reflector, mounting, wiring terminals, and ballast
components shall be readily accessible for servicing. When closed for operation, the optical
assembly shall be sealed against the entry of moisture, dirt, and insects. The refractor shall be
held in such a manner as to allow for expansion and contraction of the refractor.
8.9.3.8.2 Surface Mounted Luminaire
The housing and refractor holder shall be made of aluminium or aluminium alloy. The external
metal parts shall be finished to resemble polished aluminium. The reflector shall be made of
aluminium sheet of such grade and quality that:
a) The reflecting surface shall have a specular finish.
b) The reflecting surface shall have a dense protective coating of oxide, not less than 1.2
mg/m2, applied by the anodic oxidation process.
The refractor shall be of such material and construction as to provide low brightness and minimize
glare in the direction of oncoming traffic. The latches, nuts, screws, washers, pins and other parts
shall be made of non-corrosive metals or of metals with non-corrosive finishes as approved by
The Department.
The seal of the optical system shall be accomplished with a gasket material which will not
deteriorate with age. This gasketing shall be continuous and shall assure a weatherproof seal. A
knockout for 3.8cm conduit shall be provided at the upper portion of the housing. The conduit
shall be secured to the luminaire housing with a sealing bushing capable of providing a watertight,
dustproof connection. The lamp socket shall be provided with grips or other suitable means to
hold the lamp against vibration.
8.9.3.8.3 Recessed Under Bridge Luminaire Construction
Each recess type luminaire housing shall be designed to be cast in place in the concrete and shall
have an integral cast aluminium junction box. The housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge
aluminium. The exterior surfaces of the luminaire housing and junction box in contact with
concrete shall receive two heavy shop coats of zinc-chromate primer paint complying with U.S.
Federal Specification TT-P-645.
The door frame shall be of cast aluminium, with quarter-turn latching screws. The overlap door
frame (including the enamel finish) with sealed flat tempered glass lens assembly shall be suitable
for areas where high temperature water or steam spray wash-down is required. The entire
luminaire shall be fully gasketed and completely sealed for weather-tight, insect-tight operation.
The exposed surfaces of each frame and cover shall be coated with a high temperature, dark
brown or bronze coloured synthetic baked enamel.
8.9.3.8.4 Luminaire Optical System
The luminaire shall contain a “position oriented” socket to permit the use of high output lamps.
The lamp shall be uncoated and shall be of the horizontal burning type. The luminaire shall
contain an adjustable, sharp cut-off, reflector optical assembly consisting of hydroformed,
specular main reflector with both parabolic and cylindrical reflecting surfaces, auxiliary reflecting
elements and a support frame. The assembly shall be arranged in such a manner that the optical
elements may be rotated, to permit adjustment of the cut-off over a range from 70 degrees
through 86 degrees above nadir. Direct reading scales calibrated in degrees shall be provided to
indicate the cut-off angle setting. The optical system shall be preset at 85 degrees.
a) The lamp shall comply with Table 8.9.3.8.1 requirements.
The ballast shall be designed to operate the specified lamp of the power rating indicated in this
Section and shall be able to start the lamp and control it continuously for ambient temperatures
max. +55°C. It shall be suitable for 50Hz, 230V AC operation. It shall operate the lamp without
affecting adversely the lamp life and performance as specified herein.
b) The ballast shall be high power factor for starting. The following specifications shall
be met by the ballast:
Table 8.9.3.6.2 - 150W HPS Ballast Specification
Permissible voltage dip (without causing the Min. 25% (when lamp is new)
lamp to extinguish)
Overall power factor Min. 0.9 (under rated load)
Dielectric test between core and windings. Max. 2,500V
Input voltage fluctuations of ±5% Regulate the lamp watts within lamp Volt-
Watt trapezoid per ANSI Standard
The cost of junction boxes, extension rings, conduit clamps and junction box fittings will not be
paid for separately but shall be considered as subsidiary to the rate as included in the Bills of
Quantities for under bridge luminaire.
8.9.3.9 Basis of Luminaire Acceptance
8.9.3.9.1 General
For LED, all requirements are as per Part 1, Section A.
HID luminaire shall be tested for compliance with the specifications in accordance with Clause 3.
The illuminance levels are the maintained-in-service values after Maintenance Factors. The
Luminaire Dirt Depreciation factor (LDD) for the purpose of calculating illuminance values shall
be as per Part 1 Section A, Clause 4.3.
Prior to the construction of any works required for the lighting system the Contractor shall submit
complete shop drawings for the proposed luminaire. The Contractor's submittal shall include
spectral computations for all luminaire types, spacings, locations, and combinations shown in the
Contract plans for all lighted areas to prove that the proposed luminaire meet the required design
standards as specified in these Standard Specifications. In addition to the illuminance calculations
based on IES Standards, the Contractor’s spectral computations shall include luminance
calculations for average luminance, longitudinal uniformity and overall uniformity based on CIE
standards. The Contractor’s submittal shall include the photometric information on a Digital
Storage Device and software for enabling The Department to verify the performance of the
proposed luminaire.
8.9.3.9.2 Required Submittals
The Contractor shall submit the following design calculations and data for The Department's
approval for the following additional items:
a) For roadways: Roadway lighting calculation results showing compliance with
luminaire acceptance criteria for HID luminaires:
For LED, refer the reporting requirements in Part-1, Section-A.
b) For tunnels and underpasses: For HID detailed lighting calculations using required
lighting design software including:
i) Luminance level on road surfaces
ii) Luminance level on the sidewall
iii) Uniformity ratio on road and on wall
iv) Grid locations
v) Illuminance level on road and wall
For LED, refer the reporting requirements in Part-1, Section-B.
c) For LED luminaire:
Refer to the requirements of Part 1 & Part 2 for all LED fixture data and justification submission
requirements for the relevant Section’s Clauses criteria before preparing the submission.
In addition to general submittal requirements, the following shall be submitted, as applicable to
each type of LED luminaire in accordance with the Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual.
d) Product cut sheets indicating the following:
i) Complete catalogue information and complete and clear unique catalog
number for product submitted
ii) Explanation of all components of the catalog number
iii) QCC Exterior LED Luminaire Certificate of Conformity covering the luminaire
catalogue number(s)
iv) Stated Nominal Correlated Colour Temperature (CCT)
v) Complete specifications, including make and model number, for:
vi) LED light source(s) to show matches that used for QCC certification
vii) LED driver(s) to show matches that used for QCC certification
viii) Any Integral PLMS control components
ix) Fixture Maintenance factor (MF), where MF = LLD x LDD (as per Lighting
Manual relevant Section required MF derivation)
x) Written Full Fixture Warranty (as per Lighting Manual relevant Section’s
Clause 3.4 Warranty minimum requirements)
8.9.3.9.3 Spares
The Items for spare luminaire shall be as specified herein, in the Particular Specifications, Contract
Documents, and as approved by The Department.
All spare luminaire items shall comply with all applicable Sections of this Section. All spare units
shall be suitable boxed or crated and placed in storage where designated by The Department. All
spare units shall be identical to and by the same manufacturer as units approved by The
Department.
The Contractor shall provide all labour, tools, equipment and appurtenances to carefully load,
transport, unload and place all spares in storage. No materials, boxes or crates shall be stored
directly on the ground or similar horizontal surface. The Contractor shall provide all blocking of
wood, concrete or other material as approved by The Department under all materials, boxes or
crates. All materials, crates or boxes shall be suitably identified by Contract.
LUMINAIRE
SCHEDULE "A"/"B"/"C"
1000W/400W/250W LUMINAIRE
The following drawings/catalogues shall be submitted with the shop drawings written in English
only.
a) Scale drawing of specified roadway lighting unit cut-off luminaire showing construction details
and materials used.
b) Spectral distribution curves (polar curves) for the specified roadway lighting unit with cut-off
luminaire.
c) ISO-Candela diagrams of the roadway lighting unit with cut-off luminaire.
d) ISO-lux curves for the specified roadway lighting unit covering the roadway.
e) ISO-luminance diagrams of the specified lighting unit with cut-off luminaire.
f) Coefficient of Utilization of the specified lighting unit with cut-off luminaire.
g) Catalogues and other technical literature.
LUMINAIRE
SCHEDULE "D"
LED UNDER BRIDGE LUMINAIRE
The following drawings/catalogues shall be submitted with the shop drawings written in English
only.
a) Complete catalogue information and complete and clear unique catalogue number
for product submitted
b) Explanation of all components of the catalogue number
c) QCC Exterior LED Luminaire Certificate of Conformity covering the luminaire
catalogue number(s)
d) Stated Nominal Correlated Colour Temperature (CCT)
e) Complete specifications, including make and model number, for:
f) LED light source(s) to show matches that used for QCC certification
g) LED driver(s) to show matches that used for QCC certification
h) Any Integral PLMS control components
i) Fixture Maintenance factor (MF), where MF = LLD x LDD (as per Lighting Manual
relevant Section required MF derivation)
j) Written Full Fixture Warranty (as per Lighting Manual relevant Section’s Clauses for
Warranty minimum requirements)
Signed: Signed:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
9 Electrical Appurtenances
9.1 Description
Electrical appurtenances shall be as indicated on the Contract plans and as specified herein.
9.2 Cable Tray, Cable Trunking, Cavity Floor Trunking and Junction Box for Tunnel Lighting
9.2.1 General
The Contractor shall supply and install cable tray, cable trunking and junction box for tunnel
lighting as indicated on the Contract plans, as specified hereinafter, as required by The
Department
9.2.2 Cable Tray
Cable trays shall be constructed of grade 316L stainless steel. Thickness of the steel shall be a
minimum of 1.5mm for 50-200mm wide cable trays and 2mm for 300-600mm wide cable trays.
All trays supporting power cables shall be heavy duty.
Cable trays, bends, and junctions shall be provided as necessary and shall be of similar type and
finish. Proprietary accessories with bends and tee-pieces of the radius type shall be used. Do not
install site formed accessories without The Department’s approval. The tray shall be mechanically
and electrically continuous. The tray shall be installed in true vertical and horizontal alignment.
Bond all tray systems to the main earthing system. The trays shall be of adequate widths to
support the necessary cables and shall meet the BS EN 61537 regulations. Calculation of the space
occupied shall be submitted and the tray shall be sized accordingly with 20 percent spare space.
Trays shall be adequately supported throughout their length at intervals of minimum 1200 mm.
All cables shall be fixed to the cable tray with cable ties suitable for the environmental conditions
in Abu Dhabi. Ventilated covers shall be provided for all cable trays exposed to direct sunlight.
9.2.3 Cable Trunking
Cable trunking shall be of Grade 316L stainless steel. The access plate of the trunking shall be
removable and be of suitable sections over the entire length of straight runs. Overlapping collar
sections or other similar approved linking arrangement shall be provided at the junction of the
various sections of the trunking. All fixings shall be so arranged that there are no projecting screw
threads or similar points within the trunking that may cause damage to the cables. The cross-
sectional area of the trunking shall be uniform. Positive-continuity links shall be supplied and fixed
at all trunking-section interconnection points. The whole of the requirements for conditions
elsewhere in this specification shall, wherever appropriate, be deemed to apply to stainless steel
trunking.
The Contractor shall ensure that the completed trunking installation is clean and dry internally
before installing cables and that any damage to the finish has been properly rectified. Dress all
holes cut in trunking, apart from conduit connections, fit with a protective beading. Fit pin racks
at intervals of 1200mm in vertical runs exceeding 1800mm, and not more than 300mm from a
junction, and retaining straps at intervals of 1000mm in horizontal runs where the lid is on the
side or the underside.
Drawings showing all manufacturing details of the trunking shall be submitted to The Department
for approval. Draw wire shall be left in all service trunkings for ease of installation. A calculation
for the space factor shall be submitted and the cable trunk should be sized accordingly as per IET
wiring regulations and in line with the DOE Electricity Wiring Regulations. Cable trunking, ducting
and fittings shall comply with BS 4678. All; materials, supports and accessories shall be of the
same manufacturer.
9.2.4 Junction Box for Tunnel Lighting
The junction boxes used for terminating the tunnel lighting circuits shall be rated IP-66 and IK10
protection ingress with IP-66 rated plug and socket type. The connector terminals used inside the
junction box shall be spring loaded type, resistance to vibration, thermal cycling and shocks, with
an additional protection through circuit breaker on ceramic base. The junction box shall be in cast
aluminium material. The plug and sockets shall be minimum IP-66 and in GRP casing. The contact
technology for the sockets shall be with silver nickel tips and it shall be reliable for tunnel
atmosphere as corrosion proof, stands overload and electrical contact pressure quality never
affects despite ageing.
9.2.5 Cavity Floor Trunking
Cavity floor trunking shall be constructed of pre-galvanized sheet steel to BS EN 10346 & BS EN
10143. The thickness of the lid steel shall be a minimum of 2.5mm. Appropriate bends (90° flat
bend, 90° riser bend) and junctions shall be provided and shall be similar type and finish. Site
formed accessories shall not be used. The trunking shall be electrically and mechanically
continuous. Bond all trunkings to the main earthing system. The size of the trunking shall be as
indicated on the Contract plans and as approved by The Department.
9.3 Isolator Switches
The Contractor shall supply, install, connect, test, and commission the isolator switches as
indicated on the Contract plans, as specified herein, and as directed by The Department. Isolator
switches shall be of single or three-phase suitable for 230/400 Volt 50Hz and shall be surface
mounted. The degree of protection for the isolator switches shall be IP65. The housing for the
isolators shall be of cast aluminium or corrosion-resistant metal alloy.
The moulded parts shall be produced from strong arc-resistant material. The contact surface shall
be heavily silver plated for maximum service reliability. Isolators shall be tested to BS EN 60947-
3 and IEC 60947-3. The utilization categories shall be suitable for switching of motor loads or
other loads as indicated on the Contract plans.
9.4 Local Devices
The Contractor shall supply, install, connect, test, and commission all local devices including, but
not limited to, switches, switched socket outlets, and flexible outlets as indicated on the Contract
plans, as specified herein, and as directed by The Department.
9.4.1 Flexible Outlets
Flexible outlets shall be of the flush-mounted type and shall meet the requirements BS 5737, or
as approved. These shall be the switched and unswitched type and be provided with a fuse of
suitable rating and neon indicator to BS EN 60669-1.
10 Tunnel/Under Pass Lighting System
Refer to Clause 10.2 and Part-1, Sections-B & D with regards to all PLMS/CMS system design,
performance and material and warranty requirements for new/retrofit LED Tunnel/Underpass
lighting projects.
All lighting for new or retrofit projects are to be undertaken fully in accordance with the Part-
1, Section-B using only QCC Conformity Scheme Certified LED lighting fixtures and as per the
Lighting Manual’s requirements, unless otherwise stated on the Drawings, Particular
Specifications or Bill of Quantities.
The Contractor shall refer to the Drawings, the Particular Specifications and the Bills of
Quantities of the Contract only where it shall indicate if High Pressure Sodium fixtures are being
either repaired/replaced/maintained. Only where HID Luminaires and their associated tunnel
infrastructure are applicable for these reasons, the Contractor shall follow the associated
requirements of these Section 10.11.6 clauses in this Specification and the Project Particular
Specifications, as directed by The Department.
10.1 General
This Section contains the requirement for the design, manufacture, supply, factory acceptance
testing, packing, insurance, delivery to site, unloading, storage, protection, erection and
installation, wiring and cabling, site testing and commissioning, Providing training and supply of
spare parts for 3 years for the complete equipment for lighting of tunnel, including various
illuminated signs.
All electrical equipment, including ACBs, MCCBs, ELCBs, cabling wiring, Junction Boxes, Terminals,
Lighting Panels, etc. provided as a part of Lighting system shall meet the requirements of Section
I.
Any PLCs, Communication interfaces and workstations supplied as a part of the lighting system
shall meet the requirements as specified herein.
10.1.1 Operational Objectives
The design of the system to Part 1, Section B shall meet the operational objectives specified
herein and each component part of the system and the system shall be in every respect fit for
purpose.
The system shall be designed so that when in operation, it will, in every respect, meet with all
ordinance and laws and with all rules and regulations of The Department’s requirements and with
those of all statutory authorities and utility companies and with reasonable engineering
judgement.
The system shall have a minimum design life of 20 years.
The system shall provide safe service for users and the public that accords with the highest
prevailing standards for a public transport facility of this type. The design, execution and
maintenance of the works shall be such that this objective will be readily and consistently
achieved during all conditions of operation and use, subject only to normal requirements of
inspection and servicing.
The system shall achieve high standards of reliability in operation and use, with minimum regular
simple servicing and with major servicing as per required periodic intervals.
The design of the system shall be such that it fully considers the methods of manufacture and
construction to achieve the required high standard referred to above. Tests, checks and
inspection shall be applied by way of quality control throughout the stages of manufacture and
construction of the Works.
The arrangements and provisions for servicing and routine replacement of parts shall be such that
such work can be undertaken quickly and easily. To facilitate repairs and overhauls, components
shall be interchangeable between similar plant and complete replacement of faulty units shall be
easily achievable.
Throughout this Specification, and as shown on the Contract plans, the ratings of various major
equipment items are indicated. These ratings, however, are provisional and are subject to
verification and adjustment in the light of the final design of the actual ratings necessary to meet
the operating requirements of all The Department systems intended for the Project. These
specified ratings shall be taken as the minimum or nominal ratings based on calculations and may
be increased by the Contractor, at their cost, to conform to standard ratings included in various
international standards or to manufacturing standard programs. These rating shall not be
reduced in any way unless otherwise approved.
10.1.2 Scope of Work
The scope of Work shall comprise the following:
a) Connect the tunnel light circuit cables to the sub-station’s low voltage panel (Main
Distribution Board) through the Power Controllers/Power Regulators.
b) Supplying of Power Regulators or Power Controllers and positioning as shown on the
Contract plans.
c) Supply and Installation of Lighting Equipment comprising:
i) 400V Power Controllers/Power Regulator, including PLCs, Industrial PCs as
operator interfaces, etc.
ii) Lighting fixtures and associated brackets, supports, conduits, trunking, wire-
ways, trays and cabling/wiring for Tunnel lighting.
iii) All required sizes lighting cables as per Contract Drawings.
iv) Earthing of all electrical equipment including supply of earthing materials.
v) All jointing and termination, lugs, fuses, lamps, keys, locks, labels and all
necessary material to complete the installation.
vi) All necessary civil works.
vii) All Junction boxes for loop-in, loop-out connections for groups of lights. All
communication interfaces to achieve control of lighting from SCADA
workstation or operator workstations (associated with tunnel lighting control
system) including fiber optic cabling.
viii) VDU, Operator workstations (associated with tunnel lighting control system)
interfaces as shown on Contract plans.
d) All labour, plant and materials for the complete erection, adjustment, testing,
painting and commissioning all equipment supplied.
e) Supply and installation of any material which may not be expressly specified but which
is necessary for the completion of the project.
f) Reinstatement of the existing conditions of the services and properties that will be
affected during the construction.
g) Supply of spare parts as recommended by Manufacturer for trouble-free operation
for 3 years.
h) The Lighting system supplier shall have a minimum of 5 years of documented
experience in providing Lighting systems on a single system responsibility basis, of
which at least 3 years shall be for Road Tunnel projects. All equipment and systems
offered shall be suitable for Road Tunnel Lighting system and shall have proven record
of suitability on similar projects.
10.1.3 Description of Lighting System
a) The tunnel lighting shall be designed for a traffic speed as indicated in the roadway
Contract plans.
b) The tunnel lighting at and near the approach shall be used to maintain a sufficiently
high lighting level inside the tunnel.
c) This shall enable the driver approaching the tunnel to see into the tunnel to avoid the
"black hole effect".
d) Luminaires shall be selected and positioned to provide a continuity of lighting through
traffic routes and lanes.
e) The lighting design and control shall ensure that energy will be conserved and running
costs optimized.
10.1.4 Design Criteria of Lighting System
a) The design of the tunnel lighting generally follows the existing regime; based on the
recommendations of Part 1, Section B and/or the latest version of the BS 5489
Recommendations.
b) The designer shall take into consideration effect of flicker created upon luminaire
spacing and same shall be in line with CIE and IESNA Standards recommendations.
10.1.5 Power Regulators/Power Controllers
Power regulators/power controllers shall meet relevant BS, EN and CE standards. One of the
objective’s shall be remote control and monitoring of these Power Controllers (PC) to evaluate
cost saving in the lighting loads connected inside the tunnel.
The general requirements of the Power Controllers shall be as follows:
a) Stabilize voltage source.
b) Dim lighting loads in predefined steps.
c) Monitor and control all operational parameters of the tunnel lighting.
d) Manual/Automatic bypass.
e) Astronomical time settings.
f) Save data and transmit to main workstation.
g) Stand-alone Power Controller with modem connectivity.
h) Clock synchronization with workstation.
i) Mimic displays of the controllers on workstation.
j) General reports and alarms listings.
k) Voltage, current, power, COS ø of each circuit to be recorded.
l) Capability of the following to be ensured within the supplied PCs for future use.
i) Client/Server work environment.
ii) Ethernet communication via optical fibers.
iii) Plant management by active maps.
iv) Remote diagnosis and maintenance scheduler.
10.1.6 Tunnel Luminaires – General

NOTE: The standards indicated below are applicable to HID fixtures only:
a) Luminaires shall contain HID lamps that shall operate on 230 Volts, 50Hz, AC
b) The Tunnel lighting luminaires shall follow the provisions of the latest versions of the
following standards:
i) BS 4533
ii) BS 4533 Part 2 Section 2.7
iii) BS 4533 : Section 102.3
iv) BS 1615
v) BS 1470
vi) BS EN 60922 and BS EN 60923
vii) BS 6500
viii) IEC 60598 Part 1 and 2
ix) BS 4533: Part 103: Section 103.1
x) BS 5489
xi) BS 5225: Part 1
xii) BS 5101 (Part 1) and (Part 2)
xiii) BS EN 60529
xiv) BS 6193
xv) BS 3772
10.1.7 Tunnel Luminaires – Construction
a) The luminaires shall be suitable for 230 Volts, 50Hz, AC supply to operate HID lamps
of 400W, 250W, 150W and 100W with cap base E40 size complete with the following
assembly.
b) Aluminium (Magnesium-silicon alloy) extruded or Die-cast Aluminium body in one
piece with an anodized finish and side covers in die cast aluminium alloy as per BS
4533 Section 102.3
c) Super purity one-piece aluminium reflector of grade S1 of BS 1470 with an anodic
coating of not less than grade AA10 of BS 1615
d) Strong, very high thermally resistant, hinged, front glass protector assembly
comprising clean toughened, heat tempered glass plate, fixed into aluminium frame
with rapid closing devices, to achieve minimum IP65 for enclosure. In the open
position, the glass remains suspended from the luminaire.
e) Front flat glass assembly is to be seated on to neoprene non-rotting type gaskets/or
high quality felt gaskets silicon. The glass shall be capable of rotating 180 degrees.
f) Hinges, mounting clips and fastening bolts shall be of stainless steel grade 316L.
g) Movable porcelain lamp holder with position markings and anti-vibration fixation
device.
h) Optical system, electrical control gear and lamp, mounted on "Plug-in" type reflector
gear tray with locating pins to ensure correct alignment when being fitted into body.
(As per BS EN 60922 and BS EN 60923).
i) The luminaire shall be provided with anti-glare grill and clear flat glass.
j) Two adjustable cable entries for loop in and out and a terminal block for the
connection of incoming and outgoing supply cables shall be provided in luminaires
incorporating auxiliaries and shall be situated as close as possible to the point of entry
of the supply cable and shall be readily accessible. Earth cable connection is to be
taken through the plug and socket connector to ensure that earth potential is
maintained on the gear tray when it is being removed from the luminaire for
maintenance.
k) All electrical supply cables shall be clamped in the luminaire where necessary to
relieve the termination of strain. The cable clamp arrangement shall not damage the
insulation of the cable.
l) Protective sheath for power supply cable, and expandable nylon cable grip for wiring,
conforming to BS 4533 Section 102.3.
m) Brass earth terminal set-in housing, according to BS 4533 Section 102.3.
n) The lamp caps and the lamp holders shall meet the requirements of BS 5101:(Part 1)
and BS 5101:(Part 2) respectively.
o) The luminaire shall be equipped with two suitable mounting brackets and shall be of
hot dripped galvanized steel. The brackets shall be adjustable for continuous
inclination from 0-180 Degree, if necessary.
p) Luminaires shall withstand high temperatures generated inside tunnels and shall
operate normally under such conditions.
10.1.8 Luminaires - Mechanical Requirements
a) Luminaires shall be with separate compartments for the optical system and for the
control gear.
b) The optical compartment shall be minimum IP65 utilising neoprene gaskets or silicon
gasket. The design of the luminaire shall be such that the sealing gasket will never be
exposed to sunlight or to the luminous flux emitted by the lamp.
c) The control gear compartment shall be minimum IP65.
d) The opening of the control gear compartment shall allow a complete and easy visual
check of all electrical parts and shall be suitable for easy access and easy maintenance.
e) The mechanical strength of the body and its accessories and the protector of the
luminaire shall be adequate to withstand without any damage a mechanical shock
having an impact energy complying with BS 4533 Section 102.3
f) The luminaire shall be able to withstand without any damage a wind speed of
160km/h with gust factor of 1.14.
g) Special precautions shall be given to the choice of materials which shall be able to
resist without any damage or ageing or alteration in its structural or physical
properties, the harsh climatic conditions in addition to the heat emitted by the lamp.
h) Fixing shall be of an effective locking means using stainless steel bolts grade 316L.
i) Luminaires shall have protection against ingress of moisture of IP 65.
j) All fixings which carry the weight of the luminaire and internal accessories shall be
provided with suitable locking devices to prevent the dislodgment of any part of the
luminaire by vibration either in service or in maintenance. Compliance shall be
checked as per BS 4533 Section 102.3.
10.1.9 Luminaires - Electrical Requirements
a) The electrical accessories such as ballasts, ignitors and capacitors shall be prewired
and preassembled on metallic supports that are fixed into the control gear
compartment for each lamp.
b) Special care shall be taken to allow easy maintenance and quick replacement of the
accessories. They shall be bolted (and not riveted) on the removable supports. The
supports shall be laid down in the compartment and in no case shall be suspended by
bolts, for security reasons and maintenance facilities.
c) All electrical accessories shall be able to withstand in continuous operation and
without any damage, the temperature existing inside the control compartment, in an
ambient temperature of 50C. Cable connections to the lamp holder within the
luminaire shall be of the heat resistant type with silicon or glass fiber or other
approved insulation. The arrangement shall comply with BS 4533 Section 102.3.
d) The power supply terminals and the earth screw shall be fixed inside the control gear
compartment. A cable clamp shall be mounted near the terminals. An isolating
conduit shall be fitted to protect the incoming supply cable. The arrangement in
general shall comply with BS 4533 Section 102.3.
e) A separate set of control gear shall be provided for the lamp comprising one ballast
associated with one capacitor, one ignitor. The control gear should be encapsulated
in an approved enclosure to minimum IP 65. Terminals of all ballasts, capacitors,
ignitors shall be shrouded. The ballast shall be designed to operate the lamp and
control it continuously in ambient temperatures ranging from 0°C to 80°C. The ignitor
shall be complete with timer (1200sec).
f) The ballast shall be tropicalised of Class H insulation and vacuum impregnated. The
capacity of the ballast should be such as to keep the illumination of the lamp within
the design limit. The capacitor shall be of the diphenyl impregnated type and shall be
in a leak proof metal container fitted with an internal discharge resistor. The
permitted operating temperature of the capacitor shall be marked on its case and
shall be 90°C. The capacitors shall raise the power factor of the complete system to
0.9 or better. Each lamp shall operate using only one ballast and one capacitor. Any
combination of two or more capacitors to have the equivalent value of capacitance
will not be accepted. Ballasts and capacitors shall comply with the latest BS EN 60922
and BS EN 60923
g) The control gear shall be supplied by the luminaire manufacturer and shall be
incorporated in a separate compartment in a way that heat emitted by the lamp is
not conducted or transferred to the gear components.
h) The luminaire shall have an ES40 lamp holder. The live cable shall be connected to the
centre contact.
i) The operating temperature and thermal endurance characteristics shall conform to
Part 2 of BS 4533 Section 102.3.
j) It is envisaged to have continuous dimming control, for the luminaires indicated on
the Contract plans. The luminaires selected shall be suitable for use over the complete
range of power regulators/power controllers specified in this section.
10.1.10 Luminaires - Photometrical Requirements

a) The lamp fitting shall be adjustable to allow the luminous flux distribution to be
adapted to the geometrical installation conditions.
b) The adjusting device of the lamp shall be sufficiently sturdy, and designed in a way it
cannot be disturbed, during its normal lifetime (vibrations) or during maintenance
operations (lamp replacement).
c) This device shall have permanent position markings so that the lamp position
recommended by the manufacturer can be easily realized.
d) The photometrical classification of the luminaires, according to CIE Nr. 34 publication
shall incorporate the following characteristics, depending on the lamp position
adjustment:
i) Longitudinal flux control : Throw - intermediate or long
ii) Transverse flux control : Spread - Narrow or average
iii) Glare control : SLI - Greater than 3
10.1.11 Luminaires - Photometrical Performance Requirement

Note: The standards indicated below are applicable to Sodium fixtures only:
a) All lighting calculations are to be as per Part 1, Section B, Table 4.2.1
b) Maintenance Factor is to be calculated as per Part 1, Section B, Clause 4.3
10.1.12 Documents to be submitted.

The Contractor shall supply following technical documentation and information for each type of
luminaires for the approval of The Department. The approval of The Department does not absolve
the Contractor of the contractual obligations regarding the performance and compliance to the
specification requirements.
a) Catalogue sheet of the luminaire
b) Detailed construction drawing of the luminaire, Polar diagram of luminous intensity
in roadway vertical plan and transverse vertical plans.
c) Utilization factor curve for actual inclination of luminaire.
d) Isolux diagram for actual inclination of luminaire.
e) Intensity table, in the C-gamma co-ordinates recommended by CIE Nr. 27 Publication.
f) Computer calculation printout showing the illumination and luminance levels.
Longitudinal Uniformity Ratio (UI), overall Uniformity Ratio (UO), specific luminaire
index (SLI), glare control mark (G) and threshold increment (TI).
g) Tightness test certificate conforming to IP65 protection degree for the optical
compartment of the luminaires and the IP65 protection degree for the control gear
compartment. This test certificate shall be issued by an independent laboratory.
h) Shock test certificate confirming the resistance of the body to an impact energy as
per Section 4.4 Section 1.4 of BS 4533, Part 1. This test certificate shall be issued by
an independent laboratory approved by ADQCC.
i) Wind resistance certificate confirming that no damage will occur to the luminaire at
winds up to 160 Km/h for a short period. This certificate shall be issued by an
independent laboratory approved by ADQCC.
j) Total weight of the luminaire (with lamp and control gear).
k) Power factor of one complete luminaire (under normal working conditions)
l) Total electric consumption of the luminaire, including control gear losses.
m) Rated lumen output of the lamp under nominal conditions
n) Depreciation curve of the luminous flux with burning hours.
o) Luminous flux variation with the main voltage.
p) Make and type of ballast and capacitors separately with their electrical
characteristics, e.g. Impedance, power factor, Temperature rise (t), max.
Temperature (tw) and power losses.
q) A computer program according to IESNA or CIE standard on a Digital Storage Device
should be supplied and the matrix program for the offered luminaire.
r) The supplier shall submit for The Department’s approval; dimensioned drawings of
the control gear arrangements showing the exact positions of ballasts and capacitors
within the luminaire.
s) The Contractor shall submit a sample of the proposed luminaire for the approval of
The Department.
t) Ladder diagram printout of the program for all PLCs.
u) Single Line Diagrams, General Arrangement drawings for all Lighting Distribution
Boards and Panels.
v) System configuration diagram for the complete lighting control system.
w) The PLC Program shall be handed over to The Department at the end of the
completion of contract on a Digital Storage Device along with hard copies of the
program. The PLC program printout shall have all the information about all the tags,
inputs and outputs.
x) The Contractor shall provide along with bid/tender a recommended list of spare parts
for the complete lighting system including spares for luminaires, PLCs, Power
controllers, etc. for 3 years of trouble-free operation. This list shall be complete with
unit rates.
y) Contractor to provide along with the Bid/ Tender a detailed description about the
Mean Time between Failures (MTBF) of the proposed lighting system. This shall show
MTBF of all major parts of the system, such as luminaires, PLCs, L20 meters, power
controllers or lighting controllers, etc.
Note: The standards indicated below are applicable to LED fixtures only:
The Contractor shall supply following technical documentation and information for each type of
luminaires for the approval of The Department. The approval of The Department does not absolve
the Contractor of the contractual obligations regarding the performance and compliance to the
specification requirements.
a) All requirements as per the Part-1, Section-B of the Lighting Manual
b) Stated Nominal Correlated colour temperature (CCT)
c) Complete specifications, including make and model number, for:
d) LED light source(s) to show matches that used for QCC certification
e) LED driver(s) to show matches that used for QCC certification
f) Any Integral PLMS control components
g) Fixture Maintenance factor (MF) as per Part 1, Section B Clause 4.3
h) Written Full Fixture Warranty as per Part-1, Section-B Clause 3.3.16, Warranty
minimum requirements
i) Total weight of the luminaire (with lamp and control gear)
j) System configuration diagram for the complete lighting control system.
k) The Contractor shall provide along with bid/tender a recommended list of spare parts
for the complete lighting system including spares for Light fittings, PLCs, Power
controllers, etc. for 3 years of trouble-free operation. This list shall be complete with
unit rates.
10.2 Tunnel Lighting Control
10.2.1 General
The proposed system shall be compatible with any luminaire manufacturer. Multiple
manufacturers of luminaires can be controlled from the same system. The source of supply shall
be different for lighting and lighting control in order to guarantee full independence. The
luminaires shall not contain any controls components other than the dimmable driver.
a) The Tunnel lighting shall be controlled automatically, as required by the Department,

by the Tunnel Lighting Control System (TLCS) by means of Luminance Meter, PLC and
all communication interface modules, and contactors.
b) The proposed system shall comply with all the requirements of the Abu Dhabi Lighting
Manual.
c) Each tunnel shall have its own system. In case of two parallel tunnels in opposite
driving directions two independent systems are required.
d) The entire system shall be made of the highest industrial grade components.
e) The lighting control shall be such as to continuously adjust by dimming control,
selected groups of luminaires with the increase and decrease of external luminance
at the entrance zone and traffic density / time / usage of the tunnel. Separate sets of
programmable controllers (PLC), dimming controllers and Luminance Meters shall be
provided for each entrance.
f) The Luminance Meter shall continuously monitor the external luminance L20 or Lseq
and transmit the signal frequency based to the PLC which shall process and convert
the signal received and control the level of light accordingly. Each tunnel shall have
its own independent PLC.
g) Each LED luminaire shall be equipped with an LED Power Line (LPL) module. The LPL
shall receive control commands via the power line from the LDB.
h) The Supplier should submit list of spare parts required for 5 years trouble free
operation and maintenance.
i) Dimming/Lighting Control shall be in line with the lighting design.
j) The supplier of the lighting control system shall have a minimum of 10 years of
experience in tunnel lighting control systems in the Middle East. It shall have
successfully completed at least ten similar projects in the GCC and it shall have
previous approvals from the client.
k) There shall be two lighting schemes, one for the night time lighting and one for the
day time lighting. Both schemes shall be continuously monitored and independently
dimmed, as required by the control system.
l) The contractor shall be responsible for testing on commissioning of the complete
system. A full commissioning report, mentioning all electrical readings and all setting
shall be issued. Screen shots of each luminance meter are required.
m) The PLC shall have a SCADA interface based on TCP/IP (RJ45) connection.
n) All enclosures (LDB and PLC) shall be made from GRP.
10.2.2 Luminance Meter
a) One Luminance Meter shall be provided for the purpose of sensing the adaptation
Tunnel surrounding luminance at each entrance. The Luminance Meter shall operate
on CCTV bases with a suitably designed algorithm to give a linear electrical signal
output proportional to the Lseq (veiling luminance) or the L20 luminance measured.
Suitably compensating filters shall be provided to ensure that the field of image
scanned by the CCTV chip is adapted to the spectral sensitivity of the human eye. The
methods of CIE88:2005 shall be followed.
b) An independent test report from an accredited laboratory shall be provided for the
Luminance Meter.
c) In case of a failure of a luminance meter, the signal from another nearby luminance
meter shall be taken (from opposite driving direction), or a backup astrological 2-
channel time clock shall be activated by the PLC to take over the switching control.
d) The Luminance Meter housing shall be corrosion proof and made of high-grade
aluminium, powder coated. The Luminance Meter shall be equipped with a swivel
base, which can be swivelled +/-25 degree horizontally and vertically. It shall be
possible to mount the luminance meter on a wall or on a pole.
e) Suitable shade shall be provided by the contractor to prevent direct solar radiation to
the Luminance Meter.
f) The Luminance Meters shall be mounted on Hot Dip Galvanized steel column pointing
in the drivers' direction of vision, in stopping distance in front of the entrance at a
height of approximately 4.5 m above the pavement or hard shoulder on the near side
of the street if the road does not curve towards the near side. In the latter case, the
luminance meter should be positioned over the central median or on the other side
of the road. Alternatively, the Luminance Meter can be mounted on the near wall to
the right hand side.
g) The maximum distance from the luminance meter to the PLC controller shall not
exceed 500m in cable length. The cable used shall be 3 x 1.5mm2, shielded and
grounded on the PLC side only.
h) For commissioning purpose the luminance meter needs to be accessible. It shall have
a RS232 output on which the CCTV image can be communicated in order to verify the
exact aiming of the luminance meter. A suitable software tool shall be provided to
display this image on a portable PC. The image shall be safeguarded for future
reference and shall be included in the commissioning report.
i) The Luminance Meter shall have a power supply of 24VDC. 240VAC supply is not
permitted.
j) The Luminance Meter shall be rated for a maximum ambient temperature of 65°C.
The manufacturer shall supply a certificate of conformity
k) The Luminance Meter shall not have any mechanical cleaning devices (wiper) and
shall not use any water tank for auto-cleaning function.
l) The Luminance Meter shall be rated IP65.
10.2.3 The Main Control System/ Master PLC
a) The TLCS shall be installed in a separate enclosure outdoors or in the tunnel in a

suitable and corrosion free enclosure IP65 or in a utility room if provided. The
maximum ambient temperature of any component used shall be at least 55°C.
b) The TLCS shall work independently form all other systems.
c) The entrance zone lighting shall be switched in one step continuously dimmed. The
control system supplier shall coordinate with the lighting designer to obtain the most
efficient solution.
d) It shall be possible to adjust the threshold luminance and hysteresis for switch on and
off on the PLC. The PLC shall not have a display and it shall have a serial port for
programming. This serial port shall use a MOD-Bus protocol.
e) The night time lighting shall be switched on during the night and off during the day. It
is fed from UPS only and serves as emergency lighting (if required).
f) If installed, the exit zone lighting shall be switched in one step, each continuously
dimmed, controlled from the nearest luminance meter / Master PLC.
g) From the momentary access luminance value, the instantaneous luminance required
in the threshold zones (Lth) and Transition zones shall be derived. The control system
shall be designed in such a way that the Threshold / Transition Zone luminance shall
be automatically achieved depending on real time Lseq or L20 value considering the
specific k-factor.
h) The system shall be designed to have manual control at LDB level. For this reason,
each LDB shall have three 3-position switches (Day-Stage, Night-Stage) installed
(AUTO – OFF – BY-PASS). The manual operation shall permit to switch each stage on
and off.
i) All signal transmission in field shall be using RS485 or be frequency based or
ETHERNET/RPOFIBUS/MODBUS/approved equal communication links. Voltage
signals shall not be used, unless otherwise specifically approved by the Engineer/
Client.
j) The maximum design ambient temperature of the complete system shall be 55° C.
k) As a backup control system there shall be an astrological time clock located in the
Master PLC enclosure to switch the lights automatically on and off as required. The
PLC enclosure shall have three 3-position switches (Day-Stage, Night-Stage) installed
(AUTO – OFF – BY-PASS). The manual operation shall permit to switch the lights on
and off.
l) SCADA Connection: The Master PLC shall have a SCADA interface based on MOD-Bus
ACCII on TCP/IP (RJ45 connection). All information collected from the LDB and the
status of the Master PLC and L20 Failure shall be made available.
10.2.4 LED Control and Monitoring System
Control and Monitor all LED Luminaires: Some parameters are measured by the LPL for each
luminaire and communicated to the Lighting Point Manger (LPM) two times per night on the
request of the LPM. The time can be set in the LPM. It is important that real measurement data is
communicated. OK and NOT OK information is not permitted. Each LED luminaire shall have
dimming capability. The luminaires shall be equipped with a standard dimmable driver using a 1-
10V input connected to the LPL. The LPL shall be mounted externally on top of the luminaire using
a stainless-steel adaptor mounting plate or inside the external driver enclosure is available. All
external fixing components shall be stainless steel V4A (ANSI 316L-grade). Systems using separate
control cables to each luminaire are not permitted.
10.2.5 General Specification of the LPL Module
a) Located inside the control gear box of the luminaire in IP20 enclosure or mounted on
top of the luminaire in IP65 enclosure.
b) Galvanically isolated output 1-10 VDC to control the driver to achieve dimming from
0 to 100 % with steps of 1%, for LED luminaires only
c) Communication in AKS code with power line carrier and frequency 125 kHz (class 116)
d) Dimming control via mains voltage
e) Communication speed minimum 1000 Baud
f) Suitable for luminaire power of max. 490W LED
g) Power consumption < 0.7W
h) Supply Voltage: 170 – 254V / 50Hz
i) Maximum distance for power line shall be >1000m
j) Each module shall act as a repeater (relays) if programmed to do so
k) Operating temperature: from -20 to +60 °C
l) Storage temperature: from -30 to +80 °C
m) Compliant with EN500065-1 and EN50178 and CE
n) MTBF > 1’000’000h, demonstrated in actual project in the Middle East
o) Each module reads and communicates the following data:
p) Lamp status on/off;
q) Voltage, luminaire current and power
r) Power factor cosφ;
s) luminaire burning hours;
t) luminaire supply time (how many hours the luminaire was supplied with
power (this time is not necessarily the same as the burning hrs.)
10.2.6 General Specification of the LPM Module
a) User code, installation code.

b) Internal clock
c) control of up to 1000 LPL modules.
d) 2 inputs for scenario management, with the possibility of expansion to 16 inputs
e) Sampling and storage of all LPL data
f) The LPL’s connected to one LPM can be divided in up to 16 groups. With the two
digital local inputs on the LPM the system has an override function, and lights can be
put to maximum output manually if needed.
10.2.7 LDB
a) The LDB shall be accessible from the front door. The enclosure shall be made from
GRP.
b) Each LDB shall act as a lighting distribution panel with appropriate MCCB, ELCB and
MCB’s.
c) Each LDB shall have a power point and a light switched by a limit switch on the door.
d) The number of outgoing circuits shall be as per the LDB schedule. Each LDB’s shall
have two non-dimmed 3-phase spare outputs.
e) MCCB rating: 20kA, MCB rating: 10kA
f) ELCB: common ELCB on incomer, for monitoring only, the ELCB shall not disconnect
the load, but raise an alarm to the Master PLC.
g) The LDB supplying the LED luminaires shall be equipped with a power line modem
(LPM) in order to monitor and control each LED luminaire. V, I, P, cosφ, ton (luminaire
operating hours) shall be continuously monitored by the LPL and periodically
communicated to the LPM. The LDB shall have a power line filter preventing the high
frequency power line signals form feeding back to the supply line. The power line filter
shall be installed on all 3 phases and the neutral conductor. It shall be de-rated by
30%.
h) All LDB’s in one tunnel shall be connected via a CAT6 cable in a ring network. The
maximum distance (from one LDB to the next LDB or PLC) for 1 cable shall not exceed
500m. The Master PLC shall be part of that loop. Each LDB shall have a repeater for
the serial cable communication.
i) All LDB’s in a tunnel shall be looped with 4 x 2.5mm2 hardwire cable (240V) for on off
control (loop). The Master PLC shall be part of that loop.
j) The following parameters of each LDB shall be monitored and communicated to the
Master PLC and SCADA system:
a. Current, Voltage, Power factor of incomer.
b. Position of each AUTO-OFF-MANUAL switch
c. Tripping of any one MCB (common alarm)
d. Door open
e. Auxiliary contact of contactor (contactor on or off)
f. Data from all luminaires as per Clauses 10.2.6 and 10.2.7 (h)
k) Each LDB has a feed from the grid and from UPS. The UPS supplies the night time
lighting only. The LDB shall be equipped with a suitable ATS (Automatic Transfer
Switch), If required.
10.2.8 Communication to Future SCADA System
a) The PLC shall have a remote access port for the future SCADA system.
b) Remote access shall be available to the TLCS through the SCADA system, using
Microsoft Internet Explorer. It shall be possible to view the complete information and
make necessary changes with password protection based on authority level allocated.
Suitable remote access software shall be supplied and installed along with the system.
c) The data that shall be communicated to the SCADA system from the TLCS shall
include, but not be limited to the following.
a. status of each dimming controller/power controller

b. status of each PLC
c. power supply and status of each LDB
d. power, input voltage, output voltage current and power factor for each phase
of each LCC including alarm thresholds
e. Status of each MCB, MCCB, ELCB, contactor, thermostat, switch
f. mains supply failure
g. UPS supply failure (if any)
h. communication failure alarm for communication from dimming controller to
the Sub PLC
i. communication failure.
j. high temperature of dimming controller.
k. loss of luminance meter signal
l. any other parameter critical for the monitoring of the Lighting system
proposed by Manufacturer.
m. status of auto-off-by-pass switch
n. operating hours of each step
o. operating hours of each LED luminaire
p. status of each LED luminaire, including actual power consumption
d) The List of parameters to be displayed and recorded on the SCADA system from the
TLCS shall include as a minimum the followings. Each of the analogic signals shall be
provided with a trend indicating the signal values for last 12 months. At the end of 12
months the values shall be stored in another memory location. It shall be possible to
get a printout of the desired parameters through PLC/SCADA system.
a. Power consumption for each LDB, and for each stage.

b. Reduction in power achieved for each stage due to dimming.
c. Voltage, power and Current at each LDB.
d. Hours of operation of each stage for each tunnel.
e. Lamp usage report and lamp replacement schedule, with dates.
f. Current status of all circuits at any given time.
g. Status of all LDB’s and PLC’s used in the lighting control system,
h. Current and historical L20 values at each entrance, in graphical and numerical
for 12 months.
i. Dimming percentage applied.
j. Auto/manual/bypass switch status of each LDB
k. Any other parameter as proposed by the lighting system supplier.
10.2.9 Training for The Department’s Personnel
a) Training shall be conducted by personnel employed by the Electrical Subcontractor,

familiar with the system supplied, experienced and trained in developing and
implementing instructional courses.
b) The Contractor shall submit information on the training programme for approval prior
to the training. This submittal shall include a course outline, time required, course
schedule, sample workbook and instructor qualification information, for each level.
c) The Contractor shall make a workbook on each course available to every person
taking the courses listed herein. The workbook shall be of sufficient detail so at a later
date a trainee could review in detail the major topics of the course. One copy of each
book shall be delivered to the Client for its library.
d) The training times shall be scheduled by Employer in advance, so as not to disrupt the
Client’s ability to operate the equipment.
e) Specialized training shall be provided for a minimum of three of the Employer’s
personnel in the operation and maintenance of the system at site or in the factory as
required by the engineer. The training programme shall be divided into two segments
and each shall consist of at least two, eight hour working days.
f) The maintenance training programme shall be developed for personnel who have
electronics maintenance and repair experience and a general knowledge of computer
systems, but shall not assume any familiarity with the specific hardware furnished. As
a minimum, the following subjects shall be covered:
a. System architecture and layout.

b. Hardware components.
c. Module switch settings (configuration switches).
d. I/O modules.
e. Power supplies.
f. Data highway.
g. Programmer connection.
h. Programming and diagnostic techniques.
i. Battery replacement and recording.
j. PC and workstation familiarization and maintenance.
k. Troubleshooting.
l. Disassembly.
m. Cleaning.
n. Component replacement.
o. Reassembling.
g) The operation training program shall include the following topics:

a. Power-up, bootstrapping and shutdown of all hardware devices.
b. Interpretation of all standard displays.
c. Appropriate actions for software and hardware error occurrences.
d. Use of operator interface displays and keyboards.
e. Use of printer including replenishment of supplies.
f. Manual data entries.
g. Creation and editing of graphic operator display screens.
h. Loading of any required software into the system.
i. Data base creation and editing.
h) System Management: The training in this area shall cover the following:
a. The daily supervision of the System: e.g., archiving data, system
b. housekeeping, fault reporting, preventing repetitive alarms.
c. System administration e.g., planning and providing system expansion and
reconfiguration of hardware, control of users and privileges, software and
hardware fault analysis.
d. Engineering functions, configuration and application programming e.g.,
additions and changes to the system, points, displays, reports and logs,
preparation and downloading of lighting control programmes and schedules
and software development.
e. Provide training for client’s personnel for programming, operation,
maintenance & troubleshooting of all parts of Lighting System including but
not limited to following:
i. Lighting Controllers
ii. Lighting Fixtures
iii. Luminance Meters
iv. Communication Interfaces
v. Fiber Optic Cabling
vi. Dimming Controllers
vii. PLC’s
10.2.10 Site Inspection and Testing
a) The Engineer shall have the option to attend the inspection and tests before setting
the equipment to work. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in writing, 48 hours
before commencing tests.
b) A Site Acceptance Test (SAT) shall be conducted as part of the TLCS system validation
and shall include all equipment and software within the Contractor’s scope of supply.
This test shall be conducted after the above equipment has been installed at the Site
and the Contractor is satisfied of the correctness of the installation and of the
operation of the equipment.
c) Particular Test Requirements:
a. Communication test. The Contractor shall firstly conduct a test to establish

the correct functioning and ability to transmit data correctly to and from each
port on the system communications network. In the event of any problem or
deficiency being identified in any equipment supplied by others, this shall be
reported fully, in writing, by the Contractor to the Engineer.
b. Hardware test. Demonstrate correct operation of hardware using off-line
diagnostics.
c. Functionality test. Demonstrate the system performance and functionality
meets the specification.
d. Test details.
d) The SAT shall be carried out in accordance with a test specification produced by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
e) Test equipment and test software shall be provided by the Contractor to load the
system to the worst-case scenario defined in the test specification.
f) The Contractor shall prepare a test report following the SAT.
g) System Commissioning:
a. Where required in the Project Specification, the Contractor shall provide staff
to work in conjunction with the Client, to ensure the satisfactory service
operation of all equipment in the system, to assist the Client to adjust the
configuration data and to develop/modify application programme, e.g.,
sequence controls.
b. The Lighting Subcontractor shall provide Performance verification test of the
complete Lighting system for a continuous period of 90 calendar days, for all
items under of Lighting system, for demonstration of reliability, repeatability
and operability.
h) System Takeover: The criteria for takeover of the system shall be:
a. Submission by the Contractor and approval of as-built drawings.

b. Submission by the Contractor of all documentation.
c. Submission of operational and maintenance manuals
d. Submission of all software design and support documentation and the lodging
of source codes in a place of secure safe-keeping and storage with a Third
Party.
e. Provision of information and examples of each type of report and each item
of user-configurable functionality.
f. Issue of all relevant test certificates.
g. Successful completion of the SAT.
h. System commissioning and issue of Final System Test Certificate by the
Contractor. Following satisfactory completion of the above, the Engineer will
issue the System Takeover Certificate.
10.2.11 Factory Acceptance Test (FAT)
a. The entire system, PLC / L20 / LDB’s shall be tested at the manufacturers
location before it is delivered to site.
b. The manufacturer shall demonstrate all the functions of the system.
c. In case physical presence of the client / consultant is not possible the FAT shall
be made with an online connection.
d. A full report shall be made available after the FAT.
10.2.12 Spares
The Items for spare luminaire shall be as specified herein, in Part 1, Section I, Contract Documents,
and as approved by The Department.
All spare units shall be suitably boxed or crated and placed in storage where designated by The
Department. All spare units shall be identical to and by the same manufacturer as units approved
by The Department for use under this Contract. Spare luminaire items shall be complete with
ballast assembly, lamp and all associated appurtenances.
The Contractor shall provide all labour, tools, equipment and appurtenances to carefully load,
transport, unload and place all spares in storage. No materials, boxes or crates shall be stored
directly on the ground or similar horizontal surface. The Contractor shall provide all blocking of
wood, concrete or other material as approved by The Department under all materials, boxes or
crates. All materials, crates or boxes shall be suitably identified for this Contract.
10.3 Power Supply to Tunnel Lighting

The Consultant/Contractor shall design and install all power supply requirements for the tunnel
lighting in line with the requirements of AADC/ADDC. All testing shall be in compliance with
AADC/ADDC and International requirements. Test certificates will be supplied to the Department.
10.4 Diesel Generator Set
10.4.1 General
The Contractor shall furnish and install 400-volt, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50Hz continuously rated diesel
generator set to supply standby power for the equipment as indicated on the Contract plans and
as specified herein. The diesel generator set shall be complete with all accessories and controls
including, but not limited to, diesel engine, generator, battery, battery charger, day fuel tank of
minimum eight hours capacity, exhaust system, control panel with necessary circuit breaker,
wiring as required to provide a totally functional system. The capacity of the diesel generator set
shall be as indicated on the Contract plans and as included in the Bill of Quantities.
10.4.2 Sequence of Operation
Emergency power generation shall be provided to supply power to the essential loads through an
automatic transfer switch activated by the voltage monitoring relay fitted in the main
switchboard. The automatic transfer switch (ATS) shall normally be closed at the mains position.
In case of mains power outage, sensed by the voltage out of the limit relay in the generator
control panel, the following shall be the sequence of operation:
• Main feeder circuit breaker electrically opens.
• Generator starts and builds up to the rated speed.
• ATS automatically switches over to standby position.
Once mains supply is restored and stabilized after a predetermined period, as sensed by the
voltage signal through the generator control panel, the following shall be the sequence of
operation:
• ATS automatically switches over to mains position.
• Mains circuit breaker closes.
• Generator continues to run for a preset time, per manufacturer’s recommendations,
in order to cool the engine prior to its automatic shut-down.
10.4.3 Shop Drawings
Shop drawings and product data for the diesel generator set shall include the following detailed
information:
• Engine: Make and model, with signed and dated originals of engine manufacturer’s
certified performance curves. Photocopies will not be accepted.
• Alternator: Make and model.
• Voltage regulator: Make, model, and type.
• Generator control panel: As specified hereinafter.
• Battery: Make, type, and capacity.
• Battery charger: Make, type, and model.
• Generator: Type and model.
• Governor: Type and model.
• Air requirements in cubic meters per second.
• Cooling air required for engine and generator including exhaust pipes.
• Combustion air required.
• BS or DIN rating of engine.
• Torsional Critical Speeds: The procedure detailed in the latest Amendments of BS649,
Section 8, or equivalent DIN specification, shall be followed for the evaluation of the
torsional characteristics of the engine generator assembly.
• Flow diagrams for:
o Diesel fuel
o Lubricating oil
o Cooling liquid
• Dimensioned drawing showing the complete generating set mounted on a steel base,
including vibration isolators, exhaust system, and drip trays. Drawing shall also
indicate total weight.
• Dimensions and structural specifications of engine-generator foundation pad.
• Layout drawings of complete engine-fuel system, including pipe sizes and anchor bolt
templates for auxiliary pumps, if required, showing all critical dimensions.
• Dimensioned drawings showing complete engine-ventilation duct arrangements and
louvres, including details of openings required in wall for exhaust air.
• Continuous full-load output of set at 0.8 pf lagging.
• Transient response of system during motor starting sequence and peak load.
Maximum voltage dip and time required to full voltage shall be included.
• Description of set operation including:
o Automatic starting and transfer to load and back to normal power, including
time in seconds from start of cranking until unit reaches rated voltage and
frequency.
o Manual starting.
o Automatic shut down on:
▪ Overcranking
▪ Overspeed
▪ High engine temperature
▪ Low lube-oil pressure
▪ Short circuit
▪ Alternator overvoltage and undervoltage
o Manual remote emergency stop.
o Electrical schematics and wiring diagrams of generator control panel shall be
as follows:
i. Single line diagram of entire control panel assembly.
ii. Wiring diagram for interconnection with generator set and transfer switch
specified elsewhere.
iii. Test reports and certificates.
iv. Operation and maintenance data as follows:
- Provide data for incorporation into maintenance manual.
- Operation and maintenance manual to include instructions for the specific unit supplied
and not a general description of units manufactured by supplier. The manual shall include, but
not be limited to, operation and maintenance instructions for engine, alternator, generator-
controls system, generator-control panel, battery charger, battery, fuel system, engine-cooling
system, exhaust system, and accessories to permit effective operation, maintenance, and repair.
A recommended preventative-maintenance schedule and hours to overhaul shall also be
included.
v. Technical data as follows:
- Illustrated parts lists with parts catalogue numbers.
- Schematic diagram of electrical controls.
vi. Flow diagrams as follows:
- Fuel system.
- Lubricating oil.
- Cooling system.
vii. Certified copies of factory test results.
viii. Wiring diagram of complete plant. Minimum drawing size A1 (594 x 841).
ix. Single-line diagram showing major electrical components and locations
suitable for mounting in generator room.
x. Detailed operating instructions of generating plant on a complete system.
The generator set including engine, alternator, control panel, and accessories shall be inspected
and tested during manufacture in accordance with the requirements Clause 3.
The test procedure for the generator set shall be as follows:
i. Blank forms and check sheets with spaces to record data as approved by The Department.
The following shall be noted at the top of each record sheet:
1. Date.
2. Generator set serial number.
3. Engine make, model, serial number.
4. Alternator make, model, serial number.
5. Voltage regulator make and model.
6. Rating of generator set kW, kVA, V, A, rpm Hz.
ii. Check sheets shall be completed with data recorded on forms in duplicate.
iii. Tests interrupted for any reason shall be resumed at the beginning of the test (hours may
not be accumulated).
iv. All test instruments shall be standard meters with certified calibration.
v. The Department or designated representative shall sign the completed forms to indicate
concurrence of test results.
vi. The factory test shall be as follows:
• 100 percent rated load, operate set for four (4) hours continuously at 50°C ambient
temperature, taking readings at 30-minute intervals. The following information shall be
recorded for each interval:
o Time of reading.
o Running time.
o Ambient temperature in °C.
o Lube-oil pressure in kPa.
o Engine coolant temperature in °C.
o Alternator voltage, phase 1, 2, and 3.
o Alternator current, phase 1, 2, and 3.
o Power in kilowatts.
o Frequency in Hz.
o Power factor.
o Battery charger current in amperes.
o Battery voltage.
• At the end of four-hour run, increase load to 110 percent rated value, and take readings
every 15 minutes for one hour.
• Before commencing four-hour run, the following shut-down devices and alarms shall be
demonstrated:
o Overcranking.
o Overspeed.
o High engine temperature.
o Low lube-oil pressure.
o Emergency stop.
• After demonstration of requirements of items under (3), above, continuous-strip-chart
recorders shall be installed to record frequency and voltage variations during load-
switching procedures, with a chart speed of 1.3 millimeters per second. Each load change
shall be delayed until steady-state conditions are achieved. The switching increments shall
include:
o No load to 80 percent load to no load.
o 20-percent load to 40-percent load to no load.
• Performance as follows shall be demonstrated:
o Automatic starting of set and automatic transfer of load on failure of normal
power.
o Automatic shutdown of engine on resumption of normal power.
o That battery charger reverts to a high rate of charge after cranking.
• Low oil pressure and high engine temperature shutdowns shall be demonstrated by
simulating low oil pressure and high temperature without subjecting engine to these
excesses.
• Test forms shall be as approved by The Department.
• All factory tests specified herein may, at the discretion of The Department, be repeated on
site upon the installation of the generator set and associated equipment.
10.4.5 Materials
10.4.5.1 Engine
The Engine shall comply with the following requirements:

i. Diesel Engine
To BS 5514, or corresponding to DIN or ISO standards.
ii. Prime Mover
Four-cycle diesel compression ignition engine, solid injection full diesel, heavy duty, cold start
liquid cooled, vertical in-line or vee, and current manufacturer, of a type and size, that has been
in commercial use as a prime mover for electric power generation for not less than 5 years. The
engine shall be rated for prime power. Experimental models will not be acceptable. The generator
shall also be turbocharged and after cooled, as required, operating at 1,500 rpm. Cylinder liners
shall be full length, replaceable, wet type, honed, and coated to give fast breaking and long life.
iii. Capacity
The capacity of the engine output shall not be less than 1.34 output brake horsepower per
kilowatt at 100 percent continuous rating load while operating at specified site conditions minus
the sum of the following:
• Power to drive cooling fan and other auxiliaries.
• Power loss for site ambient conditions.
iv. Performance
The engine performance shall be as follows:
• The rated continuous kW output as shown on the Contract plans at 0.8 pf shall
be defined as DIN “A” 6270 for an industrial engine rating or equivalent BS 5514
engine-rating curve.
• The engine manufacturer’s approved, published kW rating for continuous
electrical power generation shall be used in assessing the engine capacity. This
rating shall be derated for the specified site conditions in accordance with
paragraph (2), above, incorporating latest amendments.
• The diesel generator shall have a standby kW rating and shall be derated for site
conditions and all power-absorbing accessories.
• Engine-performance curves showing ratings, conditions, and definitions will be
acceptable as evidence of brake kW output only if the curves are issued by the
engine manufacturer, certified by an officer of the company, and dated.
• The derating factors (percentage) for each site condition must be provided on a
specification sheet issued by the engine manufacturer, when derating the engine.
When derating of the engine is not necessary, the manufacturer must provide
written confirmation of this fact.
v. Cooling System
The cooling system shall comply with the following:
• The cooling system shall be a heavy-duty industrial radiator and engine-driven
fan, both sized to adequately cool the engine and generator at full load, without
derating at 50 °C ambient temperature and 20 metres mean sea level.
Filler caps, if used, shall be designed for pressure relief prior to removal. Hoses and connections
shall be suitable for temperature up to 130 °C minimum and a working pressure of 100 psig
minimum. An engine-driven pump shall be provided for circulating jacket coolant.
The direct-mounted radiator shall have horizontal discharge, with pusher type fan driven directly
from the engine crankshaft or by a minimum of two V-belt drive with belt adjuster. Direct-
mounted radiators shall be arranged for duct extension. The fan assembly shall be enclosed with
a suitable guard. The radiator-fan drive ratio shall be sized such that the fan-trip speed does not
exceed the maximum allowed by the fan manufacturer. The Contractor shall make the fan
manufacturer’s data available upon request.
• The coolant-circulation pump shall be engine driven and suitable for radiator
application.
• The manufacturer’s recommended engine-temperature range shall be
maintained at 10 percent continuous overload in an ambient temperature of
50°C.
• Cooling-air requirements to be delivered by fan shall be conservatively calculated
and shall include air required to maintain engine-room-temperature rise due to
operation of the unit at less than or equal to 10°C above ambient (outdoor)
temperature. The fan shall be adequately rated to resist static pressure for the
specific site-installation configuration.
• The engine jacket shall be water cooled. The after cooler or inter-cooler shall be
as designed and supplied by the engine manufacturer.
vi. Fuel and Fuel System
The fuel and fuel system shall comply with the following:
• The fuel shall be Type A. Fuel oil to CGSB 3-GP-6c (No. 2 Diesel).
• The fuel system shall be comprised of interchangeable injectors that require no
calibration or adjustment, an engine-driven transfer pump with hand primer,
replaceable fuel-filter elements, and a fuel rack solenoid energized to run.
• The fuel lift pump shall have at least a 1500mm suction lift at operating speed
and a fuel cellulosic element filtration system before admission of the fuel into
the injection pump(s).
• In addition to the fuel filter above, a fuel filter combination water separator with
retention shall be provided. The water shall be drained without dismantling the
unit. The unit shall be sized to provide enough fuel as recommended by engine
manufacturer. The filter separator shall be fitted in the fuel circuit just before the
fuel injection pump, offering easy access for servicing and protection from
damage.
vii. Governor
The governor shall be electronic type. Speed drop shall be externally adjustable, from isochronous
to 3 percent, temperature compensated, with steady-state speed maintenance capability of 0.25
percent.
viii. Lubrication System
The lubrication system shall conform to the following:
• Shall be pressure-lubricated by engine-driven positive displacement gear pump.
• Shall have full-flow spin on lube-oil filter generator base.
• Shall include a lube-oil cooler.
• The engine sump-drain valve shall extend beyond the engine generator base.
ix. Starting System
The starting system shall conform to the following:
• Shall be a positive shift, gear engaging starter 24 Vdc dual starters.
• The cranking shall be limited to provide a cranking period of 30 seconds duration.
• The battery shall be nickel cadmium, 24V storage with capacity to crank engine
for three minutes at 0°C without using more than 25 percent of ampere-hour
capacity. One battery per each diesel generator set shall be provided.
x. Battery Charger
The battery charger shall include the following:
• A battery stand fabricated from angle iron with a two-centimetre plywood base
shall be provided 15cm above floor level. A wooden protective cover shall be
provided for the battery. The battery stand and cover shall be specially treated
against electrolytic action.
• All necessary battery cables and connectors shall be provided. Cable size shall be
selected to ne maximum 5 percent voltage drop at time of peak load.
• The charger shall be complete with charging alternator with regulator.
• The fuel rack solenoid shall be “energized to run” and “fail safe”.
xi. Shock-Resistant Engine-Mounted Control Panel
The generator set shall be provided with a microprocessor-based control panel that shall be
designed to provide automatic starting, monitoring, and control functions for the generator set.
The control system shall also be designed to allow local monitoring and control of the generator
set, and remote monitoring and control as described in this specification. When mounted on the
generator set the control panel shall be vibration isolated and prototype tested to verify the
durability of all components in the system under the vibration conditions encountered. The
control shall meet the requirements of ISO 8528: Part 4. All switches, lamps and meters shall be
oil-tight and dust-tight, and the enclosure door shall be gasketed. There shall be no exposed
points in the control (with the door open) that operate in excess of 50 volts. The controls shall
meet or exceed the requirements of IEC 60801:Part 2, EN 50081-1 and EN 50082-1 for
susceptibility, conducted, and radiated electromagnetic emissions. The entire control shall be
tested and meet the requirements of EN 61000-4-5 for voltage surge resistance. The generator
set mounted control shall include the following features and functions:
• Three-position lockable control switch labelled RUN/OFF/AUTO. In the RUN
position the generator set shall start and accelerate to rated speed and voltage.
In the OFF position the generator set shall immediately stop, bypassing all time
delays. In the AUTO position the generator set shall be ready to accept a signal
from a remote device to start and accelerate to rated speed and voltage.
• Red "mushroom-head" push-button EMERGENCY STOP switch. Depressing the
emergency stop switch shall cause the generator set to immediately shut down
and be locked out from automatic restarting.
• Push-button RESET switch. The RESET switch shall be used to clear a fault and
allow restarting the generator set after it has shut down for any fault condition.
• Push-button PANEL LAMP switch. Depressing the panel lamp switch shall cause
the entire panel to be lighted with DC control power. The panel lamps shall
automatically be switched off 10 minutes after the switch is depressed, or after
the switch is depressed a second time.
• Generator Set AC Output Metering: The generator set shall be provided with a
metering set with the following features and functions.
• 2.5-inch, 90 degree scale analog voltmeter, ammeter, frequency meter, and
kilowatt (kW) meter. These meters shall be provided with a phase select switch
and an indicating lamp for upper and lower scale on the meters. Ammeter and
kW meter scales shall be colour coded in the following fashion: readings from
0-90% of generator set standby rating: green; readings from 90-100% of standby
rating: amber; readings in excess of 100%: red.
• Digital metering set, 0.5% accuracy, to indicate generator voltage and frequency,
output current, output kW, kW-hours, and power factor. Generator output
voltage display shall be available in line-to-line or line-to-neutral voltage
simultaneously.
• Generator Set Alarm and Status Message Display: The generator set shall be
provided with alarm and status indicating lamps to indicate non-automatic
generator status and existing alarm and shutdown conditions. The lamps shall be
high-intensity, dual element LEDs for long life. The lamp indication shall be clearly
apparent under bright room lighting conditions. The generator set control shall
indicate the existence of the following alarm and shutdown conditions on a
digital display panel:
▪ low oil pressure (alarm)
▪ low oil pressure (shutdown)
▪ oil pressure sender failure (alarm)
▪ high coolant temperature (alarm)
▪ high coolant temperature (shutdown)
▪ engine temperature sender failure (alarm)
▪ low coolant level (alarm or shutdown--selectable)
▪ fail to crank (shutdown)
▪ overcrank (shutdown)
▪ overspeed (shutdown)
▪ low DC voltage (alarm)
▪ high DC voltage (alarm)
▪ weak battery (alarm)
▪ low fuel-daytank (alarm)
▪ high AC voltage (shutdown)
▪ low AC voltage (shutdown)
▪ under frequency (shutdown)
▪ over current (warning)
▪ over current (shutdown)
▪ short circuit (shutdown)
▪ earth fault (alarm)
▪ overload (alarm)
▪ emergency stop (shutdown)
In addition, provisions shall be made for indication of two customer-specified alarm or shutdown
conditions. Labelling of the customer-specified alarm or shutdown conditions shall be of the same
type and quality as the above specified conditions. The non-automatic indicating lamp shall be
red and shall flash to indicate that the generator set is not able to automatically respond to a
command to start from a remote location.
• Engine Status Monitoring: The following information shall be available from a
digital status panel on the Generator Set Control:
▪ engine oil pressure (psi or kPA)
▪ engine coolant temperature (degrees F or C)
▪ engine oil temperature (degrees F or C)
▪ engine speed (rpm)
▪ number of hours of operation (hours)
▪ number of start attempts
▪ battery voltage (DC volts)
• Control Functions: The control system provided shall include a cycle cranking
system, which allows for user selected crank time, rest time, and number of start
cycles. Initial settings shall be for 3 cranking periods of 10 seconds each, with 10
second rest period between cranking periods.
The control system shall include an idle mode control, which allows the engine to run in idle mode
in the RUN position only. In this mode, the generator excitation system shall be disabled.
The control system shall include an engine speed governor control, which functions to provide
steady state frequency regulation as noted elsewhere in this specification. The governor control
shall include adjustments for gain, damping, and a ramping function to control engine speed and
limit exhaust smoke while the unit is starting. The governor control shall be suitable for use in
paralleling applications without component changes.
The control system shall include time delay start (adjustable 0-300 seconds) and time delay stop
(adjustable 0-600 seconds) functions.
The control system shall include sender failure monitoring logic for speed sensing, oil pressure,
and engine temperature which is capable of discriminating between failed sender or wiring
components, and actual fault conditions.
• Generator Control Functions: The generator set shall include an automatic
voltage regulation system that is matched and prototype tested with the
governing system provided. It shall be immune from malfunction due to
load-induced voltage wave form distortion and provide a pulse width modulated
output to the generator exciter.
The voltage regulation system shall be equipped with three-phase RMS sensing and shall control
build-up of AC generator voltage to provide a linear rise and limit overshoot. The system shall
include a torque-matching characteristic, which shall reduce output voltage in proportion to
frequency below a threshold of (48/49 or 58/59 HZ)
The voltage regulator shall include adjustments for gain, damping, and frequency roll-off.
Adjustments shall be broad range, and made via digital raise-lower switches, with an
alphanumeric LED readout to indicate setting level.
The voltage regulation system shall include provisions for reactive load sharing and electronic
voltage and frequency matching for paralleling applications. Motorized voltage adjust pot is not
acceptable for voltage matching.
Controls shall be provided to monitor the output current of the generator set and initiate an alarm
when load current exceeds 110% of the rated current of the generator set on any phase for more
than 60 seconds. The controls shall shut down and lock out the generator set when output current
level approaches the thermal damage point of the generator.
Controls shall be provided to monitor the kW load on the generator set and initiate an alarm
condition when total load on the generator set exceeds the generator set rating for in excess of
5 seconds.
Controls shall include a load-shed control, to operate a set of volt-free contacts (for use in
shedding customer load devices) when overload of the generator set occurs.
An AC over/under voltage monitoring system that responds only to true RMS voltage conditions
shall be provided. The system shall initiate shutdown of the generator set when alternator output
voltage exceeds 110% of the operator-set voltage level for more than 10 seconds, or with no
intentional delay when voltage exceeds 130%. Under voltage shutdown shall occur when the
output voltage of the alternator is less than 85% for more than 10 seconds.
A battery monitoring system shall be provided which initiates alarms when the DC control and
starting voltage is less than 25VDC or more than 32VDC. During engine starting, the low voltage
limit shall be disabled, and if DC voltage drops to less than 14.4V for more than two seconds a
"weak battery" alarm shall be initiated.
• Control Interfaces for Remote Monitoring: All control and interconnection points
from the generator set to remote components shall be brought to a separate
connection box. No interconnections shall be made in the control enclosure or in
the AC power output enclosure. Provide the following features in the control
system:
Common alarm contact set rated 2A @ 30VDC to indicate existence of any alarm or shutdown
condition on the generator set.
One set of contacts rated 2A @ 30VDC to indicate generator set is ready to load. The contacts
shall operate when voltage and frequency are greater than 90% of rated condition.
Fused 10A switched 24VDC power supply circuit shall be provided for customer use. DC power
shall be available from this circuit whenever the generator set is running.
Fused 20A 24VDC power supply circuit shall be provided for customer use. DC power shall be
available from this circuit at all times from the engine starting/control batteries.
The control shall be provided with a direct serial communication link for the Lonworks, modbus
RTU or modbus ASCII via RS 232 communication network interface as described elsewhere in this
specification and shown on the Contract plans.
• Communication Interface to SCADA. The Contractor shall provide necessary
hardwiring from the communication ports/instruments to the program logic
controllers installed by the SCADA system provider. Communication protocol
shall be as required by the SCADA system provider. This work shall be considered
as a subsidiary obligation to the respective items included in the Bill of Quantities.
No other payment will be made by The Department.
• Safety Guards. Guards to protect personnel from hot and moving parts shall be
provided. All openings and clearances shall be sized or arranged to prevent entry
of a human finger.
• Drip Cap. A drip cap shall be provided on the thimble when the exhaust fan is
installed vertically.
• Engine Ambient Temperature. Suitable for operation at 50 °C ambient.
10.4.5.2 Alternator
• Alternator: The alternation shall include and conform to the following.
▪ BS 5000 Part 99 or equal.
• Rating: kW rating as shown on the Contract plans, 400V, 3 phase, 4 wire, neutral
brought out, 50Hz, at 0.95 pf and 50°C ambient.
• Revolving field, brushless.
• Drip proof screen protected.
• Full amortisseur windings.
• Synchronous type.
• Exciter. Exciter shall be rotating brushless or static permanent magnetic exciter type,
adequately sized for maximum motor starting load, imposed by the motor starting
sequence, indicated while permitting a momentary voltage drop of no more than 40V.
• All insulation shall be Class H.
• Output at 50°C ambient temperature shall be:
i. 100 percent full load continuously.
ii. 110 percent full load for one hour.
iii. 150 percent full load for one minute.
iv. 300 percent full load for one second.
v. Armature leads shall be brought out to terminals and a terminal for
neutral shall be included.
vi. Dynamically balanced rotor permanently aligned to engine by SAE
flexible-disc coupling.
10.4.5.3 Structural Steel Mounting Base
The structural steel mounting base shall include the following:

• The complete generating set shall be mounted on a structural steel base (containing a
base day fuel tank), of sufficient strength and rigidity to protect the assembly from
stress or strain during transportation, installation, and under operating conditions. Care
shall be taken to prevent interference with oil drainage and other maintenance
procedures.
• The assembly shall be fitted with spring-type isolators with adjustable side snubbers to
limit vibration and the control console shall be resiliently mounted.
• Lifting eyes shall be provided at all four corners.
• Two lifting hooks shall be provided in the generator room roof slab with adequate
capacity for lifting the generator set per manufacturer’s recommendations.
10.4.5.4 Exhaust System
The exhaust system shall conform with the following:

• The system shall be heavy duty, residential type, horizontally mounted exhaust silencer
with condensate drain valve and flanged couplings, as indicated.
• A suitable length of heavy-duty flexible-bellows-type stainless-steel exhaust adapter
shall be provided with flanged couplings at the engine manifold connection. The
minimum length of the adapter shall be 100-millimetres.
• All fittings and accessories shall be provided as required.
• Expansion joints shall be stainless steel, corrugated, and of suitable length to absorb
both vertical and horizontal expansion where required.
• Mounting channels suitable for floor mounting of muffler shall be provided.
• Long-radius 90° flanged elbow from flex to muffler supported from muffler shall be
provided.
• Insulation of exhaust system. The insulation of the exhaust system shall include and
conform to the following:
i. Asbestos-free, rigid, hydrous-calcium-silicate precision insulation shall be
provided, moulded in sections, and split ready for application.
ii. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.043W/Gn•K at 100°C.
iii. The density of the insulation shall not be less than 220 kg/m³ (13.8
lbs/ft³).
iv. The compressive strength of the insulation shall be 993 kPa (144 psi)
based on 38mm thickness of block.
v. The fire-hazard classification shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories
or equal regulatory organization, and shall not exceed the following:
a. Flame Spread Rating: 0
b. Smoked Development: 0
vi. The entire insulated exhaust system shall be aluminium jacketed.
vii. Insulation thickness shall be 125mm.
10.4.5.5 Fuel System
The fuel system shall include and conform to the following:

i. Fuel storage tanks: To API 650-1978, UL and or ADNOC specification.
Base tank (day tank): To UL S601-1975.
ii. A tank level float switch.
iii. Fuel-level gauge.
iv. The black iron feed and return lines shall terminate at a globe-type shut-off valve with
a flexible connection to engine.
v. A drain valve and end plug at the bottom of the day tank.
vi. A renewable cartridge-type day-tank filter.
vii. A fire valve and bronze-body gate valve at the day tank.
viii. Isolating valves on lines, bonze body.
ix. Fuel shall be provided for testing and tanks shall be left full on acceptance.
10.4.5.6 Cooling Air System
The cooling air system shall include, the following:

i. An engine ventilating system.
ii. The cold-air-inlet louver assembly.
iii. A replaceable air-intake filter.
iv. An outlet-duct-louver assembly.
v. A flange-mounted radiator with flexible-boot ductwork adapter.
10.4.5.7 Battery Charger
The battery charger shall include and conform to the following:

i. A wall-mounted battery charger for installation adjacent to the generator set suitable
for a nickel-cadmium (NiCd) battery.
ii. The equipment shall operate from a 230V AC power source provided in the generator
room.
iii. Standard features:
• Output regulation  0.5 percent for input variation of  10 percent from no load
to full load.
• Automatic current limiting.
• Transistor output regulator.
• Integrated circuit control.
• Convection cooled.
• AC and DC breaker protection.
• Ammeter accuracy to within 5 percent.
• Voltmeter accuracy to within 5 percent.
• On-off switch.
• Equalize charge timer.
• Equalize pilot lamp indicator.
• Output seven amps maximum to zero amps float charging.
• Potentiometer to adjust float and equalize setting.
• Input 230V 50Hz, single phase.
iv. The charger shall have a DC high-voltage alarm to indicate visually and audibly the
battery terminal voltage has reached a dangerous level.
v. The charger shall be capable of recharging the batteries to 80 percent rated capacity
after eight hours and to 100 percent after 24 hours.
vi. The connections to the battery shall be a minimum 6mm² copper with R90 XLPE
insulation.
10.4.5.8 Plant Emergency Stop Pushbutton
The plant emergency stop push button shall include and confirm to the following:
i. A cast ferroalloy enclosure with a 20mm hub at top.
ii. A yellow cover with black stripes, with break-glass seal over the pushbutton.
iii. An “EMERGENCY PLANT SHUTDOWN” nameplate with minimum 12mm high letters
painted steel edged in yellow with black stripes.
10.4.5.9 Finishes
Finishes to the generator set shall be as follows:

i. The alternator-mounted circuit-breaker panel and battery charger shall have a white
finish to the internal surfaces. The external surface shall match the engine and
alternator finish.
ii. The exhaust and inlet air hoods shall match the engine and alternator finish.
iii. All other ducts and racks shall be finished in grey.
iv. The Contractor shall furnish one litre of touch-up enamel identical to the items used
or as approved by The Department.
10.4.5.10 Equipment Identification
The Contractor shall provide equipment identification as follows:

i. Equipment identification shall be provided.
ii. The control panel shall include:
iii. Nameplates for controls such as alternator breakers.
iv. Nameplates for meters, alarms, indicating lights, and minor controls.
10.4.5.11 Fabrication
Fabrication of the generating unit shall be shop assembled and shall include:
i. Base
ii. Engine
iii. Alternator.
iv. Radiator and fan
v. Fuel and oil coolers.
10.4.5.12 Installation Works
The installation works shall include the installation and testing for the generating unit.
10.4.5.13 Installation of Generator Unit
Shall include the following:

i. Delivery of the engine generator set and accessories to site shall meet the applicable
requirements of Clause 2.
ii. Factory-trained technicians shall be provided as required to ensure that installation
is satisfactory and in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and as
specified herein.
iii. Installation requirements shall be coordinated with the structural works.
iv. Engine lubricating oil shall be provided.
v. All control wiring and switches shall be provided by the Contractor.
10.4.5.14 Testing of Generator Unit
The Contractor shall carry out performance tests on the generator set in accordance with the
following requirements.
i. The Contractor shall notify The Department 10 working days in advance of the test
date.
ii. The Contractor shall demonstrate the following:
• That all automatic safety shutdowns and alarms are functional.
• Unit start, transfer to load, retransfer to normal power& unit shutdown are
functional on “Automatic” control.
• Unit start and shutdown on “Manual” control.
• Unit start and transfer on “Test” control.
• Unit start on “Engine start” control.
• Operation of automatic alarms and shutdown devices.
iii. The Contractor shall run the unit on load for a minimum period of eight hours to show
the load-carrying ability, stability of voltage and frequency, adequate engine cooling,
and the ability of the cooling system to maintain room temperature rise over ambient
(outdoor) at 10°C or less.
iv. At the end of the test run the battery voltage shall be checked to demonstrate that
the battery charger has returned the battery to a fully charged state.
v. The Contractor shall provide a load bank for site tests.
vi. Prior to commencing the test, the Contractor shall inspect the generator set for the
following:
• Maintenance repair kit has been provided.
• That the repair kit is metric.
• Any loose connections in the wiring.
• That the generator set is clear dirt or foreign matter.
• That the set is in factory condition without any damage or corrosion.
• Mechanical fit and freedom from binding in the accessories and doors,
governor and fuel pump linkage, and all adjustable or sliding parts and
controls.
vii. Check for fuel, oil, and coolant leaks.
viii. Check guards and for security of installation.
ix. Check paint finish as per specification.
x. Check fuel in use.
xi. Data plates for equipment specifications, metric, operation.
xii. Quality of data plates.
xiii. Storage compartment for operations and maintenance manual, etc.
xiv. All items inside panel to be identified.
xv. Wire termination markers are tubular and non-aging.
xvi. Two sets of wire markers loose in panel.
xvii. Panel wiring to be AWG 14 and protected.
xviii. Check indicating lights for proper colour.
xix. Labelling on wiring for external connection.
xx. Panel doors are formed edges, locking (two keys), latching mechanism.
xxi. Fuel rack solenoid energized to run.
xxii. Alternator has:
• Openings screen protected.
• No cooling air trough terminal box.
• Terminal board in terminal box.
11 Definition of Terms
The following are definitions of terms used on the Contract plans and in the Abu Dhabi Lighting
Manual
Ambient Light: Light that is already present in a scene, prior to any additional light.
Average Initial Illuminance - The average level of horizontal Illuminance on the roadway
pavement area at the time the lighting system is installed when lighting is new and luminaires are
clean; expressed in average lux for the pavement area.
Average Luminance of the Road Surface (Lav) - The values of Lav are the minimum values to be
maintained throughout the life of the installation for the specified lighting classes as defined in
the Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual. They are dependent on the light distribution of the luminaires,
the luminous flux of the light source, the geometry of the installation, and on the reflection
properties of the road surface. Higher levels are acceptable when they can be environmentally or
economically justified.
Average Maintained Illuminance - The average level of horizontal Illuminance on the roadway
pavement when the output of the light source and luminaire is diminished by the maintenance
factors; expressed in average lux for the pavement area.
Binning - General term for the production and sorting methodologies used by LED manufacturers
to ensure that the LEDs they manufacture conform to stated specifications for forward voltage,
colour and luminous flux.
Ballast - An auxiliary device used with high intensity discharge (HID) lamps to provide proper
starting and operating characteristics. It limits the current through the lamp and may also regulate
the voltage.
Bonding Jumper - A reliable conductor to assure the required electrical conductivity between
metal parts required to be electrically connected.
Candela, cd - The unit of luminous intensity (the force generating the luminous flux).
Coefficient of Utilization, Cu - The ratio of the luminous flux (lumens) from the luminaire received
on the surface of the roadway to the total lumens emitted by the luminaire light source.
Conduit - A closed system of galvanized steel or PVC pipe to protect and carry electric cables.
Control Cabinet - An enclosure designed for surface or underground mounting and provided with
a frame on which swinging doors are hung and within which circuit protective and other electrical
devices are installed.
Cut-Off (or Shielding) Angle of a Luminaire - The angle between the vertical axis and the line of
sight at which the bare tight source is not visible.
Duct - A PVC pipe to protect and carry electric cable beneath footpaths, structures and roads
(concrete encased under carriageways)
Frame - An assembly consisting of all parts of the circuit breaker except the trip unit and the
terminal connectors.
Glare - The sensation produced by luminance within the visual field that is sufficiently greater
than the luminance to which the eyes are adapted to cause annoyance, discomfort or loss of visual
performance and visibility.
High Pressure Sodium Lamp - A high intensity discharge lamp in which light is produced by
excitation of inert gases Mercury-Sodium in an Xenon gas atmosphere.
Interrupting Current - The rated interruption current is the maximum current at rated voltage
which a device is required to interrupt under the specified conditions and with a normal frequency
recovery voltage not less than the rated voltage.
Isocandela Line - A line plotted on any appropriate set of coordinates to show directions in space
about a source of light in which the intensity is the same. A series of such curves, often for equal
increments of intensity, is called an isocandela diagram
Horizontal Lux - Lux measured in a horizontal plane.
Illuminance - The density of luminous flux incident on a surface; the quotient of the flux divided
by the area of the surface, when the surface is uniformly illuminated.
Luminaire - A complete unit consisting of the light source, control gear, together with the parts
designed to distribute the light, to position or protect the light source and power supply
connections
Light Emitting Diode (LED) - A p-n junction semiconductor device that emits incoherent optical
radiation when forward biased. The optical emission may be in the ultraviolet, visible, or infrared
wavelength regions.
LED Driver: A device composed of a power source and light emitting diode (LED) control circuitry
designed to operate an LED package (component), an LED array (module), or an LED Chip
Lighting Unit - The complete assembly of the light pole, luminaire, and in the case of a 30.5M high
light pole, the lowering device.
Longitudinal Uniformity of Road surface Luminance (Ul) - ratio of the minimum to the maximum
luminance in the longitudinal direction along the center-line of each lane. It applies to long,
interrupted sections of road
Lowering Device - A device used to lower the luminaire to within one meter from ground level for
inspection and servicing of luminaires on 30.5M high light poles as indicated on the Contract
plans.
Lumen, Lm - The unit of luminous flux. It is equal to the flux through a unit solid angle (steradian)
from a uniform point source of one candela (candle) or to the flux on a unit surface, all points of
which are a unit distance from a uniform point source of one candela.
Luminaire Dirt Depreciation - Luminaire Dirt Depreciation (LDD)-The ratio of lumens emitted from
a luminaire with dirt accumulated to the lumens emitted from the same luminaire when clean.
This factor is determined by the frequency of cleaning and the pollution category as per the Abu
Dhabi Lighting Manual
Luminaire Efficacy (Lumens per Watts) - )- is the Light output of an entire luminaire divided by
the total power consumed by the lamps and control gear. Equal to the lamp efficacy multiplied by
the light output ratio of the luminaire
Luminance (photometric brightness) - The quotient of the luminous flux at an element of the
surface surrounding the point, and propagated in directions defined by an elementary cone
containing the given direction, by the product of the solid angle of the cone and the area of the
orthogonal projection of the element of the surface on a plane perpendicular to the given
direction.
Lux, Lx - The international system (SI) unit of illumination. It is a unit of illumination equal to the
direct illumination on a surface that is everywhere one meter from a uniform point source of one
candela intensity or equal to one lumen per square meter.
Maintenance Factor - It is a depreciation factor which is applied to the calculated initial average
lux to determine the value of depreciated average illumination at a predetermined time in the
operating cycle, usually just prior to relamping.
Optic Factor - The amount of space the light source take up serves as an obstruction to light
leaving the fixture that is reflected internally. Since light sources absorbs mass, they absorb some
of this light output.
Overall Uniformity of Road Luminance (Uo) - Uo is the ratio of the minimum luminance at a point
to the average road surface luminance. This criterion is important as regards the control of
minimum visibility on the road.
Pavement Reflection Factor (or Reflectance) - The ratio of the light reflected by a pavement
surface to the light incident upon it.
Post Top Lighting Unit - A light pole with a short vertical shaft for mounting the luminaires.
Metal Halide Lamp - A high intensity discharge (HID) lamp in which the major portion of the light
is produced by radiation of metal halides and their products of dissociation - possibly in
combination with metallic vapours such as mercury. Includes clear and phosphor coated lamps.
Mounting Height - The vertical distance between the roadway or motorway surface and the
centre of the apparent light source of the luminaire.
Shoe Base - A low profile casting that connects the shaft to the pole base plate.
Slip Base - A pole base plate designed to slide off a lower plate on impact.
Spacing - For roadway lighting, the distance between successive lighting units, measured along
the centreline of the roadway or motorway.
Specular Glare - Glare resulting from light being reflected from polished or glossy surfaces.
Surround Ratio SR - is defined as the ratio of the average illuminance on a 5m strip adjacent to
the road compared with the average illuminance on road
Threshold Increment TI (fTI) - A measure of disability glare expressed as the percentage increase
in contrast required between an object and its background for the object to be seen equally well
with a source of glare present
Uniformity Ratio - The ratio of the Average Maintained Illuminance level to the Minimum
Maintained Illuminance level. The uniformity ratio is used as a design check to ensure lighting
performance.
Vertical Lux - Lux measured in a vertical plane.
Vertical or Brightness Control - The brightness control classification provides a means of rating
the luminaires according to the amount of glare or brightness at high angles from the luminaire.
The major categories are: cut-off, semi-cut-off, and non-cut-off
Part-1 Section-I
Electrical Testing
Part-1 Section I –Electrical Testing

Section-I, refer to the Part-1 Applicable Standards & Guidance References Section.
12 Electrical Testing Section Explanation
This Section is a detailed description of why we carry out Electrical Testing and the Methodology
and Pro-Forma to be completed. Electrical Testing is mandatory as per this manual and the
Department of Energy (DoE) Electricity Wiring Regulation (EWR).
The technical brief criteria developed within this Section aims to ensure the appropriate electrical
requirements are provided for the Electrical Network component of the Roadway Lighting. This is
to ensure that the Electrical Design elements of the roadway/parking network meets the
requirements of The Departments and the Department of Energy Electricity Wiring Regulations in
terms of safety and periodic testing.
The Electrical Testing is carried out –
• Prior to final energisation of the network.

• Periodically, no greater than every six (6) year intervals
All parts of the electrical network belonging to the Department must be tested and the
completed Pro-Forma returned to the Department Asset Management Section for Study and
initiation of any remedial work required.
12.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-I- Electrical Testing
e) Lighting and Electrical Design to identify circuit design, including cable selection,
fusing arrangements and installation methods.
f) Single Line Diagrams showing cable type, Cross Sectional Area (CSA), volt drop and
circuit length.
g) All grounding and bonding requirements
h) Electrical testing prior to full energization of the network and periodic testing at no
greater than 6 year intervals
i) Minor testing to be carried out when any alteration/addition to the network is carried
out.
j) Completed Pro-Forma to be submitted to the Department Asset Management Section
12.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-I- Electrical Testing
b) Final energisation of the network without the approval of the electrical testing.
c) Handover to the Department of the lighting network without approval of the
electrical testing
13.General Project Design Requirements & Responsibilities
13.1 General
The Emirate of Abu Dhabi has an extensive roadway lighting network that consists of the
roadway lighting poles and the associated electrical network. All roadway lighting electrical
networks will suffer from degradation over time due to usage, material breakdown, damage and
climatic conditions. As such, it is vitally important the network is inspected and tested to ensure
that it is in a safe condition and does not give rise to risk and hazards that may cause harm to
the public and those resources used to maintain the network. These regular inspections and
tests should be carried at a specified frequency and in such detail as to remove any danger as far
as reasonably practicable. This section details:
• The electrical network in detail

• The risks and hazards involved with the electrical network
• The frequency of the inspection, test and certification of the electrical network
• The inspection and testing criteria to be carried out
• The asset management requirements for record keeping
This document will provide the methodology for carrying out the electrical inspection, testing
and certification.
13.2 Electrical Network
The electrical network consists of the following items: -
1. Electrical Supply- (Owned and maintained by AADC/ADDC)

2. Roadway Lighting Cable Network
3. Roadway Lighting Control Cabinets
4. Roadway Lighting Electrical Cut-outs
5. Roadway Lighting Luminaires
6. Project Lighting Management System (PLMS)
13.3 Risk of Electrocution
All electrical networks are required to be inspected, tested and certified as safe as per the DoE
EWR. This inspection, testing and certification must be carried out prior to full energisation of
the circuits. It is also required periodically and when any alteration to the circuits has been
carried out, to ensure that the network is still in a safe condition. Cables and all other parts of
the electrical and mechanical system will deteriorate over time due to many factors, including
age, climatic conditions, location, installation methods, load, operation and maintenance
practices, etc.
The main reason for the inspection and testing is to ensure that all those who may come into
contact with the network are safe from electric shock and electrocution.
13.3.1 Electric Shock
When any electrical equipment is able to be accessed by members of the Public and by the
Maintenance Operatives, there is always the possibility that they can come into contact with the
live parts of the system and suffer an electric shock.
Figure 13.3.1 details the Current fault path to Earth. This completes the circuit, and the person
will suffer electrocution.
Figure 13.3.1- Current Fault Path to Earth
As shown in Figure 13.3.1, the flow of current in the body to Earth is the cause of electrocution.
Figure 13.3.2 details the magnitude of the current and the effects on the human body
Figure 13.3.2- Electrocution Levels
From Figure 13.3.2, it can be seen that the danger of electrocution and death starts from as low
as 25mA. In some cases, where the person in contact with the live electrical parts is a child or
has health issues, such as heart defects, the level can be even lower. Due to this extremely low
current level, it is important that we ensure that the electrical network is maintained in good
order and all possible risks are removed.
As well as the level of current passing through the body, electrocution is also affected by the
duration that the person is connected to the electrical supply. Figure 13.3.3 shows the
connection between current and duration of the electric shock.
Figure 13.3.3- Logarithmic Graph of AC Current and Time for Electrocution
13.3.2 Outcomes of Electric Shock
When the human body is subject to electric shock, there are many serious outcomes in terms of
adverse effects on the body. The outcomes can be: -
• Burns: Shocks can give rise to burns. An electric shock can result in superficial burns on
the surface of the skin and can give rise to internal burns. It can lead to organ burns that
can also affect the heart. Burns caused from electric shock are very different from
chemical and fire burns. The burns from an electric shock can result in organ failure and
can lead to death. It is difficult to treat these kinds of burns and the healing process is
usually slow and difficult.
• Neurological Effects: An electric shock can interfere with the nervous control especially
on the heart, lungs and brain. Uncontrollable shaking of the body and the development
of a stutter in the speech are also found in some cases.
• Effect on the Heart: When a small current is passed through the body, it can result in
ventricular fibrillation.
• Death
When a person is affected by an electric shock it can lead to:
• Collapse of the person.

• Severe muscle contractions that can result in fractures, loss of consciousness or
dislocation of joints.
• The respiratory system can be paralyzed and the heartbeat can either become very fast
and irregular or can completely stop beating.
• Any electric shock can cause death of tissues at the entry and the exit points of the
current. There can be the presence of oedema as the blood at the point coagulates and
the muscles swell up. Limbs may be required to be amputated.
• A drop in blood pressure resulting in a disturbance in the fluid and electrolyte balance
can cause the release of myoglobin and result in kidney failure.
It can clearly see from the list of health issues caused by electric shock; electricity is extremely
hazardous and must be installed and maintained in a safe manner.
14. Electrical Testing
To ensure that the risk of electric shock and the outcomes discussed in Section 11 are
minimised, it is important that the electrical installation is installed in the correct manner and
inspected and tested. This inspection and testing do not stop after the initial verification but
must continue on a periodic basis or when the electrical network is added to or amended in any
significant way. The DoE EWR states that Electrical Testing for Roadway Lighting will be set by
the Department and the Lighting Manual. The Lighting Manual states that the periodic testing
should not exceed 6 years and has considered: -
We can consider the list and provided explanations in Table 14.1.
Table 14.1- Network Criteria
Network Criteria Explanation
The type of installation and equipment Roadway Lighting – including subways,

tunnels and architectural lighting
Its use and operation Providing lighting for streets, tunnels and
beautification. Operation on daily basis.
The frequency and quality of maintenance Reactive maintenance only.
The external influences Harsh climatic conditions with high

temperatures and humidity. The presence of
salt and sand in the air and ground.
Access by the public Installed in streets, parks, etc. and therefore
access is possible at all times by the public.
The network is accessible by the public on a daily basis and as per the requirements of the Abu
Dhabi Lighting Manual where all applicable lighting networks will be installed with a CMS/PLMS
that requires the street lighting network to have a permanent electrical supply 24 hours a day
(this will depend on the individual Municipality’s CMS/PLMS policy).
14.1 Electrical Testing- Competency of Testers
A person must be competent to safely undertake periodic inspection and testing. A person is
deemed to be a competent person where, “having regard to the task he or she is required to
perform and taking account of the size or hazards (or both of them) of the undertaking or
establishment in which he or she undertakes work, the person possesses sufficient training,
experience and knowledge appropriate to the nature of the work to be undertaken.” Those
performing the inspection and testing must also be able to evaluate the test data and make
informed decisions on the continued operation, deterioration or non-serviceability of the
electrical installation. A qualified Electrician/Technician should have many of the competencies
required to inspect and test a standard 230Volt/400 Volt installation. However, maintaining that
competency will require continually keeping professional skills current. This may be achieved by
undertaking Continued Professional Development (CPD) to maintain familiarity with developing
knowledge within the industry. All persons working on the electrical network must be approved
by the relevant Authorities in Abu Dhabi to carry out such work.
14.2 Electrical Testing Requirements
The electrical testing must be carried out in a systematic and methodical manner to ensure that
the network is correctly assessed, and all documentation completed to allow the Department
Asset Management Team to have an up-to-date Database of the network condition. This will
allow the Department Asset Management Team to assist the Department Maintenance Section
in determining which parts of the network require to be replaced and to request the budget and
prepare the works programmes.
The electrical tests are in two distinct sections: -
• Non Energised
• Energised
The following Non-Energised tests should be carried out in sequence: -
• Visual Inspection
• Continuity of Protective Conductors
• Earth Electrode Resistance
• Insulation Resistance
• Polarity
The following Energised Tests should be carried out.
• Earth Fault Loop Impedance at Source (Ze) and at the end of the circuit (Zs)
• Volt Drop
All recorded values must be recorded on the Periodic Test, Inspection and Certification pro-forma
supplied and returned to the Maintenance and Asset Management Teams to allow review and the
update of the asset management Database.
14.2.1 Electrical Testing Warning Notice
Prior to any testing being carried out it is imperative that the Testing Operatives safety is
considered. To ensure that no accidental energisation of the Lighting Control Cabinet (LCC)
occurs, the Testing Operative must install a sign in the LCC stating-
“DO NOT ENERGISE AS CIRCUITS ARE UNDER MAINTENANCE. PLEASE CALL MOBILE
NUMBER (MOBILE NUMBER OF ELECTRICAL SUPERVISOR) FOR ANY QUERIES.”
THE CONTROL CABINET DOOR SHOULD ALSO BE LOCKED WITH A PADLOCK WITH A
UNIQUE KEY THAT IS RETAINED BY THE ELECTRICAL SUPERVISOR.
14.2.2 Visual Inspection- LCC & Lighting Pole
Visual Inspection of the Electrical System is the first step in determining the basic compliances
with the electrical regulations. The visual inspection as per Table 14.2.2.1 must be carried out by
a competent person with knowledge of the system they are working on and of the electrical
regulations. The visual inspection should cover the following items and be recorded on the Pro-
Forma – refer to Part 1, Section J- Pro Forma- Visual Inspection Pro-forma. Visual Inspection
items: -
Table 14.2.2.1- Visual Inspection Items and Descriptions

Inspection Item Description
Enclosures and Are all enclosures and barriers in place to prevent direct contact with live
Barriers parts;
• Pole door
• Contol Cabinet door
MCCB/MCB Rating • Is the MCCB/MCB Rating correct for the device it is protecting.
• Is the MCCB disconnection time set correctly (0.4 seconds)
Earth Connections • Do all cable glands and cutouts have supplementary bonding connected
to the Main Earth tag.
• Is there an Earth Cable looped between poles.
• Is the cable armour used as the Main Earthing
Cut-out condition • Is the cut-out in good physical condition.

• Does it show signs of corrosion, burning/arcing or damage.
• Is the cover in place and secured.
Incoming/Outgoing • Are the incoming/outgoing cables terminated into the cutout correctly.
cables • Is the SWA installed with Brass Glands or provided with earth clamps.
Incoming/Outgoing • Do the incoming/outgoing cables have any damage to the insulation.

Cables • Does the SWA show signs of corrosion.
• Is there evidence of insulation shrinkage.
• Is there evidence of burning or arcing.
Additional • Are there additional connections to the cut-out. (signs/pole mounted

connections signs/
• Are the additional connections through the same or separate MCB.
• Are the additional connections in an enclosure or can the live parts be
accessed.
• How does the cable for the additional supply reach the connection point.
• Are additional cables correctly installed.
14.2.3 Continuity of Protective Conductors
There are two reasons for providing a complete and continuous earthing system: -
• To protect against the danger to life through electric shock where the equipment
becomes live either through a fault or the potential difference between equipment parts,
• To ensure the rapid operation of the protective device in the event of earth fault currents,
which can lead to the cables or equipment going on fire if undetected.
The earthing system in street lighting networks can be: -
• A separate earth conductor (either in the cable or additional)- preferred

• The armour of the cable- not allowed in EWR but found in-situ
• A combination of both- where armour acts as supplementary bonding only
14.2.3.1 Continuity of Protective Conductors- Test Procedure
To carry out the test to ensure that there is continuity of the protective conductor the
competent inspector must use a Megohmmeter. Photo 14.2.3.1.1 shows a typical meter to be
used. The value of the measurement must be a short circuit return value.
Photo 14.2.3.1.1- Typical Megohmmeter
The inspector/tester will then carry out the procedure steps in Table 14.2.3.1.2.
Table 14.2.3.1.2- Continuity of Protective Conductor Test Procedure
Procedure Step Photo
Ensure that the requirements of Section 12.2.1 have been
complied with.
Open each Lighting Pole Door on the circuit under test and switch
the MCB(s) to the “OFF” position.
Disconnect the cable in the last pole from the cut-out terminals.
Disconnect the circuit cable in the control cabinet
Short Circuit the *RED Phase Cable to the Earth cable or armour
(depending on the method for earthing) in the lighting pole.
At the Control cabinet, set the meter to Ohms (Ω), connect the
meter across the RED phase cable and the Main Earth terminal.
The result should be Zero Ohms (0Ω)
Record the Reading in the Pro-forma provided. Refer to Part 1, Section J, Pro
Forma
Repeat the steps for each circuit
Note-* if the RED conductor and Earth connection provides an infinity reading, carry out the test
again using one of the other (BLUE or YELLOW) phases ensuring to short circuit at the end of
circuit. This is carried out to ensure that there is no open circuit fault on the RED phase cable.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide Electrical Testing Pro-Forma (Part 1, Section J) with
Earth Continuity figures showing Zero Ohmhs (0Ω)
14.2.3.2 Continuity of Cable Cores- Test Procedure
In some cases where an emergency has been reported, the maintenance team will find that a
cable has a fault on one phase only and as such every third light on the circuit is dark. To provide
a “quick fix” the maintenance team take the decision to temporarily disconnect the faulty phase
and add the load to the other remaining phases. This will ensure that all lighting will be
operational. However, these “quick fixes” are often forgotten and temporary becomes a
permanent solution. This will make an unbalanced load and as such the
• load on the breaker has increased beyond the design calculation

• 3 phase load becomes unbalanced and less efficient, consuming more power in the
circuit
This temporary solution cannot become a permanent solution under the EWR and the cable
issue must be resolved by replacing the section of cable.
To ensure that there is continuity of all conductors in the circuit, the procedure described in
Section 14.2.3.1 will be carried out for all conductors, including the Neutral, and the result input
into the Pro Forma.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide Electrical Testing Pro-Forma with Conductor

Continuity figures showing Zero Ohmhs (0Ω)
14.2.4 Earth Electrode Testing
Earth Electrodes are required at the Lighting Control Cabinet and at the end of each circuit.
This test is extremely important as it verifies the path to earth is of low resistance which: -
• Allows circuit protective devices such as MCCBs/MCBs to operate.

• Reduces the ground potential rise
• Provides a safe path to ground (earth) for fault currents, lighting strikes, static charges,
etc.
Electricity will always take the path of least resistance to earth and by providing the earth
electrode with low resistance we give the electricity the low path it requires. This is better than
a path through the human body which can cause serious issues with the human body- refer to
Section 11.
The Earth Electrode Testing method that will be considered in this manual will be.
• System Resistance Testing
14.2.4.1 Ground Electrode Impedance
The impedance from the earth electrode varies according to two main factors: -
• The resitivity of the surrounding soil mass – which is affected by the-

o composition of the soil in respect to whether it is clay, gravel, sand, etc.
o changes in the soil type that can occur over small distances
o mineral content- e.g. salt (common in this region)
o compression of the soil, which can change over time
o temperature- resitivity decreases with increasing temperature
o amount of buried metal in the surrounding area
o depth of the earth electrode
• The structure of the earth electrode
o through the material it is constructed from
14.2.4.2 Testing Methodology
To ensure ease of maintenance and safety, the chosen method for earth electrode system
resistance testing will be the “Stakeless / Clamp-On Method”. This method is chosen as it does
not require any additional earth electrodes to be installed or the disconnection of the earth
electrode from the electrical network.
14.2.4.3 Testing Procedure- Explanation
The “stakeless” or “clamp-on” method allows measurement of the impedance of a series loop of
ground electrodes. The test is simple, and it may be performed on an electrode that is
connected to a working electric service.
To make the measurement the tester uses a special transformer to generate a voltage on the
ground conductor at a unique test frequency. It uses a second transformer to distinguish the
test frequency and measure the resulting current through the circuit.
This method is carried out utilising the correct equipment for the application.
When you test a ground electrode using this method, you are actually testing a loop including:
• Electrode under test

• Ground electrode conductor
• The main bonding jumper
• The service neutral
• Utility neutral-to-ground bond
• Utility ground conductors (between poles)
• Utility pole grounds
Because this method uses the electricity supply earth connections as part of the circuit, it may
be used only after the service has been completely connected to the mains supply (although it is
still a non-energised test). In this method the clamp checks the continuity of the
interconnections of all of the components above. An abnormally high reading or an open circuit
indication on the instrument points to a poor connection between two or more of the
aforementioned critical components.
Figure 14.2.4.3.1- Diagram of Stakeless or Clamp-on Test
The earth resistance is to be as close to zero ohms as possible, an accepted figure for the earth
electrode resistance is a maximum of 20 Ohms. Where this figure is exceeded, the earth
electrode must be checked to ensure that the rod is not damaged and the soil around the rod is
sufficiently compacted. All earth connections must also be checked to ensure that they are
connected in the correct place and are all properly secured.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide Electrical Testing Pro-Forma with Earth Electrode
Testing figures showing ≤ 20Ω
14.2.5 Insulation Resistance Testing
All cables have insulation over the cores, between the cores and over the cables- please refer to
Diagram 14.2.5.1.
Diagram 14.2.5.1- Typical Construction of XLPE SWA cable (used in lighting electrical network)
Over time, the insulation deteriorates due to many factors such as: -
• Manufacturer of the cable

• Installation methods
• Heat
• Presence of water in the ground
• Salinity of the soil
• Acidity/Alkalinity of the soil
• Damage during installation or by others
When the insulation deteriorates it is then possible for leakage currents to be transferred
between the cores of the cable. This leakage current may not be sufficient to trip the circuit
protective devices, such as MCBs, MCCBs, etc., but can lead to electric shock and injury.
The complete electrical network associated with a roadway lighting network, includes the cable
network from the power supply company, AADC/ADDC, that distributes the power from the
substations to the street lighting control cabinets. Most TYPICAL electrical networks utilise a TN-
S system as shown in Diagram 14.2.5.2.
Diagram 14.2.5.2- Electrical Distribution TN-S
A TN-S system
T terre (French for earth) and meaning a direct connection to earth
N neutral
S separate.
This system has the supply source neutral directly connected to earth, the installation
metalwork connected to the earthed neutral of the supply source via the lead sheath of the
supply cable, and the neutral and protective conductors throughout the whole system
performing separate functions.
If the insulation resistance between the cores breaks down, refer to Diagram 14.2.5.3, and the
leakage current is transferred between Phase and Neutral, it will also be transferred between
the Neutral and the Earth in the substation (transformer) and as such all metal work that is tied
to earth in the roadway lighting circuit e.g., the lighting poles. This leakage current may not be
sufficient to trip the circuit protective devices such as MCBs and MCCBs but may be sufficient to
cause an electric shock to anyone in contact with the lighting poles. Please refer to Section 13
for the results of electric shock.
Diagram 14.2.5.3 – Electrical Leakage in Insulation
14.2.5.1 Insulation Resistance Test Procedure Methodology
The test procedure for Insulation resistance utilizes a megger and a set of simple tests. The
following procedures are carried out in sequence for each circuit.
Table 14.2.5.1.1- Insulation Resistance Test Procedure
Procedure Step Photo
1 Ensure that the steps shown in Sections 14.2.1 & 14.2.3.1 are still in place and all of
the MCBs in the Pole cut-outs are in the off position.
2 From the previous test- Continuity of Protective Conductors- the circuit will be
disconnected in the Control Cabinet.
3 Set the Insulation Resistance Tester (Megohmmeter) to 500v D.C.
4 Connect the Test leads to the circuit cable in the
following order
5 Phase to Phase Red to Yellow and take the reading
to be recorded in the Pro-forma
6 Phase to Phase Red to Blue and take the reading to be recorded in the Pro-forma
7 Phase to Phase Yellow to Blue and take the reading to be recorded in the Pro-forma
8 Phase Red to Neutral Black and take the reading to be recorded in the Pro-forma
9 Phase Yellow to Neutral Black and take the reading to be recorded in the Pro-forma
10 Phase Blue to Neutral Black and take the reading to be recorded in the Pro-forma
11 Phase Red to Earth and take the reading to be recorded in the Pro-forma
12 Phase Yellow to Earth and take the reading to be recorded in the Pro-forma
13 Phase Blue to Earth and take the reading to be recorded in the Pro-forma
14.2.5.2 Testing Results
The required minimum Resistance is one (1) Megohm (1,000 ohms).

Where the readings are found to be lower than the minimum requirement, the circuit fails and
must be marked for further breakdown to find the exact section of cable that is at fault (N.B. the
test has been carried out on the complete circuit at this present time).
14.2.5.3 Circuit Breakdown
Where the circuit fails the Insulation Resistance test, it will then be necessary to breakdown the
circuit to identify which section(s) of the cable require to be replaced. This can be a very simple
process which does not take long to accomplish. The procedure is carried out as follows: -
Table 14.2.5.3.1- Circuit Breakdown Procedure

Step No. Procedure
1 Locate the Middle of the circuit. Disconnect the two three phase cables and
ensure that the cable ends are not touching.
2 Carry out the Phase to Phase or Phase to Neutral or Phase to Earth test for the
failed test and identify if the failure is present in the first or second half of the
circuit.
3 Once the faulty half of the circuit is identified, carry out steps 1 and 2 again and
identify the half of the circuit where there is a fault.
4 Repeat the steps until the faulty section(s) are found. Most circuits can be broken
down in a maximum of five (5) steps.
5 The cable section that is faulty will require to be replaced. In cases where there
are multiple failures in the cable each section will require to be replaced.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide Electrical Testing Pro-Forma with Insulation

Resistance Testing figures showing ≥ 1,000Ω
14.2.6 Polarity
During the installation and subsequent termination of the street lighting cable network it is
important to ensure that the cables are connected together in the correct order. All cables must
be connected in the poles as follows: -
• Red Phase to Red Phase

• Yellow Phase to Yellow Phase
• Blue Phase to Blue Phase
• Neutral Black to Neutral Black
This is important as during any maintenance operation, the electrician must be assured that the
cable they are working on is connected correctly and will not become “live” when not expected.
14.2.6.1 Polarity Test Procedure Methodology
The polarity test is a simple test that uses the Megohmmeter on the Ohm setting. The test
procedure is detailed in Table 14.2.6.1.1.
Table 14.2.6.1.1.- Test Procedure for Polarity

Step No. Procedure Photo
1 Ensure that the steps shown in Sections 14.2.1 & 14.2.3.1 are still in place and all
of the MCBs in the Pole cut-outs are in the off position.
2 Select one Phase cable e.g., RED at the control cabinet.
3 At the end of the circuit, short circuit the RED Phase
to BLUE Phase.
4 At the control cabinet connect the Megohmmeter

test cables to the RED Phase and BLUE Phase and test
for a short circuit. Record the results in the Pro-forma
provided.
5 Carry out steps 3 and 4 for the other Phases and Neutral and record the results in
the Pro-forma provided.
The required testing result should be a short circuit showing Zero Ohms.
Where the short circuit is not found, this shows that there is an issue with the polarity and the
circuit must be further investigated. Table 14.2.5.3.1 can be used for this investigation.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide Electrical Testing Pro-Forma with Polarity Testing
figures showing Zero Ohm
14.2.7 Earth Fault Loop Impedance
Earth Fault Loop Impedance (EFLI) is found at the source of supply in the control cabinet and at
the end of circuit. The EFLI is a determining force to ensure that the circuit protective device
operates within the specified time and protects the cable network from faults due to over
current and subsequent burning. It also ensures that the fault current, that may be travelling
through a person who has come into contact with the electrical cables, is switched off as quickly
as possible which ensures that the person is in contact with the current for as short a time as
possible, this does not always remove the dangers of electrocution but can minimise the
outcomes.
there are two EFLIs to consider: -
• EFLI at source Ze
• EFLI at the end of the circuit Zs
14.2.7.1 EFLI (Ze) at Source
The Ze figure is normally managed by the Power Supply company, AADC/ADDC. During the
design stage the designer must contact the Power Supply company to discuss the expected Ze
value. Typically, for TN-S systems the Ze value can be considered as 0.8 Ohms (this may not be
the actual measured value on site).
14.2.7.2 Test Procedure Methodology for Ze
The test procedure for Ze utilises an Earth Loop Impedance meter (multi-function
Megohmmeters are available to cover the majority of electrical testing requirements).
Table 14.2.7.2.1 – Test Procedure for EFLI Ze at Source

Step Procedure Photo
No.
1 This test is carried out at the control cabinet
incoming supply. Disconnect the Earth cable
from the incoming supply to the main earthing
point in the control cabinet.
2 Using the EFLI meter probes, connect to the
incoming earth, phases (in sequence) and
neutral at the incoming supply point and
record on the Pro-forma
3 Once all readings are taken, reconnect the

main earth cable in the control cabinet
14.2.7.3 EFLI (Zs) at end of circuit
As discussed in Section 4.4, the Zs value is a calculation at design stage that looks at the Ze
figure and the Resistance of the cable Phase (R1) and Earth Cores (R2). The formula for
calculating Zs at the design stage is: -
Zs = Ze + (R1+R2) Ohms.
The Ze value determines the circuit protective device disconnection time for the final circuit.
Where an MCB is used as the circuit protective device we will consider instantaneous breaking
and the maximum disconnection time to be 0.4 seconds.
14.2.7.4 Test Procedure Methodology for Zs

This test is carried out using the EFLI meter and is carried out at the last pole in the circuit.
Table 14.2.7.4.1 – Test Procedure for EFLI Zs at end of circuit

No.
1 This test is carried out at the last pole in the

circuit. Remove the cut-out cover plate.
2 Using the EFLI meter probes, connect to the
incoming earth, phases (in sequence) and
neutral at the incoming supply point and
record on the Pro-forma
The required testing result should be input into the Pro-Forma and then compared against the
Data sheets and Logarithmic Tables for disconnection time for the MCCB/MCB being used.
Disconnection time to be maximum 0.4 seconds as per DoE EWR requirements
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide Electrical Testing Pro-Forma with test figures and
Pass/Fail.
14.2.8 Volt Drop
All cables have a resistance that increases with the length of the circuit, the cross-sectional area
of the cable and the circuit load. Where long circuits, such as street lighting circuits, with
sufficiently high loads are found, there will be a volt drop developed across the circuit.
The theory behind the volt drop is as follows:
Volt Drop Calculation
Every electrical cable has a resistance associated with the cable core. Due to this resistance the
circuit will drop (lose) voltage over the entire length of the circuit. ADDC allow for a 4% volt drop
over the circuit. If you use: -
• a three phase circuit this is 4% of 415V = 16.6V and
• single phase 4% of 230V = 9.2V
To determine the Volt, Drop the following must be considered: -
• Cable Volt Drop per Amp per Meter (Vd/A/m)- the Vd is normally shown in milliVolts (
mV) from cable catalogue
• Cable size – Cross Sectional Area (CSA)- from Design
• Circuit Current (I Amps)- from Design
• Circuit Length (L meters) – from Design
The calculation will be: -
Volt Drop (Vd) = Cable Volt Drop per Amp per Meter (mV/A/m) x Circuit current x Circuit length
1000
Vd = Vd/mA/m x I x L
1000
14.2.8.1 Test Procedure Methodology for Volt Drop
This test is carried out using a Voltmeter and is carried out at the control cabinet and the last
pole in the circuit. Table 14.2.8.1.1 provides the steps for measuring the volt drop in the lighting
circuit.
Table 14.2.8.1.1 – Test Procedure for Volt Drop
No.
1 Open the control cabinet and check the voltage across
the Phases and Neutral and record in the Pro-forma.
2 Go to the last pole in the circuit. Remove the cut-out

cover plate.
3 Using the Voltmeter probes, connect to the incoming
phases (in sequence) and neutral at the incoming
supply point and record on the Pro-forma
4 Once all readings are taken, ensure that the cut-out cover plate is securely fitted back
into place.
The required testing result should be input into the Pro-Forma and then compared against the
allowed volt drop figure and percentage.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide Electrical Testing Pro-Forma with test figures and
Pass/Fail.
15.Asset Management
Once the completed, the values from the periodic testing will be made available to two Sections
of the Department: -
• Maintenance Section
• Asset Management Section
15.1 Asset Management Department
The asset management department will ensure that all of the test results are input into the
Asset Management Data Base for comparison with the test results from the next testing cycle.
The database will also be updated when the assets are replaced and will show the installation
test results. The assets department will also assist in the preparation of the works programmes
for the periodic inspection and will inform the maintenance department when and where the
periodic testing will be required. This will assist the maintenance department in the preparation
of annual and monthly budgets.
15.2 Maintenance Department
The maintenance department will review the Pro-Forma for the periodic testing of the street
lighting network where the maintenance actions will be prioritised and programmes and
budgets prepared for discussion with the Senior Management. Priorities will include: -
• Replacing missing lighting pole doors

• Replacing electrical cut-outs that are damaged/missing covers/corroded
• Replacing missing earth electrodes and supplementary bonding
• Replacing cables that fail the Insulation Resistance tests
The maintenance department will then prepare programmes for the replacement of cables that
have failed or are near to failing insulation resistance required values.
Part-1 Section-J –Pro-forma
Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual – Version 3.0 July 2021

Part-1 Section J –Pro-forma
This Section provides Typical Pro-forma to be used during Design Submissions, Electrical and Structural
Testing and Site Inspections. The Pro-forma are typical and may be replaced by others specific to the
Municipality where the design, Testing and Inspection will occur.
They are designed as a memory aid during submissions and to allow the Design Reviewer to quickly see
that all information has been submitted. This will reduce the rejection of submissions and will reduce the
time for review and approval.
They are also designed to allow testing (initial and periodic) results to be retained by the Asset and
Maintenance Sections and will ensure that the assets are always up to date for testing and will be in a
safe condition, allowing the Department to fulfill their “Duty of Care” more easily and in a more proactive
and cost effective manner.
Appendix A- Lighting Design Certificate

DESIGN CERTIFICATE FOR ROAD LIGHTING
DETAILS OF NEW ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
(To be completed by the designer and submitted to the Department with Lighting Calculations.)
Location:
Project Code: Drawing Number:
Designed by: Position:

Lighting Design
Calculation 1 Calculation 2 Calculation 3 Calculation 4
Designed to
Lighting category
Road Type(s)/Conflict No.
Pole Arrangement
Mounting Height (meter)
Luminaire Overhang (meter)
Effective Width (meter)
Luminaire Type
Luminaire Wattage (W)
Luminaire Design Lumens
Maintenance Factor
Minimum Spacing (meter)
Maximum Spacing (meter)
Optic Setting
Software Used
Design Results
Calculated Eav/Lav (Lux/cd/m2)

(min S/max S)
Calculated Uo
(min S/max S)
Calculated Ul
(min S/max S)
Calculated TI (%)
(min S/max S)
Surround Ratio
(min S/max S)
I/we being the person(s) responsible (as indicated by my/our signatures below) for the design of the Lighting Installation for the above Project CERTIFY that the said work for which I/we
have been responsible is to the best of my/our knowledge and belief in accordance with the current Version of the Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual and the Department’s current Specification
for the installation of roadway lighting, except for departures, if any, stated in this certificate. The extent and liability of the signatory is limited to the work described above as the subject
of this certificate.
Departures
Designed By: Position: Date:

Checked By: Position: Date:
(Note: where additional calculations are required, additional pages can be used)
Appendix B- Electrical Design Certificate
DESIGN CERTIFICATE FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
DETAILS OF NEW ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(To be completed by Designer and retained in file with Electrical Calculations)
Project Name/ Location:
Project Code: Drawing Number: LCC No.
Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 3 Circuit 4
Cable Type:
Cable Size: mm2
Protective Device:
Total Load-Steady State: Watts Watts Watts Watts
Total Load-Steady State: Amps Amps Amps Amps
Total Load- In Rush: Amps Amps Amps Amps
Volt Drop End of Circuit Volts Volts Volts Volts
Disconnection Time >: Secs Secs Secs Secs
PSCC at End of Circuit: Amps Amps Amps Amps
E.F.L.I at End of Circuit:    
Total Circuit Length m m m m
Total Power: kW
Control Cabinet
Main Isolator : Protective Device: Rating:
ADDC Power Supply: No. of Phases: Method of Earthing:
I/we being the person(s) responsible (as indicated by my/our signatures below) for the design of the Lighting Electrical Installation for the above Project
CERTIFY that the said work for which I/we have been responsible is to the best of my/our knowledge and belief in accordance with the current Version
of the Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual, the Department’s current Specification for the installation of road lighting, the DOE Wiring Regulations and the IET
Regulations for Electrical Installations BS7671, except for any departures, if any, stated in this certificate. The extent and liability of the signatory is
limited to the work described above as the subject of this certificate.
Departures from Regulations
Name of Designer: Position:
Company:
Signature: Date:
Address:
On Behalf Of:
(Additional Pages to be used where more than 4 circuits)
Appendix C- Lighting Design Submission Checklist
DESIGN SUBMISSION CHECKLIST
Pole Height & Spacing

Roadway Type Pole Height (m) Pole Height (m) in Pole Spacing (m) Pole Spacing (m) in Comply (Y/N)
Required Design Required Design
Highways/Freeways/Major Arterials
Arterials/Secondary Arterials
Sector Internal/Access Lanes / Parking
Off Street Car Parks
Justification for any Departure from Standard
Lighting Levels – Table to be used for each road type/area to show full compliance across the ROW
Roadway Type LAV /EAV LAV Uo Uo Ul Ul SR SR TI% TI%
(cd/m2/Lux) (cd/m2/Lux Required Achieved Required Achieved Required Achieved Required Achieved
Min Required Min Achieved (≥) (≥) (≥) (≥) (≥) (≥) (≤)
Arterials
Secondary Arterials
+Sector Internal/*Access Lanes
Off Street Car Parks (+Low/Med/High Risk)
On Street Parking
Under Bridges
Cycle Lane/Path
Sidewalk/Pedestrian Footpath
Note- * Access Lane identified as either frontage lane or road with short length typically ending in dead end
+Strikethrough item NOT required
Conflict Area – Lighting Levels

Roadway Type EAV Required (Lux) EAV Achieved (Lux) Uo Required Uo Achieved Comply (Y/N)
Arterials
Secondary Arterials
Sector Internal/Access Lanes
Cross Walks
Appendix D- Design Submission Checklist
Concept Design Submission Checklist
Item No. Description of submission Submitted (Y/N/(N/A)) Approved

(Y/N/(N/A))
Concept Design Report
1 Cover Letter Describing the Project
2 Reference to Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual- Latest version
3 *Scope of Work – Roadway/Landscape/Public Realm/Sports/Tunnel
4 Lighting Levels to be used
(covering *ALL areas including road, sidewalks, cycle lanes, tunnels, sports area, landscape, paths, bridges, under-bridges, parking (on/off
street), conflict areas, others)
5 Pole arrangement(s)- *Single Sided, Median, Opposite
6 Pole Heights to be considered (any pole height OTHER than stated in the lighting manual MUST have a statement of why a departure from
standards is applied and justification)
7 Electrical Section showing understanding of- * cable type, cable size (CSA), earthing arrangement (separate or combined ECC),
Disconnection Time for MCCB/MCB to be achieved, Volt Drop Requirement
8 ADQCC Approval- statement of understanding
Optional
9 Lighting Calculations- Pole Height, Pole Arrangement, Lighting Level (refer to item 4), Pole Spacing, Bracket length and tilt
10 Luminaire Type, Data Sheets, ADQCC Certificates
11 PLMS/CMS
Note-*Strikethrough where NOT applicable
Concept Design - Comment Sheet from Reviewer
Item No. Comment Reference
Preliminary Design Submission Checklist
Item No. Description of submission Submitted Approved (Y/N)

(Yes/No/N/A)
Preliminary Design Report
1 Cover Letter Describing the Project with Concept Design Approval
5 Pole arrangement- *Single Sided, Median, Opposite
7 Light Loss Factor/Maintenance Factor calculation (LDD x LLD)
Lighting Calculations
8 Lighting Calculations Roadway- Completed Lighting Design Certificate (Appendix A), Pole Height, Pole Arrangement, Lighting Level
(refer to item 4), Pole Spacing, Bracket Length and Tilt
9 Lighting Calculations Conflict Area- Completed Lighting Design Certificate (Appendix A), Pole Height, Pole Arrangement, Lighting Level
(refer to item 4), Pole Spacing, Bracket Length and Tilt
Electrical Calculations
10 Electrical Calculation detailing- * cable type, cable size (CSA), earthing arrangement (separate or combined ECC), Disconnection Time for
MCCB/MCB achieved, Volt Drop.
Calculations submitted using Electrical Software
11 Electrical Calculations- Completed Electrical Design Certificate (Appendix B)
ADQCC
12 ADQCC Approval- Luminaire Compliance Certificates- are the models approved the same as shown on the lighting calculations
13 Luminaire Type & Data Sheets- are the models shown the same as shown on the lighting calculations and ADQCC certificates
Layout Drawings
14 Lighting Layout- spacing between poles, pole arrangement, pole height as per design calculations
15 Lighting Layout- Legend – LEDs will be referenced ONLY as Type A, B, C,.. or 1, 2, 3…,
(refer to item 4), Maintenance Factor, Pole Spacing, Bracket Length and Tilt
(refer to item 4), Maintenance Factor. Pole Spacing, Bracket Length and Tilt
18 Single Line Diagrams- do SLDs match the electrical calculations
19 Standard Details- Are Standard Details relevant to the project (pole height, Control Cabinet, trenching, etc.)
PLMS/CMS
20 PLMS/CMS- fully compliant with the requirements of the Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual
Preliminary Design - Comment Sheet from Reviewer
Detailed Design Submission Checklist
Item No. Description of submission Submitted Approved (Y/N)

(Yes/No/N/A)
Detailed Design Report
1 Cover Letter Describing the Project with Preliminary Design Approval
5 Pole arrangement- *Single Sided, Median, Opposite
7 Light Loss Factor/Maintenance Factor calculation (LDD x LLD)
8 Light Pollution Mitigation – has Light Pollution Table been referenced in the report
Lighting Calculations
(refer to item 4), Maintenance Factor, Pole Spacing, Bracket Length and Tilt
(refer to item 4), Maintenance Factor. Pole Spacing, Bracket Length and Tilt
Electrical Calculations
11 Electrical Calculation detailing- cable type, cable size (CSA), earthing arrangement (separate or combined ECC), Disconnection Time for
MCCB/MCB achieved, Volt Drop.
Calculations submitted using Electrical Software
12 Electrical Calculations- Completed Electrical Design Certificate (Appendix B)
ADQCC
13 ADQCC Approval- Luminaire Compliance Certificates- are the models approved the same as shown on the lighting calculations
14 Luminaire Type & Data Sheets- are the models shown the same as shown on the lighting calculations and ADQCC certificates
Layout Drawings
15 Lighting Layout- spacing between poles, pole arrangement, pole height as per design calculations
16 Lighting Layout- Legend – LEDs will be referenced ONLY as Type A, B, C,.. or 1, 2, 3…,
17 Conflict Area- is each Conflict Area identified (Alpha Numeric Code) and corresponding Lighting Calculation Provided – if ALL criteria
(pole position, road dimensions, area, etc.) are the same, Conflict Areas can be grouped. Typical calculations are not permitted.
18 Lighting Layout- Legend- Cable type identified, ECC Identified, Control Cabinet Identified, Proposed/Existing clearly identified
19 Single Line Diagrams- do SLDs match the electrical calculations
20 Standard Details- Are Standard Details relevant to the project (pole height, Control Cabinet, trenching, etc.)
PLMS/CMS
21 PLMS/CMS- fully compliant with the requirements of the Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual
Light Pollution Mitigation Report

22 Light Pollution Mitigation report- has this been provided and does it cover ALL lighting to be installed.
Detailed Design - Comment Sheet from Reviewer
Appendix E- Electrical Testing Certificate
Appendix F- Site Inspection Checklist

Site Inspection Pro-forma- Roadway/Landscape/Parking/Public Realm Lighting
Project Name Site Visit Date:

Drawing No. Inspector Name
Status- Satisfactory ✓ Unsatisfactory X Not Applicable N/A
Status Item Description
(✓/X/N/A) No.
Control Cabinet
1 Control cabinet as per shop drawings and material approval
2 Location of control cabinet as per shop drawings
3 Control cabinet foundations as per shop drawings (re-bar provided)
4 Control cabinet vertical/horizontal alignment
5 Main Earth cable installed/correctly terminated in control cabinet
6 Control cabinet numbering/warning signs as per ADM requirement
Lighting Pole
1 Location and level of lighting pole foundations as per shop drawings
2 Depth of lighting pole foundations as per shop drawings
3 Construction of lighting pole foundations as per shop drawings (re-bar provided)
4 Lighting pole vertical alignment
5 Luminaire model/type installed as per shop drawings and material approval
6 Luminaire orientation correct
7 Lighting pole bracket as per shop drawings (length/tilt)
Electrical Works
1 Depth of ducting correct (*footpath/verge/road crossing)
2 Ducting material as per shop drawings
3 Cable as per shop drawings and as material approval
4 Earth Continuity Conductor (ECC) installed/correctly terminated in the lighting pole
5 Cut-out as per shop drawings and material approval
6 Termination of cable in cut-out correct
7 Phasing of cables to luminaire identified and as per shop drawings
8 Supplementary earth bonding installed/correctly terminated
9 Cable installed from cut-out to Luminaire installed/correctly terminated
10 MCB rating as per shop drawings
11 Location and level of access chamber as per shop drawings
12 Earth electrode as per shop drawings and material approval
13 Earth electrode installed correctly and connected (*control cabinet/pole)
* strike through as required
Consultant Name: Consultant Date:

Signature:
Contractor Name: Contractor Date:
Signature:
Non-Conformities
Item No. Description Remedial Works
Rectification of Non-Conformities
Consultant Name: Consultant Date:

Signature:
Contractor Name: Contractor Date:
Signature:
Appendix G- Light Pollution Mitigation


Roadway Roadway
Landscape Landscape

00.00 hrs. 07.00 hrs.
00.00 hrs. 07.00 hrs.

Signature Signature
Date Date
**Where Typical Streets are used, they must be identical for the lighting proposed. Where multiple Typical streets are used,
they must have a unique reference number and be clearly marked on the Project drawings.
Appendix H- Luminance Measurement
Appendix I- Illuminance Measurement- Roads/Footpath/Cycle Track/Jogging Track
Appendix J- Illuminance Measurement (2)- Conflict/Irregular Shaped Areas
Appendix K- Lighting Pole Condition Classification

Area Item Item Condition SIF 100 Condition Classification
No
Descriptions and scoring
1 – Good 2 – Fair 3 – Poor 4 – Bad

1 Base Plate No indication of Minor internal Layers of rust with Support leaning or
corrosion on Plate of corrosion and signs metal or bolt structurally damaged
Bolts of bolt corrosion corroded
Score
2 Base Compartment No indication of Minor internal and Layers of rust or poor Layers of rust or
corrosion on base external corrosion foundation damaged
Score
3 Door Opening Opening in good Minor Signs of Lock and hinges Door missing, Hinges /
condition corrosion showing signs of Lock broken. Metal
wear. Door in place around door split.
but secured by
A wire/tape
Score
4 Internal Compartment No indication of Minor internal Layers of rust Layers of rust and thin
corrosion corrosion wall
Score
5 Shaft No signs of corrosion Rust spots or 25% external rust 60% external rust
protective coating cover cover or structurally
removed damaged
Score
6 Illegal Attachment No attachments attachments
Score
7 Bracket Shaft Interface Good condition and Minor signs of Missing bolts /grub Extensive cracking
sealed corrosion or loose screws around bolt / grub
shaft joint screw holes and
B misalignment
Score
8 Elbow Good condition Minor signs of Web showing signs of Extensive cracking
corrosion stress splits
Score
9 Bracket Web Good condition Minor signs of Web showing signs of Extensive cracking
C corrosion stress splits
Score
10 Luminaire Fixing Luminaire attached Luminaire misaligned
correctly or hanging
Score
11 Bowl / Lens Good lens seals and Signs of decay to Signs of moisture UV damage to
bowl clarity seals and bowl/lens dust ingress lens/bowl reducing
wear light output
Score
12 Gear/Wiring Good electrical Untidy wiring Insulation shrinkage Wiring showing
integrity or poor bonding burning or damage
Score
D 13 Node Good condition Damaged
Score
14 Cut-out Cut-out in good Cut-out showing Damage to cut-out Cover missing from
condition corrosion cutout
Score
15 Door in place / missing Door in place Door held on by steel Door held on by wire Door missing
banding or tape
Score
16 Wiring / Earthing Good electrical Untidy wiring Insulation shrinkage Wiring showing
integrity or poor bonding burning or damage
E Score
17 Door Lock / Hinge Lock and Hinge ok Minor wear to lock Damage to lock and Broken lock or hinges
or hinges hinges
Score
Appendix L- Lighting Pole Structural Inspection Form

Structural Inspection Form- SIF 001

Road:
Date: Location:
Pole Type (Type) Protection (Prot) Material (Mat) Bracket Length Condition
TP Tapered G Galvanised S Steel 0.5P 0.5m Projection 1 GOOD
OC Octagonal G & RP G+Root Protection A Aluminium 1.0P 1.0m Projection 2 FAIR
1.5P 1.5m Projection 3 POOR
4 BAD
See SIF 100 FOR CONDITION
CLASSIFICATION
Pole Details Area A- Base Compartment Area B- Shaft Area C- Bracket Area D- Luminaire Area E- Electrical Integrity
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Pole Ref. Type Prot Mat Base Base Door Int Shaft Att Shaft/ Elbow Brkt- Fix Bowl Wire Node Cutout Door Wire Lock
No. Plate Brkt web
Appendix M- Lighting Pole Wall Thickness Measurement
Pro-forma – SIF 002

Wall Thickness Measurement – Structural Inspection Form -- SIF 002

Pole ID: Road:
Date: Location:
Measurement Area ID Measurement Thinnest
Code (mm) Point
A
B
BASE
C
D
E
F
DOOR
G
H
1
FROM BASE
THINNEST
2
POINT
3
4

Part-1 - Applicable Standards & Guide References
Part-1 Applicable Standards & Guidance References

The following documents where applicable and/or as invoked specifically, shall be followed with
regards to the Lighting Manual Part-1 Sections A to H. Any versions listed (or equivalent
International approved documents) that are superseded by either updated versions or by
alternative documents, if and when they become available, the latest applicable versions/editions
always shall be obtained and referred to.
A. Abu Dhabi Standards & Guidance

1. DMT Abu Dhabi Sustainable Lighting Strategy
2. DMAT Public Realm & Street Lighting Handbook
3. The Abu Dhabi Guide to Infrastructure Standards - www.qcc.abudhabi.ae
▪ Energy Infrastructure Chapter
▪ Public Realm Infrastructure Chapter
▪ Transport Infrastructure Chapter
Along with the following specific unified manuals, standards, codes,
specifications, guides and other documents encompassed by and referenced
within these Chapters:
▪ Urban Street Design Manual (USDM)
▪ Public Realm Design Manual (PRDM)
▪ Utility Corridors Design Manual (for Utilities in Urban Areas)
▪ Right of Way Utilities Distribution Manual (for Main Roads)
▪ Walking & Cycling Master Plan – Network Design
▪ Standard Specifications for Roads – Volumes 1 to 3
▪ Standard Drawings for Roads Projects
▪ Roadway Design Manual
▪ Consultant Procedure Manual
▪ Standard Scope of Services for Roads Projects Consultants
▪ Road Safety Audit Manual
▪ Quality Assurance & Quality Control – Requirements for Roads Projects
▪ Environmental, Health & Safety Manual for Road Projects
▪ Sustainability Guideline Standards
▪ Roadside Design Guide
▪ Road Structures Design Manual
▪ Road Geometric Design Manual
▪ Pavement Design Manual
▪ Roadside Advertising Manual
▪ Manual for Uniform Traffic Control Devices
▪ Traffic Signals and Electronic Warning & Information Systems
▪ Safety & Security Planning Manual
▪ Non-Disruptive Road Crossings
▪ Guide Drawings on Locating Bus Stops on Urban Roads
▪ Technical Circular – Bus Stop Design Standard Drawings
▪ Road User Code
▪ Standard Bill of Quantities
▪ Project Cost Estimating Manual
▪ Project Risk Management Manual
▪ Landscape Design Guidelines, Standard Drawings, Specifications and
O&M Guidelines and Specifications
▪ Irrigation Manuals – Volumes I to IV
▪ Stormwater Design Manual, Standard Drawings, O&M & Technical
Specifications
4. Department Sustainable Project Rating Schemes
For Abu Dhabi City Municipality (ADM):
▪ Abu Dhabi Sustainable Roads Rating System (SRRS) (latest version)
5. Department Project Value Engineering Requirements
▪ Value Engineering Guidelines (VEG) (latest version)
6. Estidama-Pearl Community Rating System (latest version)
7. Estidama-Pearl Public Realm Rating System (latest version)
8. Estidama-Submittal User Guides – PQP
9. UPC Interim Coastal Development Guidelines (ICDG)
10. UPC Al Bateen Waterfront Design Guidelines
11. ADDC/AADC Standard Technical Specifications for Electrical Works
12. Abu Dhabi Regulation & Supervision Bureau - The Electricity Wiring Regulations
13. Telecommunications Regulatory Authority (TRA) Technical Standards
14. UAE Fire & Life Safety Code of Practice
B. International Standards & Guidance

1. CIE S 017/E ILV: International Lighting Vocabulary
2. ANSI/IES RP-16 Nomenclature & Definitions for Illuminating Engineering
3. Illuminating Engineering Society: The Lighting Handbook Reference and
Application – 10th Edition
4. The Society of Light and Lighting : The SLL Lighting Handbook
5. The Society of Light and Lighting: The SLL Code for Lighting
6. ISO 9001: Quality Management System – Requirements
7. ISO 80000 Quantities and Units (SI units)
C. Lighting Maintenance & Measurement

2. CIE 140 Road Lighting Calculations
3. CIE 154 The Maintenance of Outdoor Lighting Systems
4. CIE 194 On-site Measurement of the Photometric Properties of Road and Tunnel
Lighting
5. BS 667: Illuminance Meters. Requirements and Test Methods
6. ISO/CIE 19476 Characterization of the Performance of Illuminance Meters and
Luminance Meters
7. EN 13201-Road lighting-Part 4 Methods of measuring lighting performance
8. IES/IESNA DG-4 Design Guide for Roadway Lighting Maintenance
9. BS 5489 Design of road lighting. Lighting of roads and public amenity areas.
Code of practice
D. Mechanical/Material
2. EN/ANSI/IEC 60529 Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code for
Ingress Protection)
3. EN/ANSI/IEC 62262 Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures for Electrical
Equipment Against External Mechanical Impacts (IK Code)
4. ANSI C136.31-Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment-Luminaire Vibration.
5. EN/IEC 60068-2-68-2 L Environmental Testing – Part 2-68: Tests – Test L: Dust
and Sand
6. ASTM B117 Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
7. ASTM D1654 Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated
Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments
8. ISO 9227 Corrosion Tests in Artificial Atmospheres. Salt Spray Tests
9. ISO 8289 Vitreous and Porcelain Enamels - Low voltage Test for Detecting and
Locating Defects
10. ISO 4892-1 Plastics - Methods of Exposure to Laboratory Light Sources -- Part 1:
General Guidance
11. ISO 3522 - BS EN 1706 Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys - Castings - Chemical
Composition and Mechanical Properties
12. ASTM A153/A153M Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron
and Steel Hardware
13. ASTM D4956 Standard Specification for Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic
Control
14. Stainless Steel Specification /Designation to ASTM-SAE or aligned equivalent
grades
E. Electrical
General
1. IEC 60050 International Electro-technical Vocabulary (IEV)
Electrical & Material Safety:
2. EN/IEC 60598-1 Luminaires. General Requirements and Tests
3. EN/IEC 60598-2-1 Luminaires. Part 2: Particular Requirements. Section One:
Fixed General Purpose Luminaires
4. EN/IEC 60598-2-3ed3.1 Particular Requirements - Luminaires for Road and
Street Lighting
5. BS EN 61140+A1:2006/IEC 61140 Protection against electric shock. Common
aspects for installation and equipment
6. Emirates Authority for Standardization and Metrology (ESMA) Conformity
Assessment System for Lighting Products (latest version)
7. IEC 61347-1 Lamp Control Gear. General & Safety Requirements
8. IEC 61347-2-13 Lamp Controlgear - Part 2-13: Particular Requirements for d.c. or
a.c. Supplied Electronic Controlgear for LED Modules
9. IEC 62384+A1 dc or ac Supplied Electronic Control Gear for LED Modules.
Performance Requirements
10. IEEE STD C62.41.2 IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in
Low-Voltage (1000v and Less) AC Power Circuits
11. RoHS-2 Directive 65/EU (Recast RoHS-1) Restriction of Hazardous Substances
Directive…in Electrical and Electronic Equipment
Electromagnetic Compatibility:
1. EN/IEC 61547ed.2.0 Equipment for General Lighting Purposes - EMC Immunity
Requirements (Surge Protection)
2. IEEE/ASNI C62.41.2 IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges
in Low-Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits
3. EN/IEC 61000-3-2ed4.0 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-2: Limits -
Limits for Harmonic Current Emissions
Limitation of Voltage Changes, Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker in Public Low-
Voltage Supply Systems
5. IEC CISPR-15 - EN 55015 Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio
Disturbance Characteristics of Electrical Lighting and Similar Equipment
6. NEMA ANSI C82.77 Harmonic Emission Limits – Related Power Quality
Requirements for Lighting Equipment
7. IEEE 519 Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in
Electrical Power Systems
F. Light Emitting Diode (LED)

LED Manufacturing, Testing, Photometry & Measurement:
1. ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377 – American National Standard for Electric Lamps—
Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting (SSL) Products
2. IEC 62717ed1.0 LED Modules for General Lighting - Performance Requirements
(cancels and replaces IEC PAS 62717 published in 2011)
3. IES/IESNA LM-80 Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED
Light Sources
4. CIE-127 Measurement of LEDs
5. JEDEC JESD22-A108D Temperature Bias and Operating Life
6. JEDEC JESD51-5 Extension of Thermal Test Board Standards for Packages with
Direct Thermal Attachment Mechanisms
7. JEDEC JESD51-50 Overview of Methodologies for the Thermal Measurement of
Single and Multi-chip, Single and Multi-PN-Junction Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
8. JEDEC JESD51-51 Implementation of the Electrical Test Method for the
Measurement of Real Thermal Resistance and Impedance of Light-Emitting
Diodes with Exposed Cooling Surface
9. JEDEC JESD51-52 Guidelines for Combining CIE 127 Total Flux Measurements
with Thermal Measurements of LEDs with Exposed Cooling Surface
10. JEDEC JESD51-53 Terms, Definitions and Units Glossary for LED Thermal Testing
11. CIE-15Colorimetry Technical Report
12. EN/IEC 62471-2 Photobiological Safety of Lamps and Lamp Systems
G. LED Luminaire Performance

General:
1. CIE-140 Methods of Calculation
Luminaire Testing, Photometry & Measurement:
2. Abu Dhabi Quality and Conformity Council (QCC) Abu Dhabi Certification
Scheme for LED Exterior Lighting Fixtures (Luminaires) (latest version)
3. CE Product Certification: 92/59/EEC (General Product Safety) & 73/23/EEC
Guidelines to Low Voltage Directive (LVD)
4. UL Product Certification: UL 1598, Luminaires
5. IES/IESNA LM-79 Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements
of Solid-State Lighting Products
6. IEC 62722-2-1ed1.0 Luminaire performance - Part 2-1: Particular requirements
for LED luminaires
7. EN 13032-1 Light and Lighting. Measurement and Presentation of Photometric
Data of Lamps and Luminaires. Measurement and File Format
8. EN 13032-4 Light and Lighting - Measurement and Presentation of Photometric
Data of Lamps and Luminaires Part 4: LED Light Sources and Luminaires (once
approved; used in conjunction with EN 13032-1)
9. IES/IESNA TM-21 Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light
Sources + Addendum A: Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED
Packages
10. IES/IESNA LM-82 LED Light Engines and LED Lamps for Electrical and
Photometric Properties as a Function of Temperature
11. IES/IESNA LM-84 Measuring Luminous Flux and Color Maintenance of LED
Lamps, Light Engines and Luminaires
12. IES/IESNA TM-28 Projecting Long-Term Luminous Flux Maintenance of LED
Lamps and Luminaires
13. IEC 60068-2-6 ed.07 Environmental Testing - Part 2-6: Tests - Test Fc: Vibration
(sinusoidal)
14. EULUMDAT Photometry file – European data file format used for Specification
of photometric data. The file extension is .ldt
15. IES Photometry file – North American data file format used for Specification of
photometric data. The file extension is .ies
Photobiological Safety of Lamps and Lamp Systems:
2. ANSI/IESNA RP-27.3 Recommended Practice for Photobiological Safety for lamps
– Risk Group Classification
H. Lighting Design
Roads & Bridges:
2. ANSI/IES RP-8 Roadway Lighting
3. IESNA DG-21 Design Guide for Residential Street Lighting
4. CIE 115-2nd-Edition Lighting of Roads for Motor and Pedestrian Traffic
5. BS 5489-1 Code of Practice for Design of Road Lighting
6. BS-EN/CEN 13201-Road lighting-Part 2: Performance requirements (Road
Lighting ME/MEW Classes)
7. IES TM-15+ Addendum A Backlight, Uplight, and Glare (BUG) Ratings
Tunnels:
2. ANSI/IES RP-22 Tunnel Lighting
3. CIE 88 Guide for the Lighting of Road Tunnels and Underpasses
4. CEN/CR 14380 Lighting Applications - Tunnel Lighting
5. BS-EN/CEN 5489-2 Code of practice for the design of road lighting. Lighting of
tunnels
6. CIE 193 Emergency Lighting in Road Tunnels
7. BS-EN 16276 Evacuation Lighting in Road Tunnels
Interchanges:
2. ANSI/IES RP-8 Roadway Lighting (Conflict Areas)
3. CIE 115-2nd-Edition Lighting of Roads for Motor and Pedestrian Traffic (Zones of
Conflict)
Lighting CE Classes)
5. BS-EN/CEN 5489-1 Code of Practice for Design of Road Lighting
Roundabouts:
3. IES DG-19 Design guide for Roundabout Lighting
4. CIE 115 Lighting of Roads for Motor and Pedestrian Traffic (Zones of Conflict)
Pedestrian Crossings:
2. ANSI/IES RP-8 Roadway Lighting (Conflict Areas & Interaction)
3. CIE 115 Lighting of Roads for Motor and Pedestrian Traffic
Lighting EV Classes)
Parking:
2. IES RP-20 Lighting for Parking Facilities
3. PD CEN/TR 13201-1 Road lighting. Guidelines on Selection of Lighting Classes
Outdoor Work Places:
2. CIE 129 Guide for Lighting Exterior Work Areas
3. EN 12464-2 Light and Lighting. Lighting of Work Places. Outdoor Work Places
Signage Lighting:
1. IESNA RP-19, Roadway Sign Lighting,
2. BS EN 12899-1- Fixed, Vertical Road Traffic Signs
Light Pollution Mitigation:
3. IESNA RP-33, Lighting for Exterior Environments,
4. IESNA TM-10 Addressing Obtrusive (Urban Sky Glow and Light Trespass)
5. CIE 126 Guidelines for Minimizing Sky Glow
6. ILP Guidance Notes for the Reduction of Obtrusive Light
7. CIBSE/SLL Guide to Limiting Obtrusive Light
10. UPC, Abu Dhabi Safety and Security Planning Manual, P4 Lighting Surveillance
I. Solar Street Lighting

General:
2. ISO 9488 Solar Energy – Vocabulary
3. ASTM E772 Standard Terminology Relating to Solar Energy Conversion
Solar PV Systems and Components:

1. IEC 61215-1 Thin-Film Terrestrial Photovoltaic (PV) Modules - Design
Qualification and Type Approval
2. IEC 61730-1ed1.2 Consol. with am1&2 - Photovoltaic (PV) Module Safety
Qualification – Part 1: Requirements for Construction.
3. IEC 62093ed1.0B Balance-of-System Components for Photovoltaic Systems -
Design Qualification Natural Environments
Batteries:
1. IEC 60050-482 (IEV) Chapter 486: Secondary Cells and Batteries
2. IEC 60086-1ed11.0 Primary Batteries – Part 1: General
3. IEC 60086-2ed12.0 Primary batteries - Part 2: Physical and electrical
Specifications
4. IEC/EN 60896-11ed1.0- Stationary lead-acid batteries - Part 11: Vented types -
General requirements and methods of tests
5. IEC/EN 60896-21 Stationary Lead Acid Batteries, Valve-Regulated Types:
Methods of Test
6. IEC/EN 60896-22ed1.0 Stationary Lead Acid Batteries, Valve-Regulated Types:
Requirements
7. IEC/EN 61951-2ed3.0b: Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or
other non-acid electrolytes - Portable sealed rechargeable single cells - Part 2:
Nickel-metal hydride
J. Economic/Cost - Life-Cycle Analysis

1. ISO 15686-5 Buildings and constructed assets -- Service-life planning
-- Part 5: Life-cycle costing
K. Lighting Controls/PLMS
1. EN 60950 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment.
2. IEEE 802.15.4a - Wireless Personal Area Network (WPAN)
3. IEC 62386 - DALI Standards
4. DMX512 Standards
Part-2 Contents
Section A – Lighting for Parks and Public Realm

1. Section Explanation………................................................................................................443
1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-2 Section-A……….................................443
1.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-2 Section-A………........................ 444
2. General Project Design Requirements & Responsibilities..................444
3. LED Luminaires………………………………………………………………………………………………………………445
3.1 General Requirements....................................................................................................445
3.2 AD Quality Mark (QCC Exterior LED Luminaire Certification)...........................445
3.3 LED Luminaire Technical & Material Requirements (QCC aligned).….............446
3.3.1 General
3.3.3 LED Binning
3.3.13 Project Lighting Management Requirements
3.3.16 Warranty
4. Project Lighting Design Requirements………………………………………………..…………454
4.1 Appraisal………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 454
4.2 General Design Considerations…………………………………………………………………………………454
4.3 Schedule of Lighting Levels……………………………………………………………………......................457
4.4 External Architectural Lighting……………………………………………………….……......................458
4.5 Maintenance Factors…..……………………………………………………………………...........................460
4.6 Project Lighting Design Calculations…………………………………………………...................... 462
5. Project Site Verification Requirements………………………………………………….…… 463
5.1 Lighting Level Verification…………….………………………………………………………………….……. 463
5.2 Project Harmonic Measurement…………………………………………………………………….……. 463
6. Power to Landscape and Public Realm Lighting…………..………………….…… 464
6.1 Control Cabinet Requirements…...………………………………………………………………….……. 464
6.2 Landscape and Public Realm Lighting Control………………..………………………….……. 464
6.3 Landscape and Public Realm Lighting Control-DMX……..………………………….……. 464
Part-2 Contents
Section B – Sports Area Use Lighting

1. Section Explanation………................................................................................................467
1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-2 Section-B……….................................467
1.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-2 Section-B….….….......................468
2. General Project Design Requirements & Responsibilities..................468
3. LED Luminaires………………………………………………………………………………………………………………469
3.1 General Requirements....................................................................................................469
3.2 AD Quality Mark (QCC Exterior LED Luminaire Certification)...........................469
3.3 LED Luminaire Technical & Material Requirements (QCC aligned).….............470
3.3.1 General
3.3.3 LED Binning
3.3.16 Warranty
4. Project Lighting Design Requirements………………………………………………..…………478
4.1 Appraisal………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 478
4.2 General Design Considerations…………………………………………………………………………………478
4.3 Schedule of Lighting Levels……………………………………………………………………......................481
4.4 Maintenance Factors…..……………………………………………………………………...........................482
4.5 Project Lighting Design Calculations………………………………………………….......................484
5. Project Site Verification Requirements……………………………………………..…..…… 486
5.1 Lighting Level Verification …………….…………………………………………………………………….…….486
5.2 Project Harmonic Measurement…………………………………………………………………….….…….485
Part-2 Contents
Section C – Lighting Poles and Accessories

1. General Project Design Requiremens & Responsibilities....................489
2. Special Materials………………………………………………………………………………………...................490
3. Quality Assurance…………………………………………………………………………………………,……………490
4. Material and Construction Details………………………………………………………..…………490
4.1 Structural Testing…………….………………………………..………………………………………………..……. 490
5. Warranty…………………………………………………………………………..…………………………………..…..…… 491
Part-2 Contents
Section D – Public Realm Lighting Management

1. Section Explanation……….......................................................................................................494
1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-2 Section-D………........................................494
1.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-2 Section-D………...............................494
2. General Project Design Requirements & Responsibilities.........................495
3. Project Controls/Lighting Management System (PLMS) Provision……495
3.1 Projects Requiring Basic Timed Operation.................................................................... 495
3.2 Projects Requiring Split-Circuit Operation or PLMS Provision……..........................495
4. Lighting Controls & PLMS Technical Criteria……..………………………………..………… 496
4.1 Basic Switching/Timing Controls Technical Requirements……..………………………… 496
4.1.1
Circuit Control Devices
4.1.2
General Mandatory Project Technical Requirements
4.2 PLMS Technical Requirements………..………………………………………………………………….………… 497
4.2.1 Wired System
4.2.2 Wireless System
4.2.5 Prohibuted Components or Capabilities
5. Public Realm Programming………………………………………………………………………………...…… 501
6. Quality Assurance……………………………..……………………………………………………………………...…… 502
7. Warranty…………………………………………….…..………………………………………………………………..…....…… 502
8. Maintenance/Defects Contract Period…………….…………………………………..…....…… 503
9. Measurement and Payment…………………………………………………..……………………..…...…… 503
10. Operation and Maintenance Manual ……..…………………………………………………...…… 504
Part-2 Contents
Section E – Solar & Lighting for Public Realm

1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-2 Section-E……….................................. 508
1.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-2 Section-E………........................... 508
2. Public Realm Solar Lighting System Options................................................. 509
2.1 Project Selection................................................................................................................. 509
2.2 Standalone System............................................................................................................. 510
2.3 Grid-Connected System.................................................................................................. 510
2.4 Full Backup System............................................................................................................ 511
3.1 Design Requirements....................................................................................................... 512
4. Project Cost Analysis........................................................................................................ 513
4.1 Cost Analysis Requirements............................................................................................ 513
5. System Components.........................................................................................................516
5.1 LED Luminaires.................................................................................................................... 516
5.2 PV System............................................................................................................................. 517
5.2.1 General
5.2.2 Materials
5.3 Inverter/Controller............................................................................................................ 518
5.4 Batteries................................................................................................................................ 519
5.5 Controls................................................................................................................................ 519
5.6 Cleaning System.................................................................................................................. 521
5.7 Pole Design Submission and Production................................................................... 521
6. Quality Assurance............................................................................................................. 522
7. Warranty.................................................................................................................................. 523
8. Maintenance/Defects Contract Period................................................................524
9. Measurement and Payment..................................................................................... 524
10. Operation and Maintenance Manual.................................................................. 525
Part-2 Contents
Section F –Light Pollution Mitigation

1. Section Explanation………..............................................................................................528
1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-2 Section-F………................................528
1.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-2 Section-F….……......................528
2. General Project Design Requirements & Responsibilities.................529
2.1 General……….......................................................................................................................529
2.2 Exterior Lighting………………..............................................................................................529
2.3 Lighting Levels at the Site Boundary and Beyond……….......................................530
2.4 Additional Requirements/Clarifications……...........................................................531
3. Light Pollution Criteria Definitions…………………………………………..………….…………531
3.1 Definitions……….................................................................................................................532
4. Design Calculation Requirements and Methodology……………….….….…532
4.1 Step by Step Guidance...................................................................................................534
4.2 Light Pollution Mitigation Pro-forma.......................................................................534
Part-2-Contents
Section G –Project Submission Requirements

1. Section Explanation………..................................................................................................538
2. Concept Design Stage ……………………………………………………………………………………….………..539
2.1 Lighting Submission Minimum Requirements…………………………………………....………..539
2.1.1 Cover Letter
2.2 Optional Lighting Submission Material…………………………………………….……….....………..540
3. Preliminary Design Stage………………………………………………………………………………….….…. 540
3.1 Lighting Submission Minimum Requirements……………………………………………..……….541
3.1.1
Cover Letter & Copy of the Concept Design Approval
3.1.2
Lighting Calculations Key Aspects
3.1.3
Lighting Layouts Key Aspects
3.1.4
Technical Data Key Aspects
3.1.5
Electrical Design Key Aspects
3.2 OptionalLighting Submission Material…………………………...……………………………….………544
4. Detail Design Stage………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 544
4.1 Lighting Submission Minimum Requirements…………………………….………………………. 545
4.1.1Cover Letter & Copy of the Preliminary Design Approval
4.1.2Lighting Calculations Key Aspects
4.1.3Lighting Layout/Details Key Aspects
4.1.4Technical Data Key Aspects
4.1.5Light Pollution Mitigation Report
4.1.6Electrical Design Key Aspects
4.2 Optional Lighting Submission Material…………………………….……………………………………. 548
5. Tender/Construction Responsibilities……………………………………………………………. 548
Part-2 Contents

A. Abu Dhabi Standards & Guidance……………………………………………….…………….…551
B. International Standards & Guidance……………………………………………………………552
C. Lighting Maintenance & Measurement…………………………………………………… 552
D. Mechanical/Material..................................................................................................553
E. Electrical.............................................................................................................................. 553
F. Light Emitting Diode (LED)...................................................................................... 554
G. LED Luminaire Performance...................................................................................555
H. Lighting Design.................................................................................................................556
I. Solar Street Lighting.....................................................................................................557
J. Economic/Cost - Life-Cycle Analysis................................................................. 558
K. Lighting Controls/PLMS............................................................................................ 558
Part-2 Contents

Drawing No. Drawing Title Page No.
L.01 30.5m Light Pole Details……………………………………………………….…….….561
L.02 30.5m Light Pole Details (Barrier Mounted) ………..…….………….………562
L.03 30.5m Light Pole Details (Lighting & luminaire details) …………...……563
L.04 20m Light Pole Details........................................................................564
L.05 18m Light Pole Details....................................................................... 565
L.06 14m Light Pole Details....................................................................... 566
L.07 10m Light Pole Details........................................................................567
L.08 8m Light Pole Details..........................................................................568
L.09 30.5m Mid Hinged Light Pole Details.................................................569
L.10 20m Mid Hinged Light Pole Details................................................... 570
L.14 14m Multi-Function Light Pole Details.............................................574
L.15 10m Multi-Function Light Pole Details.............................................575
L.16 8m Multi-Function Light Pole Details...............................................576
L.17 Cutout for Loop In Loop Out with SPD & Screw Connector.............577
L.18 Cutout for Loop In Loop Out without SPD & Screw Connector.......578
L.19 Cutout for Loop In Loop Out with SPD & Tunnel Connector............579
L.20 Cutout for Loop In Loop Out without SPD & Tunnel Connector......580
L.21 Lighting Control Cabinet Type 1........................................................581
L.22 Type 1 Control Cabinet Schematic & Device Schedule ....................582
L.23 Lighting Control Cabinet Type 2........................................................583
L.24 Type 2 Control Cabinet Schematic & Device Schedule ....................584
L.25 Type 3 Control Cabinet -Underground .............................................585
L.26 Underground Cable and Duct Installation .......................................586
L.27 Pullbox Type IV-Concrete .................................................................587
L.28 Pullbox Polycarbonate......................................................................588
L.29 Lighting Control Cabinet Type 4-Pre-Wired Landscape...................589
L.30 Type 4 Control Cabinet Schematic & Device Schedule ................... 590
L.31 Lighting Control Cabinet Type 5- Landscape.................................... 591
L.33 Lighting Control Cabinet Type 6 – Spit Circuit for Landscape.......... 593
L.35 14m MCC Hybrid Pole....................................................................... 595

Part-2 Section-A – Lighting for Parks & Public Realm
Part-2 Section A – Lighting for Parks & Public Realm

For full descriptions of any standards and guidance documents referred to within this Part-2 Section-A, refer to
the Part-2 Applicable Standards & Guidance References Section.
This Section is a brief summary of the primary factors covered within this Part-2 Section-A of the Lighting
Manual. The detailed technical criteria for which are described in the Clauses following:
1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-2 Section-A
a) Reference to the Public Realm & Street Lighting Handbook’s Chapter J: Public Realm Lighting is
made as the required reading as the primary learning resource before undertaking any Park or Public
Realm project lighting design.
b) It is statutory that all luminaires used for projects must be LED (or other equally sustainable
c) Manual Part-1 Section-A, in addition to the LED luminaire criteria aligned with QCC, has been revised
with separate clauses covering the additional specific Department Project criteria regarding fixture
and component performance, quality, lighting design and warranty requirements.
d) LED Luminaire Useful-Life Performance is based on an ambient to 350C.
e) Maintenance Factor (MF) calculations must be supplied with every submission.
f) Luminaire Dirt Depreciation Factor (LDD) component of the Maintenance Factor are detailed in Part
2 Section A, Clause 4.5.
g) Warranty for all luminaires is a minimum 10-Years for all aspects.
h) Table of Lighting Design areas/objects/categories are detailed in Table 4.3.1
i) Project Lighting Design and Calculation requirements are set out within the Manual.
j) Project Lighting Management requirements are detailed in Lighting Manual Part-2 Section-D.
k) Where Solar Public Realm Lighting proposed for a project, then all project, technical, component
and material requirements for the solar system aspects are set out within Manual Part-2 Section-E.
All Lighting design, lighting fixture, lighting calculation and lighting verification requirements are as
per Part-2 Section-A.
l) The lighting control methodology to be provided in the report.
m) Luminaires mounted on lighting poles for pathway lighting to have NEMA sockets with Gateways
installed/connected to or to be controlled through a Powerline PLMS.
n) The Department’s decision is final regarding project submissions and design approvals.
1.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-2 Section-A
a) Any deviation from the minimum maintenance and warranty requirements as set out within this
Manual.
b) Any deviation from the project Lighting Design, Calculation and Site Verification requirements as set
out within this Manual.

The Public Realm & Street Lighting Handbook’s Chapter J: Public Realm Lighting is required reading as the
primary learning resource before undertaking any Park or Public Realm project lighting design.
It is required that for every Public Realm and Park lighting project the Consultant shall explore the current
viability and options for solar lighting solutions in the marketplace and propose where best it can be offered for
incorporation into the project. Particular attention should be paid to areas of the project which might provide
specific advantages for having some solar lighting technology and/or their cost of implementation can be
mitigated by other factors. These include, but are not limited to, interactive/awareness zones, integrated with
local structures, isolated areas without current electrical infrastructure, dedicated sports areas, children’s play
areas, sculptures/arts or specific paths. All Project Submissions from Concept Stage onwards shall cover the
proposal of Solar or solar lighting integration within the reports and detail this as applicable from Preliminary
Design Stage onwards. Refer to Manual Part-2 Section-E for all solar technical and design criteria.
The design, specification, calculation, manufacturing, testing, shipment, installation and performance for the
project shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of The Department’s electrical and lighting
standards for electrical distribution works as per Part 1 Section I.. Details of all standards are provided within
the Applicable Standards & Guidance References at the end of Part-1.
It is a statutory requirement that all luminaires used on The Department’s Public Realm and Park Lighting
projects must be LED (or other equally sustainable alternative luminaire technology as defined within this
Manual’s Introduction).
Suppliers and manufacturers shall guarantee adherence to this Manual and the performance of their luminaires
under all the required design conditions.
The Consultant shall be responsible to ensure that the project and all product specifications are fully in
compliance, without any deviation from this Manual, prior to forwarding to The Department for approval. Any
deviation should be brought to the notice of The Department. The Consultant shall ensure in their design the
following: integration, coordination, functionality and accessibility of these services. It shall be the Consultant’s
responsibility to bring the system to the design & operating and maintenance conditions.
The Consultant shall, as requested by The Department, provide full cost analysis including payback assessments
as required for the project (or part of the project) and in accordance with the instructions given by The
Department. All information provided and the cost analysis/payback calculations must be calculated with the
exact luminaire solution proposed; including specific circuit wattages and drive currents, actual sources within
the luminaires, including the exact calculation for the fixtures useful-life cycle, project location, controls
usage/programming etc.
3. LED Luminaires
The LED luminaires shall be designed to operate continuously for the required useful-lifetime performance and
at the specified ambient temperature, humidity and quality criteria as defined by this Manual. With special
attention given to the effects of direct sun-exposure during the day, corrosion resistance and endurance against
the occasional sandstorm and dusty weather in designing the luminaire body and components.
For more reference information regarding lighting technology, lamps, luminaires, electrical, materials and
lighting maintenance, refer to the Public Realm & Street Lighting Handbook Chapters C, D, E, M and O.
A valid QCC Certificate of Conformity must be provided covering every luminaire proposed for the project
during submissions.
In addition to the LED Luminaires supplied QCC Certificates shall be the additional specific Lighting Manual
fixture-technical and project-required design criteria, for which all data must be provided on the project
submission for all projects.
Notes:
The QCC Certification Scheme provides certification for a luminaire and/or luminaire range/family; within the
allowed criteria set out under the scheme. The specific optics option of the luminaire is not a critical parameter
within the scheme and as such if the luminaire proposed for a particular project has an optic which differs from
that used for certification, this is not an issue for compliance and is allowed as long as the project specific
minimum fixture efficacy requirements stated within table 3.4.1.1 are met with the particular optic used and
photometry provided to show actual luminaire efficacy value.
If the luminaire proposed for a project has different/revised LED package to that installed within the luminaire(s)
gaining compliance (i.e. using a new generation of LED sources), this too is allowed as long as the luminaire’s
body, materials, driver and drive current remain the same (or less in regard to drive current) and the overall
luminaire’s lumen output is similar. Justification must be made to The Department alongside the QCC Product
Conformity Certificate with all technical details and The Department shall assess the justification as part of the
project submission and decide if the luminaire is accepted as being covered under the existing Certificate or must
require new certification. The Department’s decision is final and it is advised for all manufacturers to ensure
regular certification of updated fixture families as required to ensure compliance is maintained.
If the Specifications within the QCC Certification Scheme becomes a UAE Standard through adoption by ESMA
(Emirates Association for Standards & Metrology), then from the date this becomes active the QCC Certification
procedure will simply refer to the ESMA Standard.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide Copy of QCC Product Conformity Certificate(s)
3.3.1 General
a) Manufacturer’s company profile including a profile of the manufacturing facilities. Valid ISO 9001
certificates of the manufacturing facilities.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide manufacturer profile and ISO 9001 certificates.
b) The following shall be submitted in addition to the documents required (all data in SI units):
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide Photometric test data in standard format (IES or EULUMDAT), Full
light source/lamp specification data and LED chip reliability reports to JEDEC JESD22/JESD51 or comparable
International standard (tests at +85ºC).
a) The LEDs shall be from a manufacturer of LEDs with ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2011 or similar
approved International Standard certification. (Please note: The nominal Correlated Colour
Temperature (CCT) ANSI standard white LED colours accepted for use for public realm/park lighting on
projects are 2700K, 3000Kand 4000K only, although the QCC Scheme allows a wider band for all
luminaire types).
b) Minimum Luminaire Efficacy and associated Minimum Colour Rendering (CRI – Colour Rendering Index)
rating shall be per Table 3.3.2.1:
General Column Fixture 100lm/W 80

Bollard 75lm/W 80
In Ground (buried) 75lm/W 80
Floodlight 100lm/W 80
Bulkhead 75lm/W 80
Underwater Fixture 75lm/W 80
Special 75lm/W 80
*Luminaire efficacy is given as lumen Output (lm) over input power (W) at standard laboratory
conditions. All tests to be taken at 230V. Efficacy a[[;ies to luminaires without glare shields. The efficacy
and CCTrequirements do not apply to RGB(W) luminaires.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide IES LM-79test reports (Sections 11 & 12) or comparable
IEC/International standards to prove luminaire efficacy and CRI, plus actual** luminaire CCT is within acceptable
limits as per Table 3.3.2.2 in relation to Nominal CCT.

Nominal CCT Nominal CCT
2700K 2725K ±83
3000K 3045K ± 100
4000K 3985K ± 154
Note: Where the project is either an extension of existing LED phases, or are roads connecting to other
adjacent roads installed with LED roadway lighting, or replacements of existing luminaires in part, the
Consultant shall investigate the nominal CCT of these adjoining fixtures and propose a solution with
matching CCT for visual consistancy.
3.3.3 LED Binning
White-light luminaires shall be maximum proved MacAdam Ellipse Step-4. This does not apply for coloured or
RGB fixtures/LEDs.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide copies of highlighted LED chip data or full luminaire LM-79-08 test
data to show compliance acheived within limits of Step-4 or better.
The fixture shall be ‘servicable’: Drivers and LED modules/boards/engine shall be site removable/replaceable
without any possible risk to maintaining luminaire photometry and without the need to demount the fixtures
for sake of future upgrading/ maintenance requirements if required.
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide written descriptions of LED source maintenance and replacement.
The luminaire shall be fitted with optical refractors, diffusers and/or reflectors designed to exactly suit the
specific application the fixture is intended for.
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide product information describing the optical control and components
to cover the range and fixture application.
a) The LED luminaires shall be designed to operate continuously at the specified ambient temperature and
humidity with special attention given to the effects of direct sun-exposure during the day, the occasional
sand storms and dust in designing the luminaire body. The design of the luminaire shall be such that
there is a direct thermal path from the LED junctions to the atmosphere thus providing a thermal
transfer effect throughout the life of the luminaire. The thermal solution shall be proprietary and
designed by the lighting manufacturer to enable the luminaires to work efficiently in Abu Dhabi climatic
conditions. The luminaire shall be provided with a demonstrated ventilation arrangement allowing heat
to be dissipated to the atmosphere.
The luminaire shall be designed to prevent collection of debris and dust/sand by proven and stated
means. The design shall be such that the luminaire lenses shall be anti-static to ensure minimal
dust/sand accumulation.
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide detailed physical description of the fixture including images and
dimensions. Provide written justification and luminaire product data.
b) The luminaire operating range (taking into account LED components, driver, etc.) shall be to a minimum
of +50°C ambient air temperature(Ta) with an acceptable demonstrated lumen-output performance at
Ta+50°C. The operating range maximum refers to the Ta as per IEC/ISO 60598-1 or UL 1598.
Project Submission Requirement: - The effect of reduced lumen output at operation in increased ambient
temperatures (i.e. any ambient temperature higher than 25°C as per LM-79) must be checked by a submitted
LM-82 test report for 50°C ambient (testing the luminaire’s/luminaire range’s largest LED engine/module, or
(largest) whole luminaire, per LM-82 procedures in all cases). This test shall be taken using the highest proposed
fixture/range drive current, by measuring total luminous flux or luminous intensity at the elevated temperature
and extrapolating to the 25°C Ta figure. This will be considered acceptable provided the lumen output decrease
is proved to be less-than-or-equal-to 6%)
In addition, this measured percentage drop of luminous flux shall then be applied to the LM-79 luminaire flux
value and when multiplied by the measured load at 50°C, will be considered acceptable provided the resultant
efficacy value still remains within the minimum allowed fixture efficacy as set out within Table 3.2.2.1. the LM
79 and LM 82 tests shall be carried out on the same fitting.
c) The luminaire installed daytime (non working) temperature shall be to a minimum of 50°C ambient air
temperature (Ta)with all internal components rated to a minimum of 85°C..
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide declaration of the conformity of the Luminaire to the required
installed temperature minimums.

The luminaire control gear and LED optical-unit components shall be externally fully rated to the minimum IP
(Ingress Protection) rating and IK (Impact Protection/Mechanical Strength) rating as set out in the Table 3.3.7.1,
have proven means of negating internal condensation build-up for their application and be able to operate in
high relative humidity.

Minimum IK-Rating
Fixture Type Minimum IP-Rating
Luminaire Lens
General Column Fixture IP65 IK08 IK07*
Bollard IP-65 (top and bottom) IK08 IK07*
In Ground (buried) IP-67 (top and bottom)

IK08
Floodlight IP66 IK08 IK07*
Bulkhead IP65 IK08 IK07*
IP-68 (including all

Underwater Fixture IK10
connections)
IP-65-68 (to suit

Special IK08 IK07*
type/application)
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide test reports for IP and IK ratings: IP rating determined by IEC 60529
or comparable International standard, IK rating determined by IEC 62262 or comparable International standard.
a) All Exterior pressure die-cast aluminum alloy components shall have a copper content percentage in
line with the requirements of ISO 3522, EN/BS 1706 by mass.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide declaration of pressure die-cast aluminum alloy standard used and
associated component copper content (by mass) to ISO 3522, EN/BS 1706 Standards or other comparable
International standard.
b) Testing of exterior metal coated/painted and non-coated components for proven and demonstrated
corrosion resistance.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide test report to ASTM D1654-08 or other comparable International
standard for evaluation of a sample of the exterior painted or coated metals subjected to corrosive
environments or provide test report to EN/ISO 9227, ASTM B117-11 or other comparable International standard
for Salt Spray test of finished luminaire body and all metal coated/painted and non-coated fixture components
for minimum 1000hours, or approved accelerated test method under these standards.
c) Where different metallic materials are used together, then proof of avoidance of bi-metallic or galvanic
corrosion with any touching dissimilar metals must be assured.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide written report of all dissimilar metals used within the lighting fixture
and confirmation of the method/design in avoiding bi-metallic or galvanic corrosion.
d) All synthetic optical materials shall be resistant to degredation by Ultraviolet Radiation and scratch
resistant.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide declaration with supporting evidence that the resistance to
degredation by Ultraviolet Radiation will be sufficient to not significantly affect the luminaire performance
during the Department’s expected useful lifetime of the luminaire. Manufacturer to submit a datasheet of the
proposed optic material to show both the Ultraviolet Radiation degredation resistance and scratch resistance
of the external optical synthetic material.
e) Any steel body materials, components, bolts, nuts and hardened washers shall be galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A153 or comparable International standard.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide written confirmation covering any steel components to
show all are galvanised to ASTM-A153 comparable standard or other comparable International
standard.
f) Any external stainless steel body materials, components bolts, nuts and hardened washers shall be
minimum 316L Grade or comparable International standard.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide written confirmation covering any stainless steel components to
show all are minimum 316L Grade to ASTM-SAE comparable standard or other comparable International
standard.
• Driver shall be minimum 1-10v dimmable/addressable and/or 1-10v+DALI allowed and must be
able to be PLMS/CMS connectable.
• Driver Current to be max. 750mA.
• Driver can have some means of built-in overheat thermal protection in the form of either
automatic dimming or stepping/holding down of the driver. But this function can be present
only if devices activate after the case-temperature exceeds that experienced within the
luminaire’s normal required maximum operational limits: i.e. with Ta50°C (outside ambient-air
temperature to the luminaire).
• Case Temperature (Tc) rating +80°C at a minimum 95% Relative Humidity (RH). Luminaires with
open drivers need to prove Luminaire ambient of 50°C maximum in equivalence with this
requirement.
• Nominal rated Input voltage: 230V+10%/-6% 50Hz.
• Drivers shall be Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) compliant.
• Drivers shall have a Total individual luminaire Harmonic Distortion (THD) of: ≤20% in accordance
with ANSI C82.77or comparable International standard.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide LED driver manufacturer data sheets, test reports and/or
certification documentation demonstrating conformity to the above requirements. If thermal protection is
present within the driver, then proof required to confirm its operation is not activated within the normal stated
limits of luminaire thermal operational requirements.
Demonstrate 50,000 hour useful life of the luminaire based on the simplified B20-L70 threshold at ambient
temperature (Tq) of 35°C (takes into account the annual average recorded night-time temperature for Abu Dhabi
Emirate plus safety allowance).
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide lumen maintenance report for 50,000 hour, B20-L70 @ (Tq) of 35°C
for the luminaire, referring to the chip manufacturer’s IES LM-80 data for demonstrated curve/drive current/
fVoltage. Using IES TM-21 or comparable IEC/international standard.
Luminaire must comply with Photobiological Safety of lamps and lamp systems in accordance with the
requirements of IEC 62471 or ANSI/IES RP-27.3.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide test results for IEC 62471, ANSI/IES RP-27.3 or comparable
International standards. The fixture must pass all requirements of the tests for “No Risk”/”Exempt” results.
Test whole fixture/luminaire as per ANSI C136.31 or comparable international standard. Test method specifics
to be determined by the supplier dependent on the potential vibration exposure.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide test results for ANSI C136.31 or comparable International standard
Depending on the project type, size, scope, dynamic lighting, Estidama compliance and/or Light Pollution
Mitigation requirements, the project’s lighting management must be established to ensure the required level
of circuit switching, dimming, controls etc. are provided. Refer to Manual Part-2 Section-D for the specific
technical requirements for lighting management and Manual Part-2 Section-F for the specific technical
requirements for Light Pollution Mitigation which might determine the level of lighting management needed to
be designed into the project. Special attention should be paid to any Parks/Public Realm projects which will be
used after 00:00 hours as the allowances for the various aspects of light pollution are different before and after
this threshold time.
The Consultant must propose and agree the lighting management with The Department as part of the project
Concept Design Stage submission approval process. If approved by the Department this approach must then be
described and designed for all further project design stages, through and including to Tender.
Project Submission Requirement:- Check the project against the requirements detailed within Manual Part-2
Sections-D and F and undertake the Concept Design to meet these requirements. If approved follow the
technical criteria set out within Manual Part-2 Section D for the Preliminary and Detail Design proposals as well
as within the project Tender.

or comparable International standard for surge protection. All SPDs within the luminaire shall be connected in
series and will be complimentary to an SPD installed in the base of the pole (accessible through the pole
handhole as a separate item or integrated into the electrical cut-out) of minimum 10kV/10kA as per the
standards mentioned. All SPDs installed in the pole base shall be connected in series and shall have an indicator
(Green/Red) to provide visual identification if working or faulty. SPDs in the pole base shall be designed to fail
before any failure occurs in the luminaire SPD.
SPDs shall be capable of protecting the luminaire against common mode and differential mode surges and shall
be connected to Phase (L), Neutral (N) and Protective Earth (PE). The Surge protection Device shall include
fusing and protection to prevent fire in case of protection component failures at end of life.
Earthing of the LED luminaire shall be as per a class I “electrical unit” to EN/IEC 60598-1.To ensure that no part
of the luminaire can become live due to failure of the insulated parts or through any type of fault, the luminaire
will be provided with a Protective Earth Connection to which the wiring from the supply from the cut-out shall
be connected. All cabling from the cut-out to the luminaire shall be 3 core flex as per the Electrical requirements
detailed in Part 1 Section I.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide manufacturer’s details of the surge protection device fitted to the
luminaire including class-I earthing connection (and fuse provision as applicable) to achieve the Manual’s
requirements for 6kV/6kA protection to IEC/EN 61547, IEEE/ANSI C62.41.2-2002/ earthing to EN/IEC 60598-1
or comparable International standards.
a) The Department will request a sample of three luminaires of all proposed luminaire types to be installed
for review by The Department. The Department’s decision on all matters is final.
b) To verify luminaire performance and compliance with the specifications, The Department may also
request additional testing of sample luminaires. All such testing shall be from accredited llaboratories.
c) According to the requirements of the Project’s Contract documents, if required, The Department
reserves the right to attend, or appoint another party to attend, a factory inspection.
Project Submission Requirement:- Written confirmation stating acceptance of the above requirements, if and
when, evoked by The Department.
3.3.16 Warranty
Note: Warranties shall be for/transferable to The Department after the end of project’s defined defects phase
to cover the remainder of the Warranty period to the requirements as defined below.
a) A written warranty for a 10 year on-site replacement material, fixture, finishes and workmanship against
the deterioration of the housing, all external components; such as lenses, gaskets & fastenings, and the
fixture finishes shall include warranty against failure or substantial deteriorations such as corrosion,
blistering, cracking or peeling (excluding damage caused by contact with chemical substances,
fertilizers, water containing corrosive agents or stray electrical currents) with no cost to The
Department**
b) A written warranty for a 10 year replacement material warranty for defective or non-starting LED source
assemblies with no cost to The Department**
c) A written warranty for a 10 year replacement material warranty on all supplied drivers, power supply
units (PSUs), electrical components and in-built control components with no cost to The Department*
d) A written warranty for a 10 year replacement material warranty for on-maintained luminance levels on
all light sources (LED package, LED array, or LED module) including, but not limited to the LED die,
encapsulate, and phosphor. Stating B20 compliance for a minimum of 10 years. If the expected useful
life performance parameters of the luminaire system are not being maintained, then the manufacturer
shall replace the light source(s) or luminaire as needed with no cost to The Department*
*With no cost to The Department does not just refer to the luminaire or luminaire component cost in regards to
any warranty actions. This also refers to any costs associated with labour for removal/fitting of luminaires,
obtaining Authority NOCs, traffic management costs, transport etc. The Department will not be liaible for any
associated costs arising/necessary in relation to warranty actions). The manufacturer must contact DMT before
appointing a contractor. These requirements are purely in regards to the terms of Luminaire/Luminaire
Equipment Warranties that must be provided to The Department at Handover. It is not in any way in
connection to the cover during the defects period which shall be solely as per specific terms agreed between
the manufacturer and Contractor.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide a written undertaking, to the satisfaction of The Department, of the
Warranty for The Department from the Luminaire Supplier(s), accompanied with written proof of the local
representative’s UAE Operating License and established UAE background, to warranty the materials and
performance as stated within this clause and for the minimum periods defined.
For all project lighting design and calculations, refer to the Public Realm & Street Lighting Handbook for
guidance on applying the requirements of the Lighting Manual. Particular attention should be given to
Handbook Chapters F, H, I, J, M and O.
4.1 Appraisal
The Consultant shall read fully the Public Realm Section: Chapter J of the Public Realm & Street Lighting
Handbook prior to designing the lighting for all Public Realm and Parks. This Chapter provides information and
recommendations on how to approach the lighting within public realm and will aid ideas for concepts and
themes as well as details on how to ensure the correct balance is to be achieved to provide good nighttime
visual environments.
4.2 General Design Considerations
Use of Mesopic multipliers shall be disallowed herein, by assuming an S/P ratio of 1.00 for all luminaires
in all calculations.
b) Solar Provision
It is a statutory requirement that for every Public Realm and Park lighting project the Consultant shall
explore the current viability and options for solar lighting solutions in the marketplace and propose
where best it can be offered for incorporation into each specific project. This is not necessarily to look
just at solar column fixtures for pathways etc. nor is a requirement to look at all or the majority of
possible fixtures to be solar fixtures unless this is specifically requested by The Department. But
particular attention should be paid to areas of the project which might provide key advantages for The
Department for having some solar lighting technology and/or their cost of implementation can be
mitigated by other factors. These include, but are not limited to, interactive/awareness zones,
integrated with local structures, isolated areas without current electrical infrastructure, dedicated
sports areas, children’s play areas, sculptures/arts or specific paths. All Project Submissions from
Concept Stage onwards shall not ignore this consideration and the Consultant shall cover the proposal
of solar or solar lighting integration within the reports and detail this as applicable from Preliminary
Design Stage onwards. Refer to Manual Part-2 Section-E for all solar technical and design criteria.
c) Parking
For any areas within Public Realm/Parks which include car parking, these are to be designed as per the
requirements of Part-1 Section-A and the fixtures and lighting design shall be undertaken to this
Section’s criteria and as per the “Parking Lots/Off-Street Bays” category.
d) Lighting Poles/Bollards
The Consultant shall undertake all necessary detailing and co-ordination (especially during the Detail
Design Stage/submission) to ensure poles and bollards etc. are never mounted within softscape. Poles
and bollards must always be mounted in hardscape/gravel and coordinated with the landscape design
and detailing. All lighting poles/bollards to be kept a minimum of 1m distance from irrigation spray to
remove the corrosive effects of irrigation water- Refer to Figure 4.2.1 (insert diagram of pole
installation)
e) Coordination with Planting
All lighting intended for illumination of planting and/or located
within planting must allow for the future growth and maintenance
of the planting within the lighting design as far as aiming, future
adjustment and plant maintenance. Refer to figure 4.2.1. for
installation requirements.
Figure 4.2.1
f) Luminaire Family
The Consultant shall select luminaires in coordination with the other public realm furniture items
proposed for the project. This includes the aesthetics, finishes, colours, scale and theme, with all
relevant key aspects forming part of the luminaire selection and project specification. Consider if
existing lighting elements are being retained. Luminaires should be sympathetic to these existing items.
Existing lighting, not conforming to this Manual’s technical standards, shall not be retained within a
project.
g) External Architectural Lighting

This Section also covers the external architectural lighting of any structures/buildings within the Public
Realm or Park project and, if applicable, the Consultant shall ensure all the special considerations set
out within Clause 4.4 for architectural lighting are met within the overall design. The lighting design
criteria for the illumination of facades could also be applied elsewhere as they are based on
International recommendations.
h) Internal Lighting and Lighting Integrated with Structural Elements

Any structures/buildings such as toilet blocks, plant rooms, ‘Smart’ technology structures/artworks etc.
within public realm shall have their internal/external lighting and any emergency lighting designed as
per this Manual or (for internal/ emergency lighting) as per stated International Standards as listed
within Section-G. Access paths/ entrances/surround shall be balanced with the project adjacent
ambient lighting levels.
i) Coloured Light with Coloured and RGB/RGBW LEDs

Coloured LEDs emit coloured light directly from the chip without additional filtering required. As such
the values obtained within lighting design software from luminaire photometry can accurately
compared against white light fixtures and the resultant illuminance figures a good guide to
effectiveness.
Conversion factors do not need to be applied as the outputs in all colours is achieved at 100% of the
rated outputs. However, it is always suggested to physically test and if necessary, mock-up any coloured
lighting solutions within the proposal before finalizing the design and fixture specifications.
j) Wiring, Connections & Junction Boxes

Unless a lighting fixture can cater for direct internal termination of SWA (Steel Wire Armoured) or any
other form of armoured cable, all Public Realm and Park lighting final circuits must be undertaken
utilising double-insulated un-armoured flexible cables with another form of physical mechanical cable
protection proposed such as ducts. This is to ensure luminaire IP ratings are maintained and circuits
can avoid unnecessary and hazardous additional joint/ junctions etc.
The Consultant shall ensure all luminaires proposed have a terminal-block capacity to directly take the
size of cable (CSA) required within the project design. Any required junction boxes, cables, connections
or control devices however shall be integrated into the landscaping through suitable concealed means
in a logical and designed manner by the Consultant. The proposed installation method(s), protection,
maintenance methodology, accessibility, finishes and locations shall be detailed and presented to The
Department as part of the Detail Design Stage submission. Consideration must be given to future O&M
operations, including fault finding. “Daisy Chain” connections are not acceptable where the circuit MCB
will trip with any failure within the luminaire. Consideration must be given to fusing arrangements
within the luminaires or as part of the electrical network.
k) Signage
For any signage within a public realm/park project, refer to Part-1 Section-F for details of signage lighting
requirements. Generally, within public realm, the aim of the Consultant is to ensure the
siting/positioning of signs is coordinated with the general lighting so that they are illuminated to
required levels naturally from the ambient lighting levels. If, however, specific lighting is
required/proposed, the technical criteria and lighting design requirements for all cases is to be
undertaken and followed as per Part-1 Section-F.
l) Cost Analysis
assessments as required for the project and in accordance with the instructions given by The
Department.
Project Submission Requirement:- Ensure all the above criteria and recommedations for the specific project are
applied as applicable.
Table 4.3.1- Schedule of Lighting Levels

Minimum Average Uniformity
Specific Area, Use, Task or Feature Design Level: Ratio Notes
(Minimum to
Illumination (Em)=LUX Average)
Main/Primary Pathways 8-10 Lux Uo≥0.25
Secondary Pathways 4-6Lux Uo≥0.2 Use different treatment to Primary
Tertiary Pathways and Jogging Tracks 2-3 Lux Uo≥0.15 Use different treatment to Primary & Secondary
Public Squares/Open public spaces 15 Lux Uo≥0.25 Level and design dependent on location and use
Localised as necessary and higher illuminances

Playgrounds 30 Lux Uo≥0.3 for specific equipment risk. Avoid excessive glare
Informal Play/Flexible Lawn Areas 30 Lux Uo≥0.15 Refer also to Part-2 Section-B
Steps, Hazards & In balance with the surrounding lit elements to

6-30 Lux Uo≥0.6 ensure Lux ratio remains within 3:1
Shared Spaces (Cyclist/Pedestrian)
Park Access Points, Exits 40 Lux Uo≥0.3 Localized treatment
Bus Stops 20 Lux Uo≥0.4 Horizontal floor plane in and around bus stop
Pedestrian Footbridges 20 Lux (30 Lux on Steps) Uo≥0.25 Or as specific CCTV requirements
Pedestrian Underpasses 100 Lux+ 30 Lux Vertical*2 Uo≥0.4 Incl. Steps. Or as specific CCTV requirements
Sikkas 5-10 Lux Uo≥0.4
Cycle Paths/Dedicated Cycle Routes 3-5 Lux + 1.5-2 Lux Vert. *2 Uo≥0.4
Cycle Racks 10 Lux Uo≥0.4
Designated Trees/Bushes*1 5-10 Lux N/A On surfaces
Delivery, Rubbish & Refuse Areas 30 Lux Uo≥0.3
Outside Audience Areas 20 LUX Uo≥0.4 Controls to provide 1 Lux during performance
Performance/Stage Area 300 LUX Uo≥0.6
Position lamps to produce good reflectance in

Water (still) N/A N/A
water
Position lamps behind/below; aim to into water

Water (running) N/A N/A
at oblique angles or within jets.
Focal Points (large) 75 LUX N/A
Focal Points (small) 150 LUX N/A
Flag: over a dark background 100 LUX N/A
Flag: over a bright background 300 LUX N/A
Clocks: Dark surround/light surface 70 LUX N/A
Clocks: Light surround/dark surface 200 LUX N/A
*1 This does not mean every tree/bush shall be illuminated; only the ones selected as the project’s lighting design. Refer the Chapter-
J of the Public Realm & Street Lighting Handbook for advice on selection and treatment approaches.
*2 Vertical Lux calculations where required shall be checked and submitted using the DIALux Ev (Vertical Illuminance) output report
options for all directions (Ev-West, Ev-North, Ev-East & Ev-South) to prove the average table values are achieved for all view directions.
4.4 External Architectural Lighting
The various illuminance requirements for open public realm spaces, such as public squares and parks, are given
in Table 4.3.1. The precise requirements for the architectural lighting to any buildings/structures’ facades found
within the project and intended to be illuminated, cannot be given so specifically because the values are affected
by many more factors. However, the general recommendations of the below table are a useful starting point
and are The Department’s average illuminance limits for design. (These lighting design criteria could also be
applied for any architectural lighting outside the remit of public realm/parks projects as they are based on
International recommendations).
The Consultant shall investigate and confirm the surface material(s), the state of cleanliness and the district
brightness; it is assumed that building/structure facade surfaces are generally matt; specular or metallic finishes
will require additional special consideration.
Successful building floodlighting depends on much more than achieving the recommended maximum average
illuminance and there is only an indirect relationship between illuminance, and the visual effect produced.
The project designer must endeavor to integrate the lighting within the public realm or structure/building in the
most appropriate way possible.
The simplified procedure comprises of 5 steps:
1. Determination of required illuminance from Table 4.4.1.

2. Choice of luminaire type(s) (generally floodlights and/or architectural feature lights) best suited
to the project design and constraints.
3. Calculation of the number and wattage of the fixtures needed to give the required illuminance.
4. Determination of best mounting positions for luminaires.
5. Specification of aiming directions for the luminaires.
Note: Under no circumstances can any architectural lighting equipment for private sector projects/buildings
be located on/within The Department’s land. Any such proposals will be rejected. All private sector
architectural lighting must be located on/within the private sector plot or building.
Table 4.4.1- Illumination Levels

Maximum Average Illumination (Em)=LUX
Approximate Surface
Typical Materials*1 for District Brightness*2
Reflectance Condition
Low Medium High
Clean 15 25 40
White Brick, Tiles or
0.8 Painted Fairly Clean 20 35 60
Fairly Dirty 45 75 120
Clean 20 35 60
Sand, Sandstone,
0.6 Portland Stone Fairly Clean 35 55 90
Clean 30 50 80
Middle Stone, Mud
0.4 Brick, Medium Concrete Fairly Clean 45 75 120
Clean 40 60 100
0.3 Dark Stone and Tiles Fairly Clean 55 90 150
Clean 55 90 150
Dark Granite, Tiles
0.2 Fairly Clean 80 140 230
Red Brick
*1 Based on reflectance for white light. Values will need to be adapted for LED light sources with a defined colour; illuminance shall
then be defined through lighting software calculation or with site trials/mock-ups.
*2 Typical districts are: Low Brightness – Rural, Medium Brightness – Suburban, High Brightness – Town and City Centers. Refer also
to the definitions/requirements of UPC/Estidama.
Project Submission Requirement:- Ensure complete compliance with the tables and associated notes for all
lighting designs and lighting calculations undertaken for projects. Citing any justifications for design decisions
where described above within any project roadway lighting reports and within the DiaLux lighting calculation
output reports described with Clause 4.5.
Project Maintenance Factors for lighting calculations shall never be assumed, nor default values used in any
lighting calculations submitted to The Department. All Maintenance Factors shall be calculated and justified in
accordance with the requirements of this Clause.
The following method shall be used to determine the Lamp Lumen Depreciation component of the Maintenance
Factor used in the DIALux lighting design software calculation:
The Consultant shall demonstrate the 50,000 hour lumen depreciation of the luminaire at 100% output at an
average night-time temperature (Tq) of 35°C (takes into account the annual average recorded night-time
temperature for Abu Dhabi Emirate plus safety allowance). The methodology to be used is as follows:
a) The manufacturer shall submit a Thermal Report to a suitable reference & standard agreed by The
Department, showing the highest Ts (solder point temperature of an LED) recorded within the luminaire,
usually at the centre of the fitting and the centre of the PCB or what would appear logically to be the
hottest region of the optical compartment. This thermal test will be conducted at 25°C ambient.
b) 10°C shall then be added to the hottest recorded Ts to simulate the required average night time
temperature of 35°C.
c) The LM-80 report from the chip manufacturer shall be provided showing the associated Alpha and Beta
(α and β) figures for each of the three Ts measurements namely, 55°C, 85°C and 105°C at the proposed
driving current. The most appropriate higher Alpha and Beta will be chosen for the Ts + 10°C. (Note:
figures from “Energy Star” type calculations can only be submitted as per TM-21 formula requirements
as verification of the required LM-80 report derived figures, never as an alternative to LM-80 or the TM-
21 method).
Example; if a thermal test shows a Ts of 68°C measured at 25°C ambient at 500mA drive current, then
10°C is added to give 78°C. In this case the most appropriate Alpha and Beta figures would be the LM-
80 data for a Ts of 85°C at 500mA. Any Ts measurements that exceed 105°C (including the added 10°C
for Tq 35°C) will not be permitted.
d) These Alphas and Betas will then be applied to the TM-21 formula which calculates the expected lumen
output at 50,000 hours.
e) This lumen output (percentage) figure (Lxx) shall then be used as the LLD component (Lamp Lumen
Depreciation) which forms part of the MF to be used in all DESIGN calculations. The LLD must be ≥0.70
or the fixture will not be allowed for use on all projects.
Thermal Test Report at 25°C detailing the highest Ts within the luminaire. LM-80 Report from chip manufacturer
with α & β for the proposed driving current. TM-21 Calculation as per the given formula.
Table 4.5.2.1 shall be used to justify the appropriate Luminaire Dirt Depreciation (LDD) in accordance with the
external optical material of the specific fixture and the appropriate pollution category for the specific project.
The appropriate value shall be selected from the table and inputted as the LDD component of the Maintenance
Factor with selection explained within the MF written justification.
*Unless specifically informed otherwise by The Department, or with another justifiable reason, assume Cleaning
Interval as 12-months.
Table 4.5.2.1- Luminaire Cleaning Interval

6 months 0.95 0.96 0.98 0.92 0.93 0.94
12 months* 0.93 0.94 0.97 0.91 0.92 0.93
18 months 0.91 0.92 0.96 0.9 0.91 0.92
24 months 0.90 0.91 0.95 0.88 0.89 0.91
36 months 0.89 0.91 0.95 0.83 0.87 0.90

Project Submission Requirement:- Provide a written report of the calculated Maintenance Factor (for every
different luminaire proposed) as per the above instructions for the LLD and LDD components and ensure these
Maintenance Factors are used in all lighting calculations in which the particular LED luminaire is proposed.
Lighting Design Calculations; assuming 50,000 hours of luminaire operation at 35C average ambient
temperature (takes into account the annual average recorded night time temperature for Abu Dhabi Emirate
plus safety allowance). DIALux calculations shall use the derived MF value(s) as calculated under the
requirements set out in Clause 4.5 and with these MFs used, designs shall achieve the Minimum Average Design
Levels, Uniformities and other applicable parameters set out within Tables 4.3.1 & 4.4.1.
The Consultant shall undertake all necessary lighting calculations for the project based on the specific
requirements set out within Section-A Clause 4.
All lighting calculations shall be undertaken using DIALux lighting design software, using the Exterior Scene
calculation section, as appropriate. DIALux is certified Freeware and can be obtained from www.dial.de or direct
from luminaire manufacturers.
Note: DIALux Evo can also be used if required as is especially useful in representing whole areas made up of
many different adjacent tasks, objects etc. which can be viewed together. However, it can only be submitted as
an additional report to DIALux if useful in justifying particular aspects of the design for a submission.
DIALux lighting calculations (at 100% luminaire output) for a project shall be issued within a single DIALux-
generated report format and the Consultant shall comply with the following requirements:
• All Company Details and Project Set-Up information shall be entered in full.
• Designer’s details and contact information shall be entered in full.
• Project Notes section to be filled in for all justifications/notes required.
• Each separate relevant task/element/object calculation to be titled logically for the project and cross-
referenced to project drawings/reports specifically.
• A typical cross-section or example of any repeating public realm/park elements; such as paths & trees,
can be provided without all areas needing to be shown.
• Tables 4.3.1 & 4.4.1 and associated notes shall form the basis of all calculations with base variables (Lux,
Uo) manually adapted from software defaults as necessary to exactly match table requirements.
• Clause 4.5 calculated Maintenance Factors only shall form the basis of all entered MF values used and
replace any DIALux default values.
• Public realm layouts/dimensions shall be inputted exactly as per the project.
• Fixture locations shall exactly match those for the project.
• Project Output Report for submissions shall always include the following selected minimum options as
and where applicable (These are DIALux standard Output Report Options to be selected before
generating the report):
Project
• Project Cover
Per Area or Element Calculation
• Planning Data
• 3D Rendering
• Valuation Fields: Isolines (Ev West) *1
• Valuation Fields: Isolines (Ev North) *1
• Valuation Fields: Isolines (Ev East) *1
• Valuation Fields: Isolines (Ev South) *1
*1 Required only for Cycle Paths/Dedicated Cycle Routes and Pedestrian Underpasses
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide the DIAlux Lighting Calculation Output Report fully in adhereance to
the above requirements in PDF format. In addition, provide the source .DLX file (DIALux file) alongside the PDF
Report in all submissions to The Department.
5.1 Lighting Level Verification

Lighting level verification will be as per Part 1, Section A Clause 9 and will consider the area under
measurement as footpaths or an irregular shaped area.
The Contractor shall measure the voltage harmonic at the supply point (LV side of the distribution substation,
after obtaining permission from AADC/ADDC) after the installation of all the LED fixtures and adopt harmonic
compensation methods, if required, to limit the total harmonics distortion in the supply voltage.
The maximum allowed total harmonics distortion is to be taken as 5% (or as per latest Electricity Authority latest
requirements if different) and in accordance with IEEE 519 Regulations.
Warning: Under no circumstances shall any LED luminaires be directly connected to a temporary generator
for field testing, nor should they be energised via a temporary generator if the generator does not meet the
requirements set out in Part 1, Section I, Clause 10.4 and without seeking fixture manufacturer approval, as
the output from many generators on start-up can permanently damage the luminaire components and thus
render the fixture warranties void.
Temporary generator energisation can only be undertaken with prior and written confirmation obtained from
the fixture manufacturers stating they approve that their fixtures can be energised by this means with details
of the specific generator used and method statement for connection and energisation.
The Contractor is fully responsible for all electrical connections to the LED fixtures and if damage is caused to
fixtures due to ignoring this warning will have to undertake remedial action to replace any affected luminaires
at their cost and without delay to the Contract.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide test report of the project installation and proof of harmonic
distortion limit compliance.
6. Power to Landscape and Public Realm Lighting
6.1 Control Cabinet Requirements
Due to the typical requirements and types of luminaires used in Landscape and Public Realm lighting, it is
accepted that the circuits will be Single Phase and that the control cabinets will utilise MCBs as circuit
protective devices. All electrical requirements are detailed in Part 1, Section I and all standard detail drawings
are provided in Part 2, Applicable Standard Detail Drawings. All circuits will utilise 3 core XLPE/SWA or 3 core
rubberised flex as per Single Phase requirements (Live, Neutral and Earth cores).
6.2 Landscape and Public Realm Lighting Control
As landscape and public realm lighting will consist of a mixture of luminaire types it is important that the
lighting control is considered to deal with the requirements of this manual for switch on/off times for the
various types of luminaires and their requirements. The requirements can be broken down into 2 types-
• Landscape Lighting- Aesthetic purpose only- where the landscape lighting provides an aesthetic
outcome by illuminating the landscape elements such as trees, rocks, fountains, statues, etc.
this type of lighting can be fully switched off as per the requirements of Part 2, Section D.
• Landscape Lighting- Aesthetics and Public Safety- where landscape lighting is broken into
aesthetic lighting which can be switched off in full at the prescribed times and lighting for public
safety, such as pathways through parks that are open to the public 24/7. The control can be
split across the circuits using a two-channel time clock or PLMS system suitable to control
separate parts of the lighting. For all references for the lighting control systems to be applied
refer to Part 2, Section D and Part 2, Applicable Standard Details of this manual.
6.3 Landscape and Public Realm Lighting Control-DMX
Where DMX is used as a method for controlling the lighting a separate detailed methodology and control
schematics will be provided to the Department during submission.

Part-2 Section-B – Sports Area Use Lighting
Part-2 Section B – Sports Area Use Lighting

Section-B, refer to the Part-2 Applicable Standards & Guidance References Section.
This Section is a brief summary of the primary factors covered within this Part-2 Section-B of the
1.1. Required/Permitted under Manual Part-2 Section-B
a) Reference to the Public Realm & Street Lighting Handbook’s Chapter K: Sports
Lighting is made as the required reading as the primary learning resource before
undertaking any Sports facility lighting design within Public Realm.
b) It is statutory that all luminaires used for projects must be LED (or other equally
Introduction).
c) Manual Part-1 Section-A, in addition to the LED luminaire criteria aligned with QCC,
has been revised with separate clauses covering the additional specific Department
Project criteria regarding fixture and component performance, quality, lighting design
and warranty requirements.
d) LED Luminaire Useful-Life Performance is based on an ambient to 350C.
e) Maintenance Factor (MF) calculations must be supplied with every submission.
f) Luminaire Dirt Depreciation Factor (LDD) component of the Maintenance Factor are
detailed in Part 2 Section B, Clause 4.4.
g) Warranty for all luminaires is a minimum 10-Years for all aspects.
h) Table of Lighting Design areas/objects/categories are detailed in Table 4.3.1
i) Project Lighting Design and Calculation requirements are set out within the Manual.
j) Project Lighting Management requirements are detailed in Lighting Manual Part-2
Section-D.
k) Where Solar Public Realm Lighting proposed for a project, then all project, technical,
component and material requirements for the solar system aspects are set out within
Manual Part-2 Section-E. All Lighting design, lighting fixture, lighting calculation and
lighting verification requirements are as per Part-2 Section B
l) The Department’s decision is final regarding project submissions and design
approvals.
1.2. Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-2 Section-B
a) Any deviation from the system technical criteria as set out within this Manual
b) Any deviation from the minimum maintenance and warranty requirements as set out
within this Manual.
c) Any deviation from the project Lighting Design, Calculation and Site Verification

The Public Realm & Street Lighting Handbook’s Chapter K: Sports Lighting is made as the
required reading as the primary learning resource before undertaking any Sports facility lighting
design within Public Realm.

Department’s electrical and lighting standards for electrical distribution worksas per Part 1
Section IDetails of all standards are provided within the Applicable Standards & Guidance
It is a statutory requirement that all luminaires used on The Department’s Sports Lighting projects
must be LED (or other equally sustainable alternative luminaire technology as defined within this
Manual’s Introduction).
Consultant shall ensure in his design the following: integration, coordination, functionality and
3. LED Luminaires
3.1. General Requirements
corrosion resistance and endurance against the occasional sandstorm and dusty weather in
In addition to the LED Luminaires supplied QCC Certificates shall be the additional specific Lighting
on the project submission for all projects.
Notes:
The QCC Certification Scheme provides certification for a luminaire and/or luminaire range/family;
within the allowed criteria set out under the scheme. The specific optics option of the luminaire
are not a critical parameter within the scheme and as such if the luminaire proposed for a
particular project has an optic which differs from that used for certification, this is not an issue for
compliance and is allowed as long as the project specific minimum fixture efficacy requirements
stated within table 3.4.1.1 are met with the particular optic used and photometry provided to
show actual luminaire efficacy value.
the luminaire(s) gaining compliance (i.e. using a new generation of LED sources), this too is
allowed as long as the luminaire’s body, materials, driver and drive current remain the same (or
less in regards to drive current) and the overall luminaire’s lumen output is similar. Justification
must be made to The Department alongside the QCC Product Conformity Certificate with all
technical details and The Department shall assess the justification as part of the project
submission and decide if the luminaire is accepted as being covered under the existing Certificate
or must require new certification. The Department’s decision is final and it is advised for all
manufacturers to ensure regular certification of updated fixture families as required to ensure
compliance is maintained.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide Copy of QCC Product Conformity Certificate(s)
3.3.1 General
a) Manufacturer’s company profile including a profile of the manufacturing facilities. Valid

Project Submission Requirement: - Provide manufacturer profile and ISO 9001 certificates.
b) The following shall be submitted in addition to the documents required (all data in SI
units):
a) The LEDs shall be from a manufacturer of LEDs with ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2011 or

Correlated Colour Temperature (CCT) ANSI standard white LED colours accepted for use
for Sports lighting projects are 4000K, 4500K, 5000K and 5700K only, although the QCC
Scheme allows a wider band for all luminaire types).
Sports Application Floodlight 100lm/W 70

Project Submission Requirement:- Provide IES LM-79 test reports (Sections 11 & 12) or
luminaire CCT is within acceptable limits as per Table 3.2.2.2 in relation to Nominal CCT.

Nominal CCT Nominal CCT
4000K 3985K ± 154
5000K 5028K ± 220
5700K 5665K ± 269
3.3.3 LED Binning
White-light luminaires shall be maximum proved MacAdam Ellipse Step-4. This does not apply for
coloured or RGB fixtures/LEDs.
replacement.
exposure during the day, the occasional sand storms and dust in designing the luminaire
body. The design of the luminaire shall be such that there is a direct thermal path from
the LED junctions to the atmosphere thus providing a thermal transfer effect throughout
the life of the luminaire. The thermal solution shall be proprietary and designed by the
lighting manufacturer to enable the luminaires to work efficiently in Abu Dhabi climatic
The luminaire shall be designed to prevent collection of debris and dust/sand by proven and
stated means. The design shall be such that the luminaire lenses shall be anti-static to ensure
minimal dust/sand accumulation.
b) The luminaire operating range (taking into account LED components, driver, etc.) shall be
to a minimum of +50°C ambient air temperature(Ta) with an acceptable demonstrated
lumen-output performance at Ta+50°C. The operating range maximum refers to the Ta as
per IEC/ISO 60598-1 or UL 1598.
In addition this measured percentage drop of luminous flux shall then be applied to the LM-79
fitting.
c) The luminaire installed daytime (non working) temperature shall be to a minimum of 50°C
ambient air temperature (Ta)with all internal components rated to a minimum of 85°C..
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide declaration of the conformity of the Luminaire to the
Table 3.3.7.1- Ingress Protection (IP) and Impact Protection (IK)

Minimum IK-Rating
Fixture Type Minimum IP-Rating
Luminaire Lens
Sport Application Floodlight IP66 IK10
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide declaration of pressure die-cast aluminum alloy

Standards or comparable International standard.
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide test report to ASTM D1654-08 or other comparable
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide written report of all dissimilar metals used within the
corrosion.
d) All synthetic optical materials shall be resistant to degredation by Ultraviolet Radiation
and scratch resistant.
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide declaration with supporting evidence that the
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide written confirmation covering any steel components
standard.
f) Any external stainless steel body materials, components bolts, nuts and hardened
washers shall be minimum 316L Grade or comparable International standard.
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide written confirmation covering any stainless steel

Driver can have some means of built-in overheat thermal protection in the form of either
automatic dimming or stepping/holding down of the driver. But this function can be present only
if devices activate after the case-temperature exceeds that experienced within the luminaire’s
normal required maximum operational limits: i.e. with Ta50°C (outside ambient-air temperature
to the luminaire).
in equivalence with this requirement
• Drivers shall have a Power Factor (PF) of L ≥ 0.90
• Driver shall be UL and/or IEC Certified
in accordance with ANSI C82.77or comparable International standard
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide LED driver manufacturer data sheets, test reports
thermal protection is present within the driver, then proof required to confirm its operation is not
activated within the normal stated limits of luminaire thermal operational requirements.
Demonstrate 50,000 hours useful life of the luminaire based on the simplified B20-L70 threshold
at ambient temperature (Tq) of 35°C (takes into account the annual average recorded night-time
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide lumen maintenance report for 50,000 hour, B20-L70
standard.
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide test results for IEC 62471, ANSI/IES RP-27.3 or
exposure.
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide test results for ANSI C136.31 or comparable
Depending on the project type, size, scope, dynamic lighting, Estidama compliance and/or Light
Pollution Mitigation requirements, the project’s lighting management must be established to
ensure the required level of circuit switching, dimming, controls etc. are provided. Refer to
Manual Part-2 Section-D for the specific technical requirements for lighting management and
Manual Part-2 Section-F for the specific technical requirements for Light Pollution Mitigation
which might determine the level of lighting management needed to be designed into the project.
Special attention should be paid to any Parks/Public Realm projects which will be used after 00:00
hours as the allowances for the various aspects of light pollution are different before and after
this threshold time.
The Consultant must propose and agree the lighting management with The Department as part
of the project Concept Design Stage submission approval process. If approved by the Department
this approach must then be described and designed for all further project design stages, through
and including to Tender.
Project Submission Requirement: - Check the project against the requirements detailed within
Manual Part-2 Sections-D and F and undertake the Concept Design to meet these requirements.
If approved follow the technical criteria set out within Manual Part-2 Section D for the Preliminary
and Detail Design proposals as well as within the project Tender.
• IEC/EN 61547 to 10kV (or 6 kV if a remote SPD is installed)

• IEEE/ASNI C62.41.2 Scenario I Location Category C to 10kV-10kA (or 6kV-6kA if a
remote SPD is installed)
luminaire SPD.
is final.
accredited laboratories

inspection.

requirements, if and when, evoked by The Department.
3.3.16 Warranty
below.
a) A written warranty for a 10 year on-site replacement material, fixture, finishes and
workmanship against the deterioration of the housing, all external components; such as
lenses, gaskets & fastenings, and the fixture finishes shall include warranty against failure
or substantial deteriorations such as corrosion, blistering, cracking or peeling (excluding
damage caused by contact with chemical substances, fertilizers, water containing
corrosive agents or stray electrical currents) with no cost to The Department**
b) A written warranty for a 10 year replacement material warranty for defective or non-
starting LED source assemblies with no cost to The Department**
c) A written warranty for a 10 yearreplacement material warranty on all supplied drivers,

power supply units (PSUs), electrical components and in-built control components with
no cost to The Department**
d) A written warranty for a 10 year replacement material warranty for on-maintained

luminance levels on all light sources (LED package, LED array, or LED module) including,
but not limited to the LED die, encapsulate, and phosphor. Stating B20 compliance for a
minimum of 10 years. If the expected useful life performance parameters of the luminaire
system are not being maintained, then the manufacturer shall replace the light source(s)
or luminaire as needed with no cost to The Department*
*With no cost to The Department does not just refer to the luminaire or luminaire component cost
in regards to any warranty actions. This also refers to any costs associated with labour for
warranty actions). The manufacturer must contact DMT before appointing a contractor. These

should be given to Handbook Chapters F, H, I, J, K, M and O.
4.1 Appraisal
The Consultant shall read fully the Sports Lighting Section: Chapter K of the Public Realm & Street
Lighting Handbook prior to designing all sports lighting within Public Realm and Parks projects.
This Chapter provides information and recommendations on how to approach the design of
lighting for many of the more common sports activities applicable to public projects and includes
examples and sample calculation.
4.2 General Design Considerations
Use of Mesopic multipliers shall be disallowed herein, by assuming an S/P ratio of 1.00
for all luminaires in all calculations.
b) Lighting Approach & Floodlighting Orientation

All floodlighting for pitches & courts shall be mounted equally spaced along the sides of
the pitch or court so that the distance between each fixture is twice that of the end fixture
and pitch/court corner. Fixtures aimed tangentially (at right angles) to the direction of
play. Mounting floodlights at corners, at the pitch/court ends, behind goals, nor aim
fittings diagonally across the playing surface is not acceptable.
The simplified design procedure comprises of six steps:
1. Determination of required illuminance, uniformity and Glare Rating from Table

4.3 (Class III figures, unless confirmed otherwise: see item e)
2. Use International Sports Lighting Guidance for determination of specific Design
and Calculation criteria. Refer to Applicable Standards & References Section
3. Choice of luminaires best suited to the sport and the area
4. Calculation of the number and wattage of fixtures to give the required
illuminance and meet lighting criteria
5. Determination of best arrangement and mounting positions for luminaires
6. Specification of aiming angles/directions for the luminaires
c) Lighting Design Classes

All Lighting Levels (with the exception of Informal Play Areas) to following standard
International Class classifications as follows:
▪ Class I - Top Level Competition

▪ Class II - Intermediate Level Competition
▪ Class III* - Lower Level Competition, Supervised Training & Unsupervised play
*NOTE. Class III shall always be followed, unless specifically required otherwise by the Project
Brief or in writing from The Department.
d) Informal Play Areas

For Informal Play Areas, which tend to blend into other public realm spaces less formally
it is advised to propose only 4000K CCT Lighting fixtures within the project’s overall
lighting design and endeavour to combine the luminaires with other public realm fixtures,
such as adjacent pathway poles or locations following the landscape layouts.
e) Sports Lighting Luminaires/Poles

The Consultant shall undertake all necessary detailing and co-ordination (especially
during the Detail Design Stage/submission) to ensure poles and bollards etc. are never
mounted within softscape. Poles and bollards must always be mounted in
hardscape/graveland coordinated with the landscape design and detailing. All lighting
poles/bollards to be kept a minimum of 1m distance from irrigation spray to remove the
corrosive effects of irrigation water.
f) Wiring, Connections & Junction Boxes

Unless a lighting fixture can cater for direct internal termination of SWA (Steel Wire
Armoured) or any other form of armoured cable, all Public Realm and Park lighting final
circuits must be undertaken utilising double-insulated un-armoured flexible cables with
another form of physical mechanical cable protection proposed such as ducts. This is to
ensure luminaire IP ratings are maintained and circuits can avoid unnecessary and
hazardous additional joint/ junctions etc.
The Consultant shall ensure all luminaires proposed have a terminal-block capacity to
directly take the size of cable (CSA) required within the project design. Any required
junction boxes, cables, connections or control devices however shall be integrated into
the landscaping through suitable concealed means in a logical and designed manner by
the Consultant. The proposed installation method(s), protection, maintenance
methodology, accessibility, finishes and locations shall be detailed and presented to The
Department as part of the Detail Design Stage submission. Consideration must be given
to future O&M operations, including fault finding. “Daisy Chain” connections are not
acceptable where the circuit MCB will trip with any failure within the luminaire.
Consideration must be given to fusing arrangements within the luminaires or as part of
the electrical network.
g) Cost Analysis
The Consultant shall, as requested by The Department. provide full cost analysis including
payback assessments as required for the project and in accordance with the instructions
Project Submission Requirement: - Ensure all the above criteria and recommedations for the
specific project are applied as applicable.
Table 4.3.1- Schedule of Lighting Levels

Minimum Average Design Level: (Em)*3 Lux (Horizontal plane)
and Uniformity Ratio (minimum to average) Glare rating (GR)*4

Sport
Activity/Area Class I*1 Class II*1 Class III*2
Uo Uo Uo
(Em) Lux (Em) Lux (Em) Lux I II III
Min/Ave Min/Ave Min/Ave
MUGA (Multi Use

400 0.7 200 0.5 75 0.5 50 50 55
Games Areas)
Athletics 500 0.7 200 0.5 50 to 100 0.5 50 50 55
Running Tracks &

500 0.7 200 0.5 20 to 50 0.3 50 50 55
Circuit Training
Baseball In Fld 750 0.7 500 0.7 300 0.5 50 50 55

Out Fld 500 0.5 300 0.5 200 0.3 50 50 55
Basketball 500 0.7 200 0.6 75 0.5 50 50 55
Cricket Wkt 750 0.7 500 0.7 300 0.5 50 50 55

Field 500 0.5 300 0.5 200 0.3 50 50 55
Bowls (Flat Green) 300 0.7 200 0.7 100 0.5 50 50 50
Equestrian 500 0.7 200 0.7 100 0.5 50 50 55
Football (Soccer) 500 0.7 200 0.6 75 0.5 50 50 55
Hockey 500 0.7 200 0.7 200 0.7 50 50 55
Netball 500 0.7 200 0.6 75 0.5 50 50 55
Rugby (all codes) 500 0.7 200 0.6 75 0.5 50 50 55
Tennis 500 0.7 300 0.7 200 0.6 50 50 55
Volleyball 500 0.7 200 0.6 75 0.5 50 50 55
Hurling 500 0.7 300 0.7 200 0.5 50 50 55
Gaelic Football 500 0.7 200 0.6 75 0.5 50 50 55
American Football 500 0.7 200 0.6 75 0.5 50 50 55
Swimming Pools/
500 0.7 300 0.7 200 0.5 50 50 55
Pool Areas
Skate/ BMX Parks 500 0.7 300 0.5 100 0.3 50 50 55
Informal Play/
Flexible Lawn N/A N/A N/A N/A 30 0.15 N/A N/A 60
Areas*5
*1 Where More than one Class must be catered for then the use of multiple fixtures, separate circuits and controls
shall be implemented to ensure the different illumination, uniformity and glare requirements can be met. NOTE: Just
Class III shall be followed, unless specifically required otherwise by the Project Brief or in writing from The
Department
*2 Class III shall always be followed, unless specifically required otherwise by the Project Brief or in writing from The
Department
*3 Em is the Minimum Average Design Level (specification level) and is the horizontal design illuminance level, below
which the lighting shall not be allowed to fall during the period to planned maintenance.
*4 CIE 112 is to be used to check the Glare Rating. Outputs from this check are to be provided within the
Report.
*5 For Informal Play/Flexible Lawn Areas, which tend to blend into other public realm spaces less formally it is
advised to propose only 4000K CCT Lighting fixtures. Refer also to Part-2 Section-A, however all luminaire criteria are
as per this Section’s requirements.
Project Maintenance Factors for lighting calculations shall never be assumed, nor default values
used in any lighting calculations submitted to The Department. All Maintenance Factors shall be
calculated and justified in accordance with the requirements of this Clause.
the Maintenance Factor used in the DIALux lighting design software calculation:
The Consultant shall demonstrate the 50,000 hour lumen depreciation of the luminaire at 100%
output at an average night-time temperature (Tq) of 35°C (takes into account the annual average
recorded night-time temperature for Abu Dhabi Emirate plus safety allowance).
The methodology to be used is as follows:
b) 10°C shall then be added to the hottest recorded Ts to simulate the required average night
time temperature of 35°C.
current, then 10°C is added to give 78°C. In this case the most appropriate Alpha and Beta
figures would be the LM-80 data for a Ts of 85°C at 500mA. Any Ts measurements that
exceed 105°C (including the added 10°C for Tq 35°C) will not be permitted.
calculations. The LLD must be ≥0.70 or the fixture will not be allowed for use on
Department projects.
formula.
Table 4.4.2.1- Cleaning Interval
6 months 0.95 0.96 0.98 0.92 0.93 0.94
12 months* 0.93 0.94 0.97 0.91 0.92 0.93
18 months 0.91 0.92 0.96 0.9 0.91 0.92
24 months 0.90 0.91 0.95 0.88 0.89 0.91
36 months 0.89 0.91 0.95 0.83 0.87 0.90

components and ensure these Maintenance Factors are used in all lighting calculations in which
the particular LED luminaire is proposed.
Lighting Design Calculations; assuming 50,000 hours of luminaire operation at 35C average
ambient temperature (Takes into account the annual average recorded night time temperature
for Abu Dhabi Emirate plus safety allowance). DiaLux calculations shall use the derived MF
value(s) as calculated under the requirements set out in Clause 4.4 and with these MFs used
designs shall achieve the Minimum Average Design Levels, Uniformities and other applicable
parameters set out within Table 4.3.1.
specific requirements set out within Section-B Clause 4.
All lighting calculations shall be undertaken using DIALux lighting design software, using the
Exterior Scene calculation section and Sports Facilities Inserts, as appropriate. DIALux is certified
Freeware and can be obtained from www.dial.de or direct from luminaire manufacturers.
Note: DIALux Evo can also be used if required as is especially useful in representing whole areas
made up of many different adjacent tasks, objects etc. which can be viewed together. However,
it can only be submitted as an additional report to DIALux if useful in justifying particular aspects
of the design for a submission.
DIALux lighting calculations (at 100% luminaire output) for a project shall be issued within a single
DIALux-generated report format and the Consultant shall comply with the following
requirements:
• Designer’s details and contact information shall be entered in full
• Project Notes section to be filled in for all justifications/notes required
• Each separate relevant sport/task calculation to be titled logically for the project and
cross-referenced to project drawings/reports specifically
• Table 4.3.1 and associated notes shall form the basis of all calculations with base variables
(Lux, Uo) manually adapted from software defaults as necessary to exactly match table
requirements
values used and replace any DIALux default values
• Sports Facility layouts/dimensions shall be inputted exactly as per the project
• Fixture locations shall exactly match those for the project
minimum options as and where applicable (These are DIALux standard Output Report
Options to be selected before generating the report):
Project
• Project Cover
Per Sports Facility/Task Calculation
• Planning Data
• 3D Rendering
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide the DIAlux Lighting Calculation Output Report fully in
adhereance to the above requirements in PDF format. In addition, provide the source .DLX file
(DIALux file) alongside the PDF Report in all submissions to The Department.

5.1 Lighting Level Verification
Lighting level verification will be as per Part 1, Section A Clause 9 and will consider the area
under measurement as an irregular shaped area.
The Contractor shall measure the voltage harmonic at the supply point (LV side of the distribution
obtained from the fixture manufacturers stating they approve that their fixtures can be

Part-2 Section-C –Lighting Poles and Accessories
P
Part-2 Section C – Lighting Poles & Accessories
Note: For all structural, technical and material light pole and accessory Specification details
refer to The Department’s Standard Specifications, Drawings and Manuals listed within the
Part-2 Applicable Standards & Guidance References Section. The criteria within the latest
versions of these documents shall be adhered to. This Section covers only some additional
details and the lighting pole/accessory warranty requirement information.
The Public Realm & Street Lighting Handbook’s Chapters J & K: Public Realm Lighting and
Sports Lighting respectively are required reading as the primary learning resources before
undertaking any Park, Public Realm or Sports project lighting design.
All lighting poles and mounting accessories shall be selected along with the luminaires to
match the overall landscaping and furniture master plan and finishes. Poles and accessories
shall be made up of pressure die-cast aluminium alloy, extruded aluminium, wood, steel or
stainless-steel. The finishes colour and designs of the poles/accessories shall be as agreed
with The Department for the project.

Department’s electrical and lighting standards for electrical distribution works, except as
specified herein. Copies should be requested from The Department if not already held. Details
of all standards are provided within the Applicable Standards & Guidance References at the
end of Part-2.
Suppliers and manufacturers shall guarantee adherence to this Manual and the performance
of their poles and accessories under all the required design conditions.
The Consultant shall be responsible to ensure that the project and all product specifications
are fully in compliance, without any deviation from this Manual, prior to forwarding to The
Department for approval. Any deviation should be brought to the notice of The Department.
The Consultant shall ensure in his design the following: integration, coordination,
functionality and accessibility of these services. It shall be the Consultant’s responsibility to
bring the system to the design & operating and maintenance conditions.
Note: The height and type of lighting poles shall be left to the Department to decide if suitable
for each area. Lighting pole foundations shall be installed 150mm above agreed ground level
except where the lighting pole will be installed in a tiled/hardscape area. Where lighting poles
are installed in tiled/hardscape areas they will be flush with the tiles.
P
2. Special Materials
Any proposed wooden poles, components or mounting accessories shall be from a proven
sustainable source of supply, FSC (Forest Stewardship Council) certified and suitable for use in the
UAE environment. All materials and finishes shall be guaranteed against cracking and fading and
be resistant to degradation by Ultraviolet Radiation.
a) The Department may request standard production model pole/accessory samples,

identical to the proposed products, to be installed for inspection. The Department
shall be sole judge regarding acceptability of products.
b) To verify performance and compliance with the specifications, The Department may
also request additional testing of sample poles/accessories. All such testing shall be
from accredited laboratories.
c) According to the requirements of the Project’s Contract documents, if required The

inspection.

requirements, if and when, invoked by The Department.
4. Material and Construction Details
4.1. Structural Testing
All structural testing shall be carried out as per the directions of Part 1, Section A Clauses 8 to
11. With all visual inspection and testing data being recorded on the appropriate Pro-forma in
Part 1, Section J.
Note: ALL Material and Construction information is contained within Part 1, Section C and shall
be followed during Tender and Construction Stages. Failure to comply with the requirements
will require the Contractor to remove and reinstall all lighting poles and foundations at their
cost.
P
5. Warranty
below.
a) A written warranty for a Minimum fifteen (15) year on-site replacement: material,
fixture finish, and workmanship. On-site replacement includes transportation,
removal and installation of new product. Finish warranty shall include warranty
include for maintained aesthetic integrity of the poles, accessories and assembly,
without any partial or complete separation, dislocation, disjointing, flaring, etc. of any
elements of the pole, accessory and assembly with no cost to The Department*
b) A written warranty for a Minimum fifteen (15) year replacement material warranty
for defective poles and mounting accessories with no cost to The Department*
c) A written warranty for a Minimum twenty (20) year replacement material warranty
for defective wooden poles and mounting accessories with no cost to The
Department*
(Please note: * With no cost to The Department does not just refer to the pole/accessory cost in
regards to any warranty actions. This also refers to any costs associated with labour for
removal/fitting of pole, accessory or components, obtaining Authority NOCs, traffic management
costs, transport etc. The Department will not be liaible for any associated costs arising/necessary
in relation to warranty actions) These requirements are purely in regards to the terms of
Pole/Pole Equipment/Accessory Warranties that must be provided to The Department at
Handover. It is not in any way in connection to the cover during the defects period which shall
be solely as per specific terms agreed between the manufacturer and Contractor.

Department, of the Warranty for The Department from the Supplier(s), accompanied with written
proof of the local representative’s UAE Operating License and established UAE background, to
warranty the materials and performance as stated within this clause and for the minimum periods
defined.
P

Part-2 Section-D –Public Realm Lighting Management
P
Part-2 Section D – Public Realm Lighting Management

For full descriptions of any standards and guidance documents referred to within this Part-2 Section-D,
refer to the Part-2 Applicable Standards & Guidance References.
This Section is a brief summary of the primary factors covered within this Part-2 Section-D of the
1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-2 Section-D
a) Basic Timing Controls to be provided for projects as defined in Clause 3.1.

b) Split-Circuit Controls or Project Lighting management System (PLMS) to be provided for
projects as defined in Clause 3.2.
c) Tables of Initial PLMS programming dimming profile levels provided within the Manual
d) PLMS/CMS shall be Open Protocol to allow various manufacturers’ equipment to be used
and connected seamlessly.
e) Warranty for all lighting management systems/switches/timers/components set as
minimum 10-Years for all aspects.
f) Table of Initial Timer/PLMS programming profiles provided within the Manual.
g) The Department’s decision is final regarding project submissions and design approvals.
1.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-2 Section-D
a) Any deviation from the system technical criteria as set out within this Manual
b) Any deviation from the minimum maintenance and warranty requirements as set out within
this Manual.

herein.. Details of all standards are provided within the Applicable Standards & Guidance
P
Suppliers and manufacturers shall guarantee adherence to this Manual and the performance of their
lighting management system, components and software under all the required design conditions.
The Consultant shall be responsible to ensure that the project and all product specifications are fully
in compliance, without any deviation from this Manual, prior to forwarding to The Department for
approval. Any deviation should be brought to the notice of The Department. The Consultant shall
ensure in their design the following: integration, coordination, functionality and accessibility of these
services. It shall be the Consultant’s responsibility to bring the system to the design & operating and
maintenance conditions.
calculations must be calculated with the exact luminaire solution proposed; including specific circuit
wattages and drive currents, actual sources within the luminaires, including the exact calculation for
the lighting fixtures’ useful-life cycle, project location, PLMS controls usage/programming etc.
3. Project Controls/Lighting Management System (PLMS) Provision

The following project parameters define a public realm/park project’s requirements for provision of
controls or PLMS:
3.1 Projects Requiring Basic Timed Operation
a) All Public Realm/Parks areas intended to be operated/occupied only up to 23:00hrs on

weekdays and 00:00 on weekends and have no defined lit sports facilities other Informal Play
Areas.
b) Stand alone non-dynamic lit water features or non-interactive lit elements
3.2 Projects Requiring Split-Circuit Operation or PLMS Provision
a) Separate circuit timed control system or PLMS for All Public Realm/Parks areas intended to
be operated/occupied after 23:00hrs on weekdays and 00:00 on weekends.
b) All Public Realm/Parks areas intended to be operated/occupied only up to 23:00hrs on

weekdays and 00:00 on weekends but have defined lit sports facilities other Informal Play
Areas.
c) All defined Sports facilities other than Informal Play Areas must be supplied via separate
circuits and be provided with separately controlled automatic/PLMS or user controls.
P
d) Solar lighting systems or lighting controlled/connected to solar supply systems (refer also to
the additional specific PLMS requirements within Section-E).
e) Stand alone dynamic-lighting effect water features or lit interactive elements.
f) Any Public Realm/Parks areas including lit water features or interactive elements.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide assessment of the project based on the above and
justification within project submissions of the required controls or PLMS
4. Lighting Controls & PLMS Technical Criteria
The project lighting control/operation shall be fully interlinked via either a system of circuit
timers/switches or a PLMS system which fully meets the requirements of this Section and proposed
as best meets the needs and location of the specific project:
4.1 Basic Switching/Timing Controls Technical Requirements
4.1.1 Circuit Control Devices
• For all general technical and material Specification details refer to The Department’s
Standard Specifications, Drawings and Manuals listed within the Part-2 Applicable
Standards & Guidance References Section
• Timer switching devices shall be of the electronic, astronomical type and shall be
selected to be 24-hour or 7-Day programmable to suit the intended project type/use and
must have battery backup to maintain programming through power outages and
Photocell override
• Compliant with EN50178 and CE or comparable International standard
• System components shall be located within Lighting Control Cabinets (LCCs) and operate
defined circuits through set programming with photocell override.
• All photocell devices to be located in positions clear to the sky and selected to avoid
becoming inhibited by future plant growth
• The Controls supplier shall have at least six (6) years of experience in the manufacturer
of control components and shall have at least two (2) years’ experience of its products
installed successfully in the GCC
• The system must prevent any daytime operation of the luminaires
• All system components shall be able to operate within a Nominal Rated Input voltage:
230V +10% / -6% (As per DOE EWR 4th Edition) 50Hz
P
operations
• Any UPS/batteries within the system components shall be rated for minimum 6-years
operation without need for replacement
• Components operating temperature (Nighttime): +60 °C
• Components storage (non-operating, Daytime) +85 °C
4.2 PLMS Technical Requirements
4.2.1. Wired Systems
• System shall use power line communication and be suitable for three-phase and/or
single-phase distribution as per the project’s infrastructure
• The system shall be equipped with a suitable filtering system, preventing any disrupting
interference signals being fed back through the supply and proposed to address the
actual site supply conditions
• Compliant with EN60950 and CE or comparable International standard
• Main system units shall be located within Lighting Control Cabinets (LCCs) and must
interconnect/communicate to all other main units and the luminaires’ interface modules
via the existing power lines using the power line communication method
• Each luminaire shall be equipped with an adjacent hard-wired transmitter/ receiver
control interface through a hard-wired connection to the fixture terminal block. The
control interface and luminaire shall be interconnected via 5 core cable; phase, neutral,
earth, control+ and control –
• Devices cannot be located within the luminaire bodies, but to be positioned in locations
to be agreed for the project by The Department
• System must be able to handle and maintain communication when one or more of the
main system components are down by demonstrating capability for signal distance
performance on the specific constraints of the project
• Project PLMS must be provided with a single point of data terminal/interface/
connection for any reprogramming needs of the PLMS project area to be achievable from
one point of interface
• The system shall be able to operate in a pre-programmed condition autonomously for
the project and also data shall be able to be interfaced via a MODBus, RS232 interface
for communication to a central CMS location via the GSM/GPRS/TCP-IP network, with a
Department central location in the future.
4.2.2. Wireless Systems
• Wireless system; Wi-Fi, or RF system, with MESH or STAR Capability and fully tested and
compatible with the lighting system proposed
P
• GSM 900/1800, GPRS, SMS, ZigBee etc. or other approved system agreed with the
Department
• System shall be compliant with all Abu Dhabi TRA Standards/requirements and be
proposed with all statutory approvals
• System to comprise of main system component units/nodes and addressable
transmitters/receiver units, with ‘hop’ capability, adjacent to or locally connected to the
luminaires to suit the proposed system’s requirements and final connection to the
luminaire through a hard-wired connection to the fixture terminal block
• All luminaires are to be factory fitted with Nema sockets and Nodes. All Gateways are to
be fitted to the lighting poles, without causing damage to the pole coating or causing
galvanic corrosion. Where existing luminaires are to be retrofitted to include PLMS,
where possible and without voiding the warranty or affecting the IP rating, the node shall
be fitted to the luminaire body. Where this is not possible, the node shall be fitted to the
pole or the pole bracket. Where the luminaire is still within the warranty period, the
manufacturer must be contacted, prior to any work being carried out, to ensure that the
warranty will not be adversely affected. System must be able to handle and maintain
communication when one or more of the main system components are down by
demonstrating capability for signal distance performance on the specific constraints of
the project
• Project PLMS must be provided with a single point of data terminal/interface/connection
for any reprogramming needs of the PLMS project area to be achievable from one point
of interface
• The system shall be able to operate in a pre-programmed condition autonomously for
the project and also data shall be able to interface for communication to a central CMS
location via a GSM/TCP-IP network, with a TCP/IP over a fiber- optic converter or other
approved means and protocol to a Department central location in the future
4.2.3. General Mandatory Project Technical Requirements
• The PLMS supplier shall have at least six (6) years of experience in public lighting
management systems and it shall be able to demonstrate at least two (2) similar relevant
installations in the UAE, GCC or MENA region
• The proposed system shall be fully compatible with all luminaire(s) and drivers proposed
for the project through a hard-wired final connection to the fixture terminal block and
all system components must comply with open communication protocols
• Any brand of luminaires (as per the technical criteria within Part-2 Sections-A and/or B)
shall be able to be controlled from the system to ensure luminaire choice can be made
openly for the best current marketplace products available for the project and for any
future revisions and additions to the project area
• The PLMS and system main components must have a minimum of 20% spare capacity
for future potential street revisions and additions.
P
• The system must prevent all daytime operation of LED fixtures unless only the specific
manual override of the automated programming is desired by The Department
• All system components shall be able to operate within a range of Nominal rated Input
voltage: 230V +10% / -6% (As per DOE EWR 4th Edition) 50Hz.
• The solution shall offer a complete backup operation; in the case of communication or
power failure to the system the area controlled shall be able to operate automatically as
per the set programming profiles
• System interface/software to be password encrypted, able to program the project
system and cater for revised programming settings for future if required
system/control room in the future as and when required (refer to Part-1 Section-D
Clause 4.1.6)
• Minimum 0-10V analogue dimming capability (optional PWM dimming 0-100%, DMX
and DALI interface capability as required) Standard & customizable 24-hour light profiles
for peak/off-peak times as per Clause 5 for the specific project area/feature. Light levels
configurable at 10% step increments. The individual dimming profiles able to be changed
to weekly plans if required
operations
• Error Reporting - Comprehensive & instant overview about infrastructure problems like
circuit power failure, individual lamp/driver/fixture failures
• Energy Reports - Detailed daily overview about energy consumed, voltage, current, pf,
accumulative hours of operation (at dimming level) etc.
• Data Export/Import capability for future in depth analysis or integration into any existing
asset/inventory management/control systems operated by The Department (refer to
Part-1 Section-D Clause 4.1.6)
• Any UPS/batteries within the system components shall be rated for minimum 6-years
operation without need for replacement
• Components operating temperature: +60 °C
• Components storage (non-operating): +80 °C
4.2.4. Optional Project Requirements
NOTE: These capabilities/devices/requirements are not suitable for general project PLMS and should
not be proposed for general projects. However only if specifically requested by The Department they
can be proposed for particular projects which may have unique or special opportunities to warrant
their inclusion within that project proposal:
• Movement/infra-red sensors
• Pedestrian monitoring sensors
• Luminance and illuminance measurement sensors
• iOs/Android/Windows mobile application interface for maintenance work at site
P
4.2.5. Prohibited Components or Capabilities
• Individual fixture photocell light sensors

• Any fixture ‘flashing ‘or strobing programming operation
• Public user-interface of lighting controls
• Any proprietary node socket that prohibits the use of any brand of luminaire Any
luminaire interface or internal PLMS components which could affect the thermal
performance of LED luminaires and/or void the luminaire’s warranty and/or require new
luminaire testing
4.2.6. Central Management System (CMS) Technical Requirements
NOTE: Refer to Manual Part-1, Section-D Clause 4.1.6. for all details with regards CMS
P
5. Public Realm Programming
The following table shall be the default programming settings for all public realm/park project types and
should also used within in any required project cost analysis.
Table 5.1- PLMS Timing Program

Circuit Operation or PLMS Provision Basic Programming
Public Realm Area/Features
General Timings Alternative Approach/Notes
All circuits energised from systems ON*1 at Dusk, until area

Access Points, Primary Pathways
closing time/Dawn*1, as applicable
All Circuits energised from systems ON*1 until 23:00hrs

Open Public Spaces, Sikkas & weekdays and 00:00hrs weekends, then 50% levels/circuits Alternative post weekday/weekend timing levels can be
Playgrounds after weekday/weekend timings until space’s closing proposed to suit specific project requirements
time/Dawn*1, as applicable
Consider coin-operation, user manual switching controls or

All Circuits separately controlled from systems ON*1 until
other regime, but facilities must remain off after
23:00hrs weekdays and 00:00hrs weekends, after which time
Sports Facilities weekday/weekend timing unless specific sports activity is
any sports areas not being used must be designed to remain
happening for a limited time thereafter. Consider carefully
off. Any which are being used can be designed to remain on
(except Informal Play Areas) the requirements of Estidama and the Light Pollution
for a limited time after weekday/weekend timings but only
Mitigation Section-F as Sports Lighting levels are generally
when sports are active
higher than all other public realm lighting
All Circuits energised from systems ON*1 until 23:00hrs

Secondary/Tertiary Pathways & Jogging tracks may remain on until a later defined time as per
weekdays and 00:00hrs weekends, then must remain off until
Jogging Tracks the community requirements
energised again at 5am and then off at Dawn*1
All Circuits energised from systems ON*1 until 00:00

May remain on till a later defined time as per the
Cycling Paths, Bus Stops (Midnight), then must remain off until energised again at
community/bus-route timetable requirements
4am and then off at Dawn*1
Feature Lighting All Circuits energised from systems ON*1 until 23:00hrs
Flags may require longer lighting energisation as per the
weekdays and 00:00hrs weekend, then must remain off until
(trees, bushes, water features, project requirements
flags, clocks etc.) Dawn*1
All ambient lighting circuits energised from systems ON*1 at Any dedicated feature lighting circuits on Pedestrian
Pedestrian Footbridges, Cycle Racks
Dusk, until area closing time/Dawn*1, as applicable Footbridges should turn off at 11pm
All ambient lighting circuits for the underpass energised 24-

Pedestrian Underpasses hours a day, with outside parts of staircases energised from
systems ON*1 at Dusk, until Dawn*1
Two levels of lighting to be provided as per Table 4.3,1 within

Outside Audience Areas Section-A to be manually controlled only during
performances
*1 Dusk & Dawn operation determined by photocell input or astro-clock adjustment to timed programming
Project Submission Requirement:- Select and state the appropriate programming from the above Table
for the project and include within the project design and submission.
P
a) The Department may request standard production model samples, identical to the proposed
products to be installed. The Department may request independent testing of the sample
equipment to verify the performance and compliance with the specifications. The Department
shall be the sole judge regarding the acceptability of the performance of the timer-controlled
switching components or PLMS.
According to the requirements of the Project’s Contract documents, if required The Department
reserves the right to attend, or appoint another party to attend, a factory inspection.
Project Submission Requirement:- Written confirmation stating acceptance of the above requirements
if and when envoked by The Department.
7. Warranty
Note: Warranties shall be for/transferable to The Department after the end of project’s defined defects
phase to cover the remainder of the Warranty period to the requirements as defined below.
a) A written warranty for a Minimum ten (10) year on-site replacement: material, material,
fixtures, finish, and workmanship. On-site replacement includes transportation, removal and
installation of new products. Finish warranty shall include warranty against corrosion, failure or
substantial deteriorations such as blistering, cracking or peeling (excluding damage caused by
contact with chemical substances, fertilizers, water containing corrosive agents or stray electrical
currents). The warranty shall include for maintained integrity of the lighting control or PLMS
System equipment; all accessories, components and assemblies, without any partial or complete
separation, corrosion, leaking, dislocation, disjointing, flaring, etc. of any elements of the system
components with no cost to The Department*
b) A written warranty for a Minimum ten (10) year replacement material warranty for defective
lighting controls, CMS and PLMS equipment and components, with no cost to The Department*
c) A written warranty for a Minimum six (6) year replacement material warranty on any UPS
batteries or other batteries for on-site replacement: material and workmanship. On-site
replacement includes transportation, removal and installation of new products. Warranty shall
include substantial deteriorations such as leaking, buckling, corrosion, inability to be charged or
withhold a charge, impacted system autonomy and reduced output with no cost to The
Department*
(Please note: * With no cost to The Department does not just refer to the Controls/PLMS
equipment/component component cost in regards to any warranty actions. This also refers to any costs
associated with labour for removal/fitting of components, obtaining Authority NOCs, traffic management
costs, transport etc. The Department will not be liaible for any associated costs arising/necessary in
P
relation to warranty actions) These requirements are purely in regards to the terms of PLMS/Control
Equipment Warranties that must be provided to The Department at Handover. It is not in any way in
connection to the cover during the defects period which shall be solely as per specific terms agreed
between the manufacturer and Contractor.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide a written undertaking, to the satisfaction of The Department,
of the Warranty for The Department from the PLMS Supplier, accompanied with written proof of the
local representative’s UAE Operating License and established UAE background, to warranty the materials
and performance as stated within this clause and for the minimum periods defined.
If requested within the Project documents, the Consultant/Contractor shall provide for the lighting
controls/PLMS manufacturer to include for a full maintenance and defects contract for a defined period
for the project. This would be above and beyond the normal defect arrangements
This contract shall include for all preventative and reactionary maintenance of the lighting controls/PLMS
and components, including all parts and materials throughout the duration of the contract. Full details
of this maintenance contract including method statement for the maintenance to be included for
approval of The Department. The maintenance contract should include for a renewal and/or extension
of the contract if required in the future by The Department.
Project Submission Requirement:- Cover the above requirements for all projects including a PLMS
a) General. The measurement and payment for the Lighting Controls/PLMS shall include, but not
by way of limitations, all modules, units, components and all related materials and works for the
complete installation and energizing the system.
b) Lighting Controls/PLMS Components. Measurement and payment for the Lighting Controls,
PLMS and all components will be at the unit rates as included in the Bills of Quantities, which
rates shall be considered as full compensation for all labour materials, finishes, tools, equipment
and appurtenances as required, as specified, and as directed by The Department.
Project Submission Requirement:- Cover the above requirements for all projects including Lighting
Controls or PLMS.
P
An Operation, Instruction and Maintenance Manual (O&M Manual), in both English and Arabic, should
be provided for The Department for the project Lighting Controls or PLMS. The following minimum
details must be provided in the Manual:
• Basic principles of the Lighting Control/PLMS system

• A small write-up (with a block diagram) on the Lighting Control/PLMS system and all its
components
• Equipment manufacturer’s documentation (data sheets, handbooks, etc.)
• Clear instructions on regular maintenance, cleaning and troubleshooting of the Lighting
Controls/PLMS
• Compete software and programming information
• Do's and Don’ts
components after removal/changing-over
• All names and contact details of the relevant contact persons for repair, cleaning and
maintenance, in case of non-functionality of the Lighting Controls/PLMS
Project Submission Requirement:- Cover the above requirements for all projects including Lighting
Controls or PLMS.
P

Part-2 Section-E –Solar & Lighting for Public Realm
P
Part-2 Section E – Solar & Lighting for Public Realm
Note: It is required that for every Public Realm and Park lighting project the
Consultant shall explore the current viability and options for solar lighting
solutions in the marketplace and propose where best it can be offered for
incorporation into the project. Particular attention should be paid to areas of the
project which might provide specific advantages for having some solar lighting
technology and/or their cost of implementation can be mitigated by other factors.
These include, but are not limited to, interactive/awareness zones, integrated with
local structures, isolated areas without current electrical infrastructure, dedicated
sports areas, children’s play areas, sculptures/arts or specific paths. All Project
Submissions from Concept Stage onwards shall cover the proposal of Solar or solar
lighting integration within the reports and detail this as applicable from
Preliminary Design Stage onwards. Refer to Part-2 Section-A for Public Realm and
Park Lighting projects and for all solar technical requirements this Part-2 Section-E
must be complied with.
For full descriptions of any standards and guidance documents referred to within this Part-2 Section-
E, refer to the Part-2 Applicable Standards & Guidance References Section.
For more reference information relating to solar lighting, refer to the Public Realm & Street Lighting
Handbook Chapters C, D, E, N and O.
This Section is a brief summary of the primary factors covered within this Part-2 Section-E of
the Lighting Manual.
The technical brief criteria within this Section have been established after access to over five
years of on-site test data from various different solar installations within Abu Dhabi and the
UAE. From these results, has come the evidence of which types of technologies are viable as
long-term sustainable solutions for use on Abu Dhabi public realm/park lighting projects and
which are not viable. The detailed technical criteria for which are described in the following
Clauses:
P
1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-2 Section-E
a) Vertically mounted pole-integrated solar PV systems, retrofit vertical PV cladding and

luminaire integrated PV panels
b) Monocrystalline or Polycrystalline silicon wafer PV construction
c) Gel Lead Acid, Lithium Iron Phosphate (LiFePO4) and Nickel Metal Hydride (NiMH)
battery technologies
d) Other battery technologies proposed with proven adherence to the technical
e) Solar standalone solutions or grid-connected system options
f) Wind-generation components only as an addition to solar PV and with full material,
maintenance and efficiency data provided
g) Batteries mounted above ground within the base of the pole system
h) Batteries mounted below ground within the concrete foundation of the pole system
i) Batteries mounted within the Luminaire or PV cell array (must be accessible without
removing the PV cells)
j) Standalone systems with batteries to have minimum 24-hour autonomy
k) LED luminaires (or other equally sustainable alternative luminaire technology as defined
within this Manual’s Introduction) complying fully with the requirements of Part-1
Section-A
l) Standalone or grid-connected project solar lighting control/operation fully interlinked
via wireless PLMS (Project Lighting Management System)
m) Minimum 10-year full on-site combined maintenance and defects cover in addition to
the standard warranty requirements
n) Full project cost analysis including payback
o) Provision of Operation and Maintenance Manual
p) Cleaning Proposal including the equipment type as part of the project system provision
q) Environmental Policy Proposal for battery and component recycling/disposal
r) System approval unless full cost analysis provided and checked/approved by The
Department
s) Any non-site-specific sun-availability criteria used in calculations/analysis
t) Any deviation from the system technical criteria as set out within this Manual Section
u) Any deviation from the minimum maintenance and warranty requirements as set out
1.2 Not Permitted under this Manual Part-2 Section-E
a) Pole-top or side mounted flat PV-panel solar systems

b) Open ‘wet-type’ Lead Acid batteries
c) Other battery technologies proposed without proven adherence to the technical
d) Batteries mounted below ground within separate battery enclosure/pits
e) Batteries mounted below ground underneath the PV-Pole requiring demounting of the
pole to access
P
f) LED lighting fixtures (or other equally sustainable alternative luminaire technology as
defined within this Manual’s Introduction) not complying fully with the requirements of
Part-1 Section-A
g) Any claim for “self-cleaning” PV panels and/or unjustified maintenance factors provided
to include for dust accumulation
h) Any in-built mechanical/electrical automated cleaning mechanism or apparatus without
full test data to prove long term viability and sustainability
i) System approval unless full cost analysis provided and checked/approved by The
Department
j) Any non-site-specific sun-availability criteria used in calculations/analysis
k) Any deviation from the system technical criteria as set out within this Manual Section
l) Any deviation from the minimum maintenance and warranty requirements as set out
2. Public Realm Solar Lighting System Options
2.1 Project Selection
There are three viable solar lighting system options available for consideration for a project as
described in Clauses 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4. The decision about which system option is best considered is
described within the three clauses below and can be determined primarily by what level of existing
public realm lighting electrical infrastructure is present for the project.
The site-specific infrastructure as far as a local sub-station being either present or not present is
another primary consideration: also, if planned for a defined or undefined future date or present
but lacking sufficient capacity. Even if local substation and capacity is available, but there is no
existing public realm lighting electrical infrastructure currently in place (sub-mains distribution,
lighting control cabinets, final circuit cabling etc.) this can have a further implication.
A project area might indeed have both full infrastructure and capacity in place, but other factors
such as a client’s paramount need to ensure illumination is maintained at all times or any area is
subject to, or has a history of, power outages, or where the replacement of the existing electrical
network may be costly and disruptive to replace, may be an issue.
The main factors for consideration have been suggested in this section; however, there may be
other factors to determine the best system proposal for a specific project. All these factors all need
to be weighed up when deciding on the most appropriate system option to consider and propose
through the project cost analysis.
P
2.2 Standalone System
No grid-connection, standalone Solar luminaires or remote solar equipment, with integral

batteries, controller/ inverter and wireless PLMS.
Recommended for solar public realm/park light projects:
• Without existing substation/cabling/infrastructure

• Or with existing cabling/infrastructure, but unsuitable for utilisation
• Or where new cabling may not be commercially feasible
The batteries mounted above ground at low-level or below ground within protected locations, in
the PV Cell area or integrated into the luminaire.
The standalone fixture’s or luminaire groups connected to the remote solar equipment’s
controller/inverter* controls the charge and discharge of the batteries, battery status and the status
of the fixtures.
activation, dimming (as applicable) and status of the lights.
*Note- Standalone solar LED Luminaires are preferred to be supplied directly from the battery with
DC to remove inverter losses.
2.3 Grid-Connected System
Electric grid-connection, solar luminaires or remote solar equipment feeding fixtures, without
batteries, with controller/inverter and wireless PLMS.

The grid-connected luminaires/remote solar equipment, via controllers/inverters during the

daytime, converts the solar energy via the PVs from dc to ac and feeds it to the power grid. During
the night, fixtures work like any other conventional luminaires, with the required energy for lighting
taken from the power grid via local lighting circuits.
A wireless type PLMS provides and controls the power for the luminaires, including coordinated
P
Ideally, the design of the system would ensure more energy from the solar PVs is produced during
the day than required for lighting the LED luminaire(s) during the night.
Excess energy can be used for its own purposes or could be sold/credited in the future.
2.4 Full Backup System
Electric grid-connection, solar luminaires or remote solar equipment with integral batteries,
controller/inverter and wireless PLMS

• Or for areas with infrastructure, but susceptible to power outages
• Or for a project where maximised efficiency of power generation is desirable
• Or for a project where 100% assurance of illumination is always essential
Solar energy generated from the PVs during the day is stored in batteries. Once the batteries are
charged, excess solar generated energy is converted from dc to ac and fed into the power grid. The
batteries are installed within the solar PV-clad pole base, in a separate, concrete foundation-located
formed battery enclosure, in the PV Cell area or integrated into the luminaire.
During the night, the lighting fixtures can be designed to work in one of two ways:
• As per other conventional luminaires; with the required energy for lighting
taken from the power grid. Then in the case of power outage, the system
switches immediately to battery backup.
• The required energy for lighting taken solely from the batteries, with the grid
used as a back-up in the event of the batteries failing or discharging fully before
the end of the required night-time operation timings for the project.
A wireless type PLMS provides and controls the power for the light fittings, including coordinated
With a system such as this the autonomy and thus size of the batteries could be relaxed from the
normal Manual’s requirements as part of the overall system design.
Excess energy can be used for its own purposes or could be sold/credited in the future. future as
per discussions and direction from the Electricity Distribution Company.
P
submission to The Department
Project Submission Requirement: - Provide assessment of the public realm/park project’s solar
proposal based on the above and justification within project submissions of the proposed system(s).
3.1 Design Requirements
a) The design, specification, calculation, manufacturing, testing, shipment, installation and

performance of Solar and lighting systems shall be in accordance with the applicable
requirements of all The Department’s civil, electrical, mechanical and lighting
infrastructure standards for electrical distribution works, except as specified herein.
Copies should be requested from The Department if not already held.
b) The Project’s lighting design and illuminance level requirements and the LED luminaires
(or other equally sustainable alternative luminaire technology as defined within this
Manual’s Introduction) shall be fully in accordance with the requirements of Part-2
Section-A.
c) Submissions for the project made to the Department must include all the usual proof of
compliance; lighting calculations, layouts, compliance checklist, luminaire/lamp-
source/gear data and all accredited test sheets to show the requirements of this
Lighting Manual have been met fully.
d) The Consultant and manufacturers shall guarantee adherence to this Manual and the
performance of the solar equipment: panels, pole/column, fixture and/or system and
the luminaire(s) under all the required design conditions.
e) The Consultant shall be responsible to ensure that the project and product
specifications are fully in compliance, without any deviation from this Manual prior to
forwarding to The Department for approval. Any deviation should be brought to the
notice of The Department. The Consultant shall ensure in his design the following:
integration, coordination, functionality and accessibility of these services. It shall be
the Consultant’s responsibility to bring the system to the design & operating and
maintenance conditions.
P
4. Project Cost Analysis
4.1. Cost Analysis Requirements
assessments as required for the project solar proposal(s) and in accordance with the instructions
The full project life cycle cost analysis asset comparison shall be undertaken to the ISO 15686-5
Supplement (Publicly Available Manual - published by the International Organisation for
Standardisation) or similar and cover parameters which fully meets the requirements of this
Manual.
All information provided and the cost analysis/payback calculations should be calculated with the
exact proposed lighting fixture types/sizes, solar equipment, battery, inverter, autonomy and Solar
Peak daylight hours per day for the specific project location. Daylight hours and Solar Peak hours
available are not the same
The Economic Cost Analysis should include the following parameters and allowances:
a) Compare the solar proposal(s) against the base standard of LED (or other equally
Introduction) as per Part-2 Section-A, with standard installations as per the project’s
brief requirements and electrical infrastructure matching the site’s existing constraints
b) Compare project specific Initial Capital Expenditure (CAPEX) costs- Refer to Table 4.1.1
c) Compare project specific Annual Operational Expenditure (OPEX) to include electricity

usage and maintenance cost allowances– Refer to Table 4.1.2
d) Compare long-term total costs over minimum of 15-years based on present value cost
assessment including initial CAPEX, annual OPEX and future CAPEX for required
component replacement.
e) Compare Salvage Value of the system at the end of the study period.
f) Include all justifications of given and calculated values and timescales with annotation
and supporting data where applicable.
g) Provide the calculated Payback Period (if applicable) for the solar proposal(s) against
the base LED conventional approach.
h) Provide report and output graphs/tables as required to present project data clearly.
P
i) Include also average per luminaires ‘point’ cost comparisons of all options within report
findings.
j) Allow for 0.293fils/kWhr.as per the 2015 Meter Cost of Electricity; or

current/alternative tariff as agreed with The Department.
k) Allow for 11-hours per night, 365-days a year luminaire operation for primary lighting
circuits and lower hour operation if other non-essential circuits; as per the requirements
of Part-2 Section-D.
l) Allow for load of actual luminaires, with actual driver/current including all losses as per
the fixtures’ LM-79 reports or comparable standard.
m) Allow for stated average useful life of all components in the long-term analysis, and
salvage analysis, including, but not limited to, the luminaire, driver, inverter, battery,
control components, cables, PV-panels/modules, pole/column/fixture, base and
associated synthetic and metal materials.
n) For any solar grid-connected systems for which the fixtures or connected circuit have
no batteries, but connect to a conventional grid, generate electricity in the daytime and
run conventionally at night time, provide justified figures based on the local
environment and actual site situation on assessed generation value used in the analysis.
A written agreement with the Electricity Distributor stating that the Grid connected
solar systems have been approved by them, must be provided to The Department at
the time of submission
o) Use an annual discount rate of 7% for the long-term Present Value analysis unless
confirmed otherwise by The Department
p) Allow for dimming savings in the analysis only if included within the project proposal(s)
and then only pro-rata as per the exact dimming/switching settings proposed and
justified.
q) If local infrastructure is present or not present this should also be factored into the
analysis for cost comparison purposes including, as applicable, local sub-station
provision, sub-mains distribution, lighting control cabinets, final circuit cabling,
protection, civil works and connections.
r) Solar system cleaning requirements and the associated costs, as described within Clause
5.6, should also be included within the project cost analysis
P
Table 4.1.1- CAPEX Items to be included in Cost Comparison
CAPEX ITEMS for Cost Comparison (Supply and Install)
Lighting Pole (*plus accessories)
LED Luminaire
PLMS Node
PLMS Gateway
Lighting Pole Foundation
Trench Excavation
Duct
Access Chamber
PV Modules
Battery
Battery Chamber
* refers to Cutout, cable glands, MCB, cable termination, internal wiring, labour, etc.
Table 4.1.2- OPEX Items to be included in Cost Comparison

OPEX ITEMS for Cost Comparison
Lighting Pole Structural Testing
Luminaire LED Modules Replacement
Luminaire LED Driver Replacement
Luminaire SPD Replacement
Smart Node/System Replacement
PLMS Gateway Replacement
Electrical Testing
PV Panel Cleaning
LED Luminaire Cleaning
Battery Replacement
Electricity Cost
All Periodic actions to follow the guidance from this manual. Failures within the warranty period are
not considered as they will be replaced FOC by the Manufacturer under the warranty clauses.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide a detailed cost analysis based on the requirements
of this section for the solar public realm lighting system or systems proposed.
P
5. System Components
5.1. LED Luminaires
a) The Project’s LED luminaires (or other equally sustainable alternative luminaire technology
as defined within this Manual’s Introduction) shall be fully in accordance with the
requirements of Part-2 Section-A.
b) The Consultant and Manufacturers shall ensure all luminaires are fully compatible with the
Solar system, the fixture driver, the solar inverter/controller equipment, PLMS and
components to meet all the overall design requirements.
c) All luminaire drivers must be specified correctly to have suitable inputs for the solar
system’s 12Vdc-48Vdc. output from the Battery/inverter/ controller as required by the
specific system proposed.
d) Some systems may negate the need for a driver with the fixtures entirely as the driver
current function forms part of the inverter/controller equipment. Refer also to clause 5.3
to see details about the inverter/controller
e) All luminaire test data and supporting information must be provided with the specific driver
specification used.
f) Where the Solar PV cells are integrated into the luminaire, they must have bevelled edges
to prohibit the accumulation of dust and sand.
g)
Project Submission Requirement:- Ensure the requirements of Part-2 Section-A are met in
regards to all LED luminaires as well as the particular criteria contained in this Section.
P
5.2. PV System
5.2.1 General
Table 5.2.1 Ingress Protection (IP) and Impact Protection (IK)for the PV system components:
Component Type Minimum IP-Rating Minimum IK-Rating
Solar LED Fixtures As per Part-2 Section-A As per Part-2 Section-A
PVs & Electrical components IP-66 N/A
Glass covers/components N/A IK08
Synthetic clear covers N/A IK08
Batteries IP44 N/A
Battery housing above ground IP66 IK07
Battery housing below ground IP68 IK07
Below Ground Battery housing

IP67 IK10
cover plate
5.2.2 Materials
a) Foundations. Structural analysis shall be submitted to show that the foundation design for
any pole/column/bollard and other solar components meets the load of the given solar-
luminaire/component type in its “Fully Loaded” state. For all system foundations, full design
details shall be submitted for The Department’s review and approval.
b) Photovoltaics (PVs). All photovoltaic components shall be either Monocrystalline or

Polycrystalline silicon wafer types manufactured, manufactured and tested as per the
standards within the Part-2 Applicable Standards & Guidance References Section.
c) Wind Generators. Wind-generation components are only permitted as a potential

additional option to solar PV and must be proposed with full material and testing data,
including maintenance requirements and justified lifetime efficiency data for The
Department to consider their viability. For Warranty purposes they must be considered to
meet the same requirements as the PV modules.
P
d) Synthetic Materials. All synthetic materials including translucent (non-glass) PV covers
shall be 100% UV Stable non-yellowing, environmentally resistant and scratch resistant.
Laboratory test data shall be provided to The Department to prove the materials are
resistant to deterioration.
e) Copper Content. All external pressure die-cast aluminium alloy components shall have a
maximum copper content of 1% by mass.
5.3. Inverters/Controllers
Inverters/controllers control the charge and discharge of the batteries, battery status and the status
of the solar system/solar luminaires. Inverters/controllers provide and control the power for the
lighting luminaire(s), including dimming (as applicable) and status.

• Selected (with batteries) for minimum 24-hour autonomy operation (capability of
1-night full operation following one full bad weather day)
• Photovoltaic charge control for 12Vdc-48Vdc. batteries as per the project system
requirements
• 12Vdc-48Vdc. output for powering LED fixture drivers
• Intelligent charging of batteries, battery charging 12Vdc-48Vdc. Monitoring of all
individual cell voltages.
• Solar input 10Vdc-48Vdc.
• Nominal rated Input voltage: 230V +10% / -6% (As per DOE EWR) 50Hz
• Can be combined with dc/ac inverter for grid system connection as required
• Specified for the project assessed solar energy yield in combination with wattage
of luminaire(s) used, battery sizes and usage of dimming (as applicable)
• Automatic Light Switching
• Light On/Off controlled by sunset/sunrise and Integration with communication
module (PLMS), remote software/firmware capabilities, logging of all system
parameters as per Part-2 Section-D requirements

• Operating temperature: +60 °C
• Storage (non-operating) +80 °C
P
5.4. Batteries
The type, size and quality of batteries specified shall be selected for their optimum performance
and integration for the project specific requirements.

• Gel Lead Acid, Lithium (Li-ion), Lithium Iron Phosphate (LiFePO4) and Nickel Metal
Hydride (NiMH) battery technologies with the exception of open ‘wet-type’ Lead
Acid batteries, other battery technologies proposed can be considered provided
with proven adherence to all technical requirements of this Manual Section
• Selected for minimum 24-hour autonomy operation (capability of 1-night/evening
(as applicable) full operation following one full bad weather day)
• 12Vdc-48Vdc. Min 70Ah rated as per proposed system
• Expected Lifetime for the project design - 8-10 Years
• Guaranteed Lifetime for the project design - 10 Years
• 75 % of the rated capacity of the battery should be between fully charged and load
cut off conditions (as per specific battery performance requirements)
• Manufactured, tested and installed as per the respective International standards
listed under Part-2 Applicable Standards & Guidance References Section
• Operating night-time temperature: +60 °C

• Storage (daytime non-operating): +85 °C
5.5. Controls
Whether the Standalone, Grid-Connected or Full Backup type systems, the project solar lighting
control/operation shall be fully interlinked via a wireless PLMS system.
• Wireless system; Wi-Fi or RF system, with MESH Capability and fully tested and
compatible with the lighting system proposed
• GSM 900/1800, GPRS, SMS, ZigBee etc. or other approved agreed system
• System shall be compliant with all Abu Dhabi TRA Standards/requirements and be
proposed with all statutory approvals
• The proposed system shall be fully compatible with the specified luminaire and
driver (ac or dc) proposed for the project and the inverter/controller
P
• Any brand of luminaires (as per the technical criteria within Part-1 Section-A) shall
be able to be controlled from the system to ensure luminaire choice can be made
openly for the best current marketplace products available for the project
• The PLMS must have a minimum of 20% spare capacity for future potential street
revisions and additions
system (CMS)/control room in the future as and when required (refer to Part-1
Section-D Clause 4.1.6)
• The system shall be able to operate in a pre-programmed condition autonomously
for the project and data shall be able to interface for communication to a central
CMS location via a GSM/TCP-IP network, with a TCP/IP over a fiber- optic converter
or other approved means and protocol to a Department central location in the
future
• The system must prevent all daytime operation of the LED Public Realm/Park
Lighting unless only the specific manual override of the automated programming is
desired by The Department
• Standard & customizable 24-hour light profiles for peak/off-peak times as per Part-
1 Section-D Clause 5 for the specific project type/location. Light levels configurable
at 10% step increments. The individual dimming profiles able to be changed to
weekly plans if required, rather than just identical 24-hour plans as per the initial
programming
• Photocell/astro-clock input adjustment to timed programming for dusk/dawn
operations
• Automatic luminous flux reduction in case of consecutive bad weather periods to
avoid light switch off
• System must be provided with a single point of data terminal/interface/ connection
for any reprogramming needs of the PLMS project area to be achievable from one
point of interface
• Error Reporting - Comprehensive & instant overview about infrastructure problems
like lamp/driver errors, battery errors, inverter errors per pole
• Reporting - Detailed overview about solar energy generation, energy consumed,
accumulated power usage (Wh), temperatures, individual cell voltages when non-
Lead-acid batteries are used (i.e. Lithium) and accumulative hours of luminaire
operation at dimming levels, etc. Optional iOs/Android mobile application interface
for maintenance work at site – Basic status info and instant setting configuration
via mobile phone, while on site
• Data Export for further in-depth analysis or integration into existing inventory
management systems operated by The Department
• Operating temperature: +60 °C

• Storage (non-operating) +80 °C
P
5.6. Cleaning System
To ensure optimum performance at all times, the PV-systems must be cleaned on a regular basis.
To avoid spillage of cleaning fluids, water and dirt/dust onto parked vehicles, notices of intent to
clean must be sent out to residents/building owners and posted on the lighting poles prior to any
cleaning being carried out. All cleaning methods for the PV cells must be detailed during design
submissions for review by The Department,
Where any cleaning systems using specific tools are specified, all tools shall be handed over to The
Department at the end of the maintenance period.
High pressure hose cleaning is not acceptable, nor are any automated/motorised systems, without
full test data to prove long term viability and sustainability, on the PV-systems themselves and any
solution should be based on the following parameters:

• Cleaning must be carried out using the methods and materials as specified by the
manufacturer. All cleaning methods will be recorded in The Department’s Asset
Management Database and provided to maintenance contractors when required.

• PV systems shall be cleaned as per the manufacturer’s detailed financial analysis
submitted during design stage
• Solar charging and battery levels will be reviewed on a monthly basis through the
PLMS
• Failure to meet the required levels of charging and battery level will be reviewed as
part of the warranty (performance)
Project Submission Requirement: - Ensure all the material and component requirements are met
5.7 Pole Design Submission and Production
a) Design for Strength. The PV-poles shall be designed as per the requirements of Part 2
Section C. The design shall consider the loading of the pole when equipped with the
equivalent of the actual type and number of mounted luminaires for the project and
the associated fittings or accessories as confirmed by The Department. All PV-poles shall
be designed in accordance with the requirements of the latest edition of BS EN 40 or
equivalent International standard. Design calculations shall be submitted, for The
Department’s approval, showing the following: -
P
i. Wind load derivation (hand calculation) on luminaires and mounted
accessories
iv. Stress at the intervals specified in (iii) above
vi. Combined Stress Ratios at the intervals specified in (iii) above
.
b) Design for Deflection. Actual deflection against the deflection limit of the PV-poles shall
be clearly stated in the design calculations and shall conform to BS EN 40 or equivalent
International standard. The actual deflection calculated shall be based on the basic wind
speed of 160kph with gust factor of 1.14 as per The Department’s requirements and
shall be measured at the luminaire(s) position(s). The calculated deflection shall be the
sum of deflection on the vertical PV-pole section as well as the outreach bracket arm
section(s). Deflection of both the vertical pole and the arm(s) shall be shown in the
design submission.
allowable deflection and special deflection limits required for CCTV cameras, where
applicable for the project.
c) Notarized Statement. A notarized statement, attested by the UAE Embassy, certifying

the PV-systems were built conforming to the manufacturer’s approved drawings and
design calculations, shall be submitted after completion of manufacture, and prior to
delivery of poles to site. PV-systems delivery to project site shall not be accepted
without this.
Project Submission Requirement:- Ensure all the material and component requirements are met
proposed products to be installed. The Department may request independent testing
of the sample equipment to verify the performance and compliance with the
Specifications. The Department shall be the sole judge regarding the acceptability of
the performance of system or components.

inspection. During a factory inspection, the manufacturer shall perform a full PV-pole
P
deflection test, as agreed jointly with an accredited independent test house and
department, on a randomly selected pole from the manufactured lot, for each type of
ordered pole, to establish the design compliance and structural integrity of the
manufactured pole under simulated conditions of full loading, strictly in accordance
with the approved design calculations and drawings. Where PV integrated into
luminaires or PV cladding has been proposed, The Department will require random
samples from the manufacturer’s stores to be tested to show compliance with The
Department’s requirements as set out in this Section.

7. Warranty
below.
a) A written warranty for a Minimum ten (10) year on-site replacement: materials,
fixtures, finish, and workmanship. On-site replacement includes transportation,
removal and installation of new products. Finish warranty shall include warranty
include for maintained aesthetic integrity of the PV-pole, photovoltaic panels,
accessories, components and, without any partial or complete separation, corrosion,
leaking, dislocation, disjointing, flaring, etc. of any elements of the PV-pole, system
components and assembly with no cost to The Department*
defective PV-poles, photovoltaics, accessories, components and with no cost to The
Department*
c) A written warranty for a Minimum eight (8) year replacement material warranty on the
batteries for on-site replacement: material and workmanship. On-site replacement
includes transportation, removal and installation of new products. Warranty shall
include substantial deteriorations such as leaking, buckling, corrosion, inability to be
charged or withhold a charge, impacted system autonomy and reduced dc output with
no cost to The Department*
d) A written warranty for a Minimum twenty-five (25) year replacement material

warranty for the photovoltaic (PV) modules for their output peak watt capacity to not
fall below 80% at the end of twenty-five (25) years. With a Minimum-ten (minimum-10)
year replacement warranty for their output peak watt capacity to not fall below 90% at
the end of ten (10) years. With no cost to The Department*
P
(Please note: * With no cost to The Department does not just refer to the solar
equipment/component cost in regards to any warranty actions. This also refers to any costs
associated with labour for removal/fitting of components, obtaining Authority NOCs, traffic
management costs, transport etc. The Department will not be liaible for any associated costs
arising/necessary in relation to warranty actions). The manufacturer must contact DMT before
appointing any Contractor. These requirements are purely in regards to the terms of Solar
Equipment Warranties that must be provided to The Department at Handover. It is not in any way
in connection to the cover during the defects period which shall be solely as per specific terms
agreed between the manufacturer and Contractor.

Department, of the Warranty for The Department from the Solar Supplier, accompanied with
written proof of the local representative’s UAE Operating License and established UAE background,
to warranty the materials and performance as stated within this clause and for the minimum periods
defined.
If requested within the Project documents, the Consultant/Contractor shall provide for the solar
system manufacturer to include for a full maintenance and defects contract for a defined period for
the project. This would be above and beyond the normal defect arrangements.
This contract shall include for all preventative and reactionary maintenance of the solar system and
components, including all parts and materials throughout the duration of the contract. Refer also
to Clause 5.6 regarding cleaning. Full details of this maintenance contract including method
statement for the maintenance to be included for approval of The Department. The maintenance
contract should include for a renewal and/or extension of the contract if required in the future by
The Department.
Project Submission Requirement:- Cover the above requirements for the solar lighting system.
a) General. The measurement and payment for the PV-system solar roadway/parking lighting
system shall include, but not by way of limitations, the complete PV-poles and components,
batteries, invertors, controllers, PLMS, luminaires with all accessories, foundations,
earthing and all related materials and works for the complete installation and energizing
the system.
b) Installation of cables in PV-systems shall be in accordance with The Department’s standard

Specifications.
P
c) PV-Systems. Measurement and payment for the PV-system and components, will be at the
unit rates as included in the Bills of Quantities, which rates shall be considered as full
compensation for all labour, materials, finishes, tools, equipment and appurtenances as
required, as specified, and as directed by The Department.
Project Submission Requirement:- Cover the above requirements for the solar lighting
system.
An Operation, Instruction and Maintenance Manual (O&M Manual), in both English and
Arabic, should be provided for The Department for the solar system. The following
minimum details must be provided in the Manual:
• Basic principles of the photovoltaic system.

• A small write-up (with a block diagram) on the project solar system - its
components, fixtures and PV-modules, batteries, inverter/controller electronics
and LED luminaires (if applicable), driver, including expected performance.
• Type, Model number, Voltage & capacity of the batteries used in the system.
• Charging, discharging regime and significance of any indicators.
• Clear instructions about the installation of all solar system components.
• Equipment manufacturer’s documentation (data sheets, handbooks, etc.
• A list of actions to be taken in the event of an earth fault alarm
• The shutdown and isolation procedure for emergency and maintenance
• A copy of the Shutdown procedure and any electrical safety warnings
solar system.
• The system performance estimate, including expected seasonal or operational
variation
• Do's and Don’ts.
components after removal/changing-over.
and maintenance, in case of non-functionality of the solar system.
Project Submission Requirement:- Cover the requirements of this Section for the solar
lighting system.
P

Part-2 Section-F –Light Pollution Mitigation
Part-2 Section F – Light Pollution Mitigation

Section-F, refer to the Part-1 Applicable Standards & Guidance References Section.
For more reference information regarding light pollution, light trespass and sky glow, refer to the
Public Realm & Street Lighting Handbook Chapter F.
Lighting Manual.
The technical brief criteria developed within this Section aims to ensure the appropriate reduced
nighttime light pollution is maintained for a project. This is to ensure the correct balance is
achieved to avoid excessive and obtrusive light pollution and its associated adverse impacts on
human and ecological health.
The Light Pollution Mitigation calculations must be provided at Detailed Design Stage for the
whole project area or a typical section of project area if applicable: i.e. for a linear streetscape
project with a repetitive lighting design solution.
lighting only, landscape lighting only, or combined roadway/parking and landscape lighting. A
single project submission is required to cover all the area’s lighting. To ensure this holistic
requirement is understood fully, this section is repeated within Part-2 of this Manual
1.1 Required/Permitted under Manual Part-2 Section-F
A project Light Pollution Mitigation submission at Detailed Design Stage to cover whole project
lighting.
1.2 Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-2 Section-F
Separate roadway/parking lighting and landscape lighting submissions if both are present
together within a project area.
2.1 General

herein. All requirements ar detailed in Part 1 Section I.
2.2 Exterior lighting:
a) All non-safety and non-security public realm lighting must be automatically switched
off or dimmed between 23.00hrs and 07.00hrs during the week and 00:00 hrs. and
07:00hrs at the weekend and outside these hours if daylight levels are sufficient.
b) If safety lighting is provided and will be used between the hours detailed in Item a,
this part of the lighting system must comply with the lower levels of lighting
recommended during these hours as per Part 1 Section D.
c) If security lighting is provided, it must be activated using motion sensors with

threshold and time-off adjustment so that luminaires only activate when someone is
in the immediate area and turn off a reasonable time after motion is no longer
detected.
2.3 Lighting levels at the site boundary and beyond:
a) All projects must be classified and stated under one of the zones defined in Table
2.3.1:
Table 2.3.1 - Lighting Zones

Lighting Zone Description
Developed areas of national parks, state parks, forest land

LZ1
and rural areas
Areas predominantly consisting of residential zoning,

LZ2 neighbourhood business districts, light industry with limited
nighttime use, and residential mixed-use areas
LZ3 All other areas
High-activity commercial districts in major metropolitan areas

LZ4
as designated by the local land use planning authority
b) The project’s exterior lighting must then be designed to meet the following
requirements:
Table 2.3.2- Lighting Design Requirements

Maximum Maximum Light Maximum
Maximum
Maximum Initial Trespass into Surface
Luminaire Source
Initial Illuminance at Maximum windows (Vertical Luminance
Lighting Intensity (kcd) *3
Illuminance at Specified % Direct Lux)*3 (cd/m2)
Zone*2
Site Boundary Distance Up-light 19:00 to 00.00 to 19.00 to 00.00 to
(Lux) Beyond Site 00.00 07.00 00.00 07.00 Average
Boundary (Lux) hrs. hrs. hrs. hrs.
LZ1 <1 N/A 0% 2 1*1 2.5 0 2.5
LZ2 1.1 <1 AT 3m 2% 5 1 7.5 0.5 5
LZ3 2.2 <1 AT 4.5m 5% 10 2 10 1 10
LZ4 5 <1 AT 7.5m 15% 25 5 15 2.5 15
1
* Allowed from public roadway lighting installations only.
*2 Where the site boundary lies adjacent to a Lighting Zone of a lower category, the requirements of the
lower category must be met at and beyond that boundary.
*3 Worst case scenario of weekend lighting hours taken.
2.4 Additional Requirements/Clarifications:
a) High structure aircraft hazard lights are excluded from the calculations.
b) Feature lighting may be exempted from these requirements where a specialist

lighting consultant has recommended their inclusion in order to protect illuminated
visual elements/character as part of artwork.
c) Any floodlighting for sports facilities, for a limited amount of time in the evenings can
also be excluded from the project calculations. These sports facilities must only have
lighting activated during sporting activities/use. Sports facilities intended for
operation during non-operational hours must include the sports lighting within the
calculations.
d) Lighting schemes requiring/proposing upward light, for example ground recessed

luminaires, ground mounted floodlights and decorative lighting may not in
combination achieve the Table’s limits. In these instances, deliberation and care
should always be taken to minimise any upward waste light by the proper application
of suitably directional luminaires where applicable; accurate aiming onto surfaces,
minimal lumen-output/wattage selection, light controlling attachments and the
project’s circuit/control philosophy.
Project Submission Requirement:- To demonstate the above requirements are met
3. Light Pollution Criteria Definitions

Figure 3.1 - Diagram showing Light pollution
3.1 Definitions
a) Percentage Direct Uplight - The percentage of direct upward light associated with the
total initial designed fixture lumens emitted at an angle of 90-degrees or higher from
nadir (straight down). This percentage must be met at the project’s plot boundary.
b) Maximum Light Trespass (into windows) - This is calculated in vertical illuminance

(Lux) and is measured flat on the glazing at the center of the window. These values
are the maximum levels permitted excluding existing base light levels.
c) Maximum Luminaire Source Intensity - This applies to each lighting source and/or
luminaire directly visible outside of the area being lit which could be a source of glare
or distraction. These values must be achieved however exceptions may be permitted
it mitigated for particular lighting applications, such as sports lighting.
d) Maximum Surface Luminance - This is the measurement of actual visual brightness

and must be limited to avoid over lighting of all or any of the external lighting
elements. The area luminance is only applicable to surfaces directly illuminated as
part of the nighttime external lighting scheme.
e) Motion sensors with threshold adjustment - Threshold adjustments can be made to

prevent nuisance activation by insects, birds and small animals. Hours of operation
should be followed, except where it can be demonstrated that the project’s known
‘hours of usage’ exceed these.
4. Design Calculation Requirements and Methodology

A detailed Light Pollution Mitigation Report must be provided for all projects. This report must
include, but not limited to, the following requirements: -
a) Provide a narrative describing the type and location of all external lighting provided
on the project, and lighting calculations demonstrating that the required illuminances
and percentage up-light limits within the Table of Lighting Design Requirements have
been met.
b) Provide overall project site external lighting drawing(s) and details of lighting controls
and locations of any daylight sensors.
c) Provide specification and luminaire schedule details confirming mounting heights and
all information relating to the light output and aiming of each luminaire.
d) Provide the Control Strategy confirming which luminaires will be turned off and/or
dimmed outside the recommended hours of operation and which luminaires will
operate at the reduced levels.
e) Provide confirmation of any safety or security lighting used between 00.00 and 07:00
complies with the lower levels of lighting recommended within Table 2.3.2.
f) Provide a Light Pollution Mitigation Calculation Report within a single report format
which must include for all public realm lighting, including safety, security, pedestrian
circulation, landscape (functional/accent/feature/ architectural), roadway, external
car parking, and external signage/advertising. Proprietary lighting calculation
software, such as DIALux must be used to evaluate and demonstrate compliance of
the project and achievement of the limits set out within table 2.3.2.
g) Where the lighting project consists of exceptionally large areas that would not be
easily imported into calculation software, typical streets can be used as the basis of
the calculations. Typical streets must be identical in every aspect of the lighting
installation. Typical streets must be identified on the project layout to provide ease
of identification by The Department’s reviewer.
The Consultant shall comply with the following requirements:
• Designer’s details, contact information and project notes shall be entered in full
• Use of horizontal and vertical calculation planes, false-colour, contour and/or
point measurement grids can be used to address appropriately the various
aspects
• Each separate calculation/calculation plane to be titled logically for the project
and cross-referenced to project drawings/report specifically if applicable
• Table 2.3.2 and associated notes shall form the basis of all calculations with any
base variables manually adapted from any software defaults as necessary to
exactly match the requirements
• The calculated Maintenance Factors derived as per the relevant lighting design
Section(s) only shall form the basis of all entered MF values used and replace any
software default values
• Only exact-fixture IES/Elumdat luminaire data used within the calculation(s),
fixtures files always used at appropriate % lumen output as per the controls’
strategy
• Fixture offsets, aiming and tilt angles shall exactly match those proposed for the
project
o Project Cover
o Table of Contents
o Luminaire Parts List
o Luminaire Data Sheet(s)
o Planning Data
Per Calculation/Calculation Plane (as applicable)
o Luminance Photometric Results OR

o Illuminance Photometric Results OR
o Greyscale or False Colour 2D/3D Contour Rendering
4.1 Step by Step Guidance
To prepare the Light Pollution Mitigation Report it is advisable to follow the steps in Table 4.1.1.
Table 4.1.1- Light Pollution Mitigation Report- Step by Step Guidance

Step Description Outcome
1 Provide Project info, project description and Luminaire Complete Pro-forma
Schedule in report format.
2 Identify ALL types of lighting to be used in the project Complete Pro-forma
3 Identify any additional lighting present Complete Pro-forma
4 Identify any Exemptions requested (refer to Clause 2.4) Complete Pro-forma
5 Identify the hours of operation/dimming for each lighting Complete Pro-forma
type
6 Identify the Applicable Lighting Zone to be used and justify Complete Pro-forma
selection
7 Identify Typical Streets, provide unique reference number Complete Pro-forma
and mark on project layout drawing
8 Use approved lighting calculation software to calculate the Complete Pro-forma
required lighting levels from Table 2.3.2. Set up Grids in
DIALux at the right of way boundary and the appropriate
distance for the Lighting Zone beyond the boundary.
Where buildings will be/are installed, set up grid on
building face to calculate light trespass through windows
(where building type is unknown use a typical type of
building as an example and add a note).
9 Provide report and completed Pro-forma to the
Department
4.2 Light Pollution Mitigation Pro-forma
To ensure that the information provided is accurate and covers all required data input and
calculation required for the submission and approval of the Light Pollution Mitigation Report,
the consultant/contractor must complete, sign and return Pro-forma 4.1.2- Part 1 Section J.
Pro-forma 4.1.2- Light Pollution Mitigation Report Project Data

Roadway Roadway
Landscape Landscape

00.00 hrs. 07.00 hrs.
00.00 hrs. 07.00 hrs.

Signature Signature
Date Date
**Where Typical Streets are used, they must be identical for the lighting proposed. Where multiple Typical streets are
used, they must have a unique reference number and be clearly marked on the Project drawings.
Project Submission Requirement:- Provide a Project Light Polution Mitigation Report including
the Software Lighting Calculation Report fully in adhereance to the above requirements in PDF
format. In addition, if requested by The Department, provide the software source file alongside
the PDF Report.

Part-2 Section-G –Project Submission Requirements
Part-2 Section G –Project Submission Requirements

Section-G, refer to the Part-1 Applicable Standards & Guidance References Section.
Lighting Manual.
This Section covers Project Design Submissions made to The Department in relation only to the
lighting discipline and the specific technical lighting submission information required in addition
to any Department Standard Consultant Procedures/standard submission standards. It is not in
relation to any other disciplines, nor planning submissions, material submittals, shop drawings,
Tender submissions or any other pre or post-design submissions. These are separate issues and
covered elsewhere as per Department procedures for other disciplines and as required for Town
Planning submissions or Contract works.
The Project Design Stage Submission Requirements for Lighting are grouped as per the separate
Stages as follows:
• Concept Design Stage

• Preliminary Design Stage
• Detail Design Stage
Concept Design, Preliminary Design and Detail Design are statutory project submission stages for
all projects, unless otherwise agreed by The Department Where the project will not follow all
submission steps, a letter from The Department must be provided at the design submission stage
providing the agreed exemption.
The Consultant shall ensure that all submissions made to The Department are correctly labelled
as per these Design Stages and if different terminology is used, aligned to the requirements of
these stage requirements and stated. All submissions will include the Design Submission Checklist
as per Part 1 Section J. The Consultant/Contractor shall also ensure that requirements of the Road
Safety Audit Manual (TR-540) are also adhered to whilst ensuring compliance with the
USDM/UCDM.
2. Concept Design Stage
with a reference to the lighting layout and road type. Consideration must be given to the Road
Safety Audit Manual (TR-540) and USDM/UCDM in the preparation of the lighting layouts.
2.1.1 Cover Letter
project encompasses.
a) This Lighting Manual must be stated as the primary basis of the project’s lighting
design. Reference to the Public Realm & Street Lighting Handbook is also desired.
b) State prior approval of relevant authorities such as UPC and DMT.
c) Any Supply Authority standards/requirements can only be mentioned, in regard to

sub-mains electrical requirements, not in relation to lighting, luminaires or lighting
design.
d) DMT: USDM, PRDM, UCDM, SSPM and ESTIDAMA documents and stated
requirements are recommended and acceptable references for lighting in relation to
planning and general project lighting requirements.
e) Any other QCC approved relevant Abu Dhabi Standards and Specifications can also be
stated.
f) If lighting levels, any design variables, pole heights, spacings/arrangements etc. are
stated then they must match the relevant requirements within this Manual unless
specific reasons are stated to justify a variation to the normal Department
requirements.
g) Any reference to luminaires must confirm they are LED (or other equally sustainable
h) Any reference to lighting management controls or solar lighting equipment must

conform to the requirements of this Manual’s Part-1 Sections D & E respectively.
Note: Images, renderings or visualisations are not a statutory requirement for this Stage within
purely roadway, parking or tunnel lighting projects, however they are required as part of the
Concept Stage submission for parks/public realm projects. Refer to Part-2 Section-G for details. If
a roadway/parking lighting project has any streetscape landscaping lighting elements then Part-
2’s requirements regarding images, renderings/visualisations must be covered and included as
applicable.
a) If there are lighting calculations included, then they must always match the relevant
requirements within this Manual unless specific reasons are stated to justify a
variation to the normal Department requirements. They must also correlate with any
lighting layout/plan information submitted (if supplied).
b) Where conflict area designs are submitted, the lighting design must be clear and
optimise pole locations that take into account lighting levels and safety.
c) If there are any images, renderings or visualisations shown, then they must always
correlate with the relevant requirements within this Manual.
3. Preliminary Design Stage
The general rule of what technical information must be submitted for the Preliminary Design
Stage for lighting can be summarised into the following four requirements:
• Lighting Layouts
• Luminaire Data
• Electrical Design
All four items must always be submitted together as project lighting cannot be reviewed or be
with a reference to the lighting layout and road type. All electrical calculation submissions must
include the Electrical Designer’s Certificate as per Part 1 Section J. Consideration must be given
to the Road Safety Audit Manual (TR-540) and USDM/UCDM in the preparation of the lighting
layouts.
3.1.1 Cover Letter & Copy of the Concept Design Approval
conditional approval if applicable) for the Concept Design Stage.
a) If the calculation is for Public Realm lighting then DIALux software must be used, other
lighting calculations can use other independent software packages, but
requirements set out with the Clause 4 requirements as per the relevant Section(s)
within this Manual.
setting out of the fixtures on the lighting layout drawings.

intersection / junction / bridge / park / etc. in an easy to follow referencing system to
allow The Department to review quickly and correctly. Any submission where the
3.1.3 Lighting Layouts Key Aspects
b) All lighting layouts must show the approved Public Realm corridor as agreed with The
Department
c) The lighting layouts’ fixture spacings, heights, locations etc. must correlate fully with

is just a result a particular luminaire’s combination of light source, driver, optics and
unique letter or number, for example: A, B, C1, C2, D etc…
e) The luminaires shown on the lighting layouts (as referenced/labelled) must correlate
fully both with those used within the lighting calculations and with the luminaire data
provided within the submission.
f) All Layouts; title blocks, labelling, electrical/civil layer information and all other
general requirements shall be as per The Department’s Drawing/CAD/CADD
Standards.
a) Preliminary drawings are required to show that the design is progressing in the
correct manner and if there are issues these can be identified at this stage and
discussed.
b) All luminaire data provided must prove they are fully compliant with all the criteria
c) Each luminaire proposed within the submission must be clearly defined by the
they are located on the lighting layouts.
d) Luminaires must be presented in a Lighting Schedule format, either on the layouts or

luminaire.
e) Any lighting management system proposed for the project (provision requirement as
f) Any solar roadway lighting system proposed for the project (provision requirement
a) All electrical design will be carried out on third party certified software (excel
b) Electrical designs shall cover the following: -
the DOE EWR
c) All information on Electrical Deign shall be recorded in the Electrical Design Certificate
It is useful to include any lighting information contained within a Preliminary Report (or even from
the original Concept Design Report) if the project has something, as often this gives the reviewer
some useful background to the project that can assist in the review.
Note: Approval at Preliminary Design Stage is always based on the specific luminaire solution(s)
proposed and proved through the combined calculation, layout and luminaire data material
submitted. Lighting approvals are not ‘generic’ and the Consultant is fully responsible to ensure
this approved solution is taken forward to Detail Design Stage and subsequently the Tender
package in whatever method is preferred to ensure The Department Approved solution is either
delivered or a fully Equal and Approved solution delivered in its place. All electrical calculation
submissions must include the Electrical Designer’s Certificate as per Part 1 Section J.
Consideration must be given to the Road Safety Audit Manual (TR-540) and USDM/UCDM in the
preparation of the lighting layouts.
4. Detail Design Stage
The general rule of what technical information must be submitted for the Detail Design Stage for
lighting can be summarised into the following five requirements:
• Lighting Layouts/Details
• Luminaire Data
• Light Pollution Mitigation Report
• Electrical Calculations
All five items must always be submitted together as project lighting cannot be reviewed or be
electronic, it is essential that all electronic files are titled simply and logically as to what they
are, so The Department’s reviewers to easily identify each file. Reports should be named as a
report; lighting calculations should be named lighting calculation, lighting layouts named as per
the layout’s titles and not the drawing numbers and the light pollution mitigation report files
labelled accordingly. All electrical calculation submissions must include the Electrical Designer’s
Certificate as per Part 1 Section J. Consideration must be given to the Road Safety Audit Manual
(TR-540) and USDM/UCDM in the preparation of the lighting layouts.
4.1.1 Cover Letter & Copy of the Preliminary Design Approval
conditional approval if applicable) for the Preliminary Design Stage.
a) If the calculation is for Public Realm lighting then DIALux software must be used, other
lighting calculations can use other independent software packages, but
requirements set out with the requirements as per the relevant Section(s) within this
Manual.
setting out of the fixtures on the lighting layout and detail drawings.

intersection / junction / bridge / park / etc. in an easy to follow referencing system to
allow The Department to review quickly and correctly. Any submission where the
4.1.3 Lighting Layout/Details Key Aspects
b) The lighting layouts’ fixture spacings, heights, locations etc. must correlate fully with
c) The lighting detail drawings must show every luminaire type’s installation, fixing,
mounting details clearly and how they are integrated within the project’s hardscape
arrangements and compliance with any Department requirements.

is just a result a particular luminaire combination of light source, driver, optics and
unique letter or number, for example: A, B, C1, C2, D etc.
e) The luminaires shown on the lighting layouts and details (as referenced/labelled)
must correlate fully both with those used within the lighting calculations and with the
f) All Layouts/Details; title blocks, labelling, electrical/civil layer information and all
other general requirements shall be as per The Department’s Drawing/CAD/CADD
Standards.
g) All lighting layouts must show the approved lighting corridor as agreed with The
Department
a) All luminaire data provided must prove they are fully compliant with all the criteria
b) Each luminaire proposed within the submission must be clearly defined by the
they are located on the lighting layouts and detail drawings.
c) Luminaires must be presented in a Lighting Schedule format, either on the layouts or

luminaire.
d) Any lighting management system proposed for the project (provision requirement as
e) Any solar roadway lighting system proposed for the project (provision requirement
4.1.5 Light Pollution Mitigation Report
Provide a Project Light Pollution Mitigation Report including the Software Lighting Calculation
Report fully in adherence to the requirements of Section F, including the completed Pro-forma in
Part 1, Section G, in PDF format. In addition, if requested by The Department, provide the software
source file alongside the PDF Report.
d) All electrical design will be carried out on third party certified software (excel
e) Electrical designs shall cover the following: -
the DOE EWR
f) All information on Electrical Deign shall be recorded in the Electrical Design Certificate
It is useful to include any lighting information contained within a Detail Design Report (or even
from the original Concept Design and/or Preliminary Design Report) if the project has something,
as often this gives the reviewer some useful background to the project that can assist in the
review.
5. Tender/Construction Responsibilities
Note: Approval at Detail Design Stage with regards to lighting is always an approval based on
the entire optimum project design and includes the specific optimum luminaire solution(s)
contained which has been proved through the combined calculation, layout and luminaire data
material submitted to meet all this Manual’s requirements. The luminaires included within a
Project’s lighting approval can therefore never be treated as ‘generic’, nor can lighting fixtures
be deemed purely an arbitrary commodity item based on a handful of performance variables
such as wattage, number of LEDs, IP-rating or lumen output. All LED luminaires are precise
optical instruments with a unique combination of a multitude of performance, distribution,
quality, material and aesthetic attributes, albeit attributes which can and should be correctly
defined for the later project stages from Tender onwards.
The Consultant is fully responsible to ensure the approved Detail Design can be taken forward
to Tender package and then to Construction accurately, in whatever method preferred, to
ensure the Department’s approval is either delivered exactly as the DD or an equal or better
optimum luminaire/lighting design solution could be approved and delivered in its place.
It is recommended that Tender documentation covers each fixture requirement/specification

in enough fine detail to set out all the necessary photometry/efficiency performance,
component, quality, material and aesthetic parameters clearly, including the specific fixture
brand/references/images if preferred, including accessories. But always being clearly set out
that any specific luminaire references are on an Equal & Approved basis. So a Contractor can
make his free choice and that any luminaires proposed by the Contractor that are different to
those approved within the Detail Design submission will need to be put forward to meet or
exceed all requirements and with new lighting calculations and data/testing sheets instructed
to be included within material submissions to prove this.

Part-2 Applicable Standards & Guidance References

The following documents where applicable and/or as invoked specifically, shall be followed with
regards to the Lighting Manual Part-1 Sections A to H. Any versions listed (or equivalent
International approved documents) that are superseded by either updated versions or by
alternative documents, if and when they become available, the latest applicable versions/editions
always shall be obtained and referred to.
A. Abu Dhabi Standards & Guidance

1. DMT Abu Dhabi Sustainable Lighting Strategy
3. The Abu Dhabi Guide to Infrastructure Standards - www.qcc.abudhabi.ae
▪ Energy Infrastructure Chapter
▪ Public Realm Infrastructure Chapter
▪ Transport Infrastructure Chapter
Along with the following specific unified manuals, standards, codes,
specifications, guides and other documents encompassed by and referenced
within these Chapters:
▪ Urban Street Design Manual (USDM)
▪ Public Realm Design Manual (PRDM)
▪ Utility Corridors Design Manual (for Utilities in Urban Areas)
▪ Right of Way Utilities Distribution Manual (for Main Roads)
▪ Walking & Cycling Master Plan – Network Design
▪ Standard Specifications for Roads – Volumes 1 to 3
▪ Standard Drawings for Roads Projects
▪ Roadway Design Manual
▪ Consultant Procedure Manual
▪ Standard Scope of Services for Roads Projects Consultants
▪ Quality Assurance & Quality Control – Requirements for Roads Projects
▪ Environmental, Health & Safety Manual for Road Projects
▪ Sustainability Guideline Standards
▪ Roadside Design Guide
▪ Road Structures Design Manual
▪ Road Geometric Design Manual
▪ Pavement Design Manual
▪ Roadside Advertising Manual
▪ Manual for Uniform Traffic Control Devices
▪ Traffic Signals and Electronic Warning & Information Systems
▪ Safety & Security Planning Manual
▪ Non-Disruptive Road Crossings
▪ Guide Drawings on Locating Bus Stops on Urban Roads
▪ Technical Circular – Bus Stop Design Standard Drawings
▪ Road User Code
▪ Standard Bill of Quantities
▪ Project Cost Estimating Manual
▪ Project Risk Management Manual
▪ Landscape Design Guidelines, Standard Drawings, Specifications and
O&M Guidelines and Specifications
▪ Irrigation Manuals – Volumes I to IV
▪ Stormwater Design Manual, Standard Drawings, O&M & Technical
Specifications
4. Department Sustainable Project Rating Schemes
▪ Abu Dhabi Sustainable Roads Rating System (SRRS) (latest version)
5. Department Project Value Engineering Requirements
▪ Value Engineering Guidelines (VEG) (latest version)
8. Estidama-Submittal User Guides – PQP
9. UPC Interim Coastal Development Guidelines (ICDG)
10. UPC Al Bateen Waterfront Design Guidelines
11. ADDC/AADC Standard Technical Specifications for Electrical Works
12. Abu Dhabi Regulation & Supervision Bureau - The Electricity Wiring Regulations
13. Telecommunications Regulatory Authority (TRA) Technical Standards
B. International Standards & Guidance

1. CIE S 017/E ILV: International Lighting Vocabulary
2. ANSI/IES RP-16 Nomenclature & Definitions for Illuminating Engineering
3. Illuminating Engineering Society: The Lighting Handbook Reference and
Application – 10th Edition
4. The Society of Light and Lighting: The SLL Lighting Handbook
5. The Society of Light and Lighting: The SLL Code for Lighting
6. ISO 9001: Quality Management System – Requirements
7. ISO 80000 Quantities and Units (SI units)
C. Lighting Maintenance & Measurement

2. CIE 140 Road Lighting Calculations
3. CIE 154 The Maintenance of Outdoor Lighting Systems
4. CIE 194 On-site Measurement of the Photometric Properties of Road and Tunnel
Lighting
5. BS 667: Illuminance Meters. Requirements and Test Methods
6. ISO/CIE 19476Characterization of the Performance of Illuminance Meters and
Luminance Meters
7. EN 13201-Road lighting-Part 4 Methods of measuring lighting performance
8. IES/IESNA DG-4 Design Guide for Roadway Lighting Maintenance
9. BS 5489 Design of road lighting. Lighting of roads and public amenity areas.
Code of practice
D. Mechanical/Material
2. EN/ANSI/IEC 60529 Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code for
Ingress Protection)
3. EN/ANSI/IEC 62262 Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures for Electrical
Equipment Against External Mechanical Impacts (IK Code)
4. ANSI C136.31- Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment- Luminaire Vibration.
5. EN/IEC 60068-2-68-2 L Environmental Testing – Part 2-68: Tests – Test L: Dust
and Sand
6. ASTM B117 Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
7. ASTM D1654 Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated
Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments
8. ISO 9227 Corrosion Tests in Artificial Atmospheres. Salt Spray Tests
9. ISO 8289 Vitreous and Porcelain Enamels - Low voltage Test for Detecting and
Locating Defects
10. ISO 4892-1 Plastics - Methods of Exposure to Laboratory Light Sources -- Part 1:
General Guidance
11. ISO 3522 - BS EN 1706 Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys - Castings - Chemical
Composition and Mechanical Properties
12. ASTM A153/A153M Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron
and Steel Hardware
13. ASTM D4956 Standard Specification for Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic
Control
14. Stainless Steel Specification /Designation to ASTM-SAE or aligned equivalent
grades
E. Electrical
General
1. IEC 60050 International Electro-technical Vocabulary (IEV)
Electrical & Material Safety:
2. EN/IEC 60598-1 Luminaires. General Requirements and Tests
3. EN/IEC 60598-2-1 Luminaires. Part 2: Particular Requirements. Section One:
Fixed General Purpose Luminaires
4. EN/IEC 60598-2-3ed3.1 Particular Requirements - Luminaires for Road and
Street Lighting
5. BS EN 61140+A1:2006/IEC 61140 Protection against electric shock. Common
aspects for installation and equipment
6. Emirates Authority for Standardization and Metrology (ESMA) Conformity
Assessment System for Lighting Products (latest version)
7. IEC 61347-1 Lamp Control Gear. General & Safety Requirements
8. IEC 61347-2-13 Lamp Controlgear - Part 2-13: Particular Requirements for d.c. or
a.c. Supplied Electronic Controlgear for LED Modules
9. IEC 62384+A1 dc or ac Supplied Electronic Control Gear for LED Modules.
Performance Requirements
10. IEEE STD C62.41.2 IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in
Low-Voltage (1000v and Less) AC Power Circuits
11. RoHS-2 Directive 65/EU (Recast RoHS-1) Restriction of Hazardous Substances
Directive…in Electrical and Electronic Equipment
Electromagnetic Compatibility:
1. EN/IEC 61547ed.2.0 Equipment for General Lighting Purposes - EMC Immunity
Requirements (Surge Protection)
2. IEEE/ASNI C62.41.2 IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges
in Low-Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits
Limits for Harmonic Current Emissions
Limitation of Voltage Changes, Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker in Public Low-
Voltage Supply Systems
5. IEC CISPR-15 - EN 55015 Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio
Disturbance Characteristics of Electrical Lighting and Similar Equipment
6. NEMA ANSI C82.77 Harmonic Emission Limits – Related Power Quality
Requirements for Lighting Equipment
7. IEEE 519 Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in
Electrical Power Systems
F. Light Emitting Diode (LED)

LED Manufacturing, Testing, Photometry & Measurement:
1. ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377 – American National Standard for Electric Lamps—
Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting (SSL) Products
2. IEC 62717ed1.0 LED Modules for General Lighting - Performance Requirements
(cancels and replaces IEC PAS 62717 published in 2011)
3. IES/IESNA LM-80 Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED
Light Sources
4. CIE-127 Measurement of LEDs
5. JEDEC JESD22-A108D Temperature Bias and Operating Life
6. JEDEC JESD51-5 Extension of Thermal Test Board Standards for Packages with
Direct Thermal Attachment Mechanisms
7. JEDEC JESD51-50 Overview of Methodologies for the Thermal Measurement of
Single and Multi-chip, Single and Multi-PN-Junction Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
8. JEDEC JESD51-51 Implementation of the Electrical Test Method for the
Measurement of Real Thermal Resistance and Impedance of Light-Emitting
Diodes with Exposed Cooling Surface
9. JEDEC JESD51-52 Guidelines for Combining CIE 127 Total Flux Measurements
with Thermal Measurements of LEDs with Exposed Cooling Surface
10. JEDEC JESD51-53 Terms, Definitions and Units Glossary for LED Thermal Testing
11. CIE-15Colorimetry Technical Report
G. LED Luminaire Performance

General:
1. CIE-140 Methods of Calculation
Luminaire Testing, Photometry & Measurement:
2. Abu Dhabi Quality and Conformity Council (QCC) Abu Dhabi Certification
Scheme for LED Exterior Lighting Fixtures (Luminaires) (latest version)
3. CE Product Certification: 92/59/EEC (General Product Safety) & 73/23/EEC
Guidelines to Low Voltage Directive (LVD)
4. UL Product Certification: UL 1598, Luminaires
5. IES/IESNA LM-79 Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements
of Solid-State Lighting Products
6. IEC 62722-2-1ed1.0 Luminaire performance - Part 2-1: Requirements for LED
luminaires
7. EN 13032-1 Light and Lighting. Measurement and Presentation of Photometric
Data of Lamps and Luminaires. Measurement and File Format
8. EN 13032-4 Light and Lighting - Measurement and Presentation of Photometric
Data of Lamps and Luminaires Part 4: LED Light Sources and Luminaires (once
approved; used in conjunction with EN 13032-1)
9. IES/IESNA TM-21 Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light
Sources + Addendum A: Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED
Packages
10. IES/IESNA LM-82 LED Light Engines and LED Lamps for Electrical and
Photometric Properties as a Function of Temperature
11. IES/IESNA LM-84 Measuring Luminous Flux and Color Maintenance of LED
Lamps, Light Engines and Luminaires
12. IES/IESNA TM-28 Projecting Long-Term Luminous Flux Maintenance of LED
Lamps and Luminaires
13. IEC 60068-2-6 ed.07 Environmental Testing - Part 2-6: Tests - Test Fc: Vibration
(sinusoidal)
14. EULUMDAT Photometry file – European data file format used for Specification
of photometric data. The file extension is .ldt
15. IES Photometry file – North American data file format used for Specification of
photometric data. The file extension is .ies
Photobiological Safety of Lamps and Lamp Systems:
2. ANSI/IESNA RP-27.3 Recommended Practice for Photobiological Safety for lamps
– Risk Group Classification
H. Lighting Design
Roads & Bridges:
3. IESNA DG-21 Design Guide for Residential Street Lighting
4. CIE 115-2nd-Edition Lighting of Roads for Motor and Pedestrian Traffic
Lighting ME/MEW Classes)
7. IES TM-15+ Addendum A Backlight, Uplight, and Glare (BUG) Ratings
Tunnels:
2. ANSI/IES RP-22 Tunnel Lighting
3. CIE 88 Guide for the Lighting of Road Tunnels and Underpasses
4. CEN/CR 14380 Lighting Applications - Tunnel Lighting
5. BS-EN/CEN 5489-2 Code of practice for the design of road lighting. Lighting of
tunnels
6. CIE 193 Emergency Lighting in Road Tunnels
7. BS-EN 16276 Evacuation Lighting in Road Tunnels
Interchanges:
3. CIE 115-2nd-Edition Lighting of Roads for Motor and Pedestrian Traffic (Zones of
Conflict)
Roundabouts:
3. IES DG-19 Design guide for Roundabout Lighting
4. CIE 115 Lighting of Roads for Motor and Pedestrian Traffic (Zones of Conflict)
Pedestrian Crossings:
2. ANSI/IES RP-8 Roadway Lighting (Conflict Areas & Interaction)
Lighting EV Classes)
Parking:
2. IES RP-20 Lighting for Parking Facilities
3. PD CEN/TR 13201-1 Road lighting. Guidelines on Selection of Lighting Classes
Outdoor Work Places:
2. CIE 129 Guide for Lighting Exterior Work Areas
3. EN 12464-2 Light and Lighting. Lighting of Work Places. Outdoor Work Places
Signage Lighting:
1. IESNA RP-19, Roadway Sign Lighting,
2. BS EN 12899-1- Fixed, Vertical Road Traffic Signs
Light Pollution Mitigation:
3. IESNA RP-33, Lighting for Exterior Environments,
4. IESNA TM-10 Addressing Obtrusive (Urban Sky Glow and Light Trespass)
5. CIE 126 Guidelines for Minimizing Sky Glow
6. ILP Guidance Notes for the Reduction of Obtrusive Light
7. CIBSE/SLL Guide to Limiting Obtrusive Light
10. UPC, Abu Dhabi Safety and Security Planning Manual, P4 Lighting Surveillance
I. Solar Street Lighting

General:
2. ISO 9488 Solar Energy – Vocabulary
3. ASTM E772 Standard Terminology Relating to Solar Energy Conversion
Solar PV Systems and Components:

1. IEC 61215-1 Thin-Film Terrestrial Photovoltaic (PV) Modules - Design
Qualification and Type Approval
2. IEC 61730-1ed1.2 Consol. with am1&2 - Photovoltaic (PV) Module Safety
Qualification – Part 1: Requirements for Construction.
3. IEC 62093ed1.0B Balance-of-System Components for Photovoltaic Systems -
Design Qualification Natural Environments
Batteries:
1. IEC 60050-482 (IEV) Chapter 486: Secondary Cells and Batteries
2. IEC 60086-1ed11.0 Primary Batteries – Part 1: General
3. IEC 60086-2ed12.0 Primary batteries - Part 2: Physical and electrical
Specifications
4. IEC/EN 60896-11ed1.0- Stationary lead-acid batteries - Part 11: Vented types -
General requirements and methods of tests
5. IEC/EN 60896-21 Stationary Lead Acid Batteries, Valve-Regulated Types:
Methods of Test
6. IEC/EN 60896-22ed1.0 Stationary Lead Acid Batteries, Valve-Regulated Types:
Requirements
7. IEC/EN 61951-2ed3.0b: Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or
other non-acid electrolytes - Portable sealed rechargeable single cells - Part 2:
Nickel-metal hydride
J. Economic/Cost - Life-Cycle Analysis

1. ISO 15686-5 Buildings and constructed assets -- Service-life planning
-- Part 5: Life-cycle costing
K. Lighting Controls/PLMS
1. EN 60950 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment.
2. IEEE 802.15.4a - Wireless Personal Area Network (WPAN)
3. IEC 62386 - DALI Standards
4. DMX512 Standards

NOTES:
C/L LIGHT POLE, C/L ANCHORAGE
1. REFER TO ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL PART I SECTION C
ASSEMBLY AND C/L FOUNDATION
444 Ø POLE AT BASE STAINLESS STEEL FOR LIGHT POLE SPECIFICATION.
119 DIA 4-52 Ø (MIN) ANCHOR BOLTS DOUBLE CABLE CLAMPS
WITH 3 HEAVY HEX NUTS AND 2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN MILLIMETERS .
HARDENED WASHERS PER BOLT. C/L LIGHT POLE, C/L ANCHORAGE
3. LIGHT POLE FOUNDATIONS ARE DESIGNED FOR A WIND
VELOCITY OF 160 KILOMETERS PER HOUR AND WITH GUST
FACTOR 1.14 WHEN EQUIPPED WITH LUMINAIRES OF THE
WALL THICKNESS - 5mm A ELECTRICAL CUTOUT WITH MAXIMUM WEIGHT PER LUMINAIRES IN ACCORDANCE WITH
CIRCUIT BREAKER ASSEMBLY THE A.A.S.H.T.O STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL
100Ø PVC CONDUIT ENCLOSED IN METALLIC POLE CORD CAP SUPPORTS FOR HIGHWAY SIGNS, LUMINAIRES AND TRAFFIC
706 x 706 x 60mm BASE SIGNALS.
COVER (SEE NOTE 9) CIRCUIT BREAKER
PLATE (ASTM-A588) 648 Ø BOLT CIRCLE
Fy (MIN) = 4300 Kg/cm² CORD CONNECTOR 4. ALL ANCHOR BOLT SHALL BE PROPERLY SET PRIOR TO
MOUNTING PLATE PLACING CONCRETE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE
HOLE IN BASE PLATE TO 1000Ø CIDH FOUNDATION
HAND HOLE THIS WITH THE LIGHTING POLE SUPPLIER.
ACCOMMODATE CONDUIT
5. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN SOIL BORINGS AT EACH
TOP PLAN WINCH ASSEMBLY 30.5m POLE LOCATION SHOWN ON THE PLANS. BORING LOGS
CABLE CLAMP 1.5m LONG POWER CORD TOGETHER WITH ALL APPLICABLE SHOP DRAWINGS REQUIRED
BY THE SPECIFICATIONS ARE TO BE SUBMITTED TO THE
ENGINEER FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL PRIOR TO THE START
OF CONSTRUCTION.
C/L LIGHT POLE . C/L ANCHORAGE
444 Ø POLE AT BASE STAINLESS STEEL EARTH LUG
BASE PLATE
ASSEMBLY AND C/L FOUNDATION 6. THE ANCHOR BOLT SIZE AND SPACING IS BASED UPON DESIGN
DATA AS SPECIFIED IN ROADWAY LIGHTING STANDARD
280 PROJ
60(MIN)
100 GROUT
SPECIFICATIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH
52 Ø ANCHOR BOLTS STAINLESS STEEL CABLE GLAND SUCH SPECIFICATIONS BASED ON DATA SUPPLIED BY THE
MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER WHOSE MATERIAL IS
TOP OF CONCRETE SIZED 4 CORE XLPE PROPOSED BY THE CONTRACTOR. SUCH SHOP DRAWING AND
FOUNDATION ARMOURED CABLES DATA SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER BEFORE
150 300
FABRICATION.
TOP OF FINISHED 7. ALL THE ANCHOR BOLT IN UNPAVED AREA SHALL BE

GROUND COVERED BY PVC CAP AND IN PAVED AREA SHALL BE
HAND HOLE WIRING COVERED BY DECORATIVE BASE PLATE COVER.
BENDING RADIUS
(MINIMUM) 250mm ELECTRICAL CUTOUT 8. CIDH DENOTES "CAST IN DRILLED HOLE".
WITH CIRCUIT BREAKER
100Ø PVC CONDUIT 9. DEPTH OF CONDUIT FOR CABLE ENTRY IN TO THE CUT OUT
SEE NOTE 6
(SEE NOTE 9) SHALL BE APPROXIMATELY 750mm OR AS DETERMINED ON
SITE BY THE ENGINEER.
SEE ELEVATION FOR HEIGHT OF FOUNDATION

10. PROVIDE TWO (2) FOUNDATION CONDUITS AT LOCATIONS
WHERE THE LIGHTING PLAN INDICATES THE TERMINATION OF
POWER CABLE IN
30500
WINCH ASSEMBLY TWO UNDERGROUND CABLES AT POLE BASE. THE

POLE YIELD STRENGTH SHALL FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT ELECTRICAL CUTOUTS IN POLES AT THESE LOCATIONS SHALL
BE TO ASTM - A595, GRADE (B) BE SUITABLE FOR TERMINATING TWO UNDERGROUND
CABLES.
11. ALUMINUM PLATE OF DIMENSION (120x150)mm SHOULD BE

WALL THICKNESS - 6mm FIXED FROM THE FACTORY PREMISES FOR POLE NUMBERING.
TO EARTH LUG
B 12. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE DETAILED STRUCTURAL
CALCULATION AND DRAWINGS FOR ENGINEER'S APPROVAL.
CABLE GLAND
13. FOUNDATION DESIGN OF LIGHT POLE SHOULD BE VERIFIED
SIZED 4 CORE XLPE ELECTRICAL CUTOUT & BY THE PROJECT CONSULTANT AS PER ACTUAL SOIL
12 - 20Ø 90 CL ARMOURED CABLES PARAMETERS BASED ON GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
EQUALLY SPACED (TYP) WINCH ASSEMBLY REPORT.
SCALE: NTS
14. THE TOP OF FOUNDATION SHALL BE 150mm ABOVE

FINISHED GROUND LEVEL EXCEPT FOR TILED AREA. IN
10 Ø SPIRAL - 80mm PITCH CIRCUIT BREAKER ASSIGNMENT TILED AREA THE TOP OF THE FOUNDATION LEVEL SHALL
2 EXTRA TURNS TOP &
BE THE SAME AS THE FINISHED TILED LEVEL.
BOTTOM
NO. OF LUMINARIES DESCRIPTION
15. LUMINAIRES TO BE AS PER ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL
1000 Ø CIDH FOUNDATION MINIATURE CKT. BREAKER 3-P AND SPECIFICATIONS.
4
400V, 10KA SIZED PER CABLE CALC.
MINIATURE CKT. BREAKER 3-P
6
400V, 10KA SIZED PER CABLE CALC.
1000 DIA ANCHOR BOLTS WITH 3 HEAVY HEX NUTS

90CL
AND HARDENED WASHERS PER BOLT. TOP PORTION OF ANCHOR BOLTS,

WALL THICKNESS - 7mm
ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL CONFORM TO SHALL BE GALVANISED IN ACCORDANCE
ASTM-A675,GRADE 90 WITH ASTM-A153.
1 - - July 2021
F
HAND HOLE SECTION A-A - NUTS AND WASHERS SHALL BE
OF STAINLESS STEEL 0 - -
TOP OF PEDESTAL
DETAIL A
- ALL PART F SHALL BE COVERED No. REVISIONS APP'D DATE
E
444 Ø POLE AT BASE BY GREASE CLIENT
150
A
TOP OF FINISHED GROUND
C
C/L FOUNDATION
1000 DIA
SEE NOTE 14 ANCHOR PLATE (ASTM-A588
TITLE
200
60 DIA PVC Fy MIN.=4300 Kg/cm² )

STANDARD DRAWINGS
1200
5000
B
CONDUIT
C/L FOUNDATION
1000Ø CIDH DRAWING TITLE
FOUNDATION ANCHOR BOLT DETAILS
LIGHTING
10Ø SPIRAL - 80mm PITCH
30.5m LIGHT POLE DETAILS
.
400
12 - 20Ø EQUALLY SPACED POLE SIZE A B C D E F ANCHOR PLATE

200
DRAWN . SCALE NTS

30.5m 2580 150 2150 280 50 330 110x110x20
TYPICAL CHECKED . DATE .
ELEVATION DETAIL A SECTION B-B ANCHOR BOLT DIMENSIONS APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-01
NOTES:
1. REFER TO ABU DHABI LIGHTNG MANUAL PART 1 SECTION C
FOR LIGHT POLE SPECIFICATION.
C/L LIGHT POLE,
C/L PEDESTAL & C/L LIGHT POLE & C/L FOUNDATION 2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN MILLIMETERS .
EXPANSION JOINT (TYP) . C/L FOUNDATION
FACE / MEDIAN BARRIER 3. LIGHT POLE FOUNDATIONS ARE DESIGNED FOR A WIND
C/L LIGHT POLE, C/L ANCHORAGE HOLE IN BASE PLATE TO 15mmPRE MOLDED JT.
(TYPICAL) VELOCITY OF 160 KILOMETERS PER HOUR AND WITH GUST
ASSEMBLY & C/L FOUNDATION ACCOMODATE CONDUIT FILLER (FULL HEIGHT OF
FACTOR 1.14 WHEN EQUIPPED WITH 6 LUMINAIRES OF THE
180
648 DIA BOLT CIRCLE BARRIER)
MAXIMUM WEIGHT PER LUMINAIRE IN ACCORDANCE WITH
400
119 Ø EXP.JT
(TYP) 25Ø EF THE A.A.S.H.T.O STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR
4-52Ø ANCHOR BOLTS WITH 3
STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS FOR HIGHWAY SIGNS, LUMINAIRES
HEAVY HEX NUTS & HARDENED
50 180
C/L MEDIAN, C/L LIGHT AND TRAFFIC SIGNALS.
WASHERS PER BOLT. C/L MEDIAN, C/L
530
POLE, C/L PEDESTAL &
CIDH FOUNDATION
LIGHT POLE & C/L
C/L FOUNDATION 4. ALL ANCHOR BOLT SHALL BE PROPERLY SET PRIOR TO
FOUNDATION
A
1000 DIA
PLACING CONCRETE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE
8-25Ø
1520
1520
720
10ØSPIRAL THIS WITH THE LIGHTING POLE SUPPLIER.
80mm PITCH
60Ø PVC CONDUIT
530
4-25Ø
12-20Ø @
1060
1520
EQUAL SPACES 30.5m POLE LOCATION SHOWN ON THE PLANS. BORING LOGS
(TYP)
TOGETHER WITH ALL APPLICABLE SHOP DRAWINGS REQUIRED
170
C/L MEDIAN, C/L LIGHT POLE 4-52Ø ANCHOR BY THE SPECIFICATIONS ARE TO BE SUBMITTED TO THE
400
C/L ANCHORAGE ASSEMBLY & BOLTS
DOUBLE - FACE MEDIAN ENGINEER FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL PRIOR TO THE START
180
C/L FOUNDATION
BARRIER (TYP)
OF CONSTRUCTION.
530 530 6-25Ø
HEXAGONAL BASE PLATE
180 50
SIDES = 440mm, (ASTM-A 588) 1060 6. THE ANCHOR BOLT SIZE AND SPACING IS BASED UPON DESIGN
1060
Fy (MIN) = 4300 Kg/cm² DATA AS SPECIFIED IN ROADWAY LIGHTING STANDARD
6-25Ø SUCH SPECIFICATIONS BASED ON DATA SUPPLIED BY THE
1060 MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER WHOSE MATERIAL IS
444 DIA POLE AT BASE PROPOSED BY THE CONTRACTOR. SHOP DRAWING AND
FOUNDATION PLAN C SECTION C-C DATA SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER BEFORE
SCALE: NTS SCALE NTS FABRICATION.
B 7. ALL THE ANCHOR BOLT IN UNPAVED AREA SHALL BE
COVERED BY PVC CAP AND IN PAVED AREA SHALL BE
COVERED BY DECORATIVE BASE PLATE COVER.
TOP PLAN C/L MEDIAN C/L LIGHT POLE
8. CIDH DENOTES "CAST IN DRILLED HOLE".
SCALE: NTS & C/L FOUNDATION
POLE SHALL BE ASTM - A595, 9. DEPTH OF CONDUIT FOR CABLE ENTRY SHALL BE
1520
GRADE (B) APPROXIMATELY 750mm OR AS DETERMINED ON SITE BY THE
180 50 1060 50 180 C/L FOUNDATION
ENGINEER.
4-25Ø 1000 Ø
C/L LIGHT POLE, C/L ANCHORAGE WHERE THE LIGHTING PLAN INDICATES THE TERMINATION OF
ASSEMBLY AND C/L FOUNDATION TWO UNDERGROUND CABLES AT POLE BASE. THE
4-52Ø ANCHOR BOLTS
1060
SEE DETAIL
ELECTRICAL CUTOUTS IN POLES AT THESE LOCATIONS SHALL
30500
BE SUITABLE FOR TERMINATING TWO UNDERGROUND

C/L FOUNDATION
60(MIN) BASE PLATE
6-25Ø TOP/MEDIAN CABLES.
280
BARRIER
25Ø EF
100 GROUT PAD
4-52 Ø ANCHOR BOLTS

SEE DETAIL 11. ALUMINUM PLATE OF DIMENSION (120x150)mm SHOULD BE
6-25Ø
10Ø SPIRAL FIXED FROM THE FACTORY PREMISES FOR POLE NUMBERING.
80mm.PITCH
510
CL 12. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE DETAILED STRUCTURAL
TOP/MEDIAN 90 YP)
(T CALCULATION AND DRAWINGS FOR ENGINEER'S APPROVAL.
12-20Ø EQUAL
840
BARRIER
SPACES
4CL.
TOP / SHOULDER
4-180Ø
250
BENDING RADIUS BY THE PROJECT CONSULTANT AS PER ACTUAL SOIL
(MINIMUM) 25CM PARAMETERS BASED ON GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
80
REPORT.
D SECTION D-D
840
100Ø PVC CONDUIT 4-25Ø 14. LUMINAIRES TO BE AS PER ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL
80CL.
500
80 CL. SCALE NTS AND SPECIFICATIONS.
(TYP)
6-25Ø (TYP)
4-18Ø
TOP SHOULDER
C 300x300x80 mm KEY
500
25Ø 8-25Ø
.
5840
6-25Ø 12-20Ø @ EQUAL SPACES
5000
300x300x80 mm KEY
12-20Ø @ EQUAL SPACES
4500
1 - - July 2021
HAND HOLE
0 - - .
4500
10Ø SPIRAL - 80mm² PITCH

10Ø SPIRAL - 80mm² PITCH EXTRA TURNS TOP & BOT
EXTRA TURNS TOP & BOTTOM
90CL. No. REVISIONS APP'D DATE
(TYP)
444 Ø POLE AT BASE 90CL. CLIENT
(TYP)
TOP OF SHOULDER D
90CL.
(TYP)
90CL.
(TYP)
60 DIA PVC
CONDUIT
TITLE
5000
C.I.D.H. 1000 DIA

STANDARD DRAWINGS
CIDH FOUNDATION 1000 DIA
CIDH FOUNDATIION
DRAWING TITLE
LIGHTING
ELEVATION SECTION A-A 30.5m LIGHT POLE DETAILS (BARRIER MOUNTED)
SCALE: NTS
A B SECTION B-B
SCALE NTS SCALE NTS
DRAWN . SCALE NTS
CHECKED . DATE .
APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-02
NOTES:
1. FOR GENERAL PRESENTATION ONLY.
2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS .

1862
3. REFER TO ABU DHABI LIGHTNG MANUAL PART 1 SECTION C
ALUMINIUM
COVER SHEAVE FOR
"IRIS" TYPE BALLAST (TYP) FOR LIGHT POLE SPECIFICATION.
LIFT CABLE (TYP)
GUIDE ARM (TYP)
4. PHASE CONNECTIONS TO LUMINAIRES ON CONSECUTIVE
YELLOW
BLACK
POLES SHALL BE SUITABLY ALTERED TO BALANCE
TOTAL PHASE LOADING OF INDIVIDUAL UNDERGROUND
POWER CABLE
SHEAVE CABLE CIRCUITS.
HEAD
FRAME 5. LUMINAIRES SHALL BE CONNECTED IN PHASE SEQUENCE.
2
ASSEMBLY 2.5mm ELECTRIC CABLES,
(RED, YELLOW, BLUE& BLACK)
LUMINAIRE 1000W LUMINAIRE (OR LED
MOUNTING BLUE BLACK EQUIVALENT) (TYP)
BRACKET
430
WATER PROOF POWER BLACK RED
RECEPTACLE FOR TESTING
LUMINAIRES IN LOWERED
POSITION POWER RECEPTACLE ASSEMBLY
WITH TERMINAL BLOCK AND FUSES
MOUNTING
RING
ASSEMBLY
LATCHING
BLACK
POWER CABLE, FLAT 8 CORE (MINIMUM)
RED
4-"IRIS" TYPE WATER RESISTANT INDICATOR
GUIDE ARMS NON-MARKING FLAG 2.5 mm,2 PVC INSULATED AND SHEATHED,
SYNTHETIC COMPOSITION COLOURED RED, YELLOW, BLUE (PHASES)
STAINLESS STEEL GUIDE WHEEL BLACK (NEUTRAL) GREEN (EARTH)
AIRCRAFT CABLE
HEAD FRAME AND LUMINAIRE RING ASSEMBLY

TOP VIEW OF MOUNTING RING 4 - LUMINAIRE WIRING DIAGRAM
FOR 30.5m LIGHT POLE SCALE: NTS SCALE: NTS
SCALE: NTS
1000W LUMINAIRE WITH

BUILT-IN BALLAST (TYP)
OR LED EUQIVALENT
HAND HOLE 1000W LUMINAIRE OR LED EQUIVALENT (TYP)
BALLAST (TYP)
HIGH STRENGTH TORQUE PORTABLE
YELLOW
BLACK
STRUCTURAL LIMITER POWER UNIT
GALVANIZED LUMINAIRE
STEEL POLE
MOUNTING RING
BL K
WINCH UE AC
BL
ASSEMBLY BL
AC D
K RE
2
2.5mm ELECTRIC CABLES,
POWER RECEPTACLE ASSEMBLY
HEAD FRAME (RED, YELLOW, BLUE& BLACK)
WITH TERMINAL BLOCK AND FUSES
ASSEMBLY
POWER UNIT BL
CLAMPING STRAP D A CK
RE
POWER UNIT POLE TOP K BL
AC UE
MOUNTING FRAME BL
BASE PLATE
YELLOW
BLACK
POWER CABLE, FLAT 8 CORE (MINIMUM)
2.5 mm 2 , PVC INSULATED AND SHEATHED,
REMOTE COLOURED RED, YELLOW, BLUE,(PHASES)
CONTROL BLACK (NEUTRAL) GREEN (EARTH)
POWER UNIT MOUNTED AT 30.5m POLE BASE 4 - LUMINAIRE MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT 90° APART 6 - LUMINAIRE WIRING DIAGRAM
SCALE: NTS SCALE: NTS SCALE: NTS
1000W LUMINAIRE WITH

BUILT-IN BALLAST (TYP)
OR LED EUQIVALENT
LUMINAIRE MOUNTING ARM (TYP)
1 - - July 2021
0 -
No. REVISIONS APP'D DATE
CLIENT
LUMINAIRE MOUNTING RING
HEAD FRAME ASSEMBLY
TITLE
STANDARD DRAWINGS
POLE TOP DRAWING TITLE
LIGHTING
30.5m LIGHT POLE DETAILS
LIGHTING & LUMINAIRE DETAILS
6 - LUMINAIRE MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT 60° APART DRAWN . SCALE NTS
SCALE: NTS
CHECKED . DATE .
APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-03
NOTES:
200
1. REFER TO ABI DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL PART 1 SECTION C
275
1" CURVED PIPE 50
C/L LIGHT POLE, C/L ANCHORAGE 2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN MILLIMETERS .
LUMINAIRE SIZE TO MATCH POLE
LE
ASSEMBLY AND C/L FOUNDATION WELDED
NUT & BOLT
PO
AND ANCHOR BOLT STRUCTURAL
15 15
341 Ø POLE AT BASE 3. LIGHT POLE FOUNDATIONS ARE DESIGNED FOR A WIND
F
REQUIREMENTS 4-42 Ø (MIN) ANCHOR BOLTS
O
F
WITH 3 HEAVY HEX NUTS AND
A/
HARDENED WASHERS PER BOLT. WELDED POINT F.B. 300x3mm THK FACTOR 1.14 WHEN EQUIPPED WITH LUMINAIRES OF THE
120
C/L LIGHT POLE, C/L ANCHORAGE MAXIMUM WEIGHT PER LUMINAIRE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
ST. PLT. 2mm THK
ASSEMBLY AND C/L FOUNDATION A.A.S.H.T.O STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL
SUPPORTS FOR HIGHWAY SIGNS, LUMINAIRES AND TRAFFIC
TOP VIEW TYPICAL SIGNALS.
A 4. ALL ANCHOR BOLT SHALL BE PROPERLY SET PRIOR TO
ELEVATION PLAN PLACING CONCRETE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE
THIS WITH THE LIGHTING POLE SUPPLIER.
600 x 600 x 50mm
2 100Ø PVC CONDUIT
BASE PLATE (ASTM-A588) 5. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN SOIL BORINGS AT EACH
118 DIA Fy (MIN) = 4300 Kg/cm
POLE LOCATION SHOWN ON THE PLANS. BORING LOGS
HOLE IN BASE PLATE TO
ACCOMMODATE CONDUIT
648 Ø BOLT CIRCLE
FLAG POLE HOLDER DETAIL TOGETHER WITH ALL APPLICABLE SHOP DRAWINGS REQUIRED
SCALE: NTS BY THE SPECIFICATIONS ARE TO BE SUBMITTED TO THE
1000Ø CIDH FOUNDATION FINISH GALVANIZED TO B.S 729
TOP PLAN OF CONSTRUCTION.
6. THE ANCHOR BOLT SIZE AND SPACING IS BASED UPON DESIGN

DATA AS SPECIFIED IN ROADWAY LIGHTING STANDARD
341 Ø POLE AT BASE
SUCH SPECIFICATIONS BASED ON DATA SUPPLIED BY THE
C/L LIGHT POLE . C/L ANCHORAGE
*INSTALL A FLAG POLE ARM SOCKET ON THE LIGHT
POLE SHAFT AFTER ERECTION OF POLES,AS
PVC OR NEOPRENE SEAL

CAST ALUMINUM OR GALVANIZED
STEEL REMOVABLE ENCLOSURE
PROPOSED BY THE CONTRACTOR. SHOP DRAWING AND
DATA SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER BEFORE
BASE PLATE
REQUIRED BY THE ENGINEER 42 Ø ANCHOR BOLTS PLATE. 2 HALVES PER BASE . SIZE
BETWEEN TWO HALVES OF FABRICATION.
60 (MIN)
ENCLOSURE PLATE AND TO MATCH BASE PLATE. PAINT TO
TOP OF CONCRETE
280 PROJ
ALL AROUND POLE MATCH POLE FINISH.
FOUNDATION 7. ALL THE ANCHOR BOLT IN UNPAVED AREA SHALL BE
100 GROUT
300
SEE NOTE 6 150

TOP OF FINISHED
GROUND PROVIDE BACK-UP PLATE TO ONE 8. CIDH DENOTES "CAST IN DRILLED HOLE".
HALF OF ENCLOSURE PLATE
WITH TAPPED HOLES TO ACCEPT 9. DEPTH OF CONDUIT FOR CABLE ENTRY SHALL BE
BENDING RADIUS REMOVABLE STAINLESS STEEL
STAINLESS STEEL SCREWS APPROXIMATELY 750mm OR AS DETERMINED ON SITE BY THE
(MINIMUM) 250mm SCREWS COUNTERSUNK
COUNTERSUNK INTO OTHER
WALL THICKNESS - 4mm ENGINEER.
100Ø PVC CONDUIT 10. PROVIDE TWO (2) FOUNDATION CONDUITS AT LOCATIONS
(SEE NOTE 9)
TWO UNDERGROUND CABLES AT POLE BASE. THE
SEE ELEVATION FOR HEIGHT OF FOUNDATION

POLE SHALL BE BE SUITABLE FOR TERMINATING TWO UNDERGROUND
ASTM-A 595 GRADE (B)
ENCLOSURE PLATE DETAILS CABLES.
(PAVED AREA) 11. ALUMINUM PLATE OF DIMENSION (120x150)mm SHOULD BE

FIXED FROM THE FACTORY PREMISES FOR POLE NUMBERING.
20000
12. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE DETAILED STRUCTURAL

B CALCULATION AND DRAWINGS FOR ENGINEER'S APPROVAL.

BY THE PROJECT CONSULTANT AS PER ACTUAL SOIL
12 - 20Ø 90 CL PARAMETERS BASED ON GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
EQUALLY SPACED (TYP) REPORT.

ANCHOR BOLTS WITH 3 HEAVY HEX NUTS FINISHED GROUND LEVEL EXCEPT FOR TILED AREA. IN
AND HARDENED WASHERS PER BOLT. TILED AREA THE TOP OF THE FOUNDATION LEVEL SHALL
10 Ø SPIRAL - 80mm PITCH ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL CONFORM TO
2 EXTRA TURNS TOP & BOTTOM TOP PORTION OF ANCHOR BOLTS, BE THE SAME AS THE FINISHED TILED LEVEL
WALL THICKNESS - 5mm ASTM-A675,GRADE 90
SHALL BE GALVANISED IN ACCORDANCE
Fy (MIN) = 4920 kg/cm² 15. LUMINAIRES SHALL BE AS PER ABU DHABI LIGHTING
WITH ASTM-A153.
MANUAL AND SPECIFICATIONS.
D
1000 Ø CIDH FOUNDATION
F
- NUTS AND WASHERS SHALL BE
TOP OF PEDESTAL
OF STAINLESS STEEL
E
- ALL PART F SHALL BE COVERED
BY GREASE
C
90CL
HAND HOLE
1000 DIA
DETAIL A 1 - - July 2021

TOP OF 140 ANCHOR PLATE
ENCLOSURE (ASTM-A588 Fy MIN.=4300 Kg/cm²) 0 - - -
PLATE SECTION A-A
B
341 Ø POLE AT BASE No. REVISIONS APP'D DATE
TOP OF
PAVEMENT TILE
CLIENT
(PAVED AREA) TOP OF CURB LEVEL
(UNPAVED AREA)
C/L FOUNDATION
150
SEE NOTE 14 1000 DIA

ANCHOR BOLT DETAILS TITLE
STANDARD DRAWINGS
500
4000
60 Ø PVC CONDUIT
C/L FOUNDATION
1000 Ø CIDH FOUNDATION DRAWING TITLE
LIGHTING
10Ø SPIRAL - 80mm PITCH POLE SIZE A B C D E F ANCHOR PLATE 20m LIGHT POLE DETAILS
12 - 20Ø EQUALLY SPACED 20m 1700 150 1270 280 50 330 110x110x20
DRAWN . SCALE NTS
CHECKED . DATE .
ELEVATION TYPICAL SECTION B-B ANCHOR BOLT DIMENSIONS APPROVED . SIZE A1
DETAIL A PROJECT
. DWG.
L-04
No. No.
NOTES:
1. REFER TO ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL PART1 SECTION C
LUMINAIRE SIZE TO MATCH POLE PAVED AREA UNPAVED AREA
2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN MILLIMETERS .
275
AND ANCHOR BOLT STRUCTURAL 1" CURVED PIPE
REQUIREMENTS 50
C/L LIGHT POLE, C/L ANCHORAGE
LE
ASSEMBLY AND C/L FOUNDATION NUT & BOLT WELDED
15 15
PO
TOP VIEW
F
286 Ø POLE AT BASE
O
4-42 Ø (MIN) ANCHOR BOLTS FACTOR 1.14 WHEN EQUIPPED WITH LUMINAIRES OF THE
F
A/
WITH 3 HEAVY HEX NUTS AND WELDED POINT MAXIMUM WEIGHT PER LUMINAIRE IN ACCORDANCE WITH
F.B. 300x3mm THK
120
HARDENED WASHERS PER BOLT. ST. PLT. 2mm THK THE A.A.S.H.T.O STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR
C/L LIGHT POLE, C/L ANCHORAGE STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS FOR HIGHWAY SIGNS, LUMINARIES
ASSEMBLY AND C/L FOUNDATION 200 AND TRAFFIC SIGNALS.
ELEVATION TYPICAL 4.ALL ANCHOR BOLT SHALL BE PROPERLY SET PRIOR TO
A PLAN PLACING CONCRETE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE
THIS WITH THE LIGHTING POLE SUPPLIER.
600 x 600 x 50mm 60Ø PVC CONDUIT

BASE PLATE (ASTM-A588) FLAG POLE HOLDER DETAIL 5. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN SOIL BORINGS AT EACH
Fy (MIN) = 4300 Kg/cm 2 SCALE: NTS POLE LOCATION SHOWN ON THE PLANS. BORING LOGS
FINISH GALVANIZED TO B.S 729 TOGETHER WITH ALL APPLICABLE SHOP DRAWINGS REQUIRED
648 Ø BOLT CIRCLE BY THE SPECIFICATIONS ARE TO BE SUBMITTED TO THE
118 DIA ACCOMMODATE CONDUIT ENGINEER FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL PRIOR TO THE START
1000Ø CIDH FOUNDATION
OF CONSTRUCTION.

TOP PLAN DATA AS SPECIFIED IN ROADWAY LIGHTING STANDARD
PROPOSED BY THE CONTRACTOR. SUCH SHOP DRAWING AND
CAST ALUMINUM OR GALVANIZED
PVC OR NEOPRENE SEAL STEEL REMOVABLE ENCLOSURE
FABRICATION.
*INSTALL A FLAG POLE ARM SOCKET
ON THE LIGHT POLE SHAFT AFTER
PAVED AREA UNPAVED AREA BETWEEN TWO HALVES OF
ENCLOSURE PLATE AND
PLATE. 2 HALVES PER BASE . SIZE
TO MATCH BASE PLATE. PAINT TO
ERECTION OF POLES,AS REQUIRED MATCH POLE FINISH.
7. ALL THE ANCHOR BOLT IN UNPAVED AREA SHALL BE
C/L LIGHT POLE,C/L ANCHORAGE ALL AROUND POLE
BY THE ENGINEER ENCLOSURE PLATE COVERED BY PVC CAP AND IN PAVED AREA SHALL BE
ASSEMBLY & C/L FOUNDATION
PAVED AREA COVERED BY DECORATIVE BASE PLATE COVER.
42 Ø ANCHOR HAND HOLE

BOLTS PROVIDE BACK-UP PLATE TO ONE 8. CIDH DENOTES "CAST IN DRILLED HOLE".
WITH TAPPED HOLES TO ACCEPT 9. DEPTH OF CONDUIT FOR CABLE ENTRY SHALL BE
REMOVABLE STAINLESS STEEL
STAINLESS STEEL SCREWS
SCREWS COUNTERSUNK APPROXIMATELY 750mm OR AS DETERMINED ON SITE BY THE
BASE PLATE
COUNTERSUNK INTO OTHER
100 GROUT
100 GROUT HALF OF ENCLOSURE PLATE ENGINEER.
50 MIN
TOP OF
WALL THICKNESS - 4mm PAVEMENT TILE TOP OF CONCRETE FOUNDATION 10. PROVIDE TWO (2) FOUNDATION CONDUITS AT LOCATIONS
200
ENCLOSURE PLATE DETAILS TWO UNDERGROUND CABLES AT POLE BASE. THE
(PAVED AREA) ELECTRICAL CUTOUTS IN POLES AT THESE LOCATIONS SHALL
BE SUITABLE FOR TERMINATING TWO UNDERGROUND
SEE NOTE 6
CABLES.
POLE SHALL BE
ASTM - A595, GRADE (B) 11. ALUMINUM PLATE OF DIMENSION (120x150)mm SHOULD BE
100 Ø PVC CONDUIT 12. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE DETAILED STRUCTURAL
18000

BENDING RADIUS MINIMUM 250mm
B 13. FOUNDATION DESIGN OF LIGHT POLE SHOULD BE VERIFIED

ANCHOR BOLTS WITH 3 HEAVY HEX NUTS PARAMETERS BASED ON GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
12-20 Ø
AND HARDENED WASHERS PER BOLT. REPORT.
EQUALLY SPACED ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL CONFORM TO
ASTM-A675,GRADE 90 TOP PORTION OF ANCHOR BOLTS, 14. THE TOP OF FOUNDATION SHALL BE 150MM ABOVE
Fy (MIN) = 4920 kg/cm 2 SHALL BE GALVANISED IN ACCORDANCE FINISHED GROUND LEVEL EXCEPT FOR TILED AREA. IN
WITH ASTM-A153. TILED AREA THE TOP OF THE FOUNDATION LEVEL SHALL
90 mm CL
(TYP) BE THE SAME AS THE FINISHED TILED LEVEL.
F
- NUTS AND WASHERS SHALL BE
WALL THICKNESS - 5mm 10 Ø SPIRAL TOP OF PEDESTAL
80mm PITCH OF STAINLESS STEEL 15. LUMINAIRES TO BE AS PER ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL
E
AND SPECIFICATIONS.
BY GREASE
C
90 mm CL
(TYP)
HAND HOLE ANCHOR PLATE

2
(ASTM-A588 Fy MIN.=4300 Kg/cm )
140
B
TOP OF
ENCLOSURE
DETAIL A SECTION A-A 1 - July 2021
PLATE 0 - - -
286 Ø POLE AT BASE No. REVISIONS APP'D DATE
TOP OF
PAVEMENT ANCHOR BOLT DETAILS CLIENT
TILE
TOP OF CURB LEVEL 1000 Ø
(PAVED AREA)
(UNPAVED AREA)
150
SEE NOTE 14
500
TITLE
STANDARD DRAWINGS
4000
60 Ø PVC CONDUIT

POLE SIZE A B C D E F ANCHOR PLATE
DRAWING TITLE
LIGHTING
10 Ø SPIRAL 12-20 Ø
80mm PITCH EQUALLY SPACED
18m 1700 150 1270 280 50 330 110x110x20 18m LIGHT POLE DETAILS
ELEVATION TYPICAL DRAWN . SCALE NTS

DETAIL A SECTION B-B ANCHOR BOLT DIMENSIONS CHECKED . DATE .
APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-05
NOTES:
1. REFER TO ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL PART 1 SECTION C
PAVED AREA UNPAVED AREA 2 . ALL DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN MILLIMETERS .
275
1" CURVED PIPE 50
HOLE IN BASE PLATE TO ACCOMMODATE
LE
ACCOMMODATE CONDUIT SLEEVES NUT & BOLT WELDED
15 15
PO
C/L LIGHT POLE,C/L ANCHORAGE
F
FACTOR 1.14 WHEN EQUIPPED WITH LUMINAIRES OF THE
O
4-37 Ø (MIN) ANCHOR BOLT WITH ASSEMBLY & C/L FOUNDATION
F
MAXIMUM WEIGHT PER LUMINAIRE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
A/
3 HEX NUTS AND HARDENED WELDED POINT
F.B. 300x3mm THK
A.A.S.H.T.O STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL
120
LUMINAIRE SIZE TO MATCH POLE WASHER PER BOLT.
AND ANCHOR BOLT STRUCTURAL 425 Ø BOLT CIRCLE ST. PLT. 2 mm THK SUPPORTS FOR HIGHWAY SIGNS, LUMINARIES AND TRAFFIC
REQUIREMENTS SIGNALS.
CURB 200
TOP VIEW 4. ALL ANCHOR BOLT SHALL BE PROPERLY SET PRIOR TO

TYPICAL PLACING CONCRETE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE
118 DIA A THIS WITH THE LIGHTING POLE SUPPLIER.
ELEVATION PLAN 5. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN SOIL BORINGS AT EACH
C/L LIGHT POLE,C/L POLE LOCATION SHOWN ON THE PLANS. BORING LOGS
ANCHORAGE ASSEMBLY C/L 60 Ø PVC CONDUIT
TOGETHER WITH ALL APPLICABLE SHOP DRAWINGS REQUIRED
& C/L FOUNDATION BY THE SPECIFICATIONS ARE TO BE SUBMITTED TO THE
FLAG POLE HOLDER DETAIL ENGINEER FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL PRIOR TO THE START
ENCLOSURE PLATE SCALE: NTS
900 Ø CIDH FOUNDATION FINISH GALVANIZED TO B.S 729 OF CONSTRUCTION.
254 Ø POLE AT BASE 6. THE ANCHOR BOLT SIZE AND SPACING IS BASED UPON DESIGN
450*450*50 mm BASE PLATE
20 PREFORMED JOINT FILLER (ASTM -A588 Fy (MIN)=3600 Kg/Cm
2 DATA AS SPECIFIED IN ROADWAY LIGHTING STANDARD
*INSTALL A FLAG POLE ARM SOCKET ON THE LIGHT TOP PLAN MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER WHOSE MATERIAL IS
POLE SHAFT AFTER ERECTION OF POLES,AS
PROPOSED BY THE CONTRACTOR. SUCH SHOP DRAWING AND
REQUIRED BY THE ENGINEER
CAST ALUMINUM OR GALVANIZED DATA SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER BEFORE
PVC OR NEOPRENE SEAL STEEL REMOVABLE ENCLOSURE FABRICATION.
BETWEEN TWO HALVES OF PLATE. 2 HALVES PER BASE . SIZE
PAVED AREA UNPAVED AREA ENCLOSURE PLATE AND TO MATCH BASE PLATE. PAINT TO 7. ALL THE ANCHOR BOLT IN UNPAVED AREA SHALL BE
ALL AROUND POLE MATCH POLE FINISH. COVERED BY PVC CAP AND IN PAVED AREA SHALL BE
ENCLOSURE PLATE C/L LIGHT POLE,C/L ANCHORAGE COVERED BY DECORATIVE BASE PLATE COVER.
PAVED AREA ASSEMBLY & C/L FOUNDATION
37 Ø ANCHOR HAND HOLE PROVIDE BACK-UP PLATE TO ONE 9. DEPTH OF CONDUIT FOR CABLE ENTRY SHALL BE
WALL THICKNESS - 4mm BOLTS HALF OF ENCLOSURE PLATE APPROXIMATELY 750mm OR AS DETERMINED ON SITE BY THE
WITH TAPPED HOLES TO ACCEPT ENGINEER.
254 Ø POLE AT BASE REMOVABLE STAINLESS STEEL
STAINLESS STEEL SCREWS
SCREWS COUNTERSUNK
COUNTERSUNK INTO OTHER 10. PROVIDE TWO (2) FOUNDATION CONDUITS AT LOCATIONS
BASE PLATE
POLE SHALL BE HALF OF ENCLOSURE PLATE WHERE THE LIGHTING PLAN INDICATES THE TERMINATION OF
100 GROUT
50 MIN
ASTM - A595, GRADE B 100 GROUT TWO UNDERGROUND CABLES AT POLE BASE. THE
TOP OF ELECTRICAL CUTOUTS IN POLES AT THESE LOCATIONS SHALL
PAVEMENT TILE TOP OF CONCRETE FOUNDATION
BE SUITABLE FOR TERMINATING UP TO THREE UNDERGROUND
200 CABLES.
ENCLOSURE PLATE DETAILS
14000
(PAVED AREA)
SEE NOTE 6


100 Ø PVC CONDUIT
PARAMETERS BASED ON GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
BENDING RADIUS MINIMUM 250mm
REPORT.
B ANCHOR BOLTS WITH 3 HEAVY HEX NUTS 14. THE TOP OF FOUNDATION SHALL BE 150mm ABOVE
AND HARDENED WASHERS PER BOLT. FINISHED GROUND LEVEL EXCEPT FOR TILED AREA. IN
12-18 Ø ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL CONFORM TO TILED AREA THE TOP OF THE FOUNDATION LEVEL SHALL
EQUALLY SPACED ASTM-A675,GRADE 90
Fy (MIN) = 3867 kg/cm
2 BE THE SAME AS THE FINISHED TILED LEVEL
TOP PORTION OF ANCHOR BOLTS, 15. LUMINAIRES TO BE AS PER ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL
SHALL BE GALVANISED IN ACCORDANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS.
90 CL WITH ASTM-A153.
(TYP)
F
10 Ø SPIRAL - NUTS AND WASHERS SHALL BE
80mm PITCH TOP OF PEDESTAL
OF STAINLESS STEEL
E
HAND HOLE
BY GREASE
A
TOP OF
C
ENCLOSURE
DETAIL A
PLATE
140
254 Ø POLE AT BASE
1 - - July 2021
90 CL
(TYP)
TOP OF ANCHOR PLATE

PAVEMENT
TILE
SECTION A-A 2
(ASTM-A588 Fy MIN.=3600 Kg/cm ) 0 - - -
TOP OF CURB LEVEL
B
(PAVED AREA)
(UNPAVED AREA) No. REVISIONS APP'D DATE
CLIENT
150
900 Ø
SEE NOTE 14
ANCHOR BOLT DETAILS

500
3000
60 Ø PVC CONDUIT
TITLE
STANDARD DRAWINGS
DRAWING TITLE
LIGHTING
14.0m 1270 180 870 220 50 270 100x100x20 14m LIGHT POLE DETAILS
TYPICAL
ELEVATION DETAIL A SECTION B-B ANCHOR BOLT DIMENSIONS DRAWN . SCALE NTS
CHECKED . DATE .
APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-06
NOTES:
275
1" CURVED PIPE 50 FOR LIGHT POLE SPECIFICATION.
PAVED AREA UNPAVED AREA
LE
NUT & BOLT WELDED 2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN MILLIMETERS .
15 15
PO
F
O
LUMINAIRE SIZE TO MATCH POLE HOLE IN BASE PLATE TO ACCOMMODATE C/L LIGHT POLE,C/L ANCHORAGE 3. LIGHT POLE FOUNDATIONS ARE DESIGNED FOR A WIND
F
A/
AND ANCHOR BOLT STRUCTURAL CONDUIT SLEEVES ASSEMBLY & C/L FOUNDATION WELDED POINT
F.B. 300x3mm THK VELOCITY OF 160 KILOMETERS PER HOUR AND GUST FACTOR
120
REQUIREMENTS ST. PLT. 2 mm THK 1.14 WITH LUMINAIRES AS PER APPROVED DESIGN AND
4-32 Ø (MIN) ANCHOR BOLT WITH 425 Ø BOLT CIRCLE 200 IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE A.A.S.H.T.O STANDARD
3 HEX NUTS AND HARDENED TYPICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS FOR HIGHWAY
TOP VIEW WASHER PER BOLT.
ELEVATION PLAN SIGNS, LUMINARIES AND TRAFFIC SIGNALS
CURB
4. ALL ANCHOR BOLT SHALL BE PROPERLY SET PRIOR TO
FLAG POLE HOLDER DETAIL THIS WITH THE LIGHTING POLE SUPPLIER.
SCALE: NTS
FINISH GALVANIZED TO B.S 729
C/L LIGHT POLE,C/L ANCHORAGE POLE LOCATION SHOWN ON THE PLANS. BORING LOGS
118 DIA C/L 60 Ø PVC CONDUIT
ASSEMBLY & C/L FOUNDATION TOGETHER WITH ALL APPLICABLE SHOP DRAWINGS REQUIRED
ENCLOSURE PLATE
700 Ø CIDH FOUNDATION OF CONSTRUCTION.
241 Ø POLE AT BASE
410*410*30 mm BASE PLATE DATA AS SPECIFIED IN ROADWAY LIGHTING STANDARD
20 PREFORMED JOINT FILLER 2
(ASTM -A588 Fy (MIN)=3600 Kg/Cm
CAST ALUMINUM OR GALVANIZED MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER WHOSE MATERIAL IS
TOP PLAN PVC OR NEOPRENE SEAL STEEL REMOVABLE ENCLOSURE PROPOSED BY THE CONTRACTOR. SUCH SHOP DRAWING AND
BETWEEN TWO HALVES OF PLATE. 2 HALVES PER BASE . SIZE DATA SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER BEFORE
ENCLOSURE PLATE AND
ALL AROUND POLE
MATCH POLE FINISH.
FABRICATION.
ERECTION OF POLES,AS 7. ALL THE ANCHOR BOLT IN UNPAVED AREA SHALL BE

REQUIRED BY THE ENGINEER COVERED BY PVC CAP AND IN PAVED AREA SHALL BE
PAVED AREA UNPAVED AREA COVERED BY DECORATIVE BASE PLATE COVER.
ENCLOSURE PLATE C/L LIGHT POLE,C/L ANCHORAGE PROVIDE BACK-UP PLATE TO ONE
PAVED AREA ASSEMBLY & C/L FOUNDATION HALF OF ENCLOSURE PLATE 8. CIDH DENOTES "CAST IN DRILLED HOLE".
WITH TAPPED HOLES TO ACCEPT
STAINLESS STEEL SCREWS 9. DEPTH OF CONDUIT FOR CABLE ENTRY SHALL BE
32 Ø ANCHOR HAND HOLE SCREWS COUNTERSUNK
COUNTERSUNK INTO OTHER APPROXIMATELY 750mm OR AS DETERMINED ON SITE BY THE
BOLTS
241 Ø POLE AT BASE
BASE PLATE
100 GROUT

100 GROUT
30 MIN

TOP OF TOP OF CONCRETE FOUNDATION ELECTRICAL CUTOUTS IN POLES AT THESE LOCATIONS SHALL
(PAVED AREA)
200
PAVEMENT TILE BE SUITABLE FOR TERMINATING UP TO THREE UNDERGROUND

POLE SHALL BE CABLES.
ASTM - A595, GRADE B
11 ALUMINUM PLATE OF DIMENSION (120x150)mm SHOULD BE
SEE NOTE 6
10000

100 Ø PVC CONDUIT 13. FOUNDATION DESIGN OF LIGHT POLE SHOULD BE VERIFIED
BENDING RADIUS MINIMUM 250mm PARAMETERS BASED ON GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
REPORT.
B ANCHOR BOLTS WITH 3 HEAVY HEX
NUTS AND HARDENED WASHERS PER
BOLT. ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL FINISHED GROUND LEVEL EXCEPT FOR TILED AREA. IN
12-16 Ø
CONFORM TO ASTM- A 675,GRADE 90 TILED AREA THE TOP OF THE FOUNDATION LEVEL SHALL
EQUALLY SPACED 2 BE THE SAME AS THE FINISHED TILED LEVEL
TOP PORTION OF ANCHOR BOLTS,
AND SPECIFICATIONS.
WITH ASTM-A153.
90 mm CL
(TYP)
F
TOP OF PEDESTAL
80mm PITCH OF STAINLESS STEEL
E
BY GREASE
HAND HOLE
C
90 mm CL
(TYP)
TOP OF DETAIL A - July 2021

ENCLOSURE 1 -
PLATE
ANCHOR PLATE 0 - - -
241 Ø POLE AT BASE 2
TOP OF (ASTM-A588 Fy MIN.=3600 Kg/cm ) No. REVISIONS APP'D DATE
PAVEMENT SECTION A-A
B
140
TILE CLIENT
(UNPAVED AREA)
150
SEE NOTE 14
700 Ø
2500
60 Ø PVC CONDUIT STANDARD DRAWINGS

500

DRAWING TITLE
LIGHTING
A POLE SIZE A B C D E F ANCHOR PLATE
10m LIGHT POLE DETAILS
10.0m 980 150 650 180 50 230 60x60x20
DRAWN . SCALE NTS
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-07
NOTES:
275
1" CURVED PIPE 50 FOR LIGHT POLE SPECIFICATION.
LE
NUT & BOLT WELDED 2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN MILLIMETERS .
15 15
PO
F
O
LUMINAIRE SIZE TO MATCH POLE HOLE IN BASE PLATE TO ACCOMMODATE C/L LIGHT POLE,C/L ANCHORAGE 3. LIGHT POLE FOUNDATIONS ARE DESIGNED FOR A WIND
F
A/
AND ANCHOR BOLT STRUCTURAL CONDUIT SLEEVES ASSEMBLY & C/L FOUNDATION WELDED POINT
F.B. 300x3mm THK VELOCITY OF 160 KILOMETERS PER HOUR AND GUST FACTOR
120
REQUIREMENTS ST. PLT. 2 mm THK 1.14 WITH LUMINAIRES AS PER APPROVED DESIGN AND
4-32 Ø (MIN) ANCHOR BOLT WITH 425 Ø BOLT CIRCLE 200 IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE A.A.S.H.T.O STANDARD
3 HEX NUTS AND HARDENED TYPICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS FOR HIGHWAY
TOP VIEW WASHER PER BOLT.
ELEVATION PLAN SIGNS, LUMINARIES AND TRAFFIC SIGNALS
CURB
FLAG POLE HOLDER DETAIL THIS WITH THE LIGHTING POLE SUPPLIER.
SCALE: NTS
FINISH GALVANIZED TO B.S 729
C/L LIGHT POLE,C/L ANCHORAGE POLE LOCATION SHOWN ON THE PLANS. BORING LOGS
118 DIA C/L 60 Ø PVC CONDUIT
ASSEMBLY & C/L FOUNDATION TOGETHER WITH ALL APPLICABLE SHOP DRAWINGS REQUIRED
ENCLOSURE PLATE
700 Ø CIDH FOUNDATION OF CONSTRUCTION.
241 Ø POLE AT BASE
410*410*30 mm BASE PLATE DATA AS SPECIFIED IN ROADWAY LIGHTING STANDARD
20 PREFORMED JOINT FILLER 2
(ASTM -A588 Fy (MIN)=3600 Kg/Cm
CAST ALUMINUM OR GALVANIZED MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER WHOSE MATERIAL IS
TOP PLAN PVC OR NEOPRENE SEAL STEEL REMOVABLE ENCLOSURE PROPOSED BY THE CONTRACTOR. SUCH SHOP DRAWING AND
BETWEEN TWO HALVES OF PLATE. 2 HALVES PER BASE . SIZE DATA SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER BEFORE
ENCLOSURE PLATE AND
ALL AROUND POLE
MATCH POLE FINISH.
FABRICATION.
ERECTION OF POLES,AS 7. ALL THE ANCHOR BOLT IN UNPAVED AREA SHALL BE

REQUIRED BY THE ENGINEER COVERED BY PVC CAP AND IN PAVED AREA SHALL BE
PAVED AREA UNPAVED AREA COVERED BY DECORATIVE BASE PLATE COVER.
ENCLOSURE PLATE C/L LIGHT POLE,C/L ANCHORAGE PROVIDE BACK-UP PLATE TO ONE
PAVED AREA ASSEMBLY & C/L FOUNDATION HALF OF ENCLOSURE PLATE 8. CIDH DENOTES "CAST IN DRILLED HOLE".
WITH TAPPED HOLES TO ACCEPT
STAINLESS STEEL SCREWS 9. DEPTH OF CONDUIT FOR CABLE ENTRY SHALL BE
32 Ø ANCHOR HAND HOLE SCREWS COUNTERSUNK
COUNTERSUNK INTO OTHER APPROXIMATELY 750mm OR AS DETERMINED ON SITE BY THE
BOLTS
241 Ø POLE AT BASE
BASE PLATE
100 GROUT

100 GROUT
30 MIN

TOP OF TOP OF CONCRETE FOUNDATION ELECTRICAL CUTOUTS IN POLES AT THESE LOCATIONS SHALL
(PAVED AREA)
200
PAVEMENT TILE BE SUITABLE FOR TERMINATING UP TO THREE UNDERGROUND

POLE SHALL BE CABLES.
ASTM - A595, GRADE B
11 ALUMINUM PLATE OF DIMENSION (120x150)mm SHOULD BE
SEE NOTE 6
8000

100 Ø PVC CONDUIT 13. FOUNDATION DESIGN OF LIGHT POLE SHOULD BE VERIFIED
BENDING RADIUS MINIMUM 250mm PARAMETERS BASED ON GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
REPORT.
B ANCHOR BOLTS WITH 3 HEAVY HEX
NUTS AND HARDENED WASHERS PER
BOLT. ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL FINISHED GROUND LEVEL EXCEPT FOR TILED AREA. IN
12-16 Ø
CONFORM TO ASTM- A 675,GRADE 90 TILED AREA THE TOP OF THE FOUNDATION LEVEL SHALL
EQUALLY SPACED 2 BE THE SAME AS THE FINISHED TILED LEVEL
AND SPECIFICATIONS.
WITH ASTM-A153.
90 mm CL
(TYP)
F
TOP OF PEDESTAL
80mm PITCH OF STAINLESS STEEL
E
BY GREASE
HAND HOLE
C
90 mm CL
(TYP)
TOP OF DETAIL A - July 2021

ENCLOSURE 1 -
PLATE
ANCHOR PLATE 0 - - -
241 Ø POLE AT BASE 2
TOP OF (ASTM-A588 Fy MIN.=3600 Kg/cm ) No. REVISIONS APP'D DATE
PAVEMENT SECTION A-A
B
140
TILE CLIENT
(UNPAVED AREA)
150
SEE NOTE 14
700 Ø
2500
60 Ø PVC CONDUIT STANDARD DRAWINGS

500

DRAWING TITLE
LIGHTING
A POLE SIZE A B C D E F ANCHOR PLATE
8m LIGHT POLE DETAILS
8.0m 980 150 650 180 50 230 60x60x20
DRAWN . SCALE NTS
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-08
NOTES:
200
DOOR REINFORCEMENT
Ø25 Hole IN 1. REFER TO ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL PART 1 SECTION C
20mm THK. R=18 SQ.BAR 30x30x1000
Ø16mmS.S THREADED BOTTOM SEGMENT FOR LIGHT POLE SPECIFICATION.
ROD L=450mm G
CUTOUT SUPPORT R 2. THIS HINGED POLE IS DESIGNED TO CARRY TWO, FOUR, SIX
WITH 6NO.S.S NUTS
LOCK PLATE
(20x5x300mm STEEL STRIP)
100
36
OR EIGHT LUMINAIRES EACH WEIGHT IS MAX 24KG,
250
AND 4NO.S.S.WASHERS
SLOT 150x34
Ø18 CALCULATIONS SHALL BE SUBMITTED AND AGREED BY THE
HOLE ENGINEER IF THE LUMINAIRE WEIGHT IS CHANGED.
40 DOOR BOLT M10
JACKET
COVER CAP
800
150
400
1000
120
5MM THK. 3. AS COUNTER WEIGHT IS DEPENDENT ON THE NUMBER OF
60
UPPER PLATE DETAIL LOCK DETAIL
SPECIAL NUT WITH FLAT BAR 20x3mm R LUMINAIRES ,THE MANUFACTURER SHALL SUBMIT MECHANICAL
SCALE: NTS
PUSH BACK SPRING. FOR WEATHER PROOFING
900
STRESS CALCULATIONS SUBJECT TO THE NUMBER OF
100
150
5M
20
A/F = 120mm 20mm THK. R=18 Ø6mm TAPPED HOLE Rod Ø12mm LUMINAIRES ON THE POLE.
M
200
55
55
100
90 CHAIN SUPPORT Ø6MM 4. COUNTER WEIGHT TO BE RUBBER LAMINATED.
8 No. M12 FLAT BAR 20x5 BOTTOM SEGMENT CLAMP.
DOOR COVER
36
Nuts Ø18 S.S EARTH LUG WITH 1HOLE 1 5. ROPE USED SHALL BE Ø16mm MARINE TYPE.
NUT.
HOLE BOLT,2 NUTS 2 WASHERS M8 TYPICAL
44 TYPICAL 6. ALL BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS ARE S.S. GRADE316L.
SECTION B-B JACKET DETAILS SECTION G-G
DETAIL-G
LOWER PLATE DETAIL 7. DEPTH OF CONDUIT FOR CABLE ENTRY SHALL BE
8000
SCALE: NTS Ø14HOLE TO SUIT M10 APPROXIMATELY 750mm OR AS DETERMINED ON SITE BY THE
JACKET
WALL THICKNESS-4mm ALLEN KEY HEAD ENGINEER.
B B NUT SLEEVE
WOODEN BACK BOARD WELDED STRIP 300X5MM.
100
20mm THK. R=18 (SEE DETAIL) 91.7 8. PROVIDE TWO (2) FOUNDATION CONDUITS AT LOCATIONS
SUPPORT 200X600X18 WHERE THE LIGHTING PLAN INDICATES THE TERMINATION OF
MARINE TYPE
.7
91
F F UP TO THREE UNDERGROUND CABLES AT POLE BASE. THE
91
BOLT RETANING
.7
M8 SCREW. BOLT M24X65 COVER CAP ELECTRICAL CUTOUTS IN POLES AT THESE LOCATIONS SHALL
36
STRIP
A/F = 191mm Ø18 STRIP FOR CHAIN SUPPORT. BE SUITABLE FOR TERMINATING UP TO THREE UNDERGROUND
110
110
HOLE EARTH LUG S.S.PREVAILING CABLES.
750
40 CHAIN SUPPORT DOOR REINFORCEMENT A/F=468

A/F = 210mm
750 TORQUE WITH METAL
STAINLESS STEEL SQ BAR 30x 30x1000mm LG.
20
INSERT NUT M24. PLATE 30X30X10 9. HOT DIP GALVANIZING IS ACCORDING TO BS 729 WITH
Ø16mmS.S UPPER PLATE DETAIL CHAIN 650mm LONG SEE DETAIL B FLAT BAR 20x 3mm FOR BOTTOM SPACER AVERAGE COATING THICKNESS OF 100 MICRONS.
ROD L=450mm SCALE: NTS
100
WHEATHERPROOFING SEGMENT
WITH 6NO. S.S DOOR OPENING 10. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE DETAILED STRUCTURAL
198 FOR ROPE FIXING
20mm THK. R=18 LOCATING LUG CALCULATION AND DRAWINGS FOR ENGINEER'S APPROVAL.
NUTS AND 4NO. SEE DETAIL Y
S.S. WASHERS TYPICAL TYPICAL
16650
DOOR COVER DETAILS SECTION A-A VIEW R-R JACKET BOTTOM 11. FOUNDATION DESIGN OF LIGHT POLE SHOULD BE VERIFIED
36
SCALE: NTS
Ø18 PARAMETERS BASED ON GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION

BOTTOM SEGMENT REPORT.FOUNDATION DESIGNED FOR 160KM/HR WITH GUST
HOLE 7mm Thk.
44 FACTOR 1.14
Ø16mmS.S THREADED 11mm Gap. 11mm Gap.
Ø12mm ROAD
SQ. BAR 64 12. ALUMINUM PLATE OF DIMENSION (120x150)mm SHOULD BE
ROD L=450mm LOWER PLATE DETAIL JACKET Spacer
64
8900
WITH 6NO.S.S NUTS SCALE: NTS COVER CAP 30x30x1000 30x30x10mm FIXED FROM THE FACTORY PREMISES FOR POLE NUMBERING.
64
7mm Thk.
AND 4NO.S.S.WASHERS COVER CAP NUT M24
65 SILICON GASKET STAINLESS STEEL NUT SLEEVE. 13. ALL THE ANCHOR BOLT IN UNPAVED AREA SHALL BE
360
220
220
(12x4mm) FLAT BAR 20x3 Ø70X7MM WELDED COVERED BY PVC CAP AND IN PAVED AREA SHALL BE
DETAIL-R WASHER FABRICATED ON BOTTOM SHAFT. A/F=329 COVERED BY DECORATIVE BASE PLATE COVER.
30X4MM, LENGTH = 500 MM
SCALE: NTS 7mm Thk.

BRASS EARTHING STRAP
Bolt M24x65 (SPACER)

WALL THICKNESS-5mm
TYPICAL TYPICAL FINISHED GROUND LEVEL EXCEPT FOR TILED AREA. IN
TILED AREA THE TOP OF THE FOUNDATION LEVEL SHALL
(COUNTER WEIGHT DETAIL`B' SECTION F-F JACKET TOP BE THE SAME AS THE FINISHED TILED LEVEL.
SCALE: NTS SCALE: NTS
~ TO BE RUBBER LAMINATED) 15.LUMINAIRES TO BE AS PER ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL
SEE DETAIL-R
30500
Ø12mm ROD AND SPECIFICATIONS.

4 WASHERS
6
A/F=267 M52,S.STEEL. COUNTER WEIGHT
20 20 8MM THK. 16. ALL ANCHOR BOLT SHALL BE PROPERLY SET PRIOR TO
600
30 30 30 PLACING CONCRETE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL

A/F=285 6mm S.S PIN
TOP SHAFT COORDINATE THIS WITH THE LIGHTING POLE SUPPLIER.
500
220
A/F= 280 A/F=329 JACKET 390 DETAIL Y

BOTTOM SCALE: NTS
SHAFT 6mm S.S SPINDLE

A/F= 290 WALLTHK. Qty = 1 Ø =50mm
SEE HINGE DETAIL
JACKET WALL THICKNESS-7

Ø8 mm STRAP CLAMP. SENDING
TAPPED HOLE 12mm WELD
CHORD BACK PULLY
BOTTOM SHAFT BRASS EARTHING
11
STRAP 30X4MM LOCK

LENGTH=500MM Top shaft
(SILVER COLOR.)
100
20
PLATE-"C" (SEE DETAIL) 7mm WELD
10
CHORD ROPE WITH LOCK
25
TO CARRY CABLE
2
WITH TO STOP LOWERING
4GLANDS 3 CORE 4mm BASE PLATE &
BOTTOM WALL THICKNESS-7
SHAFT WELDING
13850
CABLE GLAND BACK PULLY DETAIL

13630
DEFLECTION SCALE: NTS
PLATE 5mm Thk. No. REVISIONS DATE

APP'D
BOTTOM DEFLECTION 34
TYPICAL JACKET CLIENT
DOOR OPENING PLATE 5mm Thk. 4 x Ø 52
100
SEE DETAIL-G ELEVATION 1 CABLE SUSPENSION ANCHOR BOLTS

8MM BOLT. HOOK 8MM DIA.
CABLE( BY OTHERS) Bottom shaft
S.S. Bolt
M24x65 STAINLESS STEEL ROPE.
140
TITLE
LOCKING BOLT GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS
CLAMP Ø12mm 50 50 Ø25
STANDARD DRAWINGS
706 SQ
Ø14 Rod SCALE: NTS
7mmThk.
35
JACKET A/F= 468 4mmThk.

50
30
DRAWING TITLE
120
800
Ø10mm
LIGHTING
1100
140
Ø70
44
Ø25 HOLE WITH
80
30.5m MID HINGED LIGHT POLE DETAILS

500
PLASTIC CABLE
100
10
A/F=444mm GLAND FOR 300 Ø620 mm
50
STAINLESS STEEL HOCK Ø16 CABLE. 60mm THK.

BASE PLATE TO FIX INTO THE CLAMP.
706X706X60 TYPICAL DRAWN . SCALE NTS
PLATE-"C" DETAIL %%UPL 300X80X4MM %%UQTY=1 NO BASE PLATE DETAIL FABRICATED WASHER
CHECKED . DATE .
30.5m POLE ELEVATION HINGE DETAIL TO PREVENT INGRESS OF WATER & SAND
SCALE: NTS APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-09
NOTES:
50mm THK. 4 x Ø 42
ANCHOR BOLTS
1. REFER TTO ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL PART1 SECTION C
JACKET
20mm THK. R=18 DOOR REINFORCEMENT FOR LIGHT POLE SPECIFICATION.
Ø16mmS.S THREADED SQ.BAR 30x30x1000 G
ROD L=450mm Ø25 Hole IN 2. THIS HINGED POLE IS DESIGNED TO CARRY TWO, FOUR, SIX
WITH 6NO.S.S NUTS FUSE BOX SUPPORT R BOTTOM SEGMENT OR EIGHT LUMINAIRES EACH WEIGHT IS MAX 24KG,
36
AND 4NO.S.S.WASHERS Ø18 (20x5x300mm STEEL STRIP) CALCULATIONS SHALL BE SUBMITTED AND AGREED BY THE
100
ENGINEER IF THE LUMINAIRE WEIGHT IS CHANGED.
150
600 SQ
HOLE
40
LOCK DETAIL 3. AS COUNTER WEIGHT IS DEPENDING ON THE NUMBER OF
SLOT 140x34
JACKET
LUMINAIRES,THE MANUFACTURER SHALL SUBMIT
800
UPPER PLATE DETAIL
600
LOCK PLATE
A
300
A
140
MECHANICAL STRESS CALCULATIONS SUBJECTED TO THE
120
SCALE: NTS
900
FLAT BAR 20x3mm FOR
60
NUMBER OF LUMINAIRES ON THE POLE.
20
20mm THK. R=18 WEATHER PROOFING R Ø6MM
150
Ø6mm TAPPED HOLE 4. COUNTER WEIGHT TO BE RUBBER LAMINATED.
100
CLAMP.
TYPICAL BOTTOM
36
SEGMENT Rod Ø12mm NUT. 5. ROPE USED SHALL BE Ø16mm MARINE TYPE.
Ø18 BASE PLATE DETAIL CHAIN SUPPORT.
HOLE SCALE: NTS
S.S EARTH LUG WITH SECTION G-G 6. ALL BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS ARE S.S. GRADE316L.
44 1HOLE 1 BOLT,2 TYPICAL 7. DEPTH OF CONDUIT FOR CABLE ENTRY SHALL BE
NUTS 2 WASHERS M8
LOWER PLATE DETAIL DETAIL-G JACKET DETAILS APPROXIMATELY 750mm OR AS DETERMINED ON SITE BY THE
SCALE: NTS
B B ENGINEER.
11mm Gap 11mm Gap
WOODEN BACK BOARD JACKET SPACER 8. PROVIDE TWO (2) FOUNDATION CONDUITS AT LOCATIONS
100
SUPPORT180x600x18 6mm Thk.
20mm THK. R=18 WELDED STRIP 20x20x7mm WHERE THE LIGHTING PLAN INDICATES THE TERMINATION OF
MARINE TYPE NUT M24
BOLT RETANING STRIP 20x5x200mm. JACKET NUT SLEEVE. UP TO THREE UNDERGROUND CABLES AT POLE BASE. THE
Ø14HOLE TO SUIT Ø70X7MM WELDED ELECTRICAL CUTOUTS IN POLES AT THESE LOCATIONS SHALL
WASHER
36
M10 ALLEN KEY HEAD STRIP FOR FLAT BAR 20x 3mm BE SUITABLE FOR TERMINATING UP TO THREE
Ø18 M8 SCREW FABRICATED ON BOTTOM SHAFT.
EARTH LUG FOR WEATHER (SPACER) UNDERGROUND CABLES.
HOLE PROOFING 7mm Thk.
40
CHAIN SUPPORT
BOLT M24x65
9. HOT DIP GALVANIZING IS ACCORDING TO BS 729 WITH
750
F SPECIAL F
20
CHAIN SUPPORT. DOOR BOLT AVERAGE COATING THICKNESS OF 100 MICRONS.

100
UPPER PLATE DETAIL NUT M24 TYPICAL

A/F = 103mm STAINLESS STEEL
REINFORCEMENT M24X65
SCALE: NTS SECTION F-F
100
8Nos. M12 CHAIN 650mm LONG NUT SLEEVE

300
SCALE: NTS
NUTS (SEE DETAIL) 10. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE DETAILED STRUCTURAL
20mm THK. R=18 LOCATING LUG SQ BAR 20x 20x800mm LG. CALCULATION AND DRAWINGS FOR ENGINEER'S APPROVAL.
198
SEE DETAIL B
DOOR OPENING 166.5
COVER CAP
16
TYPICAL
6.
BOTTOM
36
6.
16
DOOR COVER DETAILS
5
WALL THICKNESS-4MM Ø18 SECTION A-A SEGMENT A/F=396 PARAMETERS BASED ON GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
Ø12mm ROD FOR
111.25
111.25
HOLE (INSIDE) REPORT.FOUNDATION DESIGNED FOR 160KM/HR WITH GUST
44 DOOR BOLT ROPE FIXING A/F=408 FACTOR OF 1.14.
Ø16mmS.S THREADED COVER CAP SQ. BAR 20x20x800 SEE DETAIL Y
M10x40 (OUTSIDE)
ROD L=450mm LOWER PLATE DETAIL 12. ALUMINUM PLATE OF DIMENSION (120x150)mm SHOULD BE
SCALE: NTS NYLOCK NUT. 5mm THK. PLATE 30x30x10 FIXED FROM THE FACTORY PREMISES FOR POLE NUMBERING.
WITH 6NO.S.S NUTS SILICON GASKET STAINLESS STEEL
AND 4NO.S.S.WASHERS (12x4mm) FLAT BAR 20x3 SPACER
VIEW R-R 13. ALL THE ANCHOR BOLT IN UNPAVED AREA SHALL BE
30 TYPICAL COVERED BY PVC CAP AND IN PAVED AREA SHALL BE
30
5M
DETAIL-R JACKET BOTTOM
6
FLAT BAR 20x5 160
Ø12mm ROD COVERED BY DECORATIVE BASE PLATE COVER.
M
SCALE: NTS
SCALE: NTS DETAIL`B'
8,500
30 30 30
14. THE TOP OF FOUNDATION SHALL BE 150mm ABOVE FROM
SECTION B-B FINISHED GROUND LEVEL EXCEPT FOR TILED AREA IN
30X4MM, LENGTH = 400 MM
113.5
DETAIL Y 11 TILED AREA THE TOP OF THE FOUNDATION LEVEL SHALL
BRASS EARTHING STRAP
3.
5
3.
SCALE: NTS 5 BE THE SAME AS THE FINISHED TILED LEVEL
11
A/F=268 15.LUMINAIRES TO BE AS PER ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL
190.75
190.75
STRAP CLAMP. (INSIDE)
Ø8 mm TAPPED HOLE AND SPECIFICATIONS.
A/F=280
Ø12mm ROAD Qty = 1 (OUTSIDE) 16. ALL ANCHOR BOLT SHALL BE PROPERLY SET PRIOR TO
(TYP) thk. = 25mm PLACING CONCRETE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL
BRASS EARTHING TOP SHAFT 10MM DIA. COORDINATE THIS WITH THE LIGHTING POLE SUPPLIER.
100
STRAP 30X4MM TYPICAL
LENGTH=400MM JACKET TOP
SEE DETAIL-R Ø100 (SILVER COLOR.) SCALE: NTS
10
290
A/F=232 D.SHACKLE
25
650
20,000
Cable D.SHACKLE DETAIL

1000
Gland
A/F=248 COUNTER WEIGHT
DEFLECTION
TOP SHAFT
350
350
(COUNTER WEIGHT PLATE 4mm Thk. (17.678 Kg)

A/F= 244 10mm
A/F=280 JACKET WELD CHORD
~
~ TO BE RUBBER LAMINATED)
170
WALL THICKNESS-6mm
BOTTOM 2Ø10HOLES FOR JACKET
2M8x30 BOLTS.
100
SHAFT
20
A/F= 246 SEE HINGE DETAIL CABLE SUSPENSION 6mm
HOOK 8MM DIA.
WELD CHORD
8MM BOLT.
7
Jacket BOTTOM SHAFT

Bottom Shaft BASE PLATE &
7 CABLE( BY OTHERS)
722x11190X6mm SHAFT WELDING
SENDING
DOOR OPENING BACK PULLY
SEE DETAIL-G
Plate-"C" (See Detail)
To Carry Cable with LOCK
S.S Spindle Ø40mm BOTTOM No. REVISIONS APP'D DATE
4Glands 3 core 4mm2
11,380
SHAFT WALL S.S. Bolt 15 Qty = 1 15

M24x65 LOCKING BOLT CLIENT
20
THICKNESS-
6mm Ø14 Rod Ø10 mm Hole
3
CLAMP Ø12mm ROPE. for 8mm S.S Pin 3 30
3 ROPE WITH LOCK
37 TO STOP LOWERING
120
30
Deflection Plate 4mm Thk. 300 TOP VIEW. BACK PULLY DETAIL TITLE
SCALE: NTS
44 Bottom 2 WASHERS M40,
600
STAINLESS STEEL S.STEEL, 6MM THK

STANDARD DRAWINGS
950
HOCK TO FIX INTO

THE CLAMP. 20
3 DRAWING TITLE
450
400
A/F=444mm Ø25
LIGHTING
40
30
BASE PLATE 7mmThk. 20.0m MID-HINGED LIGHT POLE DETAILS
PG 16 GLAND 3MM THK.
700X700X50 PLATE "C"
55
PLASTIC 43 TO STOP NUT

MOVEMENT.
268 Ø70 DRAWN . SCALE NTS
TYPICAL SIDE VIEW. FRONT VIEW.
CHECKED . DATE .
20m POLE ELEVATION DETAIL OF CABLE GLAND Pl 250x50x4mm Qty = 1 No.
SCALE: NTS
NUT SLEEVE DETAIL FABRICATED WASHER APPROVED . SIZE A1
To Prevent Ingress of Water & Sand SCALE: NTS
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-10
NOTES:
20mm THK.
2. THIS HINGED POLE IS DESIGNED TO CARRY TWO, FOUR, SIX
E
H OL 11.5 OR EIGHT LUMINAIRES EACH WEIGHT IS MAX 24KG,
Ø18 CALCULATIONS SHALL BE SUBMITTED AND AGREED BY THE
100 ENGINEER IF THE LUMINAIRE WEIGHT IS CHANGED.
40
36
3. AS COUNTER WEIGHT IS DEPENDENT ON THE NUMBER OF
M20 Nut LUMINAIRES ,THE MANUFACTURER SHALL SUBMIT MECHANICAL
STRESS CALCULATIONS SUBJECTED TO THE NUMBER OF
Fabricated Washer
Spacer LUMINAIRES ON THE POLE.
Welded on Shaft
40 30x30x10mm 6mm THK.
4. COUNTER WEIGHT TO BE RUBBER LAMINATED.
100
180
TOP A/F=103 Nut Sleeve
5. ROPE USED SHALL BE Ø16mm MARINE TYPE.
650
UPPER PLATE DETAIL Fabricated Washer
20
8Nos. M10 NUTS SCALE: NTS M20x50mm Bolt 6mm THK. 6. ALL BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS ARE S.S. GRADE316L.
300
40
TYPICAL 7. DEPTH OF CONDUIT FOR CABLE ENTRY SHALL BE
JACKET BOTTOM APPROXIMATELY 750mm OR AS DETERMINED ON SITE BY THE
150
Ø12 ROD SCALE: NTS
20mm THK. 8. PROVIDE TWO (2) FOUNDATION CONDUITS AT LOCATIONS
O LE WHERE THE LIGHTING PLAN INDICATES THE TERMINATION OF
8H UP TO THREE UNDERGROUND CABLES AT POLE BASE. THE
WALL THICKNESS-3MM Ø1 237
100
12
100
223 BE SUITABLE FOR TERMINATING UP TO THREE UNDERGROUND
CABLES.
36
4196
(COUNTER WEIGHT AVERAGE COATING THICKNESS OF 100 MICRONS.

Ø16mm S.S. THREADED ROD
TO BE RUBBER LAMINATED) 10. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE DETAILED STRUCTURAL
8550
400mm LENGTH WITH 6Nos.
157
157
SCALE: NTS CALCULATION AND DRAWINGS FOR ENGINEER'S APPROVAL.
S.S. NUTS & 4Nos. S.S. WASHERS 44

LOWER PLATE DETAIL BY THE PROJECT CONSULTANT AS PER ACTUAL SOIL
SCALE: NTS PARAMETERS BASED ON GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
95
3
Jacket REPORT.FOUNDATION DESIGNED FOR 160KM/HR WITH GUST
.3
.
33
95
A/F=185 Ø22 Hole in 95.33 FACTOR 1.14
24 Bolt M20x50 12. ALUMINUM PLATE OF DIMENSION (120x150)mm SHOULD BE
Bottom Segment
TYPICAL FIXED FROM THE FACTORY PREMISES FOR POLE NUMBERING.
Lock Plate
JACKET TOP
550
650
120
(SEE DETAIL) Lock Plate 6mm Thk. Ø10 Hole 13. ALL THE ANCHOR BOLT IN UNPAVED AREA SHALL BE
90
SCALE: NTS
150

40
(SEE DETAIL)
1100

A/F=198
550
Ø12mm ROD
450
Ø12mm Rod 14. THE TOP OF FOUNDATION SHALL BE 150mm ABOVE
20
A/F=198
(SEE DETAIL) FINISHED GROUND LEVEL EXCEPT FOR TILED AREA. IN
160
336 BE THE SAME AS THE FINISHED TILED LEVEL.

18000
33
A/F=200 BRASS EARTHING STRAP 11.5 7 15.LUMINAIRES TO BE AS PER ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL
30x4x400mm Lg. AND SPECIFICATIONS.
(SILVER COLOR)
LOCK PLATE DETAIL
80
SCALE: NTS 16. ALL ANCHOR BOLT SHALL BE PROPERLY SET PRIOR TO
PLACING CONCRETE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL
COORDINATE THIS WITH THE LIGHTING POLE SUPPLIER.
95.5
95.5
JACKET WALL THICKNESS-7mm
(600x8490x7mm) Spacer 30x30x10
LOCKING BOLT JACKET

80
136.33
Ø12 Rod TYPICAL

Ø8mm TAPPED HOLE
JACKET BOTTOM
9290
Rope.
for M8mm BOLT SCALE: NTS
30
SHAFT TYPICAL
WALL THICKNESS- 45 GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS
5mm STAINLESS STEEL Hock to fix SCALE: NTS
into the Clamp.
90
1 - - July 2021
600
0 - - -
950
4 x Ø 42 TYPICAL COUNTER WEIGHT

ANCHOR BOLT No. REVISIONS APP'D DATE
400
19.94 Kg SHALL BE CALCULATED

300
BY MANUFACTURER CLIENT
50mm THK.
BOTTOM A/F=310 6mm Thk.
SENDING BACK
450SQ.
600SQ.
PULLY
Ø12mm Rod
6
TYPICAL LOCK
TITLE
18m POLE ELEVATION
SCALE: NTS
ROPE WITH LOCK STANDARD DRAWINGS
TO STOP LOWERING
Ø22 30 30 30
DRAWING TITLE
Ø60 LIGHTING
TYPICAL
FABRICATED WASHER 18m MID HINGED LIGHT POLE DETAILS
SCALE: NTS BASE PLATE BACK PULLY DETAIL
DRAWN . SCALE NTS

CHECKED . DATE .
APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-11
NOTES:

2. THIS HINGED POLE IS DESIGNED TO CARRY TWO, FOUR, SIX

100
100
OR EIGHT LUMINARIES EACH WEIGHT IS MAX 24KG,
TOP A/F=100 40 CALCULATIONS SHALL BE SUBMITTED AND AGREED BY THE
Ø8mm TAPPED HOLE
8Nos. M10 NUTS
250
for M8mm BOLT 3. AS COUNTER WEIGHT IS DEPENDENT ON THE NUMBER OF
Jacket LUMINAIRES,THE MANUFACTURER SHALL SUBMIT
Ø22 Hole in MECHANICAL STRESS CALCULATIONS SUBJECTED TO
24 Bolt M20x50 BRASS EARTHING STRAP LUMINAIRES ON POLE.
Bottom Segment
80
30x4x400mm Lg.
Lock Plate
254
(SILVER COLOR) 4. COUNTER WEIGHT TO BE RUBBER LAMINATED.
120
(SEE DETAIL) Lock Plate
90
40
(SEE DETAIL)
6. ALL BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS ARE S.S. GRADE316L.
Ø12mm Rod Ø12mm ROD
40
7. DEPTH OF CONDUIT FOR CABLE ENTRY SHALL BE
(SEE DETAIL) APPROXIMATELY 750mm OR AS DETERMINED ON SITE BY THE
WALL THICKNESS-4mm Ø12 ROD JACKET 8. PROVIDE TWO (2) FOUNDATION CONDUITS AT LOCATIONS
80
6700
UP TO THREE UNDERGROUND CABLES AT POLE BASE. THE

6mm Thk. Ø10 Hole ELECTRICAL CUTOUTS IN POLES AT THESE LOCATIONS SHALL
100
12
CABLES.
20
AVERAGE COATING THICKNESS OF 100 MICRONS.
(COUNTER WEIGHT TO BE RUBBER LAMINATED) TYPICAL 10. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE DETAILED STRUCTURAL
33 CALCULATION AND DRAWINGS FOR ENGINEER'S APPROVAL.
SCALE: NTS GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS
SCALE: NTS
LOCK PLATE DETAIL BY THE PROJECT CONSULTANT AS PER ACTUAL SOIL
REPORT.

A/F=160 Ø12mm Rod
6
194 250 FIXED FROM THE FACTORY PREMISES FOR POLE NUMBERING.
184 11.9 5 13. ALL THE ANCHOR BOLT IN UNPAVED AREA SHALL BE
150

11.9 30 30 30
A/F=162 14. THE TOP OF FOUNDATION SHALL BE 150mm ABOVE
14000
94.75
94.75
129.5
129.5
M20 Nut Fabricated Washer
15.LUMINAIRES TO BE AS PER ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL
Welded on Shaft 6mm Thk.
AND SPECIFICATIONS.
6mm THK.
Spacer 30x30x10mm 3
78
.3 PLACING CONCRETE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL
.3
78
3
Nut Sleeve 78.33 101.5
Fabricated Washer
M20x50mm Bolt 6mm THK. Spacer 30x30x10
TYPICAL TYPICAL
JACKET JACKET TOP TYPICAL Ø22
JACKET SCALE: NTS SCALE: NTS JACKET BOTTOM Ø60
WALL THICKNESS-5mm SCALE: NTS
(494x6295)
FABRICATED WASHER
7150
SCALE: NTS
SHAFT
WALL THICKNESS-4mm
LOCKING BOLT
Ø12 Rod
Rope.
30
90
4xØ37 1 - - July 2021

45 TYPICAL COUNTER WEIGHT
ANCHOR BOLT - - -
STAINLESS STEEL Hock to fix 19.94 Kg SHALL BE CALCULATED 0
into the Clamp. BY MANUFACTURER
600
50mm THK. No. REVISIONS APP'D DATE

1000
CLIENT
SENDING BACK
450SQ.
300SQ.
400
PULLY
350
LOCK
BOTTOM A/F=225 TITLE
ROPE WITH LOCK
TO STOP LOWERING STANDARD DRAWINGS
TYPICAL TYPICAL DRAWING TITLE
14m POLE ELEVATION BASE PLATE LIGHTING
BACK PULLY DETAIL 14m MID HINGED LIGHT POLE DETAILS
SCALE: NTS
DRAWN . SCALE NTS

CHECKED . DATE .
APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-12
NOTES:

2. THIS HINGED POLE IS DESIGNED TO CARRY TWO LUMINARIES

100
100
EACH WEIGHT IS MAX 24KG,
TOP A/F=100 40 CALCULATIONS SHALL BE SUBMITTED AND AGREED BY THE
Ø8mm TAPPED HOLE
8Nos. M10 NUTS
250
for M8mm BOLT 3. AS COUNTER WEIGHT IS DEPENDENT ON THE NUMBER OF
Jacket LUMINAIRES,THE MANUFACTURER SHALL SUBMIT
Ø22 Hole in MECHANICAL STRESS CALCULATIONS SUBJECTED TO
24 Bolt M20x50 BRASS EARTHING STRAP LUMINAIRES ON POLE.
Bottom Segment
80
30x4x400mm Lg.
Lock Plate
254
(SILVER COLOR) 4. COUNTER WEIGHT TO BE RUBBER LAMINATED.
120
(SEE DETAIL) Lock Plate
90
40
(SEE DETAIL)
6. ALL BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS ARE S.S. GRADE316L.
Ø12mm Rod Ø12mm ROD
40
(SEE DETAIL) APPROXIMATELY 750mm OR AS DETERMINED ON SITE BY THE
WALL THICKNESS-4mm Ø12 ROD JACKET 8. PROVIDE TWO (2) FOUNDATION CONDUITS AT LOCATIONS
80
4700
UP TO THREE UNDERGROUND CABLES AT POLE BASE. THE

6mm Thk. Ø10 Hole ELECTRICAL CUTOUTS IN POLES AT THESE LOCATIONS SHALL
100
12
CABLES.
20
AVERAGE COATING THICKNESS OF 100 MICRONS.
(COUNTER WEIGHT TO BE RUBBER LAMINATED) TYPICAL 10. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE DETAILED STRUCTURAL
33 CALCULATION AND DRAWINGS FOR ENGINEER'S APPROVAL.
SCALE: NTS GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS
SCALE: NTS
LOCK PLATE DETAIL BY THE PROJECT CONSULTANT AS PER ACTUAL SOIL
REPORT.

A/F=160 Ø12mm Rod
6
194 250 FIXED FROM THE FACTORY PREMISES FOR POLE NUMBERING.
184 11.9 5 13. ALL THE ANCHOR BOLT IN UNPAVED AREA SHALL BE
150

11.9 30 30 30
A/F=162 14. THE TOP OF FOUNDATION SHALL BE 150mm ABOVE
10000
94.75
94.75
129.5
129.5
M20 Nut Fabricated Washer
Welded on Shaft 6mm Thk.
AND SPECIFICATIONS.
6mm THK.
Spacer 30x30x10mm 3
78
.3 PLACING CONCRETE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL
.3
78
3
Nut Sleeve 78.33 101.5
Fabricated Washer
M20x50mm Bolt 6mm THK. Spacer 30x30x10
TYPICAL TYPICAL
JACKET JACKET TOP TYPICAL Ø22
JACKET SCALE: NTS SCALE: NTS JACKET BOTTOM Ø60
WALL THICKNESS-5mm SCALE: NTS
(494x6295)
FABRICATED WASHER
5150
SCALE: NTS
SHAFT
WALL THICKNESS-4mm
LOCKING BOLT
Ø12 Rod
Rope.
30
90
4xØ37 1 - - July 2021

45 TYPICAL COUNTER WEIGHT
ANCHOR BOLT - - -
STAINLESS STEEL Hock to fix 19.94 Kg SHALL BE CALCULATED 0
into the Clamp. BY MANUFACTURER
600
50mm THK. No. REVISIONS APP'D DATE

1000
CLIENT
SENDING BACK
450SQ.
300SQ.
400
PULLY
350
LOCK
BOTTOM A/F=225 TITLE
ROPE WITH LOCK
TO STOP LOWERING STANDARD DRAWINGS
TYPICAL TYPICAL DRAWING TITLE
14m POLE ELEVATION BASE PLATE LIGHTING
BACK PULLY DETAIL 10m MID HINGED LIGHT POLE DETAILS
SCALE: NTS
DRAWN . SCALE NTS

CHECKED . DATE .
APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-13
NOTES:

PAVED AREA UNPAVED AREA VELOCITY OF 160 KILOMETERS PER HOUR AND GUST FACTOR
OF 1.14 FOR POLE WITH LUMINAIRES AND ALL EQUIPMENT
HOLE IN BASE PLATE TO C/L LIGHT POLE,C/L ANCHORAGE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE A.A.S.H.T.O STANDARD
ACCOMMODATE CONDUIT SLEEVES ASSEMBLY & C/L FOUNDATION SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS FOR HIGHWAY
POLE CAP BRACKET AND LUMINAIRE- SIGNS, LUMINAIRES AND TRAFFIC SIGNALS
SHAPE INDICATIVE ONLY 4-37 Ø (MIN) ANCHOR BOLT
WEIGHT 25KG (MAX)EACH WITH 3 HEX NUTS AND
2. CONCRETE GRADE C30 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH = 30N/M
HARDENED WASHER PER BOLT. sq.
PVC OR NEOPRENE SEAL BETWEEN CAST ALUMINUM OR
LUMINAIRE BRACKET CURB 3. STEEL SECTION FOR THE POLE SHALL BE HOT DIPPED
TWO HALVES OF ENCLOSURE PLATE GALVANIZED STEEL
AND ALL AROUND POLE REMOVABLE ENCLOSURE GALVANIZED.
PLATE. 2 HALVES PER BASE .
SIZE TO MATCH BASE PLATE. 4. ROADWAY LIGHTING SUBCONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE
PAINT TO MATCH POLE FINISH. NON METALLIC PADS AND WASHERS AS APPLICABLE TO
A ISOLATE THE TWO DIFFERENT MATERIALS (GALVANIZED
STEEL/ALUMINUM)
C/L LIGHT POLE,C/L ANCHORAGE PROVIDE BACK-UP PLATE TO ONE HALF SCREWS COUNTERSUNK 5. FOR THE TRANSITION RIM, THE POWDER COATING SHOULD
ASSEMBLY & C/L FOUNDATION C/L 60 Ø PVC CONDUIT OF ENCLOSURE PLATE WITH TAPPED
BE MINIMUM 100 MICRONS OF POLYESTER POWER
HOLES TO ACCEPT STAINLESS STEEL
COATING, TYPE PE-SDF OR RECOMMENDED BY THE
SCREWS COUNTERSUNK INTO OTHER
ENGINEER.
900 Ø CIDH FOUNDATION HALF OF ENCLOSURE PLATE
ENCLOSURE PLATE
273 Ø POLE AT BASE APPROXIMATELY 750mm OR AS DETERMINED ON SITE BY
FIXTURE TYPE -1 450*450*50 mm BASE TYPICAL THE ENGINEER
2 Nos. 815x350 PLATE (ASTM -A588
20 PREFORMED JOINT FILLER
WEIGHT 5KG (MAX)EACH Fy (MIN)=3600 Kg/Cm² ENCLOSURE PLATE DETAILS 7. PROVIDE TWO (2) FOUNDATION CONDUITS AT LOCATIONS
PAVED AREA WHERE THE LIGHTING PLAN INDICATES THE TERMINATION
TYPICAL OF UP TO THREE UNDERGROUND CABLES AT POLE
TOP PLAN BASE.THE ELECTRICAL CUTOUTS IN POLES AT THESE
LOCATIONSSHALL BE SUITABLE FOR TERMINATING UP TO
THREE UNDERGROUND CABLES.
8. THE MANUFACTURER SHALL SUBMIT DESIGN CALCULATION

FOR BOTH POLE AND FOUNDATION COMPONENTS BASED
PAVED AREA UNPAVED AREA ON THE SPECIFIED CODE TAKING INTO CONSIDERATION
ALL THE ADDITIONAL APPLICABLE LOADS.
ENCLOSURE PLATE C/L LIGHT POLE,C/L ANCHORAGE 4 ANCHOR BOLTS WITH 3 HEAVY TOP PORTION OF ANCHOR BOLTS,
FIXTURE TYPE-2 1000 1000
PAVED AREA ASSEMBLY & C/L FOUNDATION HEX NUTS AND HARDENED SHALL BE GALVANISED IN 9. THE ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL BE PROPERLY SET PRIOR TO
CCTV CAMERA 700mm
WEIGHT 30KG WASHERS PER BOLT. ANCHOR ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM-A153. PLACING CONCRETE,THE CONTRACTOR SHALL
FIXTURE TYPE-2 37 Ø ANCHOR BOLTS
(MAX)EACH HAND HOLE BOLTS SHALL CONFORM TO COORDINATE THIS WITH LIGHT POLE SUPPLIER.
CCTV CAMERA 700mm
F
ASTM-A675,GRADE 90 -NUTS AND WASHERS SHALL BE
WEIGHT 30KG (MAX)EACH
273 Ø POLE AT BASE FY (MIN.)=3867 Kg./Cm²
E
OF STAINLESS STEEL 10. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN SOIL BORINGS AT EACH
POLE LOCATION SHOWN ON THE PLANS. CONTRACTOR
BASE PLATE
TOP OF PAVEMENT TILE -ALL PART F SHALL BE COVERED
100 GROUT
Ø215X4mm ALUMINIUM SHALL DESIGN THE POLE FOUNDATION TAKING INTO

100 GROUT BY GREASE CONSIDERATION THE SOIL DATA OBTAINED FROM S.I
50 MIN
UPPER EXTRUSION
TOP OF CONCRETE REPORT.
C
200
FOUNDATION
220
11. CIDH DENOTES "CAST IN DRILLED HOLE"
14841
12. FOUNDATION DESIGN OF LIGHT POLE SHOULD BE

14000
BENDING RADIUS ANCHOR PLATE

MINIMUM 250mm VERIFIED BY THE PROJECT CONSULTANT AS PER ACTUAL
(ASTM-A588 Fy MIN.=3600 Kg/cm ) SOIL PARAMETERS BASED ON GEOTECHNICAL
B
FLAG 850 (APPROXIMATE) INVESTIGATION REPORT.
100 Ø PVC CONDUIT UNPAVED AREAS
750 (APPROXIMATE)
PAVED AREAS 13. THE TOP OF FOUNDATION SHALL BE 150mm ABOVE
ANCHOR BOLT DETAILS FINISHED GROUND LEVEL EXCEPT FOR TILED AREA. IN
B TILED AREA THE TOP OF THE FOUNDATION LEVEL SHALL
12-18 Ø BE THE SAME AS THE FINISHED TILED LEVEL.
90 mm CLERANCE COVERED BY PVC CAP AND IN PAVED AREA SHALL BE
FIXTURE TYPE-2
(TYP) COVEDRED BY BASE DECORATIVE BASE PLATE COVER .
2Nos. 3000x1000 POLE SIZE A B C D E F ANCHOR PLATE
ILLUMINATED BANNER
WEIGHT 60KG (MAX)EACH 15.LUMINAIRES TO BE AS PER ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL
10 Ø SPIRAL 14.0m 1270 180 870 220 50 270 100x100x20 AND SPECIFICATIONS.
80mm PITCH
8000
PLACING CONCRETE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL

ANCHOR BOLT DIMENSION COORDINATE THIS WITH THE LIGHTING POLE SUPPLIER.
17. REFER TO ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL PART 1

SECTION C FOR LIGHTING POLE SPECIFICATION.
SECTION A-A - July 2021

1 -
0 - - -
Ø300 CAST ALUMINIUM
TRANSITION RIM No. REVISIONS APP'D DATE
CLIENT
3000
900 Ø
Ø300 ALUMINIUM LOWER

CLADDING (CLADDING AS ADVISED TITLE
2180
BY CLIENT)
STANDARD DRAWINGS
GROUT 100
DRAWING TITLE
10 Ø SPIRAL 12-18 Ø LIGHTING
STEEL MEMBER Ø273X9.3mm 14m MULTIFUNCTION LIGHT POLE DETAILS
CHS L=2m 150X150X9mm SHS
L=4m & 650X650X50mm BASE PLATE TYPICAL
TYPICAL DRAWN . SCALE NTS
SECTION B-B
CHECKED . DATE .
FRONT VIEW
APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-14
NOTES:

PAVED AREA UNPAVED AREA VELOCITY OF 160 KILOMETERS PER HOUR AND GUST FACTOR
1.14 FOR POLE WITH LUMINAIRES AND ALL EQUIPMENT
ACCOMMODATE CONDUIT SLEEVES ASSEMBLY & C/L FOUNDATION SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS FOR HIGHWAY
SIGNS, LUMINAIRES AND TRAFFIC SIGNALS.
4-32 Ø (MIN) ANCHOR BOLT
WITH 3 HEX NUTS AND
HARDENED WASHER PER BOLT.
sq.
425 Ø POLT CIRCLE
PVC OR NEOPRENE SEAL CAST ALUMINUM OR GALVANIZED
CURB 3. STEEL SECTION FOR THE POLE SHALL BE HOT DIPPED
BETWEEN TWO HALVES OF STEEL REMOVABLE ENCLOSURE
ENCLOSURE PLATE AND ALL PLATE. 2 HALVES PER BASE . SIZE GALVANIZED.
AROUND POLE TO MATCH BASE PLATE. PAINT TO
MATCH POLE FINISH. 4. ROADWAY LIGHTING SUBCONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE
NON METALLIC PADS AND MASHERS AS APPLICABLE TO
A ISOLATE THE TWO DIFFERENT MATERIALS (GALVANIZED
STEEL/ALUMINUM)
C/L LIGHT POLE,C/L ANCHORAGE PROVIDEBACK-UPPLATETOONE SCREWS COUNTERSUNK
C/L 60 Ø PVC CONDUIT 5. FOR THE TRANSITION RIM, THE POWDER COATING SHOULD
POLE CAP BRACKET AND LUMINAIRE- ASSEMBLY & C/L FOUNDATION HALFOFENCLOSUREPLATEWITH
SHAPE INDICATIVE ONLY BE MINIMUM 100 MICRONS OF POLYESTER POWER
TAPPEDHOLESTOACCEPT
WEIGHT 18KG (MAX)EACH COATING, TYPE PE-SDF OR RECOMMENDED BY THE
STAINLESSSTEELSCREWS
ENGINEER.
700 Ø CIDH FOUNDATION COUNTERSUNKINTOOTHERHALF
ENCLOSURE PLATE
OFENCLOSUREPLATE
LUMINAIRE BRACKET 6. DEPTH OF CONDUIT FOR CABLE ENTRY SHALL BE
410*410*40 mm BASE PLATE TYPICAL THE ENGINEER
20 PREFORMED JOINT FILLER (ASTM -A588 Fy (MIN)=3600 Kg/Cm²
ENCLOSURE PLATE DETAILS 7. PROVIDE TWO (2) FOUNDATION CONDUITS AT LOCATIONS
PAVED AREA
TYPICAL WHERE THE LIGHTING PLAN INDICATES THE TERMINATION
OF UP TO THREE UNDERGROUND CABLES AT POLE
LOCATIONS SHALL BE SUITABLE FOR TERMINATING UP YO

FIXTURE TYPE-1 PAVED AREA UNPAVED AREA ON THE SPECIFIED CODE TAKING INTO CONSIDERATION
2Nos. 815x350 ALL THE ADDITIONAL APPLICABLE LOADS.
WEIGHT 5KG (MAX)EACH ENCLOSURE PLATE PAVED AREA C/L LIGHT POLE,C/L ANCHORAGE
ASSEMBLY & C/L FOUNDATION 9. THE ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL BE PROPERLY SET PRIOR TO
32 Ø ANCHOR BOLTS PLACING CONCRETE,THE CONTRACTOR SHALL
HAND HOLE COORDINATE THIS WITH LIGHT POLE SUPPLIER.
FIXTURE TYPE-2
CCTV CAMERA 219 Ø POLE AT BASE 10. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN SOIL BORINGS AT EACH
700mm WEIGHT 1000 1000 POLE LOCATION SHOWN ON THE PLANS. CONTRACTOR
BASE PLATE
30KG (MAX)EACH TOP OF PAVEMENT
FIXTURE TYPE-2 TILE SHALL DESIGN THE POLE FOUNDATION TAKING INTO
100 GROUT
CONSIDERATION THE SOIL DATA OBTAINED FROM S.I
30 MIN
CCTV CAMERA 700mm
WEIGHT 30KG (MAX)EACH TOP OF CONCRETE REPORT.
200
FOUNDATION
220 11. CIDH DENOTES "CAST IN DRILLED HOLE"
Ø215X4mm ALUMINUM BENDING RADIUS 12. FOUNDATION DESIGN OF LIGHT POLE SHOULD BE
UPPER EXTRUSION 100 GROUT MINIMUM 250mm VERIFIED BY THE PROJECT CONSULTANT AS PER ACTUAL
SOIL PARAMETERS BASED ON GEOTECHNICAL
100 Ø PVC CONDUIT UNPAVED AREAS
10341 750 (APPROXIMATE)
10000 B TILED AREA THE TOP OF THE FOUNDATION LEVEL SHALL
12-18 Ø
FIXTURE TYPE-2 2Nos. 90 mm CLERANCE COVERED BY PVC CAP AND IN PAVED AREA SHALL BE
3000x1000 ILLUMINATED (TYP) COVEDRED BY BASE DECORATIVE BASE PLATE COVER .
BANNER WEIGHT 60KG
(MAX)EACH 10 Ø SPIRAL AND SPECIFICATIONS.
80mm PITCH
TOP PORTION OF ANCHOR BOLTS, 16. ALL ANCHOR BOLT SHALL BE PROPERLY SET PRIOR TO
4 ANCHOR BOLTS WITH 3 HEAVY HEX NUTS
SHALL BE GALVANIZED IN ACCORDANCE PLACING CONCRETE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL
AND HARDENED WASHERS PER BOLT.
WITH ASTM-A153. COORDINATE THIS WITH THE LIGHTING POLE SUPPLIER.
ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL CONFORM TO
ASTM-A675,GRADE 90
8000 D F -NUTS AND WASHERS SHALL BE 17. REFER TO ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL PART 1
FY (MIN.)=3867 Kg./Cm²
OF STAINLESS STEEL SECTION C FOR LIGHTING POLE SPECIFICATION.
E
-ALL PART F SHALL BE COVERED
SECTION A-A BY GREASE
1 - - July 2021
A C 0 - - -
Ø250 CAST ALUMINUM
TRANSITION RIM No. REVISIONS APP'D DATE
CLIENT
3000 ANCHOR PLATE
900 Ø
700 (ASTM-A588 Fy MIN.=3600 Kg/cm )
B
Ø250 ALUMINUM LOWER CLADDING TITLE
2180 (CLADDING AS ADVISED BY CLIENT)
ANCHOR BOLT DETAILS STANDARD DRAWINGS
DRAWING TITLE
10 Ø SPIRAL 12-18 Ø LIGHTING
80mm PITCH EQUALLY SPACED POLE SIZE A B C D E F ANCHOR PLATE
STEEL MEMBER 10m MULTIFUNCTION LIGHT POLE DETAILS
Ø219.1X8.18mm CHS L=2m 10.0m 980 150 650 180 50 230 60x60x20
150X150X6mm SHS L=2m TYPICAL
&410X410X40mm BASE PLATE DRAWN . SCALE NTS
TYPICAL SECTION B-B
FRONT VIEW ANCHOR BOLT DIMENSION CHECKED . DATE .
APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-15
NOTES:

PAVED AREA UNPAVED VELOCITY OF 160 KILOMETERS PER HOUR AND GUST FACTOR
AREA 1.14 FOR POLE WITH LUMINAIRES AND EQUIPMENT
ACCOMMODATE CONDUIT ASSEMBLY & C/L FOUNDATION SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS FOR HIGHWAY
SLEEVES SIGNS, LUMINAIRES AND TRAFFIC SIGNALS.
4-32 Ø (MIN) ANCHOR
BOLT
WITH 3 HEX NUTS AND
sq.
HARDENED WASHER
PER BOLT. PVC OR NEOPRENE SEAL CAST ALUMINUM OR
CURB 3. STEEL SECTION FOR THE POLE SHALL BE HOT DIPPED
BETWEEN TWO HALVES GALVANIZED STEEL
OF ENCLOSURE PLATE REMOVABLE ENCLOSURE GALVANIZED.
AND ALL AROUND POLE PLATE. 2 HALVES PER
BASE SIZE TO MATCH 4. ROADWAY LIGHTING SUBCONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE
BASE PLATE PAINT TO NON METALLIC PADS AND MASHERS AS APPLICABLE TO
A MATCH POLE FINISH. ISOLATE THE TWO DIFFERENT MATERIALS (GALVANIZED
STEEL/ALUMINUM)
REMOVABLE STAINLESS
C/L LIGHT POLE,C/L ANCHORAGE PROVIDE BACK-UP PLATE TO STEEL SCREWS
C/L 60 Ø PVC CONDUIT 5. FOR THE TRANSITION RIM, THE POWDER COATING SHOULD
POLE CAP BRACKET AND LUMINAIRE- ASSEMBLY & C/L FOUNDATION ONE HALF OF ENCLOSURE COUNTERSUNK BE MINIMUM 100 MICRONS OF POLYESTER POWER
SHAPE INDICATIVE ONLY PLATE WITH TAPPED HOLES
COATING, TYPE PE-SDF OR RECOMMENDED BY THE
WIGHT 18KG (MAX)EACH TO ACCEPT STAINLESS STEEL
ENGINEER.
700 Ø CIDH FOUNDATION SCREWS COUNTERSUNK INTO
ENCLOSURE PLATE OTHER HALF OF ENCLOSURE
LUMINAIRE BRACKET 6. DEPTH OF CONDUIT FOR CABLE ENTRY SHALL BE
PLATE
410*410*30 mm BASE
PLATE TYPICAL THE ENGINEER
20 PREFORMED JOINT
FILLER (ASTM -A588 Fy ENCLOSURE PLATE DETAILS 7. PROVIDE TWO (2) FOUNDATION CONDUITS AT LOCATIONS
(MIN)=3600 Kg/Cm² PAVED AREA
WHERE THE LIGHTING PLAN INDICATES THE TERMINATION
TYPICAL OF UP TO THREE UNDERGROUND CABLES AT POLE
LOCATIONS SHALL BE SUITABLE FOR TERMINATING UP TO

FIXTURE TYPE-1 PAVED AREA UNPAVED AREA ON THE SPECIFIED CODE TAKING INTO CONSIDERATION
2Nos. 815x350 ALL THE ADDITIONAL APPLICABLE LOADS.
WEIGHT 5K(MAX)EACH ENCLOSURE PLATE PAVED C/L LIGHT POLE,C/L ANCHORAGE
AREA ASSEMBLY & C/L FOUNDATION 9. THE ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL BE PROPERLY SET PRIOR TO
32 Ø ANCHOR BOLTS PLACING CONCRETE,THE CONTRACTOR SHALL
HAND HOLE COORDINATE THIS WITH LIGHT POLE SUPPLIER.
FIXTURE TYPE-2 241 Ø POLE AT BASE 10. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN SOIL BORINGS AT EACH
1000 1000
CCTV CAMERA POLE LOCATION SHOWN ON THE PLANS. CONTRACTOR
BASE PLATE
TOP OF
700mm WEIGHT
100 GROUT
FIXTURE TYPE-2 PAVEMENT TILE SHALL DESIGN THE POLE FOUNDATION TAKING INTO
30KG (MAX)EACH 100 GROUT
CONSIDERATION THE SOIL DATA OBTAINED FROM S.I
30 MIN
CCTV CAMERA 700mm
WEIGHT 30KG (MAX)EACH TOP OF CONCRETE REPORT.
200
FOUNDATION
220
11. CIDH DENOTES "CAST IN DRILLED HOLE"
Ø215X4mm ALUMINUM
BENDING RADIUS 12. FOUNDATION DESIGN OF LIGHT POLE SHOULD BE
EXTRUSION
MINIMUM 250mm VERIFIED BY THE PROJECT CONSULTANT AS PER ACTUAL
SOIL PARAMETERS BASED ON GEOTECHNICAL
UNPAVED AREAS
100 Ø PVC CONDUIT
750 (APPROXIMATE)
8341
8000
B TILED AREA THE TOP OF THE FOUNDATION LEVEL SHALL

12-18 Ø BE THE SAME AS THE FINISHED TILED LEVEL.
FIXTURE TYPE-2 90 mm CLERANCE COVERED BY PVC CAP AND IN PAVED AREA SHALL BE
2Nos. 3000x1000 (TYP) COVEDRED BY BASE DECORATIVE BASE PLATE COVER .
ILLUMINATED BANNER 4 ANCHOR BOLTS WITH 3 HEAVY HEX NUTS 15.LUMINAIRES TO BE AS PER ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL
WEIGHT 60KG (MAX)EACH AND HARDENED WASHERS PER BOLT. AND SPECIFICATIONS.
10 Ø SPIRAL SHALL BE GALVANISED IN
80mm PITCH ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL CONFORM TO ACCORDANCE 16. ALL ANCHOR BOLT SHALL BE PROPERLY SET PRIOR TO
ASTM-A675,GRADE 90 WITH ASTM-A153. PLACING CONCRETE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL
F
FY (MIN.)=3867 Kg./Cm²
E
-NUTS AND WASHERS SHALL BE
5000
6000
OF STAINLESS STEEL 17. REFER TO THE ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL PART 1
SECTION C FOR LIGHTING POLE SPECIFICATION.
-ALL PART F SHALL BE COVERED
BY GREASE
C
SECTION A-A
1 - - July 2021
0 - - -
Ø250 CAST ALUMINUM ANCHOR PLATE
TRANSITION RIM (ASTM-A588 Fy MIN.=3600 Kg/cm ) No. REVISIONS APP'D DATE
B
CLIENT
3000
900
700 Ø
ANCHOR BOLT DETAILS

Ø250 ALUMINUM LOWER TITLE
2180
CLADDING (CLADDING AS
ADVISED BY CLIENT)
STANDARD DRAWINGS
DRAWING TITLE
10 Ø SPIRAL 12-18 Ø 8.0m 980 150 650 180 50 230 60x60x20 LIGHTING
STEEL MEMBER 8m MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHT POLE DETAILS
Ø219.1X8.18mm CHS L=2m ANCHOR BOLT DIMENSION
150X150X6mm SHS L=2m TYPICAL
&610X410X40mm BASE DRAWN . SCALE NTS
TYPICAL PLATE SECTION B-B
FRONT VIEW CHECKED . DATE .
APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-16
NOTES:
1. FOR ALL ROADWAY LIGHTING CUTOUT SPECIFICATIONS
REFER TO ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL PART 1 SECTION I
LUMINAIRE SHALL BE 2. GLAND PLATE EARTH TO BE CONNECTED TO THE POLE EARTH

AND CIRCUIT EARTH.
CONNECTED IN PHASE 3C 2.5mm2 Flexible N E 3. ALL CUTOUTS ARE TO FIT INTO THE POLE HANDHOLE.
SEQUENCE. cable to luminaire
4. ONLY ONE LUMINAIRE TO BE CONNECTED TO ONE MCB.
Cable Grommet Transparent lockable 5. MAXIMUM 3 "LOOP IN LOOP OUT" CABLES PER CUTOUT
N(out) E N(out) E cover over MCBs 6. ALTERNATIVE GLAND PLATE TO BE USED TO ACCEPT 3 X
3C (MIN.) 2.5mm², 105°C P.V.C. CABLES
10 A 10 kA 10 A 10 kA
INSULATED AND SHEATHED. MCB SPD MCB SPD
7. WHERE FOUR LUMINAIRES ARE CONNECTED, THE SPDs CAN
CABLE TO BE COLOUR CODED TO Drip Loop BE-
A) CONNECTED TO TWO LUMINAIRES PER SPD, BUT IF THE SPD
INDICATE PHASE SEQUENCE FAILS BOTH LUMINAIRES WILL BE DARK.
USE THE REQUIRED PHASE AS PER MCB (Rated to luminaire wattage) B) ADDED IN AN EXTENSION BOX ABOVE THE CUTOUT
.
THE APPROVED DRAWINGS. L(out) L(in) L(out) L(in)
Surge Protection Device (SPD) N(in) N(in)
Lockable Hasp
ELECTRICAL CUT OUT WITH MCBs
AND SPDs. MCB RATING BASED ON
LUMINAIRE WATTAGE
Cable Connector suitable for

3 x 10-25mm2 XLPE/SWA Cable
(Colour Coded by Phase/Neutral)
CABLE GLANDS
EARTH LUG
6-25mm² 4C - XLPE/SWA/PVC ARMOURED
CABLE SIZE DETERMINED BY THE
VOLTAGE DROP OF THE CIRCUIT
POLE BASE
U.P.V.C 60mm. O/D CONDUIT.
Earth Cable to Pole Stud

10-25mm2 XLPE/SWA Cable
Loop In Loop Out
LUMINAIRE WIRING DIAGRAM
SCALE: NTS
Brass Gland Plate with 2 x 25mm dia. holes

To accept 2 x BWL25 Brass Glands,
1 - - July 2021
Lock Nuts, Serrated Washers and Shrouds
0 - - -
CLIENT
TITLE
STANDARD DRAWINGS
DRAWING TITLE
LIGHTING
LOOP IN LOOP OUT CUTOUT WITH SPDs
Brass Gland Plate with 3 x 25mm dia. holes SCREW CONNECTOR TYPE
To accept 3 x BWL25 Brass Glands, DRAWN . SCALE NTS
Lock Nuts, Serrated Washers and Shrouds CHECKED . DATE .
APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-17
NOTES:

AND CIRCUIT EARTH.
Cable Grommet Transparent lockable 5. MAXIMUM THREE "LOOP IN LOOP OUT" CABLES PER CUTOUT
cover over MCBs 6. ALTERNATIVE GLAND PLATE TO BE USED TO ACCEPT 3 X
10 A 10 A
INSULATED AND SHEATHED. MCB MCB
7. TO BE USED WHERE EXISTING LUMINAIRE HAS SPD INSTALLED.
CABLE TO BE COLOUR CODED TO Drip Loop
INDICATE PHASE SEQUENCE .
USE THE REQUIRED PHASE AS PER MCB (Rated to luminaire wattage)
THE APPROVED DRAWINGS.
Up to 4 MCBs to be installed
Lockable Hasp
ELECTRICAL CUT OUT WITH MCBs.
MCB RATING BASED ON LUMINAIRE
WATTAGE
Cable Connector suitable for

3 x 10-25mm2 XLPE/SWA Cable
(Colour Coded by Phase/Neutral)
CABLE GLANDS
EARTH LUG
POLE BASE

LUMINAIRE WIRING DIAGRAM Loop In Loop Out
SCALE: NTS

1 - - July 2021
0 - - -
CLIENT
TITLE
STANDARD DRAWINGS
DRAWING TITLE
LIGHTING
LOOP IN LOOP OUT CUTOUT WITHOUT SPD
Brass Gland Plate with 3 x 25mm dia. holes SCREW CONNECTOR TYPE
APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-18
NOTES:

AND CIRCUIT EARTH.
Cable Grommet
Transparent lockable 5. MAXIMUM 3 "LOOP IN LOOP OUT" CABLES PER CUTOUT
N(out) E N(out) E cover over MCBs 6. ALTERNATIVE GLAND PLATE TO BE USED TO ACCEPT 3 X
10 A 10 kA 10 A 10 kA
INSULATED AND SHEATHED. MCB SPD MCB SPD
7. WHERE FOUR LUMINAIRES ARE CONNECTED, THE SPDs CAN
CABLE TO BE COLOUR CODED TO Drip Loop BE-
A) CONNECTED TO TWO LUMINAIRES PER SPD, BUT IF THE SPD
INDICATE PHASE SEQUENCE FAILS BOTH LUMINAIRES WILL BE DARK.
USE THE REQUIRED PHASE AS PER MCB (Rated to luminaire wattage) B) ADDED IN AN EXTENSION BOX ABOVE THE CUTOUT
.
THE APPROVED DRAWINGS. Up to 4 MCBs to be Installed L(out) L(in) L(out) L(in)
N(in) N(in)
Surge Protection Device (SPD)

Lockable Hasp
ELECTRICAL CUT OUT WITH MCBs
AND SPDs. MCB RATING BASED ON
LUMINAIRE WATTAGE
Tunnel Connector
one per cable
CABLE GLANDS
EARTH LUG
POLE BASE

Loop In Loop Out
SCALE: NTS

1 - - July 2021
0 - - -
CLIENT
TITLE
STANDARD DRAWINGS
DRAWING TITLE
LIGHTING
LOOP IN LOOP OUT CUTOUT WITH SPD
Brass Gland Plate with 3 x 25mm dia. holes TUNNEL TYPE CONNECTORS
APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-19
NOTES:

AND CIRCUIT EARTH.
Cable Grommet Transparent lockable 5. MAXIMUM THREE "LOOP IN LOOP OUT" CABLES PER CUTOUT
cover over MCBs 6. ALTERNATIVE GLAND PLATE TO BE USED TO ACCEPT 3 X
10 A 10 A
INSULATED AND SHEATHED. MCB MCB 7. TO BE USED WHERE EXISTING LUMINAIRE HAS AN SPD
CABLE TO BE COLOUR CODED TO Drip Loop INSTALLED.
INDICATE PHASE SEQUENCE
USE THE REQUIRED PHASE AS PER MCB (Rated to luminaire wattage)
THE APPROVED DRAWINGS.
Up to 4 MCBs to be installed.
Lockable Hasp
ELECTRICAL CUT OUT WITH MCB'S.
MCB RATING BASED ON LUMINAIRE
WATTAGE
Tunnel Connector
one per cable
CABLE GLANDS
EARTH LUG
POLE BASE

(Loop In Loop Out)
SCALE: NTS

1 - - July 2021
0 - - -
CLIENT
TITLE
STANDARD DRAWINGS
DRAWING TITLE
LIGHTING
LOOP IN LOOP OUT CUTOUT WITHOUT SPD
Brass Gland Plate with 3 x 25mm dia. holes TUNNEL CONNECTOR TYPE
APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-20
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETER UNLESS

OTHERWISE NOTED.
2. ALL ROADWAY LIGHTING DETAILS TO FOLLOW ABU

DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL PART 1 SECTION I.
1700 3. REFER TO STANDARD DETAIL L22 FOR SCHEMATIC

AND DEVICE SCHEDULE
3. BUS BSR ARE COLOUR CODED (R-RED, Y-YELLOW,

B-BLUE & N-BLACK WITH HEAT SHRINKABLE TUBING.
4. ALL COMPONENTS ARE SUITABLE FOR 50°C WITHOUT

DERATING FACTOR.
5. PROTECTION CLASS IP54.
A
6. RIGID WEATHER PROOF CONTROL CUBICLES AND/OR
MARSHALLING BOXES .
GRP BAKALITE SHEET TO TOP VIEW
COVER THE LIFE PARTS SCALE: NTS 7.AADC/ADDC KILOWATT HOUR METER TO BE IN
LIFTING HOOK SEPARATE CABINET LOCATED ADJACENT TO THE LCC
40 1 42 28 33 15 16-24 41 27 30 26 29
VENTILATION DEVICE(8Nos.)
DIMENSION TABLE
MOUNTING PLATE
G.I SHEET 2MM THICK SERIAL NO. FOR
LIGHTING CONTROL CABINET SCHEDULE
T PC CONTROL CABINET
BOTH AT FRONT SIDE TYPE NO. OF CABINET FOUNDATION FOUNDATION
AND BACK SIDE AL. TOWER BOLT WAYS WIDTH (mm) WIDTH (mm) OPENING (mm)
INSULATOR GRP THICKNESS 4.5MM
31 A 4 1500 1700 1200
BUSBAR SUPPORT COLOUR RAL 7032(light grey) RATING PLATE
GLASS WINDOW B 6 1500 1700 1200
32
FOR PHOTOCELL C 6 1700 1900 1400
BOX FOR WARNING SIGN
3 4 5 6 7 8
DRAWINGS SEE DETAIL A&B
1200
2
INSULATED GRP/BAKELITE
SERIAL No. FOR 9 10 11 12 13 14 SHEET 3MM THICK FOR
1200
SHROUDING IDENTIFICATION SIGN
CONTROL CABINET
SEE DETAIL A&B
300 `L' HANDLE WITH
HYLAM SHEET 31 3POINT CAM & ROD
900Hx400Wx3MMTHICK N PAD LOCK
FACILITY STAINLESS STEEL
31 12mm STAINLESS HINGES
E GLAND PLATE 5MM
STEEL FIXING BOLTS THICK ALUM. PLATE
EARTH BOLT
GRP THICKNESS 6MM
(AT BOTTOM ONLY) 1500
CONCRETE CHAMFER
CONCRETE
CHAMFER
INTERNAL VIEW
DOOR STOPPER
EARTHING
EARTHING ROD ROD
800
450
REINFORCED CONCRETE
CLASS C 35
BLINDING CONCRETE
CLASS C 20 REINFORCED BLINDING CONCRETE
CONCRETE CLASS C 30 CLASS C 20
ELEVATION A SECTION A-A ELEVATION

SCALE: NTS SCALE NTS SCALE: NTS
SIGNAL FACE ATTACHED TO

ALUMINUM PANEL SEE DETAIL B
20 20 - July 2021
1 -
220 10
10 - - -
0
HOLE FOR STAINLESS STEEL No. REVISIONS APP'D DATE
WHITE INCOMING CABLE
DANGER 2 (TYP) PANEL NUT, BOLT GLAND PLATE (5mm CLIENT
RED(TYP) AND WASHER Thick)
300
RED DOOR
RED(TYP) 300
200
2mm
400V ALUMINUM PANEL TITLE

5(TYP) SIGN FACE
STANDARD DRAWINGS
300 300
DRAWING TITLE
KNOCKOUT TYPE HOLE 6-14mm DIA HOLES FOR
FOR OUTGOING CABLES 12mm DIA SS316 BOLTS LIGHTING
LOGO / NAME AS PER OWNER CONTROL CABINET TYPE 1
REQUIREMENTS
DETAIL - A DETAIL - B BOTTOM VIEW
SCALE: NTS
DRAWN . SCALE NTS
CHECKED . DATE .
APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-21
NOTES:
400V/230V, 3Ph. 50Hz DEVICE SCHEDULE 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETER UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED.
2. ALL STREET LIGHTING DETAILS TO FOLLOW

STANDARD SPECIFICATION.
ITEM No. DESCRIPTION QUANTITY 3. BUS BSR ARE COLOUR CODED (R-RED, Y-YELLOW,
DOOR PANEL B-BLUE & N-BLACK WITH HEAT SHRINKABLE TUBING.
6A SP MCB SWITCH LAMP

4. ALL COMPONENTS ARE SUITABLE FOR 50° WITHOUT
ENCLOSURE, GLASS REINFORCED DERATING FACTOR.
23 29 28 1 PLASTIC 6MM THICK, SINGLE WALL, 01 5. TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH STANDARD DETAIL L21
13A SWITCH + SOCKET
TP MCCB IP:55 (RL7032) WITH GEL COAT LAYER
2 Earth Wire 4 Sqmm.
160 A , 35KA
16A SP MCB
TP MCCB, 160A, SC RATING 35KA
2 01
24 AT 50°C
33
ENERGY METER
BY ADDC / AADC KWhm
TP RCBO / RCCB, 63A, SC RATING 25KA , 30mA
3-8 06
AT 50°C
31 TINNED COPPER BUSBAR WITH RATING OF 200A AT 46kA FOR 1 sec.
TP CONTACTOR, 63A, AC1 DUTY,
9-14 06
COIL VOLTAGE-230V AC
32
TP 15 01
TP RCBO / RCCB MCB
TP MCB, 10A, 10KA
3 4 5 6 7 8 15
63 A , 25KA, 30mA 10A
TP CONTACTOR 16-23 SP MCB, 6A, 10KA 08

63 A C1 9 C2 10 C3 11 C4 12 C5 13 C6 14
24 SP MCB, 16A, 10KA 01
26 PHOTOCELL (0-200) LUX 01

N TINNED COPPER BUSBAR
E TINNED COPPER BUSBAR 40x4MM 27 SELECTOR SWITCH, 4POS (R,Y,B & OFF) 01
28 BULK HEAD LAMP AS PER SPECIFICATION 01

OFF
R Phase
Y Phase 29 DOOR LIMIT SWITCH 01
B Phase 27
30 SELECTOR SWITCH (AUTO, OFF, HAND) 02

(LOCAL,REMOTE)
MAIN BUSBARS
26 41
31
M TINNED Cu. E
PHOTOCELL TIMER
INTERNAL BUSBARS
(0-200)LUX 32 R,Y,B
HAND
AUTO
1 - - July 2021
TINNED Cu.
OFF
0 - - -
30
33 SOCKET, 13A 01 CLIENT
40 VENTILATION DEVICE 08 TITLE
SP
MCB
STANDARD DRAWINGS
6A
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
41 TIMER DIGITAL ASTRONOMICAL AS PER 01 DRAWING TITLE
OWNER'S REQUIREMENTS LIGHTING
C1 9 C2 10 C3 11 C4 12 C5 13 C6 14 TYPE 1 CONTROL CABINET
42 CURRENT TRANSFORMER . 03 SCHEMATIC AND DEVICE SCHEDULE
SPARE
N DRAWN . SCALE NTS
LIGHTING CABINET
CHECKED . DATE .
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM APPROVED . SIZE A1
SCALE: NTS
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-22
NOTES:

OTHERWISE NOTED.
2. ALL ROADWAY LIGHTING DETAILS TO FOLLOW THE ABU

DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL PART 1 SECTION I
1700 3. BUSBARS ARE COLOUR CODED (R-RED, Y-YELLOW,


DERATING FACTOR.
5. PROTECTION CLASS IP54.
6. RIGID WEATHER PROOF CONTROL CUBICLES AND/OR

MARSHALLING BOXES .
A
7. REFER TO STANDARD DETAIL No. 24 FOR WIRING
SCHEMATIC AND DEVICE SCHEDULE
GRP BAKALITE SHEET TO TOP VIEW
COVER THE LIVE PARTS SCALE: NTS
LIFTING HOOK
16 1 17 11 15 10 9 12
MOUNTING PLATE
CONTROL CABINET
BOTH AT FRONT SIDE
AND BACK SIDE AL. TOWER BOLT
INSULATOR GRP THICKNESS 4.5MM
13
BUSBAR SUPPORT COLOUR RAL 7032(light grey) RATING PLATE
14
BOX FOR WARNING SIGN
3 4 5 6 7 8
DRAWINGS SEE DETAIL A&B
800
2
SERIAL No. FOR SHEET 3MM THICK FOR
SHROUDING
800
CONTROL CABINET IDENTIFICATION SIGN
SEE DETAIL A&B
300 `L' HANDLE WITH
HYLAM SHEET 13 3POINT CAM & ROD
900Hx400Wx3MMTHICK N PAD LOCK
13 12mm STAINLESS HINGES
E GLAND PLATE 5MM
STEEL FIXING BOLTS THICK ALUM. PLATE
EARTH BOLT
GRP THICKNESS 6MM
(AT BOTTOM ONLY) 1000
CONCRETE CHAMFER
CONCRETE
CHAMFER
INTERNAL VIEW
DOOR STOPPER
EARTHING
EARTHING ROD ROD
800
450
REINFORCED CONCRETE
CLASS C 35
BLINDING CONCRETE
CLASS C 20 REINFORCED BLINDING CONCRETE
ELEVATION A SECTION A-A ELEVATION

SCALE: NTS SCALE NTS SCALE: NTS

20 20 - July 2021
1 -
220 10
10 - - -
0
HOLE FOR STAINLESS STEEL No. REVISIONS APP'D DATE
WHITE INCOMING
DANGER 2 (TYP) PANEL NUT, BOLT GLAND PLATE (5mm CLIENT
RED(TYP) AND WASHER SUPPLY CABLE Thick)
300
RED DOOR
RED(TYP) 300
200
2mm
400V ALUMINUM PANEL TITLE

5(TYP) SIGN FACE
STANDARD DRAWINGS
300 300
DRAWING TITLE
6 x 14mm DIA HOLES FOR KNOCKOUT TYPE HOLE FOR
12mm DIA SS316 BOLTS OUTGOING CABLES
KNOCKOUT TYPE HOLE FOR
OUTGOING EARTH CABLES
LIGHTING
LOGO / NAME AS PER OWNER TO SUIT 25mm BWL GLANDS CONTROL CABINET TYPE 2
REQUIREMENTS
DETAIL - A DETAIL - B BOTTOM VIEW CMS READY WITH 24/7 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY
SCALE: NTS
DRAWN . SCALE NTS
CHECKED . DATE .
APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-23
NOTES:
400V/230V, 3Ph. 50Hz DEVICE SCHEDULE 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETER UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED.
2. ALL ROADWAY LIGHTING DETAILS TO FOLLOW

ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL PART 1, SECTION I .
ITEM No. DESCRIPTION QUANTITY 3. BUS BSR ARE COLOUR CODED (R-RED, Y-YELLOW,
DOOR LED PANEL B-BLUE & N-BLACK WITH HEAT SHRINKABLE TUBING.
6A SP MCB SWITCH LAMP

ENCLOSURE, GLASS REINFORCED DERATING FACTOR.
9 12 11 1 PLASTIC 6MM THICK, SINGLE WALL, 01 5. INCOMING POWER SUPPLY WILL BE LIVE 24/7.
13A SWITCHED SOCKET
TP 100/160A MCCB, 35KA IP:55 (RL7032) WITH GEL COAT LAYER 6. ALL LIGHTING CONTROL WILL BE THROUGH CMS/PLMS
2 Earth Wire 4 Sqmm.
ELP 300mA
7. MAIN MCCB RATING WILL DEPEND ON THE LOAD OF THE
16A SP MCB
TP MCCB, 100A/160A, 300mA ELP PROPOSED CIRCUITS INCLUDING ADVERTISING AND
2 01 DECORATIVE LIGHTING.
10 SC RATING 35KA AT 50°C 8. TO BE USED WITH STANDARD DETAIL No. ?? -CONTROL
15 CABINET GENERAL ARRANGEMENT.
ENERGY METER
BY ADDC / AADC KWhm
TP MCCB, 40A, SC RATING 25KA ,
(SEPARATE CABINET) 3-8 06
AT 50°C
13 TINNED COPPER BUSBAR WITH RATING OF 200A AT 46kA FOR 1 sec.
9 SP MCB, 6A, 10KA 01

14
TP MCCB
10 SP MCB, 16A, 10KA 01
3 4 5 6 7 8
40A , 25KA
11 LED LAMP AS PER SPECIFICATION 01
12 DOOR LIMIT SWITCH 01
MAIN BUSBARS
13
TINNED Cu. E&N
N TINNED COPPER BUSBAR
E TINNED COPPER BUSBAR 40x4MM INTERNAL BUSBARS
14 R,Y,B
TINNED Cu.
LIGHTING CABINET SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 15 SOCKET, 13A 01
16 VENTILATION DEVICE 08
17 CURRENT TRANSFORMER. 03
1 - - July 2021
0 - - -
CLIENT
TITLE
STANDARD DRAWINGS
DRAWING TITLE
LIGHTING
TYPE 2 CONTROL CABINET
DRAWN . SCALE NTS
CHECKED . DATE .
APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-24
NOTES:
13 15
UNIT ROTATES INTO
12
CHAMBER ABOUT HINGE
11 9
16 1
14
ROADWAY LIGHTING 10
CABINET.
8
CABINET
7
6
5
LOCKABLE
LOCKABLE CHAMBER COVERS
CHAMBER COVERS
4
3
PE
17
2
HINGED POINT 13
FOR ROTATION
CHAMBER UNIT AND

RECESSED COVER FRAME
150mm CONCRETE SURROUND

FOR PROTECTION

CLIENT
TITLE
STANDARD DRAWINGS
DRAWING TITLE
SIDE ELEVATION FRONT ELEVATION LIGHTING
UNDERGROUND
DRAWN . SCALE NTS
CHECKED . DATE .
APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-25
NOTES:
WEARING COURSE TYPE AND THICKNESS WILL

VARY WITH THE SURFACE TO BE USED.
GROUND LEVEL
GROUND LEVEL
30 cm
WARNING TAPE
TO BE REINSTATED WITH APPROVED BACKFILL.

COMPACTION TO BE CARIED OUT IN 150mm
75 cm
15 cm
LAYERS TO ACHIEVE MINIMUM 95%
COMPACTION LEVELS.
CABLE COVERING TILES
25 cm
LV CABLE (SIZE VARIES)
50mm
10 cm
SIEVED SAND BEDDING
10 cm
SIEVED SAND BEDDING 30 cm 30 cm 30 cm

10 cm LAYER
120 cm
TYPICAL SECTION OF TRENCH FOR ROADWAY LIGHTING LV CABLES- DIRECT BURIED
WEARING COURSE TYPE AND THICKNESS WILL

GROUND LEVEL VARY WITH THE SURFACE TO BE USED.
GROUND LEVEL
30 cm
WARNING TAPE
TO BE REINSTATED WITH APPROVED BACKFILL.

COMPACTION TO BE CARIED OUT IN 150mm
75 cm
15 cm
LAYERS TO ACHIEVE MINIMUM 95%
COMPACTION LEVELS.
CABLE COVERING TILES
25 cm No. REVISIONS APP'D DATE

100mm Dia. DUCT
CLIENT
NUMBER VARIES
50mm
10 cm
SIEVED SAND BEDDING TITLE

10 cm
LV CABLE (SIZE VARIES) STANDARD DRAWINGS

MAX 2 PER DUCT DRAWING TITLE
LIGHTING
SIEVED SAND BEDDING 30 cm 30 cm UNDERGROUND CABLE AND DUCT INSTALLATION
10 cm LAYER
120 cm
DRAWN . SCALE NTS
CHECKED . DATE .
TYPICAL SECTION OF TRENCH FOR ROADWAY LIGHTING LV CABLES- INSTALLED IN DUCT APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-26
NOTES:
1. FOR ALL ROADWAY LIGHTING DETAILS REFER TO
ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL.
3. PULLBOX, TYPE IV, COVERS AND FRAMES SHALL BE

MANUFACTURED FROM DUCTILE IRON MATERIALS.
4. ALL CONCRETE INCORPORATED IN THE CONSTRUCTION OF
CONCRETE PULLBOXES SHALL BE CLASS C 30/20 CONCRETE.
5. ALL REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE EPOXY COATED GRADE 60

DEFORMED STEEL BARS.
750 750
16Ø @ 200 cm SPACE
TO MISS CONDUITS
B
750
ELECTRICAL 10mm DIA
750
BOX THE NUMBER SIZE AND
S.S BOLT
LOCATION OF THE CONDUIT
VARIES AS SHOWN ON THE
DWGS AND TO MEET THE
FIELD REQUIREMENTS AS
DETERMINED ON SITE BY
DETAIL - 1 THE ENGINEER
COVER LIFTING 1
KEY HOLE SCALE NTS
495 DUCTILE IRON COVER AND
1 16@ Ø 200cm FRAME TO BE RUBBER GASKET
TYPICAL SEALED BOLT DOWN TYPE. USE
STAINLESS STEEL COUNTER
PULL BOX TYPE IV FRONT COVER DETAILS SUNK HEX.HEAD CAP SCREWS
SCALE: NTS
SECTION A-A
EXTEND 1000
BEYOND CURB
(TYPE)
1000
PAVEMENT
DUCTILE IRON
NS NS
FRAME AND COVER
.
MATCH GRADE LEVEL IN
150 450 150 PAVED OR SIDEWALK
***450
450***
AREAS OR 100 mm
CONCRETE ENCASED DUCT ABOVE GRADE LEVELS
IN GREEN AREAS
75 CL 16Ø @ 200 cm SPACE

TO MISS CONDUITS
EXTEND 1000
BEYOND
EXTEND TO END PAVEMENT PAVEMENT
50 50
650
OF SIDE SLOPE A
NS
.
NS
450***
150
1 - - July 2021
SUMP 150X150X150 mm 0 - - -
***450
CONCRETE
150
ENCASED DUCT
***DEPTH MAY VARY TO MEET
SECTION B-B No. REVISIONS APP'D DATE
THE FIELD REQUIREMENTS
CLIENT
LIMITS OF CONCRETE ENCASED DUCTS AS DETERMINED ON SITE
BY THE ENGINEER.
UNDER PAVEMENT
SCALE: NTS
TITLE
STANDARD DRAWINGS
DRAWING TITLE
LIGHTING
PULL BOX TYPE IV DETAILS
CONCRETE
DRAWN . SCALE NTS
CHECKED . DATE .
APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-27
NOTES:
1. FOR ALL ROADWAY LIGHTING DETAILS REFER TO
ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL PART 1 SECTION I
A
3. PULLBOX TYPE IV POLYCARBONATE, COVERS AND

681 FRAMES SHALL BE MANUFACTURED FROM POLYMER
76
CONCRETE MATERIALS.
in
2°M
ROADWAY LIGHTING
22.25 HEIGHT
1138
1138
B LETTERS
6.35mm S.S
19
LIFT PIN(2X)
3
R3
50.8
Min
1/2-13 S.S HEX HEAD
BOLT DOWN (2X)
FLOATING NUT
W/CLEAN OUT
POLYMER CONCRETE COVER
HOLE (2X)
(FIELD REPLACEABLE)
NON SKID SURFACE
R
O
A
D
W
A
Y
LI
G
H
TI
N
G
POLYCARBONATE PULL BOX DETAIL
SCALE: NTS
OPEN BASE
POLYMER
EXTEND 1000 CONCRETE
BEYOND CURB
(TYPE) BOX
1000
PAVEMENT
NS NS
.
1 - - July 2021
***450
450***
0 - - -
772 1229
CONCRETE ENCASED DUCT
1219
762
686 1143 CLIENT
629 1086
EXTEND 1000
BEYOND
TITLE
76
EXTEND TO END PAVEMENT PAVEMENT

OF SIDE SLOPE
NS
STANDARD DRAWINGS
457
57Min
57Min
.
NS
DRAWING TITLE
450***
LIGHTING
619 48
POLYCARBONATE PULLBOX
***450
CONCRETE 657 1076

ENCASED DUCT
***DEPTH MAY VARY TO MEET 1114
THE FIELD REQUIREMENTS
LIMITS OF CONCRETE ENCASED DUCTS AS DETERMINED ON SITE DRAWN . SCALE NTS
BY THE ENGINEER.
UNDER PAVEMENT SECTION B-B SECTION A-A CHECKED . DATE .
SCALE: NTS SCALE: NTS SCALE: NTS APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-28
NOTES:

6 OTHERWISE NOTED.

PLASTIC GLAND FOR CABLE TO SOCKET
3. REFER TO STANDARD DETAIL L30 FOR SCHEMATIC
AND DEVICE SCHEDULE

4 B-BLUE & N-BLACK WITH HEAT SHRINKABLE TUBING.
LED LIGHT
3 N PH1 PH2 PH3
10 1 vents
DERATING FACTOR.
8
2 5 7 5. PROTECTION CLASS IP54.
N PH1 PH2 PH3 6. RIGID WEATHER PROOF CONTROL CUBICLES AND/OR

L3 L2 L1
1 THREE PHASE & NEUTRAL
63 A. MCCB . 300mA ELP
MARSHALLING BOXES .
N PUSH BUTTON
9 C C C C C C C C
FOR MANUAL ON
L I No. I No. I No. I No. I No. I No. I No. I No. 7. ALL OUTGOING CABLES TO BE SINGLE PHASE 3 CORE
T3 T2 T1 R R R R R R R R
C 1 C 2 C 3 C 4 C 5 C 6 C 7 C 8 XLPE/SWA OR 3 CORE RUBBERISED FLEX AS ALL
U U U U U U U U
37
I
T
I
T
I
T
I
T
I
T
I
T
I
T
I
T CABLES TO BE INSTALLED IN DUCT.
11
HINGED CLEAR PLASTIC COVERS TO BE INSTALLED

8. ALL EARTH CORES TO BE CONNECTED TO ENSURE
CONTINUITY.
LIT INDICATORS FOR PHASES

B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 9. ALL CONTROL CABINET DIMENSIONS TO BE SUBMITTED
C C C C C C C C
I No.
R
I No.
R
I No.
R
I No.
R
I No.
R
I No.
R
I No.
R
I No.
R
BY DESIGNER (MINIMUM SIZE REQUIRED).
C 1 C 2 C 3 C 4 C 5 C 6 C 7 C 8
U U U U U U U U
13-20 37
I
T
I
T
I
T
I
T
I
T
I
T
I
T
I
T 10. PRE-WIRED PANEL TO BE INSTALLED IN CONTROL
11 CABINET AND ATTACHED TO BACKBOARD.
38
vents
BRASS GLAND FOR INCOMING SUPPLY

E N
A E 11. AADC/ADDC KILOWATT HOUR METER TO BE IN
U
R Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 T SEPARATE CABINET LOCATED ADJACENT TO THE LCC
T R C
I No.
C
I No.
C
I No.
C
I No.
C
I No.
C
I No.
C
I No.
C
I No.
H A R R R R R R R R
L C 1 C 2 C 3 C 4 C 5 C 6 C 7 C 8
U U U U U U U U
PLASTIC GLAND FOR EARTH CABLE

12 21-28 37 12 I
T
I
T
I
T
I
T
I
T
I
T
I
T
I
T
11
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8
EARTH STRAP
TO BE BRAIDED
COPPER, COVERED 29-36
BY HEATSHRINK
SLEEVING
BRASS GLAND PLATE TO BE FITTED

MAIN EARTH FROM SUPPLY
WITH BRASS COMPRESSION GLANDS
TO BE CONNECTED DIRECTLY
FOR OUT GOING CABLES
TO EARTH BAR
LIFTING HOOK 3 CORE 4-10mm2 XLPE/SWA
INCOMING SUPPLY
CABLE
MAIN EARTH ON
FROM ADDC/AADC
CONTROL CABINET
Permanent label to be fitted
Label to be as per BS7671
section 514-13-01 MOUNTING PLATE
CONTROL CABINET
BOTH AT FRONT SIDE
GRP THICKNESS 4.5MM
COLOUR RAL 7032(light grey) RATING PLATE
WARNING SIGN
20 20 SEE DETAIL A&B
A
220 10
10
SHEET 3MM THICK FOR
WHITE
A
DANGER SEE DETAIL A&B
RED(TYP) B `L' HANDLE WITH
300
PAD LOCK 3POINT CAM & ROD

RED
RED(TYP) GLAND PLATE 5MM HINGES
400V THICK ALUM. PLATE
EARTH BOLT 1 - - July 2021
GRP THICKNESS 6MM 0 - - -
300 300 (AT BOTTOM ONLY)
C No. REVISIONS APP'D DATE
CONCRETE
CHAMFER CLIENT
LOGO / NAME AS PER OWNER

REQUIREMENTS
EARTHING
DETAIL - A ROD
TITLE
C
D
2 (TYP) PANEL NUT, BOLT STANDARD DRAWINGS

AND WASHER
DRAWING TITLE
DOOR LIGHTING
CONTROL CABINET TYPE 4
2mm
ALUMINUM PANEL
5(TYP) SIGN FACE REINFORCED BLINDING CONCRETE PRE-WIRED PANEL FOR LANDSCAPE
DRAWN . SCALE NTS
DETAIL - B A SECTION A-A CHECKED . DATE .
ELEVATION
SCALE NTS SCALE: NTS APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-29
NOTES:
400V/230V, 3Ph. 50Hz

DEVICE SCHEDULE 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETER UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED.

ITEM No. DESCRIPTION QUANTITY ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL PART 1 SECTION I.

1 TP&N MCCB, 63A, SC RATING 35KA 01
DERATING FACTOR.
2 SP MCB, 16/10A, SC RATING 10KA 01 5. TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH STANDARD DETAIL L29
TP & N MCCB DOOR LED PANEL
1 6. ALL MCBs TO BE MOUNTED ON DIN RAIL
63 A , 35KA 6A SP MCB SWITCH LAMP
7. ALL CABLES TO BE SINGLE PHASE 3 CORE XLPE/SWA OR 3
2
3 DOOR LIMIT SWITCH 01 CORE RUBBERISED FLEX AS ALL CABLES TO BE INSTALLED IN
3 4 DUCT.
13A SWITCH + SOCKET
ENERGY METER 8. ALL EARTH CORES TO BE CONNECTED FOR CONTINUITY.
BY ADDC / AADC Earth Wire 4 Sqmm.
KWhm
4 LED LAMP AS PER SPECIFICATION 01 9. ALL CONTROL CABINET DIMENSIONS TO BE SUBMITTED BY
16A SP MCB DESIGNER (MINIMAL SIZE REQUIRED).
5
10A SP MCB 6
5 SP MCB, 16A, 10KA 01
7
6 SOCKET, 13A 01
R Phase
Y Phase
8
B Phase 7 SP MCB, 10A, 10KA 01
TIMER DIGITAL ASTRONOMICAL AS PER

10 L3 L2 L1 8 OWNER'S REQUIREMENTS 01
PUSH BUTTON
L
FOR MANUAL ON
9 TP CONTACTOR, 63A, AC1 DUTY,
N
T3 T2 T1 9 01
11 B Phase
10 SELECTOR SWITCH, 2POS (ON & OFF) 01

SP
MCB
16/10A
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 MAIN BUSBARS
11 TINNED Cu. 03
INTERNAL BUSBARS 02
12
TINNED Cu.
11 Y Phase
13-36 SP MCB, 10/16A, 10KA 24

SP
MCB
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
16/10A
37 CURRENT TRANSFORMER . 03
R Phase 38 VENTILATION DEVICE 10

11 1 - - July 2021
0 - - -
SP
MCB CLIENT
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
16/10A
TITLE
STANDARD DRAWINGS
DRAWING TITLE
LIGHTING
12 N TINNED COPPER BUSBAR
12 E TINNED COPPER BUSBAR 40x4MM
DRAWN . SCALE NTS
CHECKED . DATE .
APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-30
NOTES:
A
6 OTHERWISE NOTED.

GRP BAKALITE SHEET TO
COVER THE LIFE PARTS
AND DEVICE SCHEDULE
4 3. BUS BSR ARE COLOUR CODED (R-RED, Y-YELLOW,

4 3
LED LIGHT B-BLUE & N-BLACK WITH HEAT SHRINKABLE TUBING.
LED LIGHT
3
10 6 4. ALL COMPONENTS ARE SUITABLE FOR 50°C WITHOUT
11
10 DERATING FACTOR.
37
8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 2 5 7
2 5 7 INSULATOR 5. PROTECTION CLASS IP54.
8 BUSBAR SUPPORT
N PH1 PH2 PH3
13-20 6. RIGID WEATHER PROOF CONTROL CUBICLES AND/OR
L3 L2 L1
11 MARSHALLING BOXES .
N
63 A. MCCB . 300mA ELP L3 L2 L1 BOX FOR
9 37 N DRAWINGS
L
Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8
9
L
7. ALL OUTGOING CABLES TO BE SINGLE PHASE 3 CORE
T3 T2 T1
T3 T2 T1
XLPE/SWA OR 3 CORE RUBBERISED FLEX AS ALL
N PH1 PH2 PH3
37 CABLES TO BE INSTALLED IN DUCT.
SERIAL No. FOR 21-28 1
11
CONTROL CABINET 8. ALL EARTH CORES TO BE CONNECTED TO ENSURE
63 A. MCCB . 300mA ELP CONTINUITY.
37
HYLAM SHEET R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 31
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 N 9. ALL CONTROL CABINET DIMENSIONS TO BE SUBMITTED
3MMTHICK
29-36 31
E 12mm STAINLESS
13-20 37 STEEL FIXING BOLTS
11 10. AADC/ADDC KILOWATT HOUR METER TO BE IN
SEPARATE CABINET LOCATED ADJACENT TO THE LCC
E N
A E CONCRETE CHAMFER
U
R Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 T
T R
A
H
L
INTERNAL VIEW
12 21-28 37 12 DOOR STOPPER
11
EARTHING ROD
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8
EARTH STRAP
REINFORCED CONCRETE
TO BE BRAIDED CLASS C 35
BY HEATSHRINK
SLEEVING
BLINDING CONCRETE
MAIN EARTH FROM SUPPLY CLASS C 20
TO EARTH BAR
LIFTING HOOK
INCOMING SUPPLY
CABLE
MAIN EARTH ON
CONTROL CABINET
FROM ADDC/AADC 38
CONTROL CABINET
BOTH AT FRONT SIDE
GRP THICKNESS 4.5MM
WARNING SIGN
A
220 10
10
SHEET 3MM THICK FOR
WHITE
A
300

RED
CONCRETE
CHAMFER CLIENT

REQUIREMENTS
EARTHING
DETAIL - A ROD
TITLE
C
D

AND WASHER
DRAWING TITLE
DOOR LIGHTING
2mm
ALUMINUM PANEL
5(TYP) SIGN FACE REINFORCED BLINDING CONCRETE FOR LANDSCAPE
DRAWN . SCALE NTS
ELEVATION
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-31
NOTES:
400V/230V, 3Ph. 50Hz

OTHERWISE NOTED.


1 TP&N MCCB, 63A, SC RATING 35KA 01
DERATING FACTOR.
2 SP MCB, 16/10A, SC RATING 10KA 01 5. TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH STANDARD DETAIL L31
2
3 4 DUCT.
13A SWITCH + SOCKET
KWhm
16A SP MCB DESIGNER (MINIMUM SIZE REQUIRED).
5
10A SP MCB 6
5 SP MCB, 16A, 10KA 01
7
6 SOCKET, 13A 01
R Phase
Y Phase
8
TIMER DIGITAL ASTRONOMICAL AS PER

10 L3 L2 L1 8 OWNER'S REQUIREMENTS 01
PUSH BUTTON
L
FOR MANUAL ON
9 TP CONTACTOR, 63A, AC1 DUTY,
N
T3 T2 T1 9 01
11 B Phase

SP
MCB
16/10A
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 MAIN BUSBARS
11 TINNED Cu. 03
INTERNAL BUSBARS 02
12
TINNED Cu.
11 Y Phase
13-36 SP MCB, 10/16A, 10KA 24

SP
MCB
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
16/10A

11 1 - - July 2021
0 - - -
SP
MCB CLIENT
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
16/10A
TITLE
STANDARD DRAWINGS
DRAWING TITLE
LIGHTING
DRAWN . SCALE NTS
CHECKED . DATE .
APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-32
NOTES:
A
6 OTHERWISE NOTED.

GRP BAKALITE SHEET TO
COVER THE LIFE PARTS
AND DEVICE SCHEDULE
4 3. BUS BSR ARE COLOUR CODED (R-RED, Y-YELLOW,

4 3
LED LIGHT B-BLUE & N-BLACK WITH HEAT SHRINKABLE TUBING.
LED LIGHT
3
10 6 4. ALL COMPONENTS ARE SUITABLE FOR 50°C WITHOUT
11
10 DERATING FACTOR.
37
8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 2 5 7
2 5 7 INSULATOR 5. PROTECTION CLASS IP54.
8 BUSBAR SUPPORT
N PH1 PH2 PH3
13-20 6. RIGID WEATHER PROOF CONTROL CUBICLES AND/OR
11 MARSHALLING BOXES .
63 A. MCCB . 300mA ELP L1 L1 L1
BOX FOR
N N N
37 9 9 9 DRAWINGS
Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 L L L
7. ALL OUTGOING CABLES TO BE SINGLE PHASE 3 CORE
T1 T1 T1 XLPE/SWA OR 3 CORE RUBBERISED FLEX AS ALL
N PH1 PH2 PH3
37 CABLES TO BE INSTALLED IN DUCT.
SERIAL No. FOR 21-28 1
11
CONTROL CABINET 8. ALL EARTH CORES TO BE CONNECTED TO ENSURE
63 A. MCCB . 300mA ELP CONTINUITY.
L1
37
N HYLAM SHEET R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 31
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 9 N 9. ALL CONTROL CABINET DIMENSIONS TO BE SUBMITTED
L 3MMTHICK
T1
29-36 31
E 12mm STAINLESS
13-20 37 STEEL FIXING BOLTS
11 10. AADC/ADDC KILOWATT HOUR METER TO BE IN
SEPARATE CABINET LOCATED ADJACENT TO THE LCC
E L1 N
A
N
E CONCRETE CHAMFER
U
R Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 9 T
L
T R
A
H T1
L
INTERNAL VIEW
12 21-28 37 12 DOOR STOPPER
11
EARTHING ROD
L1
N
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 9
L
EARTH STRAP
T1
REINFORCED CONCRETE
TO BE BRAIDED CLASS C 35
BY HEATSHRINK
SLEEVING
BLINDING CONCRETE
MAIN EARTH FROM SUPPLY CLASS C 20
TO EARTH BAR
LIFTING HOOK
INCOMING SUPPLY
CABLE
MAIN EARTH ON
CONTROL CABINET
FROM ADDC/AADC 38
CONTROL CABINET
BOTH AT FRONT SIDE
GRP THICKNESS 4.5MM
WARNING SIGN
A
220 10
10
SHEET 3MM THICK FOR
WHITE
A
300

RED
CONCRETE
CHAMFER CLIENT

REQUIREMENTS
EARTHING
DETAIL - A ROD
TITLE
C
D

AND WASHER
DRAWING TITLE
DOOR LIGHTING
2mm
ALUMINUM PANEL
5(TYP) SIGN FACE REINFORCED BLINDING CONCRETE SPLIT CIRCUITS FOR LANDSCAPE
DRAWN . SCALE NTS
ELEVATION
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-33
NOTES:
400V/230V, 3Ph. 50Hz

OTHERWISE NOTED.


TP MCCB, 63A, SC RATING 35KA B-BLUE & N-BLACK WITH HEAT SHRINKABLE TUBING.
1 01
DERATING FACTOR.
SP MCB, 16/10A, SC RATING 10KA
2 01 5. TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH STANDARD DETAIL L33
2
3 4 DUCT.
13A SWITCH + SOCKET
KWhm
16A SP MCB DESIGNER (MINIMUM SIZE REQUIRED).
5 10. TIMER TO BE TWO CHANNEL TO SPLIT THE CIRCUITS FOR

6 PART NIGHT ON/FULL NIGHT ON.
10A SP MCB 5 SP MCB, 16A, 10KA 01
7
6 SOCKET, 13A 01
R Phase
Y Phase
8
TWO CHANNELTIMER DIGITAL ASTRONOMICAL

10 8 AS PER OWNER'S REQUIREMENTS 01
PUSH BUTTON
FOR MANUAL ON
SP CONTACTOR, 63A, AC1 DUTY,
9 03
11 B Phase
L1
N
SP 9
L
MCB
16/10A
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 T1 MAIN BUSBARS
11 TINNED Cu. 03
INTERNAL BUSBARS 02
12
TINNED Cu.
11 Y Phase
L1
N 13-36 SP MCB, 10/16A, 10KA 24

SP 9
L
MCB
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 T1
16/10A

11 1 - - July 2021
L1
0 - - -
N
SP 9 No. REVISIONS APP'D DATE

L
MCB T1
CLIENT
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
16/10A
TITLE
STANDARD DRAWINGS
DRAWING TITLE
LIGHTING
DRAWN . SCALE NTS
CHECKED . DATE .
APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-34
NOTES:
NOTE:FINAL APPROVAL ON THE POLE AND FOUNDATION WILL BE BY MCC AFTER VIBRATION MEASUREMENT TESTING WITH ACCELEROMETER
PVC OR NEOPRENE SEAL BETWEEN CAST ALUMINUM OR 1. REFER TO ABU DHABI MCC FOR THE HYBRID POLE LOCATION
HYBRID POLE AND BRACKET SHAPE TO MATCH TWO HALVES OF ENCLOSURE PLATE GALVANIZED STEEL
AND ALL AROUND POLE REMOVABLE ENCLOSURE AND SPECIFICATION. REFER TO ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL
THE INSTALLED LIGHTING POLES. PLATE. 2 HALVES PER BASE .
SIZE TO MATCH BASE PLATE. FOR ALL INFORMATION REGARDING THE ROADWAY LIGHTING.
LUMINAIRES TO BE AS PER THE PROJECT REQUIREMENTS. PAINT TO MATCH POLE FINISH.
SUPPORTING HOLES CAMERA 2 . ALL DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN MILLIMETERS.
(2 X HOLE AT 8.0m HEIGHT) REMOVABLE STAINLESS STEEL
PROVIDE BACK-UP PLATE TO ONE HALF SCREWS COUNTERSUNK
OF ENCLOSURE PLATE WITH TAPPED 3. HYBRID POLE FOUNDATIONS ARE DESIGNED FOR A WIND
HOLES TO ACCEPT STAINLESS STEEL VELOCITY OF 160 KILOMETERS PER HOUR AND WITH GUST
244mm Ø POLE AT TOP 8.0m SCREWS COUNTERSUNK INTO OTHER
HALF OF ENCLOSURE PLATE FACTOR 1.14 WHEN EQUIPPED WITH LUMINAIRES AND
SUPPORTING HOLES CAMERA CAMERAS OF THE MAXIMUM WEIGHT IN ACCORDANCE WITH
(1 X HOLE AT 7.5m HEIGHT) 7.5m TYPICAL THE A.A.S.H.T.O STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL
ENCLOSURE PLATE DETAILS SUPPORTS FOR HIGHWAY SIGNS, LUMINARIES AND TRAFFIC
SUPPORTING HOLES CAMERA SIGNALS. FINAL APPROVAL BY MCC WILL BE GIVEN AFTER
7.0m
PAVED AREA
(1 X HOLE AT 7.0m HEIGHT)
SUCCESFUL ACCELEROMETER TEST TO MEASURE VIBRATION.
8 ANCHOR BOLTS WITH 3 HEAVY
TOP PORTION OF ANCHOR BOLTS, THIS WITH THE LIGHTING POLE SUPPLIER.
HEX NUTS AND HARDENED SHALL BE GALVANISED
WASHERS PER BOLT. ANCHOR 5. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN SOIL BORINGS AT EACH
BOLTS SHALL CONFORM TO
POLE LOCATION SHOWN ON THE PLANS. BORING LOGS
F
GRADE 8.8 -NUTS AND WASHERS SHALL BE
CAMERA INSTALLATION AND MOUNTING DETAIL OF STAINLESS STEEL TOGETHER WITH ALL APPLICABLE SHOP DRAWINGS REQUIRED
E
-ALL PART F SHALL BE COVERED BY THE SPECIFICATIONS ARE TO BE SUBMITTED TO THE
BY GREASE
C
OF CONSTRUCTION.
PAVED AREA UNPAVED AREA ANCHOR PLATE DATA AS SPECIFIED IN ROADWAY LIGHTING STANDARD
POLE MOVEMENT FREQUENCY WILL BE SPECIFICATIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH
B
ENCLOSURE PLATE C/L LIGHT POLE,C/L ANCHORAGE
2.77/3.27Hz. PAVED AREA ASSEMBLY & C/L FOUNDATION SUCH SPECIFICATIONS BASED ON DATA SUPPLIED BY THE
42 Ø ANCHOR BOLTS
ANCHOR BOLT DETAILS PROPOSED BY THE CONTRACTOR. SUCH SHOP DRAWING AND
POLE SIZE A B C D E F ANCHOR PLATE FABRICATION.
BASE PLATE
TOP OF PAVEMENT TILE
14.0m 1270 180 870 220 50 270
100 GROUT
7. A SEPARATION PLATE IS REQUIRED BETWEEN THE LIGHTING
TOP OF CONCRETE AND THE MCC AREAS INSIDE THE POLE.
ANCHOR BOLT DIMENSION
200
FOUNDATION
220
BENDING RADIUS
MINIMUM 250mm COVERED BY DECORATIVE BASE PLATE COVER.
BETWEEN 850/750mm OR AS DETERMINED ON SITE BY THE
ENGINEER.
B
12-1 8 Ø 11. PROVIDE TWO (2) FOUNDATION CONDUITS AT LOCATIONS
TWO OR THREE UNDERGROUND CABLES AT POLE BASE. THE
4000
90 mm CLERANCE
140 140 (TYP) ELECTRICAL CUTOUTS IN POLES AT THESE LOCATIONS SHALL
CABLES.
8000
10 Ø SPIRAL
14841
14000
80mm PITCH
12. PROVIDE SIX (6) FOUNDATION CONDUITS AT THE LOCATIONS
WHERE THE MCC PLAN INDICATES THE TERMINATION OF
500
800
CABLES FOR THE CAMERAS (POWER & COMMS).

SECTION A-A 14. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE DETAILED STRUCTURAL

TYPICAL DOOR DETAIL TYPICAL DOOR DETAIL UNPAVED AREAS
Ø
ROADWAY LIGHTING MCC 15. FOUNDATION DESIGN OF LIGHT POLE SHOULD BE VERIFIED
PAVED AREAS
PARAMETERS BASED ON GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
4000
REPORT AND SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE ABU
B DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL PART 1 SECTION C..
SEPARATION PLATE BETWEEN
LIGHTING AND MCC ACCESSES 16. THE TOP OF FOUNDATION SHALL BE 150mm ABOVE
322 Ø POLE AT BASE TILED AREA THE TOP OF THE FOUNDATION LEVEL SHALL
TOP OF PAVEMENT TILE 10 Ø SPIRAL 12-18 Ø
BE THE SAME AS THE FINISHED TILED LEVEL
TOP OF CURB LEVEL 80mm PITCH EQUALLY SPACED
(PAVED AREA)
(UNPAVED AREA) 17. LUMINAIRES TO BE AS PER ABU DHABI LIGHTING MANUAL
TYPICAL AND PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS.
SECTION B-B TYPICAL DUCT INSTALLATION- ELEVATION
150
SEE NOTE 16
1 - - July 2021
0 - - -
C/L LIGHT POLE,C/L ANCHORAGE No. REVISIONS DATE
APP'D
4000
ACCOMMODATE CONDUIT SLEEVES ASSEMBLY & C/L FOUNDATION

8-42 Ø (MIN) ANCH OR BOLT
CLIENT
WITH 3 HEX NUTS AND
HARDENED WASHER PER BOLT.
CURB
TITLE
A
STANDARD DRAWINGS
TYPICAL DUCT INSTALLATION- PLAN
C/L LIGHT POLE,C/L ANCHORAGE DRAWING TITLE
ASSEMBLY & C/L FOUNDATION
LIGHTING/ MCC
ENCLOSURE PLATE
Ø FOUNDATION 14m HYBRID POLE DETAILS
POLE AT B ASE
20 PREFORMED JOINT FILLER PLATE (S355 Fy (MIN)=3600 Kg/Cm² DRAWN . SCALE NTS
CHECKED . DATE .
TYPICAL
PLAN AT BASE PLATE TYPICAL SEPARATION PLATE DETAIL APPROVED . SIZE A1
PROJECT DWG.
No. . No. L-35

Third Edition July 2021

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Third Edition July 2021

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Third Edition July 2021

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

(PR-402)

Lighting Manual – Version 3.0: July 2021

Purpose, Scope & Application of this Document

Content and Format

Part-1: Roadway, Parking, Tunnel & Underpass Projects

Part-2: Parks & Public Realm Lighting Projects

Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual – Version 3.0: July 2021 Introduction |2

How to Use the Lighting Manual

Policy on Alternative Luminaires to LED

Solar Provision for Roadway/Public Realm/Parking

Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual – Version 3.0: July 2021 Introduction |3

Minimum Average Design Levels

Roadway Project Lighting Management Systems (PLMS)

Project Light Pollution Mitigation Report

Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual – Version 3.0: July 2021 Introduction |4

Notice to Manufacturers Regarding LM-84/TM-28

Notice Regarding MCC Hybrid Poles

Glossary of Terms, Abbreviations & Acronyms

Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual – Version 3.0: July 2021 Introduction |5

Page Intentionally Blank

Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual – Version 3.0: July 2021 Introduction |6

4.4 DESIGN & DAY-1 Calculation Outputs………………………………………………........................ 75

Section D – Lighting Management

Section E – Solar Roadway/Parking Lighting

Section F –Lighting for Signage

Section G –Light Pollution Mitigation

Section H –Project Submission Requirements

Section I – Electrical Requirements

Applicable Standards & Guidance References

Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual – Version 3.0: July 2021

Part-1 Section A – Lighting for Roadways & Parking

1.1. Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-A

1.2. Not Required/Permitted under Manual Part-1 Section-A

Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual – Version 3.0: July 2021 Page |2

• Reduction in night-time Personal Injury Accidents (PIAs)

The design, specification, calculation, manufacturing, testing, shipment, installation and

Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual – Version 3.0: July 2021 Page |3

3.1. General Requirements

3.2. AD Quality Mark (QCC Exterior LED Luminaire Certification)

3.2.1. QCC Certificate of Conformity

Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual – Version 3.0: July 2021 Page |4

3.3. LED Luminaire Technical & Material Requirements (QCC aligned)

Project Submission Requirement:- Provide valid QCC Certificate.

b) Manufacturer’s company profile including a profile of the manufacturing facilities. Valid

Project Submission Requirement:- Provide manufacturer profile and ISO 9001

3.3.2. Minimum Whole-Luminaire Efficacy & Colour Rendering Index

a) The LEDs shall be from a manufacturer of LEDs with ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377 or

Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual – Version 3.0: July 2021 Page |5

Fixture Type Minimum Luminaire Efficacy* Minimum CRI-Rating

Roadway Lighting Fixture 125lm/W 70

Table 3.3.2.2 Nominal CCT

3.3.3. LED Binning

All Luminaires shall be maximum proved MacAdam Ellipse Step-4.

3.3.4. Serviceability/Lamp Source Replacement

Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual – Version 3.0: July 2021 Page |6

3.3.6. Luminaire Thermal Management

Abu Dhabi Lighting Manual – Version 3.0: July 2021 Page |7

3.3.7. Roadway Lighting Fixture Mounting

Project Submission Requirement: - Provide written descriptions of lighting fixture mounting